AU7251198A

AU7251198A - A system, method and article of manufacture for switched telephony communication

Info

Publication number: AU7251198A
Application number: AU72511/98A
Authority: AU
Inventors: David A. Zey
Original assignee: MCI Worldcom Inc
Current assignee: Verizon Business Global LLC
Priority date: 1997-04-15
Filing date: 1998-04-15
Publication date: 1998-11-11
Anticipated expiration: 2018-04-15
Also published as: EP0976234A2; CA2286132A1; JP2001521695A; IL132397A; BR9808592A; AP9901678A0; NZ500383A; NO995042L; WO1998047298A9; CN1271491A; IL132397A0; WO1998047298A2; NO995042D0; KR20010006455A; AU738963B2; WO1998047298A3; TR199902599T2

Description

WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 A SYSTEM METHOD AND ARTICLE OF MANUFACTURE FOR SWITCHED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATION Field Of The Invention 5 The present invention relates to the integration of the Internet with telephony systems, and more specifically, to a system, method and article of manufacture for using the Internet as the communication backbone of a communication system architecture while maintaining a 10 rich array of call processing features. Background of the Invention The Internet has increasingly become the communication network of 15 choice for the consumer e-mail marketplace. Recently, software companies have begun to investigate the transfer of telephone calls across the Internet. However, the system features that users demand of normal call processing are considered essential for call processing the Internet. Today, those features are not available on the Internet. Thus, 20 a system is required that connects the communication network including telephony capability with the Internet to facilitate callback processing. Callback scenarios for reserving calls over existing telephony networks 25 have been available for some time. Examples of such service are CSI Callback, Rumilla Telecommunication for international callback and SummitLink which provides international callback offering distribution, wholesaling and rebilling features. The Internet provides a website entitled, "Callback on the Net" which purports to "collect all available 30 information on callback services." This information was accumulated by doing a Yahoo search utilizing the search term "callback". International callback as provided by the prior art system refers to a user being able to dial a number to connect to a switch overseas. The WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 caller allows the phone to ring twice and hangs up. The switch then utilizes the ANI and/or called number information to query a database of profile information stored on the switch to determine billing and other information on the caller. Then, the switch initiates a call to the caller 5 and when the caller goes offhook, the switch provides a dialtone allowing the caller to access any number available to the switch. In this way, international or other long distance callers can obtain low cost long distance services so long as they are pre-registered for the service. This service still requires the caller to be responsible for all of the overhead 10 associated with initiating call processing, requires a caller to learn the protocol of interfacing with the switch, does not provide reservation of such services such as conferencing, and it does not allow operator assistance on the calls. 15 Recently, AT&T has announced a service very similar to conferenceMCI (MCI's Operator Call-in Conference Call capability). This service termed "On-Line TeleConference" capability allows teleconference customers to use an on-line interface to allow customers to pre-arrange an AT&T TeleConference call through the World Wide Web. However, while 20 conference call definition of a number for each participate to call into to join the conference is provided, "all voice connections are established over the existing telephone network" and require all parties to contact a common number to establish the conference call (AT&T TeleConference Service: On-Line Trial Information, 2/7/97). 25 While this new AT&T service is moving in the direction that the subject invention has already arrived at, it does not provide integration of voice over the Internet with existing network services, nor does it provide any mention of a callback architecture which allows a calling party to pre 30 arrange for a network service to contact one or more parties and effectively eliminate the need for any manual intervention. Moreover, it does not provide an operator on an exception basis for Internet telephony operations. Thus, a true union of the Internet and existing telephony networks is not provided.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 "Callback" is a telephony term utilized by remote test systems in reference to accessing and testing customer's voice and data circuits which traverse through a Digital Cross-Connect System (DXC). When a 5 callback feature is selected, the remote test system bridges a local phone line to a customer's DSO circuit. If the circuit under test is an analog circuit, the remote tester performs monitoring. If the circuit under test is a voice circuit, the remote tester performs voice testing which includes selecting appropriate signaling states for callback to the customer's 10 phone over the circuit under test by the remote test system. The callback feature enables the remote tester to enter a phone number to a co-located phone residing at the remote tester's location. The remote test system has local phone lines attached to an internal 15 card. The purpose of the phone lines are to allow the test system to place outbound calls. After a remote user enters a number, which includes an area code or their co-located phone, the remote test system selects one of the local phone lines, goes off hood, and upon detecting dial tone from the local telco central office will dial pulse or DTMF the 20 entered phone number. The remote tester's phone receives the call from the remote test system, goes off hook, and then the call from the remote test system to the remote tester is considered complete. The remote tester can then either monitor the audible quality or initiate 25 a call to the voice circuit customer's phone by selecting the appropriate signaling state for the circuit under test. Once the appropriate signaling state for the customer is selected, the channel bank card or PBX detects the incoming call and converts it to ring cycle to the customer's phone. This action initiates a ringing condition to the customer's phone. Upon 30 the customer answering the phone, the remote tester verbally communicates with the customer over the customer's circuit under test. This testing is routinely performed for circuit assurance verification testing.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 The remote test system has a limit of outbound calls that can be completed. This limit is dependent on the number of phone lines that can be supported by the test system's interface. There are also monthly access charges by the telephone company for each local line terminating 5 into the test system.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Summary of the Invention According to a broad aspect of a preferred embodiment of the invention, telephone calls, data and other multimedia information are routed 5 through a hybrid network including a switched network which transfers information across the internet to provide multirouted and multidimensional callback processing. The hybrid network includes one or more switched networks coupled to one or more packet transmission networks that also couple a call router to the switched communication 10 network and the packet transmission network to route information to the appropriate switched telephony device or internet device address. A computer with an attached display communicates with the packet transmission network, the computer is used to initiate remote management of the hybrid network, including tests of the hybrid 15 network which include circuit analysis such as selecting signaling states which could be loop start, ground start, dual tone multifrequency detection or removing a line from service. The hybrid network includes support for an operator to monitor the management of the mybrid network, and an expert system to regulate the Quality of Service of the 20 hybrid telecommunication system. DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS The foregoing and other objects, aspects and advantages are better 25 understood from the following detailed description of a preferred embodiment of the invention, with reference to the drawings, in which: Figure 1A is a block diagram of a representative hardware environment in accordance with a preferred embodiment; 30 Figure 1B is a block diagram illustrating the architecture of a typical Common Channel Signaling System #7 (SS7) network in accordance with a preferred embodiment; WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Figure 1C is a block diagram of an internet telephony system in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 1D is a block diagram of a hybrid switch in accordance with a 5 preferred embodiment; Figure 1E is a block diagram of the connection of a hybrid switch in accordance with a preferred embodiment; 10 Figure 1F is a block diagram of a hybrid (internet-telephony) switch in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 1G is a block diagram showing the software processes involved in the hybrid internet telephony switch in accordance with a preferred 15 embodiment; Figure 2 is a block diagram illustrating the use of PMUs in a typical SS7 network in accordance with a preferred embodiment; 20 Figure 3 is a block diagram illustrating the systems architecture of the preferred embodiment; Figure 4 is a high-level process flowchart illustrating the logical system components in accordance with a preferred embodiment; 25 Figures 5 - 9 are process flowcharts illustrating the detailed operation of the components illustrated in Figure 4 in accordance with a preferred embodiment; 30 Figure 10A illustrates a Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) 1000 comprising a Local Exchange Carrier (LEC) 1020 through which a calling party uses a telephone 1021 or computer 1030 to gain access to a switched network in accordance with a preferred embodiment; 6 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Figure 10B illustrates an internet routing network in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 11 illustrates a VNET Personal Computer (PC) to PC Information call 5 flow in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 12 illustrates a VNET Personal Computer (PC) to out-of-network PC Information call flow in accordance with a preferred embodiment; 10 Figure 13 illustrates a VNET Personal Computer (PC) to out-of-network Phone Information call flow in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 14 illustrates a VNET Personal Computer (PC) to in-network Phone Information call flow in accordance with a preferred embodiment; 15 Figure 15 illustrates a personal computer to personal computer internet telephony call in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 16 illustrates a phone call that is routed from a PC through the 20 Internet to a phone in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 17 illustrates a phone to PC call in accordance with a preferred embodiment; 25 Figure 18 illustrates a phone to phone call over the internet in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 19A and 19B illustrate an Intelligent Network in accordance with a preferred embodiment; 30 Figure 19C illustrates a Video-Conferencing Architecture in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 19D illustrates a Video Store and Forward Architecture in -7 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 19E illustrates an architecture for transmitting video telephony over the Internet in accordance with a preferred embodiment; 5 Figure 19F is a block diagram of an internet telephony system in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 19G is a block diagram of a prioritizing access/router in accordance 10 with a preferred embodiment; Figure 20 is a high level block diagram of a networking system in accordance with a preferred embodiment; 15 Figure 21 is a functional block diagram of a portion of the system shown in Figure 20 in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 22 is another high level block diagram in accordance with a preferred embodiment of Figure 21; 20 Figure 23 is a block diagram of a switchless network system in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 24 is a hierarchy diagram illustrating a portion of the systems 25 shown in Figures 20 and 23 in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 25 is a block diagram illustrating part of the system portion shown in Figure 24 in accordance with a preferred embodiment; 30 Figure 26 is a flow chart illustrating a portion of a method in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figures 27-39 are block diagrams illustrating further aspects of the systems of Figures 20 and 23 in accordance with a preferred embodiment; 3- WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Figure 40 is a diagrammatic representation of a web server logon in accordance with a preferred embodiment; 5 Figure 41 is a diagrammatic representation of a server directory structure used with the logon of Figure 40 in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 42 is a more detailed diagrammatic representation of the logon of 10 Figure 40 in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figures 43-50 are block diagrams illustrating portions of the hybrid network in accordance with a preferred embodiment; 15 Figure 51 illustrates a configuration of the Data Management Zone (DMZ) 5105 in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figures 52A-52C illustrate network block diagrams in connection with a dial-in environment in accordance with a preferred embodiment; 20 Figure 53 depicts a flow diagram illustrating the fax tone detection in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figures 54A through 54E depict a flow diagram illustrating the VFP 25 Completion process for fax and voice mailboxes in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figures 55A and 55B illustrate the operation of the Pager Termination processor in accordance with a preferred embodiment; 30 Figure 56 depicts the GetCallback routine called from the pager termination in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 57 shows a user login screen for access to online profile 97 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 management in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 58 shows a call routing screen, used to set or change a user's call routing instructions in accordance with a preferred embodiment; 5 Figure 59 shows a guest menu configuration screen, used to set up a guest menu for presentation to a caller who is not an account owner in accordance with a preferred embodiment; 10 Figure 60 shows an override routing screen, which allows a user to route all calls to a selected destination in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 61 shows a speed dial numbers screen, used to set up speed dial in 15 accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 62 shows a voicemail screen, used to set up voicemail in accordance with a preferred embodiment; 20 Figure 63 shows a faxmail screen, used to set up faxmail in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 64 shows a call screening screen, used to set up call screening in accordance with a preferred embodiment; 25 Figures 65-67 show supplemental screens used with user profile management in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 68 is a flow chart showing how the validation for user entered speed 30 dial numbers is carried out in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figures 69A-69AI are automated response unit (ARU) call flow charts showing software implementation in accordance with a preferred embodiment; / O WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Figures 70A-70R are console call flow charts further showing software implementation in accordance with a preferred embodiment; 5 Figure 71 illustrates a typical customer configuration for a VNET to VNET system in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 72 illustrates the operation of DAPs in accordance with a preferred embodiment; 10 Figure 73 illustrates the process by which a telephone connects to a release link trunk for 1-800 call processing in accordance with a preferred embodiment; 15 Figure 74 illustrates the customer side of a DAP procedure request in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 75 illustrates operation of the switch 10530 to select a particular number or "hotline" for a caller in accordance with a preferred embodiment; 20 Figure 76 illustrates the operation of a computer-based voice gateway for selectively routing telephone calls through the Internet in accordance with a preferred embodiment; 25 Figure 77 illustrates the operation of the VRU of figure 76 deployed in a centralized architecture in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 78 illustrates the operation of the VRU of figure 76 deployed in a distributed architecture in accordance with a preferred embodiment; 30 Figure 79A and 79B illustrate the operation of sample applications for Internet call routing in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 79B illustrates a number of applications for caller-initiated If WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 consumer transactions in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 80 illustrates a configuration of a switching network offering voice mail and voice response unit services, as well as interconnection into a 5 service provider, in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 81 illustrates an inbound shared Automated Call Distributor (ACD) call with data sharing through a database in accordance with a preferred embodiment; 10 Figure 82 is a block diagram of an exemplary telecommunications system in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 83 is a block diagram of an exemplary computer system in 15 accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 84 illustrates the CDR and PNR call record formats in accordance with a preferred embodiment; 20 Figures 85(A) and 85(B) collectively illustrate the ECDR and EPNR call record formats in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 86 illustrates the OSR and POSR call record formats in accordance with a preferred embodiment; 25 Figures 87(A) and 87(B) collectively illustrate the EOSR and EPOSR call record formats in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 88 illustrates the SER call record format in accordance with a 30 preferred embodiment; Figures 89(A) and 89(B) are control flow diagrams illustrating the conditions under which a switch uses the expanded record format in accordance with a preferred embodiment; /2 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Figure 90 is a control flow diagram illustrating the Change Time command in accordance with a preferred embodiment; 5 Figure 91 is a control flow diagram illustrating the Change Daylight Savings Time command in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 92 is a control flow diagram illustrating the Network Call Identifier (NCID) switch call processing in accordance with a preferred embodiment; 10 Figure 93 is a control flow diagram illustrating the processing of a received Network Call Identifier in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 94(A) is a control flow diagram illustrating the generation of a 15 Network Call Identifier in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 94(B) is a control flow diagram illustrating the addition of a Network Call Identifier to a call record in accordance with a preferred embodiment; 20 Figure 95 is a control flow diagram illustrating the transport of a call in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 96 shows a hardware component embodiment for allowing a video operator to participate in a video conferencing platform, providing services 25 including but not limited to monitoring, viewing and recording any video conference call and assisting the video conference callers in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 97 shows a system for enabling a video operator to manage video 30 conference calls which includes a video operator console system in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 98 shows a system for enabling a video operator to manage video conference calls which includes a video operator console system in WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 99 shows how a video conference call initiated by the video operator in accordance with a preferred embodiment; 5 Figure 100 shows the class hierarchy for video operator software system classes in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 101 shows a state transition diagram illustrating the state changes 10 that may occur in the VOCall object's mstate variable in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 102 shows a state transition diagram illustrating the state changes that may occur in the VOConnection object's mstate variable ("state 15 variable") in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 103 shows a state transition diagram illustrating the state changes that may occur in the VOConference object's mstate variable ("state variable") in accordance with a preferred embodiment; 20 Figure 104 shows a state transition diagram illustrating the state changes that may occur in the VORecorder object's mstate variable ("state variable") in accordance with a preferred embodiment; 25 Figure 105 shows a state transition diagram illustrating the state changes that may occur in the VORecorder object's mstate variable ("state variable") in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 106 shows the class hierarchy for the video operator graphics user 30 interface ("GUI") classes in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 107 shows a database schema for the video operator shared database in accordance with a preferred embodiment; WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Figure 108 shows one embodiment of the Main Console window in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 109 shows one embodiment of the Schedule window in accordance 5 with a preferred embodiment; Figure 110 shows one embodiment of the Conference window 41203, which is displayed when the operator selects a conference or playback session in the Schedule window in accordance with a preferred 10 embodiment; Figure 111 shows one embodiment of the Video Watch window 41204, which displays the H.320 input from a selected call of a conference connection or a separate incoming or outgoing call in accordance with a 15 preferred embodiment; Figure 112 shows one embodiment of the Console Output window 41205 which displays all error messages and alerts in accordance with a preferred embodiment; and 20 Figure 113 shows a Properties dialog box in accordance with a preferred embodiment. Figure 114A is a block diagram of an access/router system in accordance 25 with a preferred embodiment. Figure 114B is a block diagram of the architecture in accordance with a preferred embodiment. 30 Figure 115 is a block diagram of an internet based callback architecture in accordance with a preferred embodiment.

WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 DETAILED DESCRIPTION INDEX OF CONTENTS I. THE COMPOSITION OF THE INTERNET 5 II. PROTOCOL STANDARDS A. Internet Protocols B. International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization Sector ("ITU-T") Standards III. TCP/IP FEATURES 10 IV. INFORMATION TRANSPORT IN COMMUNICATION NETWORKS A. Switching Techniques B. Gateways and Routers C. Using Network Level Communication for Smooth User Connection D. Datagrams and Routing 15 V. TECHNOLOGY INTRODUCTION A. ATM B. Frame Relay C. ISDN VI. MCI INTELLIGENT NETWORK 20 A. Components of the MCI Intelligent Network 1.MCI Switching Network 2.Network Control System/Data Access Point (NCS/DAP) 3.Intelligent Services Network (ISN) 4 4.Enhanced Voice Services (EVS) 9 25 5.Additional Components B. Intelligent Network System Overview C. Call Flow Example VII. ISP FRAMEWORK A. Background 30 1. Broadband Access 2.Internet Telephony System 3. Capacity 4.Future Services B. ISP Architecture Framework /16 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 C. ISP Functional Framework D. ISP Integrated Network Services E. ISP Components F. Switchless Communications Services 5 G. Governing Principles 1.Architectural Principles 2.Service Feature Principles 3. Capability Principles 4.Service Creation, Deployment, and Execution Principles 10 5.Resource Management Model 2150 Principles 6. Data Management 2138 Principles 7.Operational Support Principles 8.Physical Model Principles H. ISP Service Model 15 1.Purpose 2.Scope of Effort 3.Service Model Overview 4. Service Structure 5.Service 2200 Execution 20 6.Service Interactions 7. Service Monitoring I. ISP Data Management Model 1.Scope 2.Purpose 25 3.Data management Overview 4. Logical Description 5. Physical Description 6.Technology Selection 7. Implementations 30 8.Security 9.Meta-Data 10. Standard Database Technologies J. ISP Resource Management Model 2.The Local Resource Manager (LRM): /7 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 3.The Global Resource Manager (GRM) 2188: 4.The Resource Management Model (RMM) 5. Component Interactions K. Operational Support Model 5 1. Introduction 2.The Operational Support Model 3.The Protocol Model 4.The Physical Model 5. Interface Points 10 6.General L. Physical Network Model 1. Introduction 2. Information Flow 3.Terminology 15 4.Entity Relationships VIII. INTELLIGENT NETWORK A. Network Management B. Customer Service C. Accounting 20 D. Commissions E. Reporting F. Security G. Trouble Handling IX. ENHANCED PERSONAL SERVICES 25 A. Web Server Architecture 1.Welcome Server 450 2.Token Server 454 3.Application Servers B. Web Server System Environment 30 1.Welcome Servers 2.Token Servers 454 3.Profile Management Application Servers C. Security D. Login Process WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 E. Service Selection F. Service Operation 1.NIDS Server 2.TOKEN database service. 5 3.SERVERS database service. 4.HOSTILEIP database service. 5.TOKENHOSTS database service. 6.SERVERENV database service. 7.Chron Job(s) 10 G. Standards H. System Administration I. Product/ Enhancement J. Interface Feature Requirements (Overview) 1.The User Account Profile 15 2.The Database of Messages K. Automated Response Unit (ARU) Capabilities 1.User Interface L. Message Management 1. Multiple Media Message Notification 20 2.Multiple Media Message Manipulation 3.Text to Speech 4.Email Forwarding to a Fax Machine 5.Pager Notification of Messages Received 6. Delivery Confirmation of Voicemail 25 7.Message Prioritization M. Information Services N. Message Storage Requirements 0. Profile Management P. Call Routing Menu Change 30 Q. Two-way Pager Configuration Control and Response to Park and Page R. Personalized Greetings S. List Management T. Global Message Handling X. INTERNET TELEPHONY AND RELATED SERVICES /9 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 A. System Environment for Internet Media 1. Hardware 2.Object-Oriented Software Tools B. Telephony Over The Internet 5 1. Introduction 2.IP Phone as a Commercial Service 3.Phone Numbers in the Internet 4.Other Internet Telephony Carriers 5. International Access 10 C. Internet Telephony Services D. Call Processing 1.VNET Call Processing 2. Descriptions of Block Elements E. Re-usable Call Flow Blocks 15 1.VNET PC connects to a corporate intranet and logs in to a directory service 2.VNET PC queries a directory service for a VNET translation 3.PC connects to an ITG 4.ITG connects to a PC 20 5.VNET PC to PC Call Flow Description 6.Determining best choice for Internet client selection of an Internet Telephony Gateway server on the Internet: 7.Vnet Call Processing XI. TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK MANAGEMENT 25 A. SNMS Circuits Map B. SNMS Connections Map C. SNMS Nonadjacent Node Map D. SNMS LATA Connections Map E. NPA-NXX Information List 30 F. End Office Information List G. Trunk Group Information List H. Filter Definition Window I. Trouble Ticket Window XII. VIDEO TELEPHONY OVER POTS 20 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 A. Components of Video Telephony System 1.DSP modem pools with ACD. 2.Agent 3.Video on Hold Server 5 4.Video Mail Server 5.Video Content Engine 6. Reservation Engine 7.Video Bridge B. Scenario 10 C. Connection Setup D. Calling the Destination E. Recording Video-Mail, Store & Forward Video and Greetings F. Retrieving Video-Mail and Video On Demand G. Video-conference Scheduling 15 XIII. VIDEO TELEPHONY OVER THE INTERNET A. Components 1.Directory and Registry Engine 2.Agents 3.Video Mail Server 20 4.Video Content Engine 5.Conference Reservation Engine 6.MCI Conference Space 7.Virtual Reality Space Engine B. Scenario 25 C. Connection Setup D. Recording Video-Mail, Store & Forward Video and Greetings E. Retrieving Video-Mail and Video On Demand F. Video-conference Scheduling G. Virtual Reality 30 XIV. VIDEO-CONFERENCING ARCHITECTURE A. Features B. Components 1. End-User Terminals 2.LAN Interconnect System 21 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 3.ITU H.323 Server 4. Gatekeeper 5.Operator Services Module 6.Multipoint Control Unit (MCU) 5 7.Gateway 8. Support Service Units C. Overview D. Call Flow Example 1. Point-to-Point Calls 10 2.Multipoint Video-Conference Calls E. Conclusion XV. VIDEO STORE AND FORWARD ARCHITECTURE A. Features B. Architecture 15 C. Components 1. Content Creation and Transcoding 2.Content Management and Delivery 3.Content Retrieval and Display D. Overview 20 XVI. VIDEO OPERATOR A. Hardware Architecture B. Video Operator Console C. Video Conference Call Flow D. Video Operator Software System 25 1. Class Hierarchy 2.Class and Object details E. Graphical User Interface Classes 1. Class Hierarchy 2.Class and Object details 30 F. Video Operator Shared Database 1.Database Schema G. Video Operator Console Graphical User Interface Windows 1.Main Console Window 2.Schedule Window 22 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 3. Conference Window 4.Video Watch Window 5.Console Output Window 6.Properties Dialog Box 5 XVII. WORLD WIDE WEB (WWW) BROWSER CAPABILITIES A. User Interface B. Performance C. Personal Home Page 1. Storage Requirements 10 2.On Screen Help Text 3.Personal Home Page Directory 4.Control Bar 5.Home Page 6. Security Requirements 15 7.On Screen Help Text 8. Profile Management 9.Information Services Profile Management 10. Personal Home Page Profile Management 11. List Management 20 12. Global Message Handling D. Message Center 1. Storage Requirements E. PC Client Capabilities 1.User Interface 25 2.Security 3.Message Retrieval 4. Message Manipulation F. Order Entry Requirements 1. Provisioning and Fulfillment 30 G. Traffic Systems H. Pricing I. Billing XVIII. DIRECTLINE MCI A. Overview 23 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 1 .The ARU (Audio Response Unit) 502 2.The VFP (Voice Fax Platform) 504 3.The DDS (Data Distribution Service) 506 B. Rationale 5 C. Detail 1. Call Flow Architecture 520 2. Network Connectivity 3.Call Flow 4.Data Flow Architecture 10 D. Voice Fax Platform (VFP) 504 Detailed Architecture 1. Overview 2. Rationale 3. Detail E. Voice Distribution Detailed Architecture 15 1.Overview 2. Rationale F. Login Screen G. Call Routing Screen H. Guest Menu Configuration Screen 20 I. Override Routing Screen J. Speed Dial Screen K. ARU CALL FLOWS XIX. INTERNET FAX A. Introduction 25 B. Details XX. INTERNET SWITCH TECHNOLOGY A. An Embodiment B. Another Embodiment XXI. BILLING 30 A. An Embodiment 1. Call Record Format 2.Network Call Identifier B. [Another Embodiment] 1.Call Record Format WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 2.Network Call Identifier XXII. PRIORITIZING ACCESS/ROUTER A. Prioritizing Access/ Router Overview B. Prioritizing Access/Router Process 5 XXIII. CALLBACK TELEPHONY SYSTEM A. Introduction to a Callback Telephony System in Accordance with a preferred Embodiment B. Internet-Based Callback Architecture C. Callback Service Potential 10 D. Internet Service Potential E. Internet-Based Callback Architecture F. Self Regulating System 2S_ WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 INTRODUCTION TO THE INTERNET I. THE COMPOSITION OF THE INTERNET The Internet is a method of interconnecting physical networks and a set of 5 conventions for using networks that allow the computers they reach to interact. Physically, the Internet is a huge, global network spanning over 92 countries and comprising 59,000 academic, commercial, government, and military networks' according to the Government Accounting Office (GAO), with these numbers expected to double each year. Furthermore, 10 there are about 10 million host computers, 50 million users, and 76,000 World-Wide Web servers connected to the Internet. The backbone of the Internet consists of a series of high-speed communication links between major supercomputer sites and educational and research institutions within the U.S. and throughout the world. 15 Before progressing further, a common misunderstanding regarding the usage of the term "internet" should be resolved. Originally, the term was used only as the name of the network based upon the Internet Protocol, but now, internet is a generic term used to refer to an entire class of networks. 20 An "internet" (lowercase "i") is any collection of separate physical networks, interconnected by a common protocol, to form a single logical network, whereas the "Internet" (uppercase "I") is the worldwide collection of interconnected networks that uses Internet Protocol to link the large number of physical networks into a single logical network. 25 II. PROTOCOL STANDARDS A. Internet Protocols govern the behavior along the Internet backbone and thus set down the key rules for data communication. Transmission Control 30 Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) has an open nature and is available to everyone, meaning that it attempts to create a network protocol system that is independent of computer or network operating system and architectural differences. As such, TCP/IP protocols are publicly available in standards documents, particularly in Requests for Comments (RFCs). A requirement WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 for Internet connection is TCP/IP, which consists of a large set of data communications protocols, two of which are the Transmission Control Protocol and the Internet Protocol. An excellent description of the details associated with TCP/IP and UDP/IP is provided in TCP/IP Illustrated, W 5 Richard Stevens, Addison-Wesley Publishing Company (1996). B. International Telecommunication Union Telecommunication Standardization Sector ("ITU-T") Standards 10 The International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization Sector ("ITU-T) has established numerous standards governing protocols and line encoding for telecommunication devices. Because many of these standards are referenced throughout this document, summaries of the relevant standards are listed below for 15 reference. ITU G.711 Recommendation for Pulse Code Modulation of 3kHz Audio Channels. ITU G.722 Recommendation for 7kHz Audio Coding within a 64kbit/s 20 channel. ITU G.723 Recommendation for dual rate speech coder for multimedia communication transmitting at 5.3 and 6.3 kbits. ITU G.728 Recommendation for coding of speech at 16kbit/s using low delay code excited linear prediction (LD-CELP) 25 ITU H.221 Frame Structure for a 64 to 1920 kbit/s Channel in Audiovisual Teleservices ITU H.223 Multiplexing Protocols for Low Bitrate Multimedia Terminals ITU H.225 ITU Recommendation for Media Stream Packetization and Synchronization on non-guaranteed quality of service LANs. 30 ITU H.230 Frame-synchronous Control and Indication Signals for Audiovisual Systems ITU H.231 Multipoint Control Unit for Audiovisual Systems Using Digital Channels up to 2 Mbit/s ITU H.242 System for Establishing Communication Between Audiovisual 27 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Terminals Using Digital Channels up to 2Mbits ITU H.243 System for Establishing Communication Between Three or More Audiovisual Terminals Using Digital Channels up to 2 Mbit/s ITU H.245 Recommendation for a control protocol for multimedia 5 communication ITU H.261 Recommendation for Video Coder-Decoder for audiovisual services supporting video resolutions of 352x288 pixels and 176x144 pixels. ITU H.263 Recommendation for Video Coder-Decoder for audiovisual 10 services supporting video resolutions of 128x96 pixels, 176x144 pixels, 352x288 pixels, 704x576 pixels and 1408x1152 pixels. ITU H.320 Recommendation for Narrow Band ISDN visual telephone systems. ITU H.321 Visual Telephone Terminals over ATM 15 ITU H.322 Visual Telephone Terminals over Guaranteed Quality of Service LANs ITU H.323 ITU Recommendation for Visual Telephone Systems and Equipment for Local Area Networks which provide a non-guaranteed quality of service. 20 ITU H.324 Recommendation for Terminals and Systems for low bitrate(28.8 Kbps) multimedia communication on dial-up telephone lines. ITU T.120 Transmission Protocols for Multimedia Data. In addition, several other relevant standards are referenced in this 25 document: ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network, the digital communication standard for transmission of voice, video and data on a single communications link. 30 RTP Real-Time Transport Protocol, an Internet Standard Protocol for transmission of real-time data like voice and video over unicast and multicast networks. IP Internet Protocol, an Internet Standard Protocol for transmission and delivery of data packets on a packet switched network of interconnected WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 computer systems. PPP Point-to-Point Protocol MPEG Motion Pictures Expert Group, a standards body under the International Standards Organization(ISO), Recommendations for 5 compression of digital Video and Audio including the bit stream but not the compression algorithms. SLIP Serial Line Internet Protocol RSVP Resource Reservation Setup Protocol UDP User Datagram Protocol 10 III. TCP/IP FEATURES The popularity of the TCP/IP protocols on the Internet grew rapidly because they met an important need for worldwide data communication and had several important characteristics that allowed them to meet this need. 15 These characteristics, still in use today, include: A common addressing scheme that allows any device running TCP/IP to uniquely address any other device on the Internet. Open protocol standards, freely available and developed independently of any hardware or operating system. Thus, TCP/IP is capable of being used 20 with different hardware and software, even if Internet communication is not required. Independence from any specific physical network hardware, allows TCP/IP to integrate many different kinds of networks. TCP/IP can be used over an 25 Ethernet, a token ring, a dial-up line, or virtually any other kinds of physical transmission media. IV. INFORMATION TRANSPORT IN COMMUNICATION NETWORKS A. Switching Techniques 30 An understanding of how information travels in communication systems is required to appreciate the recent steps taken by key players in today's Internet backbone business. The traditional type of communication network is circuit switched. The U.S. telephone system uses such circuit switching techniques. When a person or a computer makes a telephone WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 call, the switching equipment within the telephone system seeks out a physical path from the originating telephone to the receiver's telephone. A circuit-switched network attempts to form a dedicated connection, or circuit, between these two points by first establishing a circuit from the 5 originating phone through the local switching office, then across trunk lines, to a remote switching office, and finally to the destination telephone. This dedicated connection exists until the call terminates. The establishment of a completed path is a prerequisite to the transmission 10 of data for circuit switched networks. After the circuit is in place, the microphone captures analog signals, and the signals are transmitted to the Local Exchange Carrier (LEC) Central Office (CO) in analog form over an analog loop. The analog signal is not converted to digital form until it reaches the LEC Co, and even then only if the equipment is modern enough 15 to support digital information. In an ISDN embodiment, however, the analog signals are converted to digital at the device and transmitted to the LEC as digital information. Upon connection, the circuit guarantees that the samples can be delivered 20 and reproduced by maintaining a data path of 64 Kbps (thousand bits per second). This rate is not the rate required to send digitized voice per se. Rather, 64Kbps is the rate required to send voice digitized with the Pulse Code Modulated (PCM) technique. Many other methods for digitizing voice exist, including ADPCM (32Kbps), GSM (13 Kbps), TrueSpeech 8.5 (8.5 25 Kbps), G.723 (6.4 Kbps or 5.3 Kbps) and Voxware RT29HQ (2.9 Kbps). Furthermore, the 64 Kbps path is maintained from LEC Central Office (CO) Switch to LEC CO, but not from end to end. The analog local loop transmits an analog signal, not 64 Kbps digitized audio. One of these analog local loops typically exists as the "last mile" of each of the telephone 30 network circuits to attach the local telephone of the calling party. This guarantee of capacity is the strength of circuit-switched networks. However, circuit switching has two significant drawbacks. First, the setup time can be considerable, because the call signal request may find the lines ,3 ( WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 busy with other calls; in this event, there is no way to gain connection until some other connection terminates. Second, utilization can be low while costs are high. In other words, the calling party is charged for the duration of the call and for all of the time even if no data transmission takes place 5 (i.e. no one speaks). Utilization can be low because the time between transmission of signals is unable to be used by any other calls, due to the dedication of the line. Any such unused bandwidth during the connection is wasted. 10 Additionally, the entire circuit switching infrastructure is built around 64 Kbps circuits. The infrastructure assumes the use of PCM encoding techniques for voice. However, very high quality codecs are available that can encode voice using less than one-tenth of the bandwidth of PCM. However, the circuit switched network blindly allocates 64 Kbps of 15 bandwidth for a call, end-to-end, even if only one-tenth of the bandwidth is utilized. Furthermore, each circuit generally only connects two parties. Without the assistance of conference bridging equipment, an entire circuit to a phone is occupied in connecting one party to another party. Circuit switching has no multicast or multipoint communication capabilities, 20 except when used in combination with conference bridging equipment. Other reasons for long call setup time include the different signaling networks involved in call setup and the sheer distance causing propagation delay. Analog signaling from an end station to a CO on a low bandwidth 25 link can also delay call setup. Also, the call setup data travels great distances on signaling networks that are not always transmitting data at the speed of light. When the calls are international, the variations in signaling networks grows, the equipment handling call setup is usually not as fast as modem setup and the distances are even greater, so call setup 30 slows down even more. Further, in general, connection-oriented virtual or physical circuit setup, such as circuit switching, requires more time at connection setup time than comparable connectionless techniques due to the end-to-end handshaking required between the conversing parties. 31 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Message switching is another switching strategy that has been considered. With this form of switching, no physical path is established in advance between the sender and receiver; instead, whenever the sender has a block of data to be sent, it is stored at the first switching office and retransmitted 5 to the next switching point after error inspection. Message switching places no limit on block size, thus requiring that switching stations must have disks to buffer long blocks of data; also, a single block may tie up a line for many minutes, rendering message switching useless for interactive traffic. 10 Packet switched networks, which predominate the computer network industry, divide data into small pieces called packets that are multiplexed onto high capacity intermachine connections. A packet is a block of data with a strict upper limit on block size that carries with it sufficient identification necessary for delivery to its destination. Such packets 15 usually contain several hundred bytes of data and occupy a given transmission line for only a few tens of milliseconds. Delivery of a larger file via packet switching requires that it be broken into many small packets and sent one at a time from one machine to the other. The network hardware delivers these packets to the specified destination, where the 20 software reassembles them into a single file. Packet switching is used by virtually all computer interconnections because of its efficiency in data transmissions. Packet switched networks use bandwidth on a circuit as needed, allowing other transmissions to pass 25 through the lines in the interim. Furthermore, throughput is increased by the fact that a router or switching office can quickly forward to the next stop any given packet, or portion of a large file, that it receives, long before the other packets of the file have arrived. In message switching, the intermediate router would have to wait until the entire block was delivered 30 before forwarding. Today, message switching is no longer used in computer networks because of the superiority of packet switching. To better understand the Internet, a comparison to the telephone system is helpful. The public switched telephone network was designed with the goal a52 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 of transmitting human voice, in a more or less recognizable form. Their suitability has been improved for computer-to-computer communications but remains far from optimal. A cable running between two computers can transfer data at speeds in the hundreds of megabits, and even gigabits per 5 second. A poor error rate at these speeds would be only one error per day. In contrast, a dial-up line, using standard telephone lines, has a maximum data rate in the thousands of bits per second, and a much higher error rate. In fact, the combined bit rate times error rate performance of a local cable could be 11 orders of magnitude better than a voice-grade telephone 10 line. New technology, however, has been improving the performance of these lines. B. Gateways and Routers The Internet is composed of a great number of individual networks, 15 together forming a global connection of thousands of computer systems. After understanding that machines are connected to the individual networks, we can investigate how the networks are connected together to form an internetwork, or an internet. At this point, internet gateways and internet routers come into play. 20 In terms of architecture, two given networks are connected by a computer that attaches to both of them. Internet gateways and routers provide those links necessary to send packets between networks and thus make connections possible. Without these links, data communication through 25 the Internet would not be possible, as the information either would not reach its destination or would be incomprehensible upon arrival. A gateway may be thought of as an entrance to a communications network that performs code and protocol conversion between two otherwise incompatible networks. For instance, gateways transfer electronic mail and 30 data files between networks over the internet. IP Routers are also computers that connect networks and is a newer term preferred by vendors. These routers must make decisions as to how to send the data packets it receives to its destination through the use of WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 continually updated routing tables. By analyzing the destination network address of the packets, routers make these decisions. Importantly, a router does not generally need to decide which host or end user will receive a packet; instead, a router seeks only the destination network and thus 5 keeps track of information sufficient to get to the appropriate network, not necessarily the appropriate end user. Therefore, routers do not need to be huge supercomputing systems and are often just machines with small main memories and little disk storage. The distinction between gateways and routers is slight, and current usage blurs the line to the extent that the two 10 terms are often used interchangeably. In current terminology, a gateway moves data between different protocols and a router moves data between different networks. So a system that moves mail between TCP/IP and OSI is a gateway, but a traditional IP gateway (that connects different networks) is a router. 15 Now, it is useful to take a simplified look at routing in traditional telephone systems. The telephone system is organized as a highly redundant, multilevel hierarchy. Each telephone has two copper wires coming out of it that go directly to the telephone company's nearest end office, also called a 20 local central office. The distance is typically less than 10 km; in the U.S. alone, there are approximately 20,000 end offices. The concatenation of the area code and the first three digits of the telephone number uniquely specify an end office and help dictate the rate and billing structure. 25 The two-wire connections between each subscriber's telephone and the end office are called local loops. If a subscriber attached to a given end office calls another subscriber attached to the same end office, the switching mechanism within the office sets up a direct electrical connection between the two local loops. This connection remains intact for the duration of the 30 call, due to the circuit switching techniques discussed earlier. If the subscriber attached to a given end office calls a user attached to a different end office, more work has to be done in the routing of the call. First, each end office has a number of outgoing lines to one or more nearby WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 switching centers, called toll offices. These lines are called toll connecting trunks. If both the caller's and the receiver's end offices happen to have a toll connecting trunk to the same toll office, the connection may be established within the toll office. If the caller and the recipient of the call 5 do not share a toll office, then the path will have to be established somewhere higher up in the hierarchy. There are sectional and regional offices that form a network by which the toll offices are connected. The toll, sectional, and regional exchanges communicate with each other via high bandwidth inter-toll trunks. The number of different kinds of switching 10 centers and their specific topology varies from country to country, depending on its telephone density. C. Using Network Level Communication for Smooth User Connection 15 In addition to the data transfer functionality of the Internet, TCP/IP also seeks to convince users that the Internet is a solitary, virtual network. TCP/IP accomplishes this by providing a universal interconnection among machines, independent of the specific networks to which hosts and end users attach. Besides router interconnection of physical networks, software 20 is required on each host to allow application programs to use the Internet as if it were a single, real physical network. D. Datagrams and Routing The basis of Internet service is an underlying, connectionless packet 25 delivery system run by routers, with the basic unit of transfer being the packet. In internets running TCP/IP, such as the Internet backbone, these packets are called datagrams. This section will briefly discuss how these datagrams are routed through the Internet. 30 In packet switching systems, routing is the process of choosing a path over which to send packets. As mentioned before, routers are the computers that make such choices. For the routing of information from one host within a network to another host on the same network, the datagrams that are sent do not actually reach the Internet backbone. This is an example of WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 internal routing, which is completely self-contained within the network. The machines outside of the network do not participate in these internal routing decisions. 5 At this stage, a distinction should be made between direct delivery and indirect delivery. Direct delivery is the transmission of a datagram from one machine across a single physical network to another machine on the same physical network. Such deliveries do not involve routers. Instead, the sender encapsulates the datagram in a physical frame, addresses it, 10 and then sends the frame directly to the destination machine. Indirect delivery is necessary when more than one physical network is involved, in particular when a machine on one network wishes to communicate with a machine on another network. This type of 15 communication is what we think of when we speak of routing information across the Internet backbone. In indirect delivery, routers are required. To send a datagram, the sender must identify a router to which the datagram can be sent, and the router then forwards the datagram towards the destination network. Recall that routers generally do not keep track of the 20 individual host addresses (of which there are millions), but rather just keeps track of physical networks (of which there are thousands). Essentially, routers in the Internet form a cooperative, interconnected structure, and datagrams pass from router to router across the backbone until they reach a router that can deliver the datagram directly. 25 V. TECHNOLOGY INTRODUCTION The changing face of the internet world causes a steady inflow of new systems and technology. The following three developments, each likely to become more prevalent in the near future, serve as an introduction to the 30 technological arena: A. ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) is a networking technology using a high-speed, connection-oriented system for both local area and wide area WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 networks. ATM networks require modern hardware including: High speed switches that can operate at gigabit (trillion bit) per second speeds to handle the traffic from many computers; Optical fibers (versus copper wires) that provide high data transfer 5 rates, with host-to-ATM switch connections running at 100 or 155 Mbps (million bits per second); Fixed size cells, each of which includes 53 bytes. ATM incorporates features of both packet switching and circuit switching, 10 as it is designed to carry voice, video, and television signals in addition to data. Pure packet switching technology is not conducive to carrying voice transmissions because such transfers demand more stable bandwidth. B. Frame Relay 15 Frame relay systems use packet switching techniques, but are more efficient than traditional systems. This efficiency is partly due to the fact that they perform less error checking than traditional X.25 packet switching services. In fact, many intermediate nodes do little or no error checking at all and only deal with routing, leaving the error checking to the 20 higher layers of the system. With the greater reliability of today's transmissions, much of the error checking previously performed has become unnecessary. Thus, frame relay offers increased performance compared to traditional systems. 25 C. ISDN An Integrated Services Digital Network is an "international telecommunications standard for transmitting voice, video, and data over digital lines," most commonly running at 64 kilobits per second. The traditional phone network runs voice at only 4 kilobits per second. To 30 adopt ISDN, an end user or company must upgrade to ISDN terminal equipment, central office hardware, and central office software. The ostensible goals of ISDN include the following: To provide an internationally accepted standard for voice, data and signaling; WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 To make all transmission circuits end-to-end digital; To adopt a standard out-of-band signaling system; and To bring significantly more bandwidth to the desktop. 5 VI. MCI INTELLIGENT NETWORK The MCI Intelligent Network is a call processing architecture for processing voice, fax and related services. The Intelligent Network comprises a special purpose bridging switch with special capabilities and a set of general purpose computers along with an Automatic Call Distributor (ACD). The 10 call processing including number translation services, automatic or manual operator services, validation services and database services are carried out on a set of dedicated general purpose computers with specialized software. New value added services can be easily integrated into the system by enhancing the software in a simple and cost-effective manner. 15 Before proceeding further, it will be helpful to establish some terms. ISP Intelligent Services Platform NCS Network Control System DAP Data Access Point 20 ACD Automatic Call Distributor ISN Intelligent Services Network (Intelligent Network) ISNAP Intelligent Services Network Adjunct Processor MTOC Manual Telecommunications Operator Console ARU Audio Response Unit 25 ACP Automatic Call Processor NAS Network Audio Server EVS Enhanced Voice Services POTS Plain Old Telephone System ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode 30 The Intelligent Network Architecture has a rich set of features and is very flexible. Addition of new features and services is simple and fast. Features and services are extended utilizing special purpose software running on general purpose computers. Adding new features and services involves 138, WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 upgrading the special purpose software and is cost-effective. Intelligent Network Features and Services include Call type identification; 5 Call Routing and selective termination; Operator selection and call holding; Manual and Automated Operator; Voice Recognition and automated, interactive response; Customer and customer profile verification and validation; 10 Voice Mail; Call validation and database; Audio Conference reservation; Video Conference reservation; Fax delivery and broadcasting; 15 Customer Billing; Fraud Monitoring; Operational Measurements and Usage Statistics reporting; and Switch interface and control. 20 A. Components of the MCI Intelligent Figure 19A illustrates an Intelligent Network in accordance with a preferred embodiment. The MCI Intelligent Network is comprised of a large number of components. Major components of the MCI Intelligent Network include the 25 MCI Switching Network 2 Network Control System (NCS)/Data Access Point(DAP) 3 ISN - Intelligent Services Network 4 EVS - Enhanced Voice Services 9 30 1. MCI Switching Network. The MCI switching network is comprised of special purpose bridging switches 2. These bridging switches 2 route and connect the calling and the called parties after the call is validated by the intelligent services network 4. The bridging switches have limited programming capabilities WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 and provide the basic switching services under the control of the Intelligent Services Network (ISN) 4. 2. Network Control System/Data Access Point (NCS/DAP). 5 The NCS/DAP 3 is an integral component of the MCI Intelligent Network. The DAP offers a variety of database services like number translation and also provides services for identifying the switch ID and trunk ID of the terminating number for a call. 10 The different services offered by NCS/DAP 3 include: Number Translation for 800, 900, VNET Numbers; Range Restrictions to restrict toll calling options and advanced parametric routing including Time of Day, Day of Week/ Month, Point of Origin and percentage allocation across multiple sites; 15 Information Database including Switch ID and Trunk ID of a terminating number for a given call; Remote Query to Customer Databases; VNET/950 Card Validation Services; and VNET ANI/DAL Validation Services. 20 3. Intelligent Services Network (ISN) The ISN 4 includes an Automatic Call Distributor (ACD) for routing the calls. The ACD communicates with the Intelligent Switch Network Adjunct Processor (ISNAP) 5 and delivers calls to the different manual or automated 25 agents. The ISN includes the ISNAP 5 and the Operator Network Center (ONC). ISNAP 5 is responsible for Group Select and Operator Selection for call routing. The ISNAP communicates with the ACD for call delivery to the different agents. The ISNAP is also responsible for coordinating data and voice for operator-assisted calls. The ONC is comprised of Servers, 30 Databases and Agents including Live Operators or Audio Response Units (ARU) including Automated Call Processors (ACP)s, MTOCs and associated NAS 7. These systems communicate with each other on an Ethernet LAN and provide a variety of services for call processing. 6/0 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 The different services offered by the ONC include: Validation Services including call-type identification, call verification and call restrictions if any; Operator Services, both manual and automated, for customer assistance; 5 Database Services for a variety of database lookups; Call Extending Capabilities; Call Bridging Capabilities; Prompt for User Input; and Play Voice Messages. 10 4. Enhanced Voice Services (EVS) Enhanced Voice Services offer menu-based routing services in addition to a number of value-added features. The EVS system prompts the user for an input and routes calls based on customer input or offers specialized 15 services for voice mail and fax routing. The different services offered as a part of the EVS component of the MCI Intelligent Network include: Play Customer Specific Voice Messages; Prompt for User Input; User Input based Information Access; 20 Call Extending Capabilities; Call Bridging Capabilities; Audio Conference Capabilities; Call Transfer Capabilities; Record User Voice Messages; 25 Remote Update of Recorded Voice; and Send/Receive Fax. 5. Additional Components. In addition to the above mentioned components, a set of additional 30 components are also architected into the MCI Intelligent Network. These components are: Intelligent Call Routing (ICR) services are offered for specialized call routing based on information obtained from the calling party either during the call or at an earlier time. Routing is also based on the knowledge WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 of the physical and logical network layout. Additional intelligent routing services based on time of day, alternate routing based on busy routes are also offered. 5 Billing is a key component of the MCI Intelligent Network. The billing component provides services for customer billing based on call type and call duration. Specialized billing services are additionally provided for value added services like the 800 Collect calls. 10 Fraud Monitoring component is a key component of the MCI Intelligent Network providing services for preventing loss of revenue due to fraud and illegal usage of the network. Operational Measurements include information gathering for analysis of 15 product performance. Analysis of response to advertising campaigns, calling patterns resulting in specialized reports result from operational measurements. Information gathered is also used for future product planning and predicting infrastructure requirements. 20 Usage Statistics Reporting includes gathering information from operational databases and billing information to generate reports of usage. The usage statistics reports are used to study call patterns, load patterns and also demographic information. These reports are used for future product plans and marketing input. 25 B. Intelligent Network System Overview The MCI Call Processing architecture is built upon a number of key components including the MCI Switch Network, the Network Control System, the Enhanced Voice Services system and the Intelligent Services 30 Network. Call processing is entirely carried out on a set of general purpose computers and some specialized processors thereby forming the basis for the MCI Intelligent Network. The switch is a special purpose bridging switch with limited programming capabilities and complex interface. Addition of new services on the switch is very difficult and sometimes not WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 possible. A call on the MCI Switch is initially verified if it needs a number translation as in the case of an 800 number. If a number translation is required, it is either done at the switch itself based on an internal table or the request is sent to the DAP which is a general purpose computer with 5 software capable of number translation and also determining the trunk ID and switch ID of the terminating number. The call can be routed to an ACD which delivers calls to the various call processing agents like a live operator or an ARU. The ACD communicates 10 with the ISNAP which does a group select to determine which group of agents are responsible for this call and also which of the agents are free to process this call. The agents process the calls received by communicating with the NIDS 15 (Network Information Distributed Services) Server which are the Validation or the Database Servers with the requisite databases for the various services offered by ISN. Once the call is validated by processing of the call on the server, the agent communicates the status back to the ACD. The ACD in turn dials the terminating number and bridges the incoming call 20 with the terminating number and executes a Release Link Trunk (RLT) for releasing the call all the way back to the switch. The agent also generates a Billing Detail Record (BDR) for billing information. When the call is completed, the switch generates an Operation Services Record (OSR) which is later matched with the corresponding BDR to create total billing 25 information. The addition of new value added services is very simple and new features can be added by additional software and configuration of the different computing systems in the ISP. A typical call flow scenario is explained below. 30 C. Call Flow Example The Call Flow example illustrates the processing of an 800 Number Collect Call from phone 1 in Figure 19A to phone 10. The call is commenced when a calling party dials 1-800-COLLECT to make a collect call to phone 10 the Called Party. The call is routed by the Calling Party's Regional Bell WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Operating Company (RBOC), which is aware that this number is owned by MCI, to a nearest MCI Switch Facility and lands on an MCI switch 2. The switch 2 detects that it is an 800 Number service and performs an 800 5 Number Translation from a reference table in the switch or requests the Data Access Point (DAP) 3 to provide number translation services utilizing a database lookup. The call processing is now delegated to a set of intelligent computing 10 systems through an Automatic Call Distributor (ACD) 4. In this example, since it is a collect call, the calling party has to reach a Manual or an Automated Operator before the call can be processed further. The call from the switch is transferred to an ACD 4 which is operational along with an Intelligent Services Network Adjunct Processor (ISNAP) 5. The ISNAP 5 15 determines which group of Agents are capable of processing the call based on the type of the call. This operation is referred to as Group Select. The agents capable of call processing include Manual Telecommunications Operator Console (MTOC)s 6 or Automated Call Processors (ACP)s 7 with associated Network Audio Servers (NAS)s 7a. The ISNAP 5 determines 20 which of the Agents is free to handle the call and routes the voice call to a specific Agent. The Agents are built with sophisticated call processing software. The Agent gathers all the relevant information from the Calling Party including the 25 telephone number of the Called Party. The Agent then communicates with the database servers with a set of database lookup requests. The database lookup requests include queries on the type of the call, call validation based on the telephone numbers of both the calling and the called parties and also call restrictions, if any, including call blocking restrictions based on 30 the called or calling party's telephone number. The Agent then signals the ISNAP-ACD combination to put the Calling Party on hold and dial the called party and to be connected to the Called Party. The Agent informs the called party about the Calling Party and the request for a Collect Call. The Agent gathers the response from the Called Party and further processes the call.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 If the Called Party has agreed to receive the call, the Agent then signals the ISNAP-ACD combination to bridge the Called Party and the Calling Party. The Agent then cuts a BDR which is used to match with a respective OSR 5 generated by the switch to create complete billing information. The ISNAP ACD combination then bridges the Called Party and the Calling Party and then releases the line back to the switch by executing a Release Trunk (RLT). The Calling Party and the Called Party can now have a conversation through the switch. At the termination of the call by either party, the 10 switch generates a OSR which will be matched with the BDR generated earlier to create complete billing information for the call. If the Called Party declines to accept the collect call, the Agent signals the ACD-ISNAP combination to reconnect the Calling Party which was on hold back to the Agent. Finally, the Agent informs the Calling Party about the Called Party's 15 response and terminates the call in addition to generating a BDR. MCI Intelligent Network is a scaleable and efficient network architecture for call processing and is based on a set of intelligent processors with specialized software, special purpose bridging switches and ACD's. The 20 Intelligent Network is an overlay network coexisting with the MCI Switching Network and is comprised of a large number of specialized processors interacting with the switch network for call processing. One embodiment of Intelligent Network is completely audio-centric. Data and fax are processed as voice calls with some specialized, dedicated features and value-added 25 services. In another embodiment, the Intelligent Network is adapted for newly emerging technologies, including POTS-based video-phones and internet telephony for voice and video. The following sections describe in detail the 30 architecture, features and services based on the emerging technologies. COMPATIBILITY OF ISN WITH EMERGING TECHNOLOGIES The following sections describe in detail the architecture, features and WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 services based on several emerging technologies, all of which can be integrated into the Intelligent Network. VII. ISP FRAMEWORK 5 A. Background The ISP is composed of several disparate systems. As ISP integration proceeds, formerly independent systems now become part of one larger whole with concomitant increases in the level of analysis, testing, scheduling, and training in all disciplines of the ISP. 10 1. Broadband Access. A range of high bandwidth services are supported by a preferred embodiment. These include: Video on Demand, Conferencing, Distance Learning, and Telemedicine. 15 ATM (asynchronous transfer mode) pushes network control to the periphery of the network, obviating the trunk and switching models of traditional, circuit-based telephony. It is expected to be deployed widely to accommodate these high bandwidth services. 20 2. Internet Telephony System. The Internet and with it, the World Wide Web, offers easy customer access, widespread commercial opportunities, and fosters a new role for successful telecommunications companies. The ISP platform offers many features 25 which can be applied or reapplied from telephony to the Internet. These include access, customer equipment, personal accounts, billing, marketing (and advertising) data or application content, and even basic telephone service. 30 The telecommunication industry is a major transmission provider of the Internet. A preferred embodiment which provides many features from telephony environments for Internet clients is optimal. Figure 19F is a block diagram of an internet telephony system in WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 accordance with a preferred embodiment. A number of computers 1900, 1901, 1902 and 1903 are connected behind a firewall 1905 to the Internet 1910 via an Ethernet or other network connection. A domain name system 1906 maps names to IP addresses in the Internet 1910. Individual 5 systems for billing 1920, provisioning 1922, directory services 1934, messaging services 1930, such as voice messaging 1932 are all attached to the internet 1910 via a communication link. Another communication link is also utilized to facilitate communications to a satellite device 1940 that is used to communicate information to a variety of set top devices 1941 10 1943. A web server 1944 provides access for an order entry system 1945 to the Internet 1910. In an embodiment, the order entry system 1945 generates complete profile information for a given telephone number, including, name, address, fax 15 number, secretary's number, wife's phone number, pager, business address, e-mail address, IP address and phonemail address. This information is maintained in a database that can be accessed by everyone on the network with authorization to do so. In an alternate embodiment, the order entry system utilizes a web interface for accessing an existing 20 directory service database 1934 to provide information for the profile to supplement user entered information. The Internet 1910 is tied to the Public Switched Network (PSTN) 1960 via a gateway 1950. The gateway 1950 in a preferred embodiment provides a 25 virtual connection from a circuit switched call in the PSTN 1960 and some entity in the Internet 1910. The PSTN 1960 has a variety of systems attached, including a direct-dial input 1970, a Data Access Point (DAP) 1972 for facilitating 800 number 30 processing and Virtual NETwork (VNET) processing to facilitate for example a company tieline. A Public Branch Exchange (PBX) 1980 is also attached via a communication link for facilitating communication between the PSTN 1960 and a variety of computer equipment, such as a fax 1981, telephone 1982 and a modem 1983. An operator 1973 can also optionally attach to WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 a call to assist in placing a call or conference call coming into and going out of the PSTN 1960 or the internet 1910. Various services are attached to the PSTN through individual 5 communication links including an attachment to the Intelligent Services Network (ISN) 1990, direct-dial plan 1991, provisioning 1974, order entry 1975, billing 1976, directory services 1977, conferencing services 1978, and authorization / authentication services 1979. All of these services can communicate between themselves using the PSTN 1960 and the Internet 10 1910 via a gateway 1950. The functionality of the ISN 1990 and the DAP 1972 can be utilized by devices attached to the Internet 1910. Figure 19G is a block diagram of a Prioritizing Access/Router in accordance with a preferred embodiment. A prioritizing access router (PAR) is designed 15 to combine the features of an internet access device and an Internet Protocol (IP) Router. It enables dial-up modem access to the internet by performing essential modem and PPP/SLIP to IP and the reverse IP to PPP/SLIP conversion. It also analyzes IP packet source/destination addresses and UPD or TCP ports and selects appropriate outgoing network 20 interfaces for each packet. Lastly, it uses a priority routing technique to favor packets destined for specific network interfaces over packets destined for other network interfaces. The design goal of the prioritizing access/router is to segregate real-time 25 traffic from the rest of the best- effort data traffic on internet networks. Real-time and interactive multimedia traffic is best segregated from traffic without real-time constraints at the access point to the internet, so that greater control over quality of service can be gained. The process that a prioritizing access/router utilizes is presented below with reference to 30 Figure 19G. First, at 2010, a computer dials up the PAR via a modem. The computer modem negotiates a data transfer rate and modem protocol parameters with the PAR modem. The computer sets up a Point to Point Protocol (PPP) WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 session with the PAR using the modem to modem connection over a Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) connection. The computer transfers Point-to-Point (PPP) packets to the PAR using the modem connection. The PAR modem 2010 transfers PPP packets to the 5 PPP to IP conversion process 2020 via the modem to host processor interface 2080. The modem to host processor interface can be any physical interface presently available or yet to be invented. Some current examples are ISA, EISA, VME, SCbus, MVIP bus, Memory Channel, and TDM buses. There is some advantage in using a multiplexed bus such as the Time 10 Division Multiplexing buses mentioned here, due to the ability to devote capacity for specific data flows and preserve deterministic behavior. The PPP to IP conversion process 2020 converts PPP packets to IP packets, and transfers the resulting IP packets to the packet classifier 2050 via the 15 process to process interface 2085. The process to process interface can be either a physical interface between dedicated processor hardware, or can be a software interface. Some examples of process to process software interfaces include function or subroutine calls, message queues, shared memory, direct memory access (DMA), and mailboxes. 20 The packet classifier 2085 determines if the packet belongs to any special prioritized group. The packet classifier keeps a table of flow specifications, defined by destination IP Address 25 source IP address combined source/destination IP Address combined destination IP Address/UDP Port combined destination IP Address/TCP Port combined source IP address/UDP Port 30 combined source IP Address/TCP Port combined source IP Address and TCP or UDP port with destination IP address combined destination IP Address and TCP or UDP port with source IP address 119 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 combined source IP Address and TCP or UDP port with destination IP address and TCP/UDP Port. The packet classifier checks its table of flow specifications against the IP 5 addresses and UDP or TCP ports used in the packet. If any match is found, the packet is classified as belonging to a priority flow and labeled as with a priority tag. Resource Reservation Setup Protocol techniques may be used for the packet classifier step. 10 The packet classifier 2050 hands off priority tagged and non-tagged packets to the packet scheduler 2060 via the process to process interface (90). The process to process interface 2090 need not be identical to the process to process interface 2085, but the same selection of techniques is available. The packet scheduler 2060 used a priority queuing technique 15 such as Weighted Fair Queueing to help ensure that prioritized packets (as identified by the packet classifier) receive higher priority and can be placed on an outbound network interface queue ahead of competing best-effort traffic. 20 The packet scheduler 2060 hands off packets in prioritized order to any outbound network interface (2010, 2070, 2071 or 2072) via the host processor to peripheral bus 2095. Any number of outbound network interfaces may be used. 25 IP packets can arrive at the PAR via non-modem interfaces (2070, 2071 and 2072). Some examples of these interfaces include Ethernet, fast Ethernet, FDDI, ATM, and Frame Relay. These packets go through the same steps as IP packets arriving via the modem PPP interfaces. 30 The priority flow specifications are managed through the controller process 2030. The controller process can accept externally placed priority reservations through the external control application programming interface 2040. The controller validates priority reservations for particular flows against admission control procedures and policy procedures, and if

PO

WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 the reservation is admitted, the flow specification is entered in the flow specification table in the packet classifier 2050 via the process to process interface 2065. The process to process interface 2065 need not be identical to the process to process interface 2085, but the same selection of 5 techniques is available. Turning now to Figure 20, there is shown an architectural framework for an Intelligent Services Platform (ISP) 2100, used in the present invention. The architecture of the ISP 2100 is intended to define an integrated 10 approach to the provision and delivery of intelligent services to the MCI network across all the components of the ISP. Each of the existing communication network systems has its own way of providing service management, resource management, data management, 15 security, distributed processing, network control, or operations support. The architecture of the ISP 2100 defines a single cohesive architectural framework covering these areas. The architecture is focused on achieving the following goals: - Develop global capabilities; 20 - Deliver enhanced future services; - Make efficient use of resources; - Improve time to market; - Reduce maintenance and operations costs; - Increase overall product quality; and 25 - Introduce scalability both upward and downward capabilities. The target capabilities of the ISP 2100 are envisioned to provide the basic building blocks for very many services. These services are characterized as providing higher bandwidth, greater customer control or personal flexibility, 30 and much reduced , even instantaneous, provisioning cycles. 3. Capacity . The ISP 2100 has a reach that is global and ubiquitous. Globally, it will reach every country through alliance partners' networks. In breadth, it WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 reaches all business and residential locales through wired or wireless access. 4. Future Services. 5 The above capabilities will be used to deliver: " Telephony and messaging services beyond what we have today; - Emerging video and multi-media offerings; - Powerful data services, including enhanced private networks; and - Software and equipment to enable end users to gain complete 10 control over their services. Services provided by the ISP 2100 will span those needed in advertising, agriculture, education, entertainment, finance, government, law, manufacturing, medicine, network transmission, real estate, research, 15 retailing, shipping, telecommunications, tourism, wholesaling, and many others. Services: - Customizable: customer is able to tailor the service offerings to their 20 own needs. - Customer managed: customer has direct (network-side) access for the administration and control of their service. - Loosely Coupled: services obtain and use network resources only when needed; customers pay for only what they use. Bandwidth is 25 available on demand, and without pre-allocation. - Secure & Private: customer privacy and confidentiality is paramount in the networked world. Commercial interests are guaranteed safe, secure transactions. Users and customers are identified and authenticated, and the network protected from tampering or 30 corruption. B. ISP Architecture Framework The following section describes the role of the ISP Platform 2100 in providing customer services. S-2 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 The ISP 2100 provides customer services through an intelligent services infrastructure, including provider network facilities 2102, public network facilities 2104, and customer equipment 2106. The services 5 infrastructure ensures the end-to-end quality and availability of customer service. The following section describes the relationship of the ISP platform 2100 to various external systems both within and outside a provider. 10 The provider components 2108 in Figure 20 are: - Intelligent Services 2110 - responsible for service provisioning, service delivery, and service assurance, including the internal data communications networks 2102. This represents the ISP's role. 15 - Revenue Management 2112 - responsible for financial aspects of customer services. - Network Management 2114 - responsible for the development and operation of the physical networks 2102. - Product Management 2116 - responsible for the creation and marketing of 20 customer services. The entities external to the ISP 2100 depicted in Figure 20 are: - Networks 2104- this represents all the network connections and access methods used by customers 2106 for service. This includes a provider's circuit switched network, packet switched networks, internal extended wide 25 area network, the internet, a provider's wireless partners' networks, a provider's global alliance and national partner networks, broadband networks, as well as the customer premises equipment 2118 attached to these networks. -3rd party Service Providers 2120 - this represents those external 30 organizations which deliver services to customers via the provider's Intelligent Services Platform 2100. - Service Resellers 2122 - this represents those organizations which have customers using the facilities 2100. Global Alliance Partners 2124 - organizations which have shared facilities WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 and exchange capabilities of their networks and service infrastructures. C. ISP Functional Figure 21 shows components of the ISP 2100 in more detail. Shown is the 5 set of logical components comprising the ISP 2100 architecture. None of these components is a single physical entity; each typically occurs multiple times in multiple locations. The components work together to provide a seamless Intelligent Services 2110 environment. This environment is not fixed; it is envisioned as a flexible evolving platform capable of adding new 10 services and incorporating new technologies as they become available. The platform components are linked by one or more network connections which include an internal distributed processing infrastructure. The ISP 2100 Functional Components are: 15 - Inbound and Outbound Gateways 2126 - allows access to services provided by other providers, and allows other providers to access the provider's services. -Marketable Service Gateway 2128- interface to a three-tier service creation environment for services the provider sells. Services are deployed 20 and updated through the Marketable Service Gateway 2128. This is actually no different than the Management Service Gateway 2130, except that the services created and deployed through here are for external customers. 25 -Management Service Gateway 2130 - illustrates that service creation concepts apply to management of the platform as well as service logic. Management services are deployed and managed through the Management Service Gateway 2130. Also, interfaces with management systems external to ISP 2100 are realized by the Management Service Gateway 2130. Some 30 examples of management services include the collection, temporary storage, and forwarding of (billable) network events. Other services include collection and filtering of alarm information from the ISP 2100 before forwarding to network management 2132.

WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Service Engines 2134 - A Service Logic Execution Environment for either marketable or management services. The Service Engines 2134 execute the logic contained in customer-specific profiles in order to provide unique customized service features. 5 - Service Creation Environment 2136 - Creates and deploys management services as well as marketable services, and their underlying features and capabilities. 10 - Data Management 2138- Where all customer and service profile data is deployed. Data is cached on Service Engines 2134, Statistics Servers 2140, Call Context servers 2142, Analysis Servers 2144, and other specialized applications or servers 2146 requiring ISP 2100 data. 15 - Service Select 2148 - Whether the services are accessed via a narrowband or broadband network, circuit-switched, packet-switched, or cell-switched, the services are accessed via a Service Select function 2148. Service Select 2148 is a specialized version of a service engine 2134, designed specifically to choose a service or services to execute. 20 - Resource Managers 2150 - manages all resources, including specialized resources 2152 and service instances running on service engines 2134, and any other kind of resource in the ISP 2100 that needs management and allocation. 25 - Specialized Resources 2152 - Special network-based capabilities (Internet to voice conversion, DTMF-detection, Fax, Voice Recognition, etc) are shown as specialized resources 2152. 30 - Call Context Server 2142 - accepts network event records and service event records in real time, and allows queries against the data. Once all events for a call (or any other kind of network transaction) are generated, the combined event information is delivered en masse to the Revenue Management function 2154. Data is stored short-term.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 - Statistics Server 2140- accepts statistics events from service engines, performs rollups, and allows queries against the data. Data is stored short term. 5 - Customer Based Capabilities 2156- software and specialized hardware on the customer premises that enables customer-premises based capabilities, such as ANI screening, Internet access, compression, interactive gaming, videoconferencing, retail access, you name it. 10 -Analysis Services 2144- a special kind of service engine that isn't based on network access, but is based on adding value based upon network statistics or call context information in real time or near real time. Examples include fraud detection and customer traffic statistics. 15 - Other Special Services 2146- entail other specialized forms of applications or servers that may or may not be based on the Service Engine model. These components provide other computing resources and lower-level functional capabilities which may be used in Service delivery, monitoring, 20 or management. D. ISP Integrated Network Services Figure 22 shows how the ISP architecture 2100 supplies services via different networks. The networks shown include Internet 2160, the public 25 switched telephony network (PSTN) 2162, Metro access rings 2164, and Wireless 2166. Additionally, it is expected that new "switchless" broadband network architectures 2168 and 2170 such as ATM or ISO Ethernet may supplant the current PSTN networks 2162. 30 The architecture accommodates networks other than basic PSTNs 2162 due to the fact that these alternative network models support services which cannot be offered on a basic PSTN, often with an anticipated reduced cost structure. These Networks are depicted logically in Figure 22.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Each of these new networks are envisioned to interoperate with the ISP 2100 in the same way. Calls (or transactions) will originate in a network from a customer service request, the ISP will receive the transaction and provide service by first identifying the customer and forwarding the 5 transaction to a generalized service-engine 2174. The service engine determines what service features are needed and either applies the necessary logic or avails itself of specialized network resources for the needed features. 10 The ISP 2100 itself is under the control of a series of Resource managers and Administrative and monitoring mechanisms. A single system image is enabled through the concurrent use of a common information base. The information base holds all the Customer, Service, Network and Resource information used or generated by the ISP. Other external applications (from 15 within MCI and in some cases external to MCI) are granted access through gateways, intermediaries, and sometimes directly to the same information base. In Figure 22, each entity depicts a single logical component of the ISP. 20 Each of these entities is expected to be deployed in multiple instances at multiple sites. E. ISP Components Ext App 2176- an external application; 25 App 2178- an internal ISP application (such as Fraud Analysis); Dc 2180- Data client, a client to the ISP information base which provides a local data copy; Ds 2182- Data server, one of the master copies of ISP information; Admin 2184- the ISP administrative functions (for configurations, and 30 maintenance); Mon 2186- the ISP monitoring functions (for fault, performance, and accounting); GRM 2188- the global resource management view for selected resources; LRM 2190- the local resource management view for selected resources; 7 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 SR 2192- the pools of specialized resources (such as video servers, ports, speech recognition); SE 2134- the generalized service engines which execute the desired service logic; and 5 Service Select 2194- the function which selects the service instance (running on a service engine 2134) which should process transactions offered from the networks. F. Switchless Communications Services 10 The switchless network 2168 is a term used for the application of cell switching or packet-switching techniques to both data and isochronous multimedia communications services. In the past, circuit switching was the only viable technology for transport of time-sensitive isochronous voice. Now, with the development of Asynchronous Transfer Mode cell switching 15 networks which provide quality of service guarantees, a single network infrastructure which serves both isochronous and bursty data services is achievable. The switchless network is expected to provide a lower cost model than 20 circuit switched architectures due to: - Flexibility to provide exactly the bandwidth required for each application, saving bandwidth when no data is being transferred. A minimum 56 Kbps circuit will not automatically be allocated for every call. - Adaptability to compression techniques, further reducing bandwidth 25 requirements for each network session. - Lower costs for specialized resource equipment, due to the fact that analog ports do not have to be supplied for access to special DSP capabilities such as voice recognition or conferencing. A single high-bandwidth network port can serve hundreds of "calls" simultaneously. 30 - Applicability and ease of adaptation of the switchless networks to advanced high-bandwidth services such as videoconferencing, training on demand, remote expert, integrated video/ voice/ fax/electronic mail, and information services. Figure 23 illustrates a sample switchless network 2168 in accordance with a preferred embodiment.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 G. Governing Principles 1. Architectural Principles. This section contains a listing of architectural principles which provide the 5 foundation of the architecture which follows. Service Principles 1. The Service Model must support seamless integration of new and existing services. 2. Services are created from a common Service Creation Environment 10 (SCE) which provides a seamless view of services. 3. All services execute in common service logic execution environments (SLEEs), which do not require software changes when new services are introduced. 4. All services are created from one or more service features. 15 5. Data stored in a single customer profile in the ISP Data Servers may be used to drive multiple services. 6. The Service Model must support the specification and fulfillment of quality of service parameters for each service. These quality of service parameters, when taken together, constitute a service level agreement 20 with each customer. Service deployment must take into account specified quality of service parameters. 2. Service Feature Principles. 1. All service features are described by a combination of one or more 25 capabilities. 2. All service features can be defined by a finite number of capabilities. 3. Individual service features must be defined using a standard methodology to allow service designers to have a common understanding of a capability. Each service feature must document their inputs, outputs, 30 error values, display behaviors, and potential service applications. 4. Interaction of physical entities in the network implementation shall not be visible to the user of the service feature through the service feature interfaces. 5. Each service feature should have a unified and stable external WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 interface. The interface is described as a set of operations, and the data required and provided by each operation. 6. Service features are not deployed into the network by themselves. A service feature is only deployed as part of a service logic program which 5 invokes the service feature (see Figure 21). Thus, service features linked into service logic programs statically, while capabilities are linked to service logic programs dynamically. This is where the loose coupling of resources to services is achieved. 10 3. Capability Principles. 1. Capabilities are defined completely independent from consideration of any physical or logical implementation (network implementation independent). 2. Each capability should have a unified and stable interface. The 15 interface is described as a set of operations, and the data required and provided by each operation. 3. Individual capabilities must be defined using a standard methodology to allow service designers to have a common understanding of a capability. Each capability must document their inputs, outputs, error 20 values, display behaviors, and potential service applications. 4. Interaction of physical entities in the network implementation shall not be visible to the user of the capability through the capability interfaces. 5. Capabilities may be combined to form high-level capabilities. 25 6. An operation on a capability defines one complete activity. An operation on a capability has one logical starting point and one or more logical ending points. 7. Capabilities may be realized in one or more piece of physical hardware or software in the network implementation. 30 8. Data required by each capability operation is defined by the capability operation support data parameters and user instance data parameters. 9. Capabilities are deployed into the network independent of any service. 60 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 10. Capabilities are global in nature and their location need not be considered by the service designer, as the whole network is regarded as a single entity from the viewpoint of the service designer. 11. Capabilities are reusable. They are used without modification for 5 other services. 4. Service Creation, Deployment, and Execution Principles. 1. Each Service Engine 2134 supports a subset of the customer base. 10 The list of customers supported by a service engine is driven by configuration data, stored on the ISP Data Server 2182. 2. Each Service Engine 2134 obtains its configuration data from the ISP data servers 2152 at activation time. 3. Service Engines 2134 use ISP database clients 2180 (see the data 15 management section of this description) to cache the data necessary to support the customers configured for that service engine 2134, as needed. Caching can be controlled by the ISP database server 2182, or controlled by the database of the ISP database server 2182. Data may be cached semi-permanently (on disk or in memory) at a service engine 2134 if it is 20 deemed to be too much overhead to load data from the data server 2182 on a frequent basis. 4. Service Engines 2134 may be expected to execute all of a customer's services, or only a subset of the customer's services. However, in the case of service interactions, one Service Engine 2134 must always be in control 25 of the execution of a service at any given time. Service Engines may hand off control to other service engines during the course of service execution. 5. Service Engines do not own any data, not even configuration data. Service Engines 2134 are not targets for deployment of data. Data Servers 2182 are targets for deployment of data. 30 5. Resource Management Model 2150 Principles. 1. Resources 2152 should be accessible from anywhere on the network. 2. Resources are not service-specific and can be shared across all services if desired. 6-1 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 3. Resources of the same type should be managed as a group. 4. The Resource Management Model 2150 should be flexible enough to accommodate various management policies, including: Least Cost, Round Robin, Least Recently Used, Most Available, First Encountered, Use Until 5 Failure and Exclusive Use Until Failure. 5. The Resource Management Model 2150 should optimize the allocation of resources and, if possible, honoring a selected policy. 6. The RM 2150 must allow for a spectrum of resource allocation techniques ranging from static configuration to fully dynamic allocation of 10 resources on a transaction by transaction basis. 7. The Resource Management Model 2150 must allow for the enforcement of resource utilization policies such as resource time out and preemptive reallocation by priority. 8. The Resource Management Model 2150 must be able to detect and 15 access the status, utilization and health of resources in a resource pool. 9. All Resources 2152 must be treated as managed objects. 10. All resources must be able to register with the RM 2150 to enter a pool, and de-register to leave a pool. 11. The only way to request, acquire and release a resource 2152 is 20 through the RM 2150. 12. The relationship between resources should not be fixed, rather individual instances of a given resource should be allocated from a registered pool in response to need or demand. 13. All specialized resources 2152 must be manageable from a consistent 25 platform-wide viewpoint. 14. All specialized resources 2152 must offer SNMP or CMIP agent functionality either directly or through a proxy. 15. Every specialized resource 2152 shall be represented in a common management information base. 30 16. All specialized resources shall support a standard set of operations to inquire, probe, place in or out of service, and test the item. 17. All specialized resources shall provide a basic set of self-test capabilities which are controlled through the standard SNMP or CMIP management interfaces. 62 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 6. Data Management 2138 Principles. 1. Multiple copies of any data item are allowed. 2. Multiple versions of the value of a data item are possible, but one 5 view is considered the master. 3. Master versions of a given data item are under a single jurisdiction. 4. Multiple users are allowed to simultaneously access the same data. 5. Business rules must be applied uniformly across the ISP 2100 to ensure the validity of all data changes. 10 6. Users work on local copies of data; data access is location independent and transparent. 7. From the data management point of view, users are applications or other software components. 8. Data access should conform to a single set of access methods which 15 is standardized across the ISP 2100. 9. Private data is allowed at a local database, but cannot be shared or distributed. 10. Only master data can be shared or distributed. 11. Private formats for a shared data item are allowed at the local 20 database. 12. Transactional capabilities can be relaxed at end-user discretion if allowed within the business rules. 13. Rules-based logic and other meta-data controls provide a flexible means to apply policy. 25 14. Data Replication provides reliability through duplication of data sources. 15. Database Partitioning provides scalability by decreasing the size of any particular data store, and by decreasing the transaction rate against any particular data store. 30 16. Data Management 2138 must allow both static and dynamic configuration of data resources. 17. Common data models and common schemas should be employed. 18. Logical application views of data are insulated from physical data operations such as relocation of files, reloading of databases, or 16c WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 reformatting of data stores. 19. Audit trails, and event histories, are required for adequate problem resolutions. 20. On-line data audits and reconciliation are required to ensure data 5 integrity. 21. Data recovery of failed databases is needed in real time. 22. Data metrics are needed for monitoring, trending, and control purposes. 23.7 by 24 operation with 99.9999 availability is required. 10 24. Data Management 2138 mechanisms must scale for high levels of growth. 25. Data Management 2138 mechanisms must provide cost effective solutions for both large-scale and small-scale deployments. 26. Data Management mechanisms must handle overload conditions 15 gracefully. 27. Data processing and data synchronization must occur in real-time to meet our business needs. 28. Trusted order entry and service creation should work directly on the ISP databases rather than through intermediary applications whenever 20 possible. 29. All data must be protected; additionally customer data is private and must retain its confidentiality. 30. Configurations, operational settings, and run-time parameters are mastered in the ISP MIB (management information base). 25 31. Wherever possible, off the shelf data solutions should be used to meet Data Management needs. The following principles are stated from an Object-oriented view: 32. Data items are the lowest set of persistent objects; these objects encapsulate a single data value. 30 33. Data items may have a user defined type. 34. Data items may be created and deleted. 35. Data items have only a single get and set method. 36. The internal value of a data item is constrained by range restrictions and rules.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 37. Data items in an invalid state should be inaccessible to users. 7. Operational Support Principles. 1. Common View - All ISP 2100 Operational Support User Interfaces 5 should have the same look & feel. 2. Functional Commonality - The management of an object is represented in the same manner throughout the ISP Operational support environment. 3. Single View - A distributed managed object has a single 10 representation at the ISP Operational Support User Interfaces, and the distribution is automatically. 4. OS/DM Domain - Data within the Operational support domain should be managed with the ISP Data Management 2138 Mechanisms. 5. Global MIB - There is a logical Global MIB which represents 15 resources in the entire ISP. 6. External MIBs - Embedded MIBs that are part of a managed component are outsider of Operational Support and Data Management. Such MIBs will be represented to the OS by a Mediation Device. 7. System Conformance - System conformance to the ISP OS standards 20 will be gained through Mediation Layers. 8. Operational Functions - Operational personnel handle the Network Layer & Element Management for physical & logical resources. 9. Administration Functions - Administration personnel handle the Planning & Service Management. 25 10. Profile Domain - Service & customer profile data bases are managed by administration personnel under the domain of the Data Management system. 11. Telecommunication Management Network (TMN) compliance - TMN compliance will be achieved through a gateway to any TMN system. 30 12. Concurrent - Multiple Operators & Administrators must be able to simultaneously perform operations from the ISP OS Interfaces. 8. Physical Model Principles. 1. Compatibility: The physical network model provides backward WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 compatibility for existing telecommunications hardware and software. 2. Scaleable: The physical network model is scaleable to accommodate a wide range of customer populations and service requirements. 3. Redundant: The physical network model provides multiple paths of 5 information flow across two network elements. Single points of failure are eliminated. 4. Transparent: Network elements is transparent to the underlying network redundancy. In case of a failure, the switchover to redundant links is automatic. 10 5. Graceful Degradation: The physical network model is able to provide available services in a gradual reduction of capacity in the face of multiple network failures. 6. Interoperable: The physical network model allows networks with different characteristics to interoperate with different network elements. 15 7. Secure: The physical network model requires and provides secure transmission of information. It also has capabilities to ensure secure access to network elements. 8. Monitoring: The physical network model provides well-defined interfaces and access methods for monitoring the traffic on the network. 20 Security (see above) is integrated to prevent unauthorized access to sensitive data. 9. Partitionable: The physical network model is (logically) partitionable to form separate administrative domains. 10. Quality of Service: The physical network model provides QOS 25 provisions such as wide range of qualities, adequate QOS for legacy applications, congestion management and user-selectable QOS. 11. Universal Access: The physical network model does not prevent access to a network element due to its location in the network. A service is able to access any resource on the network. 30 12. Regulatory awareness: The physical network model is amenable at all levels to allow for sudden changes in the regulatory atmosphere. 13. Cost Effective: The physical network model allows for cost effective implementations by not being reliant on single vendor platforms or specific standards for function.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 H. ISP Service This section describes the Service model of the Intelligent Services Platform Architecture Framework. 5 1. Purpose. The ISP Service Model establishes a framework for service development which supports: - rapid service creation and deployment; 10 - efficient service execution; - complete customization control over services for customers; e total service integration for a seamless service view for customers; - improved reuse of ISP capabilities through loose coupling of those capabilities; 15 - reduced cost of service implementation; and - vendor-independence. 2. Scope of Effort. The ISP Service Model supports all activities associated with Services, 20 including the following aspects: - provisioning; - creation; - deployment; - ordering; 25 - updating; - monitoring; - execution; - testing or simulation; - customer support and troubleshooting; 30 e billing; - trouble ticket handling; and - operations support. This model covers both marketable services and management services. 61T WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 - Marketable services are the services purchased by our customers e Management services are part of the operation of the MCI network, and are not sold to customers. 5 The Service Model also defines interactions with other parts of the ISP Architecture, including Data Management, Resource Management, and Operational Support. 3. Service Model Overview. 10 Central to the Intelligent Services Platform is the delivery of Services 2200 (Figure 24). Services are the most critical aspect in a telecommunication service provider's ability to make money. The following definition of services is used throughout this service model: A service 2200 is a set of capabilities combined with well-defined logic 15 structures and business processes which, when accessed through a published interface, results in a desired and expected outcome on behalf of the user. One of the major differences between a Service 2200 and an Application 20 2176 or 2178 (Figure 22) is that a Service 2200 includes the business processes that support the sale, operation, and maintenance of the Service. The critical task in developing a Service is defining what can be automated, and clearly delineating how humans interact with the Service. 25 4. Service Structure. The vocabulary we will use for describing services includes the services themselves, service features, and capabilities. These are structured in a three-tier hierarchy as shown in Figure 24. 30 A service 2200 is an object in a sense of an object-oriented object as described earlier in the specification. An instance of a service 2200 contains other objects, called service features 2202. A service feature 2202 provides a well defined interface which abstracts the controlled interaction of one or more capabilities 2204 in the ISP Service Framework, on behalf of 6 9 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 a service. Service features 2202, in turn, use various capability 2204 objects. Capabilities 2204 are standard, reusable, network-wide building blocks 5 used to create service features 2202. The key requirement in Service Creation is for the engineers who are producing basic capability objects to insure each can be reused in many different services as needed. a) Services 2200 Services 2200 are described by "service logic," which is basically a program 10 written in a very high-level programming language or described using a graphical user interface. These service logic programs identify: - what service features 2202 are used; - the order in which service features are invoked; e the source of input service data; 15 - the destination for output service data; - error values and error handling; - invocation of other services 2200; e interaction with other services; and o the interactions with other services; 20 The service logic itself is generally not enough to execute a service 2200 in the network. Usually, customer data is needed to define values for the points of flexibility defined in a service, or to customize the service for the customer's particular needs. Both Management and Marketable Services 25 are part of the same service model. The similarities between of Management and Marketable Services allow capabilities to be shared. Also, Management and Marketable Services represent two viewpoints of the same network: Management Services represent and operational view of the network, and Marketable Services represent an external end-user or 30 customer view of the network. Both kinds of services rely on network data which is held in common. Every Marketable Service has a means for a customer to order the service, a billing mechanism, some operational support capabilities, and service 6 ? WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 monitoring capabilities. The Management Services provide processes and supporting capabilities for the maintenance of the platform. b) Service Features 2202 5 Service features 2202 provide a well-defined interface of function calls. Service features can be reused in many different services 2200, just as capabilities 2204 are reused in many different service features 2202. Service features have specific data input requirements, which are derived from the data input requirements of the underlying capabilities. Data 10 output behavior of a service feature is defined by the creator of the service feature, based upon the data available from the underlying capabilities. Service Features 2202 do not rely on the existence of any physical resource, rather, they call on capabilities 2204 for these functions, as shown in Figure 25. 15 Some examples of service features are: - Time-based Routing - based on capabilities such as a calendar, date/time, and call objects, this feature allows routing to different locations based upon time. 20 - Authentication - based upon capabilities such as comparison and database lookup, this function can be used to validate calling card use by prompting for a card number and/or an access number (pin number), or to validate access to a virtual private network. - Automated User Interaction - based upon capabilities such as voice 25 objects (for recording and playback of voice), call objects (for transferring and bridging calls to specialized resources), DTMF objects (for collection or outpulsing of DTMF digits), vocabulary objects (for use with speech recognition), this feature allows automated interaction with the user of a service. This service 30 feature object can be extended to include capabilities for video interaction with a user as well. c) Capabilities 2204 A capability 2204 is an object, which means that a capability has internal, WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 private state data, and a well-defined interface for creating, deleting, and using instances of the capability. Invoking a capability 2204 is done by invoking one of its interface operations. Capabilities 2204 are built for reuse. As such, capabilities have clearly defined data requirements for 5 input and output structures. Also, capabilities have clearly defined error handling routines. Capabilities may be defined in object-oriented class hierarchies whereby a general capability may be inherited by several others. 10 Some examples of network-based capability objects are: - voice (for recording or playback), * call (for bridging, transferring, forwarding, dial-out, etc), . DTMF (for collection or outpulsing), and - Fax (for receive, send, or broadcast). 15 Some capabilities are not network-based, but are based purely on data that has been deployed into our platform. Some examples of these capabilities are: - calendar (to determine what day of the week or month it is), 20 - comparison (to compare strings of digits or characters), - translation (to translate data types to alternate formats), and - distribution (to choose a result based on a percentage distribution). d) Service Data 25 There are three sources for data while a service executes: - Static Data defined in the service template, which include default values for a given service invocation. - Interactive Data obtained as the service executes, which may be explicit user inputs or derived from the underlying network 30 connections. - Custom Data defined in User Profiles, which is defined by customers or their representatives when the service is requested (i.e. at creation time). .7' WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 5. Service 2200 Execution. Services 2200 execute in Service Logic Execution Environments (SLEEs). A SLEE is executable software which allows any of the services deployed into the ISP 2100 to be executed. In the ISP Architecture, Service Engines 5 2134 (Figure 21) provide these execution environments. Service Engines 2134 simply execute the services 2200 that are deployed to them. Service templates and their supporting profiles are deployed onto database servers 2182 (Figure 22). When a SLEE is started on a Service Engine 10 2134, it retrieves its configuration from the database server 2182. The configuration instructs the SLEE to execute a list of services 2200. The software for these services is part of the service templates deployed on the database servers. If the software is not already on the Service Engine 2134, the software is retrieved from the database server 2182. The 15 software is executed, and service 200 begins to run. In most cases a service 2200 will first invoke a service feature 2202 (Figure 24) which allows the service to register itself with a resource manager 2188 or 2190. Once registered, the service can begin accepting transactions. 20 Next, a service 2200 will invoke a service feature 2202 which waits on an initiating action. This action can be anything from an internet logon, to an 800 call, to a point of sale card validation data transaction. Once the initiating action occurs in the network, the service select function 2148 (Figure 21) uses the Resource Manager 2150 function to find an instance 25 of the executing service 2200 to invoke. The initiating action is delivered to the service 2200 instance, and the service logic (from the service template) determines subsequent actions by invoking additional service features 2202. 30 During service 2200 execution, profile data is used to determine the behavior of service features 2202. Depending on service performance requirements, some or all of the profile data needed by a service may be cached on a service engine 2134 from the ISP 2100 database server 2182 to prevent expensive remote database lookups. As the service executes, WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 information may generated by service features 2202 and deposited into the Context Database. This information is uniquely identified by a network transaction identifier. In the case of a circuit-switched call, the already defined Network Call Identifier will be used as the transaction identifier. 5 Additional information may be generated by network equipment and deposited into the Context Database as well, also indexed by the same unique transaction identifier. The final network element involved with the transaction deposits some end-of-transaction information into the Context Database. A linked list strategy is used for determining when all 10 information has been deposited into the Context Database for a particular transaction. Once all information has arrived, an event is generated to any service which has subscribed to this kind of event, and services may then operate on the data in the Context Database. Such operations may include extracting the data from the Context Database and delivering it to billing 15 systems or fraud analysis systems. 6. Service Interactions. In the course of a network transaction, more than one service can be invoked by the network. Sometimes, the instructions of one service may 20 conflict with the instructions of another service. Here's an example of such a conflict: a VNET caller has a service which does not allow the caller to place international calls. The VNET caller dials the number of another VNET user who has a service which allows international dialing, and the called VNET user places an international call, then bridges the first caller 25 with the international call. The original user was able to place an international call through a third party, in defiance of his company's intention to prevent the user from dialing internationally. In such circumstances, it may be necessary to allow the two services to interact with each other to determine if operation of bridging an international call 30 should be allowed. The ISP service model must enable services 2200 to interact with other services. There are several ways in which a service 2200 must be able to interact with other services (see Figure 26): 73 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 - Transfer of Control 2210: where a service has completed its execution path and transfers control to another service; - Synchronous Interaction 2212: where a service invokes another service and waits for a reply; 5 - Asynchronous Interaction 2214: where a service invokes another service, performs some other actions, then waits for the other service to complete and reply; or - One Way Interaction 2216: where a service invokes another service but does not wait for a reply. 10 In the example of interacting VNET services above, the terminating VNET service could have queried the originating VNET service using the synchronous service interaction capability. The interesting twist to this idea is that service logic can be deployed onto both network-based 15 platforms and onto customer premises equipment. This means that service interaction must take place between network-based services and customer based services. 7. Service Monitoring. 20 Services 2200 must be monitored from both the customer's viewpoint and the network viewpoint. Monitoring follows one of two forms: -The service 2200 can generate detailed event-by-event information for delivery to the transaction context database - The service can generate statistical information for delivery periodically to 25 a statistics database, or for retrieval on demand by a statistics database. Analysis services can use the Statistics Database or the Context Database to perform real time or near real time data analysis services. The Context Database collects all event information regarding a network 30 transaction. This information will constitute all information necessary for network troubleshooting, billing, or network monitoring. I. ISP Data Management Mode This section describes the Data Management 2138 aspects of the Intelligent WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Services Platform (ISP) 2100 Target Architecture. 1. Scope. The ISP Data Management 2138 Architecture is intended to establish a model which covers the creation, maintenance, and use of data in the 5 production environment of the ISP 2100, including all transfers of information across the ISP boundaries. The Data Management 2138 Architecture covers all persistent data, any copies or flows of such data within the ISP, and all flows of data across the 10 ISP boundaries. This model defines the roles for data access, data partitioning, data security, data integrity, data manipulation, plus database administration. It also outlines management policies when appropriate. 2. Purpose. 15 The objectives of this architecture are to: - Create a common ISP functional model for managing data; - Separate data from applications; - Establish patterns for the design of data systems; - Provide rules for systems deployment; 20 - Guide future technology selections; and - Reduce redundant developments and redundant data storage. Additional goals of the target architecture are: - Ensure data flexibility; 25 - Facilitate data sharing; - Institute ISP-wide data control and integrity; - Establish data security and protection; - Enable data access and use; - Provide high data performance and reliability; 30 * Implement data partitioning; and - Achieve operational simplicity. 3. Data management Overview. In one embodiment, the Data Management Architecture is a framework -4,6- WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 describing the various system components, how the systems interact, and the expected behaviors of each component. In this embodiment data is stored at many locations simultaneously, but a particular piece of data and all of its replicated copies are viewed logically as a single item. A key 5 difference in this embodiment is that the user (or end-point) dictates what data is downloaded or stored locally. a) Domains Data and data access are characterized by two domains 2220 and 2222, as 10 shown in Figure 27. Each domain can have multiples copies of data within it. Together, the domains create a single logical global database which can span international boundaries. The key aspect to the domain definitions below is that all data access is the same. There is no difference in an Order Entry feed from a Call Processing lookup or Network side data 15 update. Central domain 2220 controls and protects the integrity of the system. This is only a logical portrayal, not a physical entity. Satellite domain 2222 provides user access and update capabilities. This is only a logical 20 portrayal, not a physical entity. b) Partitions In general, Data is stored at many locations simultaneously. A particular 25 piece of data and all of its replicated copies are viewed logically as a single item. Any of these copies may be partitioned into physical subsets so that not all data items are necessarily at one site. However partitioning preserves the logical view of only one, single database. 30 c) Architecture The architecture is that of distributed databases and distributed data access with the following functionality: - Replication and Synchronization; - Partitioning of Data Files; WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 - Concurrency Controls; - Transactional Capability; and - Shared common Schemas. 5 Figure 28 shows logical system components and high-level information flows. None of the components depicted is physical. Multiple instances of each occur in the architecture. The elements in Figure 28 are: - NETWK 2224 - external access to the ISP 2100 from the network side; 10 - SVC I/F 2226 -the network interface into ISP; - SYSTMS 2228 - external application such as Order Entry; - G/W 2230 - a gateway to the ISP 2100 for external applications; - dbAppl 2232 - a role requiring data access or update capabilities; - dbClient 2234- the primary role of the satellite domain; 15 e dbServer 2236- the primary role of the central domain; - dbAdmin 2238- an administrative role for Data; e dbMon 2240- a monitoring role; - I/F Admin 2242 administrative role for interfaces; and - Ops 2244- operations console. 20 d) Information Flow The flows depicted in Figure 28 are logical abstractions; they are intended to characterize the type of information passing between the logical components. 25 The flows shown above are: - Rest - data requests to the ISP from external systems; - Resp -responses from the ISP to external requests; - Access - data retrieval by applications within the ISP; - Updates -data updates from applications within ISP; 30 - Evts, data related events sent to the monitor; - Meas - data related metrics sent to the monitor; - New Data -additions to ISP master data; - Changed Data changes to ISP master data; -Views - retrieving ISP master data; WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 - Subscriptions -asynchronous stream of ISP master data; - Cache copies- a snapshot copy of ISP master data; -Actions- any control activity; and - Controls any control data. 5 e) Domain Associations In general the Satellite domains 2222 of Data Management 2138 encompass: - ISP Applications; 10 - External systems - Network interfaces 2226 and system gateways 2230; and - Database client (dbClient) 2234. The Central domain for Data Management 2138 encompasses: 15 e Monitoring (dbMon) 2240; - Administration (dbAdmin) 2238; and - Database masters (dbServer) 2236 4. Logical Description . 20 The behavior of each Architecture component is described separately below: a) Data Applications (dbAppl) 2232 This includes any ISP applications which require database access. Examples are the ISN NIDS servers, and the DAP Transaction Servers, The 25 applications obtain their required data from the dbClient 2234 by attaching to the desired databases, and providing any required policy instructions. These applications also provide the database access on behalf of the external systems or network element such as Order Entry or Switch requested translations. Data applications support the following 30 functionality: - Updates: allow an application to insert, update, or delete data in an ISP database. - Access requests allow an application to search for data, list multiple items, select items from a list or set, or iterate through members of a set.

WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 -Events and Measurements are special forms of updates which are directed to the monitoring function (dbMon) 2240. 5 b) Data Management 2138 (1) Client Databases (dbClient) 2234 The dbClients represent satellite copies of data. This is the only way for an application to access ISP data. Satellite copies of data need not match the format of data as stored on the dbServer 2236. 10 The dbClients register with master databases (dbServer) 2236 for Subscriptions or Cache Copies of data. Subscriptions are automatically maintained by dbServer 2236, but Cache Copies must be refreshed when the version is out of date. 15 A critical aspect of dbClient 2234 is to ensure that data updates by applications are serialized and synchronized with the master copies held by dbServer 2236. However, it is just as reasonable for the dbClient to accept the update and only later synchronize the changes with the dbServer (at 20 which time exception notifications could be conveyed back to the originating application). The choice to update in lock-step, or not, is a matter of application policy not Data Management 2138. Only changes made to the dbServer master copies are forwarded to other 25 dbClients. If a dbClient 2234 becomes inactive or loses communications with the dbServer; it must resynchronize with the master. In severe cases, operator intervention may be required to reload an entire database or selected 30 subsets. The dbClient 2234 offers the following interface operations: - Attach by an authorized application to a specified set of data; - Policy preferences to be set by an authorized application; WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 - Select a specified view of the local copy of data; - Insert, Update, or Delete of the local copy of data; - Synchronize subscripted data with the dbServer; and - Expiration notifications from dbServer for cached data. 5 Additionally, the dbClients submit Logs or Reports and signal problems to the monitor (dbMon) 2240. (2) Data Masters (dbServer) 2236 The dbServers 2236 play a central role in the protection of data. This is 10 where data is 'owned' and master copies maintained. At least two copies of master data are maintained for reliability. Additional master copies may be deployed to improve data performance. These copies are synchronized in lock-step. That is each update is required 15 to obtain a corresponding master-lock in order to prevent update conflicts. The strict implementation policies may vary, but in general, all master copies must preserve serial ordering of updates, and provide the same view of data and same integrity enforcement as any other master copy. The internal copies of data are transparent to the dbClients 2234. 20 The dbServer 2236 includes the layers of business rules which describe or enforce the relationships between data items and which constrain particular data values or formats. Every data update must pass these rules or is rejected. In this way dbServer ensures all data is managed as a single 25 copy and all business rules are collected and applied uniformly. The dbServer 2236 tracks when, and what kind of, data changes are made, and provides logs and summary statistics to the monitor (dbMon) 2240. Additionally these changes are forwarded to any active subscriptions and 30 Cache-copies are marked out of date via expiration messages. The dbServer also provides security checks and authorizations, and ensures that selected items are encrypted before storage. The dbServer supports the following interface operations: 6 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 -View selected data from dbServer; - Subscribe to selected data from dbServer; - Copy selected data into a cache-copy at a dbClient 2234; - Refresh a dbClient cache with the current copy on demand; 5 - New data insertion across all dbServer copies of the master; - Change data attributes across all dbServer copies; and - Cancel previous subscriptions and drop cache-copies of data. (3) Data Administration (dbAdmin) 2238 10 Data Administration (dbAdmin) 2238 involves setting data policy, managing the logical and physical aspect of the databases, and securing and configuring the functional components of the Data Management 2138 domain. Data Management policies include security, distribution, integrity rules, performance requirements, and control of replications and partitions. 15 dbAdmin 2238 includes the physical control of data resources such as establishing data locations, allocating physical storage, allocating memory, loading data stores, optimizing access paths, and fixing database problems. dbAdmin 2238 also provides for logical control of data such as auditing, reconciling, migrating, cataloguing, and converting data. 20 The dbAdmin 2238 supports the following interface operations: - Define the characteristics of a data type; - Create logical containers of given dimensions; - Relate two or more containers through an association; 25 - Constrain data values or relations through conditional triggers and actions; - Place physical container for data in a given location; - Move physical containers for data to new locations; - Remove physical containers and their data; 30 - Load data from one container to another; - Clear the data contents of a container; and -Verify or reconcile the data contents of a container. (4) Data Monitoring (dbMon) 2240 9/ WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 The dbMon 2240 represents a monitoring function which captures all data related events and statistical measurements from the ISP boundary gateways, dbClients 2234 and dbServers 2236. The dbMon 2240 mechanisms are used to create audit trails and logs. 5 The dbMon typically presents a passive interface; data is fed to it. However monitoring is a hierarchical activity and further analysis and roll-up (compilation of data collected at intervals, such as every minute, into longer time segments, such as hours or days) occurs within dbMon. Additionally 10 dbMon will send alerts when certain thresholds or conditions are met. The rate and count of various metrics are used for evaluating quality of Service (QOS) , data performance, and other service level agreements. All exceptions and date errors are logged and flow to the dbMon for inspection, 15 storage, and roll-up. dbMon 2240 supports the following interface operations: - Setting monitor controls, filters, and thresholds; - Logging of data related activity; 20 * Reports of status, metrics, or audit results; and - Signaling alarms, or alerts. (5) Data Management operations (Ops) 2244 The Operations consoles (Ops) 2244 provide the workstation-interface for 25 the personnel monitoring, administering, and otherwise managing the system. The Ops consoles provide access to the operations interfaces for dbMon 2240, dbAdmin 2238, and dbServer 2236 described above. The Ops consoles 2244 also support the display of dynamic status through icon based maps of the various systems, interfaces, and applications within the 30 Data management domain 2138. 5. Physical Description. This section describes the Data Management 2138 physical architecture. It describes how a set of components could be deployed. A generalized WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 deployment view is shown in Figure 29. In Figure 29: e circles are used to represent physical sites, - boxes or combined boxes are computer nodes, and - functional roles are indicated by abbreviations. 5 The abbreviations used in Figure 29 are: - OE - order entry systems 2250; - GW - ISP gateway 2230; - APP - application (dbAppl) 2232; 10 - CL- a dbClient 2234; - SVR- a dbServer 2236; - ADM- a dbAdmin component 2238; - MON- a dbMon component 2240; and - Ops - operations console. 15 The functional roles of these elements were described above (see Logical Description of the Target Architecture) in connection with Figure 28. Each of the sites shown in Figure 29 is typically linked with one or more of the other sites by wide area network (WAN) links. The exact network 20 configuration and sizing is left to a detailed engineering design task. It is not common for a database copy to be distributed to the Order Entry (OE) sites 2251, however in this architecture, entry sites are considered equivalent to satellite sites and will contain the dbClient functionality. 25 On the network-side of the ISP 2100, Satellite sites 2252 each contain the dbClient 2234 too. These sites typically operate local area networks (LANs). The dbClients act as local repositories for network or system applications such as the ISN operator consoles, ARUs, or NCS switch requested translations. 30 The Central sites 2254 provide redundant data storage and data access paths to the dbClients 2234. Central sites 2254 also provide roll-up monitoring (dbMon) functions although dbMon components 2240 could be deployed at satellite sites 2252 for increased performance.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 The administrative functions are located at any desired operations or administration site 2254 but not necessarily in the same location as the dbMon. Administrative functions require the dbAdmin 2238, plus an 5 operations console 2244 for command and control. Remote operations sites are able to access the dbAdmin nodes 2238 from wide-area or local area connections. Each of the sites is backed-up by duplicate functional components at other sites and are connected by diverse, redundant links. 10 6. Technology Selection. The following section describes the various technology options which should be considered. The Data Management 2138 architecture does not require any particular technology to operate; however different technology choices will impact the resulting performance of the system. 15 Figure 30 depicts a set of technologies which are able to provide a very-high performance environment. Specific application requirements will determine the minimum level of acceptable performance. Three general environments are shown. 20 - In the upper part, a multi-protocol routed network 2260 connects external and remote elements with the central data sites. Administrative terminals, and smaller mid-range computers are shown, plus a high-availability application platform such as Order Entry. 25 - In the center are large-scale high-performance machines 2262 with large data-storage devices; these would be typical of master databases and data processing, and data capture/tracking functions such as dbServer 2236 and dbMon 2240. 30 - In the lower part of the diagram are local area processing and network interfaces 2264, such as the ISN operator centers or DAP sites. 7. Implementations.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 While much is known of the current ISP data systems, additional detailed requirements are necessary before any final implementations are decided. These requirements must encompass existing ISN, NCS, EVS, NIA, and TMN system needs, plus all of the new products envisioned for Broadband, 5 Internet, and Switchless applications. 8. Security. ISP data is a protected corporate resource. Data access is restricted and authenticated. Data related activity is tracked and audited. Data 10 encryption is required for all stored passwords, PINS (personal identification numbers), private personnel records, and selected financial, business, and customer information. Secured data must not be transmitted in clear-text forms. 15 9. Meta-Data . Meta-data is a form of data which comprises the rules for data driven logic. Meta-data is used to describe and manage (i.e. manipulate) operational forms of data. Under this architecture, as much control as possible is intended to be driven by meta-data. Meta-data (or data-driven logic) 20 generally provides the most flexible run-time options. Meta-data is typically under the control of the system administrators. 10. Standard Database Technologies. Implementation of the proposed Data Management Architecture should 25 take advantage of commercially available products whenever possible. Vendors offer database technology, replication services, Rules systems, Monitoring facilities, Console environments, and many other attractive offerings. 30 J. ISP Resource Management Model This section describes the Resource Management 2150 Model as it relates to the ISP 2100 Architecture. a) Scope WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 The Resource Management Model covers the cycle of resource allocation and de-allocation in terms of the relationships between a process that needs a resource, and the resource itself. This cycle starts with Resource Registration and De-registration and continues to Resource Requisition, 5 Resource Acquisition, Resource Interaction and Resource Release. b) Purpose The Resource Management 2150 Model is meant to define common architectural guidelines for the ISP development community in general, and 10 for the ISP Architecture in particular. c) Objectives In the existing traditional ISP architecture, services control and manage their own physical and logical resources. Migration to an architecture that 15 abstracts resources from services requires defining a management functionality that governs the relationships and interactions between resources and services. This functionality is represented by the Resource Management 2150 Model. The objectives of the Resource Management Model are designed to allow for 20 network-wide resource management and to optimize resource utilization, to enable resource sharing across the network: - Abstract resources from services; - Provide real-time access to resource status; - Simplify the process of adding and removing resources; 25 - Provide secure and simple resource access; and - Provide fair resource acquisition, so that no one user of resources may monopolize the use of resources. d) Background Concepts 30 Generally, the Resource Management 2150 Model governs the relationships and interactions between the resources and the processes that utilize them. Before the model is presented, a solid understanding of the basic terminology and concepts used to explain the model should be established. The following list presents these terms and concepts: 356 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 (1) Definitions - Resource: A basic unit of work that provides a specific and well defined capability when invoked by an external process. Resources 5 can be classified as logical, like a service engine and a speech recognition algorithm, or physical, like CPU, Memory and Switch ports. A resource may be Shared like an ATM link bandwidth or Disk space, or Dedicated like a VRU or a Switch port. * Resource Pool: A set of registered resource members that share 10 common capabilities. - Service: A logical description of all activities and the interaction flow between the user of the network resources and the resources themselves. - Policy: A set of rules that governs the actions taken on resource 15 allocation and de-allocation, resource pool size thresholds and resource utilization thresholds. "' (2) Concepts - The Resource Management Model is a mechanism which governs 20 and allows a set of functions to request, acquire and release resources to/from a resource pool through well-defined procedures and policies. The resource allocation and de-allocation process involves three phases: - Resource Requisition is the phase in which a process requests a 25 resource from the Resource Manager 2150. - Resource Acquisition: If the requested resource is available and the requesting process has the privilege to request it, the Resource Manager 2150 will grant the resource and the process can utilize it. 30 Otherwise, the process has the choice to either abandon the resource allocation process and may try again later, or it may request that the Resource Manager 2150 grant it the resource whenever it becomes available or within a specified period.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Resource Release: The allocated resource should be put back into the resource pool once the process no longer needs it. Based on the resource type, the process either releases the resource and the resource informs the Resource Manager of its new status, or the 5 process itself informs the Resource Manager that the resource is available. In either case, the Resource Manager will restore the resource to the resource pool. The Resource Management Model allows for the creation of resource pools 10 and the specification of the policies governing them. The Resource Management Model allows resources to register and de-register as legitimate members of resource pools. Resource Management Model policies enforce load balancing, failover and 15 least cost algorithms and prevent services from monopolizing resources. The Resource Management Model tracks resource utilization and automatically takes corrective action when resource pools are not sufficient to meet demand. Any service should be able to access and utilize any available resource across the network as long as it has the privilege to do 20 so. The Resource Management Model adopted the OSI Object Oriented approach for modeling resources. Under this model, each resource is represented by a Managed Object (MO). Each MO is defined in terms of the 25 following aspects: - Attributes: The attributes of a MO represent its properties and are used to describe its characteristics and current states. Each attribute is a associated with a value, for example the value CURRENTSTATE attribute of a MO could be IDLE. 30 - Operations: Each MO has a set of operations that are allowed to be performed on it. These operations are: - Create: to create a new MO - Delete: to delete an existing MO - Action: to perform a specific operation such as SHUTDOWN.

WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 - Get Value: to obtain a specific MO attribute value e Add Value: to add specific MO attribute value - Remove Value: to delete a specific MO attribute value from a set of values. 5 - Replace Value: to replace an existing MO attribute value(s) with a new one. - Set Value: to set a specific MO attribute to its default value. - Notification: Each MO can report or notify its status to the management entity. This could be viewed as triggers or traps. 10 - Behavior: The behavior of an MO is represented by how it reacts to a specific operation and the constraints imposed on this reaction. The MO may react to either external stimuli or internal stimuli. An external stimuli is represented by a message that carries an operation. The internal stimuli, however, is an internal event that 15 occurred to the MO like the expiration of a timer. A constraint on how the MO should react to the expired timer may be imposed by specifying how many times the timers has to expire before the MO can report it. 20 All elements that need to utilize, manipulate or monitor a resource need to treat it as a MO and need to access it through the operations defined above. Concerned elements that need to know the status of a resource need to know how to receive and react to events generated by that resource. 25 Global and Local Resource Management: The Resource Management Model is hierarchical with at least two levels of management: Local Resource Manager (LRM) 2190 and Global Resource Manager (GRM) 2188. Each RM, Local and Global, has its own domain and 30 functionality. 2. The Local Resource Manager (LRM):. - Domain: The domain of the LRM is restricted to a specific resource pool (RP) that belongs to a specific locale of the network. Multiple 89C WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 LRMs could exist in a single locale, each LRM may be responsible for managing a specific resource pool. - Function: The main functionality of the LRM is to facilitate the resource allocation and de-allocation process between a process and 5 a resource according the Resource Management Model guidelines. 3. The Global Resource Manager (GRM) 2188:. - Domain: The domain of the GRM 2188 covers all registered 10 resources in all resource pools across the network. - Function: The main function of the GRM is to help the LRM 2190 locate a resource that is not available in the LRM domain. Figure 31 illustrates the domains of the GRM 2188 and LRM 2190 within 15 network 2270. 4. The Resource Management Model (RMM). The Resource Management Model is based on the concept of Dynamic 20 Resource Allocation as opposed to Static Configuration. The Dynamic Resource Allocation concept implies that there is no pre-defined static relationship between resources and the processes utilizing them. The allocation and de-allocation process is based on supply and demand. The Resource Managers 2150 will be aware of the existence of the resources 25 and the processes needing resources can acquire them through the Resource Managers 2150. On the other hand, Static Configuration implies a pre-defined relationship between each resource and the process that needs it. In such a case, there is no need for a management entity to manage these resources. The process dealing with the resources can 30 achieve that directly. Dynamic Resource Allocation and Static Configuration represent the two extremes of the resource management paradigms. Paradigms that fall between these extremes may exist. The Resource Management Model describes the behavior of the LRM 2190 Y0 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 and GRM 2188 and the logical relationships and interactions between them. It also describes the rules and policies that govern the resource allocation and de-allocation process between the LRM/GRM and the processes needing the resources. 5 a) Simple Resource Management Model Realizing that resource allocation and de-allocation could involve a complex process, a simple form of this process is presented here as an introduction to the actual model. Simple resource allocation and de-allocation is 10 achieved through six steps. Figure 32 depicts these steps. 1. A process 2271 requests the resource 2173 from the resource manager 2150. 2. The resource manager 2150 allocates the resource 2173. 3. The resource manager 2150 grants the allocated resource 2173 to 15 the requesting process 2271. 4. The process 2271 interacts with the resource 2273. 5. When the process 2271 is finished with the resource 2273, it informs the resource. 6. The resource 2273 releases itself back to the resource manager 20 2150. b) The Resource Management Model Logical Elements: The Resource Management Model is represented by a set of logical elements 25 that interact and co-operate with each other in order to achieve the objectives mentioned earlier. These elements are shown in Figure 33 and include: Resource Pool (RP) 2272, LRM 2190, GRM 2188 and Resource Management Information Base (RMIB) 2274. 30 (1) Resource Pool (RP) 2272 All resources that are of the same type, share common attributes or provide the same capabilities, and are located in the same network locale may be logically grouped together to form a Resource Pool (RP) 2272. Each RP will have its own LRM 2190. 9/ WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 (2) The Local Resource Manager (LRM) 2190 The LRM 2190 is the element that is responsible for the management of a specific RP 2272. All processes that need to utilize a resource from a RP 5 that is managed by a LRM should gain access to the resource through that LRM and by using the simple Resource Management Model described above. (3) The Global Resource Manager (GRM) 2188 10 The GRM 2188 is the entity that has a global view of the resource pools across the network. The GRM gains this global view through the LRMs 2190. All LRMs update the GRM with RP 2272 status and statistics. There are cases where a certain LRM can not allocate a resource because all local resources are busy or because the requested resource belongs to 15 another locale. In such cases, the LRM can consult with the GRM to locate the requested resource across the network. (4) The Resource Management Information Base (RMIB) 2274 20 As mentioned above, all resources will be treated as managed objects (MO). The RMIB 2274 is the database that contains all the information about all MOs across the network. MO information includes object definition, status, operation, etc. The RMIB is part of the ISP Data Management Model. All LRMs and the GRM can access the RMIB and can have their own view and 25 access privileges of the MO's information through the ISP Data Management Model. 5. Component Interactions. To perform their tasks, the Resource Management Model elements must 30 interact and co-operate within the rules, policies and guidelines of the Resource Management Model. The following sections explain how these entities interact with each other. a) Entity Relationship (ER) Diagram (Figure 33): 112 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 In Figure 33, each rectangle represents one entity, the verb between the "<>" implies the relationship between two entities and the square brackets "[]" imply that the direction of the relationship goes from the bracketed number to the non bracketed one. The numbers imply is the relationship is 5 1-to-1, 1-to-many or many-to-many. Figure 33 can be read as follows: 1. One LRM 2190 manages one RP 2272. 2. Many LRMs 2190 access the RMIB 2274. 3. Many LRMs 2190 access the GRMs 2188. 10 4. Many GRMs 2188 access the RMIB 2274. b) Registration and De-registration Resource registration and de-registration applies only on the set of resources that have to be dynamically managed. There are some cases 15 where resources are statically assigned. LRMs 2190 operate on resource pools 2272 where each resource pool contains a set of resource members. In order for the LRM to manage a certain resource, the resource has to inform the LRM of its existence and 20 status. Also, the GRM 2188 needs to be aware of the availability of the resources across the network in order to be able to locate a certain resource. The following registration and de-registration guidelines should be applied on all resources that are to be dynamically managed: - All resources must register to their LRM 2190 as members of a 25 specific resource pool 2272. - All resources must de-register from their LRM 2190 if, for any reason, they need to shutdown or be taken out of service. - All resources must report their availability status to their LRM 2190. 30 * All LRMs must update the GRM 2188 with the latest resource availability based on the registered and de-registered resources. c) GRM, LRM and RP Interactions Every RP 2272 will be managed by an LRM 2190. Each process that needs 9?3 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 a specific resource type will be assigned an LRM that will facilitate the resource access. When the process needs a resource it must request it through its assigned LRM. When the LRM receives a request for a resource, two cases may occur: 5 1. Resource is available: In this case, the LRM allocates a resource member of the pool and passes a resource handle to the process. The process interacts with the resource until it is done with it. Based on the resource type, once the process is done with the resource, it either informs the resource that it is done with it, and the resource itself informs its LRM 10 that it is available, or it releases the resource and informs the LRM that it is no longer using the resource. 2. Resource is not available: In this case, the LRM 2190 consults with the GRM 2188 for an external resource pool that contains the requested resource. If no external resource is available, the LRM informs the 15 requesting process that no resources are available. In this case, the requesting process may: - give up and try again, * request that the LRM allocate the resource whenever it becomes available, or 20 - request that the LRM allocates the resource if it becomes available within a specified period of time. If an external resource is available, the GRM 2188 passes location and access information to the LRM 2190. Then the LRM either: 25 * allocates the resource on the behalf of the requesting process and passes a resource handle to it (In this case the resource allocation through the GRM is transparent to the process), or - advises the requesting process to contact the LRM that manages the located resource. 30 d) GRM, LRM and RMIB Interactions The RMIB 2274 contains all information and status of all managed resources across the network. Each LRM 2190 will have a view of the RMIB 274 that maps to the RP 2272 it manages. The GRM 2188, on the WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 other hand, has a total view of all resources across the network. This view consists of all LRMs views. The GRM's total view enables it to locate resources across the network. 5 In order for the RMIB 2274 to keep accurate resource information, each LRM 2190 must update the RMIB with the latest resource status. This includes adding resources, removing resources and updating resource states. 10 Both the LRM 2190 and GRM 2188 can gain their access and view of the RMIB 2274 through the ISP Data Management entity. The actual management of the RMIB data belongs to the ISP Data Management entity. The LRM and GRM are only responsible for updating the RMIB. 15 K. Operational Support Model 1. Introduction. Most of the existing ISP service platforms were developed independently, each with it's own set of Operational Support features. The amount of time required to learn how to operate a given set of platforms increases with the 20 number of platforms. The ISP service platforms need to migrate to an architecture with a common model for all of its Operational Support features across all of its products. This requires defining a model that will support current needs and will withstand or bend to the changes that will occur in the future. The Operational Support Model (OSM) defines a 25 framework for implementation of management support for the ISP 2100. a) Purpose The purpose of the Operational Support Model is to: - achieve operational simplicity by integrating the management platform for 30 ISP resources; -reduce the learning curve for operational personnel by providing a common management infrastructure; - reduce the cost of management systems by reducing overlapping management system development; WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 -improve time to market for ISP services by providing a common management infrastructure for all of the ISP services and network elements; and - provide a framework for managing ISP physical resources (hardware) and 5 logical resources (software). b) Scope The OSM described here provides for the distributed management of ISP physical network elements and the services that run on them. The 10 management framework described herein could also be extended to the management of logical (software) resources. However, the architecture presented here will help map utilization and faults on physical resources to their resulting impact on services. The management services occur within four layers 15 - Planning, - Service Management, -Network Layers, and - Network Elements. Information within the layers falls into four functional areas: 20 - Configuration Management, - Fault Management, - Resource Measurement, and -Accounting. The use of a common Operational Support Model for all of the ISP will 25 enhance the operation of the ISP, and simplify the designs of future products and services within the ISP. This operational support architecture is consistent with the ITU Telecommunications Management Network (TMN) standards. 30 c) Definitions Managed Object: A resource that is monitored, and controlled by one or more management systems Managed objects are located within managed systems and may be embedded in other managed objects. A managed object may be a logical or physical resource, and a resource may be 96 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 represented by more than one managed object (more than one view of the object). Managed System: One or more managed objects. Management Sub-Domain: A Management domain that is wholly located 5 within a parent management domain. Management System: An application process within a managed domain which effects monitoring and control functions on managed objects and/or management sub-domains. Management Information Base: A MIB contains information about 10 managed objects. Management Domain: A collection of one or more management systems, and zero or more managed systems and management sub-domains. Network Element: The Telecommunications network consist of many types of analog and digital telecommunications equipment and associated 15 support equipment, such as transmission systems, switching systems, multiplexes, signaling terminals, front-end processors, mainframes, cluster controllers, file servers, LANs, WANs, Routers, Bridges, Gateways, Ethernet Switches, Hubs, X.25 links, SS7 links, etc. When managed, such equipment is generally referred to as a network element (NE). 20 Domain: The management environment may be partition in a number a ways such as functionally (fault, service....), geographical, organizational structure, etc. Operations Systems: The management functions are resident in the Operations System. 25 2. The Operational Support Model. Figure 34 shows the four management layers 2300, 2302, 2304 and 2306 of the Operational Support Model 2308 over the network elements 2310. The Operational Support Model 2308 supports the day to day management 30 of the ISP 2100. The model is organized along three dimensions. Those dimensions are the layers 2300-2306, the functional area within those layers, and the activities that provide the management services. Managed objects (a resource) are monitored, controlled, and altered by the management system. 1?7 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 a) The Functional Model The following sections describe the functional areas as they occur within the management layers 2300-2306. 5 (1) Planning The ISP Planning Layer 2300 is the repository for data collected about the ISP 2100, and the place where that data is to provide additional value. - Configuration Management 2312: Setting of policy, and goals. 10 - Fault Management 2314: Predicting of mean time to failure. - Resource Measurement 2316: Predicting future resource needs (trending, capacity, service agreement compliance, maintenance agreement, work force). - Accounting: Determine cost of providing services in order to support 15 service pricing decisions. (2) Service Management The Service Ordering, Deployment, Provisioning, Quality of Service agreements, and Quality of service monitoring are in the ISP Service 20 Management layer 2302. Customers will have a restricted view of the SM layer 2302 to monitor and control their services. The SM layer provides a manager(s) that interacts with the agents in the NLMs. The SM layer also provides an agent(s) that interacts with the manager(s) in the Planning layer 2300. Managers within the SM layer may also interact with other 25 managers in the SM layer. In that case there are manager-agent relationships at the peer level. - Configuration Management 2320: Service Definition, Service Activation, Customer Definition, Customer Activation, Service Characteristics, Customer Characteristics, hardware provisioning, software provisioning, 30 provisioning of other data or other resources. - Fault Management 2322: Monitor and report violations of service agreement. Testing. - Resource Measurement 2324: Predict the violation of a service agreement and flag potential resource shortages. Predict the needs of current and WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 future (trending) services. -Accounting 2326: Process and forward Accounting information. Network Layer Management: 5 The ISP Network Layer Management (NLM) Layer 2304 has the responsibility for the management of all the network elements, as presented by the Element Management, both individually and as a set. It is not concerned with how a particular element provides services internally. The NLM layer 2304 provides a manager(s) that interacts with the agents in the 10 EMs 2306. The NLM layer also provides an agent(s) that interacts with the manager(s) in the SM layer 2302. Managers within the NLM layer 2304 may also interact other managers in the NLM layer. In that case there are manager agent relationships at the peer level. - Configuration Management 2328 provides functions to define the 15 characteristics of the local and remote resources and services from a network wide perspective. - Fault Management 2330 provides functions to detect, report, isolate, and correct faults that occur across multiple NEs. - Resource Measurement 2332 provides for the network wide measurement, 20 analysis, and reporting of resource utilization from a capacity perspective. - Accounting 2334 consolidates Accounting information from multiple sources. (3) Element Management 25 The Element Management Layer 2306 is responsible for the NEs 2310 on an individual basis and supports an abstraction of the functions provided by the NEs The EM layer 2306 provides a manager(s) that interact with the agents in the NEs. The EM layer also provides an agent(s) that interact with the manager(s) in the NLM layer 2304. Managers within the EM layer 30 2306 may also interact other managers in the EM layer. In that case there are manager agent relationships at the peer level. - Configuration Management 2336 provides functions to define the characteristics of the local and remote resources and services.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 - Fault Management 2338 provides functions to detect, report, isolate, and correct faults. - Resource Measurement 2340 provides for the measurement, analysis, and reporting of resource utilization from a capacity perspective. 5 - Accounting 2342 provides for the measurement and reporting of resource utilization from an accounting perspective. b) Network Element The computers, processes, switches, VRUs, internet gateways, and other 10 equipment that provide the network capabilities are Network Elements 2310. NEs provide agents to perform operations on the behalf of the Element Management Layer 2306. c) Information Model 15 Figure 35 shows manager agent interaction. Telecommunications network management is a distributed information application process. It involves the interchange of management information between a distributed set of management application processes for the purpose of monitoring and controlling the network resources (NE) 2310. For the purpose of this 20 exchange of information the management processes take on the role of either manager 2350 or agent 2352. The manager 2350 role is to direct management operation requests to the agent 2352, receive the results of an operation, receive event notification, and process the received information. The role of the agent 2352 is to respond to the manager's 25 request by performing the appropriate operation on the managed objects 2354, and directing any responses or notifications to the manager. One manager 2350 may interact with many agents 2352, and the agent may interact with more than one manager. Managers may be cascaded in that a higher level manager acts on managed objects through a lower level 30 manager. In that case the lower level manager acts in both manager and agent roles. 3. The Protocol Model. a) Protocols I 0 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 The exchange of information between manager and agent relies on a set of communications protocols. TMN, which offers a good model, uses the Common Management Information Services (CMIS) and Common Management Information Protocol (CMIP) as defined in Recommendations 5 X.710, and X.71 1. This provides a peer-to-peer communications protocol based on ITU's Application Common Service Element (X.217 service description & X.227 protocol description) and Remote Operation Service Element (X.219 service description & X.229 protocol description). FTAM is also supported as an upper layer protocol for file transfers. The use of 10 these upper layer protocols is described in Recommendation X.812. The transport protocols are described in Recommendation X.81 1. Recommendation X.811 also describes the interworking between different lower layer protocols. This set of protocols is referred to as Q3. 15 b) Common context In order to share information between processes there needs to be a common understanding of the interpretation of the information exchanged. ASN. 1 (X.209) with BER could be used to develop this common understanding for all PDU exchanged between the management processes 20 (manager/ agent). c) Services of the upper layer The following identifies the minimum services required of the service layer and is modeled after the TMN CMIS services. 25 SET: To add, remove, or replace the value of an attribute. GET: To read the value of an attribute. CANCEL-GET: To cancel a previously issued GET. ACTION: To request an object to perform a certain action. 30 CREATE: To create an object. DELETE: To remove an object. EVENT-REPORT: Allows the network resource to announce an event. 4. The Physical Model. 01 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Figure 36 shows the ISP 2100 physical model. 5. Interface Points . Mediation Device 2360 provides conversion from one information model to 5 the ISP information model. Gateways 2362 are used to connect to management systems outside of the ISP. These gateways will provide the necessary functions for operation with both ISP compliant systems, and non-compliant systems. The gateways may contain mediation devices 2360. Figure 36 identifies nine interface points. The protocols associated 10 with those interface points are: 1. There are two upper layer protocols. The protocol for communications with the workstation and the ISP upper layer for all other operational support communications. The lower layer is TCP/IP over Ethernet. 15 2. The upper layer is the protocol for communications with workstation 2364, and the lower layer is TCP/IP over Ethernet. 3,4. The upper layer is the ISP upper layer, and the lower layer is TCP/IP 20 over Ethernet. 5. The proprietary protocols are the of legacy systems that are not compatible with the supported interfaces. Equipment that provides a Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) interface will be supported 25 with Mediation Devices. 6,7,8,9. Gateways by their nature will support ISP compliant and non compliant interfaces. Gateways to enterprise internal systems could include such as the Order Entry system, or an enterprise wide TMN system. 30 The ISP Realization of the Operational Support Model Figure 37 shows operational support realization. 102_ WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 6. General. The Operational Support Model provides a conceptual framework for building the Operational Support System. Figure 37 represents an ISP realization of this conceptual model. In this implementation of that model 5 all the ISP Network Elements would be represented to the Operational Support System by a Management Information Base (MIB) 2370 and the agent process that acts upon the objects in the MIB. Field support personnel have two levels from which the ISP 2100 will be 10 managed. 1. For trouble-shooting, the Network Layers Manager 2372 gives field support a picture of the ISP as a whole. The process of detecting, isolating, and correcting problems begins from there. From that layer, problems could be isolated to a single Network Element. Individual Network 15 Elements are accessible from the Network Element Managers 2374 and would allow a more detailed level of monitoring, control, configuration, and testing. The centralized view of the ISP is missing from today's ISP, but many recognize its importance. 20 For configuration the Network Layers Manager 2370 provides an ISP-wide view, and interacts with the Network Element Managers 2374 to configure Network Elements in a consistent manner. This will help insure that the ISP configuration is consistent across all platforms. The ability to change a piece of information in one place and have it automatically distributed 25 ISP- wide is a powerful tool that has not been possible with the current ISP management framework. Once a service definition has been created from the Service Creation Environment 2376, the Service Manager 2378 is used to place it in the ISP 30 network, and provision the network for the new service. Customers for a service are provisioned through the Service Manager 2378. As a part of provisioning customers the Service Manager predicts resource utilization, and determines if new resources need to be added to handle the customer's use of a service. It uses the current utilization statistics as a basis for that I o3 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 determination. Once a customer is activated, the Service Manager monitors the customer's usage of the service to determine if the quality of service agreement is being met. As customer utilization of the services increases the Service Manager 2378 predicts the need to add resources to the ISP 5 network. This Service Management, with appropriate restrictions, can be extended to customers as another service. While Service Creation is the talk of the IN world, it needs a Service Manager that is integrated with the rest of the system, and that is one of the purposes of this model. 10 Finally, for planning personnel (non-field support), the Planning Manager 2380 analyzes the ISP-wide resource utilization to determine future needs, and to allocate cost to different services to determine the cost of a service as the basis for future service pricing. 15 L. Physical Network Model 1. Introduction. This section describes the Physical Network aspects of the Intelligent Services Platform (ISP) 2100 Architecture. 20 a) Purpose The Physical Network Model covers the: - Logical Architecture Mapping; - Information Flows; and - Platform Deployment in the production environment of the architecture. 25 b) Scope This model defines the terminology associated with the physical network, describes the interactions between various domains and provides examples of realizations of the architecture. 30 c) Objectives The objectives of this model are to: - Create a model for identifying various network platforms; e Classify Information Flow; - Provide standard nomenclature; I O 4 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 - Provide rules for systems deployment; and - Guide future technology selections. 2. Information Flow. 5 One of the key aspects of the intelligent network (IN) is the Information Flow across various platforms installed in the network. By identifying types of information and classifying them, the network serves the needs of IN. Customers interact with IN in a series of call flows. Calls may be audio 10 centric (as in the conventional ISP products), multimedia-based (as in internetMCI user using the web browser), video-based (as in video-on demand) or a combination of contents. Information can be classified as follows: 15 * Content; - Signaling; or - Data. Normally, a customer interacting with the intelligent network will require all three types of information flows. 20 a) Content Content flows contain the primary information being transported. Examples of this are analog voice, packet switched data, streamed video and leased line traffic. This is customer's property that IN must deliver 25 with minimum loss, minimum latency and optimal cost. The IN elements are standardized such that the transport fabric supports more connectivity suites, in order to allow content to flow in the same channels with flow of other information. 30 b) Signaling Signaling flows contain control information used by network elements. ISUP RLT/IMT, TCP/IP domain name lookups and ISDN Q.931 are all instances of this. The IN requires, uses and generates this information. Signaling information coordinates the various network platforms and allows t 03 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 intelligent call flow across the network. In fact, in a SCE-based IN, service deployment will also require signaling information flowing across the fabric. c) Data 5 Data flows contain information produced by a call flow, including crucial billing data records often produced by the fabric and certain network platforms. 3. Terminology. 10 Network: A set of interconnected network elements capable of transporting content, signaling and/or data. MCI's IXC switch fabric, the ISP extended WAN, and the Internet backbone are classic examples of networks. Current installations tend to carry different contents on different networks, each of which is specialized for specific content transmission. Both technology and 15 customer requirements (for on-demand high bandwidth) will require carriers to use more unified networks for the majority of the traffic. This will require the fabric to allow for different content characteristics and protocols along the same channels. Another aspect of this will be more uniform content-independent signaling. 20 Site: A set of physical entities collocated in a geographically local area. In the current ISP architecture, instances of sites are Operator Center, ISNAP Site (which also has ARU's) and an EVS site. By the very definition, the NT and DSC switches are NOT part of the site. They are instead part of the Transport Network (see below). In the architecture, a group of 25 (geographically collocated) Service Engines (SE), Special Resources (SR), Data Servers (DS) along with Network Interfaces and Links form a site. Network Element: A physical entity connecting to the Transport Networks through Network Interfaces. Examples of this are ACP, EVS SIP, MTOC, Videoconference Reservation Server, DAP Transaction Server, and NAS. In 30 the next few years, elements such as web servers, voice authentication servers, video streamers and network call record stores will join the present family of network elements. Network Interface: Equipment enabling connectivity of Network Elements to the Transport Networks. DS1 CSU/DSU, l0BaseT Ethernet interface to6 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 card and ACD ports are network interfaces. With the architecture of the preferred embodiment, network interfaces will provide a well-understood uniform set of API's for communication. Link: Connection between 2 or more Network Interfaces which are at 5 different sites. A link may be a segment of OC-12 SONET Fiber or 100mbps dual ring FDDI section. In the coming years, IN must handle network links such as ISO Ethernet WAN hub links and gigabit rate OC 48's. Connection: an attachment of two or more Network Interfaces which are at 10 the same site. Figure 38 shows a representation of a physical network 2400 schematic. Networks 2401 contain network elements 2402 at sites 2404 are interconnected through network interfaces 2406 and one or more gateways 15 2408. 4. Entity Relationships. Entity relationships as shown in Figure 39 have been arrived at as part of the physical network modeling rules. Some of these rules allow for 20 generalities that future demands and some will constrain definitions to avoid conflicts. 1. A Network 2401 spans one or more sites 2404, and contains one or more network elements 2402. 2. A Site 2404 contains one or more network elements 2402. 25 3. A Network Element 2402 is located in only one Site 2404. 4. A Link 2420 connects two or more Sites 2404. 5. A Connection 2422 connects two or more Network Elements. 6. A Network Element 2402 contains one or more Network Interfaces 2406. 30 The preferred embodiment integrates product and service offerings for MCI's business customers. The initial embodiment focuses on a limited product set. Requirements for an interface have been identified to capitalize on the integration of these services. The interface provides user- WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 manageability of features, distribution list capabilities, and a centralized message database. VIII. INTELLIGENT NETWORK 5 All of the platform's support services have been consolidated onto one platform. The consolidation of platforms enables shared feature/functionality of services to create a common look and feel of features. 10 A. Network Management The architecture is designed such that it can be remotely monitored by an MCI operations support group. This remote monitoring capability provides MCI the ability to: 15 - Identify degraded or broken connectivity between: -platforms, servers or nodes that must pass information (i.e., objects) to the "universal inbox", -platforms, servers or nodes responsible for retrieving messages and delivering messages, 20 -the "universal inbox" and the PC Client messaging interface, -the "universal inbox" and the Message Center interface, -platforms, servers or nodes that must pass profile information to Profile, and -platforms, servers or nodes that must pass profile information to the ARU; 25 - Identify degraded application processes and isolate the process that is degraded; - Identify hardware failure; and - Generate alarms that can be detected and received by an internal MCI monitoring group for all application process, hardware or 30 interface failures. In addition, remote access to system architecture components is provided to the remote monitoring and support group such that they can perform remote diagnostics to isolate the cause of the problem. (og8 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 B. Customer Service Customer Service teams support all services. Customer support is provided to customers in a seamless manner and encompasses the complete product 5 life cycle including: - Alpha tests; - Beta tests; - Commercial release; and - Identification of enhancements to address customer feedback or 10 additional customer support requirements Comprehensive and coordinated support procedures ensure complete customer support from inception to termination. Customer service is provided from the time the Account Team submits the order until the customer cancels the account. Comprehensive and coordinated customer 15 support entails the following: - A one-stop, direct access, customer service group to support ARU or VRU problems, WWW Browser problems or PC Client problems. - A staff that is well trained on diagnosing problems associated with access (ARU, WWW Browser or PC Client), the user interface (ARU, WWW 20 Browser or PC Client), the application ( Message Center or Profile Management) or the back-end system interfaces (universal inbox, directlineMCI voicemail/faxmail platform, Fax Broadcast System, SkyTel Paging server, order entry systems, billing systems, etc.) - A staff that has on-line access to databases with information about 25 ARU or VRU capabilities, WWW Browser capabilities, identified hardware issues and identified application issues - 7 x 24 customer support - a single toll free number (800 or 888) with direct access to the customer service group 30 - seamless first, second and third level support for most troubles where: - Level 1 support is the first support representative answering the telephone. They are expected to be able to resolve the most commonly asked questions or problems reported by customers. These questions or WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 problems typically deal with access type (ARU, WWW Browser, PC Client), dial-up communication for the WWW Browser or PC Client, installation or basic computer (PC, workstation, terminal) hardware questions. Additionally they are able to open and update trouble tickets, and 5 reactivate customers' passwords. - Level 2 support is provided within the customer support group when referrals to more experienced technical experts is necessary. - Level 3 support may involve an outside vendor for on-site hardware support for the customer or an internal MCI engineering or support group 10 depending on the nature of the problem. The customer support group will be able to track the status of the customer visit and add the identified problem to both the customer support databases. - Level 4 support will continue to be provided by the Systems 15 Engineering programmers. - Staffing levels to provide acceptable customer hold times and abandon rates. - A staff that has on-line access to the order entry and billing systems. - Automatically generate weekly reports that detail volume of calls 20 made, received, average hold-time of calls and number of trouble tickets opened/ closed/ escalated. C. Accounting Accounting is supported according to current MCI procedures. 25 D. Commissions Commissions are supported according to current MCI procedures. E. Reporting 30 Reporting is required for revenue tracking, internal and external customer installation/sales, usage and product/ service performance. Weekly and monthly fulfillment reports are required from the fulfillment house(s). These fulfillment reports correlate the number of orders received and number of orders delivered. In addition, reporting identifies the t / D WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 number of different subscribers accessing Profile Management or the Message Center through the WWW Site. F. Security 5 Security is enforced in accordance with MCI's published policies and procedures for Internet security. In addition, security is designed into the WWW Browser and ARU interface options to verify and validate user access to directlineMCI profiles, Message Center, Personal Home Page calendars and Personal Home Page configurations. 10 G. Trouble Handling Trouble reporting of problems is documented and tracked in a single database. All troubles are supported according to the Network Services Trouble Handling System (NSTHS) guidelines. Any Service Level 15 Agreements (SLAs) defined between MCI organizations are structured to support NSTHS. Any troubles that require a software fix are closed in the trouble reporting database and opened as a Problem Report (PR) in the Problem Tracking System. This Problem Tracking System is used during all test 20 phases of and is accessible by all engineering and support organizations. IX. ENHANCED PERSONAL SERVICES Throughout this description, the following terms will be used: 25 Term Represents Server Both the hardware platform and a TCP service Web Server AIX 4.2 system running Netscape Commerce Server HTTP Daemon Welcome Server 30 Application Server The Web Servers running as Welcome Servers will be running the Netscape Commerce Server HTTP Daemon in secure as well as normal mode. The Web Servers operating as various application servers will run this daemon in secure mode only. The Secure Mode uses SSLv2.

II(

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 A. Web Server Architecture The Web Servers are located in a DMZ. The DMZ houses the Web Servers and associated Database Clients as required. The database clients do not hold any data, but provide an interface to the data repositories behind the 5 corporate firewall. The Web space uses Round-Robin addressing for name resolution. The Domain name is registered with the administrators of mci.com domain, with a sub-netted (internally autonomous) address space allocated for 10 galileo.mci.com domain. Figure 40 shows the sequence of events leading to a successful login. 1. Welcome Server 450. 15 This Web Server runs both the secure and normal HTTP daemons. The primary function of this server is to authenticate user 452 at login time. The authentication requires the use of Java and a switch from normal to secure mode operation. There are one or more Welcome servers 450 in the DMZ. The information provided by the Welcome server 450 is stateless. The 20 statelessness means that there is no need to synchronize multiple Welcome Servers 450. The Welcome server's first task is to authenticate the user. This requires the use of single use TOKENS, Passcode authentication and Hostile IP 25 filtering. The first is done using a Token Server 454, while the other two will be done using direct database 456 access. In case of failed authentication, the user 452 is shown a screen that mentions all the reasons (except Hostile-IP) why the attempt may have 30 failed. This screen automatically leads the users back to the initial login screen. Welcome server 450's last task, after a successful authentication, is to send a service selection screen to the user 452. The Service Selection I /2 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 screen directs the user to an appropriate Application Server. The user selects the Application, but an HTML file in the Server Section page determines the Application Server. This allows the Welcome Servers 450 to do rudimentary load balancing. 5 All the Welcome Servers 450 in the DMZ are mapped to www.galileo.mci.com. The implementation of DNS also allows galileo.mci.com to map to www.galileo.mci.com. 10 2. Token Server 454. This is a database client and not a Web Server. The Token servers 454 are used by Welcome Servers 450 to issue a TOKEN to login attempts. The issued TOKEN, once validated, is used to track the state information for a connection by the Application Servers. The TOKEN information is be 15 maintained in a database on a database server 456 (repository) behind the corporate firewall. The Token Servers 454 do the following tasks: 1. Issue single use TOKEN during authentication phase. 2. Validate single use TOKEN (mark it for multi use). 20 3. Validate multi-use TOKEN. Re-validate multi-use TOKEN. The Token Servers 454 are required to issue a unique TOKEN on every new request. This mandates a communication link between multiple Token 25 Servers in order to avoid conflict of TOKEN values issued. This conflict is eliminated by assigning ranges to each Token Server 454. The TOKEN is a sixteen character quantity made up of 62 possible character values in the set [0-9A-Za-z]. The characters in positions 0,1 and 30 2 for each TOKEN issued by the Token Server are fixed. These character values are assigned to each Token Server at configuration time. The character at position 0 is used as physical location identifier. The character at position 1 identifies the server at the location while the character at position 2 remains fixed at 'O'. This character could be used to identify the 11I3 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 version number for the Token Server. The remaining 13 characters of the TOKEN are generated sequentially using the same 62 character set described above. At startup the TOKEN 5 servers assign the current system time to the character positions 15-10, and set positions 9-3 to '0'. The TOKEN values are then incremented sequentially on positions 15-3 with position 3 being least significant. The character encoding assumes the following order for high to low digit values : 'z-'a','Z -A ,9 -' . 10 The above scheme generates unique tokens if the system time is computed in 4 byte values, which compute to 6 base-62 characters in positions 15 10. The other assumption is that the scheme does not generate more than 62A7 (35*1OA12) TOKENS in one second on any given Token Server in any 15 embodiment. The use of TOKEN ranges allows the use of multiple Token Servers in the Domain without any need for explicit synchronization. The method accommodates a maximum 62 sites, each having no more than 62 Token 20 Servers. An alternate embodiment would accommodate more sites. All of the Token Servers in the DMZ are mapped to token.galileo.mci.com. The initial embodiment contains two Token Servers 454. These Token Servers 454 are physically identical to the Welcome Servers 450, i.e., the 25 Token Service daemon will run on the same machine that also runs the HTTP daemon for the Welcome service. In another embodiment, the two run on different systems. The Welcome Server(s) 450 use the Token Server(s) 454 to get a single use 30 TOKEN during the authentication phase of the connection. Once authenticated, the Welcome Server 450 marks the TOKEN valid and marks it for multiple use. This multi-use TOKEN accompanies the service selection screen sent to the user by the Welcome Server.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 The design of TOKEN database records is discussed in detail below. 3. Application Servers. The Application servers are Web servers that do the business end of the 5 user transaction. The Welcome Server's last task, after a successful authentication, is to send a service selection screen to the user. The service selection screen contains the new multi-use TOKEN. When the user selects a service, the selection request, with its embedded 10 TOKEN, is sent to the appropriate Application Server. The Application Server validates the TOKEN using the Token Server 454 and, if valid, serves the request. A Token Server can authenticate a TOKEN issued by any one of the Token Servers on the same physical site. This is possible because the Token Servers 454 are database clients for the data 15 maintained on a single database repository behind the corporate firewall. An invalid TOKEN (or a missing TOKEN) always leads to the "Access Denied" page. This page is served by the Welcome Server(s) 450. All denial of access attempts are logged. 20 The actual operation of the Application Server depends on the Application itself. The Application Servers in the DMZ are mapped to <appName><num>.galileo.mci.com. Thus, in an embodiment with multiple applications (e.g., Profile Management, Message Center, Start Card Profile, 25 Personal Web Space etc.), the same Welcome and Token servers 450 and 454 are used and more Applications servers are added as necessary. Another embodiment adds more servers for the same application. If the work load on an application server increases beyond its capacity, another 30 Application Server is added without any changes to existing systems. The SERVERS and TOKENHOSTS databases (described below) are updated to add the record for the new server. The <num> part of the host name is used to distinguish the Application Servers. 115- WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 There is no need to use DNS Round-robin on these names. The Welcome server 450 uses a configuration table (The SERVERS database loaded at startup) to determine the Application Server name prior to sending the service selection screen. 5 B. Web Server System Environment All the Web servers run the Netscape Commerce Server HTTP daemon. The Welcome Servers 450 run the daemon in normal as well as secure mode, while the Application Servers only run the secure mode daemon. 10 The Token Server(s) run a TCP service that runs on a well known port for ease of connection from within the DMZ. The Token Service daemon uses tcp-wrapper to deny access to all systems other than Welcome and Application server(s). In order to speed this authentication process, the list 15 of addresses is loaded by these servers at configuration time, instead of using reverse name mapping at every request. The use of tcp-wrapper also provides the additional tools for logging Token Service activity. The Application servers mostly work as front-ends for database services 20 behind the firewall. Their main task is to validate the access by means of the TOKEN, and then validate the database request. The database requests are to Create, Read, Update or Delete exiting records or data fields on behalf of the user. The Application Servers do the necessary validation and authority checks before serving the request. 25 1. Welcome Servers. The Welcome Servers serve the HTML pages described below to the user at appropriate times. The pages are generated using Perl-based Common Gateway Interface (CGI) scripts. The Scripts reside in a directory which is 30 NOT in the normal document-root directory of the HTTP daemon. The normal precautions regarding disabling directory listing and removing all backup files etc. are taken to ensure that CGI scripts are not readable to the user. Figure 41 shows the directory structure 455 on the Welcome Server 450.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Figure 41 shows that the <documentroot> 456 is separated from the <serverroot> 458. It also shows that the <documentroot> directory holds only the welcome and access failure HTML pages. 5 The HTTP Server maps all requests to the "cgi" directory 460 based on the URL requested. The CGI scripts use the HTML templates from the "template" directory 462 to create and send the HTML output to the users on fly. 10 The use of the URL to map to a CGI script out of the <documentroot> 456 blocks access to the <documentroot> directory 456 by a malicious user. Since every access to the Welcome Server 450 maps to a CGI script in the cgi directory 460 of the Welcome Server 450, security is ensured by calling 15 the authentication function at start of every script. The user Authentication libraries are developed in Perl to authenticate the user identity. NSAPI's authentication phase routines also add features for TOKEN verification and access mode detection in the servers themselves. 20 The Welcome Servers 450 read their operating parameters into their environment from the database 456 at startup. It is necessary to keep this information in the common database in order to maintain the same environment on multiple Welcome Servers 450. 25 a) Welcome Page The welcome page is sent as the default page when the Welcome Server 450 is first accessed. This is the only page that is not generated using a cgi script, and it is maintained in the <documentroot> directory 456. This 30 page does the following: Confirms that the browser can display Frames. If the browser fails to display Frames correctly, this page will display an appropriate error message and direct the user to down load Microsoft Internet Explorer V3.0 or later. 11I * WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 - Confirms that the browser can run Java. A failure will result in the user being directed to Microsoft Internet Explorer V3.0 or later. - If the browser successfully displays Frames and runs Java, then this page will automatically request the Welcome Server 450 to send a 5 login page. The last action by the Welcome page is done using the Java applet embedded in page. This also switches the user's browser from normal to secure mode. 10 b) Login Page The Login Page is a cgi-generated page that contains an embedded single use TOKEN, a Java applet, and form fields for the user to enter a User Id and Passcode. The page may display a graphic to emphasize service. 15 The processing of this page is padded to introduce an artificial delay. In the initial embodiment, this padding is set to zero. The response from this page contains the TOKEN, a scrambled TOKEN value generated by the applet, User Id and Passcode. This information is 20 sent to the Welcome server using a POST HTTP request by the Java applet. The POST request also contains the Applet signature. If the login process is successful the response to this request is the Server Selection page. A failure at this stage results in an Access Failed page. 25 c) Server Selection Page The Server Selection Page is a cgi-generated page which contains an embedded multi-use TOKEN. This page also shows one or more graphics to indicate the types of services available to the user. Some services are not 30 accessible by our users. In other embodiments, when more than one service exists, a User Services Database keyed on the User Id is used to generate this page. The Welcome server uses its configuration information to embed the names WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 of appropriate Application Servers with the view to sharing the load among all available Application Servers. This load sharing is done by using the configuration data read by the Welcome Server(s) during startup. 5 The Welcome Server selects an Application Server based upon entries in its configuration file for each of the services. These entries list the names of Application Server(s) for each application along with their probability of selection. This configuration table is loaded by the Welcome Servers at startup. 10 d) Access Failed Page The Access Failed Page is a static page. That displays a message indicating that the login failed because of an error in User Id, Passcode or both. This page automatically loads the Login Page after a delay of 15 seconds. 15 e) Access Denied Page The Access Denied Page is a static page that displays a message indicating that an access failed due to authentication error. This page automatically loads the Login Page after a delay of 15 seconds. The Access Denied page is 20 called by the Application Servers when their authentication service fails to recognize a TOKEN. All loads of this page will be logged and monitored. 2. Token Servers 454. The TOKEN service on the Web site is the only source of TOKEN generation 25 and authentication. The Tokens themselves are stored in a shared Database 456. This database can be shared among all Token servers. The Token Database is behind the firewall out of the DMZ. The Token service provides the services over a well-known (>1024) TCP 30 port. These services are provided only to a trusted host. The list of trusted hosts is maintained in a configuration database. This database is also maintained behind the firewall outside of the DMZ. The Token servers read their configuration database only on startup or when they receive a signal to refresh. The Token services are: WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 - Grant a single use TOKEN for login attempt. - Validate a single use TOKEN. - Validate a TOKEN. - Re-Validate a TOKEN. 5 TOKEN aging is implemented by a separate service to reduce the work load on the Token servers. All access to the Token Server(s) is logged and monitored. The Token Service itself is written using the tcpwrapper code available from MCI's internal security groups. 10 3. Profile Management Application Servers. The profile management application server(s) are the only type of Application servers implemented in the first embodiment. These servers have the same directory layout as the Welcome Servers. This allows the 15 same system to be used for both services if necessary. C. Security The data trusted by subscribers to the Web server is sensitive to them. They would like to protect it as much as possible. The subscribers 20 have access to this sensitive information via the Web server(s). This information may physically reside on one or more database servers, but as far as the subscribers are concerned it is on Server(s) and it should be protected. 25 Presently only the following information needs to be protected in an embodiment: In other embodiments, profile information for directline account additional information is protected, including Email, Voice Mail, Fax Mail, and 30 Personal Home Page information. The protection is offered against the following type of attackers: - People with access to Web; - Other subscribers; WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 - MCI personnel; - People with access to Subscriber's network; - People with access to Subscriber's system; - People looking over the shoulder of the Subscriber; and 5 - Other systems pretending to be Server(s). The project implements the security by using the following schemes: - Single use TOKENS for login attempts; - Validated TOKENS will accompany all transactions; 10 - TOKEN aging to invalidate a TOKEN if it has not been used for ten minutes; - TOKEN is associated with the IP Address of the calling machine, so TOKEN stealing is not an easy option; - Use of SSL prevents TOKEN or DATA stealing without having 15 physical access to the customer's display; - Use of TOKEN in a form analogous to the Netscape Cookie gives us the option to switch to cookies at a later date. Cookies offer us the facility to hide the TOKEN even further into the document for one extra layer of security; and 20 - Use of Hostile-IP table to block multiple offenders without detection by them. In addition to the security implemented by TOKEN as described above, the Web Server(s) are in a Data Management Zone for further low level security. 25 The DMZ security is discussed below. D. Login Process Figure 42 shows the Login Process. The sequence of events leading to a successful login is: 30 1. The user requests a connection to www.galileo.mci.com. 2. A server is selected from a set using DNS Round-robin. 3. An HTML Page is sent to the user's browser. 4. The Page checks the browser for JAVA Compliance and displays a welcome message.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 5. If the browser is not Java compliant, the process stops with an appropriate message. 6. If the browser is Java compliant, it automatically issues a "GET Login Screen" request to the www.galileo.mci.com server. This request also 5 switches the browser to SSL v2. It will fail if the Browser is not SSL compliant. 7. The Web Server does the following: A. The Web server gets a Single Use Token from its internal Token service. 10 B. The Web server picks one applet from a large set. C. The Web server Records the Applet, Token, and Client IP address in a Database. D. The Web server sends back the Login Screen, with Applet & Token. 15 8. User fills in the Login Screen fields - User Id and Passcode. A. The User Id is the user's Directline number (printed on User's Business cards and is in public domain). B. The Passcode is a Six digit number known only to the User. 9. When the User presses Enter (or clicks on the LOGIN button) the 20 Java Applet sends the Userld, Passcode, Token, and Scrambled Token back. The Scrambling Algorithm is specific to the Applet that was sent in Step 7D. 10. If the browser's IP address is in the Hostile-IP table, the server goes back to Step 7. 25 11. The Web server authenticates the Login request against what it recorded in Step 7C. 12. If the test is invalid: if this is the third successive failed attempts from the same IP address server records the Address in Hostile-IP table. 30 13. The server goes back to Step 7. 14. If the test is valid; The server sends a select services screen to the Browser with an embedded Token. The Token is still associated with the Browser's IP address, but it now has an expiration time. 122 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 E. Service Selection When the user selects an option from the Service selection screen, the request is accompanied by the Token. The token is validated before the service is accessed, as shown in Figure 43. 5 F. Service The screens generated by the Application Servers all contain the Token issued to the user when the Login process was started. This Token has an embedded expiration time and a valid source IP Address. All operation 10 requests include this token as a part of the request. The service requests are sent by the browser as HTML forms, APPLET based forms or plain Hyper Links. In the first two instances, the Token is sent back as a Hidden field using the HTTP-POST method. The Hyper-Links 15 use either the HTTP-GET method with embedded Token or substitute the Cookie in place of a Token. The format of the Token is deliberately chosen to be compatible with this approach. 1. NIDS Server. 20 The NIDS server in the system is isolated from the Web Servers by a router based firewall. The NIDS server runs the NIDSCOMM and ASCOMM services that allow TCP clients access to databases on the NIDS server. The NIDSCOMM and ASCOMM services do not allow connectivity to databases not physically located on the NIDS Server. 25 The following databases (C-tree services) on the NIDS server are used by the Welcome Server, Token Server and Profile Management Application Server: e 800_PIN_1CALL (this is a partitioned database); 30 - 1CALLTRANS; - COUNTRY; - COUNTRYSET; - COUNTRY2 (maybe); - COUNTRYCITY (maybe); 123 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 - NPACITY; e NPACITYOA300 (maybe); and - OP153TOO. 5 In addition to the C Tree services named above the following new C tree services will be defined in the SERVDEF and used only on the NIDS server dedicated to the system: - TOKEN; - SERVERS; 10 - HOSTILEIP; * TOKENHOSTS; and - SERVERENV. The following descriptions for these databases do not show the filler field 15 required at the first byte of each record, nor do they attempt to show any other filler fields that may be required for structure alignment along the 4 byte boundaries. This omission is made only for clarity. The numbers in parentheses next to the field definitions are the number of bytes required to hold the field value. 20 2. TOKEN database service. The TOKEN database service is accessed by the Token Servers. The primary operations on this service are Create a new record, read a record for a given Token value and update a record for the given Token value. 25 A separate chron job running on the NIDS Server itself also accesses this database and deletes obsolete records on a periodic basis. This chron job runs every hour. It does a sequential scan of the database and deletes records for expired tokens. 30 The TOKEN database service contains the TOKEN records. The TOKEN records use a single key (the TOKEN) and have the following fields: 1. Version (1); 2. Use Flag (Single/Multi) (1); 12'4 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 3. Token Value (16); 4. IP Address (16); 5. User Id (16); 6. Time Granted (4); and 5 7. Time expires (4). The key field is the Token Value. 3. SERVERS database service. The Servers Database Service is accessed by the Welcome Server at configuration time. The records in this database contain the following 10 fields: 1. Application Name (16); 2. Application Server Host Name (32); 3. Application Server Domain Name (32); 4. Weight (1); 15 5. Application Icon File URL (64); and 6. Application Description File URL (64). The key field is the combination of Application Name, Server Host Name, and Server Domain Name. This database is read by the Welcome Servers sequentially. This database is also accessed by the Web Administrators to 20 Create, Read, Update and Delete records. This access is via the ASCOMM interface. The Web Administrators use the a HTML form and CGI script for their administration tasks. 4. HOSTILEIP database service. 25 This database is accessed by the Welcome servers to create new records or read existing records based on IP address as the key. The read access is very frequent. This database contains the following fields: 1. IP Address (16); 2. Time entered (4); and 30 3. Time expires (4). The key field is the IP Address. All three values are set by the Welcome Server when creating this record. If the entry is to be over-ridden, the service doing the over-ride will only be allowed to change the Time expires value to <epoch-start>, thus flagging the entry as over-ride. 12!; WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 This database is also accessed by the Web Administrators to Create, Read, Update, and Delete records. Access is via the ASCOMM interface. The Web Administrators use the HTML form and CGI script for their administration 5 tasks. Customer Service uses a specially developed tool to access this database and access is allowed only from within the corporate firewall. 10 A chron job running on the NIDS server also accesses this database and deletes all obsolete records from this database. This job logs all its activity. The log of this job is frequently examined by the Web Administrators all the time. 15 5. TOKENHOSTS database service. This database service lists IP Addresses of the hosts trusted by the Token Servers. This database is read by the Token Service at configuration time. The records in this database contain the following fields: 1. IP Address (16); 20 2. Authority (1); 3. Host Name (32); 4. Host Domain Name (32); and 5. Host description (64). The key field is the IP Address. The Authority binary flag determines the 25 access level. The low access level only allows validate/re-validate commands on an existing TOKEN; the high access level additionally allows Grant and Validate single use TOKEN commands as well. This database is also accessed by the Web Administrators to Create, Read, 30 Update and Delete records. Access is via the ASCOMM interface. The Web Administrators use the HTML form and CGI script for their administration tasks. 6. SERVERENV database service.

WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 This database is read by the Welcome and Application servers at startup. It defines the starting environment for these servers. In one embodiment, only one field (and only for the Welcome Servers) is designed to be used. This is expanded in other embodiments. 5 The records in this database contain the following fields: 1. Sequence Number (4); 2. Application Name (16); 3. Environment Name (32); and 10 4. Environment Value (64). The key field is Sequence Number. Environment values may refer to other environment variables by name. The values are evaluated at run time by the appropriate CGI scripts. The Welcome Servers are assigned the pseudo 15 Application Name of WELCOME. This database is also accessed by the Web Administrators to Create, Read, Update and Delete records. This access is via the ASCOMM interface. The Web Administrators use the HTML form and CGI script for their 20 administration tasks. 7. Chron Job(s). The NIDS Server runs a cleanup chron job. This job is scheduled to run every hour. The main tasks for this job are the following: 25 1. Scan the HOSTILEIP database and report on all records. This report contains all records. The aim to track repeat offenders based on this report. 2. Scan the HOSTILEIP database and report on records with <epochtime> as their expiration time. 30 3. Scan the HOSTILEIP database and delete obsolete records. 4. Scan the TOKEN database and report on all records. This report format will be geared towards traffic reporting rather than scanning each entry. 5. Scan the TOKEN database to delete obsolete records.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 G. Standards The following coding standards have been developed: 1. HTML Look and Feel standards; 5 2. Java Look and Feel standards (derived from the HTML look and feel standards, these are the new class libraries used in development to force a common look and feel on the site's pages); and 3. HTML Programming standards. 10 H. System The system administration tasks require reporting of at least the following System Operating Parameters to the System Administrators: System stats and disk usage with time stamps; e Network operating parameters with time stamps; 15 - Web page usage and access statistics with time stamps; - TOKEN usage statistics; e Hostile IP alarms and statistics; The following tools and utilities are on the Servers in DMZ; e Time synchronization; 20 - Domain Name Servers; - System Log Monitoring; - Alarm reporting; and Secure Shell. The system generates alarms for the following conditions: 25 e Incorrect use of TOKENS; - Hostile IP table changes; - TOKEN Expiration; and e Login attempts. 30 The alarms will be generated at different levels. The Web Servers use the following broad guidelines: 1. The servers run in a root environment. 2. The administrators are able to start a staging server on a non standard port to test a new (staged) service. 1 28 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 3. The staging server is accessible from Internet during the staging run. The Administrators have the option to move the staging software from staging area to production area with a single command. There are suitable checks to make sure this is not done accidentally. 5 I. Product/ A preferred embodiment enables directlineMCI customers additional control over their profile by providing a graphical user interface, and a common messaging system. The capability to access the power of a preferred 10 embodiment exists in the form of a directlineMCI profile and common messaging system. The user is able to modify his account, customizing his application by making feature/functionality updates. The application enables the power of the future capabilities that a preferred embodiment integration will provide by allowing the user to run his application. 15 The user is able to access all of his messages by connecting with just one location. FAX, email, page and voice messages will be accessed through a centralized messaging interface. The user is able to call into the centralized messaging interface through his message center interface to retrieve 20 messages. A centralized message interface provides the user the capability to manage his communications easily and effectively. The user interface has two components, the user's application profile and message center. The interface is accessible through PC software (i.e., PC 25 Client messaging interface), an ARU or a VRU, and a World Wide Web (WWW) Browser. The interface supports the customization of applications and the management of messages. The feature/functionality requirements for an embodiment will be 30 presented below. The first piece to be described is the ARU interface and its requirements for the user interface, message management and profile management. Following the ARU requirements, requirements are also provided for the WWW Browser and PC Client interfaces. (29 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 J. Interface Feature Requirements (Overview) A front-end acts as an interface between the user and a screen display server in accordance with a preferred embodiment. The user is able to access the system and directly access his profile and messages. The user 5 interface is used to update his profile and to access his messages. The user's profile information and the user's messages may reside in different locations, so the interface is able to connect to both places. Profile and messaging capabilities are separate components of the interface and have different requirements. 10 Through his interface, the user is able to update his profile in real-time through profile management. The application profile is the front-end to the user account directory, which is where all of the user account information resides in a virtual location. Also, a user is able to manage his messages 15 (voicemail, faxmail, email, pager recall) through his message center. The message center is the front-end to the centralized messaging database, which is where all of the user's messages may reside, regardless of message content. 20 Three user interfaces are supported: - DTMF access to an ARU or VRU; - WWW Browser access to a WWW Site; and - PC Client access to a Messaging Server. 25 From the ARU, the users are able to update their profiles (directlineMCI only), retrieve voicemail messages and pager recall messages, and retrieve message header (sender, subject, date/time) information for faxmail and email messages. Through the PC Client, the user is limited to message retrieval and message manipulation. The WWW Browser provides the user a 30 comprehensive interface for profile management and message retrieval. Through the WWW Browser, the users are able to update their profiles (directlineMCI, Information Services, List Management, Global Message Handling and Personal Home Pages) and retrieve all message types. I130 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 1. The User Account Profile. The user is able to access account information through the application profile. The application profile provides an intelligent interface between the user and his account information, which resides in the user account 5 directory. The User Account Directory accesses the individual account information of users. Users are able to read and write to the directory, making updates to their accounts. The directory allows search capabilities, enabling customer service representatives to search for a specific account when assisting a customer. 10 When a customer obtains a phone number, the user account directory reflects the enrollment, and the user is able to access and update features through his user account profile. If a customer withdraws, the user directory will reflect the deactivation, and the service will be removed from 15 the user's application profile. In summary, the user account directory provides account information for each of the user's services. However, the user account directory is limited to: directlineMCI profile, Information Services profile, Global Message 20 Handling, List Management and Personal Home Page profiles. This information determines the feature/functionality of the user's application and provides the user with the flexibility that is necessary to customize his application, allowing MCI to meet his continuously changing communication needs. 25 2. The Database of Messages. An important feature that is offered is the integration of messages. Messages of similar and dissimilar content are consolidated in one virtual location. Through a call, the message center provides the user with a review 30 of all of his messages, regardless of content or access. Through the interface messaging capabilities, the user is also able to maintain an address book and distribution lists. This message database is a centralized information store, housing 131I WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 messages for users. The message database provides common object storage capabilities, storing data files as objects. By accessing the message database, users retrieve voicemail, faxmail, email and pager recall messages from a single virtual location. In addition, by using common object storage 5 capabilities, message distribution is extremely efficient. K. Automated Response Unit (ARU) Capabilities K. 1. User Interface . The ARU interface is able to perform directlineMCI Profile Management, 10 Information Services Profile Management, message retrieval and message distribution. The DTMF access provided through the ARU is applied consistently across different components within the system. For example, entering alphabetic characters through the DTMF keypad is entered in the same manner regardless if the user is accessing Stock Quote information or 15 broadcasting a fax message to a distribution list. Voicemail Callback Auto Redial provides the capability to prompt for and collect a DTMF callback number from a guest leaving a voicemail and automatically launch a return call to the guest call back number when 20 retrieving messages. Upon completing the callback, the subscriber will be able to return to the same place where they left off in the mailbox. Music On-Hold provides music while a guest is on-hold. 25 Park and Page provides a guest an option to page a directlineMCI subscriber, through the directlineMCI gateway, then remain on-hold while the subscriber is paged. The subscriber receives the page and calls their directlineMCI number, where they can select to be connected with the guest on hold. Should the subscriber fail to connect a call with the guest, the 30 guest will receive an option to be forwarded to voicemail. If the subscriber does not have voicemail as a defined option, then the guest a final message will be played for the guest. Note: The guest has the ability to press an option to be forwarded to voicemail at any time while on hold. 132 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Call Screening with Park and Page An embodiment provides the subscriber with functionality for responding to a park and page, the identity of the calling party (i.e., guest). This provides the subscribers the 5 ability to choose whether they wish to speak to the guest or transfer the guest to voicemail, prior to connecting the call. Specifically, guests are ARU prompted to record their names when they select the park and page option. When the subscriber respond to the park and page, they will hear an ARU prompt stating, "You have a call from RECORDED NAME", then be 10 presented with the option to connect with the calling party or transfer the party to voicemail. If the subscriber does not have voicemail as a defined option, then the guest will be deposited to a final message. The guest also will have the ability to press an option to be forwarded to voicemail at any time while on hold. 15 Two-way Pager Configuration Control and Response to Park and Page The system also allows a subscriber to respond to a park and page notification by instructing the ARU to route the call to voicemail or final message or continue to hold, through a command submitted by a two-way 20 pager. Text Pager Support The system allows a subscriber to page a directlineMCI subscriber, through the directlineMCI gateway, and a leave a message to be retrieved by a text 25 pager. Specifically, upon choosing the appropriate option, the guest will be transferred to either the networkMCI Paging or the SkyTel message center where an operator will receive and submit/create a text-based message to be retrieved by the subscriber's text pager. 30 Forward to the Next Termination Number The system provides the capability for the party answering the telephone, to which a directlineMCI call has been routed, to have the option to have the call routed to the next termination number in the directlineMCI routing sequence. Specifically, the called party will receive a prompt from the 1 38 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 directlineMCI ARU gateway, which indicates that the call has been routed to this number by directlineMCI and providing the called party with the option to receive the incoming call or have the call routed to the next termination number or destination in the routing sequence. The options 5 presented to a called party include: - Press an option to accept the call - Press an option to send the call to the next termination - Let the call time-out (i.e., no action taken) and then proceed to the next termination. 10 Less Than 2 Second # Reorigination An embodiment also provides the capability to reoriginate an outbound call, from the directlineMCI gateway, by pressing the pound ( # ) key for less than two seconds. Currently, directlineMCI requires the # key to be depressed for two seconds or more before the subscriber can reoriginate a 15 call. L. Message 1. Multiple Media Message Notification . The subscriber can receive an accounting of current messages across a number of media, to include voicemail, faxmail, email, paging. Specifically, 20 the subscriber will hear an ARU script stating, for example, "You have 3 new voicemail messages, 2 new faxmail messages, and 10 new email messages." 2. Multiple Media Message Manipulation. 25 A subscriber is allowed to access the Universal Inbox to perform basic message manipulation, of messages received through multiple media (voicemail, faxmail, email, paging), through the directlineMCI ARU gateway. Subscribers are able to retrieve voicemail messages and pager messages, and retrieve message header (priority, sender, subject, date/time, size) 30 information for faxmail and email messages. In addition, subscribers are able to save, forward or delete messages reviewed from the ARU interface. The forward feature is limited to distributing messages as either voicemails or faxmails. Only voicemail messages can be forwarded as voicemails. Email, faxmail and pager messages can be forwarded as faxmails; however, 134F WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 it may be necessary to convert email and pager messages to a G3 format. When forwarding messages as faxmails, subscribers have the ability to send messages to distribution lists and Fax Broadcast lists. 5 3. Text to Speech. The system converts text messages, received as email, faxmail or pager messages, into audio, which can be played back through the directlineMCI gateway. Initially, the text-to-speech capability will be limited to message header (priority, sender, subject, date/time, size) information. 10 Subscribers are provided the option to select whether they want to hear message headers first and then select which complete message they want to be played. The only message type that does not support a text-to-speech capability for the complete message will be faxmail messages. The 15 capability only exists to play faxmail headers. FAXmail header information includes sender's ANI, date/time faxmail was received and size of faxmail. 4. Email Forwarding to a Fax Machine. Subscribers can forward an email, retrieved and reviewed through the 20 directlineMCI ARU gateway, to a subscriber-defined termination number. Specifically, the subscriber has the ability to review an email message through the directlineMCI ARU. After reviewing the message, the subscriber receives, among the standard prompts, a prompt requesting whether he would like to forward the email message to a specified termination number 25 or have the option to enter an impromptu number. Upon selecting this option and indicating the termination number, the email message is converted to a G3 format and transmitted to the specified termination number. Email attachments that are binary files are supported. If an attachment cannot be delivered to the terminating fax machine, a text 30 message must be provided to the recipient that the binary attachment could not be forwarded. Forwarding of emails to a fax machine does not result in the message being deleted from the "universal inbox". 5. Pager Notification of Messages Received.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 A subscriber can receive a pager notification, on a subscriber-defined interval, indicating the number of messages, by message media, that currently reside in the subscriber's "universal inbox". Specifically, the subscriber will have the ability to establish a notification schedule, through 5 the directlineMCI ARU, to receive a pager message which indicates the number of voicemail, faxmail, email and pager messages that reside in the subscriber's "universal inbox". 6. Delivery Confirmation of Voicemail . 10 The system provides the subscriber the ability to receive a confirmation voicemail message when a subscriber-initiated voicemail message was not successfully delivered to the terminating party(s). 7. Message Prioritization . 15 The system provides the guest the ability to assign either regular or urgent priority to a message. When the subscriber receives an accounting of messages, the prioritization will be indicated, and all urgent messages will be indexed before regular messages. This requirement only applies to voicemails, not faxmails. This will require that the "universal inbox" present 20 the proper message priority for directlineMCI voicemails. M. Information Services Through the ARU interface, users will be able to receive content from information services which are configurable through the WWW Browser 25 interface. Information content will be provided as an inbound service and an outbound service. The information content that is defined through the WWW Browser (i.e., Profile Management) is defined as the inbound information content and will be limited to: - Stock Quotes and Financial News 30 - Headline News. Subscribers also have the ability to access additional information content through the ARU interface; however, this information is not configurable through the WWW Browser (i.e., Profile Management). This additional p6~ WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 information content will be referred to as outbound information content and will consist of: - Stock Quotes and Financial News; - Headline News; 5 - Weather; - Sports News and Scores; - Soap Opera Updates; - Horoscopes; - Lottery Results; 10 *Entertainment News; and - Traveler's Assist. The configurable parameters of the inbound information content is defined below. Retrieval of outbound information content will support the entry of 15 alphabetic characters through a DTMF keypad. Entering of alphabetic characters must be consistent with the manner that alphabetic characters are entered through DTMF for list management. Access to Traveler's Assist will be bundled with the other outbound 20 information services such that the subscriber only has to dial a single 800/8XX number. The 800/8XX call may extend to different termination depending upon the information content selected. N. Message Storage Requirements 25 The message storage requirements are consistent with the message storage requirements defined below. 0. Profile Management directlineMCI Profile Management 30 Subscribers can also review, update and invoke their directlineMCI account profiles. The directlineMCI profile management capabilities through the ARU interface are consistent with the presentation provided through the WWW Browser and support the following requirements: - Create new directlineMCI profiles and assign names to the profile; WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 - Invoke directlineMCI profiles; * Voice annotate directlineMCI profile names; - Update existing directlineMCI profiles; - Support the rules-based logic of creating and updating directlineMCI 5 profiles (e.g., selection of only one call routing option, like voicemail, will invoke override routing to voicemail; and updates made in one parameter must ripple through all affected parameters, like paging notification); - Enable a directlineMCI number; - Enable and define override routing number; and 10 - Enable and define FollowMe routing. - Enable and define final routing (formerly called alternate routing) to: -Voicemail and pager; -Voicemail only; -Pager only; 15 -Final message; - Invoke menu routing if two or more of the call routing options (FollowMe, voicemail, faxmail or pager) are enabled; - Define the default number for faxmail delivery; - Activate paging notification for voicemail; 20 - Activate paging notification for faxmail; and - Provide guest option to classify voicemails for urgent delivery; - Define call screening parameters for: -Name and ANI; -ANI only; 25 -Name only; and - Enable or disable park and page. P. Call Routing Menu Change The system also provides the capability for subscribers to modify their call 30 routing termination numbers without having to re-enter termination numbers which they do not wish to change. Specifically, the directlineMCI routing modification capability requires the subscriber to re-enter all termination numbers in a routing sequence should they wish to change any of the routing numbers. This capability permits the subscriber to change WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 only the termination numbers they wish to change, and indicate by pressing the "#" key when they do not wish to change a specific number in the routing sequence. 5 Q. Two-way Pager Configuration Control and Response to Park and Page The system can also enable or disable predefined directlineMCI profiles through a command submitted by a two-way pager. 10 R. Personalized Greetings The system provides subscribers the ability to review and update the personalized greeting that will be played from the ARU or displayed from their Personal Home Page. Each greeting is maintained separately and customized to the features available through each interface (ARU or 15 Personal Home Page). S. List Management The system also provides the subscriber the ability to create and update lists, and create a voice annotation name for a list. Fax Broadcast list 20 management capabilities are integrated with directlineMCI list management capabilities to provide a single database of lists. From the ARU interface, subscribers have the ability to review, update, add or delete members on a list. In addition, subscribers are able to delete or create lists. The ARU interface is able to use the lists to distribute voicemail and faxmail 25 messages. Access to distribution lists supports alphabetic list names such that lists are not limited to list code names. Entering of alphabetic characters through DTMF to the ARU for list names is consistent with the manner that 30 alphabetic characters are entered through DTMF for Information Services. The List Management requirements are discussed in greater detail below. In addition to providing message manipulation capabilities, the PC Client also provides an address book and access to lists. The user is able to make

I'?

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 modifications to the address book and manage distribution lists for voice, fax, email and paging messages. In one embodiment, lists created or maintained through the PC Client interface are not integrated with lists created or maintained through the WWW Browser or ARU interfaces, but 5 such integration can be implemented in an alternative embodiment. The subscriber is able to send a message to a distribution list from the PC Client. This requires a two-way interface between the PC Client and the List Management database whereby the PC Client can export a comma delimited or DBF formatted file to the database of lists. 10 The user is able to create and modify recipient address information through his interface PC software. The user is able to record multiple types of addresses in his address book, including 10 digit ANIs, voice mailbox ids, fax mailbox ids, paging numbers and email addresses (MCIMail and 15 Internet). This information should is saved onto the PC. The address information retained on the PC Client is classified and sorted by recipient's name. T. Global Message Handling 20 From the ARU interface, subscribers are able to define which message types can be accessed from the "universal inbox". The global message handling requirements are consistent with the requirements defined below. X. INTERNET TELEPHONY AND RELATED SERVICES 25 The discussion thus far has provided an introduction to the Internet, and therefore Internet telephony, but Internet telephony encompasses quite a few areas of development. The following is a summary of Internet telephony, divided into six key areas. The first area consists of access to Internet telephony services. This area involves accessing and utilizing the Internet 30 using such mechanisms as satellites, dialup services, T1, T3, DS3, OC3, and OC12 dedicated lines, SMDS networks, ISDN B-channels, ISDN D channels, multirate ISDN, multiple B-channel bonded ISDN systems, Ethernet, token ring, FDDI GSM, LMDS, PCS, cellular networks, frame relay, and X.25. I40 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 The second area involves sharing Internet telephony. Multimedia data can utilize circuit-switched networks quite readily due to the high reliability and throughput potential. Issues include shared data, pushing URL data 5 between parties, data conferencing, shared whiteboarding, resource collaboration, and ISDN user-user signaling. The third area deals with routing Internet telephony. Issues include the time-of-day, the day-of-week, the day-of-month, and the day-of-year, in 10 addition to geographic points of origin, network point of origin, and time zone of origin. Analysis of routing also includes user data, destination parties, telephone numbers, lines of origin, types of bearer service, presubscribed feature routing, ANI, and IP addresses. Also, VNET plans, range privileges, directory services, and Service Control Points (SCP)s fall 15 into routing Internet telephony. The fourth category deals with quality of service. Analysis must include switched networks, ISDN, dynamic modifications, Internet telephony, RSVP, and redundant network services. In addition, this category includes 20 hybrid Internet/telephony switches, Ethernet features, ISDN features, analog local loops and public phones, and billing for reserved and/or utilized services. The fifth category is composed of directory services, profiles, and 25 notifications. Examples are distributed directories, finding-me and follow me services, directory management of telephony, and user interfaces. Calling party authentication security is also included. Hierarchical and object-oriented profiles exist, along with directory service user profiles, network profile data structures, service profiles, and order entry profiles. 30 The sixth category consists of hybrid Internet telephony services. Areas include object directed messaging, Internet telephony messaging, Internet conferencing, Internet faxing, information routing (IMMR), voice communications, and intranets (such as those that exist within a WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 company). Other services include operator services, management service, paging services, billing services, wireless integration, message broadcasts, monitoring and reporting services, card services, video-mail services, compression, authorization, authentication, encryption, telephony 5 application builders, billing, and data collection services. The seventh category consists of hybrid Internet media services, which include areas of collaborative work which involve a plurality of users. Users can collaborate on Audio, Data and Video. This area includes media 10 conferencing within the Hybrid network. Then there is a broadly related area of Reservations mechanism, Operator-assisted conferencing, and the introduction of content into conferences. The Virtual locations of these conferences will assume importance in the future. The next-generation Chat Rooms will feature virtual conference spaces with simulated Office 15 Environments. A. System Environment for Internet Media 1. Hardware. A preferred embodiment of a system in accordance with the present 20 invention is preferably practiced in the context of a personal computer such as the IBM PS/2, Apple Macintosh computer or UNIX based workstation. A representative hardware environment is depicted in Figure 1A, which illustrates a typical hardware configuration of a workstation 99 in accordance with a preferred embodiment having a central processing unit 25 10, such as a microprocessor, and a number of other units interconnected via a system bus 12. The workstation shown in Figure 1A includes a Random Access Memory (RAM) 14, Read Only Memory (ROM) 16, an I/O adapter 18 for connecting peripheral devices such as a communication network (e.g., a data processing network) 81, printer 30 and a disk storage 30 unit 20 to the bus 12, a user interface adapter 22 for connecting a keyboard 24, a mouse 26, a speaker 28, a microphone 32, and/or other user interface devices such as a touch screen (not shown) to the bus 12, and a display adapter 36 for connecting the bus 12 to a display device 38. The workstation typically has resident thereon an operating system such as 142 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 the Microsoft Windows NT or Windows/95 Operating System (OS), the IBM OS/2 operating system, the MAC System/7 OS, or UNIX operating system. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that the present invention may also be implemented on platforms and operating systems other than those 5 mentioned. 2. Object-Oriented Software Tools. A preferred embodiment is written using JAVA, C, and the C++ language and utilizes object oriented programming methodology. Object oriented 10 programming (OOP) has become increasingly used to develop complex applications. As OOP moves toward the mainstream of software design and development, various software solutions require adaptation to make use of the benefits of OOP. A need exists for these principles of OOP to be applied to a messaging interface of an electronic messaging system such that a set 15 of OOP classes and objects for the messaging interface can be provided. OOP is a process of developing computer software using objects, including the steps of analyzing the problem, designing the system, and constructing the program. An object is a software package that contains both data and a 20 collection of related structures and procedures. Since it contains both data and a collection of structures and procedures, it can be visualized as a self sufficient component that does not require other additional structures, procedures or data to perform its specific task. OOP, therefore, views a computer program as a collection of largely autonomous components, 25 called objects, each of which is responsible for a specific task. This concept of packaging data, structures, and procedures together in one component or module is called encapsulation. In general, OOP components are reusable software modules which present 30 an interface that conforms to an object model and which are accessed at run-time through a component integration architecture. A component integration architecture is a set of architectural mechanisms which allow software modules in different process spaces to utilize each other's capabilities or functions. This is generally done by assuming a common WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 component object model on which to build the architecture. It is worthwhile to differentiate between an object and a class of objects at this point. An object is a single instance of the class of objects, which is 5 often just called a class. A class of objects can be viewed as a blueprint, from which many objects can be formed. OOP allows the programmer to create an object that is a part of another object. For example, the object representing a piston engine is said to have 10 a composition-relationship with the object representing a piston. In reality, a piston engine comprises a piston, valves and many other components; the fact that a piston is an element of a piston engine can be logically and semantically represented in OOP by two objects. 15 OOP also allows creation of an object that "derived from" another object. If there are two objects, one representing a piston engine and the other representing a piston engine wherein the piston is made of ceramic, then the relationship between the two objects is not that of composition. A ceramic piston engine does not make up a piston engine. Rather it is 20 merely one kind of piston engine that has one more limitation than the piston engine; its piston is made of ceramic. In this case, the object representing the ceramic piston engine is called a derived object, and it inherits all of the aspects of the object representing the piston engine and adds further limitation or detail to it. The object representing the ceramic 25 piston engine "derives from" the object representing the piston engine. The relationship between these objects is called inheritance. When the object or class representing the ceramic piston engine inherits all of the aspects of the objects representing the piston engine, it inherits the 30 thermal characteristics of a standard piston defined in the piston engine class. However, the ceramic piston engine object overrides these ceramic specific thermal characteristics, which are typically different from those associated with a metal piston. It skips over the original and uses new functions related to ceramic pistons. Different kinds of piston engines have 14-44 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 different characteristics, but may have the same underlying functions associated with them (e.g., number of pistons in the engine, ignition sequences, lubrication, etc.). To access each of these functions in any piston engine object, a programmer would identify the same functions with 5 the same names, but each type of piston engine may have different/overriding implementations of functions behind the same name. This ability to hide different implementations of a function behind the same name is called polymorphism and it greatly simplifies communication among objects. 10 With the concepts of composition-relationship, encapsulation, inheritance and polymorphism, an object can represent just about anything in the real world. In fact, our logical perception of the reality is the only limit on determining the kinds of things that can become objects in object-oriented 15 software. Some typical categories are as follows: Objects can represent physical objects, such as automobiles in a traffic-flow simulation, electrical components in a circuit-design program, countries in an economics model, or aircraft in an air traffic-control system. 20 ? Objects can represent elements of the computer-user environment such as windows, menus or graphics objects. An object can represent an inventory, such as a personnel file or a table of the latitudes and longitudes of cities. An object can represent user-defined data types such as time, angles, 25 and complex numbers, or points on the plane. With this enormous capability of an object to represent just about any logically separable matters, OOP allows the software developer to design and implement a computer program that is a model of some aspects of 30 reality, whether that reality is a physical entity, a process, a system, or a composition of matter. Since the object can represent anything, the software developer can create an object which can be used as a component in a larger software project in the future. t 45~ WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 If 90% of a new OOP software program consists of proven, existing components made from preexisting reusable objects, then only the remaining 10% of the new software project has to be written and tested from scratch. Since 90% already came from an inventory of extensively 5 tested reusable objects, the potential domain from which an error could originate is 10% of the program. As a result, OOP enables software developers to build objects out of other, previously built, objects. This process closely resembles complex machinery being built out of 10 assemblies and sub-assemblies. OOP technology, therefore, makes software engineering more like hardware engineering in that software is built from existing components, which are available to the developer as objects. All this adds up to an improved quality of the software as well as an increased speed of its development. 15 Programming languages are beginning to fully support the OOP principles, such as encapsulation, inheritance, polymorphism, and composition relationship. With the advent of the C++ language, many commercial software developers have embraced OOP. C++ is an OOP language that 20 offers a fast, machine-executable code. Furthermore, C++ is suitable for both commercial-application and systems-programming projects. For now, C++ appears to be the most popular choice among many OOP programmers, but there is a host of other OOP languages, such as Smalltalk, common lisp object system (CLOS), and Eiffel. Additionally, OOP 25 capabilities are being added to more traditional popular computer programming languages such as Pascal. The benefits of object classes can be summarized, as follows: Objects and their corresponding classes break down complex 30 programming problems into many smaller, simpler problems. Encapsulation enforces data abstraction through the organization of data into small, independent objects that can communicate with each other. Encapsulation also protects the data in an object from accidental damage, but allows other objects to interact with that data 146 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 by calling the object's member functions and structures. Subclassing and inheritance make it possible to extend and modify objects through deriving new kinds of objects from the standard classes available in the system. Thus, new capabilities are created 5 without having to start from scratch. Polymorphism and multiple inheritance make it possible for different programmers to mix and match characteristics of many different classes and create specialized objects that can still work with related objects in predictable ways. 10 Class hierarchies and containment hierarchies provide a flexible mechanism for modeling real-world objects and the relationships among them. Libraries of reusable classes are useful in many situations, but they also have some limitations. For example: 15 Complexity. In a complex system, the class hierarchies for related classes can become extremely confusing, with many dozens or even hundreds of classes. Flow of control. A program written with the aid of class libraries is still responsible for the flow of control (i.e., it must control the 20 interactions among all the objects created from a particular library). The programmer has to decide which functions to call at what times for which kinds of objects. Duplication of effort. Although class libraries allow programmers to use and reuse many small pieces of code, each programmer puts 25 those pieces together in a different way. Two different programmers can use the same set of class libraries to write two programs that do exactly the same thing but whose internal structure (i.e., design) may be quite different, depending on hundreds of small decisions each programmer makes along the way. Inevitably, similar pieces of code 30 end up doing similar things in slightly different ways and do not work as well together as they should. Class libraries are very flexible. As programs grow more complex, more programmers are forced to reinvent basic solutions to basic problems over WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 and over again. A relatively new extension of the class library concept is to have a framework of class libraries. This framework is more complex and consists of significant collections of collaborating classes that capture both the small scale patterns and major mechanisms that implement the 5 common requirements and design in a specific application domain. They were first developed to free application programmers from the chores involved in displaying menus, windows, dialog boxes, and other standard user interface elements for personal computers. 10 Frameworks also represent a change in the way programmers think about the interaction between the code they write and code written by others. In the early days of procedural programming, the programmer called libraries provided by the operating system to perform certain tasks, but basically the program executed down the page from start to finish, and the programmer 15 was solely responsible for the flow of control. This was appropriate for printing out paychecks, calculating a mathematical table, or solving other problems with a program that executed in just one way. The development of graphical user interfaces began to turn this procedural 20 programming arrangement inside out. These interfaces allow the user, rather than program logic, to drive the program and decide when certain actions should be performed. Today, most personal computer software accomplishes this by means of an event loop which monitors the mouse, keyboard, and other sources of external events and calls the appropriate 25 parts of the programmer's code according to actions that the user performs. The programmer no longer determines the order in which events occur. Instead, a program is divided into separate pieces that are called at unpredictable times and in an unpredictable order. By relinquishing control in this way to users, the developer creates a program that is much 30 easier to use. Nevertheless, individual pieces of the program written by the developer still call libraries provided by the operating system to accomplish certain tasks, and the programmer must still determine the flow of control within each piece after it's called by the event loop. Application code still "sits on top of' the system.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Even event loop programs require programmers to write a lot of code that should not need to be written separately for every application. The concept of an application framework carries the event loop concept further. Instead 5 of dealing with all the nuts and bolts of constructing basic menus, windows, and dialog boxes and then making these things all work together, programmers using application frameworks start with working application code and basic user interface elements in place. Subsequently, they build from there by replacing some of the generic capabilities of the framework 10 with the specific capabilities of the intended application. Application frameworks reduce the total amount of code that a programmer must write from scratch. However, because the framework is really a generic application that displays windows, supports copy and paste, and so 15 on, the programmer can also relinquish control to a greater degree than event loop programs permit. The framework code takes care of almost all event handling and flow of control, and the programmer's code is called only when the framework needs it (e.g., to create or manipulate a data structure). 20 A programmer writing a framework program not only relinquishes control to the user (as is also true for event loop programs), but also relinquishes the detailed flow of control within the program to the framework. This approach allows the creation of more complex systems that work together 25 in interesting ways, as opposed to isolated programs with custom code being created over and over again for similar problems. Thus, as explained above, a framework basically is a collection of cooperating classes that make up a reusable design solution for a given 30 problem domain. It typically provides objects that define default behavior (e.g., for menus and windows), and programmers use it by inheriting some of that default behavior and overriding other behavior so that the framework calls application code at the appropriate times. There are three main differences between frameworks and class libraries: I ±+ WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 ? Behavior versus protocol. Class libraries are essentially collections of behaviors that you can call when you want those individual behaviors in your program. A framework, on the other hand, provides not only behavior but also the protocol or set of rules that govern the ways in 5 which behaviors can be combined, including rules for what a programmer is supposed to provide versus what the framework provides. ? Call versus override. With a class library, the code the programmer instantiates objects and calls their member functions. It's possible to 10 instantiate and call objects in the same way with a framework (i.e., to treat the framework as a class library), but to take full advantage of a framework's reusable design, a programmer typically writes code that overrides and is called by the framework. The framework manages the flow of control among its objects. Writing a program involves 15 dividing responsibilities among the various pieces of software that are called by the framework rather than specifying how the different pieces should work together. Implementation versus design. With class libraries, programmers reuse only implementations, whereas with frameworks, they reuse 20 design. A framework embodies the way a family of related programs or pieces of software work. It represents a generic design solution that can be adapted to a variety of specific problems in a given domain. For example, a single framework can embody the way a user interface works, even though two different user interfaces created 25 with the same framework might solve quite different interface problems. B. Telephony Over The Internet Voice over the Internet has become an inexpensive hobbyist commodity. 30 Several firms are evolving this technology to include interworking with the PSTN. This presents both a challenge and an opportunity for established carriers like MCI and BT especially in the IDDD arena. This discussion explores how a carrier class service could be offered based on this evolving technology. Of particular interest are ways to permit interworking between WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 the PSTN and the Internet using 1 plus dialing. The introductory discussion considers the technical requirements to support PC to PC connectivity in a more robust manner than presently 5 offered, in addition to the technical requirements for a PSTN to Internet voice gateway. Consideration is given to how calls can be placed from PCs to a PSTN destination and visa versa. The case of PSTN to PSTN communications, using the Internet as a long distance network is also explored. 10 It is shown how such services can be offered in a way that will complement existing PSTN services, offering lower prices for a lower quality of service. At issue in the longer term is the steady improvement in quality for Internet telephony and whether this will ultimately prove competitive with 15 conventional voice services. 1. Introduction. In the mid-late 1970s, experiments in the transmission of voice over the Internet were conducted as part of an ongoing program of research 20 sponsored by the US Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency. In the mid-1980s, UNIX-based workstations were used to conduct regular audio/video conferencing sessions, in modest quantities, over the Internet. These experimental applications were extended in the late 1980s with larger scale, one-way multicasting of voice and video. In 1995 a small 25 company, VocalTec (www.vocaltec.com), introduced an inexpensive software package that was capable of providing two way voice communications between multi-media PCs connected to the Internet. Thus was born a new generation of telephony over the Internet. 30 The first software package, and its immediate followers, provided a hobbyist tool. A meeting place based on a Internet Relay Chat "room" (IRC) was used to establish point to point connections between end stations for the voice transfer. This resulted in chance meetings, as is common in chat rooms, or a prearranged meeting, if the parties coordinated ahead of time, by email or WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 other means. a) 'How it Works A user with a multi-media PC and an Internet connection can add the 5 Internet Telephony capability by loading a small software package. In the case of VocalTec, the package makes a connection to the meeting place (IRC server), based on a modified chat server. At the IRC the user sees a list of all other users connected to the IRC. 10 The user calls another user by clicking on his name. The IRC responds by sending the IP address of the called party. For dial in users of the Internet, an IP address is assigned at dial in time, and consequently will change between dial in sessions. If the destination is not already engaged in a voice connection, its PC beeps a ring signal. The called user can answer 15 the phone with a mouse click, and the calling party then begins sending traffic directly to the IP address of the called party. A multi-media microphone and speakers built into or attached to the PC are used as a speakerphone. The speaker's voice is digitized, compressed and packetized for transmission across the Internet. At the other end it is decompressed 20 and converted to sound through the PC's speakers. b) Implications Telephony over the Internet offers users a low cost service, that is distance and border insensitive. For the current cost of Internet access (at low hourly rates, or in some cases unlimited usage for a flat fee) the caller can 25 hold a voice conversation with another PC user connected to the Internet. The called party contributes to the cost of the conversation by paying for his Internet access. In the case that one or both ends are LAN connected to the Internet by leased lines the call is free of additional charges. All of this is in contrast to the cost of a conventional long distance, possibly 30 international, call. c) Quality of Service The voice quality across the Internet is good, but not as good as typical telephone toll quality. In addition, there are significant delays experienced 1'-21 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 during the conversation. Trying to interrupt a speaker in such an environment is problematic. Delay and quality variations are as much a consequence of distance and available capacity as they are a function of compression, buffering and packetizing time. 5 Delays in the voice transmission are attributable to several factors. One of the biggest contributors to delays is the sound card used. The first sound cards were half duplex and were designed for playback of recorded audio. Long audio data buffers which helped ensure uninterrupted audio playback 10 introduced real time delays. Sound card based delays are being reduced over time as full duplex cards designed for "speakerphone" applications are brought to the market. Other delays are inherent in the access line speeds (typically 14.4-28.8 15 kbps for dial-up internet access) and in the packet forwarding delays in the Internet. Also there is delay inherent in filling a packet with digitized encoded audio. For example, to fill a packet with 90 ms of digitized audio, the application must wait at least 90 ms to receive the audio to digitize. Shorter packets reduce packet-filling delays, but increase overhead by 20 increasing the packet header to packet payload data ratio. The increased overhead also increases the bandwidth demands for the application, so that an application which uses short packets may not be able to operate on a 14.4 kbps dial-up connection. LAN-based PCs suffer less delay, but everyone is subject to 25 variable delays which can be annoying. Lastly, there are delays inherent in audio codecs. Codec delays can vary from 5 to 30 ms for encoding or decoding. Despite the higher latencies associated with internet telephony, the price is right, and this form of voice 30 communication appears to be gaining in popularity. 2. IP Phone as a Commercial Service. IP telephony technology is here whether the established carriers like it or not. Clearly the use of the Internet to provide international voice calls is a '15 13 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 potential threat to the traditional International Direct Distance Dialing (IDDD) revenue stream. Although it may be several years before there is an appreciable revenue impact, it cannot be stopped, except perhaps within national borders on the basis of regulation. The best defense by the 5 carriers is to offer the service themselves in an industrial strength fashion. To do this requires an improved call setup facility and an interface to the PSTN. Facilitating PC to PC connections is useful for cases in which the voice 10 conversation needs to be conducted during a simultaneous Internet data packet communication, and the parties don't have access to separate telephone facilities. Dial-up Internet subscribers with only one access circuit might find themselves in that position. Cost considerations may also play a role in dictating the use of PC to PC telephony. The larger use of 15 this technology will occur when the Internet can be used in place of the long distance network to interconnect ordinary telephone hand sets. The number of multi-media Internet connected PCs in the world (estimated at 10 million) is minuscule compared to the number of subscriber lines worldwide (estimated at 660 million). This service is in the planning stages 20 of several companies. In the sections below we look at each of the end point combinations possible in a full Internet telephony service. The most important aspects relate to the PSTN to Internet gateway capabilities. Of particular interest is 25 the possibility of providing the PSTN caller with one-step dialing to his called party. The one-step dialing solutions discussed below are in the context of the North American numbering plan. There are essentially four cases: PC to PC; 30 PC to PSTN; PSTN to PC; and PSTN to PSTN. The first case is addressed by today's IP Phone software. The second and third case are similar but not identical and each requires a gateway 1 5-4 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 between the PSTN and the Internet. The last case uses the Internet as a long distance network for two PSTN telephones. a) PC to PC (1) Directory Service 5 To facilitate PC to PC Internet Telephony a directory service is needed to find the IP address of the called party based on a name presented by the calling party Early internet telephony software utilized a modified internet chat server as a meeting place. More recently, internet telephony software is replacing the chat server with a directory service which will uniquely 10 identify internet telephone users (perhaps by email address). To receive calls, customers would register with the directory service (for a fee, with recurring charges) and would make their location (IP address) known to the directory system whenever they connect to the Internet and want to be available for calls. The best way to accomplish automatic notification is to 15 get agreement between the vendors of IP phone software on a protocol to notify the directory service whenever the software is started (automatic presence notification). It would also be desirable, as an option, to find a way to automatically invoke the IP phone software when the IP stack is started. 20 The directory service is envisioned as a distributed system, somewhat like the Internet Domain Name System, for scalability. This is not to imply, necessarily, the user@foo.com format for user identification. Theoretically only the called parties need to be registered. If the calling 25 party is not registered, then the charge for the call (if there is one) could be made to the called party (a collect call). Alternatively, we can insist that the caller also be registered in the directory and billed through that mechanism (this is desirable since we charge for the registration and avoid the complications that collect calls require). A charge for the call setup is billed, 30 but not for the duration, over and above the usual Internet charges. Duration charges already apply to the dial up Internet user and Internet usage charges, both for dial up and dedicated usage, are probably not too far away.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Collect calls from a registered user may be required to meet market demand. A scheme for identifying such calls to the called party must be devised, along with a mechanism for the called party to accept or reject the collect call. The directory service will track the ability of the called software 5 to support this feature by version number (or, alternatively, this could be a matter for online negotiation between the IP telephony software packages). In the event of collect calls (assuming the caller is not registered), the caller could claim to be anyone she chooses. The directory service will force the caller to take on a temporary "assigned" identity (for the duration of the 10 call) so the called party will know this is an unverified caller. Since IP addresses are not necessarily fixed, one cannot rely on them to identify parties. (2) Interoperability 15 Nearly all IP phone software packages on the market today use different voice encoding and protocols to exchange the voice information. To facilitate useful connections the directory will store the type and version (and possibly options) of Internet phone software being used. To make this work effectively software vendors will report this information automatically 20 to the directory service. This information will be used to determine interoperability when a call is placed. If the parties cannot interoperate, an appropriate message must be sent to the caller. As an alternative, or in addition to registration of software type, a negotiation protocol could be devised to determine interoperability on the fly, but all packages would 25 have to "speak" it. There is a question of whether translations between IP phone encoding can be performed with acceptable quality to the end user. Such a service could have a duration and or volume fee associated with it, which might limit the 30 desirability of its use. Also, after a shake out period we expect only a few different schemes to exist and they will have interoperability, perhaps through an industry agreed lowest common denominator compression and signaling protocol. So far, all the IP phone software vendors we have contacted are in favor of an Esperanto that will permit interoperability. If 1 56 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 this comes to pass the life span of the translation services will be short, probably making them not economically attractive. We can help the major software vendors seek consensus on a "common" 5 compression scheme and signaling protocol that will provide the needed interoperability. Once the major vendors support this method the others will follow. This is already happening, with the recent announcements from Intel, Microsoft, Netscape, and VocalTec that they will all support the H.323 standard in coming months. This can be automatically detected at call 10 setup time. The directory service would keep track of which versions of which software can interoperate. To facilitate this functionality the automatic notification of presence should include the current software version. This way upgrades can be dynamically noted in the directory service. Some scheme must also be defined to allow registration 15 information to be passed between software packages so if a user switches packages she is able to move the registration information to the new application. There is no reason to object if the user has two applications each with the same registration information. The directory service will know what the user is currently running as part of the automatic presence 20 notification. This will cause a problem only if the user can run more than one IP phone package at the same time. If the market requires this ability the directory service could be adapted to deal with it. The problem could also be overcome through the use of negotiation methods between interacting IP phone software packages. 25 (3) Call Progress Signaling If the user is reachable through the directory system, but is currently engaged in a voice connection, then a call waiting message (with caller ID, something which is not available in the PSTN call waiting service) is sent to 30 the called party and a corresponding message is sent back to the caller. If the user is reachable through the directory system, but is currently not running his voice software (IP address responds, but not the application see below for verification that this is the party in question) then an i S-1 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 appropriate message is returned to the caller. (As an option an email could be sent to the called party to alert him to the call attempt. An additional option would be to allow the caller to enter a voice message and attach the "voice mail" to the email. The service could also signal the caller to 5 indicate: busy, unreachable, active but ignored call waiting, etc. Other notification methods to the called party can also be offered, such as FAX or paging. In each case, the notification can include the caller's identity, when known.) Once the directory system is distributed it will be necessary to query the other copies if contact cannot be made based on local 10 information. This system provides the ability to have various forms of notification, and to control the parameters of those forms. (4) Party Identification A critical question is how will the directory service know that a called party 15 is no longer where she was last reported (i.e., has "gone away"). The dialed in party might drop off the network in a variety of ways (dialed line dropped, PC hung, Terminal Server crashed) without the ability to explicitly inform the directory service of his change in status. Worse yet, the user might have left the network and another user with a voice application might 20 be assigned the same IP address. (This is OK if the new caller is a registered user with automatic presence notification; the directory service could then detect the duplicate IP address. There may still be some timing problems between distributed parts of the directory service.) Therefore, some scheme must exist for the directory service to determine that the 25 customer is still at the last announced location. One approach to this is to implement a shared secret with the application, created at registration time. Whenever the directory system is contacted by the software (such as automatic presence notification or call initialization) 30 or attempts to contact the called party at the last known location, it can send a challenge (like CHAP) to the application and verify the response. Such a scheme eliminates the need for announcing "I am no longer here", or wasteful keep alive messages. A customer can disconnect or turn off his IP phone application at any time without concern for notification to the WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 directory system. If multiple IP phone applications are supported, by the directory service, each may do the challenge differently. (5) Other Services 5 Encrypted internet telephone conversations will require a consensus from the software vendors to minimize the number of encryption setup mechanisms. This will be another interoperability resolution function for the directory service. The directory service can provide support for public key applications and can provide public key certificates issued by suitable 10 certificate authorities. The user can also specify on the directory service, that his PC be called (dial out) if she is not currently on-line. Charges for the dial out can be billed to the called party, just as would happen for call forwarding in POTS. The call 15 detail record (CDR) for the dial out needs to be associated with the call detail of an entity in the IP Phone system (the called party). Note that this is different than the PC to PSTN case in that no translation of IP encoded voice to PCM is required, indeed the dial out will use TCP/IP over PPP. If the dial out fails an appropriate message is sent back. 20 The dial out could be domestic or international. It is unlikely that the international case will exist in practice due to the cost. However, there is nothing to preclude that case and it requires no additional functionality to perform. 25 b) PC to PSTN The PSTN to Internet gateway must support translating PCM to multiple encoding schemes to interact with software from various vendors. Alternatively the common compression scheme could be used once it is 30 implemented. Where possible, the best scheme, from a quality stand point, should be used. In many cases it will the software vendor's proprietary version. To accomplish that, telcos will need to license the technology from selected vendors. Some vendors will do the work needed to make their scheme work on telco platforms.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 (1) Domestic PSTN Destination The PC caller needs to be registered to place calls to the PSTN. The only exception to this would be if collect calls from the Internet are to be allowed. This will add complications with respect to billing. To call a PSTN 5 destination the PC caller specifies a domestic E. 164 address. The directory system maps that address to an Internet dial out unit based on the NPA NXX. The expectation is that the dial out unit will be close to the destination and therefore will be a local call. One problem is how to handle the case where there is no "local" dial out unit. Another problem is what to 10 do if the "local" out dial unit is full or otherwise not available. Three approaches are possible. One approach is to offer the dial out service only when local calls are possible. A second approach is to send a message back to the caller to inform him that a long distance call must be placed on his behalf and request permission to incur these charges. A third approach 15 is to place the call regardless and with no notification. Each of these cases requires a way to correlate the cost of the dial out call (PSTN CDR) with the billing record of the call originator (via the directory service). 20 The third approach will probably add to the customer support load and result in unhappy customers. The first approach is simple but restrictive. Most users are expected to be very cost conscious, and so might be satisfied with approach one. Approach two affords flexibility for the times the customer wants to proceed anyway, but it adds complexity to the 25 operation. A possible compromise is to use approach one, which will reject the call for the reason that no local out dial is available. We could also add an attribute in the call request that means "I don't care if this ends up as a long distance call." In this case the caller who was rejected, but wants to place the call anyway makes a second call attempt with this attribute set. 30 For customers with money to spare, all PSTN calls could be made with that attribute set. Placing domestic PSTN calls supports the international calling requirement for Internet originated calls from Internet locations outside the US. (6o WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 (2) International PSTN Destinations Calls to an international PSTN station can be done in one of two ways. First, an international call could be placed from a domestic dial out station. 5 This is not an attractive service since it saves no money over the customer making an international telephone call himself. Second, the Internet can be used to carry the call to the destination country and a "local" dial out can be made there. This situation is problematic for it must be agreed to by the carrier at the 10 international destination. This case may be viable in one of two ways. Both ways require a partner at the international destination. One option would be to use a local carrier in the destination country as the partner. A second option would be to use an Internet service provider, or some other service provider connected to the Internet in the destination country. 15 c) PSTN to PC This case appears to be of least interest, although it has some application and is presented here for completeness. 20 As noted in the PC to PSTN case the PSTN to Internet gateway will need to support translating PCM to multiple encoding schemes to interwork with software from various vendors. The directory service is required to identify the called PC. Automatic notification of presence is important to keep the called party reachable. The PSTN caller need not be registered with the 25 directory service, for caller billing will be based on PSTN information. The caller has an E. 164 address that is "constant" and can be used to return calls as well as to do billing. Presumably we can deliver the calling number to the called party as an indication of who is calling. The calling number will not always be available, for technological or privacy reasons. It must 30 be possible to signal the PC software that this is a PSTN call and provide the E. 164 number or indicate that it is unavailable. The service can be based on charging the calling phone. This can be done as if the Internet were the long distance portion of the call. This is possible (61 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 with a second dial tone. If an 800 or local dial service is used it is necessary for the caller to enter billing information. Alternatively a 900 service will allow PSTN caller-based billing. In either case the caller will need to specify the destination "phone number" after the billing information 5 or after dialing the 900 number. A major open issue is how the caller will specify the destination at the second dial tone. Only touch tones are available at best. To simplify entry we could assign an E. 164 address to each directory entry. To avoid 10 confusion with real phone numbers (the PSTN to PSTN case) the numbers need to be under directory control. Perhaps 700 numbers could be used, if there are enough available. Alternatively a special area code could be used. Spelling using the touch tone PAD is a less "user friendly" approach. 15 3. Phone Numbers in the Internet. The best approach is to have an area code assigned. Not only will this keep future options open, but it allows for simpler dialing from day one. Given a legitimate area code the PSTN caller can directly dial the E. 164 address of the PC on the Internet. The telephone system will route the call to an MCI 20 POP where it will be further routed to a PSTN-to-Internet voice gateway. The called number will be used to place the call to the PC, assuming it is on-line and reachable. This allows the PSTN caller to dial the Internet as if it were part of the PSTN. No second dial tone is required and no billing information needs to be entered. The call will be billed to the calling PSTN 25 station, and charges will accrue only if the destination PC answers. Other carriers would be assigned unique area codes and directories should be kept compatible. For domestically originated calls, all of the billing information needed to bill 30 the caller is available and the intelligent network service functionality for third party or other billing methods is available via the second dial tone. 4. Other Internet Telephony Carriers. All this will get more complicated when number portability becomes 1 6 2.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 required. It may be desirable to assign a country code to the Internet. Although this would make domestic dialing more complex (it appears that dialing anything other than 1 plus a ten digit number significantly reduces the use of the service) it may have some desirable benefits. In any event 5 the assignment of an area code (or several) and the assignment of a country code are not mutually exclusive. The use of a country code would make dialing more geographically uniform. 5. International Access. 10 It is unlikely that an international call will be made to the US to enter the Internet in the US. If it happens, however, the system will have enough information to do the caller-based billing for this case without any additional functionality. 15 Another possibility is that we will (possibly in partnership) set up to handle incoming calls outside the US and enter the Internet in that country to return to the US, or go anywhere else on the Internet. If the partner is a local carrier, then the partner will have the information needed for billing the PSTN caller. 20 a) Collect Calls PSTN to PC collect calls require several steps. First, the call to the PSTN to Internet gateway must be collect. The collect call could then be signaled in the same way as PC to PC calls. It will be necessary to indicate that the 25 caller is PSTN based and include the calling E. 164 address if it is available. b) PSTN to PSTN The choice of voice compression and protocol scheme for passing voice between PSTN to Internet gateways is entirely under the carrier's control. 30 Various service levels could be offered by varying the compression levels offered. Different charges could associated with each level. The caller would select a quality level; perhaps by dialing different 800 number services first. (63 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 (1) Domestic Destination Neither the calling nor the called parties need be registered with the directory service to place calls across the Internet. The caller dials a PSTN to-Internet gateway and receives a second dial tone and specifies, using 5 touch tones, the billing information and the destination domestic E. 164 address. 900 service could be used as well. The directory service (this could be separate system, but the directory service already has mapping functionality to handle the PC to PSTN dial out case) will be used to map the call to an out dialer to place a local call, if possible. Billing is to the 10 caller and the call detail of the out dial call needs to be associated with the call detail of the inbound caller. An immediate question is how to deal with the case where the nearest dial out unit to the number called results in a long distance or toll call, as 15 discussed in PC to PSTN case. The situation here is different to the extent that notification must be by voice, and authorization to do a long distance, or toll call dial out must be made by touch tones. In the event of a long distance dial out the Internet could be skipped altogether and the call could go entirely over the PSTN. It is not clear that there is any cost savings by 20 using the Internet in this case. (2) One Step Dialing The problem is that the destination PSTN number needs to be entered and, somehow, it needs to be indicated that the destination is to be reached via 25 the Internet rather than the conventional long distance network. This selection criteria can be conveyed according to the following alternatives: Assign a new 1OXXX number that is the carrier's Internet. By subscription. 30 The first method allows the caller to select the Internet as the long distance carrier on a call by call basis. The second method makes the Internet the default long distance network. In the second case a customer can return to the carrier's conventional long distance network by dialing the carrier's 10XXX code.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 The first method has the draw back that the caller must dial an extra five digits. Although many will do this to save money, requiring any extra dialing will reduce the total number of users of the service. The second 5 method avoids the need to dial extra digits, but requires a commitment by the subscriber to predominately use the Internet as his long distance network. The choice is a lower price with a lower quality of service. In the PSTN to PSTN case it is possible to consider offering several grades of 10 service at varying prices. These grades will be based on a combination of the encoding scheme and the amount of compression (bandwidth) applied, and will offer lower cost for lower bandwidth utilization. To signal the grade of service desired three 1OXXX codes could be used. By 15 subscription a particular grade would be the default and other service grades would be selected by a 1OXXX code. (3) Service Quality The service quality will be measured by two major factors. First, sound 20 quality, the ability to recognize the caller's voice, and second by the delays that are not present in the PSTN. On the first point we can say that most of the offerings available today provide an acceptable level of caller recognition. Delay, however, is another 25 story. PC to PC users experience delays of a half second to two seconds. As noted in the introduction much of the delay can be attributed to the sound cards and the low speed dial access. In the case of PSTN to PSTN service both these factors are removed. 30 The use of DSPs in the PSTN to Internet voice gateway will keep compression and protocol processing times very low. The access to the gateway will be at a full 64 kbps on the PSTN side and likely Ethernet on the Internet side. Gateways will typically be located close to the backbone so the router on the Ethernet will likely be connected to the backbone by a WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 T3 line. This combination should provide a level of service with very low delays. Some buffering will be needed to mask the variable delays in the backbone, but that can likely be kept to under a quarter of a second in the domestic carrier backbone. 5 The main differentiation of quality of service will be voice recognition which will be related to bandwidth usage. If needed, the proposed IETF Resource reSerVation setup Protocol (RSVP) can be used to assure lower delay variation, but the need for the added complexity of RSVP is yet to be 10 established. Also, questions remain regarding the scalability of RSVP for large-scale internet telephony. (4) Costs An open question is whether using the Internet for long distance voice in place of the switched telephone network is actually cheaper. Certainly it is 15 priced that way today, but do current prices reflect real costs? Routers are certainly cheaper than telephone switches, and the 10 kbps (or so) that the IP voice software uses (essentially half duplex) is certainly less than the dedicated 128 kbps of a full duplex 64 kbps DSO. Despite these comparisons the question remains. 20 Although routers are much cheaper than telephone switches, they have much less capacity. Building large networks with small building blocks gets not only expensive, but quickly reaches points of diminishing returns. We already have seen the Internet backbone get overloaded with the 25 current crop of high end routers, and they are yet to experience the significant traffic increase that a successful Internet Telephony offering would bring. We are saying two things here. 1. It is unlikely that the current Internet backbone can support a major 30 traffic increase associated with a successful internet telephony service. We need to wait for the technology of routers to improve. 2. The second issue raised above was that of bandwidth usage. Indeed 10 kbps half duplex (a little more when both parties occasionally speak at 1 66 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 the same time, but much less during periods of silence) is considerably less than 64 kbps full duplex dedicated capacity. Two points should be noted on this argument. 5 First, bandwidth is cheap, at least, when there is spare fiber in the ground. Once the last strand is used the next bit per second is very expensive. Second, on transoceanic routes, where bandwidth is much more expensive, we are already doing bandwidth compression of voice to 9.6 kbps. This is essentially equivalent to the 10 kbps of Internet Telephony. 10 Why is IP capacity priced so much cheaper than POTS? The answer is that the pricing difference is partly related to the subsidized history of the Internet. There is a process in motion today, by the Internet backbone providers, to address some of the cost issues of the Internet. The essence 15 of the process is the recognition that the Internet requires a usage charge. Such charges already apply to some dial up users, but typically do not apply to users with dedicated connections. If PC to PC Internet Telephony becomes popular, users will tend to keep 20 their PCs connected for long periods. This will make them available to receive calls. It will also drive up hold times on dial in ports. This will have a significant effect on the capital and recurring costs of the Internet. (5) Charges 25 A directory service must provide the functions described above and collect enough information to bill for the service. A charge can be made for directory service as well as for registration (a one time fee plus a monthly fee), call setup, but probably not for duration. Duration is already charged for the Internet dial in user and is somewhat bundled for the LAN-attached 30 user. Usage charges for Internet service may be coming soon (as discussed above). Duration charges are possible for the incoming and outgoing PSTN segments. Incoming PSTN calls may be charged as the long distance segment by using ( 6 T WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 a special area code. Other direct billing options are 900 calls and calling card (or credit card) billing options (both require a second dial tone). Requiring all callers (except incoming PSTN calls) to be registered with the 5 directory service will eliminate the immediate need for most collect calling. This will probably not be a great impediment since most users of the IP Phone service will want to receive as well as originate calls, and registration is required for receiving calls. Callers could have unlisted entries which would be entries with an E. 164 address, but no name. People given this 10 E. 164 address could call the party (from the PSTN or from a PC), as is the case in the present phone system. Different compression levels can be used to provide different quality of voice reproduction and at the same time use more or less Internet transit 15 resources. For PC to PC connections the software packages at both ends can negotiate the amount of bandwidth to be used. This negotiation might be facilitated through the directory service. (6) Technical Issues 20 It will be necessary to coordinate with IP Phone vendors to implement the registration, automatic presence notification, and verification capabilities. We will also need to add the ability to communicate service requests. These will include authorization for collect calls specifying attributes such as "place a dial out call to the PSTN even if it is long distance" and others to be 25 determined. Registration with a directory is a required feature that will be illuminated below. Using the DNS model for the distributed directory service will likely facilitate this future requirement. Assignment of a pseudo E. 164 number 30 to directory entries will work best if a real area code is used. If each carrier has an area code it will make interworking between the directory systems much easier. An obvious complication will arise when number portability becomes required. 16S WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 IP Telephony, in accordance with a preferred embodiment, is here and will stay for at least the near future. A combination of a carrier level service, based on this technology, and a growth in the capacity of routers may lead to the Internet carrying a very significant percentage of future long distance 5 traffic. The availability of higher speed Internet access from homes, such as cable modems, will make good quality consumer IP Telephony service more easily attained. The addition of video will further advance the desirability of the 10 service. More mundane, but of interest, is FAX services across the Internet. This is very similar to the voice service discussed above. Timing issues related to FAX protocols make this a more difficult offering in some ways. 15 Conferencing using digital bridges in the Internet make voice and video services even more attractive. This can be done by taking advantage of the multi-casting technology developed in the Internet world. With multi casting the cost of providing such services will be reduced. 20 C. Internet Telephony Services Figure 1C is a block diagram of an internet telephony system in accordance with a preferred embodiment. Processing commences when telephone 200 is utilized to initiate a call by going off hook when a party dials a telephone 25 number. Telephone 200 is typically connected via a conventional two-wire subscriber loop through which analog voice signals are conducted in both directions. One of ordinary skill in the art will readily realize that a phone can be connected via fiber, ISDN or other means without departing from the teaching of the invention. Alternatively, a person could dial a phone 30 number from a computer 210, paging system, video conferencing system or other telephony capable devices. The call enters a Local Exchange Carrier (LEC) 220 which is another name for a Regional Bell Operating Company (RBOC) central switch. The call is terminated by a LEC at a leased Common Business Line (CBL) 230 of an interchange carrier such as MCI.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 As a result of the termination to the CBL, the MCI Switch 221 receives an offhook indication. The Switch 221 responds to the offhook by initiating a DAL Hotline 5 procedure request to the Network Control System (NCS) which is also referred to as a Data Access Point (DAP) 240. The switch 221 is simplified to show it operating on a single DS 1 line, but it will be understood that switching among many lines actually occurs so that calls on thousands of individual subscriber lines can be routed through the switch on their way 10 to ultimate destinations. The DAP 240 returns a routing response to the originating switch 221 which instructs the originating switch 221 to route the call to the destination switch 230 or 231. The routing of the call is performed by the DAP 240 translating the transaction information into a specific SWitch ID (SWID) and a specific Terminating Trunk Group (TTG) 15 that corresponds to the route out of the MCI network necessary to arrive at the appropriate destination, in this case either switch 230 or 231. An alternative embodiment of the hybrid network access incorporates the internet access facility into a switch 232. This integrated solution allows the switch 232 to attach directly to the internet 295 which reduces the 20 number of network ports necessary to connect the network to the internet 295. The DAP sends this response information to the originating switch 221 which routes the original call to the correct Terminating Switch 230 or 231. The terminating switch 230 or 231then finds the correct Terminating Trunk Group (TTG) as indicated in the original DAP response and routes 25 the call to the ISN 250 or directly to the modem pool 270 based on the routing information from the DAP 240. If the call were destined for the Intelligent Services Network (ISN) 250, the DAP 240 would instruct the switch to terminate at switch 230. 30 Based upon analysis of the dialed digits, the ISN routes the call to an Audio Response Unit (ARU) 252. The ARU 252 differentiates voice, fax, and modem calls. If the call is a from a modem, then the call is routed to a modem pool 271 for interfacing to an authentication server 291to authenticate the user. If the call is authenticated, then the call is /70 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 forwarded through the UDP/IP or TCP/IP LAN 281 or other media communication network to the Basic Internet Protocol Platform (BIPP) 295 for further processing and ultimate delivery to a computer or other media capable device. 5 If the call is voice, then the ARU prompts the caller for a card number and a terminating number. The card number is validated using a card validation database. Assuming the card number is valid, then if the terminating number is in the US (domestic), then the call would be routed 10 over the current MCI voice lines as it is today. If the terminating number is international, then the call is routed to a CODEC 260 that converts the voice to TCP/IP or UDP/IP and sends it via the LAN 280 to the internet 295. The call is routed through a gateway at the terminating end and ultimately to a phone or other telephony capable device. 15 Figure 1D is a block diagram of a hybrid switch in accordance with a preferred embodiment. Reference numbers have been conserved from Figure 1C, and an additional block 233 has been added. Block 233 contains the connecting apparatus for attaching the switch directly to the 20 internet or other communication means. The details of the connecting apparatus are presented in Figure 1E. The principal difference between the hybrid switch of Figure 1D and the switches presented in Figure 1C is the capability of switch 221 attaching directly to the Internet 295. 25 Figure 1E is a block diagram of the connecting apparatus 233 illustrated in Figure 1D in accordance with a preferred embodiment. A message bus 234 connects the switch fabric to an internal network 236 and 237. The internal network in turn receives input from a Dynamic Telephony Connection (DTC) 238 and 239 which in turn provides demuxing for 30 signals originating from a plurality of DS1 lines 242, 243, 244 and 245. DS 1 lines, described previously, refer to the conventional bit format on the TI lines. To accommodate the rapidly diversifying telephony / media environment, a /'7/ WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 preferred embodiment utilizes a separate switch connection for the other internal network 237. A Spectrum Peripheral Module (SPM) 247 is utilized to handle telephony/media signals received from a pooled switch matrix 248, 249, 251, 254, 261-268. The pooled switch matrix is managed by 5 the SPM 247 through switch commands through control lines. The SPM 247 is in communication with the service provider's call processing system which determines which of the lines require which type of hybrid switch processing. For example, fax transmissions generate a tone which identifies the transmission as digital data rather than digitized voice. Upon 10 detecting a digital data transmission, the call processing system directs the call circuitry to allow the particular input line to connect through the pooled switch matrix to a corresponding line with the appropriate processing characteristics. Thus, for example, an internet connection would be connected to a TCP/IP Modem line 268 to assure proper 15 processing of the signal before it was passed on through the internal network 237 through the message bus 234 to the originating switch 221 of Figure 1D. Besides facilitating direct connection of a switch to the internet, the pooled 20 switch matrix also increases the flexibility of the switch for accommodating current communication protocols and future communication protocols. Echo cancellation means 261 is efficiently architected into the switch in a manner which permits echo cancellation on an as-needed basis. A relatively small number of echo cancellers can effectively service a relatively 25 large number of individual transmission lines. The pooled switch matrix can be configured to dynamically route either access-side transmissions or network-side transmissions to OC3 demux, DSP processing or other specialized processing emanating from either direction of the switch. 30 Moreover, a preferred embodiment as shown in Figure 1E provides additional system efficiencies such as combining multiplexer stages in a port device on one side of a voice or data circuit switch to enable direct connection of a fiber-optic cable to the multiplexed output of the port device. Moreover, redundancy is architected into the switch through the / 7 2 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 alternate routes available over CEM 248 / 249 and RM 251 / 254 to alternate paths for attaching various communication ports. When the switch 221 of Figure 1D, is connected to the internet 295, the 5 processing is provided as follows. A line from the internet 295 enters the switch through a modem port 268 and enters the pooled switch matrix where demux and other necessary operations are performed before the information is passed to the switch 221 through the internal network 237 and the message bus 234. The modules 261-268 provide plug and play 10 capability for attaching peripherals from various communication disciplines. Figure 1F is a block diagram of a hybrid (internet-telephony) switch in accordance with a preferred embodiment. The hybrid switch 221 switches 15 circuits on a public switched telephone network (PSTN) 256 with TCP/IP or UDP/IP ports on an internet network 295. The hybrid switch 221 is composed of PSTN network interfaces (247, 260), high-speed Internet network interfaces (271, 272, 274), a set of Digital Signal Processor (DSP)s (259, 263), a time-division multiplexed bus 262, and a high-speed data 20 bus 275. The hybrid internet telephony switch 221 grows out of the marriage of router architectures with circuit switching architectures. A call arriving on the PSTN interface 257 is initiated using ISDN User Part (ISUP) signaling, 25 with an Initial Address Message (IAM), containing a called party number and optional calling party number. The PSTN interface 257 transfers the IAM to the host processor 270. The host processor 270 examines the PSTN network interface of origin, the called party number and other IAM parameters, and selects an outgoing network interface for the call. The 30 selection of the outgoing network interface is made on the basis of routing tables. The switch 221 may also query an external Service Control Point (SCP) 276 on the internet to request routing instructions. Routing instructions, whether derived locally on the switch 221 or derived from the SCP 276, may be defined in terms of a subnet to use to reach a particular / 73 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 destination. Like a router, each of the network interfaces in the switch 221 is labeled with a subnet address. Internet Protocol (IP) addresses contain the subnet 5 address on which the computer is located. PSTN addresses do not contain IP subnet addresses, so subnets are mapped to PSTN area codes and exchanges. The switch 221 selects routes to IP addresses and PSTN addresses by selecting an interface to a subnet which will take the packets closer to the destination subnet or local switch. 10 The call can egress the switch via another PSTN interface 258, or can egress the switch via a high-speed internet network interface 273. If the call egresses the switch via the PSTN interface 258, the call can egress as a standard PCM Audio call, or can egress the switch as a modem call 15 carrying compressed digital audio. In the case where the call egresses the switch 221 as a standard PCM audio call, the PCM audio is switched from PSTN Interface 257 to PSTN Interface 258 using the TDM bus 260. Similarly, PCM audio is switched 20 from PSTN Interface 258 to PSTN Interface 257 using the TDM bus 260. In the case where the call egresses the switch 221 as a modem call carrying compressed digital audio, the switch 221 can initiate an outbound call to a PSTN number through a PSTN interface 258, and attach across the TDM 25 Bus 260 a DSP resource 259 acting as a modem. Once a modem session is established with the destination, the incoming PCM audio on PSTN interface 257 can be attached to a DSP Resource 263 acting as an audio codec to compress the audio. Example audio formats include ITU G.729 and G.723. The compressed audio is packetized into Point to Point Protocol 30 (PPP) packets on the DSP 263, and transferred to DSP 259 for modem delivery over the PSTN Interface 258. In the case where the call egresses the switch 221 on a high speed internet interface 272, the switch 221 attaches the PSTN Interface 257 to the DSP WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 resource 263 acting as an audio codec to compress the PCM audio, and packetize the audio into UDP/IP packets for transmission over the Internet network. The UDP/IP packets are transferred from the DSP resource 263 over the high-speed data bus 275 to the high-speed internet network 5 interface 272. Figure 1G is a block diagram showing the software processes involved in the hybrid internet telephony switch 221. Packets received on the internet network interface 296 are transferred to the packet classifier 293. The 10 packet classifier 293 determines whether the packet is a normal IP packet, or is part of a routing protocol (ARP, RARP, RIP, OSPF, BGP, CIDR) or management protocol (ICMP). Routing and management protocol packets are handed off to the Routing Daemon 294. The Routing Daemon 294 maintains routing tables for the use of the packet classifier 293 and packet 15 scheduler 298. Packets classified as normal IP packets are transferred either to the packetizer/depacketizer 292 or to the packet scheduler 298. Packets to be converted to PCM audio are transferred to the packetizer/depacketizer 292. The packetizer/depacketizer takes packet contents and hands them to the codec 291, which converts compressed 20 audio into PCM Audio, then transfers PCM audio to the PSTN Interface 290. Normal IP packets to be sent to other internet devices are handed by the packet classifier 293 to the packet scheduler 298, which selects the 25 outgoing network interface for the packet based on the routing tables. The packets are placed upon an outbound packet queue for the selected outgoing network interface, and the packets are transferred to the high speed network interface 296 for deliver across the internet 295. D. Call 30 This section describes how calls are processed in the context of the networks described above. 1. VNET Call Processing. Figure 1OA illustrates a Public Switched Network (PSTN) 1000 comprising a local exchange (LEC) 1020 through which a calling party uses a WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 telephone 1021 or computer 1030 to gain access to a switched network including a plurality of MCI switches 1011, 1010. Directory services for routing telephone calls and other information is provided by the directory services 1031 which is shared between the Public Branch Exchanges 5 1041, 1040 and the PSTN. This set of scenarios allows a subscriber to use either a PC, telephone or both to make or receive VNET calls. In this service, the subscriber may have the following equipment: A telephone that uses VNET routing is available today in MCI's network. In 10 this case, VNET calls arriving in the MCI PSTN network using the subscriber's VNET number are routed with the assistance of the DAP just as they are routed today. A PC that is capable of Internet telephony. Calls are routed into and out of this PC with the assistance of an Internet or Intranet Directory Service that 15 tracks the logged-in status and current IP address of the VNET user. A PC and a telephone is used to receive and make calls. In this case, a user profile will contain information that allows the DAP and Directory Service to make a determination whether to send an incoming call to the PC or to the telephone. For example, the user may always want calls to go 20 to their PC when they are logged-in and to their phone at all other times. Or, they may want their calls to always go to their PC during normal work hours and to their phone at other times. This type of control over the decision to send incoming calls to a phone or PC may be controlled by the subscriber. 25 The following scenarios apply to this type of service. A PC to PC call where the Directory service is queried for the location of the terminating PC: PCs connected to an Intranet using the Intranet as transport. 30 Both PC's connected to a corporate Intranet via dial up access. Both PCs on separate Intranets with the connection made through the Internet. Both PCs on the Internet through a dial-up connection. One PC directly connected to a corporate Intranet and the other PC using a 16 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 dial-up connection to the Internet. One PC using a dial up connection to a corporate Intranet and the other PC using a dial-up connection to the Internet. Both PCs on separate Intranets with the connection made through the 5 PSTN. One or both PCs connected to a corporate Intranet using dial-up access. One or both of the PCs connected to an Internet Service Provider. One or both of the ITGs as an in-network element. 1 10 A PC to phone call where a directory service is queried to determine that the terminating VNET is a phone. The PC then contacts an Internet Telephony Gateway to place a call to the terminating phone. PC on an intranet using a private ITG connected to the PSTN with the ITG as an out of network element. The destination phone is connected to a PBX. 15 The PC may also be using a public ITG that must be access through the Internet. The PC may be connected to the corporate Intranet using dial-up access. PC on an intranet using a private ITG connected to the PSTN with the ITG as an in-network element. The destination phone is connected to a PBX. 20 .The PC may also be using a public ITG that must be accessed through the Internet. .The PC may be connected to the corporate Intranet using dial-up access. .PC on an intranet using a private ITG connected to the PSTN with the ITG as an in-network element. The destination phone is connected to the 25 PSTN. .The PC may also be using a public ITG that must be accessed through the Internet. .The PC may be connected to the corporate Intranet using dial-up access. .The ITG may be an in-network element. 30 .PC on an intranet using a private ITG connected to a PBX with the traffic carried over the Intranet. .PC is at a different site than the destination phone with the traffic carried over the Internet or intranet. .The PC may be using a dial-up connection to the corporate Intranet.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 A phone to PC call where the DAP or PBX triggers out to the Internet Directory Service to identify the terminating IP address and ITG for routing the call. The call is then routed through the PSTN to an ITG and a 5 connection is made from the ITG to the destination PC. Possible Variations: Same variations as the PC to phone. A Phone to Phone call where the DAP or PBX must query the Directory 10 Service to determine whether the call should be terminated to the subscriber's phone or PC. Possible Variations: Both Phones are on a PBX; One phone is on a PBX and the other phone is on the PSTN; and 15 Both phones are on the PSTN. For each of these variations, the DAP and Directory Service may be a single entity or they may be separate entities. Also, the directory service may be a private service or it may be a shared service. Each of the scenarios will be discussed below with reference to a call flow description in accordance with 20 a preferred embodiment. A description of the block elements associated with each of the call flow diagrams is presented below to assist in understanding the embodiments. 2. Descriptions of Block Elements. Element Description 25 Phl Traditional analog phone connected to a Local Exchange Carrier. For the purposes of these VNET scenarios, the phone is capable of making VNET calls, local calls or DDD calls. In some scenarios the VNET access may be done through The customer dials a 700 number with the last seven digits being the destination VNET number for the call. 30 The LEC will know that the phone is picked to MCI and route the call to the MCI switch. The MCI switch will strip off the "700", perform and ANI lookup to identify the customer ID and perform VNET routing using the VNET number and customer ID. The customer dials an 800 number and is prompted to enter their Social Security number (or other WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 unique id) and a VNET number. The switch passes this information to the DAP which does the VNET translation. PC 1 PC2 Personal computer that has the capability to dial in to an Internet service provider or a corporate intranet for the purpose of 5 making or receiving Internet telephony calls. The following access methods might be used for this PC Internet service provider The PC dials an 800 number (or any other dial plan) associated with the service provider and is routed via normal routing to the modem bank for that provider. The user of the PC then follows normal log-on procedures to 10 connect to the Internet. Corporate Intranet The PC dials an 800 number (or any other dial plan) associated with the corporate Intranet and is routed via normal routing to the modem bank for that Intranet. The user of the PC then follows normal log-on procedures to connect to the Intranet. 15 LEC SF1 Switching fabric for a local exchange carrier. This fabric provides the connection between Phi/PC 1/PC2 and MCI's telephone network. It also provides local access to customer PBXs. MCI SF1 MCI SF2 Switching fabric for MCI (or for the purpose of patenting, any telephony service provider). These SFs are capable of 20 performing traditional switching capabilities for MCI's network. They are able to make use of advanced routing capabilities such as those found in MCI's NCS (Network Control System). NCS The NCS provides enhanced routing services for MCI. Some of the products that are supported on this platform are: 800, EVS, Universal 25 Freephone, Plus Freephone, Inbound International, SAC(ISAC) Codes, Paid 800, 8XX/Vnet Meet Me Conference Call, 900, 700, PCS, Vnet, Remote Access to Vnet, Vnet Phone Home, CVNS, Vnet Card, MCI Card (950 Cards), Credit Card and GETS Card. In support of the existing VNET services, the DAP provides private dialing plan capabilities to Vnet 30 customers to give them a virtual private network. The DAP supports digit translation, origination screening, supplemental code screening, 800 remote access, and some special features such as network call redirect for this service. To support the call scenarios in this document, the NCS also has the capability to made a data query to directory WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 services in order to route calls to PCs. Dir Svc 1 Dir Svc 2 Internet Directory Services. The directory service performs: Call routing - As calls are made to subscribers using Internet telephony services from MCI, the directory service must be 5 queried to determine where the call should terminate. This may be done based upon factors such as the logged-in status of the subscriber, service subscriptions identifying the subscriber as a PC or phone only user preferred routing choices such as "route to my PC always if I am logged in", or "route to my PC from 8-5 on weekdays, phone all 10 other times", etc. Customer profile management - The directory service must maintain a profile for each subscriber to be able to match VNET numbers to the service subscription and current state of subscribers. Service authorization - As subscribers connect their PCs to an IP telephony service, they must be authorized for use of the service and 15 may be given security tokens or encryption keys to ensure access to the service. This authorization responsibility might also place restrictions upon the types of service a user might be able to access, or introduce range privileges restricting the ability of the subscriber to place certain types of calls. 20 ITG 1 ITG 2 Internet Telephony Gateway - The Internet Telephony Gateway provides a path through which voice calls made be bridged between an IP network and a traditional telephone network. To make voice calls from an IP network to the PSTN, a PC software package is used to establish a connection with the ITG and request that the ITG dial 25 out on the PSTN on behalf of the PC user. Once the ITG makes the connection through the voice network to the destination number, the ITG provides services to convert the IP packetized voice from the PC to voice over the PSTN. Similarly, the ITG will take the voice from the PSTN and convert it to IP packetized voice for the PC. To make voice 30 calls from the PSTN to the IP network, a call will be routed to the ITG via PSTN routing mechanisms. Once the call arrives, the ITG identifies the IP address for the destination of the call, and establishes an IP telephony session with that destination. Once the connection has been established, the ITG provides conversion services between IP packetized I R0 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 voice and PCM voice. ITG 3 ITG 4 These ITGs act in a similar capacity as the ITGs connected to the PSTN, but these ITGs also provide a connection between the corporate Intranet and the PBX. 5 IAD 1 IAD 2 The Internet access device provides general dial-up Internet access from a user's PC to the Internet. This method of connecting to the Internet may be used for Internet telephony, but it may also be simply used for Internet access. When this device is used for Internet telephony, it behaves differently than the ITG. Although the 10 IAD is connected to the PSTN, the information traveling over that interface is not PCM voice, it is IP data packets. In the case of telephony over the IAD, the IP data packets happen to be voice packets, but the IAD has no visibility into those packets and cannot distinguish a voice packet from a data packet. The IAD can be thought of as a modem pool 15 that provides access to the Internet. PBX 1 PBX 2 Private Brach Exchange - This is customer premise equipment that provides connection between phones that are geographically co-located. The PBX also provides a method from those phones to make outgoing calls from the site onto he PSTN. Most PBXs 20 have connections to the LEC for local calls, and a DAL connection to another service provider for VNET type calls. These PBXs also show a connection to a Directory Service for assistance with call routing. This capability does not exist in today's PBXs, but in the VNET call flows for this document, a possible interaction between the PBX and the Directory 25 Service is shown. These PBXs also show a connection to an ITG. These ITGs provide the bridging service between a customer's Intranet and the traditional voice capabilities of the PBX. Ph11 Phl2 Ph2l Ph22 These are traditional PBX connected phones. 30 PC 11 PC12 PC21 PC22 These are customer premises PCs that are connected to customer Intranets. For the purposes of these call flows, the PCs have Internet Telephony software that allow the user to make or receive calls.

WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 E. Re-usable Call Flow Blocks 1. VNET PC connects to a corporate intranet and logs in to a directory service. PC Directory Services VNET, *PasswordIP, 1) PC Online Conficuration Data Authenticate user VNET PC connects 2) PC Online Ack Update Profile with IP to corporate Intranet 40Ack, *security key and Config data Optional data depending upon implementation 5 1. The user for a PC connects their computer to an IP network, turns on the computer and starts an IP telephony software package. The software package sends a message to a directory service to register the computer as "on-line" and available to 10 receive calls. This on-line registration message would most likely be sent to the directory service in an encrypted format for security. The encryption would be based upon an common key shared between the PC and the directory service. This message contains the following information: 15 Some sort of identification of the computer or virtual private network number that may be used to address this computer. In this VNET scenario, this is the VNET number assigned to the individual using this PC. This information will be used to identify the customer profile associated with 20 this user. It may also be some identification such as name, employee id, or any unique ID which the directory service can associate with a VNET customer profile. A password or some other mechanism for authenticating the user identified by the VNET number. 25 The IP address identifying the port that is being used to connect this computer to the network. This address will be used by other IP telephony software packages to establish a connection to this computer. The message may contain additional information about the 1R2 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 specifics of the software package or PC being used for IP telephony and the configuration/capabilities of the software or PC. As an example it might be important for a calling PC to know what type of compression algorithms are being used, 5 or other capabilities of the software or hardware that might affect the ability of other users to connect to them or use special features during a connection. The location of the directory service to receive this "on-line" message will be determined by the data distribution 10 implementation for this customer. In some cases this may be a private database for a company or organization subscribing to a VNET service, in other cases it might be a national or worldwide database for all customers of a service provider (MCI). This location is configured in the telephony software package running 15 on the PC. 2. When the directory service receives this message from the PC, it validates the user by using the VNET number to look up a user profile and comparing the password in the profile to the password received. Once the user has been validated, the 20 directory service will update the profile entry associated with the VNET number (or other unique ID) to indicate that the user is "on line" and is located at the specified IP address. The directory service will also update the profile with the configuration data sent during the login request. Upon successful update of the, the 25 directory service sends a response back to the specified IP address indicating that the message was received and processed. This acknowledgment message may also contain some sort of security or encryption key to guarantee secure communication with the directory service when issuing additional commands. 30 When the PC receives this response message it may choose to notify the user via a visual or audible indicator. Variation for On-line registration The call flow segment shown earlier in this section showed a PC on-line registration where the PC simply sends a password to the directory WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 service to log-on. A variation for this log-on procedure would be the following call flow segment where the directory service presents a challenge and the PC user must respond to the challenge to complete the log-in sequence. This variation on the log-in sequence is not shown in 5 any of the call flows contained within this document, but it could be used in any of them. PC Directory Services VNET.IP. *Configutration Data, 1) PC Online 0 Calculate 10 2) Directory Service Challenge Challenge Challenge Calculate 3) Challenge Response RAuthenticate user Update Profile with [P 4) PC Online Ack Aand Config data Optional data depending upon implementation 15 1. The user for a PC connects their computer to an IP network, turns on the computer and starts an IP telephony software package. The software package sends a message to a directory service to register the computer as "on-line" and available to 20 receive calls. This on-line registration message would most likely be sent to the directory service in an encrypted format for security. The encryption would be based upon an common key shared between the PC and the directory service. This message contains the following information: 25 Some sort of identification of the computer or virtual private network number that may be used to address this computer. In this VNET scenario, this is the VNET number assigned to the individual using this PC. This information will be used to identify the customer profile associated with 30 this user. It may also be some identification such as name, employee id, or any unique ID which the directory service can associate with a VNET customer profile. The IP address identifying the port that is being used to connect this computer to the network. This address will be used by 1 ?4+ WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 other IP telephony software packages to establish a connection to this computer. The message may contain additional information about the specifics of the software package or PC being used for IP 5 telephony and the configuration/capabilities of the software or PC. As an example it might be important for a calling PC to know what type of compression algorithms are being used, or other capabilities of the software or hardware that might affect the ability of other users to connect to them or use 10 special features during a connection. The location of the directory service to receive this "on-line" message will be determined by the data distribution. implementation for this customer. In some cases this may be a private database for a company or organization subscribing to a 15 VNET service, in other cases it might be a national or worldwide database for all customers of a service provider (MCI). This location is configured in the telephony software package running on the PC. 2. In this scenario the PC did not provide a password in the initial 20 registration message. This is because the directory service uses a challenge/response registration process. In this case, the directory service will use a shared key to calculate a challenge that will be presented to the PC 3. The PC receives this challenge and presents it to the user of the 25 PC. The PC user uses the shared key to calculate a response to the challenge and send the response back to the directory service. 4. When the directory service receives this response from the PC, it validates the user. Once the user has been validated, the 30 directory service will update the profile entry associated with the VNET number (or other unique ID) to indicate that the user is "on line" and is located at the specified IP address. The directory service will also update the profile with the configuration data sent during the login request. Upon successful update of the, the WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 directory service sends a response back to the specified IP address indicating that the message was received and processed. This acknowledgment message may also contain some sort of security or encryption key to guarantee secure communication 5 with the directory service when issuing additional commands. When the PC receives this response message it may choose to notify the user via a visual or audible indicator. 2. VNET PC queries a directory service for a VNET 10 translation PC Directory Service Source VNET. IP, Dest VNET*Config Data 1) VNET Translation Req Match VNET to profile Dete-rmme route VNET PC translation 15 2) VNET Translation Resp 40 *Check configuration IP, *Config Data or IP. Dialed Number * Optional data depending upon implementation 20 1. A PC uses an Internet telephony software package to attempt to connect to a VNET number. To establish this connection, the user of the PC dials theVNET number (or other unique ID such as name, employee ID, etc). Once the telephony software package has identified this call as a VNET 25 type call , it will send a translation request to the directory service. At a minimum, this translation request will contain the following information: The IP address of the computer sending this request The VNET number of the PC sending this request. The Vnet number (or other ID) of the computer to be dialed. 30 A requested configuration for the connection. For example, the calling PC might want to use white-board capabilities within the telephony software package and may wish to verify this capability on the destination PC before establishing a connection. If the VNET number does not translate to a PC, WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 this configuration information may not provide any benefit, but at the time of sending this request the user does not know whether the VNET number will translate to a PC or phone. 2. When the directory service receives this message, it uses the 5 Vnet number (or other ID) to determine if the user associated with that VNET number (or other ID) is "on-line" and to identify the IP address of the location where the computer may be contacted. This directory service may also contain and make use of features like time of day routing, day of week routing, ANI screening, etc. 10 If the VNET number translates into a PC that is "on-line", the directory service will compare the configuration information in this request to the configuration information available in the profile for the destination PC. When the directory service returns the response to the translation request from the originating PC, the response will include 15 The registered "on-line" IP address of the destination PC. This is the IP address that the originating PC may use to contact the destination PC Configuration information indicating the capabilities of the destination PC and maybe some information about which 20 capabilities are compatible between the origination and destination PC. If the VNET number translates to a number that must be dialed through the PSTN, the response message to the PC will contain the 25 following An IP address of an Internet Telephony gateway that may be used to get this call onto MCI's PSTN. The selection of this gateway may be based upon a number of selection algorithms. This association between the caller and the ITG to be used is made 30 based upon information in the profile contained within the directory service. A VNET number to be dialed by the ITG to contact the destination phone. In the case of this call flow this is the VNET number of the destination phone. This allows the call to use the existing WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 VNET translation and routing mechanisms provided by the DAP. If the VNET number translates to a phone which is reachable through a private ITG connected to the customer's PBX, the directory service will 5 return the following. The VNET number of an ITG gateway that is connected to the PBX serving the destination phone. This association between the destination phone the ITG connected to its serving PBX is made by the directory service. 10 The VNET number to be dialed by the ITG when it offers the call to the PBX. In most cases this will just be an extension number. 3. PC connects to an ITG. Source Internet PC Telephony 15 Gateway 1) IP Telephony Dial Dialed number 2) Call ack 3) IP Telephony Answer 4)Voice path established 20 1. A PC uses its telephony software package to send a "connection" message to an ITG. This IP address is usually returned from the directory service in response to a VNET translation. The specific format and contents of this message is dependent upon the software sending 25 the message or the ITG software to receive the message. This message may contain information identifying the user of the PC or it may contain information specifying the parameters associated with the requested connection. 2. The ITG responds to the connect message by responding to the 30 message with an acknowledgment that a call has been received. This step of call setup may not be necessary for a PC calling an ITG, but it is shown here in an attempt to maintain a consistent call setup procedure that is independent of whether the PC is connecting to an ITG or to another PC. When connecting to a PC, this step of the WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 procedure allows the calling PC to know that the destination PC is ringing. 3. The ITG accepts the call. 4. A voice path is established between the ITG and the PC. 5 4. ITG connects to a PC. Internet Destination Telephony PC Gateway Offer call 1) IP Telephony Dial 10 2) Call Ack 4 3) IP Telephony Answer Call accept 4)Voice path established 1. An ITG uses its telephony software to send a "connection" message to a PC. The ITG must know the IP address of the PC to which it is 15 connecting. The specific format and contents of this message is dependent upon the ITG software sending the message or the PC software to receive the message. This message may contain information identifying this call as one being offered from an ITG, or it may contain information specifying the requested configuration for the 20 call (i.e. voice only call). 2. The message from step 1 is received by the PC and the receipt of this message is acknowledged by sending a message back to the ITG indicating that the PC is offering the call to the user of the PC 3. The user of the PC answers to call and a message is sent back to the 25 originating PC indicating that the call has been accepted. 4. A voice path is established between the ITG and the PC. 5. VNET PC to PC Call Flow Description. The user for PC12 1051 connects the computer to an Internet Protocol (IP) 30 network 1071, turns on the computer and starts an IP telephony software protocol system. The system software transmits a message to a directory service 1031 to register the computer as "on-line" and available to receive calls. This message contains IP address identifying the connection that is being used to connect this computer to the network. This address may be WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 used by other IP telephony software packages to establish a connection to this computer. The address comprises an identification of the computer or virtual private network number that may be used to address this computer 1051. In this VNET scenario, the address is a VNET number assigned to 5 the individual using this PC. VNET refers to a virtual network in which a particular set of telephone numbers is supported as a private network of numbers that can exchange calls. Many corporations currently buy communication time on a trunk that is utilized as a private communication channel for placing and receiving inter-company calls. The address may 10 also be some identification such as name, employee id, or any other unique ID. The message may contain additional information regarding the specifics of the system software or the hardware configuration of PC 11 1051 utilized 15 for IP telephony. As an example, it is important for a calling PC to know what type of compression algorithms are supported and active in the current communication, or other capabilities of the software or hardware that might affect the ability of other users to connect or use special feature during a connection. 20 6. Determining best choice for Internet client selection of an Internet Telephony Gateway server on the Internet:. Figure 10B illustrates an internet routing network in accordance with a preferred embodiment. If a client computer 1080 on the Internet needs to 25 connect to an Internet Telephony Gateway 1084, the ideal choice for an Gateway to select can fall into two categories, depending on the needs of the client: If the client 1080 needs to place a telephone call to a regular PSTN phone, 30 and PSTN network usage is determined to be less expensive or higher quality than Internet network usage, it is the preferred choice to select a gateway that allows the client to access the PSTN network from a point "closest" to the point of internet access. This is often referred to as Head End Hop-Off (HEHO), where the client hops off the internet at the "head WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 end" or "near end" of the internet. If the client 1080 needs to place a telephone call to a regular PSTN phone, and the PSTN network is determined to be more expensive than Internet 5 network usage, it is the preferred choice to select a gateway that allows the client to access the PSTN from the Internet at a point closest to the destination telephone. This is often referred to as Tail-End Hop-Off (TEHO), where the client hops off the internet at the "tail end" or "far end" of the internet. 10 a) Head-End Hop-Off Methods (1) Client Ping Method This method selects the best choice for a head-end hop-off internet telephony gateway by obtaining a list of candidate internet telephony gateway addresses, and pinging each to determine the best choice in terms 15 of latency and number of router hops. The process is as follows: Client Computer 1080 queries a directory service 1082 to obtain a list of candidate internet telephony gateways. The directory service 1082 looks in a database of gateways and selects a list of gateways to offer the client as candidates. Criteria for selecting 20 gateways as candidates can include last gateway selected. matching 1, 2, or 3 octets in the IPv4 address. last client access point, if known. selection of at least one gateway from all major gateway sites, if practical. 25 The directory service 1082 returns a list of "n" candidate IP addresses to the client 1080 in a TCP/IP message. The client 1080 simultaneously uses the IP ping to send an echo-type message to each candidate Internet Telephony Gateway, 1084, 1081, 1086. The "-r" option will be used with the ping command to obtain a trace 30 route. Based upon the ping results for each Internet Telephony Gateway, the client 1080 will rank order the ping results as follows: If any Internet Telephony Gateways are accessible to the client 1080 without traveling through any intervening router as revealed by the ping /9/ WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 trace route, they are ranked first. The remaining Internet Telephony Gateways are ranked in order of lowest latency of round-trip ping results. 5 Using the Client Ping Method with the Sample Network Topology above, the Client Computer 1080 queries the Directory Service 1082 for a list of Internet Telephony Gateways to ping. The Directory Service 1082 returns the list: 166.37.61.117 10 166.25.27.101 166.37.27.205 The Client Computer 1080 issues the following three commands simultaneously: 15 ping 166.37.61.117 -r 1 ping 166.25.27.101 -r 1 ping 166.37.27.205 -r 1 The results of the ping commands are as follows: 20 Pinging 166.37.61.117 with 32 bytes of data: Reply from 166.37.61.117: bytes=32 time=3ms TTL=30 25 Route: 166.37.61.101 Reply from 166.37.61.117: bytes=32 time=2ms TTL=30 Route: 166.37.61.101 Reply from 166.37.61.117: bytes=32 time=2ms TTL=31 Route: 166.37.61.101 30 Reply from 166.37.61.117: bytes=32 time=2ms TTL=30 Route: 166.37.61.101 Pinging 166.25.27.101 with 32 bytes of data: /?2 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Reply from 166.25.27.101: bytes=32 time=14ms TTL=30 Route: 166.37.61.101 Reply from 166.25.27.10 1: bytes=32 time=2ms TTL=30 5 Route: 166.37.61.101 Reply from 166.25.27.10 1: bytes=32 time=3ms TTL=31 Route: 166.37.61.101 Reply from 166.25.27. 101: bytes=32 time=4ms TTL=30 Route: 166.37.61.101 10 Pinging 166.37.27.205 with 32 bytes of data: Reply from 166.37.27.205: bytes=32 time=lms TTL= 126 15 Route: 166.37.27.205 Reply from 166.37.27.205: bytes=32 time=lms TTL=126 Route: 166.37. 27.205 Reply from 166.37. 27.205: bytes=32 time=1ms TTL= 126 Route: 166.37. 27.205 20 Reply from 166.37. 27.205: bytes=32 time=lms TTL=126 Route: 166.37. 27.205 Since the route taken to 166.37.27.205 went through no routers (route and 25 ping addresses are the same), this address is ranked first. The remaining Internet Telephony Gateway Addresses are ranked by order of averaged latency. The resulting preferential ranking of Internet Telephony Gateway addresses is 166.37.27.205 30 166.37.61.117 166.25.27.101 The first choice gateway is the gateway most likely to give high quality of service, since it is located on the same local area network. This gateway '93 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 will be the first the client will attempt to use. (2) Access Device Location Method The method for identifying the most appropriate choice for an Internet 5 Telephony Gateway utilizes a combination of the Client Ping Method detailed above, and the knowledge of the location from which the Client Computer 1080 accessed the Internet. This method may work well for clients accessing the Internet via a dial-up access device. 10 A client computer 1080 dials the Internet Access Device. The Access Device answers the call and plays modem tone. Then, the client computer and the access device establishes a PPP session. The user on the Client Computer is authenticated (username/password prompt, validated by an authentication server). Once the user passes authentication, the Access 15 Device can automatically update the User Profile in the Directory Service for the user who was authenticated, depositing the following information "User Name" "Account Code" "online timestamp" "Access Device Site Code" 20 Later, when the Client Computer requires access through an Internet Telephony Gateway, it queries the Directory Service 1082 to determine the best choice of Internet Telephony Gateway. If an Access Device Site Code is found in the User's Profile on the Directory Service, the Directory Service 25 1082 selects the Internet Telephony Gateway 1084, 1081 and 1086 at the same site code, and returns the IP address to the Client Computer 1080. If an Internet Telephony Gateway 1084, 1081 and 1086 is unavailable at the same site as the Access Device Site Code, then the next best choice is selected according to a network topology map kept on the directory server. 30 If no Access Device Site Code is found on the directory server 1082, then the client 1080 has accessed the network through a device which cannot update the directory server 1082. If this is the case, the Client Ping Method described above is used to locate the best alternative internet WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 telephony gateway 1084. (3) User Profile Method Another method for selection of an Internet Telephony Gateway 1084, 1081 5 and 1086 is to embed the information needed to select a gateway in the user profile as stored on a directory server. To use this method, the user must execute an internet telephony software package on the client computer. The first time the package is executed, registration information is gathered from the user, including name, email address, IP Address (for 10 fixed location computers), site code, account code, usual internet access point, and other relevant information. Once this information is entered by the user, the software package deposits the information on a directory server, within the user's profile. 15 Whenever the Internet Telephony software package is started by the user, the IP address of the user is automatically updated at the directory service. This is known as automated presence notification. Later, when the user needs an Internet Telephony Gateway service, the user queries the directory service for an Internet Telephony Gateway to use. The directory service 20 knows the IP address of the user and the user's usual site and access point into the network. The directory service can use this information, plus the network map of all Internet Telephony Gateways 1084, 1081 and 1086, to select the best Internet Telephony Gateway for the client computer to use. (4) Gateway Ping Method 25 The last method selects the best choice for a head-end hop-off internet telephony gateway by obtaining a list of candidate internet telephony gateway addresses, and pinging each to determine the best choice in terms of latency and number of router hops. The process is as follows: Client Computer queries a directory service to obtain a best-choice internet 30 telephony gateway. The directory service looks in a database of gateways and selects a list of candidate gateways. Criteria for selecting gateways as candidates can include last gateway selected.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 matching 1, 2, or 3 octets in the IPv4 address. last client access point, if known. selection of at least one gateway from all major gateway sites, if practical. 5 The directory sends a message to each candidate gateway, instructing each candidate gateway to ping the client computer's IP Address. Each candidate gateway simultaneously uses the IP ping to send an echo-type message to the client computer. The "-r" option will be used with the ping command to obtain a trace route. The ping results are 10 returned from each candidate gateway to the directory service. Based upon the ping results for each Internet Telephony Gateway, the directory service will rank order the ping results as follows: If any Internet Telephony Gateways are accessible to the client without traveling through any intervening router as revealed by 15 the ping trace route, they are ranked first. The remaining Internet Telephony Gateways are ranked in order of lowest averaged latency of round-trip ping results. The Client Ping Method and Gateway Ping Method may use the traceroute program as an alternative to the ping program in determining best choice 20 for a head-end hop-off gateway. b) Tail-End Hop-Off Methods Tail-End Hop-Off entails selecting a gateway as an egress point from the internet where the egress point is closest to the terminating PSTN location as possible. This is usually desired to avoid higher PSTN calling rates. The 25 internet can be used to bring the packetized voice to the local calling area of the destination telephone number, where lower local rates can be paid to carry the call on the PSTN. (1) Gateway Registration 30 One method for Tail-End Hop-Off service is to have Internet Telephony Gateways 1084, 1081 and 1086 register with a directory service. Each Internet Telephony Gateway will have a profile in the directory service which lists the calling areas it serves. These can be listed in terms of Country Code, Area Code, Exchange, City Code, Line Code, Wireless Cell, 1 96 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 LATA, or any other method which can be used to subset a numbering plan. The gateway, upon startup, sends a TCP/IP registration message to the Directory Service 1082 to list the areas it serves. 5 When a Client Computer wishes to use a TEHO service, it queries the directory service for an Internet Telephony Gateway 1084 serving the desired destination phone number. The directory service 1082 looks for a qualifying Internet Telephony Gateway, and if it finds one, returns the IP address of the gateway to use. Load-balancing algorithms can be used to 10 balance traffic across multiple Internet Telephony Gateways 1084, 1081 and 1086 serving the same destination phone number. If no Internet Telephony Gateways 1084, 1081 and 1086 specifically serve the calling area of the given destination telephone number, the directory 15 service 1082 returns an error TCP/IP message to the Client Computer 1080. The Client 1080 then has the option of querying the Directory Service for any Internet Telephony Gateway, not just gateways serving a particular destination telephone number. 20 As a refinement of this Gateway Registration scheme, Gateways can register calling rates provided for all calling areas. For example, if no gateway is available in Seattle, it may be less expensive to call Seattle from the gateway in Los Angeles, than to call Seattle from the gateway in Portland. The rates registered in the directory service can enable the directory service 25 the lowest cost gateway to use for any particular call. 7. Vnet Call Processing. Figure 11 is a callflow diagram in accordance with a preferred embodiment. Processing commences at 1101 where the location of the directory service 30 to receive this "on-line" message will be determined by the data distribution implementation for this customer. In some cases this may be a private database for a company or organization subscribing to a VNET service, in other cases it might be a national or worldwide database for all customers of a service provider (MCI). When the directory service receives this message 19-7 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 from PCi 2 1051, it will update a profile entry associated with the unique ID to indicate that the user is "on-line" and is located at the specified IP address. Then, at 1102, after successful update of the profile associated with the ID, the directory service sends a response (ACK) back to the 5 specified IP address indicating that the message was received and processed. When the computer (PC 12) receives this response message it may choose to notify the user via a visual or audible indicator. At 1103, a user of PC 11 1052 connects a computer to an IP network, turns 10 on the computer and starts telephony system software. The registration process for this computer follows the same procedures as those for PC12 1051. In this scenario it is assumed that the directory service receiving this message is either physically or logically the same directory service that received the message from PC12 1051. 15 At 1104, when the directory service 1031 receives a message from PC 11 1052, it initiates a similar procedure as it followed for a message for PC 12 1051. However, in this case it will update the profile associated with the identifier it received from PC 11 1052, and it will use the IP address it 20 received from PC 11 1052. Because of the updated profile information, when the acknowledgment message is sent out from the directory service, it is sent to the IP address associated with PC 11 1052. At this point both computers (PC 12 1051 and PC 11 1052) are "on-line" and available to receive calls. 25 At 1105, PC12 1051 uses its telephony system software to connect to computer PC 11 1052. To establish this connection, the user of PC12 1051 dials the VNET number (or other unique ID such as name, employee ID, etc). Depending upon the implementation of the customer's network, 30 and software package, a unique network identifier may have to be placed in this dial string. As an example, in a telephony implementation of a VNET, a subscriber may be required to enter the number 8 prior to dialing the VNET number to signal a PBX that they are using the VNET network to route the call. Once the telephony software package has identified this call as a ,Iq? WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 VNET type call, it will send a translation request to the directory service. At a minimum, this translation request will contain the following information: - The IP address of the computer (PC 12 1051) sending this request, and 5 The VNET number (or other ID) of the computer to be dialed. At 1106, when the directory service receives this message, it uses the VNET number (or other ID) to determine if the user associated with the VNET number (or other ID) is "on-line" and to identify the IP address of the 10 location where the computer may be contacted. Any additional information that is available about the computer being contacted (PC 11 1052), such as compression algorithms or special hardware or software capabilities, may also be retrieved by the directory service 1031. The directory service 1031 then returns a message to PC 12 1051 with status information for PC 11 15 1052, such as whether the computer is "on-line," its IP address if it is available and any other available information about capabilities of PC 11 1052. When PC12 1051 receives the response, it determines whether PC 11 1052 may be contacted. This determination will be based upon the "on-line" status of PC 11 1052, and the additional information about 20 capabilities of PCi 1 1052. If PC12 1051 receives status information indicating that PC 11 1052 may not be contacted, the call flow stops here, otherwise it continues. The following steps 1107 through 1111 are "normal" IP telephony call 25 setup and tear-down steps. At 1107, PC12 1051 transmits a "ring" message to PC 11 1052. This message is directed to the IP address received from the directory service 1031 in step 1106. This message can contain information identifying the user of PC 12 1051, or it may contain information specifying the parameters associated with the requested 30 connection. At 1108, the message from step 1107 is received by PC 11 1052 and the receipt of this message is acknowledged by sending a message back to PC12 1051 indicating that the user of PC 11 1052 is being notified of an I ? WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 incoming call. This notification may be visible or audible depending upon the software package and its configurations on PC 11 1052. At 1109, if the user of PC 1l 1052 accepts the call, a message is sent back 5 to PC12 1051 confirming "answer" for the call. If the user of PC 11 1052 does not answer the call or chooses to reject the call, a message will be sent back to PC12 1051 indicative of the error condition. If the call was not answered, the call flow stops here, otherwise it continues. 10 At 1110, the users of PC12 1051 and PC 11 1052 can communicate using their telephony software. Communication progresses until at 1111 a user of either PC may break the connection by sending a disconnect message to the other call participant. The format and contents of this message is dependent upon the telephony software packages being used by PC12 1051 15 and PC11 1052. In this scenario, PC11 1052 sends a disconnect message to PC12 1051, and the telephony software systems on both computers discontinue transmission of voice. Figure 12 illustrates a VNET Personal Computer (PC) to out-of-network PC 20 Information call flow in accordance with a preferred embodiment. In this flow, the Internet telephony gateway is an out-of-network element. This means that the Internet Telephony Gateway cannot use SS7 signaling to communicate with the switch, it must simply outpulse the VNET number to be dialed. An alternate embodiment facilitates directory services to do a 25 translation of the VNET number directly to a Switch/Trunk and outpulse the appropriate digits. Such processing simplifies translation in the switching network but would require a more sophisticated signaling interface between the internet gateway and the switch. This type on "in network" internet gateway scenario will be covered in another call flow. 30 This scenario assumes that there is no integration between the internet and a customer premises Public Branch Exchange (PBX). If there were integration, it might be possible for the PC to go through the Internet (or intranet) to connect to an ITG on the customers PBX, avoiding the use of 2c)o WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 the PSTN. Figure 12 is a callflow diagram in accordance with a preferred embodiment. Processing commences at 1201 where the location of the directory service to receive this "on-line" message will be determined by the data distribution implementation for this customer. In some cases this 5 may be a private database for a company or organization subscribing to a VNET service, in other cases it might be a national or worldwide database for all customers of a service provider (MCI). When the directory service receives this message from PC12 1051, it will 10 update a profile entry associated with the unique ID to indicate that the user is "on-line" and is located at the specified IP address. Then, at 1202, after successful update of the profile associated with the ID, the directory service sends a response (ACK) back to the specified IP address indicating that the message was received and processed. When the computer (PC 12) 15 receives this response message it may choose to notify the user via a visual or audible indicator. At 1203, a VNET translation request is then sent to the directory services to determine the translation for the dial path to the out of network internet 20 gateway phone. A response including the IP address and the DNIS is returned at 1204. The response completely resolves the phone addressing information for routing the call. Then, at 1205, an IP telephony dial utilizing the DNIS information occurs. DNIS refers to Dialed Number Information Services which is definitive information about a call for use in 25 routing the call. At 1206 an ACK is returned from the IP telephony, and at 1207 an IP telephony answer occurs and a call path is established at 1208. 1209a shows the VNET PC going offhook and sending a dial tone 1209b, and outpulsing digits at 1210. Then, at 1211, the routing translation of 30 the DNIS information is used by the routing database to determine how to route the call to the destination telephone. A translation response is received at 1212 and a switch to switch outpulse occurs at 1213. Then, at 1215, a ring is transmitted to the destination phone, and a ringback to the PC occurs. The call is transmitted out of the network via the internet .201 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 gateway connection and answered at 1216. Conversation ensues at 1217, until one of the parties hangs up at 1218. Figure 13 illustrates a VNET Personal Computer (PC) to out-of-network 5 Phone Information call flow in accordance with a preferred embodiment. In this call flow, the use of the PSTN is avoided by routing the call from the PC to the Internet/Intranet to an internet gateway directly connected to a PBX. Figure 14 illustrates a VNET Personal Computer (PC) to in-network Phone 10 Information call flow in accordance with a preferred embodiment. In this call flow, the internet telephony gateway is an in-network element. This requires that the internet gateway can behave as if it were a switch and utilize SS7 signaling to hand the call off to a switch. This allows the directory service to return the switch/trunk and outpulse digits on the first 15 VNET lookup. This step avoids an additional lookup by the switch. In this case the directory service must have access to VNET routing information. a) PC to PC Figure 15 illustrates a personal computer to personal computer internet 20 telephony call in accordance with a preferred embodiment. In step 1501, a net phone user connects through the internet via an IP connection to the step 1502 MCI directory service where a look up is performed to determine how to route the call. In step 1503, the call is terminated in the Intelligent System Platform (ISP) to determine where to send the call. IP Router is the 25 gateway that goes into the MCI ISP to determine via the Intelligent Services Network (ISN) feature engine how to get the call through the network. In step 1504, the call is connected through the Internet to the Net Phone user. In alternative scenario step 1504 the person at the phone is unavailable, so the calling party desired to speak with an MCI operator and 30 the IP Router goes through the Net-Switch (interface to the voice world.) In step 1505, the netswitch queries the call processing engine to do DSP Engine functions. In step 1506, the call is routed through the WAN Hub to a MCI switch to an MCI Operator or voicemail in step 1507. This preferred embodiment utilizes the existing infrastructure to assist the call. 2o2 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 b) PC TO PHONE Figure 16, illustrates a phone call that is routed from a PC through the Internet to a phone. In step 1602, the MCI Directory is queried to obtain 5 ISN information for routing the call. Then the call is redirected in step 1603 to the ISP Gateway and routed utilizing the IP router to the call processing engine in steps 1604 and 1605. Then, in step 1606, the call is routed to the WAN and finally to the RBOC where Mainframe billing is recorded for the call. 10 c) Phone to PC Figure 17 illustrates a phone to PC call in accordance with a preferred embodiment. In step 1701, a phone is routed into a special net switch where in step 1702, a call processing engine determines the DTMF tones 15 utilizing a series of digital signal processors. Then, at step 1703, the system looks up directory information and connects the call. If the caller is not there, or busy, then at step 1704, the call is routed via an IP router over the switch utilizing the call processing engine in step 1705. 20 d) Phone to Phone Figure 18 illustrates a phone to phone call over the internet in accordance with a preferred embodiment. A call comes into the switch at step 1801, and is processed by the call logic program running in the call processing engine in step 1802. In step 1803, a lookup is performed in the directory 25 information database to determine routing of the call as described above. The routing includes storing a billing record in the mainframe billing application 1808. All of the ISN features are available to the call even thought the call is routed through the internet. An IP router is used at each end of the internet to facilitate routing of the call through the internet 30 1804 and into the network switch. From the network switch the call is routed to a call processing engine through a WAN hub 1806 through the RBOC 1807 to the target telephone. Various DSP Engines 1803 are utilized to perform digital transcoding, DTMF detection, voice recognition, call progress, VRU functions and Modem functions. 203 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 XI. TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK A preferred embodiment utilizes a network management system for a telecommunication network for analyzing, correlating, and presenting 5 network events. Modern telecommunications networks utilize data signaling networks, which are distinct from the call-bearing networks, to carry the signaling data that are required for call setup, processing, and clearing. These signaling networks use an industry-standard architecture and protocol, collectively referred to as Common Channel Signaling System 10 #7, or Signaling System #7 (SS7) for short. SS7 is a significant advancement over the previous signaling method, in which call signaling data were transmitted over the same circuits as the call. SS7 provides a distinct and dedicated network of circuits for transmitting call signaling data. Utilizing SS7 decreases the call setup time (perceived by the caller as 15 post-dial delay) and increases capacity on the call-bearing network. A detailed description of SS7 signaling is provided in Signaling System #7, Travis Russell, Mcgraw Hill (1995). The standards for SS7 networks are established by ANSI for domestic (U.S.) 20 networks, by ITU for international connections, and are referred to as ANSI SS7 and ITU C7, respectively. A typical SS7 network is illustrated in Figure 1B. A call-bearing telecommunications network makes use of matrix switches 102a/ 102b for switching customer traffic. These switches 102a/ 102b are conventional, such as a DMS-250 manufactured by 25 Northern Telecom or a DEX-600 manufactured by Digital Switch Corporation. These switches 102a/ 102b are interconnected with voice grade and data-grade call-bearing trunks. This interconnectivity, which is not illustrated in Figure 1B, may take on a large variety of configurations. 30 Switches in telecommunications networks perform multiple functions. In addition to switching circuits for voice calls, switches must relay signaling messages to other switches as part of call control. These signaling messages are delivered through a network of computers, each of which is called a Signaling Point (SP) 102a/ 102b. There are three kinds of SPs in WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 an SS7 network: - Service Switching Point (SSP) - Signal Transfer Point (STP) - Service Control Point (SCP) 5 The SSPs are the switch interface to the SS7 signaling network. Signal Transfer Points (STPs) 104a... 104f (collectively referred to as 104) are packet-switching communications devices used to switch and route SS7 signals. They are deployed in mated pairs, known as clusters, for 10 redundancy and restoration. For example, in Fig. 1B, STP 104a is mated with STP 104b in Regional Cluster 1, STP 104c is mated with STP 104d in Regional Cluster 2, and STP 104e is mated with STP 104f in Regional Cluster 3. A typical SS7 network contains a plurality of STP clusters 104; three are shown in Fig. 1 for illustrative purposes. Each STP cluster 104 15 serves a particular geographic region of SSPs 102. A plurality of SSPs 102 have primary SS7 links to each of two STPs 104 in a cluster. This serves as a primary homing arrangement. Only two SSPs 102 are shown homing to Regional Cluster 2 in Fig. 1B for illustrative purposes; in reality, several SSPs 102 will home on a particular STP cluster 104. SSPs 102 will also 20 generally have a secondary SS7 link to one or both STPs 104 in another cluster. This serves as a secondary homing arrangement. The SS7 links that connect the various elements are identified as follows: 25 A links connect an SSP to each of its primary STPs (primary homing). B links connect an STP in one cluster to an STP in another cluster. C links connect one STP to the other STP in the same cluster. D links connect STPs between different carrier networks (not illustrated). E links connect an SSP to an STP that is not in its cluster (secondary 30 homing). F links connect two SSPs to each other. To interface two different carriers' networks, such as a Local Exchange Carrier (LEC) network with an Interchange Carrier (IXC) network, STP -203 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 clusters 104 from each carriers' network may be connected by D links or A links. SS7 provides standardized protocol for such an interface so that the signaling for a call that is being passed between an LEC and an IXC may also be transmitted. 5 When a switch receives and routes a customer call, the signaling for that call is received (or generated) by the attached SSP 102. While intermachine trunks that connect the switches carry the customer's call, the signaling for that call is sent to an STP 104. The STP 104 routes the signal to either the 10 SSP 102 for the call-terminating switch, or to another STP 104 that will then route the signal to the SSP 102 for the call-terminating switch. Another element of an SS7 network are Protocol Monitoring Units (PMU) 106, shown in Figure 2. PMUs 106 are deployed at switch sites and provide an independent monitoring tool for SS7 networks. These devices, 15 such as those manufactured by INET Inc. of Richardson, TX., monitor the A, E, and F links of the SS7 network, as shown in Figure 2. They generate fault and performance information for SS7 links. As with any telecommunications network, an SS7 network is vulnerable to 20 fiber cuts, other transmission outages, and device failures. Since an SS7 network carries all signaling required to deliver customer traffic, it is vital that any problems are detected and corrected quickly. Therefore, there is an essential need for a system that can monitor SS7 networks, analyze fault and performance information, and manage corrective actions. 25 Prior art SS7 network management systems, while performing these basic functions, have several shortcomings. Many require manual configuration of network topology, which is vulnerable to human error and delay topology updates. Configuration of these systems usually requires that the system 30 be down for a period of time. Many systems available in the industry are intended for a particular vendor's PMU 106, and actually obtain topology data from their PMUs 106, thereby neglecting network elements not connected to a PMU 106 and other vendors' equipment. 20 6 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Because prior art systems only operate with data received from proprietary PMUs 106, they do not provide correlation between PMU events and events generated from other types of SS7 network elements. They also provide inflexible and proprietary analysis rules for event correlation. 5 A system and method for providing enhanced SS7 network management functions are provided by a distributed client/ server platform that can receive and process events that are generated by various SS7 network elements. Each network event is parsed and standardized to allow for the 10 processing of events generated by any type of element. Events can also be received by network topology databases, transmission network management systems, network maintenance schedules, and system users. Referring to Figure 3, the systems architecture of the preferred embodiment of the present invention, referred to as an SS7 Network Management 15 System (SNMS), is illustrated. SNMS consists of four logical servers 302/304/306/308 and a plurality of client workstations 312a/312b/312c connected via a Network Management Wide Area Network (WAN) 310. The four logical SNMS servers 302/304/306/308 may all reside on a single or a plurality of physical units. In the preferred 20 embodiment, each logical server resides on a distinct physical unit, for the purpose of enhancing performance. These physical units may be of any conventional type, such as IBM RS6000 units running with AIX operating system. 25 The client workstations 312 may be any conventional PC running with Microsoft Windows or IBM OS/2 operating systems, a dumb terminal, or a VAX VMS workstation. In actuality, client workstations may be any PC or terminal that has an Internet Protocol (IP) address, is running with X Windows software, and is connected to the WAN 310. No SNMS-specific 30 software runs on the client workstations 312. SNMS receives events from various SS7 network elements and other network management systems (NMS) 338. It also receives network topology, configuration, and maintenance data from various external systems, as will WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 be described. The various network elements that generate events include Network Controllers 314, International and Domestic SPs 316/102, STPs 104, and PMUs 106. Network Controllers 314 are devices that switch circuits based on external commands. They utilize SS7 signaling in the 5 same manner as an SSP 102, but are not linked to any STPs 104. International SPs 316 support switches that serve as a gateway between a domestic and international telecommunications network. The STPs 104 may be domestic or international. 10 The PMUs 106 scan all the SS7 packets that pass across the SS7 circuits, analyze for fault conditions, and generate network events that are then passed onto SNMS. The PMUs 106 also generate periodic statistics on the performance of the SS7 circuits that are monitored. 15 All SPs 102/316, STPs 104, PMU 106, and SS7 Network Controllers 314 transmit network events to SNMS via communications networks. This eliminates the need for SNMS to maintain a session with each of the devices. In one typical embodiment, as illustrated in Fig. 3, an Asynchronous Data Communications Network 320 is used to transport 20 events from Network Controllers 314 and International SPs 316. An IBM mainframe Front End Processor (FEP) 324, such as IBM's 3708, is used to convert the asynchronous protocol to SNA so it can be received by a IBM mainframe-based Switched Host Interface Facilities Transport (SWIFT) system 326. SWIFT 326 is a communications interface and data 25 distribution application that maintains a logical communications session with each of the network elements. In this same embodiment, an X.25 Operational Systems Support (OSS) Network 328 is used to transport events from STPs 104, SPs 102, and 30 PMUs 106. These events are received by a Local Support Element (LSE) system 330. The LSE 330, which may be a VAX/VMS system, is essentially a Packet Assembler/Disassembler (PAD) and protocol converter used to convert event data from the X.25 OSS Network 328 to the SNMS servers 302/304. It also serves the same function as SWIFT 326 in maintaining 2 o' WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 communication sessions with each network element, thus eliminating the need for SNMS to do so. The need for both SWIFT 326 and LSE 330 illustrates one embodiment of a typical telecommunications network in which different types of elements are in place requiring different transport 5 mechanisms. SNMS supports all these types of elements. All network events are input to the SNMS Alarming Server 302 for analysis and correlation. Some events are also input to the SNMS Reporting Server 304 to be stored for historical purposes. A Control system 332, which 10 may be a VAX/VMS system, is used to collect topology and configuration data from each of the network elements via the X.25 OSS Network 328. Some elements, such as STPs 104 and SPs 102, may send this data directly over the X.25 OSS Network 328. Elements such as the International SSP 316, which only communicates in asynchronous mode, 15 use a Packet Assembler/Disassembler (PAD) 318 to connect to the X.25 OSS Network 328. The Control system 332 then feeds this topology and configuration data to the SNMS Topology Server 306. Network topology information is used by SNMS to perform alarm correlation 20 and to provide graphical displays. Most topology information is received from Network Topology Databases 334, which are created and maintained by order entry systems and network engineering systems in the preferred embodiment. Topology data is input to the SNMS Topology Server 306 from both the Network Topology Databases 334 and the Control System 332. An 25 ability to enter manual overrides through use of a PC 336 is also provided to the SNMS Topology Server 306. The SNMS Alarming Server 302 also receives events, in particular DS-3 transmission alarms, from other network management systems (NMS) 338. 30 Using topology data, SNMS will correlate these events with events received from SS7 network elements. The SNMS Alarming Server 302 also receives network maintenance schedule information from a Network Maintenance Schedule system 340. SNMS uses this information to account for planned network outages due to maintenance, thus eliminating the need to respond 207 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 to maintenance-generated alarms. SNMS also uses this information to proactively warn maintenance personnel of a network outage that may impact a scheduled maintenance activity. 5 The SNMS Alarming Server 302 has an interface with a Trouble Management System 342. This allows SNMS users at the client workstations 312 to submit trouble tickets for SNMS-generated alarms. This interface, as opposed to using an SNMS-internal trouble management system, can be configured to utilize many different types of trouble 10 management systems. In the preferred embodiment, the SNMS Graphics Server 308 supports all client workstations 312 at a single site, and are therefore a plurality of servers. The geographical distribution of SNMS Graphics Servers 308 eliminates the need to transmit volumes of data that support graphical presentation to each workstation site from a central 15 location. Only data from the Alarming Server 302, Reporting Server 304, and Topology Server 306 are transmitted to workstation sites, thereby saving network transmission bandwidth and improving SNMS performance. In alternative embodiments, the Graphics Servers 308 may be centrally located. 20 Referring now to Figure 4, a high-level process flowchart illustrates the logical system components of SNMS. At the heart of the process is Process Events 402. This component serves as a traffic cop for SNMS processes. Process Events 402, which runs primarily on the SNMS Alarming Server 25 302, is responsible for receiving events from other SNMS components, processing these events, storing events, and feeding processed event data to the Reporting and Display components. The Process Events process 402 is shown in greater detail in Figure 5. 30 The Receive Network Events component 404, which runs primarily on the Alarming Server 302, receives network events from the various SS7 network elements (STPs 104, SPs 102, PMUs 106, etc.) via systems such as SWIFT 326 and LSE 330. This component parses the events and sends them to Process Events 402 for analysis. The Receive Network Events 2/0 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 process 404 is shown in greater detail in Figure 6. The Process Topology component 406, which runs primarily on the Topology Server 306, receives network topology and configuration data 5 from the Network Topology Databases 334, from the SS7 network elements via the Control System 332, and from Manual Overrides 336. This data is used to correlate network events and to perform impact assessments on such events. It is also used to provide graphical presentation of events. Process Topology 406 parses these topology and configuration data, stores 10 them, and sends them to Process Events 402 for analysis. The Process Topology process 406 is shown in greater detail in Figure 7. The Define Algorithms component 408, which runs primarily on the Alarming Server 302, defines the specific parsing and analysis rules to be 15 used by SNMS. These rules are then loaded into Process Events 402 for use in parsing and analysis. The algorithms are kept in a software module, and are defined by programmed code. A programmer simply programs the pre defined algorithm into this software module, which is then used by Process Events 402. These algorithms are procedural in nature and are based on 20 network topology. They consist of both simple rules that are written in a proprietary language and can be changed dynamically by an SNMS user, and of more complex rules which are programmed within SNMS software code. 25 The Receive NMS Data component 410, which runs primarily on the Alarming Server 302, receives events from other network management systems (NMS) 338. Such events include DS-3 transmission alarms. It also receives network maintenance events from a Network Maintenance Schedule system 340. It then parses these events and sends them to 30 Process Events 402 for analysis. The Display Alarms component 412, which runs primarily on the Graphics Server 308 and the Alarming Server 302, includes the Graphical User Interface (GUI) and associated software which supports topology and alarm presentation, using data supplied by Process Events 402. It also supports user interactions, such as alarm 2// WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 clears, acknowledgments, and trouble ticket submissions. It inputs these interactions to Process Events 402 for storing and required data updates. The Display Alarms process 412 is shown in greater detail in Figure 8. 5 The Report On Data component 414, which runs primarily on the Reporting Server 304, supports the topology and alarm reporting functions, using data supplied by Process Events 402. The Report On Data process 414 is shown in greater detail in Figure 9. 10 Referring now to Figure 5, the detailed process of the Process Events component 402 is illustrated. This is the main process of SNMS. It receives generalized events from other SNMS components, parses each event to extract relevant data, and identifies the type of event. If it is an SS7-related event, Process Events 402 applies a selected algorithm, such as create 15 alarm or correlate to existing alarm. The first three steps 502-506 are an initialization process that is run at the start of each SNMS session. They establish a state from which the system may work. Steps 510-542 are then run as a continuous loop. 20 In step 502, current topology data is read from a topology data store on the Topology Server 306. This topology data store is created in the Process Topology process 406 and input to Process Events 402, as reflected in Figure 4. The topology data that is read has been parsed in Process 25 Topology 406, so it is read in step 502 by Process Events 402 as a standardized event ready for processing. In step 504, the algorithms which are created in the Define Algorithms component 408 are read in. These algorithms determine what actions 30 SNMS will take on each alarm. SNMS has a map of which algorithms to invoke for which type of alarm. In step 506, alarms records from the Fault Management (FM) reporting database, which is created in the Report on Data process 414, are read in. 2/2 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 All previous alarms are discarded. Any alarm that is active against a node or circuit that does not exist in the topology (read in step 502) is discarded. Also, any alarm that does not map to any existing algorithm (read in step 504) is discarded. The alarms are read from the FM reporting database only 5 within initialization. To enhance performance of the system, future alarm records are retrieved from a database internal to the Process Events 402 component. Step 506 concludes the initialization process; once current topology, algorithms, and alarms are read, SNMS may begin the continuous process of reading, analyzing, processing, and storing events. 10 This process begins with step 510, in which the next event in queue is received and identified. The queue is a First In/First Out (FIFO) queue that feeds the Process Events component 402 with network events, topology events, and NMS events. To reiterate, the topology data that are read in 15 step 502 and the alarm data that are read in step 504 are initialization data read in at startup to create a system state. In step 510, ongoing events are read in continuously from process components 404, 406, and 410. These events have already been parsed, and are received as standardized SNMS events. SNMS then identifies the type of event that is being received. 20 If the event is found to be older than a certain threshold, for example one hour, the event is discarded. In steps 512, 520, 524, and 534 SNMS determines what to do with the event based on the event type identification made in step 510. 25 In step 512, if the event is determined to be topology data, SNMS updates the GUI displays to reflect the new topology in step 514. Then in step 516, SNMS performs a reconciliation with active alarms to discard any alarm not mapping to the new topology. In step 518, the new topology data is 30 recorded in a topology data store, which is kept in the SNMS Topology Server 306. In step 520, if the event is determined to be NMS data, such as DS-3 alarms 338, it is stored in the FM reporting database on the SNMS 2/ 3 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Reporting Server 304 for future reference by SNMS rules. In step 524, if the event is determined to be a defined SS7 network event, then in step 526 one or more algorithms will be invoked for the event. Such 5 algorithms may make use of data retrieved from Network Management Systems 338, Network Maintenance Schedules 340, and Network Topology 334. For example, when each circuit level algorithm generates an alarm, it 10 performs a check against the Network Maintenance Schedule 340 and NMS 338 records. Each alarm record is tagged if the specified circuit is within a maintenance window (Network Maintenance Schedule 340) or is transported on a DS-3 that has a transmission alarm (NMS 338). While SS7 circuits run at a DS-0 level, the Network Topology Databases 334 15 provide a DS-3 to DS-0 conversion table. Any DS-0 circuit within the DS-3 is tagged as potentially contained within the transmission fault. Clear records from NMS 338 will cause active SNMS circuit level alarms to be evaluated so that relevant NMS 338 associations can be removed. SNMS clear events will clear the actual SNMS alarm. GUI filters allow users to 20 mask out alarms that fit into a maintenance window or contained within a transmission fault since these alarms do not require SNMS operator actions. In step 528, active alarms are reconciled with new alarm generations and 25 clears resulting from step 526. In step 530, the GUI displays are updated. In step 532, the new alarm data is stored in the FM reporting database. In step 534, the event may be determined to be a timer. SNMS algorithms sometimes need to delay further processing of specific conditions for a 30 defined period of time, such as for persistence and rate algorithms. A delay timer is set for this condition and processing of new SNMS events continues. When the time elapses, SNMS treats the time as an event and performs the appropriate algorithm. 2/14 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 For example, an SS7 link may shut down momentarily with the possibility of functioning again within a few seconds, or it may be down for a much greater period of time due to a serious outage that requires action. SNMS, when it receives this event, will assign a timer of perhaps one minute to the 5 event. If the event clears within one minute, SNMS takes no action on it. However, if after the one minute timer has elapsed the event is unchanged (SS7 link is still down), SNMS will proceed to take action. In step 536, the appropriate algorithm is invoked to take such action. In 10 step 538, active alarms are reconciled with those that were generated or cleared in step 536. In step 540, the GUI displays are updated. In step 542, the new alarm data is stored in the FM reporting database. As stated previously, SNMS operates in a continuous manner with respect to receiving and processing events. After the data stores in steps 518, 522, 15 532, and 542, the process returns to step 510. Referring now to Figure 6, the detailed process of the Receive Network Events component 404 is illustrated. This component collects events from the SS7 network elements via data transport mechanisms, such as the 20 Async Data Network 320, SWIFT 326, X.25 OSS network 328, and the LSE 330. These events are received by the SNMS Alarming Server 302 in a First In/First Out (FIFO) queue. In steps 602 and 604, events from the SS7 network elements are collected by mainframe applications external to SNMS, such as SWIFT 326 and LSE 330, and the protocol of the event data 25 is converted from the network element-specific protocol to SNA or TCP/IP. In one embodiment, SNMS may also have software running on the mainframe that converts the protocol to that recognizable by the SNMS Alarming Server 302. The event data is then transmitted via SNA or TCP/IP to the SNMS Alarming Server 302. SNMS maintains a Signaling Event List 30 608 of all SS7 event types that is to be processed. In step 606, SNMS checks the Signaling Event List 608 and if the current event is found in the list, SNMS traps the event for processing. If the event is not found in the list, SNMS discards it. 2/13~ WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 In step 610, the event is parsed according to defined parsing rules 614. The parsing rules 614 specify which fields are to be extracted from which types of events, and are programmed into the SNMS code. The parsing of events in step 610 extracts only those event data fields needed within the 5 alarm algorithms or displays. Also input to step 610 are scheduled events 612 from the Network Maintenance Schedule 340. Scheduled events 612 are used to identify each network event collected in step 602 that may be a result of scheduled network maintenance. This allows SNMS operators to account for those SS7 network outages that are caused by planned 10 maintenance. In step 616, the parsed event data is used to create standardized event objects in SNMS resident memory for use by other SNMS processes. Such event objects are read into the main process, Process Events 402, in step 15 510. Referring now to Figure 7, the detailed process of the Process Topology component 406 is illustrated. This process component retrieves network topology and configuration data from three types of sources, creates 20 standardized topology data records, and stores this data for use by other SNMS processes. In particular, it feeds active topology data to Process Events 402, running on the Alarming Server 302, in step 502. In step 702, the SNMS Topology server 306 collects topology data from 25 three different sources. It collects current connectivity and configuration data generated by the SS7 network elements via the Control system 332. It collects topology data that has been entered into order entry and engineering systems and stored in Network Topology Databases 334. It also accepts manual overrides 336 via workstation. The collection of data from 30 the Topology Database 334 and the Control system 332 occurs on a periodic basis, and is performed independently of the SNMS Alarming server 302. Unlike prior art systems that use data retrieved from PMUs 106, SNMS receives topology data from all types of network elements, including those that are not connected to a PMU 106 such as that of Figure 21t WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 2. SNMS also uses data reflecting the topology of foreign networks, such as those of a Local Exchange Carrier (LEC) or an international carrier. This data is used to perform impact assessments that will allow the SNMS user to determine facts such as which end customers may be impacted by an 5 SS7 link outage. The type of topology data collected and used by SNMS, and for example, for the SS7 linkage of an STP 104 with a Switch/SSP 102, data is received by network order entry and engineering systems. The data and a brief description of its contents is provided below. 10 STP Link ID Identifies each SS7 link to the STP Switch Link ID Identifies each SS7 link to the Switch/SP STP Linkset Identifies a trunk grouping of SS7 links to the STP Switch Linkset Identifies a trunk grouping of SS7 links to the Switch/SP 15 MCI/Telco Circuit ID Identifies the SS7 link to external systems. For interfaces between two different networks, each ID (MCI ID and Telco ID) provides an identification of the SS7 link for each network (MCI and a Telco in this example). Link Type Identifies the type of SS7 link 20 SLC Signal Link Code For the switched voice network supported by SS7, data is received by network order entry and engineering systems and used to perform SS7 event impact assessments: 25 Voice Trunk Groups Voice trunk group supported by each SSP 102 For the SS7 linkage of a domestic STP 104g to an international STP 104h, data is received by network order entry and engineering systems: 30 Circuit ID Identifies the SS7 link to external systems SLC Signal Link Code For the purpose of performing impact assessments, Local Exchange Carrier 2/7 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 (LEC) NPA/NXX assignments and End Office to Access Tandem homing arrangements are received by a calling area database that is populated by Bellcore's Local Exchange Routing Guide (LERG). 5 LATA Local Access Transport Area (conventional) NPA/NXX Numbering Plan Area/prefix (conventional) End Office LEC customer serving node Access Tandem LEC end office hub 10 Foreign network STP 104 clustering and SSP 102 homing arrangements are received by SS7 network elements via a control system. Point Code Identifies SS7 node (conventional) 15 Data identifying certain aspects of each network element are received by a Switch Configuration File, which resides in an external system. Data mapping each network DS-0 onto a DS-3 is received by Network Topology Databases. This data is used to assign DS-3 alarms received by 20 NMS to DS-0 level circuits. Data needed to overwrite data acquired through automated processes are provided by manual overrides. 25 Referring now back to Figure 7 in step 704, the various topology data are parsed to extract the data fields that are needed by SNMS algorithms. The data are then standardized into event records that can be processed by Process Events 402. 30 In step 706, the standardized data records are validated against other data. For example, circuit topology records are validated against node topology records to ensure that end nodes are identified and defined. In step 708, the topology data are stored on the Topology server 306 of 2/Rf WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Figure 3 in a relational database, such as that offered by Sybase. In step 710, the new topology records are passed from the Topology server 306 to the main SNMS process running on the Alarming server 302 and 5 compared against the active configuration (i.e. configuration that is currently loaded into memory). Active alarm and GUI displays are reconciled to remove alarms that pertain to non-existent topology entries. In step 712, the topology is stored on the Alarming Server 302 (for use by 10 Process Events 402) in the form of flat files for performance reasons. At this time the flat file mirrors the Topology server 306 database from step 708. This flat file is only accessible by the main process. In step 714, the new topology records are loaded into active SNMS memory and new processes which require topology data now use the new configuration. 15 Referring now to Figure 8, the detailed process of the Display Alarms component 412 is illustrated. This process component provides the results of SNMS processing to the user (referred to as the "operator"), and accepts operator input as actions to be performed within SNMS. Therefore, the 20 process between Display Alarms 412 and Process Events 402 is two-way. It is important to note that while there is a single Process Events process 402 running for the entire SNMS system, there is a different instance of the Display Alarms process 412 running for each operator that is logged onto SNMS. That is, each operator instigates a separate execution of Display 25 Alarms 412. When an operator logs on SNMS, the first four steps, 802 - 808, execute as an initialization. From there, steps 810 - 838 operate as a continuous loop. The initialization provides each operator with a system state from 30 which to work. In step 802, the current topology is read in and displayed via Graphical User Interface (GUI). Each operator has its own GUI process that is initialized and terminated based upon an operator request. Each GUI process manages its displays independently. Any status change is handled by the individual processes. 2/1 1 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 In step 804, a filter that defines the specific operator view is read in. Each operator can define the view that his/her GUI process will display. Filter parameters include: 5 Traffic Alarms, Facility alarms, or both Acknowledged Alarms, Unacknowledged Alarms, or both Alarms on circuits within maintenance windows, Alarms on circuits that are not within a maintenance window, or both. 10 Alarms on circuits that have associated transmission alarms (DS-3 alarms via outage ids), Alarms on circuits that do not have associated transmission alarms, or both. Alarms with a specified severity. Alarms on nodes/circuits owned by a specified customer id. 15 Alarms on International circuits, Alarms on Domestic circuits, or both. The operator's GUI displays are updated both upon initialization in step 804 and when filter changes are requested in steps 828 and 830. Each specific operator's instance of the Display Alarms 412 process opens a 20 connection with Process Events 402 so that only alarm records relevant to the specific operator's filter are transmitted. In step 806, the specific operator's process registers itself with Process Events 402 to identify which alarms are to be sent. In step 808, the GUI display is presented to the operator. 25 The continuous execution of Display Alarms 412 begins in step 810. Each event that is to be retrieved and presented, as defined by the operator filter, is received and identified. In steps 812, 816, 820, 826, and 836 SNMS determines what to do with the event based on the event type identification 30 made in step 810. In steps 812 and 816, if the event is determined to be an alarm update or a topology update, the operator's GUI display is updated to reflect this, in steps 814 and 818, respectively. Then the next event is received, in step 810. 220 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 In step 820, if the event is determined to be an operator action, two activities are required. First, in step 822, the operator's GUI display is updated to reflect the status change. Then, in step 824, a status change update is sent to the main process, Process Events 402, so that the status 5 change may be reflected in SNMS records and other GUI processes (for other operators) can receive and react to the status changes. In step 826, if the event is determined to be an operator display action, then it is determined if the action is a filter change request or a display 10 request. In step 828, if it is determined to be a filter change request, then in step 830 the GUI process registers with Process Events 402 so that the appropriate alarms records are transmitted. In step 832, if it is determined to be an operator display request, then in step 834 the requested display is presented to the operator. Display requests may include: 15 node detail and connection circuit connection linkset connection unknown topology alarms (alarms on objects that are not defined in the 20 topology databases) STP pair connections Nodes contained within a LATA Home/Mate connections (for non-adjacent nodes) NPA/NXX lists 25 trunk group lists end office access tandem rules definition help screens (aid the operator in understanding the actual algorithm used in generating the alarm recommended actions (operator defined actions that should be taken when 30 a specific alarm is received) In step 836, if the event is determined to be a termination request, then the specific operator's GUI process is terminated in step 838. Otherwise, the next event is received in step 810. Within the Display Alarm process, 22/ WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 SNMS provides several unique display windows which support fault isolation, impact assessments, and trouble handling. All of the GUI displays which contain node and circuit symbols are "active" windows within SNMS (i.e. screens are dynamically updated when alarm status of the node or 5 circuit change). All the displays are possible due to the set of MCI topology sources used within SNMS. SNMS has extensive topology processing of SNMS which is used in operator displays. A. SNMS Circuits Map 10 This window displays topology and alarm status information for a selected linkset. As network events are received, SNMS recognizes the relationships between endpoints and isolates the fault by reducing generated alarms. This display allows the operator to monitor a linkset as seen from both sides of the signaling circuit (from the perspective of the nodes). 15 B. SNMS Connections This window presents a cluster view of MCI's signaling network. All MCI and non-MCI nodes connected to the MCI STPs in the cluster are displayed along with the associated linksets. A cluster view is important since a 20 single STP failure/isolation is not service impacting, but a cluster failure is since all MCI SPs have connectivity to both MCI STPs in the cluster. C. SNMS Nonadjacent Node This window presents a STP pair view of a selected LEC signaling network. 25 All LEC SPs, STPs, and SCPs (with signaling relationships to the MCI network) connected LEC STP pair are displayed. MCI's area of responsibility does not include the LEC STP to LEC SSP signaling links, so no linksets are displayed here. This display allows the SNMS operator to monitor a LEC signaling network as seen by the MCI nodes. 30 D. SNMS LATA Connections This window presents a map of all LEC owned nodes that are located within a specified LATA. As well, the MCI STP pair that serves the LATA is also displayed along with the associated linksets (where applicable). This 222 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 display allows the operator to closely monitor a specific LATA if/when problems surface within the LATA. LATA problems, while outside MCI's domain of control, can introduce problems within the MCI network since signaling messages are shared between the networks. As well, MCI voice 5 traffic which terminates in the specified LATA can be affected by LATA outages. E. NPA-NXX Information List This window presents a list of NPX-NXX's served by a specified LEC switch. 10 This display is very valuable during impact assessment periods (i.e. if the specified LEC switch is isolated, which NPA-NXXs are unavailable). F. End Office Information List This window presents a list of LEC end office nodes which are homed to the 15 specific LEC access tandem. This display is very valuable during impact assessment periods (i.e. if the specified LEC tandem switch is isolated, which end offices are unavailable). G. Trunk Group Information List 20 This window presents a list of MCI voice trunks, connected to a specified MCI switch, and the LEC end office switches where they terminate. This display is very valuable during impact assessment periods (i.e. what end offices are impacted when a MCI switch is isolated). This display is also available for selected LEC end office switches. 25 H. Filter Definition Window The SNMS operator can limited the scope of his displays to: type of alarms that should be presented 30 severity of alarms that should be presented acknowledged alarms, unacknowledged alarms, or both alarms on circuits inside a planned outage window, alarms on circuits outside a planned outage window or both alarms that are not the result of a specified transmission network outage 223 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 alarms on specified customer nodes or alarms on circuits connected to specified customer L Trouble Ticket Window 5 The SNMS operator can open trouble tickets on signaling alarms. These trouble tickets are opened in MCI's trouble ticketing system. Operators can also display the status of existing trouble tickets. Referring now to Figure 9, the detailed process of the Report On Data 10 component 414 is illustrated. This process component, which runs on the Reporting server 304, stores SNMS-processed data and provides reports. Standardized Network Element (NE) Event Records 914 are received with location specific time stamps. In step 902, the time stamps are converted 15 into Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) so that standardized reports can be produced. In step 904, all data received are stored in individual database tables. Data may also be archived for long-term storage to tape or disk. This data 20 includes SNMS-generated alarms 916, standardized topology records 918, and performance statistics from PMUs 920. It may also include non processed data, such as DS-3 alarms from NMS 338 and network maintenance schedule data 340. 25 In step 906, reports are produced. These reports may be custom or form reports. They may also be produced on demand, or per a schedule. These reports may be presented in a number of ways, including but not limited to electronic mail 908, X-terminal displays 910, and printed reports 912. XII. VIDEO TELEPHONY OVER POTS 30 The next logical step from voice over the POTS is video. Today, computers are capable of making video "calls" to each other when connected to some type of computer network. However, most people only have access to a computer network by making a call from their modem on the POTS with another modem on a computer connected to a network, so that they can WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 then "call" another computer on the network, which is in turn connected by a modem to another network computer. It is much simpler (and efficient) to call another person directly on the POTS and have the modems communicate with each other, without network overhead. ITU 5 recommendation H.324 describes terminals for low bitrate (28.8kbps modem) multimedia communication, utilizing V.34 modems operating over the POTS. H.324 terminals may carry real-time voice, data, and video, or any combination, including video telephony. H.324 terminals may be integrated into personal computers or implemented in stand-alone devices 10 such as videotelephones and televisions. Support for each media type (voice, data, video) is optional, but if supported, the ability to use a specified common mode of operation is required, so that all terminals supporting that media type can interwork. H.324 allows more than one channel of each type to be in use. Other Recommendations in the H.324 15 series include the H.223 multiplex (combination of voice, data and video), H.245 control, H.263 video codec (digital encoder and decoder), and G.723.1.1 audio codec. H.324 makes use of the logical channel signaling procedures of ITU 20 Recommendation H.245, in which the content of each logical channel is described when the channel is opened. Procedures are provided for allowing each caller to utilize only the multimedia capabilities of their machine. For example a person trying to make a video (and audio) call to someone who only has audio and not video capabilities can still 25 communicate with the audio method (G.723. 1.1) H.324 by definition is a point-to-point protocol. To conference with more than one other person an MCU (Multipoint Control Unit) is needed to act as a video-call bridge. H.324 computers may interwork with H.320 computers 30 on the ISDN, as well as with computers on wireless networks. A. Components of Video Telephony 1. DSP modem pools with ACD.. A Digital Signal Processor (DSP) modem pool is a modem bank, with each 225 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 modem having the ability to be programmed for extra functions (like new V. modem protocols, DTMF detection, etc.) A call is routed from the MCI switch to an ACD. The ACD keeps a matrix of which DSP modems are available. The ACD also communicates with the ISNAP which does a group 5 select to determine which group of Agents are responsible for this call and also which of the agents are free to process this call. In an alternative embodiment, DSP resources can be deployed without an ACD, directly connected to a switch. In this embodiment, the DSP resources are managed using an NCS-based routing step. 10 2. Agent. An Agent can be a human Video Operator (video capable MTOC), or an Automated program (video ARU). The ACD knows which Agent ports are available and connects an Agent to an Agent Port. 15 3. Video on Hold Server. If the ACD has no Agent ports available, then the caller is connected to the Video On Hold Server, which has the ability to play advertisements and other non-interactive video, until the ACD finds a free Agent port. 20 4. Video Mail Server. Video-mail messages are stored here. Customers can manage their mail and record greetings to be stored on this server. 25 5. Video Content Engine. Video On Demand content resides on the Video Content Engine. Video stored here can be previously recorded video-conferences, training videos, etc. 30 6. Reservation Engine. When people want to schedule a multi-party video-conference, they can specify the participants and time of the conference on this system. Configuration can be done with the help of a human Video Operator or by some other form entry method. 22-6 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 7. Video Bridge. Because H.324 is a point-to-point protocol, a Multi-point Conferencing Unit (MCU) needs to manage each participants call and re-direct the video 5 streams appropriately. MCU conferencing will be available for customers with H.324 and H.320 compliant systems. B. Scenario A computer or set-top TV has H.324 compliant software, and a modem for 10 use over POTS, most likely to be 28.8kbps (V.34) or higher. One objective is to call another party. If they do not answer or are busy, the originator has the option of leaving video-mail for the destination party. Another objective is to schedule and participate in a conference with more than two participants. 15 C. Connection Setup Figure 19B illustrates a call connection setup in accordance with a preferred embodiment. There are three methods for making a video-call to someone. The first method is to simply call them (from 1 and 7 of Figure 19B. If the destination is busy or doesn't answer, then the caller can make 20 another call to 1 800 VID MAIL and perform the appropriate procedures as follows. When a user dials "1 800 VID MAIL" at 1, the ACD on the DSP modem pool will connect a switch to a modem 2 and a port to an Agent 3. Then the 25 user logs-in to the system with a special, custom terminal program that utilizes the data stream part of the H.324 bandwidth (using the ITU T. 120 standard), called the V-mail Data Interface (VMDI). From a graphical user interface, icon or other menu, the caller can choose to : - browse and search a directory of video-capable MCI customers, 30 - call another H.324 compliant software program, - create a video-mail for Store & Forward for later delivery, - personalize and record their video-mail greeting messages, - view and manage their video-mail, or - view selections from a library of recordings (Video On Demand).

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 In an alternate embodiment, a user can dial "1 800 324 CALL" to call a number. Then, if the destination number was 1 319 375 1772, the modem dial string would be "ATDT 1 800 324 CALL ,,, 1 319 375 1772" (the comma 5 ',' tells the modem to do a short pause while dialing.) When the connection to 1 800 324 CALL is made, a connection is made from the originator, to an MCI switch 1, to an ARU 5a, selected by an ACD 2a, 3a. The ARU 5a detects DTMF tones entered through a telephone keypad or 10 other device for generating DTMF tones to get the destination number. The originator remains on hold while the ARU 5a makes a separate call to the destination number 5a, 6a and 7. If the destination answers, the originator is connected to the destination, both party's modems can connect, and the ARU 5a is released. If the destination is busy or does not answer, the call 15 is transferred to 1 800 VID MAIL or an Agent through the DSP modem pool 2. If there are no DTMF tones detected, the call is transferred to an Agent through the DSP modem pool 2. The Agent will make an H.324 connection with the caller and ask for their destination number (or provide help.) The architecture for this alternative is similar to how faxes are detected and 20 transmitted in the directlineMCI system as discussed with respect to an alternative embodiment. D. Calling the Destination When the destination number is known, the Video On Hold Server provides 25 the video input for the H.324 connection 4. A new call is made from the Agent 5, 6 to the destination number 7. One concern that required analysis while working out a detailed embodiment required determining if modems could re-synchronize after a switch operation without going off line. If the destination number answers and is a modem, a connection 30 MUST be made at the same speed as the originator modem speed. After modem handshaking is performed, the ACD instructs the switch to release the agent 3, 5 and releases the modems 2 and 6 and connects the originator to the destination 1 and 7. The destination PC realizes that the connection is an H.324 call (not a fax or otherwise) and the video-call WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 proceeds. In an alternate embodiment, if the destination answers and is a modem, a connection is made. Then, two H.324 calls are using two DSP modems. 5 The Agent can be released from both calls 3 and 5. The incoming data from each call is copied to the other call 2 and 6. This way, an Agent can monitor the video call for Video Store & Forward 9. When one connection drops carrier, the video-call is complete, and the modem carrier for the remaining call is dropped. 10 E. Recording Video-Mail, Store & Forward Video and Greetings If a destination number does not answer or is busy, the Video Mail Server will play the appropriate Video-Mail greeting for the owner of the 15 destination number 8. The caller then leaves a video-message, which is stored on the Video Mail Server. The recording of video for Store & Forward Video is exactly the same as leaving a video-message, described above. Parameters such as destination number, forwarding time, and any other audio S&F features currently available are entered through the VMDI or 20 communicated with a human video operator (or automated video ARU.) To record a personalized greeting for playback when someone cannot reach you because you are busy or do not answer, is similar to leaving Video Mail. The option to do this is done through the VMDI or communicated 25 with a human video operator. F. Retrieving Video-Mail and Video On Demand Users have the choice of periodically polling their video-mail for new messages, or have the video-mail server call them periodically when they 30 have a new message waiting. Configuration is done through the VMDI or human video operator. Managing and checking video-mail is also performed through the VMDI or communicated with a human video operator. Choice of video to view for Video On Demand (VOD) is through the VMDI. 2 2, WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 These videos can be previously recorded video-conferences, training videos, etc. and are stored on the Video Content Engine 9. G. Video-conference Scheduling 5 A user can navigate through the VMDI or Internet 10 WWW forms, or communicate with a human video operator to schedule a multi-point conference. This information is stored on the Reservation Engine 11. The other conference participants are notified of the schedule with a video-mail, e-mail message or otherwise. There will be an option to remind all 10 registered conference participants at a particular time (e.g. 1 hour before the conference), through video-mail (or e-mail, voice-mail, paging service or any other available notification method). The MCU (video bridge) can call each participant 12, or H.324 users can dial In to the MCU at the scheduled time 12. 15 XIII. VIDEO TELEPHONY OVER THE INTERNET Figure 19E illustrates an architecture for transmitting video telephony over the Internet in accordance with a preferred embodiment. Real-time Transmission Protocol (RTP) based video-conferencing refers to the 20 transmission of audio, video and data encapsulated as RTP messages. For a RTP-based video-conferencing session, a end-user station first establishes a dial-up Point-to-Point (PPP) connection with the Internet which is then used to transport the RTP messages. Audio information is compressed as per G.723.1.1 audio codec (coder - decoder) standards, Video is compressed 25 in accordance with ITU H.263 video codec standards and data is transmitted as per ITU-T. 120 standards. RTP is a protocol providing support for applications with real-time properties. While UDP/IP is its initial target networking environment, RTP 30 is transport-independent so that it can be used over IPX or other protocols. RTP does not address the issue of resource reservation or quality of service control; instead, it relies on resource reservation protocols such as RSVP. The transmission service with which most network users are familiar is point-to-point, or unicast service. This is the standard form of service 2 3 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 provided by networking protocols such as HDLC and TCP. Somewhat less commonly used (on wire-based networks, at any rate) is broadcast service. Over a large network, broadcasts are unacceptable 5 (because they use network bandwidth everywhere, regardless of whether individual sub-nets are interested in them or not), and so they are usually restricted to LAN-wide use (broadcast services are provided by low-level network protocols such as IP). Even on LANs, broadcasts are often undesirable because they require all machines to perform some processing 10 in order to determine whether or not they are interested in the broadcast data. A more practical transmission service for data that is intended for a potentially wide audience is multicast. Under the multicast model on a 15 WAN, only hosts that are actively interested in a particular multicast service will have such data routed to them; this restricts bandwidth consumption to the link between the originator and the receiver of multicast data. On LANs, many interface cards provide a facility whereby they will automatically ignore multicast data in which the kernel has not 20 registered an interest; this results in an absence of unnecessary processing overhead on uninterested hosts. A. Components RSVP Routers with MBONE capability for broadcast of video from the Video 25 Content Engine and the MCI Conference Space network. MCI will have an MBONE network that multicasts locally and transmits many unicasts out the Internet. RSVP is a network control protocol that will allow Internet applications to 30 obtain special qualities-of-service (QOS's) for their data flows. This will generally (but not necessarily) require reserving resources along the data path(s) either ahead of time or dynamically. RSVP is a component of the future "integrated services" Internet, which provides both best-effort and real-time qualities of service. An embodiment is presented in the detailed .23/ WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 specification that follows. When an application in a host (end system) requests a specific QOS for its data stream, RSVP is used to deliver the request to each router along the 5 path(s) of the data stream and to maintain router and host state to provide the requested service. Although RSVP was developed for setting up resource reservations, it is readily adaptable to transport other kinds of network control information along data flow paths. 10 1. Directory and Registry Engine. When people are connected to the Internet (whether through modem dial up, direct connection or otherwise), they can register themselves in this directory. The directory is used to determine if a particular person is available for conferencing. 15 2. Agents. An Agent can be a human Video Operator (video capable MTOC), or an Automated program (video ARU). An Internet ACD in accordance with a preferred embodiment is designed so that Agent ports can be managed. 20 The ACD will know which Agent ports are available and connects an Agent to an available Agent Port. If the ACD has no Agent ports available, then the caller is connected to the Video On Hold Server, which has the ability to play advertisements and other non-interactive video, until the ACD finds a free Agent port. 25 3. Video Mail Server. Video-mail messages are stored here. Customers can manage their mail and record greetings to be stored on this server. 30 4. Video Content Engine. Video On Demand content resides on the Video Content Engine. Video stored here may be previously recorded video-conferences, training videos, etc.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 5. Conference Reservation Engine. When people want to schedule a multi-party video-conference, they can specify the participants and time of the conference on this system. Configuration can be done with the help of a human Video Operator or by 5 some other form entry method. 6. MCI Conference Space. This is the virtual reality area that customers can be present in. Every participant is personified as an "avatar". Each avatar has many abilities 10 and features, such as visual identity, video, voice, etc. Avatars interact with each other by handling various objects that represent document sharing, file transferring, etc., and can speak to each other as well as see each other. 15 7. Virtual Reality Space Engine. The Conference Spaces are generated and managed by the Virtual Reality Engine. The virtual reality engine manages object manipulation and any other logical descriptions of the conference spaces. 20 B. Scenario If a user has a current connection to the Internet. The user will utilize H.263 compliant system software utilizing RTP (as opposed to TCP) over the Internet. If the user also desires to participate in VR MCI conference-space, and create/view video-mail, the user can join a VR session. 25 C. Connection Setup The simplest way to make a video call to another person on the Internet is to simply make the call without navigating through menus and options as an initial telephone call. However, if the destination is busy or not answering, MCI provides services for depositing messages. 30 A customer can login to a telnet server (e.g. telnet vmail.mci.com), or use a custom-made client, or the WWW (e.g. http://vmail.mci.com). The services menu is referred to as the V-Mail Data Interface (VMDI), similar to the VMDI available when dialing through POTS as described above.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 From a menu, the caller can choose to: - browse and search a directory of video-capable MCI customers, - call another H.263 compliant software program, 5 - create a video-mail for Store & Forward for later delivery, - personalize and record their video-mail greeting messages, - view and manage their video-mail, and - view selections from a library of recordings (Video On Demand). 10 When a user has specified a party to call by indicating the destination's name, IP address or other identification, the Directory is checked. It is possible to determine if a destination will accept a call without actually calling; so, since it can be determined that the destination will accept a call, the originator's video client can be told to connect to the destination. If the 15 callers are using a WWW browser (e.g. Netscape Navigator, Microsoft Internet Explorer, internetMCI Navigator, etc.) to access the VMDI, then a call can be automatically initiated using Java, JavaScript or Helper App. If a call cannot be completed, there will be a choice to leave video-mail. D. Recording Video-Mail, Store & Forward Video and 20 Greetings If an Agent determines that a destination party is not available (off-line, busy, no answer, etc.), the Video Mail Server plays an appropriate Video Mail greeting for the owner of the destination number 8. The caller then leaves a video-message, which is stored on the Video Mail Server. The 25 recording of video for Store & Forward (S&F) Video is exactly the same as leaving a video-message, described above. Parameters such as destination number, forwarding time, and any other audio S&F features currently available are entered through the VMDI or communicated with a human video operator (or automated video ARU.) 30 Customers may record their own personalized greetings to greet callers that cannot reach them because they are busy or do not answer. This is accomplished in a manner similar to leaving Video-Mail, through the VMDI or communicated with a human video operator.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 E. Retrieving Video-Mail and Video On Demand Users have the choice of periodically polling their video-mail for new messages, or having the video-mail server call them periodically when they 5 have a new message waiting. Configuration is done through the VMDI or human video operator. Managing and checking video-mail is also performed through the VMDI or communicated with a human video operator. A choice of video to view for Video On Demand (VOD) is provided through the VMDI. These videos can be previously recorded video 10 conferences, training videos, etc. and are stored on the Video Content Engine. F. Video-conference A user can navigate through the VMDI or Internet 10 WWW forms, or 15 communicate with a human video operator to schedule a conference in the Conference Space. The information is stored on the Conference Reservation Engine 8. The other conference participants are notified of the schedule with a video-mail, e-mail message or otherwise. An optional reminder is provided for all registered conference participants at a particular time (e.g. 20 1 hour before the conference), through video-mail (or e-mail, voice-mail, paging service or any other available notification method). G. Virtual Reality For multiple party conferences, a virtual meeting place can be generated by 25 the Virtual Reality Space Engine. The implementation of the interface includes an embodiment based on VRML. Each person is in control of an "avatar." Each avatar can have many different features such as visual representation (static representation or live video "head") and audio (voice or music). Data exchange and collaboration are all actions that can be 30 performed in each VR conference room. The private MBONE network allows the multi-casting of conference member's data streams. Since everyone has a different view when interacting in VR-space, the VR Space Engine can optimize the broadcast of everyone's incoming H.263 streams to everyone else by multi-casting only those avatar streams in view for each WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 particular avatar. XIV. VIDEO-CONFERENCING ARCHITECTURE MCI Video-Conferencing describes an architecture for multimedia communications including real-time voice, video and data, or any 5 combination, including video telephony. The architecture also defines inter-operation with other video-conferencing standards. The architecture also defines multipoint configurations and control, directory services and video mail services. A. Features 10 Video-Conferencing architecture is a multimedia services system and is designed to provide a number of features and functions including, Point-to-Point Video Telephony Multimedia video-conferencing with a MCU for control and multimedia information processing 15 Support for Gateways for interworking with other video-conferencing systems based on ITU H.320 and ITU H.324 standards Support for real-time voice, video and data or any combination Multimedia information streams are transported between the end-user terminals using standard transport protocol RTP 20 Support for dynamic capability exchange and mode preferences, like ITU H.263 video and ITU G.723 audio, between end-user terminals Figure 19C illustrates a Video-Conferencing Architecture in accordance with a preferred embodiment. The components and details of the video 25 conferencing architecture are detailed below. B. Components The Video-Conferencing System is comprised of a set of components including, 30 End-User Terminals LAN Interconnect System ITU H.323 Server Support Service Units 2,36 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 1. End-User Terminals. The end-user terminals are the end points of communication. Users communicate and participate in video conferences using the end-user terminals. End-user terminals, including ITU H.323 terminals 1 & 8, ITU 5 H.320 terminal 9 and ITU H.324 terminal 10, are interconnected through the ITU H.323 Server which provides the call control, multi-point control and gateway functions. End-User terminals are capable of multimedia input and output and are equipped with telephone instruments, microphones, video cameras, video display monitors and keyboards. 10 2. LAN Interconnect System. The LAN Interconnect System 3 is the interface system between the MCI Switch Network 2 and the different H.323 Systems including H.323 Server 4, Video Content Engine 5, Video Mail Server 6 and also the H.323 15 Directory Server 7. End-User terminals participating in video-telephony sessions or video conferencing sessions establish communication links with the MCI switch network and communicate with the H.323 Server through the LAN Interconnect System. The LAN Interconnect system provides ACD-like 20 functionality for the H.323 video-conferencing system. 3. ITU H.323 Server. The H.323 Server 4 provides a variety of services including call control, multipoint control, multipoint processing, and gateway services for 25 interworking between terminals supporting different video-conferencing standards like ITU H.320 and ITU H.324. The H.323 Server is comprised of a set of individual components which communicate with each other and with the other external systems like end 30 user terminals, video mail server and H.323 directory server. The different components of the H.323 Server include: H.323 Gatekeeper Operator Services Module H.323 Multipoint Control Unit (MCU) WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 H.323 Multipoint Control Unit (MCU) H.323 Gateway 4. Gatekeeper. 5 The H.323 Gatekeeper provides call control services to the H.323 terminals and Gateway units. The Gatekeeper provides a variety of services including: Call Control Signaling with terminals, gateways and MCU; Admissions Control for access to the video-conferencing system; Call Authorization ; 10 Bandwidth control and management; Transport Address Translation for translating addresses between different kinds of interworking video-conferencing systems; Call Management of on-going calls; Interfaces with the Directory Server[7] to provide directory services; and 15 Interfaces with the Video Mail Server[6] for video mail services. The Gatekeeper uses the ITU H.225 stream packetization and synchronization procedures for the different services, and is tightly integrated with the Operator Services Module for offering manual operator 20 services. 5. Operator Services Module. The Operator Services Module offers manual/automatic operator services and is tightly integrated with the gatekeeper. The manual or the automatic 25 operator terminal, located elsewhere on the LAN, interacts with the gatekeeper through the Operator Services Module to provide all the required operator services. 6. Multipoint Control Unit (MCU). The MCU is comprised of the Multipoint Controller and the Multipoint 30 Processor and together provides multipoint control and processing services for video-conferences. The multipoint controller provides control functions to support conferences between three or more terminals. The multipoint controller carries out capabilities exchange with each terminal in a multipoint conference. The multipoint processor provides for the 239 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 processing of audio, video and/or data streams including mixing, switching and other required processing under the control of the multipoint controller. The MCU uses ITU H.245 messages and methods to implement the features and functions of the multipoint controller and the multipoint 5 processor. 7. Gateway. The H.323 Gateway provides appropriate translation between the various transmission formats. The translation services include, 10 Call Signaling message translation between H.225 and H.221 which is the part of the H.320 system; Communication procedures translation between H.245 and H.242; and Translation between the video, audio and data formats like H.263, H.261, G.723, G.728 and T. 120. 15 The H.323 Gateway provides conversion functions for transmission format, call setup and control signals and procedures. 8. Support Service Units. The Support Service Units include the H.323 Directory Server 7, the Video 20 Mail Server 6 and the Video Content Engine 5 which interact with the H.323 Server for providing different services to the end-user terminals. The H.323 Directory Server provides directory services and interacts with the gatekeeper unit of the H.323 Server. The Video Mail Server is the repository of all the video mail generated by the H.323 system and interacts 25 with the gatekeeper unit of the H.323 server for the creation and playback of video mail. The Video Content Engine is the repository of all other types of video content which can be served to the end-user terminals. The Video Content Engine interacts with the gatekeeper unit of the H.323 Server. 30 C. Overview The H.323 based video-conferencing architecture completely describes an architecture for multimedia communications including real-time voice, video and data, or any combination including video telephony. Users with H.323 terminals can participate in a multimedia video-conferencing WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 session, a point-to-point video telephony session, or an audio only session with other terminal users not equipped with video facilities. The architecture also includes gateways for interworking with other video conferencing terminals based on standards like ITU H.320 and ITU H.324. 5 The architecture includes a directory server for offering complete directory services including search facilities. A video mail server is an integral part of the architecture providing for the recording and playback of video mail. A video content engine is also part of the overall architecture for offering 10 multimedia content delivery services. H.323 terminals participating in a video-conferencing or a video telephony session communicate with the H.323 server through the MCI switch network. The H.323 server offers a variety of services including call control, 15 information stream delivery, multi-point control and also gateway services for interworking with H.320 or H.324 terminals. The server also offers directory services and video mail services. A H.323 terminal initiating a video call establishes a communication link 20 with the H.323 Server through the MCI switch network. On admission to the network by the H.323 server, the server offers a directory of other available terminals to the call initiating terminal which selects a destination terminal or a destination group to participate in a video conference. The server then sets up a communication link with the selected destination 25 terminal or terminals and finally bridges the calling terminal and the called terminal/terminals. If the destination terminal is unavailable or busy, the server offers the calling terminal an option to deposit a video mail. The server also notifies the recipient of the video mail and offers the recipient services for retrieval of the video mail on-demand. Additional services like 30 content delivery on-demand to H.323 terminals are also offered and controlled by the H.323 server. D. Call Flow Example The Call Flow for the H.323 architecture based video-conferencing is 24 0 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 including calls to other H.323, H.320 and H.324 terminals; and Multipoint Video-Conference Calls. Figure 19C illustrates various call flows in accordance with a preferred 5 embodiment. 1. Point-to-Point Calls. a) Case 1: H.323 Terminal to another H.323 Terminal A call initiating H.323 terminal 1 initiates a call to another H.323 terminal[8] through the MCI Switch Network. The gatekeeper is involved in 10 controlling the session including call establishment and call control. The Terminal end-user interface is any commercially available Web-browser. Calling terminal 1 initiates a dial-up call to the MCI Switch network; the call is terminated on the H.323 Gatekeeper module of the H.323 Server 15 4 through the LAN Interconnect 3 system; a PPP link is established between the calling terminal and the Gatekeeper 4 on a well-know unreliable transport address/port; Calling terminal sends a admission request message to the Gatekeeper[4] The Gatekeeper 4 sends an admission confirm message and communicates 20 with the Directory Server 7 and sends back directory information to calling terminal for display at the calling terminal, and the directory information is displayed as a web-page along with a choice of calling modes including Point-to-Point or Conference mode; the admissions exchange is followed by the setting up of a reliable 25 connection for H.225 call control messaging on a well known port; the terminal user chooses the point-to-point mode and also chooses the destination of the call. This is the setup request message; the gatekeeper 4 together with the operator services module/operator proceeds with calling the called terminal 8 with a setup request; 30 if setup request fails, the gatekeeper 4 informs the calling terminal 1 of the failure and provides an option for the calling terminal 1 to leave a video mail; if the user at calling terminal 1 chooses to leave a video mail for user at the destination terminal 8, the gatekeeper 4 establishes a connection 291? / WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 if the user at calling terminal 1 chooses to leave a video mail for user at the destination terminal 8, the gatekeeper 4 establishes a connection with the Video Mail Server 6 and receives a reliable port address from the mail server 6 for a H.245 connection; 5 the gatekeeper 4 additionally establishes a connection for H.225 call control with the video mail server 6. the gatekeeper 4 in-turn sends a reliable port address to calling terminal 1 for H.245 control channel. The gatekeeper 4 may be involved in H.245 control channel communications; 10 the calling terminal 1 establishes a reliable connection for H.245 control channel and H.245 procedures like capability exchange, mode preferences, etc. are carried out; after the capabilities exchange, H.245 procedures will be used to establish logical channels for the different media streams; 15 the capabilities exchange also involves determination of dynamic port addresses for the transport of the different media streams; the media streams are transported over the dynamic ports in the various logical channels; once the terminal has completed the video mail, it closes the logical 20 channel for video after stopping transmission of the video stream; data transmission is stopped and logical channel for data is closed; audio transmission is stopped and logical channel for audio is closed; H.245 call clearing message is sent to the peer entity; calling terminal 1 transmits a disconnect message on the H.225 port to the 25 gatekeeper 7 which in turn sends the disconnect message to the video mail server 6; the disconnect messages are acknowledged and the call is disconnected; if the setup request is a success, called terminal 8 responds with a connect message which include a reliable port address for H.245 connection; 30 the gatekeeper 4 responds to the calling terminal 1 with the connect message along with the port address for the H.245 control channel communications; calling terminal 1 sets up a connection for H.225 call control signaling with the gateway 4, establishes another connection for H.245 control WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 channel communications and responds to the gateway 4 with connect acknowledgment message; the gatekeeper 4 in-turn sends the connect acknowledgment message to called terminal 8. 5 called terminal 8 now sets up a H.225 call control connection and also establishes another connection for H.245 with the gatekeeper 4 for control channel communications; the terminals, having established a H.245 control channel for reliable communication, exchange capabilities and other initial procedures of 10 H.245, and an audio channel may be optionally opened before the capabilities exchange; following the capabilities exchange, logical channels over dynamic ports are established for each of the media streams; once the media logical channels are open over dynamic ports, media 15 information can be exchanged; during the session, H.245 control procedures may be invoked for changing the channel structure like mode control, capability, etc.; also H.225 control channel is for specific procedures as requested by the gatekeeper[4] including call status, bandwidth allocation, etc.; 20 for termination, either terminal may initiate a stop video message, discontinue video transmission and then close the logical channel for video; data transmission is discontinued and the logical channel for data is closed; 25 audio transmission is discontinued and logical channel for audio is closed; H.245 end session message is sent and transmission on the control channel is stopped and the control channel is closed; terminal receiving the end session message will repeat the closing procedures and then H.225 call signaling channel is used for call 30 clearing; and terminal initiating the termination will send a disconnect message on the H.225 control channel to the gatekeeper 4 which in turn sends a disconnect message to the peer terminal. The peer terminal acknowledges the disconnect which is forwarded to the initiating 1 ; WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 terminal and the call is finally released. b) Case 2: H.323 Terminal to H.320 Terminal A call initiated from a H.323 terminal 1 invokes a call to a H.320 terminal 9 5 through an MCI Switch Network. The gatekeeper along with the gateway is involved in controlling the session including call establishment and call control. A terminal end-user interface is any of the commercially available Web-browsers or a similar interface. 10 The call flow is similar to a H.323 terminal calling another H.323 terminal as explained in the previous case except that a gateway 4 component is introduced between the gatekeeper 4 and the called terminal 9. The gateway transcodes H.323 messages including audio, video, data and control to H.320 messages and vice-versa. If the H.320 terminal 9 initiates 15 a call to a H.323 terminal[1], the initial dial-up routine is performed by the gateway and then the gatekeeper takes over the call control and the call proceeds as explained in the previous case. c) Case 3: H.323 Terminal to H.324 Terminal 20 Call initiating H.323 terminal 1 initiates a call to a H.324 terminal 10 through the MCI Switch Network. The gatekeeper along with the gateway is involved in controlling the session including call establishment and call control. The Terminal end-user interface is a Web-browser or a similar interface. 25 The call flow is similar to a H.323 terminal calling another H.323 terminal as explained in the previous case except that a gateway 4 component is introduced between the gatekeeper 4 and the called terminal 9. The gateway 4 transcodes H.323 messages including audio, video, data and control to H.324 messages and vice-versa. 30 If the H.324 terminal 10 initiates a call to a H.323 terminal 1, the initial dial-up routine is performed by the gateway and then the gatekeeper takes over the call control and the call proceeds as explained in the previous case.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 2. Multipoint Video-Conference Calls. In the case of multipoint video-conference, all the terminals exchange initial call signaling and setup messages with the gatekeeper 4 and then are 5 connected to the Multipoint Controller 4 for the actual conference including H.245 control channel messaging through the gatekeeper 4. The following are the considerations for setting up a conference: After the initial admission control message exchange, the users are presented with a web page with information about conference type 10 and a dynamic list of participants. Participants joining later are presented with a web page with conference information and also are requested to enter authentication information All users get connected to the multipoint controller[4] through the 15 gatekeeper[4] The multipoint controller[4] distributes information among the various participants E. Conclusion 20 The video-conferencing architecture is a total solution for multimedia communications including real-time voice, video and data, or any combination, including point-to-point video telephony. The architecture defines interworking with other systems utilizing ITU recommendations. 25 Additional services including directory services and video mail services are also part of the overall architecture. XV. VIDEO STORE AND FORWARD ARCHITECTURE 30 The Video Store and Forward Architecture describes a video-on-demand content delivery system. The content may include video and audio or audio only. Input source for the content is from the existing video-conferencing facility of MCI or from any video/audio source. Input video is stored in a Digital Library in different standard formats like ITU H.320, ITU H.324, ITU WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 H.263 or MPEG and delivered to the clients in the requested format. Delivery is at different speeds to the clients either on the Internet or on dial-up lines including ISDN and with a single storage for each of the different formats. 5 A. Features The Video Store and Forward Architecture is designed with a rich set of features and functionality including: Delivers Video and Audio on demand; 10 Supports different compression and transmission standards including ITU H.320, ITU H.324, MPEG and ITU H.263 on both IP (Internet Protocol) and RTP (Real Time Transport Protocol); Supports content delivery on the Internet, by dial-up ISDN lines and by low speed (28.8kbps) Analog Telephone lines; 15 Supports single source of content and multiple storage and delivery formats and multiple delivery speeds; and Supports Content Management and Archival in multiple formats. B. Architecture 20 Figure 19D is a Video Store and Forward Architecture in accordance with a preferred embodiment. C. Components The Video Store and Forward architecture can be completely described by the following components. 25 Content Creation and Transcoding. Content Management and Delivery. Content Retrieval and Display. 1. Content Creation and Transcoding. 30 Input sources include analog video, video from Multi-Point Control Unit (MCU) and other video sources la and 1b. Input content is converted to standard formats like ITU H.261, ITU H.263, ITU H.320, ITU H.263, ITU H.324, MPEG and also formats to support delivery of H.263 over RTP and H.263 over an Internet Protocol 2 and 3. Input can initially be coded as WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 H.263 and optionally transcoded into the various other formats and stored 2. The transcoded content is stored on different servers, one for each content type to serve the various clients each supporting a different format 5a, 5b, 5c, 5d, 5e and 5f. 5 2. Content Management and Delivery. Content is stored on different servers with each server supporting a specific format and is managed by a Digital Library consisting of: - Index Server for managing the indexes and archival of content 4, 10 - Object Servers for storage of content Sa, 5b, 5c, 5d, 5e and 5f, - Proxy Client as a front end to the Index and Object Server and interacting with the different clients requesting for content 6. Content Delivery is by: 15 - Internet, - Dial-up ISDN lines, - Dial-up Analog Telephone lines at 28.8kbps, and Content format is either a MPEG Stream, H.320 Stream, H.324 Stream, or 20 a H.263 Stream transported over IP or RTP. 3. Content Retrieval and Display. Content Retrieval is by clients supporting various formats: - MPEG Client - 7a; 25 - ITU H.263 Client supporting RTP - 7b; - ITU H.263 Client supporting IP - 7c; - ITU H.320 Client - 7d; and - ITU H.324 Client - 7e. 30 Content is retrieved by the different clients on demand and displayed on a local display. Clients support VCR like functions like fast-forward, re-wind, etc.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 D. Overview Analog Video from different sources and H.320 video from an MCU is received as input and transcoded into various formats as required like ITU H.324, ITU H.261, ITU H.263 or MPEG and stored on the different Object 5 Servers dedicated for each of the formats. The Object Servers are in turn managed by the Index Server and are together called a Digital Library. Any request from the clients for content is received by the Index Server and in turn serviced by the Object Server through a Proxy Client. 10 The Index Server or the Library Server respond to requests from the proxy client and store, update and retrieve objects like H.261, H.263 or MPEG multimedia information on the object servers. Then they direct the object server to deliver the retrieved information back to the proxy client. The Index Server has the complete index information of all the different objects 15 stored on the object servers and also information on which of the object server the information is residing on. The index information available on the Index Server is accessible by the proxy client for retrieval of multimedia content from the different object servers. Security and access control is also part of the index server functionality. 20 The Object Servers are an integral part of the Digital Library providing physical storage and acting as the repository for the multimedia content, including the video-conferencing information stream from the conferencing facilities. The multimedia content is stored in standard formats which can 25 be retrieved by the proxy client on demand. Each of the Object Servers are dedicated for a specific format of multimedia content like H.261, H.263, MPEG, etc. The organization and index information of the multimedia content including information about the specific object server dedicated for a multimedia format is managed by the index server. The Object Server 30 delivers the stored multimedia content to the proxy client upon receiving specific instructions from the index server. The Proxy Client is the front end of the digital library and is accessed by all the clients through the Internet for on-demand multimedia content. The WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Proxy Client also is a World Wide Web (WWW) Server and delivers a page to the clients when accessed. The clients interact with the Proxy Client and thereby with the Digital Library through the WWW pages. Clients request multimedia content by interacting with the WWW pages. The Proxy Client 5 receives the request from the clients through the WWW pages and processes the request. The Proxy Client then communicates with the index server with object queries as requested by the client. The index server then communicates with one of the object servers dedicated to the requested multimedia format and, based on the index information available at the 10 index server, directs the object servers to deliver the requested multimedia content to the Proxy Client. The Proxy Client receives the multimedia content from the object server and delivers it to the client making the request. 15 The Clients connect to the Servers either through the Internet or by dial-up connections on an ISDN line or an Analog line at 28.8 Kbps depending on the video format requested and the client capabilities. A H.320 client connects by an ISDN line and a H.324 client requests services on an analog telephone line at 28.8 Kbps. A MPEG client or a H.263 client using RTP or 20 a H.263 client using IP request services through the Internet. The front ends for multimedia content query and display like the WWW browsers are integrated as a part of the Client and provide an easy-to-use interface for the end-users. 25 A request for video from the client is received by the proxy client which routes the request to the Index Server which is turn processes the request and communicates with a specific Object Server in addition to indexing the content for delivery. The Object Server delivers the requested content to the client through the Internet. In the case of the dial-up links, the content 30 is delivered back on the already established link. In sum, the Video Store and Forward architecture describes a comprehensive system for the creation, transcoding, storage, archiving, management and delivery of video and audio or audio on demand. The WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 delivery of video and audio or audio will be on the Internet or by ISDN or Analog Telephone dial-up lines. Content including video and audio or audio is delivered at various data rates from individual storage locations, each serving a different delivery speed. 5 XVI. VIDEO OPERATOR A. Hardware Architecture Figure 96 shows the system hardware for allowing a video operator to participate in a video conference or video call, providing numerous services 10 to the video callers. Among the services provided are: answering incoming video calls or dialing out to customer sites; accessing a system for maintaining video conference schedules, joining callers using Bandwidth on Demand Interoperability Group ("BONDING") calls or International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization Sector 15 ("ITU-T") standard H.320 Multi-rate Bearer Service (MRBS) Integrated Services Digital Network ("ISDN") calls into a video conference or video call; monitoring, viewing and recording any video conference or video call; playing back video conferences or video calls recorded earlier; and offering assistance to or responding to inquiries from video conference callers 20 during video conferences or video calls. The system hardware is comprised of a Video Operator Terminal 40001, a Call Server 40002, a multimedia hub ("MM Hub") 40003, wide area network hubs ("WAN Hubs") 40004, a multi-point conferencing unit 25 ("MCU") 40005, a BONDING Server 40006, a Client Terminal 40007, and a switching network ("MCI") 40008. In one embodiment, the Video Operator Terminal 40001 is a Pentium based personal computer with a processing speed of 90 MHz or greater, 30 32MB RAM, and a hard disk drive with at least 1.0GB storage space. The operating system in this embodiment is Microsoft's Windows 95. Special features include Incite Multimedia Communications Program ("MCP") software, an H.320 video coder/decoder ("codec") card for audio and video compression (e.g. Zydacron's Z240 codec), and an isochronous Ethernet <23'oC WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 ("isoEthernet") network interface card. Incite's MCP manages the isoEthernet network interface card to create the equivalent of 96 ISDN B channels in isochronous channels for transmission of video signals. 5 The Call Server 40002 in this embodiment is a Pentium-based personal computer with a processing speed of 90 MHz or greater, 32MB RAM, and a hard disk drive with at least 1.0GB storage space. The operating system is Microsoft's Windows NT Server. Special features include the Incite Call Server services and an Ethernet network interface card. 10 Different embodiments of the system accommodate any model of MM Hub 40003 and any model of WAN Hub 40004. In one embodiment, the MM Hub 40003 is the Incite Multimedia Hub, and the WAN Hub is the Incite WAN Hub. The MM Hub 40003 is a local area network ("LAN") hub that 15 connects, via numerous ports supporting isoEthernet interfaces each with a bandwidth consisting of 96 full-duplex B-channels, to personal computers such as the Video Operator Terminal 40001 and the BONDING Server 40006, to WAN Hubs 40004, or to other cascaded MM Hubs. In addition, the MM Hub 40003 can accept up to ten Mbps of Ethernet data via an 20 Ethernet interface such as the one from the Call Server 40002. The WAN Hub 40004 acts as an interface between an MM Hub 40003 and a public or private switched network such as MCI 40008, enabling video conferencing to extend beyond the WAN or LAN containing the MM Hub 40003 and WAN Hub 40004. 25 Different embodiments of the system also accommodate various manufacturers' MCU 40005 devices. The function of an MCU 40005 is to allow video conference callers using a variety of different devices, possibly communicating over different circuit-based digital networks, to 30 communicate with one another in a single video conference. For example, one embodiment employs VideoServer's Multimedia Conference Server ("MCS"), which mixes audio to allow any one video conference caller to hear the complete video conference discussion and processes video to allow each video conference caller to see all other callers simultaneously. 2S7 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 In one embodiment, the BONDING Server 40006 is a Pentium-based personal computer with a processing speed of 90 MHz or greater, 32MB RAM, and a hard disk drive with at least 1.0GB storage space. The 5 operating system in this embodiment is Microsoft's Windows 95. Special features include Incite BONDING Server software, a Digital Signal Processor ("DSP") card (such as Texas Instrument's "TMS320C80" DSP), and an isoEthernet network interface card. Where a Client Terminal 40007 makes BONDING or Aggregated video calls, the BONDING Server 40006 converts 10 the calls to multi-rate ISDN calls used within the video operator platform. In a preferred embodiment, the Client Terminal a Pentium-based personal computer with a processing speed of 90 MHz or greater, 32MB RAM, and a hard disk drive with at least 1.0GB storage space. The operating system is 15 Microsoft's Windows 95 in this embodiment, and the Client Terminal 40007 is equipped with audio and video equipment making it compatible with ITU-T standard H.320. In this embodiment, the switching network is an integrated services digital 20 network ("ISDN") provided by MCI 40008. The Video Operator Terminal 40001 is connected to the MM Hub 40003 via an isoEthernet interface with a bandwidth of 96 full-duplex B-channels, which allows each video operator to manage up to eight video conferencing 25 clients, each client employing a Client Terminal 40007. The MM Hub 40003 is connected to WAN Hubs 40004 via similar isoEthernet local area network ("LAN") connections. One WAN Hub 40004 connects through MCI 40008 to an MCU 40005 via multi-rate ISDN interfaces. Another WAN Hub 40004 connects to MCI 40008 via a multi-rate ISDN interface, and 30 MCI connects to each Client Terminal 40007 via a BONDING or multi-rate ISDN interface. In a three-way connection, the MCU 40005, the Call Server 40002 and the MM Hub 40003 are connected to one another through an Ethernet wide area network ("WAN") 40009. The MM Hub 40003 is also connected to a BONDING Server 40006 via an isoEthernet ,7--1 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 interface with a bandwidth of 248 B-channels in full "iso" mode. B. Video Operator Console Figure 97 shows one embodiment of the system for enabling a video 5 operator to manage video conference calls, which includes a Video Operator Console system 40101 and external systems and interfaces 40108 through 40117. The Video Operator Console system 40101 is comprised of a Graphical 10 User Interface ("GUI") 40102, a Software System 40103 and a Media Control system 40107. The GUI 40102 interacts with both the Software System 40103 and the Media Control system 40107 to allow a video operator to perform all functions of the video operator invention from the Video Operator Terminal [40001 Figure 96] using the Video Operator 15 Console system 40101. The Software System 40103 implements the following systems: a Scheduling system 40104 which manages the video operator's schedule; a Recording and Playback system 40105 which records the audio and video 20 input from any call and plays back audio and video input through any call; and a Call System Interface 40106 which acts as an application program interface with the Incite MCP application to manage individual calls by performing switching functions such as dial and hold. 25 The Scheduling system 40104 is connected via an Open Database Connectivity ("ODBC") interface 40108 to a Video Operator Shared Database 40111, which is in turn connected via an interface between VOSD and VRS 40114 to a Videoconference Reservation System ("VRS") 40115. The VRS 40115 submits video conference schedules, conference 30 definitions and site definitions to the Video Operator Shared Database 40111 via the interface 40114 either on a regular basis or on demand by a database agent system within the Video Operator Shared Database 40111. The Video Operator Shared Database 40111, residing in a different computer from that containing the Video Operator Console 40101 in a 2 S'3 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 preferred embodiment, stores all conference and site information such that each Video Operator Console 40101 can retrieve the necessary conference and site configurations for any video conference call. In an alternative embodiment of the external systems associated with the internal 5 Scheduling system 40104, the Video Operator Shared Database 40111 and VRS 40115 may be merged into a single system. The Recording and Playback system 40105 communicates via a Dynamic Data Exchange ("DDE"), Object Linking and Embedding ("OLE") or Dynamic 10 Link Library ("DLL") interface 40109 with a Video Operator Storage and Playback system 40112 located locally in the Video Operator Terminal [40007 Figure 96]. The Video Operator Storage and Playback system is comprised of a uni-directional recording device 40116 conforming to ITU-T standard H.320 and a uni-directional playback device 40117 conforming to 15 ITU-T standard H.320. Conference calls are recorded by transmitting the digitized audio and video signals from the Video Operator Console 40101 to the H.320 recorder 40116. Conference calls are played back by retrieving a previously recorded conference call from disk storage and transmitting the audio and video signals from the H.320 playback device 40117 to the Video 20 Operator Console. The Call System Interface system 40106 communicates via a DDE interface 40110 with the Incite MCP application 40113 to manage switching functions such as dial, hold, etc. 25 The Media Control system 40107 allows the GUI 40102 to communicate directly with external components to manage the GUI 40102 presentation of audio and video. In the embodiment shown in Figure 401, the Media Control system 40107 communicates via a DDE interface 40110 with the 30 Incite MCP application 40113. The Incite MCP application 40113 provides all necessary call setup features and multimedia features such as video window placement and audio control through the DDE interface 40110 to the internal Media Control system 40107, and on to the GUI 40102.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Figure 98 shows a second embodiment of the system for enabling a video operator to manage video conference calls, which includes a Video Operator Console system 40101 and external systems and interfaces 40108 through 40117 and 40203 through 40216. In this embodiment, however, the 5 Software System 40103 is compatible with not only VideoServer's "MCS" 40215 MCU, but also other manufacturers' MCU applications. Thus the internal software system MCU control 40201, the external software system MCU Control System 40208, the MCUs themselves 40214 and 40215, and the interfaces between them 40206, 40210 and 40211, appear in Figure 10 98. In addition, because not only the Incite MCP 40113 application but also "Other programs with call control interfaces" 40216 may provide necessary call setup and multimedia features in this embodiment, the external Call Control System 40209 is necessary, as are the intervening DDE, OLE or DLL interfaces 40207, 40212 and 40213. This embodiment 15 also includes a Video Store and Forward system 40204 and its DDE, OLE or DLL interface 40203. Finally, the second embodiment adds the internal software system Call Monitor 40202. As in the first embodiment, the Video Operator Console system 40101 is 20 comprised of a GUI 40102 and a Software System 40103. However, in addition to the Scheduling system 40104, the Recording and Playback system 40105 and the Call System Interface 40106, the software system in the second embodiment includes the MCU control 40201 and the Call Monitor 40202. 25 The Scheduling system 40104 and associated external systems 40108, 40111, 40114 and 40115 are identical to the those in the first embodiment, pictured in Figure 97 and described above. 30 The internal MCU control 40201 communicates via a DDE, OLE or DLL interface 40206 with the external MCU Control System 40208 to manage resources and features specific to various different MCU systems. The MCU Control System 40208 communicates either via a ConferenceTalk interface 40211 with the VideoServer MCS 40215 or via another vendor -) Z-< WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 specific interface 40210 with some Other MCU vendors' MCU 40214. The Recording and Playback system 40105 communicates via DDE, OLE or DLL interfaces 40109, 40203 with both the Storage and Retrieval system 5 40205 and the Video Store and Forward system 40204. The Storage and Retrieval system 40205 and Video Store and Forward system 40204 communicate via another DDE, OLE or DLL interface 40207 with the Call Control System 40209. The Call Control System 40209 communicates via another DDE, OLE or DLL interface 40212 with a uni-directional H.320 10 recorder 40116 and a uni-directional H.320 playback device 40117. Conference calls recorded by transmitting the digitized audio and video signals from the Video Operator Console 40101 through the Storage and Retrieval system 40205 and Call Control System 40209 to the H.320 recorder 40116. Conference calls are played back by retrieving a 15 previously recorded conference call from disk storage and transmitting the audio and video signals from the H.320 playback device 40117 through the Call Control System 40209 and Storage and Retrieval system 40205 to the Video Operator Console 40101. The Video Store and Forward system 40204 operates in a manner similar to the Storage and Retrieval system 20 40205, communicating between the Recording and Playback system 40105 and the Call Control System 40209. The call monitor 40202 monitors the state of calls and connections by regularly polling the Call System Interface 40106 within the Video Operator 25 Console Software System 40103. The Call System Interface 40106 communicates via a DDE, OLE or DLL interface 40207 with the Call Control System 40209 to manage call data, including switching functions such as dial, hold, etc., translating between the Video Operator Console 40101 internal data structures and the Call Control System 40209 data. 30 The Call Control System, in turn, manages either the Incite MCP 40113 or Other programs with call control interfaces 40216. The Media Control system 40107 communicates via a DDE, OLE or DLL interface with the Call Control System 40209, which communicates via a WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 DDE interface 40110 with the Incite MCP application 40113 or with Other programs with call control interfaces 40216. The Incite MCP application 40113 provides all necessary call setup features and multimedia features such as video window placement and audio control either directly through 5 a DDE interface 40110 to the internal Media Control system 40102 or via the Call Control System 40209. If Other programs with call control interfaces 40216 are used to provide call setup and multimedia features, they communicated with the Media Control system 40107 via the Call Control System 40209. 10 C. Video Conference Call Flow Figure 99 shows how a video conference call initiated by the video operator is connected through the system pictured in Figure 96. In the first step, illustrated by call flow path 40301, the video operator initiates a call from 15 the Video Operator Terminal 40001 through the MM Hub 40003 to the BONDING Server 40006, where the BONDING Server 40006 converts the call to a BONDING call. In the second step, illustrated by call flow path 40302, the BONDING Server 40006 transmits the BONDING call through the MM Hub 40003 once again, through a WAN Hub 40004, through MCI 20 40008, and to the Client Terminal 40007. This step is repeated for each Client Terminal 40007 that will participate in the video conference. In the third step, illustrated by call flow path 40303, the video operator initiates a call from the Video Operator Terminal 40001 through the MM Hub 40003, through a WAN Hub 40004, through MCI 40008, and to the MCU 40005. 25 In the fourth step, illustrated by call flow path 40304, the video operator uses the Video Operator Terminal 40001 to bridge the connections to the Client Terminal 40007 and MCU 40005. Each time the video operator calls a conference call client at its Client Terminal 40007, the MCU's ANI for the particular conference site is passed in the Calling Party Field to 30 identify each client participating in the conference call with the correct conference site. When the MCU is called, the clients' ANI are passed. The MCU can then identify the correct conference site for each call. In an alternate embodiment, the client initiates a BONDING call from the 3s- WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Client Terminal 40007 through MCI 40005, through a WAN Hub 40004, through the MM Hub 40003, through the BONDING Server 40006, and through the MM Hub 40003 once again to the Video Operator Terminal 40001. The video operator then places a call to the MCU as illustrated in 5 call flow path 40303 and finally bridges the two calls as illustrated in call flow path 40304. To determine the correct conference site for the client initiated call, the initiating client's ANI is passed to the MCU when the connection is made by the video operator. 10 While a conference call is in progress, the video operator monitors each of the calls from the Video Operator Terminal 40001. Functions of the video operator include monitoring which calls remain connected, reconnecting disconnected calls, adding new clients to the conference, or joining the conference to inform the clients regarding conference status. 15 All calls are disconnected to end a conference, and the video operator shared database [40214 in Figure 98] reflects an updated conference schedule. 20 D. Video Operator Software System 1. Class Hierarchy. Figure 100 shows the class hierarchy for video operator software system classes. In one embodiment using the Visual C++ programming language, the VOObject 40401 class is extended from the Visual C++ base class 25 CObject. VOObject 40401 is a Superclass to all classes of objects in the internal software system for the video operator console system, such that all objects in the internal software system inherit attributes from VOObject 40401. 30 VOOperator 40402 is an assembly class associated with one VOSchedule 40403 Part-I Class object and one VOUserPreferences 40404 Part-2 Class object, such that exactly one ,VOSchedule 40403 object and exactly one VOUserPreferences 40404 object are associated with each VOOperator 40402 object. VOSchedule 40403, in turn, is an Assembly Class WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 associated with zero or more VOSchedulable 40405 Part-i Class objects, such that any number of VOSchedulable 40405 objects may be associated with each VOSchedule 40403 object. 5 VOSchedulable 40405 is a Superclass to the VOConference 40406 Subclass-1 and the VOPlaybackSession 40407 Subclass-2, such that the VOConference 40406 object and the VOPlaybackSession 40407 object inherit attributes from the VOSchedulable 40405 object. VOConference 40406 is an Assembly Class associated with two or more VOConnection 10 40412 Part-I Class objects and zero or one VOPlaybackCall 40415 Part-2 Class objects, such that at least two VOConnection 40412 objects and possibly one VOPlaybackCall 40415 object are associated with each VOConference 40406 object. VOPlaybackSession 40407 is an Assembly Class associated with one VOPlaybackCall 40415 Part-1 Class object, such 15 that exactly one VOPlaybackCall 40415 object is associated with each VOPlaybackSession 40407 object. VOCallObjMgr 40408 is an Assembly Class for zero or more VOCall 40410 Part-i Class objects, such that any number of VOCall 40410 objects may 20 be associated with each VOCallObjMgr 40408 object. Similarly, VOConnObjMgr 40409 is an Assembly Class for zero or more VOConnection 40412 Part-1 Class objects, such that any number of VOConnection 40412 objects may be associated with each VOConnObjMgr 40409 object. VOConnection 40412 is an Assembly class for two VOCall 25 40410 Part-i Class objects, such that exactly two VOCall 40410 objects are associated with each VOConnection 40412 object. VOCall 40410 is a Superclass to the VOPlaybackCall 40415 Subclass-1, such that VOPlaybackCall 40415 objects inherit attributes from the VOCall 40410 object. VOCall 40410 is also an Assembly Class associated with two 30 VOSite 40413 Part-1 Class objects, such that exactly two VOSite 40413 objects are associated with each VOCall 40410 object. Finally, the VOCall 40410 class object uses the VORecorder 40411 class object. VOSite 40413 is a Superclass to the VOMcuPortSite 40417 Subclass-1, the 2k? WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 VOParticipantSite 40418 Subclass-2, and the VOOperatorSite 40419 Subclass-3, such that VOMcuPortSite 40417 objects, VOParticipantSite 40418 objects and VOOperatorSite 40419 objects inherit attributes from the VOSite 40413 object. 5 VOPlaybackCall 40415 is an Assembly Class associated with one VOMovie 40416, such that exactly one VOMovie 40416 object is associated with each VOPlaybackCall 40415 object. The VOPlaybackCall 40415 class object also uses the VOPlayer 40414 class object. 10 VOMessage 40420 object has no associations other than inheriting the attributes of VOObject 40401, the Superclass to all objects in the internal software system. 15 2. Class and Object details. a) VOObject All Internal Software System classes will inherit from the following base class. This base class is extended from the Visual C++ base class CObject. 20 Class VOObject Base Class CObject Inheritance Type public Friend Classes 25 (1) Data Types enum senderType-e { SENDERINTERNAL, SENDERSCHEDULE, SENDERCONFERENCE, SENDERCONNECTION, SENDERCALL, SENDERTIMER }; 30 enum messageTypee { MSGDEBUG, MSG _ERROR, MSG _WARNING, MSG _APPLICATIONERROR, MSG _STATEUPDATE }; Delivery type flags: DELIVERMESSAGEQUEUE, DELIVERLOGFILE, DELIVERMODALDIALOG, DELIVERMODELESSDIALOG, -240 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 DELIVERCONSOLEOUTPUT (2) Attributes Access Level Type Name Description 5 static VOOperator* m-pVO video operator pointer static VOSchedule* m-pSchedule scheduler pointer static VOCallObjMgr* m-pCallOM Call Object Manager pointer static VOConnectionObjMgr* m-pConnOM Connection Object Manager pointer 10 static VOCallSystem* m-pCallSys Call System Interface pointer (3) Methods (a) PostMessage virtual PostMessage (messageType-e type, int errCode, CString info="", 15 int delivery=(DELIVERMSGQUEUE I DELIVERLOGFILE), senderType_e senderType=SENDERINTERNAL, void* sender=NULL); (i) Parameters 20 type The type of message, as defined in the Data Types section errCode The error or warning code as defined in the application's resources. Info Extra textual information to be passed as part of the message. delivery Preferred method of message delivery. The delivery options are 25 shown in the Data Types section above. Default method of delivery is stored in the class member variable m_delivery, which should be initialized to both DELIVERMESSAGEQUEUE and DELIVERLOGFILE only. 30 senderType The message sender type, as defined in the Data Types section. Sender A pointer to the object sending the message, i.e. this (ii) Description Use this function to create error, warning, debug, logging and notification 2,6 / WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 messages. It will create a VOMessage object, which will then perform the appropriate actions as specified by the delivery flags. (b) GetErrorString 5 virtual CString GetErrorString (int errorCode); Return Value: returns a CString object having the error string corresponding to the error code passed. errorCode parameter: the error code for which you want the error string. 10 Error strings are stored as resources. This function is called to get a textual description corresponding to an error code. b) Core Classes 15 (1) Class List Site Participant Site MCU Port Site 20 Video Operator Site Call Playback Call Movie Call Object Manager 25 Connection Connection Object Manager Message Video Operator 30 (2) Class Descriptions (a) Site This is a base class from which classes such as the Participant Site and MCU Port Site classes can be derived from. It's main purpose is to function as a data structure containing pertinent information about who or what is .242.

WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 taking part in a Call. Class VOSite Base Class VOObject 5 Inheritance Type public Friend Classes (i) Data Types 10 enum Bandwidth-e { MULTIRATE, BONDING, AGGREGATED, HO }; (ii) Attributes Access Level Type Name Description Cstring m name name of the site 15 IDt m_ID Unique site ID IDt mlocationID ID for physical location Cstring mtimezone Time zone Cstring mdialNumber Number(s) to dial. See the Call System Interface section for multiple numbers format. 20 Bandwidthe mbandwidthUsage Bandwidth usage int m maxNumChannels Maximum number of channels capable VOCall* m-pCall pointer to Call object that this Site is a part of . 25 * Codec or Terminal Type (PictureTel, MCP, etc.) * Call Setup Type (dial-in, dial-out) (b) Participant Site 30 Inherits from VOSite base class. All customers or conference participants will have their information stored in the VO shared database. -U 3 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Class VOParticipantSite Base Class VOSite Inheritance Type public Friend Classes 5 Attributes Access Level Type Name Description Cstring m coordinatorName Site coordinator name 10 Cstring mcoordinatorNbr Site coordinator telephone number IDt m companyID ID of Company this Site belongs to VOMCUPortSite* m-pMCUPort MCU Port Site that is to be associated with in a Connection object 15 (c) MCU Port Site Inherits from VOSite base class. 20 All conferences take place on an MCU. Each Participant Site needs to connect with a logical "port" on an MCU. Class VOMcuPortSite Base Class VOSite 25 Inheritance Type public Friend Classes Attributes 30 Access Level Type Name Description IDt mmcuID ID to identify the MCU VOParticipantSite* m-pParticipant Participant Site that is to be associated with in a Connection object WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 (d) Video Operator Site Inherits from VOSite base class. All calls will have the Video Operator Site as one of the sites in a point-to 5 point call. This structure contains the real ANI of the video operator. Class VOOperatorSite Base Class VOSite Inheritance Type public 10 Friend Classes Attributes Access Level Type Name Description 15 IDt m operatorID Operator's ID CString mvoicePhone Operator's voice phone number IDt m-groupID Operator's Group ID IDt msuperviserID Supervisor's ID 20 CObList mCalls list of Call objects that this Site is a part of (e) Call A Call is defined as a full duplex H.320 stream between two sites. In all 25 Calls, the Video Operator Site will be one of the sites. A Joined pair of Calls is called a Connection. Class VOCall Base Class VOObject 30 Inheritance Type public Friend Classes (i) Data Types WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 enum StateCall_e { ERROR, INACTIVE, INCOMING, DIALING, ACTIVE, DISCONNECTED, HELD, lastCallStates}; enum callOperation-e { ERROR, DIAL, ANSWER, HOLD, PICKUP, DISCONNECT, HANGUP, lastCallOperations } 5 (ii) Attributes Access Level Type Name Description ID t mID call ID VOSite* m-pSite other end of a call site (Participant, MCU 10 Port or unknown) VOOperatorSite* m-pOperatorSite Operator site boolean m-operatorInitiated TRUE if the call is initiated by the operator (default) CTime m startTime the actual time when the call 15 became active boolean m-expectHangup flag that helps determine whether a Hangup is expected or not. StateCall e m state state of the call StateCalle [nCallStates] [nCallOperations] m_transitionTable state 20 transition table VORecorder* m-pRecorder recorder object for call VOConnection* m-pConnection pointer to Connection object this call belongs to. 25 (iii) Methods Disconnectiono; is called when the other end of the line hangs up or the line goes dead. The member variable mexpectHangup should be FALSE. Otherwise, the Call Object Manager's Hangupo operation would have been called. 30 Reset(; resets the call state to an inactive state RecordingStart(; starts recording the H.320 input pipe of the Call. - / WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 RecordingStop(; stops the recording of the Call. setState(callOperatione operation); operation parameter: indicates an operation that has been performed 5 which will result in a change of state Operations that affect the state of the Call should call the setState function after the operation has been performed. This function will change the state of the Call by referencing the current state and the operation in the state 10 transition table. A VOMessage object will be created, with a type of STATUSUPDATE and sent to the application queue. The GUI and any other component that reads the application queue will therefore be informed of the status update. 15 (f) Playback Call Inherits from VOCall base class. In this special case of a Call, the Video Operator audio and video output is replaced with the H.320 stream from the playback of a movie by the Video 20 Operator Storage and Playback external system component. Class VOPlaybackCall Base Class VOCall Inheritance Type public 25 Friend Classes (i) Attributes Access Level Type Name Description 30 VOMovie* m-pMovie the movie object that will be played VOPlayer* m-pPlayer Player object that performs the playback (ii) Methods WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 PlaybackStart(; starts playback PlaybackStop(; stops playback 5 (g) Movie A Movie is a recording of an H.320 Call. For Phase 1, the Video Operator Storage and Playback System manages files and H.320 data streams for recording and playback of movies, as well as storage and retrieval. 10 Class VOMovie Base Class VOObject Inheritance Type public Friend Classes 15 Attributes Access Level Type Name Description public IDt m movieID movie ID public CString mdescription movie description 20 (h) Call Object Manager By having a Call Object Manager to perform the construction and destruction of Call objects, a list of all calls on the video operator's machine can be maintained. This includes calls that are not part of any Conference 25 or Playback Sessions, including incoming calls and general purpose dial out calls. Operations that affect a Call but do not create or destroy it can be performed by the Call object itself. Class VOCallObj Manager 30 Base Class VOObject Inheritance Type public Friend Classes 26? WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 (i) Attributes Access Level Type Name Description int m numChannels total number of unused channels int m-numActive total number of active channels 5 CMapStringToOb mcallList list of calls (ii) Methods Dial(); 10 Dial(VOCall* pCalling); pCalling parameter: If not NULL, this pointer will be used for the Call object. This is necessary when creating or re-using a Call object that is in an inactive or disconnected state. 15 Dial performs dial out. The number(s) to Dial are in the mpSite Call member structure. Answer(; Answer(VOCall* pIncoming); 20 pIncoming parameter: If not NULL, this pointer will be used for the Call object. This is necessary when creating or re-using a Call object that is in an inactive or disconnected state. Answer answers an incoming call. 25 Hangup(VOCall* pCall); pCall parameter: pointer to the call Hangup hangs up the call pointed to by pCall 30 Hold(VOCall* pCall); pCall parameter: pointer to the call Hold puts the call pointed to on hold. 919 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 VOCall* CallCreate(; VOCall* CallCreate creates a Call object. 5 VOPlaybackCall* PlaybackCallCreate(; VOPlaybackCall* PlaybackCallCreateo creates a Playback Call object. VOCall* GetCallPtr(ID-t idCall); idCall parameter: call ID 10 VOCall* GetCallPtr gets the pointer to the call object identified by idCall (i) Connection A Connection is defined as a pair of Call objects that maintain a Join state, 15 and each Call has the Video Operator Site as a common point for the Join to be implemented. Class VOConnection Base Class VOObject 20 Inheritance Type public Friend Classes (i) Data Types 25 enum StateConnectione { ERROR, UNJOINED, JOINED, BROKEN, lastConnectionStates }; enum ConnectionOperation-e { ERROR, JOIN, UNJOIN, BREAK, RESET, lastConnectionOperations }; 30 (ii) Attributes Access Level Type Name Description VOCall* m-pParticipantCall pointer to the Participant Call VOCall* m-pMCUPortCall pointer to the MCU Port Call 1270 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 VOParticipantSite* mpParticipantSite pointer to the Participant Site VOMCUSite* m-pMCUPortSite pointer to the MCU Port Site 5 CTime mjoinTime time of join VOMovie* m-pMovie movie pointer for recording or playback boolean m-expectBreak flag that helps determine whether a Break is expected or not. 10 StateConnection e m state state of the connection StateConnectione [nConnectionStatesI [nConnectionOps] m transitionTable state transition table VOConference* m-pConference pointer to the Conference that this Connection is a part of. 15 (iii) Methods Joino; joins the Participant and MCU Port Calls. Unjoin(; unjoins the Participant and MCU Port Calls. 20 SetParticipantCall(VOCall* participantCall); participantCall parameter: pointer to a Call object SetParticipantCall sets the Call to be the Participant Call. This is useful 25 when managing unknown incoming calls or for last minute participant substitution. SetMCUPortCall(VOCall* mcuPortCall); mcuPortCall parameter: pointer to a Call 30 SetMCUPortCall sets the Call to be the MCU Port Call. This is useful when managing unknown incoming calls or for last minute call site substitution. DoParticipantCall( ); calls the Participant Site and sets it as the WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Participant Call. DoMCUPortCall( ); calls the MCU Port Site and sets it as the MCU Port Call. 5 setState ( ConnectionOperation-e operation); operation parameter: the operation that has been performed which will result in a change of state. 10 Operations that affect the state of the Connection should call the setState function after the operation has been performed. This function will change the state of the Connection by referencing the current state and the operation in the state-transition table. A VOMessage object will be created, with a type of STATUSUPDATE and sent to the application queue. The GUI 15 and any other component that reads the application queue will therefore be informed of the status update. protected Break( ); is called when a Joined Connection becomes Un joined. If the member variable mexpectBreak is FALSE then one of the 20 Calls must have unexpectedly been disconnected. Otherwise, the Connection's Unjoino operation would have been called. protected Reset ( ); resets the state of the Connection to UNJOINED. 25 () Connection Object Manager Similarly with the Call Object Manager, a list of all Connections in operation on the video operator's machine must be maintained. All operations that result in the creation or deletion of a Connection must use the Connection Object Manager. 30 Class VOConnectionObjMgr Base Class VOObject Inheritance Type public Friend Classes 17.2 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 (i) Attributes Access Level Type Name Description 5 CMapStringToOb mconnectionsList list of all connections int mnumJoined number of joined connections 10 (ii) Methods VOConnection* Create(; Return Value: pointer to Connection object VOConnection* Create creates a new Connection object and adds it to the 15 list. Remove (VOConnection* oldConnection); oldConnection parameter: connection object to be removed 20 Return Value: returns TRUE if operation successful. Remove deletes a Connection object and removes it from the list. VOConnection* GetConnectionPtr( ID-t idConnection); 25 Return Value: a pointer to the connection object idConnection parameter: ID of the Connection VOConnection* GetConnectionPtr returns the pointer to a Connection 30 object identified by its ID. (k) Message All one-way communication from the Internal System Software to the rest of the Video Operator application, i.e. the Graphical User Interface, is sent as 'D 7 z WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 messages that get placed on the Application Queue. The function to create and post a Message is in the base class VOObject, which all Internal System Software classes inherit from. All run-time errors or debugging information is put into a Message object, and posted to the application 5 queue so that an appropriate object will process it according to its type and severity. Therefore all class functions that do not return a specific type will post a Message if something goes wrong, e.g. out of memory, or debugging information to be displayed by the GUI or logged to a file. 10 Class VOMessage Base Class VOObject Inheritance Type public Friend Classes 15 (i) Data Types enum senderType-e { INTERNAL, SCHEDULE, CONFERENCE, CONNECTION, CALL, TIMER }; 20 enum messageType-e { DEBUG, ERROR, WARNING, APPLICATIONERROR, STATEUPDATE }; Delivery type flags: DELIVERMESSAGEQUEUE, DELIVERLOGFILE, DELIVERMODALDIALOG, DELIVERMODELESSDIALOG, 25 DELIVERCONSOLEOUTPUT (ii) Attributes 30 Access Level Type Name Description int m errorCode error code int mdelivery flags for preferred message delivery when posting. senderTypee msenderType sender type WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 VOObject* m-pObject pointer to the sender messageTypee m_messageType type of the message CString minfo message info * priority of message or error 5 * severity of message or error (iii) Methods Posto; posts a message to the application message queue 10 private static AppendLog(; Return Value: returns TRUE if the operation is successful. This method is called by VOObject::PostMessageo when the flag for DELIVERLOGFILE is set. 15 (1) Video Operator Generally there will be only one Video Operator per machine. Each Video Operator has a Schedule, and a list of customer Participant Sites to manage. The Call Object Manager and Connection Object Manager are also 20 part of the Video Operator. Class VOOperator Base Class VOObject Inheritance Type public 25 Friend Classes (i) Attributes Access Level Type Name Description 30 IDt m-operatorID operatorID VOSchedulemschedule schedule for the current operator CObList mMCUlist list of MCU objects CObList m-operatorSites Operator's site(s) static VOUserPreferences m userPreferences default , 7s- WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 application user preferences (ii) Methods protected ScheduleStart(; initiates the schedule for the video operator. 5 protected CallObjMgrStart(; initiates the call object manager. protected ConnectionObjMgrStart(; initiates the connection object manager. 10 protected CallSystemlnterfaceStart(; initiates the Call System Interface. (m) User Preferences The Video Operator Console application will have a set of default 15 application preferences which may be modified and saved. The values of these variables are taken from the following sources, in order of increasing preference: hard-coded default values, saved VO.INI file, command-line invocation arguments, GUI entry and run-time modifications saved to VO.INI file. 20 Class VOUserPreferences Base Class VOObject Inheritance Type public Friend Classes 25 (i) Attributes Access Level Type Name Description IDt m-operatorlD default operatorID 30 (ii) Methods SavePrefs(; saves all values to VO.INI. LoadPrefso; loads all values from VO.INI.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 (n) MCU All MCU Port Sites correspond to a particular MCU. This class is used for MCU Port Site storage only. For Phase 2, MCU specific operations and interfaces would be implemented here. 5 Class VOMCU Base Class VOObject Inheritance Type public Friend Classes 10 (i) Attributes Access Level Type Name Description IDt mmcuID ID of the MCU 15 CObList m-portList List of MCU Port Site objects (ii) Methods VOMCUPortSite* GetPortPtr( ID-t idPort); Return Value: a pointer to the MCU Port Site object. 20 IdPort parameter: ID of the MCU Port Site VOMCUPortSite* GetPortPtr returns the pointer to a MCU Port Site object identified by its ID. 25 VOMCUPortSite* CreatePort(; Return Value: a pointer to a new MCU Port Site object VOMCUPortSite* CreatePort returns the pointer to a newly created MCU Port Site object identified by its ID. 30 (3) State Variable Transition Diagrams for Core Classes Figure 101 shows a state transition diagram illustrating the state changes that may occur in the VOCall object's mstate variable ("state variable"). 12,71 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 The state variable starts 40501 in Inactive 40502 state. If the VOCall object receives a Dial 40503 input while in Inactive 40502 state, the state variable changes to Dialing 40504 state. In the Dialing 5 40504 state, the state variable changes to Inactive 40502 state upon receiving a Busy 40505 input or to Active 40507 state upon receiving an Answer 40506 input. In the Active 40507 state, the state variable changes to Held 40510 state upon receiving a Hold 40509 input, to Disconnected 40515 state upon receiving a Disconnection 40514 input, or to Inactive 10 40502 state upon receiving a Hangup 40508 input. In the Held 40510 state, the state variable changes to Active 40507 state upon receiving a Pickup 40511 input, to Disconnected 40515 state upon receiving a Disconnection 40513 input, or to Inactive 40502 state upon receiving a Hangup 40512 input. In the Disconnected 40515 state, the state variable 15 changes to Inactive 40502 state upon receiving a Reset 40516 input. If the VOCall object receives an Incoming Call 40517 input while in Inactive 40502 state, the state variable changes to Incoming 40518 state. In the Incoming 40518 state, the state variable changes to Inactive 40502 20 state upon receiving a Reject 40520 input or to Active 40507 state upon receiving an Answer 40519 input. Figure 102 shows a state transition diagram illustrating the state changes that may occur in the VOConnection object's mstate variable ("state 25 variable"). The state variable starts 40601 in Unjoined 40602 state. In the Unjoined 40602 state, the state variable changes to Joined 40604 state upon receiving a Join 40603 input. In the Joined 40604 state, the state variable changes to Unjoined 40602 state upon receiving an Unjoin 40605 input or to Broken 40607 state upon receiving a Break 40606 input. In 30 the Broken 40607 state, the state variable changes to Joined 40604 state upon receiving a Join 40608 input. c) Scheduling System Classes (1) Class List Playback Session WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Conference Schedule Schedulable (2) Class Descriptions 5 (a) Playback Session Like Conferences, Playback Sessions need to be scheduled. A Call is made with a Participant Site and the Video Operator Site. The Video Operator Storage and Playback external component system will playback a scheduled and pre-selected movie, replacing the AV output to the Participant Site. No 10 MCU is used for a Playback Session, and only one Participant Site is involved in one embodiment. Class VOPlaybackSession Base Class VOSchedulable 15 Inheritance Type public Friend Classes (i) Data Types 20 enum StatePlaybackSession-e { ERROR, INACTIVE, SETUP, ACTIVE, ENDING, FINISHED, lastPBSessionStates }; enum playbackSessionOperatione { ERROR, PREPARE, START, CLOSE, FINISH, lastPBSessionOperations}; 25 (ii) Attributes Access Level Type NameDescription public IDt m_ID ID assigned when a reservation is made for the session public CString mname a short name for the session 30 public CString mdescription a brief description public CTime mstartTime start time public CTimeSpan mduration the duration of the playback session public int m_xferRate The data transfer rate (number of ') 9 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 channels) protected VOPlaybackCall* m-playbackCall the playback call object protected StatePlaybackSessione mstate state of playback 5 session protected StatePlaybackSession_e [lastPBSessionStates] [lastPBSessionOps] mtransitionTable The state transition table 10 (iii) Methods public boolean Setup(; Return Value: returns TRUE if operation successful. public boolean Setup() sets up the Playback Call by calling the Participant 15 Site and initialize a VOPlayer object. This function may be called by the Scheduler. Public boolean Start(; Return Value: returns TRUE if operation successful. 20 Public boolean Start starts the Player to play to the Playback Call. This function may be called by the Scheduler. Public boolean Close(; 25 Return Value: returns TRUE if operation successful. Public boolean Close sends messages to the Video Operator and maybe the Participant that the Playback Session will end soon. 30 Public boolean Finisho; Return Value: returns TRUE if operation successful. Public boolean Finish stops the Player and Hangup the Playback Call. This function may be called by the Scheduler.

WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 public StatePlaybackSession e StateGet(); Return Value: returns the playback session's state. 5 Use the public StatePlaybackSessione StateGet; function to find out the state of the Playback Session. protected boolean StateSet(playbackSessionOperatione operation); Return Value: returns TRUE if operation successful. 10 operation parameter: the operation that has been performed which will result in a change of state Operations that affect the state of the Playback Session should call the 15 protected boolean StateSet function after the operation has been performed. This function will change the state of the Playback Session by referencing the current state and the operation in the state-transition table. A VOMessage object will be created, with a type of STATUSUPDATE and sent to the application queue. The GUI and any other component that reads 20 the application queue will therefore be informed of the status update. (b) Conference The main function of the Video Operator is to manage conferences. The scheduler system creates the Conference objects, which in turn create a list 25 of Connections (or Participant-MCU Port Site Call pairs). In the special case of a movie being played back to a conference, an extra call is made to an MCU Port and the movie is played back to the MCU in a similar way as a Playback Session. This of course requires an extra MCU Port site to be available, and must be scheduled before the start of the conference. 30 Class VOConference Base Class VOSchedulable Inheritance Type public Friend Classes - WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 (i) Data Types enum conferenceMode e { CONTINUOUS-PRESENCE, VOICEACTIVATED, 5 LECTURE, DIRECTORCONTROL }; enum StateConference e { ERROR, INACTIVE, SETUP, ACTIVE, ENDING, FINISHED, lastConferenceStates}; enum conferenceOperatione { ERROR, PREPARE, START, CLOSE, FINISH, lastConferenceOperations}; 10 (ii) Attributes Access Level Type Name Description IDt mID Conference ID given when the reservation is made 15 CString mname name for conference CString mdescription brief description CString mtimeZonetime zone CTime m startTime start time of the conference 20 CTimeSpan mduration duration of the conference int m transferRate transfer rate int m numActiveConns number of active connections conferenceMode e m mode conference mode boolean mrecordingScheduled TRUE if this conference is to 25 be recorded CObList m connectionsList List to store the connection objects CMapStringToObj m-participantSiteList List of participant sites 30 VOPlaybackCall m-playbackCall If there is a playback in the conference, this is valid StateConference e m state current state of conference StateConference-e [lastConferenceStates] [lastConferenceOps] WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 m transitionTable state transition table *Call Setup Type *Audio Protocol *Video Protocol 5 *Multi MCU Conference *H.243 Chair Control & password (iii) Methods 10 public boolean Setup(; Return Value: returns TRUE if operation successful. public boolean Setup sets up each Connection in the connection list (and the Playback Call if required) by calling each Participant Site and MCU Port 15 Site as appropriate, and perform the Join operations to create the Connections. This function may be called by the Scheduler. Public boolean Start(; Return Value: returns TRUE if operation successful. 20 Public boolean Start starts the Conference. This function may be called by the Scheduler. Public boolean End(; 25 Return Value: returns TRUE if operation successful. Public boolean End starts tearing down the Connections in the conference or issues warnings that the conference will end soon. This function may be called by the Scheduler. 30 Public boolean Finisho; Return Value: returns TRUE if operation successful. Public boolean Finish stops the Conference and hangs up all Calls in the WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Conference. This function may be called by the Scheduler. public StateConferencee StateGet(; Return Value: returns the Conference state 5 Use the public StateConferencee StateGet function to find out the state of the Conference. protected boolean StateSet(conferenceOperation e operation); 10 Return Value: returns TRUE if operation successful. operation parameter: the operation that has been performed which will result in a change of state Operations that affect the state of the Conference should call the protected 15 boolean StateSet function after the operation has been performed. This function will change the state of the Conference by referencing the current state and the operation in the state-transition table. A VOMessage object will be created, with a type of STATUSUPDATE and sent to the application queue. The GUI and any other component that reads the application queue 20 will therefore be informed of the status update. (c) Schedule The Scheduling System maintains a list of Conferences and Playback Sessions. Each Conference and Playback Session is created at a particular 25 time interval before its starting time. The Schedule in memory and the Schedule stored in the Video Operator Shared Database for the current Video Operator should always be synchronized. Class VOSchedule 30 Base Class VOObject Inheritance Type public Friend Classes - WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 (i) Attributes Access Level Type Name Description IDt m operatorID responsible operator ID CMapStringToObj mschedItems list of schedulable objects 5 (Conferences and Playback Sessions) CMapWordToOb mschedAlarms list of alarms currently set for operations on schedulable objects (construction and deletion) (ii) Methods 10 SynchWithDb(; synchronizes with the VO shared database for the schedule. AddSchedulable(VOSchedulable* pSchedulable); pSchedulable parameter: pointer to schedulable object to be added to list 15 AddSchedulable adds a Schedulable object to the list DeleteSchedulable(ID-t aSchedulable); 20 aSchedulable parameter: schedulable object to be removed from list DeleteSchedulable deletes a Schedulable object and remove from list. (d) Schedulable 25 Items or Objects that are schedulable in Phase 1 are Conferences and Playback Sessions. This class allows us to create a schedule for any type of event. Class VOSchedulable 30 Base Class VOObject Inheritance Type public Friend Classes - WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 (i) Attributes Access Level Type NameDescription IDt mrequestor ID of requestor Ctime mstartTime scheduled starting time 5 CTimeSpan mduration scheduled duration of event Ctime m_endTime scheduled end time of event MMRESULTmalarmID ID of alarm currently set (ii) Methods 10 public SetAlarm(Ctime time, LPTIMECALLBACK func); time parameter: time for alarm to be triggered func parameter: pointer to callback function when alarm is triggered Return Value: returns TRUE if operation successful. 15 public SetAlarm sets an alarm to be triggered at a specified time. When the alarm is triggered, the callback function will be called. This is useful for time dependant events such as 15 minutes before a Conference starts, 5 minutes before a Conference ends, and 30 minutes after a Conference has finished. 20 public KillAlarmo; Return Value: returns TRUE if operation successful. public KillAlarm kills the last alarm that has been set by SetAlarmo. This 25 would be used in the case of aborting a Conference, etc. (3) State Variable Transition Diagram for Schedule System Classes Figure 103 shows a state transition diagram illustrating the state changes 30 that may occur in the VOConference object's mstate variable ("state variable"). The state variable starts 40701 in Inactive 40702 state. In the Inactive 40702 state, the state variable changes to ConnectionSetup 40704 state upon receiving a "15 minutes before scheduled time" 40703 input. In the ConnectionSetup 40704 state, the state variable changes to Active WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 40706 state upon receiving a Start Conference 40705 input. In the Active 40706 state, the state variable remains in Active 40706 state upon receiving an Extend Conference 40707 input or changes to Ending 40707 state upon receiving a CloseConference (Proper Termination) 40708 input. 5 In the Ending 40707 state, the state variable changes to Finished 40711 state upon receiving a Finish 40710 input. d) Recording and Playback Classes (1) Class List 10 Recorder Player (2) Class Details (a) Recorder A recorder communicates with whatever external components performs the 15 actual movie creation and recording of the input pipe of a Call. This external component is known as the Video Operator Storage and Playback system. Class VORecorder 20 Base Class VOObject Inheritance Type public Friend Classes 25 (i) Data Types enum StateRecorder-e { ERROR, IDLE, RECORDING, PAUSED, FINISHED, lastRecorderStates}; enum recorderOperatione { ERROR, BEGIN, PAUSE, RESUME, STOP, lastRecorderOps 30 (ii) Attributes Access level Type Name Description VOMovie* m movie Movie VOCall* m-pCall Call pointer (for recording) WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Cstring minfo Participant and Conference Names Ctime mstartTime Start Time Ctime m endTime End time CtimeSpan mduration Total recorded time 5 StateRecorder e m state State StateRecorder-e [lastRecorderStates] [lastRecorderOps] m-transitionTable state transition table *VSF Object *Recording Mode 10 (iii) Methods InitMovie(; VOSP initializes a recording. This will tell the VOSP to prepare to record. 15 start(; VOSP starts a recording. stop(); VOSP stops a recording. setState(recorderOperation-e operation); 20 operation parameter: the operation that has been performed which will result in a change of state. Operations that affect the state of the Recorder should call the setState 25 function after the operation has been performed. This function will change the state of the Recorder by referencing the current state and the operation in the state-transition table. A VOMessage object will be created, with a type of STATUSUPDATE and sent to the application queue. The GUI and any other component that reads the application queue will therefore be 30 informed of the status update. (b) Player A Player communicates with whatever external component performs the actual playback of a movie to the output pipe of a Call. For Phase 1, this WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 external component is known as the Video Operator Storage and Playback system. Class VOPlayer 5 Base Class VOObject Inheritance Type public Friend Classes (i) Data Types 10 enum StatePlayer-e { ERROR, IDLE, PLAYING, PAUSED, FINISHED, nPlayerStates}; enum playerOperatione { ERROR, BEGIN, PAUSE, RESUME,.STOP, RESET, nPlayerOps} 15 (ii) Attributes Access level Type Name Description VOMovie* m-pMovie Movie VOCall* m-pCall Call pointer (for playback) Cstring minfo Participant and Conference Names 20 Ctime Ctime m startTime m endTime Start and End Time CTimeSpan mduration Total playback time StatePlayere m state State StatePlayer e [nPlayerStates] [nPlayerOps] mtransitionTable state 25 transition table *VSF Object *Playback Mode (iii) Methods 30 public InitMovie(; Return Value: returns TRUE if operation successful. public InitMovie VOSP initializes playback. This will tell the VOSP to prepare for playback.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 public Start(; Return Value: returns TRUE if operation successful. 5 public Start VOSP starts playback. public Stop(; Return Value: returns TRUE if operation successful. 10 public Stop VOSP stops playback. setstate(playerOperation-e operation); Return Value: returns TRUE if operation successful. 15 operation parameter: the operation that has been performed which will result in a change of state. Operations that affect the state of the Player should call the setstate function after the operation has been performed. This function will change 20 the state of the Player by referencing the current state and the operation in the state-transition table. A VOMessage object will be created, with a type of STATUSUPDATE and sent to the application queue. The GUI and any other component that reads the application queue will therefore be informed of the status update. 25 (3) State Transition Diagrams for Recording and Playback Classes Figure 104 shows a state transition diagram illustrating the state changes that may occur in the VORecorder object's mstate variable ("state 30 variable"). The state variable starts 40801 in Idle 40802 state. In the Idle 40802 state, the state variable changes to Recording 40804 state upon receiving a Begin Recording 40803 input. In the Recording 40804 state, the state variable changes to Paused 40806 state upon receiving a Pause 40805 input or to Finished 40810 state upon receiving a Stop 40808 a90 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 input. In the Paused 40806 state, the state variable changes to Recording 40804 state upon receiving a Resume 40807 input or to Finished 40810 state upon receiving a Stop 40809 input. 5 Figure 105 shows a state transition diagram illustrating the state changes that may occur in the VOPlayer object's mstate variable ("state variable"). The state variable starts 40901 in Idle 40902 state. In the Idle 40902 state, the state variable changes to Playing 40904 state upon receiving a Begin Playing 40903 input. In the Playing 40904 state, the state variable 10 changes to Paused 40906 state upon receiving a Pause 40905 input or to Finished 40910 state upon receiving a Stop 40908 input. In the Paused 40906 state, the state variable changes to Playing 40904 state upon receiving a Resume 40907 input or to Finished 40910 state upon receiving a Stop 40909 input. In the Finished 40910 state, the state variable 15 changes to Playing 40904 state upon receiving a Replay 40911 input. e) Call System Interface Class Description The Call Control System will manage all calls that a Video Operator can manage. This includes incoming and outgoing H.320 call management and 20 low level operations on a call, such as recording and playback. The Video Operator Application uses its Call System Interface to communicate with the Call Control System external component which manages all calls in a uniform way. This allows the video operator to manage calls that require different external programs, adding an extra codec to the machine, or even 25 managing calls on a remote machine. Class VOCallSys Base Class VOObject Inheritance Type public 30 Friend Classes (1) Data Types enum Bandwidth-e { MULTIRATE, BONDING, AGGREGATED, HO } ,q ? / WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Q.931 UserInfo for a call using BONDING: OxO OxO1 Ox07 0x44 0x79 OxO OxO 0 1 7 447-9000 Bonded, 1 number, 7 digits long, 447-9000 5 Q.931 UserInfo for Aggregation: Ox01 Ox02 Ox07 0x44 Ox79 Ox00 OxO OxFF OxO1 1 2 7 447-9000 , 1 Aggregated, 2 numbers, 7 digits long, 447-9000, 447-9001 10 (2) Attributes Access Level Type Name Description public int mnumCalls total number of calls available public int mnumConnections total number of connections 15 available (3) Methods public Dial(Bandwidthe calltype, CString destination); 20 public Dial(Bandwidthe calltype, CString destination, CString origination); Return Value: returns TRUE if operation successful. calltype parameter: specifies the type of call to make. destination parameter: specifies the destination number to be dialed. 25 origination parameter: specifies an origination number to be used, instead of the real number of the operator's console. public Dial dials out. 30 public Answer(ID-t call); call parameter: The Call ID of a Call waiting to be answered. public Answer answers an incoming call.

WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 public Hangup(ID-t call); Return Value: returns TRUE if operation successful. call parameter: the Call ID of a Call to Hangup 5 public Hangup hangs up a call. public Hold(ID-t call); Return Value: returns TRUE if operation successful. call parameter: the Call ID of a Call to Hold 10 public Hold puts the call on hold. public Join(ID-t call, IDt call2); Return Value: returns TRUE if operation successful. 15 call parameter: the Call ID of a Call. call2 parameter: the Call ID of a Call. public Join joins two Calls. 20 (ID-t connection); Return Value: returns TRUE if operation successful. connection parameter: he ID of a Connection to Unjoin public Unjoin un-joins the specified Connection. 25 public StateCalle CallStatus(ID-t call); Return Value: returns the state of a Call connection parameter: the ID of a Connection to Unjoin 30 public StateCalle CallStatus reports status of the specified Call. public StateConnectione JoinStatus(IDt connection); Return Value: returns the state of a Connection connection parameter: the ID of a Connection to Unjoin WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 public StateConnectione JoinStatus reports status of the specified Join. protected LaunchMCPO; 5 Return Value: returns TRUE if operation successful. protected LaunchMCP launches Incite's MCP application. E. Graphical User Interface Classes 10 1. Class Hierarchy. Figure 106 shows the class hierarchy for the video operator graphics user interface {"GUI") classes. In general, the video conference operator will perform all the features of the video conferencing operator system described herein by interacting with the video operator console GUI ("console GUI"). 15 The main components of the console GUI are the Main Console Window, Schedule and Connection List Windows, Conference and Connection Windows, a message area, audio and video controls, dialog boxes presenting timely information, and menu items for actions that may be performed infrequently. MCU operations and features will not be 20 implemented in the video operator console GUI, so as to allow different embodiments of the video operator system employing different MCU model types. Vendor-specific MCU operations will be performed by the vendor's software that comes with the MCU application. In one embodiment employing VideoServer's MCS, the MCS Workstation Software can be used 25 to implement features such as conference finish time extension, audio and video blocking, conference director control, etc. This software can run in parallel to the video operator GUI. Described in object-oriented programming terms, the GUI has a main 30 application object which creates and maintains all the windows and views within. The main window is the VOMainFrame 41009 which is created by the VOConsoleApp 41008. This mainframe window creates the VOScheduleWnd 41016, VOAlertWnd 41015, VOConferenceVw 41014 and the VOVideoWatchVw 41013. The VOScheduleWnd 41016 and the ,2q9LA WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 VOAlertWnd are dockable windows meaning that they can be attached to one of the sides of their parent window. In this case the parent window is the VOMainFrame 41009 window. The dockable windows can also be separated from the border by dragging them away. In such a situation they 5 will act like normal tool windows. The function of each class of object can be summarized as follows. VOConsoleApp 41008 is the main application class, and VOMainFrame 41009 is the main window which contains all the other windows. 10 VOScheduleWnd 41016 is a window displaying the operator's schedule, and VOAlertWnd 41015 is a window where the error messages and alerts are displayed. VOChildFrame 41010 is a frame window for the multiple document interface ("MDI") windows. VOChildFrame 41010 will act like the mainframe window for each of the views. VOConferenceFrame 41018, 15 derived from the VOChildFrame 41010, is the frame window for the conference view, and VOConferenceVw 41014 is the window displaying the conference information. VOConferenceDoc 41012 is the document class corresponding to the VOConferenceVw 41014. VOVideoWatchFrame 41017, derived from the VOChildFrame 41010, is the frame window for 20 the Video Watch view, and VOVideoWatchVw 41013 is the window displaying the video stream and controls for making calls. VOVideoWatchDoc 41011 is the document class corresponding to the VideoWatch view. 25 In one embodiment using Visual C++ as the programming language, CWnd 41001 is a Superclass to the CMDIFrameWnd 41005 Subclass-1, CMDIChildWnd 41006 Subclass-2, CFromView 41007 Subclass-3, and CDialogBar 41002 Subclass-4, such that CMDIFrameWnd 41005 class objects, CMDIChildWnd 41006 class objects, CFromView 41007 class 30 objects, and CDialogBar 41002 class objects inherit attributes from the CWnd 41001 class. CMDIFrameWnd 41005 is a Superclass to VOMainFrame 41009 Subclass-1; CMDIChildWnd 41006 is a Superclass to VOChildFrame 41010 Subclass-1; CFromView 41007 is a Superclass to both VOVideoWatchVw 41013 Subclass-I and VOConferenceVw 41014 ') CC WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Subclass-2; and CDialogBar 41002 is a Superclass to both VOAlertWnd 41015 Subclass-i and VOScheduleWnd 41016 Subclass-2. VOChildFrame 41010 is a Superclass to both VOVideoWatchFrame 41017 Subclass-i and VOConferenceFrame 41018 Subclass-2. CWinApp 41003 5 is a Superclass to VOConsoleApp 41008 Subclass-1, and CDocument 41004 is a Superclass to both VOVideoWatchDoc 41011 Subclass-i and VOConferenceDoc 41012 Subclass-2. VOConsoleApp 41008 is an Assembly Class associated with one 10 VOMainFrame 41009 Part-i Class object, such that exactly one VOMainFrame 41009 object is associated with each VOConsoleApp 41008 object. VOMainFrame 41009 is an Assembly Class associated with one VOVideoWatchFrame 41017 Part-I Class object, one VOConferenceFrame 41018 Part-2 Class object, one VOAlertWnd 41015 Part-3 Class object, 15 and one VOScheduleWnd 41016 Part-4 Class object, such that exactly one VOVideoWatchFrame 41017 object, exactly one VOConferenceFrame 41018 object, exactly one VOAlertWnd 41015 object, and exactly one VOScheduleWnd 41016 object are associated with each VOMainFrame 41009 object. 20 VOVideoWatchFrame 41017 is an Assembly Class associated with one VOVideoWatchDoc 41011 Part-1 Class object and one VOVideoWatchVw 41013 Part-2 Class object, such that exactly one VOVideoWatchDoc 41011 object and exactly one VOVideoWatchVw 41013 object are associated with 25 each VOVideoWatchFrame 41017 object. Each VOVideoWatchDoc 41011 object, extended from the CDocument 41004 class object as discussed above, uses a VOVideoWatchVw 41013 object, extended from the CFormView 41007 class object. 30 Similarly, VOConferenceFrame 41018 is an Assembly Class associated with one VOConferenceDoc 41012 Part-I Class object and one VOConferenceVw 41014 Part-2 Class object, such that exactly one VOConferenceDoc 41012 object and exactly one VOConferenceVw 41014 object are associated with each VOConferenceFrame 41018 object.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 VOConferenceDoc 41012 uses VOConferenceVw 41014. 2. Class and Object details. a) User Interface Classes 5 (1) Class List VOConsoleApp The main application class VOMainFrame The main window which has all the other windows VOScheduleWnd Window displaying the operator's schedule VOOutputWnd Window where the error messages and alerts are 10 displayed VOChildFrame Frame window for the MDI windows. This will act like the mainframe window for each of the views. VOConferenceFrame The frame window for the conference view. This is derived from the VOChildFrame 15 VOConferenceVwThe window displaying the conference information VOConferenceDoc The document class corresponding to the VOConferenceVw VOVideoWatchFrame The frame window for the Video Watch view. This is derived from the VOChildFrame 20 VOVideoWatchVw The window displaying the video stream and controls for making calls. VOVideoWatchDoc Document class corresponding to the VideoWatch view. 25 (2) Class Details (a) VOConsoleApp Class VOConsoleApp Base Class CWinApp Inheritance Type public 30 Friend Classes (i) Attributes Access Level Type Name Description protected VOOperator* m_pOperator A pointer to the logged WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 in video operator (ii) Methods Retcode CreateVideoOperator(CString login, CString password); 5 Return Value: returns a non-zero value if successful, zero otherwise. login parameter: login id for the operator password parameter: operator's password 10 The Retcode CreateVideoOperator function is initially called during the application instantiation. Retcode InitializeCallSystemComponents(); Return Value: returns a non-zero value if successful, zero otherwise 15 The Retcode InitializeCallSystemComponents function is initially called during the application initiation, after the creation of the video operator, which makes a local copy of the pointers to the VOCallSystemInterface, VOCallObjMgr and the VOConnectionObjMgr objects, initiated by the 20 internal software system. void OnGetVOMessage(VOMsg voMsg); voMsg parameter: the message object passed by the internal software system 25 The void OnGetVOMessage function is called when the application receives a message from the internal software system to redirect the message to the appropriate windows. In the initial implementation, the message will be passed on to the VOMainFrame, which interprets the message. Depending 30 on the type of the message it is either displayed in the VOOutputWnd, displayed in a message box, or passed on to the VOConferenceVw and the VOVideoWatch windows. (b) VOMainFrame WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Class VOMainFrame Base Class CFrameWnd Inheritance Type public Friend Classes 5 (i) Attributes Access Level Type Name Description protected VOOperator* mpOperator A pointer to the logged in video operator 10 VOScheduleWnd* m-pScheduleWnd A pointer to the schedule window VOOutputWnd* mpOutputWnd A pointer to the output window VOConferneceVw* m-pConfVw A pointer to the conference window. 15 This will be collection if we have multiple conference windows active at the same time. VOVideoWatchVw* mpVideoWatchVw Pointer to the video watch window. 20 (ii) Methods Retcode SynchWithDb(; Return Value: returns a non-zero value if successful. zero otherwize login parameter: login id for the operator 25 password parameter: operator's password The Retcode SynchWithDb function is called if the schedule has changed and the needs to be synchronized with the database. 30 Retcode DisplayMessage(VOMsg voMsg); Return Value: returns a non-zero successful, zero otherwise voMsg parameter: the VOMsg object received from the internal software system WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 The Retcode DisplayMessage function displays the content of the voMsg object in the output window. Based on the severity, an alert message box is also displayed. 5 void OnConferenceStatusChanged(VOConference* pConference); pConference parameter: pointer to the conference object whose status has changed The void OnConferenceStatusChanged function is called when the status of 10 a particular conference has changed. (c) VOScheduleWnd Class VOScheduleWnd Base Class CDialogBar 15 Inheritance Type public Friend Classes (i) Attributes Access Level Type Name Description 20 protected VOMainFrame* m-pMainFrame A pointer to the Main Frame window VOSchedule* m-pSchedule pointer to the video operator's schedule 25 (ii) Methods Retcode DisplaySchedule(BOOL filter = 0); Return Value: returns a non-zero value if successful. zero otherwise filter parameter: the filter to be applied for display of the schedule. filter = 0 displays the entire schedule. filter = 1 displays only the active conferences 30 and playback calls The Retcode DisplaySchedule function is called to display the list of conferences and playback calls in the schedule window. 30C0t WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Retcode DisplayConfSites(VOConference* pConference); Return Value: returns a non-zero value if successful. zero otherwise pConference parameter: pointer to the conference object for which the sites have to be displayed in the sites list box of the schedule window. 5 The Retcode DisplayConfSites function is called to display the list of sites in a site list box of the schedule window. Retcode OnClickScheduledItemo; 10 Return Value: returns a non-zero value if the selection is different from the previous selection. zero otherwise The Retcode OnClickScheduledItem function is called when the user clicks on an item in the schedule list box. The initial implementation displays the 15 corresponding sites in the conference or the site and the movie details in the playback call. Retcode OnDblClickScheduledItemo; Return Value: returns a non-zero value if a conference window is opened. 20 zero otherwise The Retcode OnDblClickScheduledItem function is called when the user double clicks on an item in the schedule list box. The initial implementation creates a new VOConferenceVw for the scheduled item. 25 Retcode OnClickSiteo; Return Value: returns a non-zero value if the selection is different from the previous selection. zero otherwise 30 The Retcode OnClickSite function is called when the user clicks on an item in the site list box of the Schedule window. (d) VOOutputWnd 301 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Class VOOutputWnd Base Class CDialogBar Inheritance Type public Friend Classes 5 (i) Attributes Access Level Type Name Description protected VOMainframe* mpMainframe pointer to the mainframe window 10 (ii) Methods Retcode DisplayMessage(CString info, VOMsg* pVoMsg = NULL); Return Value: returns a non-zero value if successful. zero otherwise info parameter: additional information to be displayed 15 pVoMsg parameter: a pointer to a VOMsg object Retcode DisplayMessage displays a message text in the output window. If pVoMsg = NULL, only the info will be displayed. 20 (e) VOConferenceVw Class VOConferenceVw Base Class CFormView Inheritance Type public Friend Classes 25 (i) Attributes Access Level Type Name Description protected VOOperator* m_pOperator A pointer to the logged in video operator 30 VOMainFrame* m-pMainframe A pointer to the mainframe window VOVideoWatchVw* mpVideoWatchVw A pointer to the video watch window VOOutputWnd* m pOutputWnd pointer to the output window 3c2 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 (ii) Constructor(s) protected VOConferneceVw(; 5 VOConferenceVw(VOConference* pConference); VOConferenceVw(VOPlaybackSession* pPbSession); pConference parameter: a pointer to the conference object for which the view is to be created. 10 pPbSession parameter: a pointer to the playback session object for which the view is to be created. The conference view is used to display the information about any conference or a scheduled playback session. This view is created only by 15 the mainframe when the user double clicks on a conference/playback session in the schedule window. (iii) Methods (VOConference* pConference); 20 PConference parameter: a pointer to the conference object whose status has changed. void OnConferenceStatusChanged is called when the conference status has changed so that the UI can be updated accordingly. 25 void OnPbSessionStatusChanged(VOPlaybackSession* pPbSession); pPbSession parameter: a pointer to the playback session object whose status has changed. 30 void OnPbSessionStatusChanged is called when the playback session's status has changed so that the UI can be updated accordingly. void OnConnStatusChanged(VOConnection* pConnection); pConnection parameter: a pointer to the connection object whose status 3j WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 has changed. void OnConnStatusChanged is called when a connection's status has changed so that the UI can be updated accordingly. 5 void OnCallStatusChanged(VOCall* pCall); pCall parameter: a pointer to the playback session object whose status has changed. 10 void OnCallStatusChanged is called when the status of a call in the current conference/playback session has changed so that the UI can be updated accordingly. void OnPbCallStatusChanged(VOPbCall* pPbCall); 15 pPbCall parameter: a pointer to the playback session object whose status has changed. void OnPbCallStatusChanged is called when the playback session's status has changed so that the UI can be updated accordingly. 20 (VOConnection* pConnection); pConnection parameter: a pointer to the Connection object whose status has changed. 25 void DisplayConnectionStatus is called to display a connection's status. void DisplayCalStatus(VOCall* pCall); pCall parameter: pointer to the call object whose status has changed. 30 void DisplayCallStatus is called to display a call's status (participant or MCU). void DisplayRecordingStatus(; is called to display the recording status if any call in a conference is being recorded.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 void DisplayWatchStatus(; is called to display the indication as to which call is being monitored, in the current conference or playback session. 5 void DisplayPlaybackStatus(; is called to display the playback status. Retcode OnDialSite(; Return Value: returns a nonzero value if the operation has been initiated successfully, zero otherwise. 10 Retcode OnDialSite is called when the Dial button on the participant side is clicked. This will dial the participant of selected connection. Retcode OnDialMCU(; 15 Return Value: returns a nonzero value if the operation has been initiated successfully, zero otherwise. Retcode OnDialMCU is called when the Dial button on the MCU side is clicked. This will dial the MCU port assigned to the selected participant. 20 Retcode OnHangupSite(; Return Value: returns a nonzero value if the operation has been initiated successfully, zero otherwise. 25 Retcode OnHangupSite hangs up the call to the participant. Retcode OnHangupMCU(; Return Value: returns a nonzero value if the operation has been initiated successfully, zero otherwise. 30 Retcode OnHangupMCU hangs up the call to the MCU. Retcode OnHoldSite(; Return Value: returns a nonzero value if the operation has been initiated WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 successfully, zero otherwise. The Retcode OnHoldSite function puts the participant on hold (if the call is active). 5 Retcode OnHo1dMCUO; Return Value: returns a nonzero value if the operation has been initiated successfully, zero otherwise. 10 The Retcode OnHoldMCU function puts the MCU on hold (if the call is active). Retcode OnWatchSite(; Return Value: returns a nonzero value if successful, zero otherwise. 15 The Retcode OnWatchSite function will monitor the current participant. The video stream corresponding to the participant will be displayed in the video watch window. 20 Retcode OnWatchMCUO; Return Value: returns a nonzero value if successful, zero otherwise. Retcode OnWatchMCU starts monitoring the MCU leg corresponding to a participant in a conference. The video stream is displayed in the video 25 watch window. Retcode OnRecordMCUO; Return Value: returns a nonzero value if the operation has been initiated successfully, zero otherwise. 30 Retcode OnRecordMCU starts recording the MCU stream. If the recording is already on, this function will pause/stop the recording. Retcode OnRecordSiteo; 3- o 6 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Return Value: returns a nonzero value if the operation has been initiated successfully, zero otherwise. Retcode OnRecordSite starts recording the stream corresponding the 5 selected participant. If recording is already on, recording will pause/stop. Retcode MakeAutoConnection(; Return Value: returns a nonzero value if the operation has been initiated successfully, zero otherwise. 10 Retcode MakeAutoConnection is called to automatically connect the participant and the MCU and when successful, join them. Retcode MakeAutoDisconnection(; 15 Return Value: returns a nonzero value if the operation has been initiated successfully, zero otherwise. Retcode MakeAutoDisconnection is called to automatically un-join the connection and disconnect the calls to the participant and the mcu. 20 Retcode ConnectAll(); Return Value: returns a nonzero value if the operation has been initiated successfully, zero otherwise. 25 Retcode ConnectAll is called to automatically make all the connection one by one. Retcode DisconnectAll(); Return Value: returns a nonzero value if the operation has been initiated 30 successfully, zero otherwise. Retcode DisconnectAll is called to automatically break all the conference connections.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 (f) VOVideoWatchVw Class VOMainFrame Base Class CFrameWnd Inheritance Type public 5 Friend Classes (i) Attributes Access Level Type NameDescription protected VOOperator* mpOperator A pointer to the logged 10 in video operator VOCallObjMgr* m-pCallMgr Pointer to the call object manager VOScheduleWnd* m-pScheduleWnd A pointer to the schedule window 15 (ii) Constructor(s) VOVideoWatchVwo; 20 (iii) Methods void OnDial(); dials the number in the destination edit box. void OnTransfer(; transfers the current call to a number. This will initially display a dialog box where the user enters the number top which the call is 25 to be transferred. void OnAnswero; is called when the Answer button is clicked. void OnForwardo; is called when the forward button is clicked. All the call 30 will be forwarded to the forwarding number provided. void OnMute(; is called when the nute button is clicked. Turns the mute on/off. 308, WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 void OnHangupo; is called when the hang-up button is clicked. Hangs up the current call. void OnHold(; is called when the hold button is clicked. Puts the current 5 call on hold. void OnPickupo; is called when the pickup button is clicked. Picks up the call on hold. 10 void OnPrivacyo; is called when the privacy button is clicked. Turns the privacy on or off. void OnPlayMovie(; is called when the Play button is clicked. This will display a dialog box with a list of movies to choose from. Once a movie is 15 selected, the movie will be played. void OnRecordCall(); is called when the record button is clicked. void OnJoinToConferenceo; is called when the Join Conf button is 20 clicked. This will display the list of active conferences and sites OR playback sessions. The operator will select the site corresponding to the current call and the call will be joined to the conference. void WatchVideo(BOOL selection); 25 Return Value: returns a non-zero value if successful. zero otherwise selection parameter: specifies what to watch. selection = VDOWATCHCONFERENCE displays the video from the site/ MCU selected for watching selection = VDOWATCHSELF displays the output of the video operator's 30 camera selection = VDOWATCHCALL displays video from the call selected from the listbox provided in the video watch window OR the video from the incoming call, if any. 3e)7 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Call the void WatchVideo function to select the video stream to watch. void OnDisplayCallsWindow(; is called when the 'Calls' button is clicked. 5 void OnSelfViewo; is called when the 'SelfView' check box is checked or unchecked. When the self view is checked, the video operator's camera output is displayed in a separate small window. void OnLocalVolume(; is called when the local volume slide bar position is 10 changed. This will adjust the local volume. void OnRemoteVolumeo; is called when the remote volume slide bar position is changed. This will adjust the remote volume signal. 15 b) Media Control Class Description (1) VOMediaControl Class VOMediaControl Base Class VOObject Inheritance Type public 20 Friend Classes (a) Attributes Access Level Type Name Description protected struct MtsLinkPortInfo m-portInfo This structure is used 25 to communicate with the MCP (b) Constructor(s) VOMediaControl(); 30 (c) Methods public void SetVolume(short rightVolume, short leftVolume); rightVolume parameter: an integer between 0 - 1000. leftVolume parameter: an integer between 0 - 1000. 3/ 0 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 public void SetVolume sets the volume control. public short GetVolume(short channel); Return Value: returns the volume for the specified channel 5 channel parameter: set channel = PORT_CHANNELRIGHT for the right volume setting, and set channel = PORTCHANNELLEFT for the left volume setting. public short GetVolume returns the current volume for the specified 10 channel public void SetSelfView(long flags); flags parameter: sets the properties of the self view. The valid flag values are: 15 SELFVIEWON Displays the self view; SELFVIEWOFF Hides the self view; and SELFVIEWMIRRORED Mirrors the self view. public void SetSelfView sets the self view properties. 20 public long GetSelfViewo; Return Value: returns the self view settings The public long GetSelfView function returns the self view settings which 25 can be used to find out if the self view is visible or hidden, or if it is mirrored. public void SetSelfViewSize(short size); size parameter: one of the predefined sizes for the self view 30 public void SetSelfViewSize sets the size of the self view window. The valid values are FULLCIF, HALFCIF and QUARTERCIF. public short GetSelfViewSizeo; 3/ WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Return Value: returns Current self view size. The public short GetSelfViewSize function returns the current self view window size. The values will be one of the predefined sized. See 5 SetSelfViewSize for the description of the sizes. public void SetAutoGain(BOOL autoGain = TRUE); autoGain parameter: should be TRUE to enable auto gain, FALSE to disable 10 The public void SetAutoGain function enables or disables the auto gain depending on the autoGain value. public BOOL GetAutoGaino; 15 Return Value: returns The current auto gain setting. The public BOOL GetAutoGain function returns the current auto gain setting. TRUE if auto gain is on, FALSE otherwise. 20 public void SetEchoCancellation (bool bCancel); bCancel parameter: if bCancel is TRUE cancellation is enabled; if FALSE cancellation is disabled. public void SetEchoCancellation enables or disables echo cancellation. 25 public BOOL GetEchoCancellation 0; Return Value: returns the current echo cancellation state. public BOOL GetEchoCancellation gets the current state of the current 30 echo cancellation. public short GetVideoMode(short mode = MODERX); Return Value: returns the video mode mode parameter: indicates receive or transmit mode. 3/2 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 public short GetVideoMode gets the audio mode for receive or transmit, depending on the value of mode. mode = MODERX for receive mode and MODETX for transmit. 5 public short GetAudioMode(short mode = MODERX); Return Value: returns the audio mode mode parameter: indicates receive or transmit mode. 10 public short GetAudioMode gets the audio mode for receive or transmit, depending on the value of mode. mode = MODERX for receive mode and MODETX for transmit. public void SetVideoWnd(HWND hWnd); 15 hWnd parameter: pointer to the window where the video is to be displayed. The public void SetVideoWnd function displays the video in the window identified by hWnd. 20 public HWND GetVideoWnd(; Return Value: returns the window handle in which the video is being displayed. If no window is set, NULL is returned. The public HWND GetVideoWnd function is called to retrieve the window 25 handle in which the video is being displayed. public void MakeVideoWndResizeable(BOOL bResize = TRUE); bResize parameter: if bResize is TRUE, the video window is resizeable; if FALSE, it is not resizeable. 30 The public void MakeVideoWndResizeable function makes the video window resizable with bResize = TRUE. To make the window fixed size, make bResize FALSE. 3/3 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 public BOOL IsVideoWndResizeable(; Return Value: returns TRUE if the video window is resizeable, FALSE otherwise. 5 Call the public BOOL IsVideoWndResizeable function to determine if the video window is resizeable. F. Video Operator Shared Database 1. Database Schema. 10 Figure 107 shows a database schema for the video operator shared database (see 40214 Figure 98). In one embodiment, the database contains the following tables. CONFERENCE 41104 lists details about a scheduled conference, PARTICIPANT 41105 lists the participants of conferences, and CONFPARTICIPANT 41108 contains the keys from the 15 CONFERENCE 41104 and PARTICIPANT 41105 tables, which are used to determine the participants in any given conference. MCU 41102 contains the characteristics of different MCU's from various suppliers, and MCUPORT 41106 contains the MCU identification number from the MCU 41102 table as well as the ports of the MCU used by the participants to 20 connect to a conference. VOPERATOR lists video operator attributes; VOTYPES lists all the types (e.g., protocols, bandwidths) used to define a conference or participant; and VOTYPEVALUES 41107 lists the values for each of the defined types. 25 Each video operator record in the VDOOPERATOR 41101 table contains a unique identification number in its ID field, which number may appear in the CONFERENCE 41104 table's operatorID field, assigning each video operator to particular conferences profiled in the CONFERENCE 41104 table. Each conference record in the CONFERENCE 41104 table, in turn, 30 contains a unique identification number in its ID field, which number may appear in the CONFPARTICIPANT 41108 table's conflD field. Similarly, each participant record in the PARTICIPANT 41105 table contains a unique identification number in its ID field, which number may appear in the CONFPARTICIPANT 41108 table's participantlD field. Finally, each MCU w A/t WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 record in the MCU 41102 table contains a unique identification number in its ID field, which number may appear in the MCUPORT 41106 table's mcuID field, identifying the set of MCU ports associated with the MCU. Each MCU port record in the MCUPORT 41106 table, in turn, contains a 5 unique identification number in its ID field, which number may appear in the CONFPARTICIPANT 41108 table's mcuPortID field. Within the CONFPARTICIPANT 41108 table, the confID, participantID, and mcuPortID values are used as cross-referencing keys to define a particular conference with a given conference profile, a set of participants, and an 10 MCU port. In addition, each VOType record in the VOTYPE 41103 table contains a unique identification number in its ID field, which number may appear in the VOTYPEVALUES 41107 table's typeID field, identifying a set of values 15 associated with the VOType. G. Video Operator Console Graphical User Interface Windows 1. Main Console Window. Figure 108 shows one embodiment of the Main Console window 41201 as 20 it would appear on a Video Operator Terminal [1 Figure 96], showing possible placements of a Schedule window 41202, a Conference window 41203, a Video Watch window 41204 and a Console Output window 41205. The Main Console window 41201 enables the video operator to manage video conferences. 25 2. Schedule Window. Figure 109 shows one embodiment of the Schedule window 41202, which displays all the conferences 41305 and playback sessions 41306 to be handled by the current video operator for the next 8 hours. In one 30 embodiment, the list is updated upon application startup, at 15 minute intervals, and every time a conference ends. The Schedule window will have two scrolled text areas - one area for conferences 41301, and the other for sites 41302 participating in the WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 selected conference. If a conference name is double-clicked, the appropriate Conference Window [41203 Figures 108, 110] will appear. 3. Conference Window. 5 Figure 110 shows one embodiment of the Conference window 41203, which is displayed when the operator selects a conference or playback session in the Schedule window 41202. The display of the Conference Window 41203 is dependent on whether a Conference or a Playback Session has been selected from the Schedule Window 41202. Only one 10 conference window is displayed at a time. When a new conference window is opened, the existing one is hidden. While a Conference Window is hidden, the status of the conference and connections are still monitored. Figure 110 shows a Conference Session 41401. The Conference window 41203 displays the list of conference Participants 41415 and radio buttons 15 to selectively operate on individual connections, including call setup, viewing, playback and recording. Information about the conference such as the duration, start time, end time, playback and recording status, and conference type are displayed at 20 the bottom of the window. If the operator double clicks inside the Conference Window 41203 where there is no action associated with the clicking location, the Properties Box [41701 Figure 113] is displayed with the conference settings. 25 A conference is ended by pressing the End Conference button. This will disconnect all calls associated with the conference. The Conference Window 41203 displays the connections in the conference and their connection status 41417, including any free MCU Port slots 30 reserved for a not yet joined connection 41421. Each Connection listing contains a radio button 41422, the participant site name 41423 and status lights 41418-41420. The status of the two calls and the join are monitored and displayed with the site name in the Conference window 41203. The status squares 41418-41420 are colored boxes, with different

.

/14 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 colors representing different call statuses (e.g., no call, call in progress, active call, or active call that has been disconnected). The Conference Window 41203 provides buttons to click 41417 that define 5 the sequence in which a participant site gets connected to an MCU Port site, routed through the video operator. Other features available from this part of the window are watching the video input from a call, recording video input from either call, and making a normal video call to the participant site or to the MCU. 10 The color of the arrows 41424 represents the status of each call. The color of the arrows is also duplicated in the status lights 41418-41420 in the list of connections. 15 If there is a Playback Connection 41425 associated with the Conference, only one Call is necessary to an MCU Port site. The normal Participant Site call setup interface will be inaccessible, and the Join control 41405 will become the Start and Stop switch for playback. 20 Free MCU ports can be reached only when an MCU Port call for a defined Connection is inactive (or disconnected). This allows the operator to join a conference as if the operator were a participant. This is done by selecting the Connection with the free MCU port call. When connected, the operator can inform the rest of the participants that the operator is attempting to 25 contact or restore a connection. There are some functional limitations that the Conference Window 41203 will reflect. The Conference Window 41203 should not allow access to functions that cannot be performed, for example: 30 The video operator can only view one call at a time. The video operator can record any call at any time with software unidirectional decoder. Playback connection selection changes the call setup buttons 3 / I WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 appropriately. . The video operator can participate in a conference only when a MCU port call is inactive. . The video operator can talk to participant site only when the participant 5 is disconnected. To clarify, a simple connection setup using the Conference Window proceeds as follows. By pressing the Call button near the participant site box 41402, the operator calls Adam (or, alternatively, Adam may call the 10 operator), and then the operator places the call on Hold 41407. By pressing the Call button near the MCU Port site box 41403, the operator calls the MCU and then places the call on Hold 41408. By pressing the Join button 41405, the two calls are joined. In another embodiment, this can be an automated rather than a manual process. Adam and the MCU 15 are now connected as H.320 video call. All three arrows 41424 will be green. 4. Video Watch Window. Figure 111 shows one embodiment of the Video Watch window 41204, 20 which displays the H.320 input from a selected call of a conference connection or a separate incoming or outgoing call. The Video Watch window 41204 also has controls for making normal calls 41512 and media control such as audio control 41509-41510. 25 The Video Watch window is the display for the unidirectional H.320 decode of the video output of a selected call. By default, the MCU call of the first active site will be displayed. To watch any other call, the appropriate View button must be pressed in the Conference Windows. The video and audio controls for this window such as volume control 41509-41510, picture size 30 41511, etc., are managed from the Video Control Panel. When the operator chooses to make a normal H.320 video call (point to point), to a site or an available slot in an active conference, the Video Watch window 41204 is used for viewing the video. A small self-view video 3?/ 9, WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 window should appear nearby when the operator selects the Self View button 41506. 5. Console Output Window. 5 Figure 112 shows one embodiment of the Console Output window 41205 which displays all error messages and alerts 41601. The window is scrollable so that the video operator can see all errors that have occurred in the current session. These messages are also logged to a text file for future reference. 10 6. Properties Dialog Box. Figure 113 shows a Properties dialog box 41701. Dialog boxes are windows that are transitional and only displayed temporarily. They are usually used for entering data or displaying information that requires 15 immediate attention. This will be a modeless dialog box displaying the properties of a particular conference or site. There will be only one such window open at any time. If the user focuses on another Conference Window or Connection Window, the same dialog box is updated with the appropriate properties. Figure 113 pictures the properties associated with 20 a particular site, including the site coordinator 41702, the site phone number 41703, the time 41704, connection type 41705 and terminal type 41706. A Close button 41707 closes the Properties dialog box 41701. XVII. WORLD WIDE WEB (WWW) BROWSER CAPABILITIES 25 A. User Interface The graphical user interface is designed such that only a single IP connection from the workstation to the server is required. This single IP connection supports both the Internet connection between the WWW Browser and the WWW Site, and the messaging connection between the PC 30 Client and the universal inbox (i.e., Message Center). The PC Client interface is integrated with the WWW Browser interface such that both components can exist on the same workstation and share a single IP connection without causing conflicts between the two applications.

'-/

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 WWW Browser access is supported from any of the commercially available WWW Browser interfaces: - Microsoft Internet Explorer; - Netscape Navigator (1.2, 2.X); or 5 - Spyglass Mosaic. In addition, the WWW Browser interface is optimized to support Windows 95; however, Windows 3.1 and Windows 3.11 are supported as well. The WWW Browser interface detects the display characteristics of the user's 10 workstation (or terminal) and adapts the presentation to support the display settings of the workstation. The presentation optimized around a 640x480 pixel display but is also capable of taking advantage of enhanced resolution and display qualities of 800x600 (and greater) monitors. 15 To improve performance, the user is able to select between 'minimal graphics' or 'full graphics' presentation. The WWW browser will detect whether a user has selected 'minimal graphics' or 'full graphics' and send only the appropriate graphics files. 20 B. Performance Response time for downloading of information from the WWW Site or the Personal Home Page to the user's workstation or terminal meets the following benchmarks. Workstation Configuration: 25 Processor: 486DX - 33 MHz; Memory: 12 MB; Monitor: VGA, Super VGA, or XGA; Access: Dialup; Windows 95; 30 Presentation Option: Full Graphics; and Peripherals: Audio Card, Audio Player Software, 14.4 Kbps Modem. REQUIREMENT MEAN VALUE NOT TO EXCEED VALUE Retrieve and Personal Home Pages. Time is measured from when the WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 user selects the Bookmark until the Status Bar reads, "Document: Done". 20 sec 30 sec Retrieve WWW screens other than Home Pages. Time is measured from when the user selects the hypertext link or tab until the Status Bar 5 reads, "Document: Done". 5 sec (text only) or 15 sec (scheduling screen) 15 sec (text only) or 30 sec (scheduling screen) Start playing a voicemail message. Time is measured from when the users selects the voicemail message in the Message Center until the 10 streaming audio file starts playing on the user's workstation. 10 sec 15 sec After a screen or page has been downloaded from the WWW Site to the workstation, the cursor is pre-positioned onto the first required field or field 15 that can be updated. C. Personal Home Page The system provides subscribers the ability to establish a Personal Home Page which provides a vehicle for people to communicate with or schedule 20 meetings with the subscriber. A person accessing a subscriber's Personal Home Page is referred to as the guest and the user that 'owns' the Personal Home Page is referred to as the subscriber. Guest-access to Personal Home Pages will support the following features: 25 - Create and send a text-based pager message through networkMCI Paging; - Create and send an email message to the email (MCI Mail or internetMCI) account; and -Access the subscriber's calendar to schedule a meeting. Messages generated through the subscriber's Personal Home Page are 30 directed to the subscriber's networkMCI or SkyTel Pager, or MCI email account. Email messages composed by guests will: - Present the subscriber's name, not the subscriber's email address, in the ,3.z1 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 email header; - Provide a field in the email header for the: -Sender's name (required field), -Sender's email address (optional field), and 5 -Subject (optional field). Guests 'request' appointments on a subscriber's Personal Home Page. - Requested appointments on a subscriber's Personal Home Page will be prefaced with "(R)". - Approved appointments will be prefaced with "(A)". 10 Subscribers are responsible for routinely checking their calendars and approving "(A)" or deleting requested appointments, and initiating the necessary follow-up communications to the requesting party. Approved appointments will be prefaced by "(A)". 15 Security Requirements Calendar access from the Personal Home Page is designed to support two levels of security: - No PIN Access: -Times Only, or 20 -Times & Events; * PIN Access: -Times Only; or -Times & Events. 25 1. Storage Requirements . The system stores and maintains past and future appointments in the following manner: - Current month plus past six months of historical calendar appointments - Current month plus next twelve months of future calendar appointments. 30 A subscriber is provided the option to download the contents of the months appointments that are scheduled to be overwritten in the database. The calendar information that will be downloaded to the subscriber is in a comma delimited or DBF format and capable of being imported into Microsoft Schedule+, ACT or Ascend. 3.22 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 2. On Screen Help Text. On screen help text provides guest and subscriber icon access to field specific "Help" instructions to operate within the Personal Home Page. The 5 Help Text must provide information describing: - How to Send the subscriber a text-based pager message from the Personal Home Page through networkMCI Paging; - How to Send the subscriber an email message from the Personal Home Page to an MCI email account; 10 - How to Access and update a subscriber's Calendar; e How to Locate a user's Personal Home Page; and - How to Order your own Personal Home Page through MCI. 3. Personal Home Page Directory. 15 The provides the guest the ability to access to a Personal Home Page directory through the existing MCI Home Page. This directory allows the guest to search all established Personal Home Page accounts for a specific Personal Home Page address, by specifying Last Name (required); First Name (optional), Organization (optional), State (optional) and/or Zip Code 20 (optional). Results from the Personal Home Page directory search return the following information: Last Name, First Name, Middle Initial, Organization, City, State and Zip Code. Although City is not requested in search criteria it is provided in search results. 25 Another means for a guest to locate a Personal Home Page is through the WWW Browser. Many WWW Browsers have built in search capabilities for 'Net Directory.' Users' Personal Home Pages are listed within the directories of Internet addresses presented by the WWW Browser. The benefit to conducting your search from the MCI Home Page is that only Personal 30 Home Pages are indexed (and searched). Conducting the search through the WWW Browser menu option will not limit the search to Personal Home Pages and therefore will conduct a search through a larger list of URLs. In addition, guests have the capability to enter the specific URL (i.e., Open Location) for the Personal Home Page rather than performing a search. This 323 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 is especially important for those subscribers that have their Personal Home Page "unlisted" in the directory. 4. Control Bar 5 A Control Bar is presented at the bottom of the Personal Home Page. The Control Bar is presented after the guest has selected Personal Home Pages from the MCI Home Page. The Control Bar provides the guest access to the following features: - Help Text 10 - MCI Home Page - Personal Home Page Directory - Feedback. 5. Home Page. 15 The Home Page is the point of entry for the subscriber to perform message retrieval and exercise profile management from a WWW Browser. The Home Page is designed to provide the user easy access to the Message Center or Profile Management. 20 6. Security Requirements . Access to the Message Center or Profile Management is limited to authorized users. Users are prompted to enter their User ID and Password before accessing the Message Center or Profile Management. After three unsuccessful attempts, the user is blocked from accessing the Message 25 Center or Profile Management and a WARNING message advises the subscriber to contact the MCI Customer Support Group. The account is deactivated until an MCI Customer Support representative restores the account. After the account is restored, the subscriber is required to update his or her Password. 30 A successful logon to the Message Center enables the user to access Profile Management without being challenged for another (i.e., the same) User ID and Password. The same is also true for users that successfully access Profile Management - they are allowed to access the Message Center WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 without being challenged for another (i.e., the same) User ID and Password. Passwords are valid for one month. Users are prompted to update their password if it has expired. Updates to passwords require the user to enter the expired password, and the new password twice. 5 7. On Screen Help Text. Provide the subscriber icon access to field specific "Help" instructions to operate within the Home Page. The Help Text provides information describing: 10 - How to Access Message Center; - How to Access Profile Management; - How to Access the MCI Home Page; - How to Access Personal Home Pages; - How to Send (i.e. Create or Forward) Messages through Message Center; 15 - How to File Messages through Message Center; - How to Update the directlineMCI Profile; - How to Update the Information Services Profile; - How to Update their Personal Home Page; - How to Provide Feedback on the Home Page; and 20 - How to Order the User's Guide. Control Bar A Control Bar is presented at the bottom of the Home Page. The Control Bar provides the guest access to the following features: - Help Text; 25 e MCI Home Page; - Personal Home Page Directory; and -Feedback. 8. Profile Management. In addition to the On-Screen Help Text and Control Bar discussed above, 30 the Profile Management screen presents a Title Bar. The Title Bar provides the subscriber easy access to the Profile Management components and quick access to the Message Center. Access to the Profile Management components is provided through the use of tabs which will include: - directlineMCI; 3.2S- WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 - Information Services; - Personal Home Page; e List Management; and - Message Handling. 5 The directlineMCI tab includes additional tabs for the underlying components of directlineMCI which are: -Voicemail; - FAXmail; - Paging. 10 The directlineMCI Profile Management system provides subscribers a Profile Management page from which account profile information can be manipulated to: - Create new directlineMCI profiles and assign names to the profile; - Update existing directlineMCI profiles; 15 - Support the rules-based logic of creating and updating directlineMCI profiles (e.g., selection of only one call routing option, like voicemail, invokes override routing to voicemail; and updates made in one screen ripple through all affected screens, like paging notification); - Enable a directlineMCI number; 20 - Enable and define override routing number; - Enable and define FollowMe routing; and - Define RNA parameters for each number in the directlineMCI FollowMe routing sequence - Enable and define final routing (formerly called alternate routing) to: 25 -Voicemail and pager, -Voicemail only, -Pager only, and -Final message; - Invoke menu routing if two or more of the call routing options (FollowMe, 30 voicemail, faxmail or pager) are enabled; - Enable voicemail; - Enable faxmail; - Enable paging; - Define the default number for faxmail delivery; WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 * Activate paging notification for voicemail; e Activate paging notification for faxmail; - Define schedules to activate/ deactivate different directlineMCI profiles; - Provide guest option to classify voicemails for urgent delivery; 5 - Configure the time zone for all message types that will be used to identify the time a message is received; - Define call screening parameters for: -Name and ANI, -ANI only, and 10 -Name only; and - Enable or disabling park and page. 9. Information Services Profile Management. Information Services Profile Management provides subscribers the ability to 15 select the information source, delivery mechanism (voicemail, pager, email) and the delivery frequency depending upon the information source and content. Specifically, the subscriber has the ability configure any of the following information sources: - Stock Quotes and Financial News; and 20 - Headline News. Stock Quotes and Financial News provides the subscriber the following: *Business News Headlines; - Stock Quotes (delay less than or equal to 10 minutes); - Stock Market Reports (hourly, AM/PM or COB); 25 - Currency and Bond Reports (hourly, AM/PM or COB); - Precious Metal Reports (hourly, AM/PM or COB); and - Commodities Reports (hourly, AM/PM or COB). Business News Headlines are delivered via email once per day. Reports 30 (Stock Market, Currency and Bond, Precious Metal and Commodities) are delivered at the interval specified by the subscriber. Hourly reports require that email message is time stamped at 10 minutes after the hour. AM/PM reports require that one email message is transmitted in the morning (11:10 am ET) and one email message is transmitted in the evening (5:10 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 PM ET), with COB reports transmitted at 5:10 PM ET. The content of the Stock Market Report contains: - Stock or mutual fund ticker symbol; 5 - Stock or mutual fund opening price; - Stock or mutual fund closing price; - Last recorded bid price for the stock or mutual fund; - Last recorded ask price for the stock or mutual fund; - Stock or mutual fund's 52-week high; and 10 - Stock or mutual fund 52-week low. Stock Quotes and Financial News also provide the subscriber the ability to select from a list of available stocks and mutual funds and define criteria whereby a voicemail or text-based page is provided. The definable criteria 15 are referred to as 'trigger points' and can be any or all of the following conditions: - Stock or mutual fund reaches a 52-week high value; - Stock or mutual fund reaches a 52-week low value; - Stock or mutual fund reaches a user-defined high point; and 20 - Stock or mutual fund reaches a user-defined low-point. After a 'trigger point' condition has been satisfied, a message (voicemail or text-based pager) is transmitted within 1 minute to the subscriber. Voicemail messages are directed to the subscriber's mailbox defined in the 25 user's directlineMCI account. The information content for Stock Quotes and Financial News is no older-than 10-minutes old. 10. Personal Home Page Profile Management. Personal Home Page Profile Management provides subscribers the ability to 30 customize their Personal Home Page and define how guests can communicate with them (email or text-based pager). In addition, Profile Management also enables subscribers to control guest access to their calendar. Specifically, the subscriber is able to: - Establish and maintain a greeting message; WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 - Establish and maintain a contact information (i.e., address information); - Establish and maintain a personal calendar; - Enable or disable guest access to paging, email or calendar; - Control guest access to calendar by defining PINs for standard or 5 privileged access; and - Incorporate an approved subscriber submitted graphic, such as a personal photo or corporate logo, on a predefined location on the Personal Home Page. 10 Upon creation of the Personal Home Page, the contact information is populated with the subscriber's delivery address information. The subscriber has the capability to update that address information contained within the contact information. 11. List Management. 15 List Management provides the subscriber the ability to create and update lists. Profile Management provides subscribers the ability to define lists accessible through the Message Center for message distribution. In one embodiment, list management is centralized such that Fax Broadcast list management capabilities are integrated with directlineMCI list management 20 capabilities to provide a single database of lists. In an alternate embodiment, the two list management systems are separate, so the user may access either database for lists. Lists are maintained through an interface similar to an address book on the 25 PC Client whereby subscriber are able to add or remove names to lists. Associated with each person's name are the email address, faxmail address (i.e., ANI), voicemail address (i.e., ANI), and pager number. As messages populate the Message Center inbox (i.e., universal inbox), the address book is updated with the source address of the associated message type. 30 When a subscriber chooses to create a distribution list, she is prompted to select a name, type and identifier name for the list. All created lists are available in alphabetical order by name. The type of the list (voice, fax, email, page) accompanies the list name. In addition, list identifiers may Ll19 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 consist of alphabetic characters. The subscriber is then prompted for recipient names and addresses to create a distribution list. The subscriber is able to access his address book 5 for recipient information. The subscriber is not be restricted to record the same address types in his list; if a list is created with a fax type, the subscriber is able to include ANI, email and paging addresses in the list. The subscriber is able to manage his distribution lists with create, review, delete, edit (add and delete recipients) and rename capabilities. 10 When the user chooses to modify a list through the WWW Browser interface, she is prompted to select the address type (voice, fax, fax, paging, email) and a list of the user's distribution lists should be provided for that address type. The user is also able to enter the List Name to locate it. 15 Users are able to modify lists through create, review, edit (add and remove recipients), delete and rename commands. Whenever a subscriber modifies a list with a recipient addition, removal or address change, she is able to make the modification a global change. For 20 example, a user changes the voice mailbox address for Mr. Brown in one list. she is able to make this a global change, changing that address for Mr. Brown in all of his distribution lists. While the subscriber is able to create and modify distribution lists through the ARU and VRU in addition to the PC, enhanced list maintenance capabilities are supported through the 25 WWW Browser interface. The subscriber is able to search and sort lists by name or by the different address fields. For example, a user is able to search for all lists containing 'DOLE' by using the *DOLE* command within the search function. In 30 addition, users are able to search lists using any of the address fields. For example, a user could search based on a recipient number, 'to' name or zip code. A user is able to sort lists by list names, identifiers and types or by any address field. 33o WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 In addition to search capabilities, the distribution list software enables the user to copy and create sub-lists from existing distribution list records. The user is able to import and export recipient data from external database structures. 5 The capability to share lists among users and upload lists to a host also exists. 12. Global Message Handling. 10 Global Message Handling provides subscribers the ability to define the message types that will appear in the "universal inbox" or accessed through the Message Center. The following message types are selectable: - directlineMCI voicemail; e directlineMCI faxmail; 15 e networkMCI and SkyTel Paging; and - Email from an MCI email account (i.e., MCI Mail or internetMCI). If a subscriber is not enrolled in a specific service then that option will be grayed-out and therefore not selectable within Global Message Handling. 20 Any updates to Global Message Handling result in a real-time update to the Message Center. An example is that a subscriber may choose to allow voicemail messages to appear in the Message Center. The Message Center automatically retrieves all voicemail message objects that exist within the voicemail database. 25 D. Message Center The Message Center functions as the "universal inbox" for retrieving and manipulating message objects. The "universal inbox" consists of folders containing messages addressed to the user. Access to the Message Center is supported from all WWW Browsers, but content contained in the 30 "universal inbox" only presents the following message types: - Voicemail: addressed to user's directlineMCI account; - Email: addressed to the user's MCI email (i.e., MCI Mail or internetMCI) account; - FAXmail: addressed to the user's directlineMCI account; and WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Paging: addressed to the user's networkMCI Paging account (or SkyTel Paging account). In addition to the On-Screen Help Text and Control Bar discussed in the 5 previous sections, the Message Center screen presents a Title Bar. The Title Bar provides the subscriber easy access to the Message Center functions and quick access to Profile Management. The Message Center functions that are supported through the Title Bar are: - File: lists user's defined folders and allows user to select folder; 10 - Create: compose a new email message; - Forward: voicemails will be forwarded as email attachments; - Search: provide ability to search based on message type, sender's name or address, subject or date/time; and - Save: allows users to save messages to a folder on the universal inbox, to 15 a file on the workstation or to a diskette. When composing or forwarding messages through the Message Center, the user has the ability to send a message as either an email or a faxmail. The only limitation is that voicemails may only be forwarded as voicemails or as 20 email attachments. All other message types may be interchanged such that emails may be forwarded to a fax machine, or pager messages may be forwarded as an email text message. Messages that are sent out as faxmail messages are generated in a G3 format, and support distribution to Fax Broadcast lists. 25 The presentation layout of the Message Center is consistent with the presentation layout of the PC Client such that they have the same look and feel. The Message Center is designed to present a Message Header Frame and a Message Preview Frame, similar to the presentation that is supported 30 by nMB v3.x. The user will have the ability to dynamically re-size the height of the Message Header Frame and the Message Preview Frame. The Message Header Frame will display the following envelope information: - Message type (email, voice, fax, page); * Sender's name, ANI or email address; WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 - Subject; " Date/time; and " Message size. 5 The Message Preview Frame displays the initial lines of the body of the email message, the initial lines of the first page of the faxmail message, the pager message, or instructions on how to play the voicemail message. Playing of voicemail messages through an WWW Browser is supported as a streaming audio capability such that the subscriber is not required to 10 download the audio file to their workstation before playing it. The streaming audio is initiated after the user has selected (single left-mouse click) on the voicemail header in the Message Header Frame. Displaying of faxmail messages is initiated immediately after the user has selected (single left mouse click) on the faxmail header in the Message Header Frame. 15 The Message Center also allows the subscriber to use distribution lists that have been created in Profile Management. The distribution lists support sending messages across different message types. In addition to the basic message retrieval and message distribution, the 20 Message Center supports the creation and maintenance of message folders (or directories) within the universal inbox. Initially users are limited to the following folders: - Draft: retains all saved messages that have NOT been sent; - Inbox: retains all messages received by the "universal inbox" and it will be 25 the default folder presented when the user accesses Message Center; - Sent: retains all messages that have been sent; and -Trash: retains for 7 days all messages marked for delete. Subscribers will eventually be able to create (and rename) folders (and folders within folders). 30 1. Storage Requirements . Initially, users are allotted a limited amount of storage space for directlineMCI voicemail and directlineMCI faxmail. Pager recall messages and email messages are not limited based upon amount of storage space 313 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 consumed, but rather the date/time stamp of the message received. Ultimately, storage requirements will be enforced based upon a common measurement unit, like days. This will provide users an easier approach to knowing when messages will be deleted from the database, and when 5 guests will be prevented from depositing a message (voicemail, faxmail) to their "universal inbox". To support this, the following are storage requirements for messages retained in the inbox: - directlineMCI voicemail: 60 minutes; - directlineMCI faxmail: 50 pages; 10 - networkMCI pages: 99 hours; and - Email: 6 months. The subscriber is provided the option to download the messages that are scheduled to be overwritten in the database except for messages that are 15 retained in the trash folder. E. PC Client Capabilities 1. User Interface. The PC Client interface supports subscribers that want to operate in a store 20 &, forward environment. These users want to download messages to either manipulate or store locally. The PC Client is not designed to support Profile Management and the PC Client interface only presents messages (voicemail, faxmail, email, text-page). Access to Profile Management capabilities only is available through the ARU interface or the WWW Browser interface. The PC 25 Client interface is integrated with the WWW Browser interface such that both components can exist on the same workstation and share a single IP connection. The PC Client interface is optimized to support Windows 95; however, 30 Windows 3.1 is supported as well. The graphical user interface is designed to present a Message Header Window and a Message Preview Window, similar to the presentation that is supported by nMB v3.x and is supported by the WWW Browser. The user Lt ' WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 has the ability to dynamically re-size the height of the Message Header Window and the Message Preview Window. The Message Header Window displays the following envelope information: - Message type (email, voice, fax, page); 5 - Sender's name, ANI or email address; - Subject; - Date/time; and - Message size. The Message Preview Window displays the initial lines of the body of email 10 messages or pager messages, or instructions on how to display the faxmail message or play the voicemail message. Playing of voicemail messages from the PC Client requires an audio card be present on the PC. Displaying of faxmail messages invokes the faxmail reader within the PC Client. 15 The Message Center also allows the user to use distribution lists that have been created in Profile Management. The distribution lists support sending messages across different message types. 2. Security. 20 User authentication between the PC Client and the server is negotiated during the dial-up logon session. Security is supported such that the User ID and Password information is imbedded in the information that is passed between the PC Client and server when establishing the interface. Subscribers are not required to manually enter their User ID and Password. 25 In addition, updates made to the password are communicated to the PC Client. 3. Message Retrieval. Message Retrieval provides subscribers the ability to selectively retrieve 30 voicemail, faxmail, pages and email messages that reside in the "universal inbox". Message types that are displayed or played from the PC Client include: - directlineMCI voicemail; - directlineMCI faxmail; 33,5- WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 - networkMCI paging; and - Email from an MCI email account; The PC Client initiates a single communication session to retrieve all message types from the "universal inbox". This single communication 5 session is able to access the upstream databases containing voicemails, faxmails, emails and pages. The PC Client also is able to perform selective message retrieval such that the user may is able to: 10 - Retrieve all messages; - Retrieve full text (or body) for selected message header(s); - Retrieve messages based upon editable search criteria: -priority messages; -email messages; 15 -pager messages; -faxmail messages (complete or header only); -voicemail messages (complete or header only); -sender name, address or ANI; -date/time stamp on message; and 20 -message size. Header-only faxmail messages retrieved from the "universal inbox" are retained in the "universal inbox" until the message body is retrieved. Voicemail messages are retained in the "universal inbox" until the 25 subscriber accesses the "universal inbox" via the WWW Browser (i.e., Message Center) or ARU and deletes the message. Messages retrieved from the "universal inbox" are moved to the desktop folder. In addition, the PC Client is able to support background and scheduled 30 polling such that users are able to perform message manipulation (create, edit, delete, forward, save, etc.) while the PC Client is retrieving messages. 4. Message Manipulation. Message Manipulation provides subscribers the ability to perform many WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 standard messaging client actions, like: - Compose (or create) email, faxmail or pager messages; - Forward all message types; - Save; 5 - Edit; - Delete; - Distribute; * Attach; - Search; and 10 - Display or play messages. F. Order Entry Requirements directlineMCI or networkMCI Business customers are provided additional interface options to perform profile management and message management functions. Both directlineMCI and networkMCI Business customers are 15 automatically provided accounts to access the features and functions available through the different interface types. The ability to provide accounts to networkMCI Business customers is also supported; however not all networkMCI Business customers are provided accounts. Order entry is flexible enough to generate accounts for networkMCI Business 20 customers, as needed. Order entry is designed such that directlineMCI customers or networkMCI Business customers are automatically provided access to the additional interface types and services provided in the system. For example, a 25 customer that orders directlineMCI (or networkMCI Business) is provided an account to access the Home Page for Profile Management or Message Center. Checks are in place to prevent a customer from being configured with two accounts - one from directlineMCI and one from networkMCI Business. In order to accomplish this, integration between the two order 30 entry procedures is established. An integrated approach to order entry requires a single interface. The interface integrates order entry capabilities such that the order entry appears to be housed in one order entry system and does not require the 337 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 order entry administrator to establish independent logon sessions to multiple order entry systems. This integrated order entry interface supports a consistent order entry methodology for all of the services and is capable of pulling information from the necessary order entry systems. In 5 addition, the interface supports the capability to see the services associated with the user's existing application. The specific requirements of the integrated order interface system are: - Automated feeds to define an MCI email (MCI Mail or internetMCI) 10 account; - Automated feeds to define a networkMCI paging account(or SkyTel Paging) account; -Automated feeds to define a directlineMCI account; - Automated feeds to enable Fax Broadcast capabilities; 15 - Ability to manually enter MCI email account, networkMCI paging account or directlineMCI account information; - Ability to enable or disable access to inbound information services; and - Ability to enable or disable access to outbound information services. 20 These abilities give order entry administrators the flexibility to add a user based upon preexisting MCI service (email, paging, directlineMCI) account information. Alternatively, the order administrator may add a user while specifying the underlying services. 25 The order entry systems provide the necessary customer account and service information to the downstream billing systems. They also track the initial customer order and all subsequent updates so that MCI can avoid sending duplicate platform software (i.e., PC Client) and documentation (i.e., User Guide). In addition, order entry processes enable an 30 administrator to obtain the following information: - Record customer delivery and name: -support USA and Canadian addresses, and -provide ability to prevent delivery to P.O. boxes; - Record customer's billing address, phone number and contact name; WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 - Record the order date and all subsequent updates; - Record the name, phone number and division of the Account Representative that submitted the order; - Record or obtain the user's directlineMCI number; 5 - Record or obtain the user's networkMCI paging PIN; - Record or obtain the user's MCI email account ID; - Generate a daily Fulfillment Report that is electronically sent to fulfillment house; and - Generate a daily Report that tracks: 10 -number of orders received; -number of orders to create networkMCI Paging (or SkyTel Paging) account; -number of orders to create MCI email account, and -number of orders to create a directlineMCI account. 15 Personal home pages can be ordered for a customer. The customer delivery information recorded during order entry is the default address information that is presented from the user's Personal Home Page. In addition, the order entry processes support the installation of and charging for special graphics. 20 The capability to turn existing feature/functionality 'on' and 'off for a specific service exists. Features that can be managed by the user are identified within the order entry systems. These features are then activated for management within the user's directory account. 25 There are real-time access capabilities between order entry systems and the user's directory account. This account houses all of the user's services, product feature/functionality, and account information, whether user managed or not. Those items that are not identified as user-managed are 30 not accessible through the user's interface. 1. Provisioning and Fulfillment. Access requirements have been defined in terms of inbound access to the system and outbound access from the system. Inbound access includes the WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 methods through which a user or a caller may access the system. Outbound access includes the methods through which users are handled by the system in accordance with a preferred embodiment. Internet support exists for both inbound and outbound processing. 5 The following components may provide inbound access: - directlineMCI: 800/8XX; - MCIMail: 800/8XX, email addresses; - networkMCI Paging: 800/8XX; and 10 - internetMCI mail: 800/8XX, POP3 email address. The following components have been identified for outbound access: * directlineMCI: Dial 1; - Fax Broadcast: 800/8XX, local; 15 - MCI Mail: 800/8XX, email address; and - internetMCI mail: 800/8XX, POP3 email address. G. Traffic Systems Traffic is supported according to current MCI procedures. 20 H. Pricing Initially, the features are priced according to the existing pricing structure defined for the underlying components. In addition, taxing and discounting capabilities are supported for the underlying components as they are 25 currently being supported. Discounting is also supported for customers that subscribe to multiple services. I. Billing The billing system: 30 - Supports charges for directlineMCI enhanced services (voicemail, faxmail, both); - Supports charges for peak and off-peak rates; - Supports discounts for multiple services (directlineMCI, networkMCI Business, networkMCI Paging, networkMCI Cellular) which will vary 3 1 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 based upon number of services; - Supports ability to suppress networkMCI Cellular charges for directlineMCI calls (originating and terminating); * Supports charges for monthly fees sensitive to directlineMCI usage; 5 * Supports promotions in the form of free minutes based on directlineMCI usage; * Supports charges for Personal Home Pages; * Supports ability to suppress charges for Personal Home Pages; and - Supports SCA Pricing. 10 In one embodiment, the billing system supports the current invoicing procedures that exist for each of the underlying components. In an alternative embodiment, the billing provides a consolidated invoice that includes all of the underlying components. In addition to invoicing, directed 15 billing is supported for all of the underlying components that are currently supporting directed billing. XVIII. DIRECTLINE MCI The following is a description of the architecture of the directline MCI 20 system, as modified for use with the system. This document covers the general data and call flows in the directlineMCI platform, and documents the network and hardware architecture necessary to support those flows. Billing flows in the downstream systems are covered at a very high level. Order Entry (OE) flows in the upstream systems are covered at a very high 25 level. Certain portions of the directlineMCI architecture reuse existing components (e.g. the Audio Response Unit (ARU)). Those portions of the directlineMCI architecture which are new are covered in more detail. A. Overview 30 In addition to billing, order entry, and alarming, the directlineMCI system is made up of three major components, as shown in Figure 43: - ARU (Audio Response Unit) 502 - VFP (Voice Fax Platform) 504 - DDS (Data Distribution Service) 506 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 The subsections below describe each of the major components at a high level. Figure 43 shows the high-level relationships between the major system components. 5 1. The ARU (Audio Response Unit) 502. The ARU 502 handles all initial inbound calls for directlineMCI. Some features (such as find me/follow me) are implemented entirely on the ARU. Inbound faxes are tone-detected by the ARU and extended to the VFP 504. Menuing provided by the ARU can be used to request access to the 10 voicemail/faxmail features, in which case the call is also extended to the VFP. 2. The VFP (Voice Fax Platform) 504. The VFP provides the menuing for the voicemail/faxmail features as well as outbound fax and voice forwarding and pager notifications. The VFP is 15 also the central data store for the customized subscriber prompts which are played and recorded by the ARU 502. 3. The DDS (Data Distribution Service) 506. The DDS is a central data repository for OE profiles and Billing Details Records (BDRs). OE profiles are deposited with DDS, which is responsible 20 for distributing the profiles to all of the appropriate systems. DDS 506 collects BDRs and ships them to the downstream billing systems. B. Rationale The requirement for the directlineMCI service is to integrate a variety of 25 service components into a single service accessed by a single 800 number. A number of these service components had been previously developed on the ISN ARU platform. The services not present in the ARU were mailbox services and fax services. The ARU 502 of the system 500 incorporates a voicemail/faxmail platform purchased from Texas Instruments (TI). 30 Portions of that software are ported to run on DEC Alpha machines for performance, reliability, and scalability. Another requirement for the directlineMCI implementation is integration with the mainstream (existing MCI) billing and order entry systems. The DDS provides the inbound and outbound interfaces between directlineMCI and the mainstream order entry WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 systems. C. Detail Figure 43 shows the relationships between the major system components. 5 The OE system 508 generates subscriber profiles which are downloaded via DDS 506 to the ARU 502 and the Voice Fax Platform (VFP) 504. BDRs generated by the ARU 502 and VFP 504 are fed to the billing systems 510 via DDS 506. The ARU 502 handles all inbound calls. If faxtone is detected, or if a voicemail/faxmail feature is requested, the call is extended 10 from the ARU 502 to the VFP 504. For mailbox status (e.g. " You have three messages"), the ARU 502 queries the VFP 504 for status and plays the prompt. Subscribers' customized prompts are stored on the VFP 504. When the 15 ARU plays the customized prompt, or records a new prompt, the prompt is accessed on the VFP 504. Alarms from the ARU 502 and VFP 504 are sent to the Local Support Element (LSE). 1. Call Flow Architecture 520. 20 The call flow architecture for directlineMCI is shown in Figure 44. The top part of the figure shows the network 522 connectivity used to transport the calls. The bottom part of the figure shows the call direction for different call types. The subsections below provide the text description to accompany the figure. 25 2. Network Connectivity. All inbound ISN calls are received at an Automatic Call Distributor (ACD) 524 connected to the MCI network 522. The Access Control Point (ACP) receives notice of an inbound call from the Integrated Services Network 30 Application Processor (ISNAP) 526, which is the control/data interface to the ACD 524. The Network Audio System (NAS) plays and records voice under the control of the ACP via a T1 interface to the ACD. In the United States, a digital multiplexing system is employed in which a first level of multiplexed transmission, known as T1, combines 24 digitized voice WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 channels over a four-wire cable (one-pair of wires for "send" signals and one pair of wires for "receive" signals). The conventional bit format on the T1 carrier is known as DS 1 (i.e., first level multiplexed digital service or digital signal format), which consists of consecutive frames, each frame having 24 5 PCM voice channels (or DSO channels) of eight bits each. Each frame has an additional framing bit for control purposes, for a total of 193 bits per frame. The TI transmission rate is 8000 frames per second or 1.544 megabits per second (Mbps). The frames are assembled for T1 transmission using a technique known as time division multiplexing (TDM), 10 in which each DSO channel is assigned one of 24 sequential time slots within a frame, each time slot containing an 8-bit word. Transmission through the network of local, regional and long distance service providers involves sophisticated call processing through various 15 switches and hierarchy of multiplexed carriers. At the pinnacle of conventional high-speed transmission is the synchronous optical network (SONET), which utilizes fiber-optic media and is capable of transmission rates in the gigabit range (in excess of one-billion bits per second). After passing through the network, the higher level multiplexed carriers are 20 demultiplexed ("demuxed") back down to individual DSO lines, decoded and coupled to individual subscriber telephones. Typically, multiple signals are multipexed over a single line. For example, DS3 transmission is typically carried by a coaxial cable and combines 25 twenty-eight DS1 signals at 44.736 Mbps. An OC3 optical fiber carrier, which is at a low level in the optical hierarchy, combines three DS3 signals at 155.52 Mbps, providing a capacity for 2016 individual voice channels in a single fiber-optic cable. SONET transmissions carried by optical fiber are capable of even higher transmission rates. 30 The NAS/ACP combination is referred to as the ARU 502. If the ARU 502 determines that a call must be extended to the VFP 504, it dials out to the VFP 504. The VFP media servers are connected to the MCI network 522 via T1. Data transfer from the ARU 502 to the VFP 504 is accomplished Y. i 4j WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 via is Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) on each call. 3. Call Flow. The call scenarios shown in Figure 44 are detailed below. At the start of 5 any of the inbound calls, the ARU 502 has already received the call and performed an application select to determine whether the call is a directlineMCI call or not. a) Inbound FAX: 10 An inbound FAX call is delivered to the ARU 502. The ARU performs a faxtone detect and extends the call to the VFP 504. Account number and mode are delivered to the VFP utilizing DTMF signaling. b) Inbound Voice, ARU only: 15 An inbound voice call is made in either subscriber or guest mode, and only those features which use the ARU 502 are accessed. The ARU determines mode (subscriber or guest). In subscriber mode, the ARU queries the VFP 504 to determine the number of messages. No additional network accesses are made. 20 c) Inbound/Outbound Voice, ARU only: A call is made to the ARU 502, and either pager notification or find me/follow me features are accessed. The ARU 502 dials out via the ACD 524 to the outside number. 25 d) Inbound Voice, VFP features: A call is made to the ARU 502, and the call is extended to the VFP 504. Account number and mode (subscriber or guest) are sent to the VFP via DTMF. The guest modes are: 30 1. Deposit voicemail. 2. Deposit fax mail. Collect fax mail. The subscriber modes are: 1. Retrieve or send mail. 4/ WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 2. Maintain broadcast lists. 3. Modify mailbox name recording. The VFP 504 continues prompting the user during the VFP session. 5 e) Outbound Fax/Voice/Pager, VFP only: For FAX or voice delivery or pager notification, the VFP dials out on the MCI network 522 directly. f) Reoriginate/Takeback: 10 While an inbound subscriber call is connected to the VFP 504, the user may return to the top level of the ARU 502 directlineMCI menus by pressing the pound key for two seconds. The network 522 takes the call back from the VFP 504 and reorginates the call to the ARU 502. 15 4. Data Flow Architecture. Figure 45 depicts the primary data flows in the directlineMCI architecture 520: OE records (customer profiles) are entered in an upstream system and are downloaded at 530 to the DDS mainframe 532. The DDS mainframe 20 downloads the OE records to the Network Information Distributed Services (NIDS) servers 534 on the ARU/ACP and the VFP/Executive Server 536. These downloads are done via the ISN token ring network 538. On the executive server 536, the OE records are stored in the local Executive Server database (not shown). 25 BDRs are cut by both the Executive Server 536 and the ACP 540. These BDRs are stored in an Operator Network Center (ONC) server 542 and are uploaded to the DDS mainframe 532. The uploads from the ONC servers 542 to the DDS mainframe are done via the ISN token ring network 538. 30 The ARU 502 prompts subscribers with their number of voicemail/faxmail messages. The number of messages a subscriber has is obtained from the VFP 504 by the ACP 540 over the ISNAP Ethernet 544. Note that the ACPs 540 may be at any of the ISN sites.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 The user-recorded ad hoc prompts played by the NAS 546 are stored on the VFP 504 and are played over the network on demand by the NAS 546. The NFS protocol 548 is used over the ISNAP Local Area Network (LAN) 544 and 5 Wide Area network (WAN) 550. D. Voice Fax Platform (VFP) 504 Detailed Architecture 1. Overview. Figure 46 shows the hardware components of the Voice Fax Portion 504 of 10 the directlineMCI system for the first embodiment. The main components in this system are: The TI MultiServe 4000 media server 560. The DEC 8200 executive servers 536. The Cabletron MMAC+ hubs 562. 15 The AlphaStation 200 console manager and terminal servers 564. The Bay Networks 5000 hubs 566. In another embodiment, the Cabletron hubs will be removed from the configuration, and the Bay Networks hubs will then carry all the network 20 traffic. 2. Rationale. The TI MultiServe 4000 560 was selected by MCI for the voicemail/faxmail portion of the directlineMCI platform. The MultiServe 4000 is a fairly slow 25 68040 machine on a fairly slow Nubus backplane. The 68040/Nubus machines are used by TI as both media servers (T1 interface, DSPs for voice and fax) and also for the executive server (database and object storage). Although this hardware is adequate for media server use, it was inadequate as an executive server to serve hundreds or even thousands of gigabytes of 30 voice and fax data and thousands of media server ports. Additionally, there is no clustering (for either performance or redundancy) available for the media server hardware. Thus, the executive server portion of the TI implementation was ported by MCI to run on a DEC Alpha 8200 cluster 536, described below. This clustering provides both failover and WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 loadsharing (thus scalability). Likewise, the gigabytes that must be moved from the high speed 8200 platforms must be moved across a network to the TI media servers. Cabletron Hubs 562 with both Fiber Distribution Data Interface (FDDI) and 5 switched 1ObT connectivity provide the backbone for the implementation. Each media server 560 is attached to a redundant pair of switched Ethernet ports. Because each port is a switched port, each media server gets a dedicated 10Mb of bandwidth to the hub. The 8200 servers 536 each need a large network pipe to serve the many smaller 10Mb Ethernet 10 pipes. For the first embodiment, the FDDI interfaces 568 will be used. However, traffic projections show that the necessary traffic will exceed FDDI capacity by several times, so an embodiment in accordance with a preferred embodiment will use higher speed networking technology such as ATM. The hub 562 configuration is fully redundant. 15 The AlphaStation 200 workstation 564 is needed for operations support. The AlphaStation 200 provides console management via DEC's Polycenter Console Manager for each of the directlineMCI VFP 504 components. It also runs the DEC Polycenter Performance Analyzer software. The 20 performance analyzer software collects and analyzes data from the 8200s for tuning purposes. 3. Detail. Figure 47 shows the production installation of the VFP 504 at the 25 production site. Notes about Figure 47 and its relationship to Figure 46: The DEC Alpha 8200s 536 are in a failover configuration. The center rack is a shared disk array. 30 The TI MultiServe 4000 560 is actually compound of four separate media servers in a single cabinet. The diagrams after this one show each "quadrant" (one of the four media servers in a MultiServe 4000) as a separate entity. Four each of the 16 FGD Tis are connected to each quadrant.

WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 The AlphaStation 200 workstation 564 and the terminal servers are used to provide console and system management. The Cabletron hubs 562 provide the network between the media servers 560 and the executive servers 536. 5 The Bay Networks hubs 566 provide the network between the VFP 504 and the network routers 569. a) Internal Hardware Network 10 Figure 48 shows the VFP internal hardware/network architecture: General notes about Figures 47-49: The left DEC 8200 machine 536 is shown with all of its ATM and FDDI connections 570 drawn in. The right DEC 8200 is shown with its Ethernet connections 572 drawn in. In actual deployment, both machines have all of 15 the ATM, FDDI, token ring, and Ethernet connections 570 and 572 shown. The Cabletron hubs 562 show fewer connections into ports than actually occur because each 8200 536 is drawn with only half its network connectivity. Also, only one of the four media servers 560 is shown connected to the Ethernet ports. In fact, there is a transceiver and two 20 Ethernet connects for each media server. The Bay Hubs 566 are not shown in Figure 48. They are shown in Figure 49, directlineMCI VFP External LAN Network Connectivity. 25 Starting from the top of Figure 48 of the DEC 8200s 536: The top unit contains three 4GB drives 574 for operating system, swap, etc. The system CD drive 576 is also located here. This unit is controlled by the Single-Ended Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI) ("SES" on the diagram) interface 578 from the main system 579. 30 The tape stacker 580 is a 140GB tape unit with a single drive and a 10 tape stack. This unit is controlled from a Fast-Wide SCSI ("FWS" on the diagram) interface 582 from the main system 579.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 The main system unit 579 utilizes three of five available slots. Slot 1 has the main CPU card 584. This card has one 300MHz CPU and can be upgraded to two CPUs. Slot 2 has a 512MB memory card 586. This card can be upgraded to 2GB, or another memory card can be added. System 5 maximum memory is 4GB. Slots 3 and 4 are empty, but may be used for additional CPU, memory, or I/O boards. Slot 5 has the main I/O card 588. This card has eight I/O interfaces: 10 One Fast-Wide SCSI interface 582 controls the tape stacker. Two Fast-Wide SCSI interfaces 590-592 are unused. The Single-Ended SCSI interface 578 controls the local system drives. The FDDI interface 594 connects to one of the hubs. The PCI slot 596 connects to a PCI expansion chassis 598. 15 One port is a 10baseT Ethernet card 600 that is connected to the corresponding card in the other 8200 536 via a private thinnet Ethernet. This network is required for one of the system failover heartbeats. An embodiment utilizes nine of the ten available slots in the PCI/EISA 20 expansion chassis 598. Slots 1 and 2 have disk adapters 602. Each disk adapter 602 is connected to a RAID disk controller 604 that has another disk controller 604 (on the other machine) chained, which in turn is connected to a disk controller 604 on that machine. Thus, each of the 8200 machines 536 has two disk controllers 604 attached off of each disk 25 adapter 602. This is the primary clustering mechanism, since either machine can control all of the disks located in Figure 48 beneath the PCI chassis 598. Slot 3 has a Prestoserve board 606. This is a Network File Server (NFS) accelerator. Slot 4 has an FDDI board 608. This FDDI connection is made to the hub 30 other than the FDDI connection made from main slot 5 above. Slots 5 and 6 have ATM boards 610. It has a 10baseT Ethernet card 612 that is connected to the corresponding card in the other 8200 536 via a private thinnet Ethernet. This network is required for one of the system WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 failover heartbeats. Slot 10 is empty. The two units beneath the PCI chassis are Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks (RAID) disk controllers 604. Each disk controller 604 is on a SCSI 5 chain with two disk controllers 604 in the middle and a disk adapter 602 (one per machine) on each end. Thus there are two chains, each with two disk controllers 604 and two disk adapters 602. This is the connectivity to the main system 579. Each disk controller 604 supports six single-ended SCSI chains. In this configuration, each of the two chains has one disk 10 controller with two SES connections, and one disk controller with three connections. Each chain has five sets 614 (or "drawers") of disk drives as pictured in the center rack. Note the redundant power supply in the drawer with the RAID Disk Controller. 15 The Cabletron MMAC+ hubs 562 (Figure 47) are configured in a redundant pair. Both the 8200s 536 and the TI media servers 560 connect to both hubs 562, and the two hubs 562 are also connected to each other. Starting from the left side of the hubs: The FDDI concentrator card 616 provides an eight port FDDI ring. Each 8200 has one connection into the 20 FDDI card 616 on each hub 562. The 24 port Ethernet card 618 provides connectivity to the TI media servers 560. Each media server 560 connects into one Ethernet port 618 on each hub. There are eight empty slots 620 in each hub which can be used for additional FDDI, ATM, or Ethernet expansion. 25 There are four TI media servers 560 mounted in a single rack called a "MultiServe 4000". Each media server in the rack is identical. Starting from the top unit, and then proceeding left to right for the main slots: The top unit 622 is a drawer that contains two 1GB disk drives, and a 30 removable/hot-insertable tape drive. There are two tape drives that can be shared among the four media servers. The left seven boards 624 labeled "DSP xxx" are TI MPB boards which can each support six incoming or fifteen outgoing channels, as labeled. These boards 624 are grouped together into three sets. There is a right group of three boards, a middle

,?S/

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 group of three boards, and a single board on the left. Each group has one TI. The T1 terminates at the interface marked "TIM". This is the master Ti interface. TI channels may be shared by the set of boards delimited by the master/slave T1 boards, and chained together by the bridge modules. The 5 rightmost board 626 is the main CPU/IO board. This board supports an SCSI interface 628 to the disk drawer, an Ethernet connection 630 to a special transceiver 632, and a serial port for the console (not shown). The transceiver 632 to the right of the CPU/IO board connects to Ethernet 10 ports on each of the two main hubs 562. The transceiver senses if one of its Ethernet connections has failed, and routes traffic to the other port. b) External Hardware /Network Connections Figure 49 shows the hardware and network connections from the VFP 504 15 to the external network. Notes about Figure 49: Each 8200 536 is connected onto the ISN token ring 640 through the Bay Hubs for DDS access over SNA and BDR access over IP. A pair of terminal servers 642 has a connection to the console port of each machine and hub. A DEC AlphaStation 200 564 runs console manager software to access the ports 20 connected to the terminal servers 642. The DECNIS routers are all on an FDDI ring 568 (Figure 46), connected between the Bay Hubs 566 and the two DEC 8200s 536. The Bay Hubs 566 connect the VFP system 504 to the external network 25 through the seven routers 644 shown. E. Voice Distribution Detailed Architecture 1. Overview. Voice Distribution refers to the portion of the architecture in which the NAS 30 546 (Figure 45) reads and writes the subscriber's ad hoc prompts across the LAN or WAN from/to the VFP 504 using the NFS protocol. 2. Rationale. In one embodiment, voice distribution is implemented by placing a server at 3S-.2 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 each ISN site and replicating the data via complex batch processes from each server to every other server. The "Large Object Management" (LOM) project defines a network-based 5 approach. It was decided to use the directlineMCI VFP 504 as the network based central object store for the NAS 546 to read and write customer prompts. Figure 50 shows a network architecture to support Voice distribution traffic 10 in accordance with a preferred embodiment. Figure 52A depicts a configuration of the Data Management Zone 5105 of the present invention. The Data Management Zone (DMZ) is a firewall between Internet dial-in platforms (although not the actual Internet itself) and the ISN production networks. Its purpose is to provide dial-in access to data for ISN customers 15 while maintaining security for the ISN network as well as privacy and integrity of customer data in a production ISN network. The DMZ permits a customer to receive periodically generated data, such as DDS data down feeds from a mainframe database. Such data is 20 periodically extracted from the database and placed in a user account directory on a secure File Transfer Protocol (FTP) host for subsequent retrieval by a customer. Data access for customers is through dedicated ports at dial-in gateways, 25 which are owned, operated and maintained by the Internet provider. Dial-in user authentication is through the use one time passwords via secure identification cards, as is more fully described below. The cards are distributed and administered by Internet provider personnel. 30 The DMZ provides a screened subnet firewall that uses a packet filtering router to screen traffic from the outside unsecured network and the internal private network. Only selected packets are authorized through the router, and other packets are blocked. The use of multiple firewalling techniques ensures that no single point of failure or error in DMZ WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 configuration puts the ISN production network at risk. The DMZ 5105 is intended to conform to several security standards. First, individuals who are not authorized employees cannot be allowed access to 5 internal production networks. Therefore IP connectivity through the gateway is not allowed. Second, access and use of DMZ services is restricted to authenticated and authorized users for specific purposes. Therefore all other utilities and services normally found on a general purpose machine are disabled. Third, use of DMZ services and facilities 10 must be carefully monitored to detect problems encountered by authorized users and to detect potentially fraudulent activity. The centerpiece of the DMZ is the DMZ Bastion host 5110. Bastion host 5110 runs an FTP server daemon that implements a modified FTP protocol, 15 as will be described in further detail below. Bastion host 5110 is a highly secured machine used as the interface to the outside world. Bastion host 5110 allows only restricted access from the outside world. It typically acts as an application-level gateway to interior hosts in ISN 5115, to which it provides access via proxy services. Generally, critical information is not 20 placed on Bastion host 5110, so that, even if the host is compromised, no access is made to critical data without additional integrity compromise at the ISN 5115. Bastion host 5110 is connected to both interior and exterior users as 25 shown in Figure 52A. Bastion host 5115 may be a UNIX-based computer such as an IBM RS/6000 model 580 running the AIX operating system. An interior user is a user connected to the ISN production token ring 5115. Token ring 5115 is connected to an interior packet filter 5120 such as a 30 Cisco model 4500 modular router. Packet filter 5120 is connected to token ring LAN 5125, which in turn is connected to bastion host 5110. Token ring LAN 5125 is a dedicated token ring that is isolated from all components other than bastion host 5110 and interior packet filter 5120, thereby preventing any access to bastion host 5110 through token ring WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 LAN 5125 except as allowed by packet filter 5120. Exterior users connect through exterior packet filter 5130, such as a Cisco model 4500 modular router. Packet filter 5130 is connected to bastion 5 host 5110 through an isolated Ethernet LAN segment 5135. Ethernet LAN segment 5135 is a dedicated segment that is isolated from all components other than bastion host 5110 and exterior packet filter 5130. Because of the configuration, no user can access bastion host 5110 except through interior packet filter 5120 or exterior packet filter 5130. 10 Figure 52A depicts the DMZ 5105 in connection with dial-in environment 5205. In dial-in environment 5205, the customer PC 5210 is connected to public switched telephone network (PSTN) 5220 through the use of modem 5215. Modem bank 5230 assigns a modem to answer incoming calls from 15 PSTN 5220. Modem bank 5230 comprises a set of high-speed modems 5233 such as U.S Robotics V.34 Kbps modems. Incoming calls are authenticated by authentication server 5235. Authentication server 5235 may be implemented using a server such as the Radius/Keystone server running on a Sun Sparcstation model 20. 20 The Bastion host 5110 resides within a firewall, but is logically outside both the ISN 5115 and the gateway site 5205. Following authentication, the selected modem 5233 is connected to 25 incoming call router 5240 using Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP). PPP is a protocol that provides a standard method of transporting multi-protocol datagrams over point-to-point links. PPP is designed for simple links that transport packets between two peers. These links provide full-duplex simultaneous bi-directional operation, and are assumed to deliver packets 30 in order. PPP provides a common solution for easy connection of a wide variety of hosts, bridges and routers). PPP is fully described in RFC 1661: The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP), W. Simpson, Ed. (1994) ("RFC 1661"), the disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference.

WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Incoming call router 5240 selectively routes incoming requests to the exterior packet filter 5130 of DMZ 5105 over a communications link such as T1 line 5250, which is connected to exterior packet filter 5130 via a channel service unit (not shown). Incoming call router 5240 may be 5 implemented using, for example, a Cisco 7000 series multiprotocol router. Incoming call router 5240 is optionally connected to Internet 5280. However, router 5240 is configured to block traffic from Internet 5280 to Exterior packet filter 5130, and to block traffic from exterior packet filter 5130 to Internet 5280, thereby disallowing access to DMZ 5105 from 10 Internet 5280. Bastion host 5110 runs a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server daemon that implements a modified FTP protocol based on release 2.2 of the wu-ftpd FTP daemon, from Washington University. Except as noted herein, the FTP 15 protocol is compliant with RFC 765: File Transfer Protocol, by J. Postel (June 1980) ("RFC 765"), the disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference. RFC 765 describes a known protocol for transmission of files using a TCP/IP-based telnet connection, in which the server responds to user-initiated commands to send or receive files, or to provide status 20 information. The DMZ FTP implementation excludes the send command (which is used to send a file from a remote user to an FTP server, and any other FTP command that transfers files to the FTP host. A restricted subset of commands including the get (or recv), help, Is, and quit commands are supported. 25 The get command is used to transfer a file from host server 5110 to remote user 5210. The recv command is a synonym for get. The help command provides terse online documentation for the commands supported by host server 5110. The Is command provides a list of the files in the current 30 directory of the server, or of a directory specified by the user. The quit command terminates an FTP session. Optionally, the cd command, which specifies a named directory as the current directory, and the pwd command, to display the name of the current directory, may be implemented.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 By disallowing send and other commands that transfer files to the server, a potential intruder is prevented from transferring a "Trojan horse" type of computer program that may be used to compromise system security. As an 5 additional benefit, the unidirectional data flow prevents a user from inadvertently deleting or overwriting one of his files resident on the Bastion server. When the FTP daemon initiates a user session, it uses the UNIX chroot(2) 10 service to specify the root of the user's directory tree as the apparent root of the filesystem that the user sees. This restricts the user from visibility to UNIX system directories such as /etc and /bin, and from visibility to other users' directories, while permitting the desired visibility and access to the files within the user's own directory tree. To further assure a secured 15 environment, the FTP daemon executes at the user-id ("uid") of the user level, rather than as root, and allows access only to authorized users communicating from a set of predetermined IP addresses known to be authorized. In particular, the standard non-authenticated accounts of anonymous and guest are disabled. 20 In order to further secure Bastion server 5110, a number of daemons that are ordinarily started by the UNIX Internet server process inetd are disabled. The disables daemons are those that are either not needed for Bastion server operation, or that are known to have security exposures. 25 These daemons include rcp, riogin, riogind, rsh, rshd, tftp, and tftpd. These daemons are disabled by removing or commenting out their entries in the AIX /etc/inetd.conf file. The /etc/inetd.conf file provides a list of servers that are invoked by inetd when it receives an Internet request over a socket. By removing or commenting out the corresponding entry, the daemon is 30 prevented from executing in response to a received request. As a further assurance of security a number of daemons and utilities are disallowed from execution by changing their associated file permissions to mark them as non-executable (e.g., having a file mode of 000). This is WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 performed by a DMZ Utility Disabler (DUD) routine that executes at boot time. The DUD routine marks as non-executable the above-identified files (rcp, riogin, riogind, rsh, rshd, tftp, and tftpd), as well as a number of other daemons and utilities not ordinarily invoked by inetd. This set of daemons 5 and utilities includes sendmail, gated, routed, fingerd, rexecd, uucpd, bootpd, and talkd. In addition, DUD disables the telnet and ftp clients to prevent an intruder from executing those clients to access an interior host in the event of a break-in. The telnet and ftp clients may be temporarily marked as executable during system maintenance activities. 10 Bastion host 5110 has IP forwarding disabled. This ensures that IP traffic cannot cross the DMZ isolated subnet 5115 by using Bastion host 5110 as a router. 15 The limited level of ftp service provided by Bastion server 5110 provides a secure ftp session but makes it difficult to perform typical system maintenance. In order to perform system maintenance, maintenance personnel must connect to Bastion host 5110 from an interior host within ISN 5115 using a telnet client. The FTP client program in Bastion is then 20 changed from non-executable (e.g., 000) to executable (e.g., 400), using the AIX chmod command. Maintenance personnel may then execute the ftp client program to connect to a desired host on ISN 5115. During this procedure, control of transfers is therefore from within Bastion host 5110 via the FTP client program executing within that host, rather than from a 25 client outside of the host. At the end of a maintenance session the FTP session is terminated, and the chmod command is executed again to revert the ftp client program to a non-executable state (e.g., 000), after which the ISN-initiated telnet session may be terminated. 30 To provide logging, Bastion server 5110 implements a TCP daemon wrapper, such as the TCPwrappers suite from Wietse Venema. The TCP wrapper directs inetd to run a small wrapper program rather than the named daemon. The wrapper program logs the client host name or address and performs some additional checks, then executes the desired server WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 program on behalf of inetd. After termination of the server program, the wrapper is removed from memory. The wrapper programs have no interaction with the client user or with the client process, and do not interact with the server application. This provides two major advantages. 5 First, the wrappers are application-independent, so that the same program can protect many kinds of network services. Second, the lack of interaction means that the wrappers are invisible from outside. The wrapper programs are active only when the initial contact between 10 client and server is established. Therefore, there is no added overhead in the client-server session after the wrapper has performed its logging functions. The wrapper programs send their logging information to the syslog daemon, syslogd. The disposition of the wrapper logs is determined by the syslog configuration file, usually /etc/syslog.conf. 15 Dial-in access is provided through dial-in environment 5105. The use of authentication server 5235 provides for authentication of users to prevent access from users that are not authorized to access the DMZ. The authentication method implemented uses a one-time password scheme. All 20 internal systems and network elements are protected with one-time password generator token cards, such as the SecurID secure identification token cards produced by Security Dynamics, using an internally developed authentication client/server mechanism called Keystone. Keystone clients are installed on each element that receive authentication requests from 25 users. Those requests are then securely submitted to the Keystone Servers deployed throughout the network. Each user is assigned a credit card sized secure identification card with a liquid crystal display on the front. The display displays a pseudo-randomly 30 generated six-digit number that changes every 60 seconds. For an employee to gain access to a Keystone protected system, the user must enter their individually assigned PIN number followed by the number currently displayed on the secure identification card. Such authentication prevents unauthorized access that employ the use of programs that attempt to "sniff' 3 S-9 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 or intercept passwords, or Trojan horse programs designed to capture passwords from users. Authentication information collected by the Keystone clients is encrypted 5 with an RSA and DES encryption key, and is dispatched to one of many Keystone Servers. The Keystone Servers evaluates the information to verify the user's PIN and the access code that should be displayed on that user's card at that moment. After the system verifies that both factors for that user where entered correctly, the authorized user is granted access to the 10 system, or resource requested. In order to assure security from the point of entry of the external network, no external gateway machine has a general access account and all provide controlled access. Each gateway machine ensures that all gateway services 15 generate logging information, and each external gateway machine maintains an audit trail of connections to the gateway. All of the external gateway machines have all non-essential services disconnected. The authentication server 5235 serves as a front end to all remote access 20 dial up, and is programmed to disallow pass-through. All network authentication mechanisms provide for logging of unsuccessful access attempts. Preferably, the logs generated are reviewed daily by designated security personnel. 25 Figure 53 depicts a flow diagram showing the fax tone detection methodology. In step 5305, the fax tone detection system allocates a null linked-list; that is, a linked list having no entries. In step 5310, the fax tone detection system starts the asynchronous routine auCheckForFaxAsync 5315. The auCheckForFaxAsync routine 5315 is an 30 asynchronous program that executes concurrently with the main line program, and rather than synchronously returning control to the calling program. The auCheckForFax routine evaluates the tone of the incoming call to see whether the call is originated by a facsimile machine, and generates an auCheckForFax response 5318 if and when a facsimile tone is 36o WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 detected. After starting auCheckForFaxAsync routine 5315, control proceeds to step 5320. In step 5320, the fax tone detection system adds an entry to the 5 linked list allocated in step 5305. The added entry represents a unique identifier associated with the message being processed. In step 5330, the fax tone detection system starts the asynchronous routine auPlayFileAsync 5335. The auPlayFileAsync routine 5335 is an asynchronous program that executes concurrently with the main line program, rather than 10 synchronously returning control to the calling program. The auPlayFileAsync routine 5335 accesses previously stored digitally recorded sound files and plays them to the originating caller. The sound files played may be used, for example, to instruct the originating caller on sequences of key presses that may be used to perform particular functions, e.g., to 15 record a message, to retrieve a list of previously recorded messages, etc. In step 5340, the fax tone detection system starts the asynchronous routine auInputDataAsync 5340. The auInputDataAsync routine 5340 is an asynchronous program that executes concurrently with the main line 20 program, rather than synchronously returning control to the calling program. The auInputDataAsync routine 5340 monitors the originating call to detect key presses by the user, in order to invoke the routines to execute the tasks associated with a particular key press sequence. 25 As has been noted, the auCheckForFaxAsync routine 5315 executes concurrently with the main program, and generates a auCheckForFax response 5318 if and when a facsimile tone is detected. In step 5350, the fax tone detection system checks to see whether an auCheckForFax response 5318 response has been received. If a response has been 30 received, this indicates that the originating call is a facsimile transmission, and the fax tone detection system extends the incoming call to Voice/Fax processor (VFP) 5380. If no auCheckForFax response 5318 is received within a predetermined time (e.g., 7 seconds), the fax tone detection system concludes that the originator of the call is not a facsimile device, and .34 / WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 interruption-handling process. In such an implementation, an execution time routine may be set up to gain control when an auCheckForFax response 5318 event occurs. This may be implemented using, for example, the C++ catch construct to define an exception handler to handle an 5 auCheckForFax response 5318 event. Following the decision in step 5350, the fax tone detection system in step 5360 waits for the next incoming call. 10 Figures 54A through 54E depict a flow diagram showing the VFP Completion process for fax and voice mailboxes. As depicted in Figure 54A, the VFP completion routine in step 5401 searches the database for a record corresponding to the addressed mailbox. In step 5405, the VFP completion routine checks to see if a mailbox record was successfully retrieved. If no 15 mailbox record was found, in step 5407, the VFP completion routine generates a VCS alarm indicating that the desired mailbox record was not found. Because the mailbox record was not found, the VFP completion processor will be unable to test the attributes of the mailbox address. However, regardless of whether the mailbox record is found, control 20 proceeds to step 5409. In step 5409, the VFP completion processor tests the contents of the mailbox record, if any, to determine whether the addressed mailbox is full. If the addressed mailbox is full, in step 5410, the VFP completion routine plays an error message indicating that the addressed mailbox is at capacity and is unable to store additional 25 messages, and exits in step 5412. In step 5414, the VFP completion processor obtains the mode of the VFP call. The mode is derived from the dial string provided by the originating caller, and is stored in the enCurrentNum field of the pstCalllState 30 structure. The dial string has the following format: -3 C2.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 { char number[10]; /* 10-digit 8xx number dialed by user */ char asterisk; /* constant '* 5 char mode; /* 1-byte mode */ char octothorp; /* constant '#' */ } The mode has one of the following values: 10 1 guest voicemail 2 guest fax with voice annotation 3 guest fax without voice annotation 4 user voice/fax retrieval 5 user list maintenance 15 6 user recording of mailbox In step 5416, the VFP completion processor retrieves the route number associated with the addressed mailbox from the database. In step 5418, the route number is passed to the SIS layer. 20 As depicted in Figure 54B, execution continues with step 5420. In step 5420, the VFP completion processor initialized an answer supervision flag that is used to determine whether the VFP is accepting transfer of the call. In step 5422, the VFP completion processor calls the SisCollectCall routine 25 to process the call. If the call is unsuccessful, Step 5424 causes the SisCollectCall invocation of step 5422 to be repeated up to a predetermined number of retries. In step 5426, the VFP completion processor obtains a predetermined timer 30 expiration value from the otto.cfg file. The timer expiration value is set to the amount of time in which, if an answer is not received, the VFP completion processor may conclude that the VFP is not currently reachable. In step 5428, the VFP completion processor sets the timer according to the value from step 5426. In step 5430, the VFP completion processor check WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 to see whether answer supervision occurred prior to the expiration of the timer set in step 5424. If so, control proceeds to step 5430 to transfer control to the VFP. 5 Figure 54C depicts the operation of transferring control to the VFP in response to an affirmative decision in step 5430. In step 5440, any pending timers set in step 5428 are canceled. In step 5442, the VFP completion processor calls routine sisOnHoldTermo to put the VFP on hold. In step 5444, the VFP completion processor calls routine sisOffHoldOrig() 10 to take the originating call off hold. In step 5446, the VFP completion processor plays a previously stored digitally recorded sound file, instructing the originating caller to wait during the process of transferring the call to the VFP. In step 5448, the VFP 15 completion processor calls routine sisOnHoldOrig( to put the originating call back on hold. In step 5450, the VFP completion processor calls routine sisOffHoldTerm to take the VFP off hold. In step 5452, the VFP completion processor calls the auPlayDigits routine, passing to it as a parameter, a string comprising the addressed mailbox number, an asterisk 20 ('*') to indicate a field separation, the mode, and an octothorp ('#') to indicate the end of the command string. In step 5454, the VFP completion processor obtains a timeout value AckTimeout and an interdigit delay value from the otto.cfg file. The 25 AckTimeout value is used to determine the amount of time before the VFP completion processor determines that no response is forthcoming from the VFP. The interdigit delay value is used to time the delays between audio signals sent that represent telephone keypad presses. In step 5456, the VFP completion processor calls the InputData routine to obtain a response 30 from the VFP. Following steps 5440 through 5456, or following a negative decision in step 5430, control proceeds to step 5460, as shown in Figure 54D. In step 5460, the VFP completion processor requests a response from the VFP. In WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 step 5462, the VFP completion processor waits for the VFP response or for a timer set in step 5428 to expire. In step 5464, if the VFP has responded, the VFP completion processor proceeds to step 5446. 5 In step 5446, the VFP completion system checks the VFP response and writes the appropriate BDR term status record. The response indicates the acknowledgment from the TI platform. A response of '00' indicates success, and the VFP completion processor writes a BDRSTATNORMAL indicator. A response of '01' indicates the VFP did not receive the key to the addressed 10 mailbox, and the VFP completion processor writes a BDRSTAT_DLINETINODIGITS indicator. A response of '02' indicates that the VFP timed out while collecting the key, and the VFP completion processor writes a BDRSTAT_DLINETIFORMAT indicator. A response of '03' indicates that the addressed mailbox was not found, and the VFP 15 completion processor writes a BDRSTAT_DLINETIMAILBOX indicator. If no response was received, a BDRSTATDLINETINORSP indicator is written. Following the BDR indicator, control proceeds to step 5480 as shown in Figure 54E. 20 If no answer was received from the VFP, the timer set in step 5428 has expired, and control passes to step 5468. In step 5468 the VFP completion processor gives a VCS alarm indicating that the VFP did not answer. In step 5470, the VFP completion processor calls routine sisReleaseTermo to disconnect the call to the VFP. In step 5472, the VCS completion processor 25 calls routine sisOffHoldOrig to take the originating call off of hold. In step 5474, the VFP completion processor calls tiCancelTimers to cancel all outstanding timers that have not yet been canceled. In step 5476, the VFP completion processor plays a previously stored digitally recorded sound file, reporting to the originating caller that the VFP completion processor was 30 unable to connect to the VFP. After either step 5476 or step 5466 (depending on the decision in step 5464), control proceeds to step 5480, as shown in Figure 54E. In step 5480, the VFP completion processor checks to see if the originating caller is s1O/S- WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 a subscribed user. If so, control passes to step 5482. In step 5484, the VFP completion processor checks to see if the originating caller is a guest user. If so, control passes to step 5482. Step 5482 then returns the originating caller to the menu from which the caller initiated the VFP 5 request. If the originating caller is neither a subscribed user nor a guest, control passes to step 5486. In step 5486, the originating caller is assumed to be a fax call, and the call is disconnected. Figures 55A and 55B depict the operation of the Pager Termination 10 processor. In step 5510, the pager termination processor calls the GetCallback routine to obtain the telephone number that will be used to identify the caller, and that will be displayed on the paging device to identify the number to be called back by the pager subscriber. The GetCallback routine is describe in detail below with respect to Figure 56. 15 In step 5515, the pager termination processor checks to see if a telephone number was returned by the GetCallback. If no number was returned, in step 5520 the pager termination processor indicates that the call should be ended, and in step 5522 provides the caller with a menu to select another 20 service. If a number was returned, the addressed pagers PIN is obtained from the database in step 5530. The pager termination processor constructs a pager dial string comprising the pager PIN retrieved in step 5530 and the callback 25 number obtained in step 5510. In step 5532, the pager termination processor obtains the pager's type and routing information is obtained from the database. In step 5534, the pager termination processor checks the configuration file to obtain a pager parse string that defines the parameters for pagers of the type addressed. In step 5536, the pager termination 30 processor checks to see whether the requested pager parse string was successfully retrieved. If not, in step 5538 the pager termination processor indicates that the page could not be performed by setting the BDR term status to BDRSTATPAGERNOTFOUND, and in step 5540 provides the caller with a menu to select another service.

AI

WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 If the pager parse string was successfully retrieved, the pager termination processor proceeds to step 5550 as shown in Figure 55B. In step 5550, the pager termination processor calls the pager subsystem, passing to it the 5 route number, the dial string, and the pager parse string. In step 5552, the pager termination processor checks the return code from the pager subsystem. If the page was successfully completed, the pager termination processor, in step 5554 plays a digitally prerecorded message to the caller, informing the caller that the page has been successfully sent. In step 5556 10 the enEndCallStatus field is updated to mark the pager call complete. In step 5558, the transfer status is marked as blank, indicating that there is no need to transfer the caller, and in step 5560, the pager termination processor presents the user with a menu permitting it to select another service or to end the call. 15 If the page was not successfully completed, the pager termination processor checks in step 5570 whether the caller had disconnected during the page attempt. If the caller had disconnected, the pager termination processor in step 5575 checks to see whether the page had been sent prior to the 20 disconnection. If the page was sent despite the disconnect, the pager termination processor in step 5580 indicates a normal ending to the page request in step 5580 and sets the status as complete in step 5582. In step 5584, the pager termination processor presents the user with a menu permitting it to select another service or to end the call. 25 If the page was not sent the pager termination processor indicates an abnormal ending to the page request in step 5586 and indicates a caller disconnect in step 5588. In step 5590, the pager termination processor presents the user with a menu permitting it to select another service or to 30 end the call. If the caller has not disconnected, the pager termination processor sets a code indicating the reason for the failure in step 5572. The failure types include BDRSTATPAGERROUTENUM (for an invalid route number); WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 BDRSTATPAGERCRITERROR (for a failure in the originating call); BDRSTATPAGERTIMEOUT (for the failure of the pager to acknowledge the call within a predetermined timeout time interval); BDRSTATPAGERDIGITSHOLD (for the failure of the pager subsystem to 5 play the digits corresponding to the pager address); BDRSTSTPAGERDISC (for a premature disconnect of the paging subsystem); and BDRSTATPAGERNOTFOUND (for an invalid parse string). 10 In step 5592 the pager termination processor posts the error code selected in step 5572 to the BDR. In step 5582, the pager termination processor plays a prerecorded digital sound file indicating that the page could not be sent. In step 5595 the enEndCallStatus field is updated to mark the pager call complete. In step 5597, the transfer status is marked as blank, 15 indicating that there is no need to transfer the caller, and in step 5599, the pager termination processor presents the user with a menu permitting it to select another service or to end the call. Figure 56 depicts the GetCallback routine called from the pager 20 termination processor in step 5510. In step 5610 the GetCallback routine obtains constants that define the applicable start and interdigit delays from the otto.cfg file. In step 5615, the GetCallback routine plays a prerecorded digital sound file prompting the caller to provide a callback telephone number, by pressing the applicable keypad keys, followed by an octothorp 25 (#'). In step 5620, the GetCallback routine reads the number entered by the caller. In step 5625 the data received is placed in the BDR. In step 5630, the GetCallback routine checks to see if the number entered was terminated by a '#' character. If so, the GetCallback routine returns success in step 5635. If not, the GetCallback routine, in step 5640, sees if 30 the retry count has been exceeded. If the retry count has not been exceeded, execution repeats from step 5615. If the retry count has been exceeded, in step 5650, the GetCallback routine plays a prerecorded digital message indicating that the number was not successfully received, and in step 5660 returns an error condition to the calling program.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 The following description sets forth a user interface for user-management of directlineMCI profile items currently accessed via ARU (DTMF) and Customer Service. These items include: 5 - (De)Activate Account - Find-Me Routing - Schedules - 3-Number Sequence - First, Second, Third Numbers and Ring-No-Answer Timeouts 10 - Pager On/Off - Override Routing - Final (Alternate) Routing - Caller Screening - Pager Notification of Voicemail Messages 15 - Pager Notification of Faxmail Messages - Speed Dial Numbers The following table lists the fields that the directlineMCI customer is able to update via DTMF. This list does not include all fields in the service, only 20 those that are used by the directlineMCI application. Field Name 800# + PIN Primary Termination 25 Primary Time-out Value Secondary Termination SecondaryTime-out Value Tertiary Termination TertiaryTime-out Value 30 Override Routing Override Time-out Value Alternate Routing Alternate Time-out Value PINFlags, specifically: Bit 1OSchedule 1 Bit 11 Schedule 2 Bit 15Page 367 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 on Vmail Bit 16Page on Fax StateFlags, specifically: Bit 3 Account Available Bit 13 Pager On/Off Bit 14 Find-Me On/Off Bit 15 Voicemail On/Off Bit 16 Fax On/Off 5 Call Screening State Default Fax Number Speed Dial #1 Speed Dial #2 Speed Dial #3 10 Speed Dial #4 Speed Dial #5 Speed Dial #6 Speed Dial #7 Speed Dial #8 15 Speed Dial #9 A user will access his directlineMCI profile via http:/www.mci.services.com/directline. Upon entry of a valid Account ID and Passcode, the user's Routing Screen will be presented. The user may 20 click on tabs to move from one screen to another. If a user returns to a screens that's been updated during that session, the screen will be displayed as it was when he last left it, i.e. any updates he's submitted will be reflected in the data. If, however, a user logs off, or times out, when next he logs into his profile management screens, the data displayed will be 25 from a new query into the 800PIN_1Call database. Updates made within the last 15 minutes may not have reached the NIDS databases serving the Web Server, so the data may not reflect any recent updates. The following items will appear in the index frame, and will act as links to 30 their associated Web screens. When a user 'clicks' on one of these items, the associated screen will be displayed in the text frame. Call Routing Guest Menu J [- WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Override Routing Speed Dial Numbers Voicemail Faxmail 5 Call Screening In addition, a LOGOFF button will appear at the bottom of the index frame. Clicking on this button will result in immediate token expiration, and the user will be returned to the login screen. 10 F. Login Screen Figure 57 shows a user login screen 700 for access to online profile management. directlineMCI Number 702 The account ID will be the directlineMCI customer's 10-digit access 15 number, of the format 8xx xxx xxxx. This number, concatenated with a PIN of '0000', will be the key into the 1Call database, which contains the customer profile data. The user will not be allowed a successful login if the Program flag (PIN flag 20 4) is set to 'N'. If a login attempt is made on such an account, the Login Error screen will be displayed. Passcode 704 The passcode will be the same as that used to access user options via the 25 ARU interface. It is a six-character numeric string. The user's entry will not be echoed in this field; an asterisk (*) will be displayed for each character entered. Status message 30 directlineMCI Number: "Enter your directlineMCI number." Passcode: "Enter your passcode." G. Call Routing Screen Figure 58 shows a call routing screen 710, used to set or change a user's 341 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 call routing instructions. "Accept Calls" Section 712 The user can specify whether calls are accepted at 712 on her account by 5 selecting the appropriate radio button 714 or 716. These buttons correspond directly to the Account Available flag (State flags, bit 3) in the customer's directline record: Radio Buttons Account Available flag 10 Accept CallsY Do Not Accept Calls N "Choose from the selections below" Section 718 The user specifies whether the guest caller should receive a Guest Menu, or 15 Override Routing treatment. This selection will indicate whether the data in the Guest Menu or Override Routing screen is applicable. The customer's Override Termination will be populated as follows, according to the user's selection: 20 'Offer Guests...' Radio ButtonsOverride Termination Guest Menu 00 No Menu - Override Routing 08* (default voicemail) 25 "When I cannot be reached..." Section 720 A user specifies call treatment for those calls for which he was unable to be reached . The Alternate Termination in the customer record is updated as follows: 30 Radio Buttons Alternate Termination Voicemail 08 Pager 07 Voicemail or Pager - Caller Choice 09 Final Message 05 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Status messages Depending on the choices made by the user, the following status messages are provided to the user for each selection identified below: 5 Do Not Accept Calls: "No calls will be accepted on your directlineMCI Number." Accept Calls: "Calls will be accepted on your directlineMCI Number." Guest Menu: "Lets callers select how they want to contact you." No Menu - Override Routing: "Routes callers to a specific destination 10 selected by you." Voicemail: "Callers will be asked to leave a voicemail." Pager: "Callers will be prompted to send you a page." Voicemail or Pager: "Callers can choose to leave you a voicemail or send you a page." 15 Closing Message: "Callers will hear a message asking them to try their call later." H. Guest Menu Configuration Screen When Override Routing has been disabled, i.e., when Guest Menu has been selected, a Guest Menu will be presented to the guest caller. The user has 20 the ability to configure his Guest Menu using a guest menu configuration screen 730 (Figure 59) to the following extent: "Find-Me Routing" Checkbox 732 In this phase, Find-Me Routing cannot be de-selected. The check box 25 will be checked based on the Find-Me Flag (PIN Flags, bit 9, and the option greyed out. If the subscriber enters a 'leading 1' for a domestic number, it will be stripped from the number, and only the NPA-Nxx-xxxx will be stored in the database. 30 ? When programming his 3--Number Sequence numbers, the subscriber may select the number of rings, from 1 to 6, the system should allow before a Ring-no-Answer decision is made. The number of rings will be stored in the database in terms of seconds; the formula for calculating seconds will be: 6 *RingLimit. The default, if no value is entered, is 3 3)2) WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 rings, or 18 seconds. When reading from the database, from 0 to 8 seconds will translate to 1 ring. A number of seconds greater than 8 will be divided by six, with the result rounded to determine the number of rings, up to a maximum of 16. 5 ? Updates to the customer's record will be as follows: Radio Buttons Schedule 1/2 flags Primary Termination and Timeout Secondary Termination and TimeoutTertiary Termination and Timeout 10 Schedules Both Y no change no change no change 3-Number Sequence Both N 1st entered number** and timeout 2nd entered number** and timeout 3rd entered number** and timeout **Domestic/international termination will be validated as described 15 in Appendix A. "Leave a Voicemail" Checkbox 734 In this phase,Voicemail cannot be de-selected. The check box will be checked based on the Vmail Flag (PIN Flags, bit 3), and the option grayed 20 out. "Send a Fax" Checkbox 736 In this phase, Fax cannot be de-selected. The check box will be checked based on the Fax Termination Flag (PIN Flags, bit 13), and the 25 option greyed out. "Send a Page" Checkbox 738 The user can specify whether callers will be offered the paging option by toggling the box labeled Send me a Page. This box corresponds directly to 30 the Pager On/Off flag (State flags, bit 13) in the customer's directline record: Page Checkbox Pager On/Off flag Checked Y WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Unchecked N Status messages Find Me Routing: "Allows callers to try to 'find you' wherever you are." 5 Schedule Routing: "Routes callers based on your schedule." Three Number : "Allows callers to locate you through the three numbers." st nd rd 1 #, 2 #, 3 #: "Enter telephone number." st nd rd 1 , 2 , 3 Ring Limit: "Enter the number of times to ring at this number." 10 Leave a Voicemail: "Allows callers to leave you a voicemail." Send a Fax: "Allows callers to send you a fax." Send a Page: "Allows callers to send you a page." L Override Routing Screen Figure 60 shows an override routing screen 740, which allows a user to 15 route all calls to a selected destination. When a user selects to route all his calls to a specific destination, bypassing presentation of the guest menu 730 of Figure 59, the Override Termination in the customer record will be updated as follows: 20 Override Routing Radio Buttons Override Termination Guest Menu selected 00 Voicemail 08 Pager 07 Find-Me 06 25 Telephone number Entered number** When this option is initially selected from the Profiles screen, there will be no Override Routing setting in the user's customer record. The default 30 setting, when this screen is presented, will be Voicemail, if available, Find Me if Voicemail is not available. Status messages WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Find Me Routing: "Allows callers to only try to 'find you' wherever you are." Schedule Routing: "Routes callers based on your schedule." Three Number : "Allows callers to locate you through the three numbers." st nd rd 1 #, 2 #, 3 #: "Enter telephone number." st nd rd 5 1 , 2 , 3 Ring Limit: "Enter the number of times to ring at this number" Voicemail: "Callers will be prompted to leave you a voicemail only." Send a Page: "Callers will be prompted to send you a page only." Temporary Override Number: "caller will only be routed to this number you 10 select." Telephone Number Ring Limit: "Enter the number of times to ring at this number" J. Speed Dial Screen 15 Figure 61 shows a speed dial numbers screen 744. A user may update his nine (9) Speed Dial numbers via the Web interface. Speed Dial numbers labeled 1 through 9 on the Web page correspond with the same Speed Dial numbers in the customer's record. Domestic and international termination 20 will be validated as described below. Status messages 1 - 9: "Enter speed dial number <1 - 9>." 25 Figure 62 shows a voicemail screen 750. "Receive Voicemail Messages" Checkbox 752 "Page me when I receive" Checkbox "Page me when I receive a new voicemail message" Checkbox 754. This box corresponds directly to the Page on Vmail flag (PIN flags, bit 15) in the 30 customer's directline record: Pager Notification Checkbox Page on Vmail flag Unchecked N WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Checked Y Status messages Receive voicemail : "Callers will be able to leave you a voicemail message." 5 Page me each time : "You will be paged when you receive a voicemail message." Figure 63 shows a faxmail screen 760. "My primary Fax number is" Field 762 10 "Receive Faxmail Messages" Checkbox 764 Profile management of this item is shown as it appears on the Faxmail Screen. "Page me when I receive" Checkbox 766 15 This item appears as a "Page me when I receive a new voicemail message" Checkbox 766. This box corresponds directly to the Page on Fax flag (PIN flags, bit 16) in the customer's directline record: Pager Notification Checkbox Page on Fax flag 20 Unchecked N Checked Y Status messages Receive fax : "Callers will be able to send you a fax." 25 Page me each time : "You will be paged when you receive a fax." Figure 64 shows a call screening screen 770. A user may elect to screen his calls by caller name, originating number or both name and number. The Call Screening State in the customer record will be updated as follows: 30 Call Screening Checkbox Radio Buttons Call Screening State Unchecked n/a 00 Checked Number Only 02 1 7-7 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Name Only 01 Name and Number 03 Status messages 5 Allow me to screen : "Activating this feature allows you to screen your calls." Name only: "Caller's name will be presented to answering party." Telephone number: "Caller's telephone number will be presented to answering party" 10 Name and Telephone: "Caller's name and telephone number will be presented to answering party." Figures 65-67 show supplemental screens 780, 782 and 784 used with user profile management. 15 Login Error screen 780 This error screen is presented when a login attempt has failed due to an invalid account number, passcode, or a hostile IP address. This is also the screen that is displayed when a user's token has expired and he's required to login again. 20 Update Successful screen 782 This screen is presented when an update has been successfully completed. The 'blank' will be filled in with: 'Call Routing options have ', 'Guest Menu options have ', 'Override Routing has ', 'Speed Dial Numbers have', 'Voicemail options have', 'Faxmail options have', and 'Call Screening 25 option has'. Update Failed screen 784 This screen will be presented when a user has attempted to enter one or more invalid terminating number(s), or to update his account with a blank First number. The account will not be updated until corrections are made 30 and all numbers are successfully validated. In the various screens of the user interface, profile options are 'grayed out', indicating that the option is not available from the screen, based on the following flag settings: WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Screen Option Dependencies Login Screen Login Program (Follow-Me) Flag Profile Screen Accept CallsAvail Programming Flag 5 Final Routing to Voicemail Find-Me Flag AND Voicemail Flag Final Routing to Pager Find-Me Flag AND Pager Termination Flag Final Routing to Voicemail or Pager Find-Me Flag AND Voicemail 10 Flag AND Pager Termination Flag Guest Menu Schedules Find-Me AND Schedule 1 Trans populated AND Schedule 2 Trans populated Three-Number Sequence Find-Me AND Domestic Termination Flag OR International Termination 15 Number (1st, 2nd, 3rd) Find-Me AND Domestic Termination Flag OR International Termination Flag Send a pagePager Termination Flag Override Routing Schedules Find-Me Flag AND Schedule 1 Trans populated AND Schedule 2 Trans populated 20 Three-Number Sequence Find-Me AND Domestic Termination Flag OR International Termination Number (1st, 2nd, 3rd) Find-Me Flag AND Domestic Termination Flag OR International Termination Flag Pager Pager Termination Flag 25 Telephone Number Find-Me Flag AND Domestic Termination Flag OR International Termination Speed Dial Numbers 1 - 9 Speed Dial Programming AND Domestic Completion Flag OR International Completion Flag Voicemail screen Page me when I receive... Voicemail Flag AND 30 Pager Termination Flag Faxmail screen Page me when I receive... Fax Termination Flag AND Pager Termination Flag Call Screening Allow me to screen Call Screening Programming WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 For some of the profile options described above, validation checks are made as follows: 5 ? International numbers, with the exception of North American Dialing Plan (NADP) numbers, must be prefaced with '01 1', or will not be accepted for programming. 976 blocking will be implemented as follows: The International Blocking database will be queried, using Category 10 000, Type 002, , and the programmed NPA, looking for a pattern match, to ensure that the programmed number is not a blocked Information/Adult Services number. If a match is found, programming to that number will not be allowed. Country Set blocking will be implemented as follows: 15 The Country Set of the directlineMCI Property record will be validated against the Country Code of the programmed number. If the terminating country is blocked the directlineMCI Country Set, programming to that number will not be allowed. Programming Routing 20 If the programmed number is: Perform the following validation checks Domestic Domestic Flag 976 Blocking NADP Domestic Flag 976 Blocking Cset Blocking using Term PCC, Auth Cset 25 International International Flag Cset Blocking using Term CC, Auth Cset Programming Speed Dial Numbers If the programmed number is: Perform the following validation checks 30 Domestic Domestic Comp Flag 976 Blocking NADP Domestic Comp Flag 976 Blocking Cset Blocking using Term PCC, Auth Cset International International Comp Flag Cset Blocking using Term '30 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 CC, Auth Cset Figure 68 is a flow chart showing how the validation for user entered speed dial numbers is carried out. The same flow chart is applicable to validation 5 of entries by a guest on the guest screen when a call is made to a user by a non-subscriber. The integrated switching system and packet transmission network of this invention allows the provision of an improved feature set for users. 10 directlineMCI is a single-number access personal number, with features including Find-Me functionality, voicemail, paging, and fax store and forward services. A subscriber, or user, is asked for profile information, which is entered into his customer record in the directlineMCI database on the ISN mainframe. The product's feature set includes: 15 Personal Greeting: The user has the option of recording a personal greeting to be played to his guest callers. If a user records a personal greeting, it replaces the 'Welcome to directlineMCI' default greeting. Guest Menu: The Guest Menu is defined by which features the user has subscribed to. A guest caller to a 'fully loaded' account will be presented 20 options to Speak to or Page the user, Send a Fax, or Leave a Voicemail Message. 3- Number Sequence for Find-Me functionality: The system attempts to reach the user at three numbers, trying the First (Primary) number, then 25 the Second(ary), then the Third (Tertiary) number. If no answer is received at any of these numbers, the call is treated as prescribed in Alternate Routing. 2-Level Schedule for Find-Me functionality: The system attempts to reach the user at two numbers, using current date/day/time information to 30 query his schedules. Attempts are made to a number from the user's Schedule 1, then Schedule 2; if no answer is received, Alternate Routing defines the treatment. Alternate Routing allows the user to prescribe the treatment of a guest caller who chose to reach him, but no answer was received at any of the 2/ WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 attempted numbers. Options for Alternate Routing include Voicemail, Pager, a Guest's choice of Voicemail or Pager, or a Closing Message, asking the caller to try his call again at a later time. 5 Override Routing allows the user to disable the presentation of the Guest Menu, and prescribe a single treatment for all guest callers. Options include completion to a telephone number, the user's defined Find-Me sequence, Voicemail, or Pager. 10 Default Routing is the treatment of a guest caller who, when presented the Guest Menu, does not respond after three prompts. Default Routing options include a transfer to the Operator, completion to a telephone number, the Find-Me sequence, or Voicemail. 15 Call Screening allows the user to define whether or not he wishes callers to be announced before being connected. Options include no call screening, or having the caller identified by name, originating telephone number, or both name and number. The 'Place a Call' option in the user's menu allows him to make a call, and 20 have it charged to his directlineMCI account. Voice/Faxmail: Both voice and fax messages can be stored for later retrieval by the user. The user may opt to be notified when new voice and/or fax messages are deposited into his mailbox. 25 The Voice / Fax Platform (VFP) has been integrated into the Intelligent Services Network (ISN), to allow the ISN applications to query its databases, and billing records to be cut directly from the VFP. Among the changes to the original directlineMCI product are the following items: 30 Find-Me Routing Find-Me Routing now has two options, selectable by the subscriber: the 3 number sequence currently implemented, or the 2-level schedule option. The schedule option is implemented such that the subscriber's Schedule 1 translation will be treated as the primary termination, and his Schedule 2 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 translation will be treated as the secondary termination. Find-Me Routing is described in more detail in the Call Flow diagrams and ARU Impacts sections. Default Routing 5 Default Routing is the prescribed action the application takes when a caller does not respond to Guest Menu prompts. Options for Default Routing include a telephone number, voicemail, Find-Me routing, and Operator transfer. Voice/Fax Message Information 10 When a subscriber accesses the user menu, the application provides mailbox status information, including the number of new voice or fax messages, and if his mailbox is full. The application launches a query to the VFP database to obtain this information. Speed Dial 15 In addition to the ability to complete a call to a telephone number entered real-time, the subscriber is now able to complete to programmed Speed Dial numbers. These 9 Speed Dial numbers will be user-programmable via DTMF. 20 K. ARU CALL FLOWS Figs. 69A through 69AI depict automated response unit (ARU) call flow charts showing software implementation of the directline MCI product described above, and are useful for a further understanding of the invention. 25 Fig. 69A depicts the starting point for processing of an ARU call. As a call initiates, it is assumed to be a guest call. If the account to which the call is directed is not currently online, the ARU in Step 69010 plays a message indicating that calls cannot be accepted for the account, and in Step 69012 30 disconnects the call. If the ARU detects a fax tone on the incoming call, the ARU in Step 69014 performs the ARU Xfer to Voice/Fax Guest Fax without Annotation routine, which is described below with respect to Fig. 69L. If no fax tone is detected, the ARU in Step 69018 performs the ARU Play Greeting routine, which is described below with respect to Fig. 69L. The WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 ARU then checks to see whether the subscriber has indicated an override for incoming calls. If so, in Step 69020 the ARU performs the ARU Find Me routine, specifying a parameter of "Override." The ARU Find Me routine is described below with respect to Figs. 69E and 69F. If override has not 5 been specified, the ARU in Step 69022 performs the ARU Guest Menu routine, which is described below with respect to Fig. 69D. Fig. 69B depicts the ARU Play Greeting routine. If a custom greeting has been recorded, the ARU plays the custom greeting in Step 69030. 10 Otherwise, the ARU plays a generic prerecorded greeting in Step 69032. Fig. 69C depicts the ARU Play Temp Greeting routine. If a temporary greeting has been recorded, the ARU plays the temporary greeting in Step 69034. If a custom greeting has been recorded, the ARU plays the custom 15 greeting in Step 69036. Otherwise, the ARU plays a generic prerecorded greeting in Step 69038. Fig. 69D depicts the ARU Guest Menu routine. In Step 69040, the ARU presents an audible menu to the caller. In the example shown, item '1' 20 corresponds to a request to speak to a subscriber; item '2' corresponds to a request to leave a voice mail message for a subscriber; item '3' corresponds to a request to send a fax to a subscriber; and item 4 corresponds to a request to page a subscriber. In addition, a subscriber may enter his or her passcode to gain access to the ARU as a subscriber. 25 If the caller requests to speak to a subscriber, the ARU checks the schedule flags associated with the caller's profile. If the subscriber's profile indicates routing by schedule, the ARU in Step 69042 performs the Find Me routine of Fig. 69E and 69F, using "Sched1" as the parameter. If the subscriber's 30 profile does not indicate routing by schedule, the ARU in Step 69044 performs the ARU Find Me routine using "First" as the parameter. The ARU Find Me routine is discussed in further detail below with respect to Figs. 69E and 69F.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 If the caller requests to leave a voice mail message, the ARU checks to see whether the subscriber's mailbox is full. If the mailbox is full, a recorded message is played and the caller is returned to the guest menu. If the mailbox is not full, a recorded message is played advising the caller to hold 5 while he is transferred to the ARU Voicemail routine in Step 69046. If the caller requests to send a fax, the ARU checks to see whether the subscriber's mailbox is full. If the mailbox is full, a recorded message is played and the caller is returned to the guest menu. If the mailbox is not 10 full, a recorded message is played advising the caller to hold while he is transferred to the voice/fax routine in Step 69048. If the caller requests to page the subscriber, the ARU in Step 69050 performs the ARU Send Page routine, which is described with respect to 15 Fig. 69M, below. If the caller enters a valid passcode, the ARU in Step 69052 performs the ARU User Call routine, which is described with respect to Fig. 69P, below. 20 Figs. 69E and 69F depict the operation of the ARU Find Me routine. As shown in Step 69060, the ARU Find me routine takes a single parameter TermSlot, which is set by the caller and used by the ARU performing the ARU Find Me routine to choose among alternative courses of action. If TermSlot is set to "Find Me", this indicates that the ARU is to use the 25 default method of determining the subscriber's current number. This value may be set, for example, for override or default processing. If the subscriber's profile includes schedule flags, the ARU performs the ARU Find Me routine using the "Sched1" parameter as shown in Step 69062; if not, the ARU performs the ARU Find Me routine using the first telephone 30 number in the list of numbers for the subscriber, as shown in Step 69061. If TermSlot is set to "Voicemail," the ARU plays a message to the caller that the subscriber has requested that the caller leave a voice mail message. If the subscriber's mailbox is not full, the ARU in Step 69064 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 performs the ARU Xfer to Voice/Fax Guest Voice routine, depicted in Fig. 69K. That routine returns if unsuccessful, in which case a message is played indicating that the caller should try the call later, and the caller is disconnected. Likewise, if the subscriber's mailbox is full, the ARU plays 5 messages indicating that the mailbox is full and that the caller should try the call later, and the caller is disconnected. If TermSlot is set to "Pager," the ARU plays a message to the caller that the subscriber has requested that the caller leave a request to page the 10 subscriber. The ARU then performs the ARU Send Page routine, which is described with respect to Fig. 69M, below. That routine returns if unsuccessful, in which case a message is played indicating that the caller should try the call later, and the caller is disconnected. 15 If TermSlot is set to any POTS ("Plain Old Telephone Service") value (such as Sched1, Sched2, First, Second, or Third), the POTS value indicates that the subscriber has specified that incoming calls be sent using the standard telephone system, and the ARU has been directed to use the particular scheduled or selected telephone number. In Step 69070, the ARU performs 20 the ARU Record Name routine to acquire a digital recording of the caller's identification. The ARU Record Name routine is described in detail with respect to Fig. 69H, below. The ARU plays an appropriate message for the caller (e.g., "Please hold while I try to reach your party" on the first attempt, and "I am still trying to reach your party; please continue to hold" for 25 subsequent attempts). In Step 69071, the ARU places the caller on hold and launches the call to the selected telephone number. If the call is answered by an individual, the ARU in Step 69072 performs the ARU Connect Call routine, discussed below with respect to Fig. 691. If the line is busy, the ARU in Step 69074 performs the ARU Alternate Routing routine 30 of Fig. 69N. If the ARU detects an answering machine, it checks to see whether the subscriber has requested that the ARU roll over to the next alternative number upon encountering an answering machine. If not, the ARU connects the call. Otherwise, the ARU selects the next number in rotation to call and re-performs the ARU Find Me routine using the newly- WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 selected number. If there is neither a live answer, a line busy signal, nor an answering machine answer, then if TermSlot is set to "Operator," the ARU performs 5 the ARU Guest Xfer to MOTC routine, described below with respect to Fig. 69M, to transfer the call to the operator. Otherwise, the ARU selects the next telephone number, if any, and re-invokes the ARU Find Me routine with the new number. If no more numbers to check remain, the ARU in Step 69084 performs the ARU Alternate Routing routine of Fig. 69N. 10 Fig. 69G depicts the ARU Record Name routine. This routine is used to record the name of the caller if the subscriber has specified call screening, either by name or by name and ANI. If the subscriber has specified call screening, the ARU checks to see whether the caller's name has been 15 recorded on a previous pass. If not, the caller is prompted to supply a name, and the audible response is recorded in Step 69090. If the subscriber has not specified either form of call screening, the ARU Record Name routine returns without recording the caller's name. 20 Fig. 69H depicts the ARU Guest Xfer to MOTC routine. This routine plays a prerecorded message asking the caller to hold, and then transfers the call to the operator in Step 69092. Fig. 691 depicts the ARU Connect Call routine. If operator assistance is 25 required to complete the call, the ARU performs the ARU Guest Xfer to MOTC routine of Fig. 83H. If the subscriber has not requested call screening, the call is connected to the subscriber. If the subscriber has selected call screening, the ARU plays a set of informational messages to the subscriber. The ARU plays "You have a call from," followed by a 30 message identifying the caller, depending on the options chosen by the subscriber and whether a caller name had been recorded. If the name is not recorded, the identifying message 69106 gives only the ANI from which the call was placed. If a name was recorded, the identifying message includes the name as in Step 69107 if the subscriber has requested WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 screening by name, or the name and ANI as in Step 69108 if the subscriber has selected screening by name and ANI. After prompting the subscriber with the identifying information, the ARU in Step 69110 performs the ARU Gain Acceptance routine depicted in Fig. 69J. 5 Fig. 69J depicts the ARU Gain Acceptance routine called from Step 69110. The ARU checks whether the subscriber has an available mailbox that is not full. If so, the ARU prompts the subscriber to indicate whether to take the call or to have the call directed to voice mail. If the mailbox is full or 10 not available, the ARU prompts the subscriber whether to take the call or direct the caller to call back later. If the subscriber indicates that he will take the call (e.g., by pressing '1'), the ARU connects the call in Step 69124. Otherwise, the ARU acknowledges the refusal with an appropriate informational message (e.g., "Your caller will be asked to leave a voice mail 15 message" or "Your caller will be asked to try again later," depending on the condition of the mailbox determined in Step 69120). The ARU disconnects the subscriber and takes the calling party off hold. The ARU plays a recording to the calling party indicating that it was unable to reach the subscriber and optionally prompting the caller to leave a voice mail 20 message. If no mailbox is available, the caller is disconnected. If a non-full mailbox is available, the ARU in Step 69128 performs the ARU Xfer to Voice/Fax Guest Voice routine of Fig. 69K. Following this routine, the ARU plays a message asking the caller to call back later, and disconnects. 25 Fig. 69K depicts the ARU Xfer to Voice/Fax Guest Voice routine, which connects the caller to the VFP to leave a voice mail message. The ARU attempts to acquire a handshake with the VFP. If the handshake is successful, the ARU connects the call in Step 69130. If unsuccessful, the ARU plays an error message in Step 69132 and exits. Fig. 69L depicts the 30 ARU Xfer to Voice/Fax Guest Fax w/ or w/out Annotation routine, which connects the caller to the VFP to transmit a fax. The ARU attempts to acquire a handshake with the VFP. If the handshake is successful, the ARU connects the call in Step 69140. If unsuccessful, the ARU plays an error message in Step 69142 and exits. The routines of Figs. 68K and 69L 33 & WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 are similar except for the service requested of the VFP and the contents of the error message played to the caller. Fig. 69M depicts the ARU Send Page routine, which initiates a call to the 5 subscriber's paging service. In Step 69150 the ARU prompts the caller to enter the telephone number that should be provided to the addressed pager. This prompt is repeated up to three times until a callback number is received. If no callback number after three prompts, the ARU performs the ARU Guest Xfer to MOTC routine, which transfers the caller to the 10 operator. This permits a caller without DTMF-enabled equipment by which to enter a callback to provide the number to an operator who can enter it on his or her behalf. In Step 69158, the ARU plays a recording to the caller, enabling the caller to correct a number entered in error, or to confirm that the correct number has been entered. In Step 69160, the 15 ARU places a call to the subscriber's paging service, using the data provided by the caller to indicate to the paging service the number to be displayed on the pager. If the call to the paging service is successful, the ARU plays a message indicating success in Step 69164 and disconnects in Step 69166. If the call to the paging service is unsuccessful, the ARU in 20 Step 69162 plays a message indicating the failure and returns, whereupon the ARU may optionally present the caller with additional options. Fig. 69N depicts the ARU Alternate Routing routine. The ARU performs this routine to route calls that cannot be routed to the subscriber. If the 25 subscriber has indicated that such unrouted calls are to be routed to his or her paging service, the ARU in Step 69170 plays a recording indicating that the caller may send a page. The ARU then in Step 69172 performs the ARU Send Page routine that has been described with respect to Fig. 69M. If the page was unsuccessful, the ARU plays a message indicating the 30 failure and disconnects the caller in Step 69174. If the subscriber has indicated that unrouted calls are to be routed to voice mail, the ARU in Step 69173 plays a recording indicating that the caller may leave a voice mail message. If the subscriber's mailbox is not full, the ARU performs the ARU Xfer to Voice/ Fax Guest Voice routine. If that routine returns, the 3 R? WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 attempt to leave the voice mail was unsuccessful, and the ARU plays a message indicating the failure and disconnects the caller in Step 69184. If the mailbox is full, the ARU plays a recording informing the caller of that condition and then disconnects the caller in Step 69184. If the subscriber 5 has indicated a "guest option," the ARU in Step 69180 performs the ARU Alternate Routing Guest Option routine of Fig. 690; otherwise the ARU disconnects the caller in Step 69182. Fig. 690 depicts the ARU Alternate Routing Guest Option routine. This 10 routine permits the guest to select whether to leave a voice mail or send a page is the subscriber is unreachable. The ARU in Step 69190 presents the caller with a menu of available routing options, here, '1' to leave a voice mail, and '2' to send a page. If the caller request to send a page, then the ARU in Step 69200 performs the ARU Send Page routine of Fig. 69M. If 15 the Send Page routine fails, the ARU plays a diagnostic recording to the caller and disconnects the caller in Step 69202. If the caller requests to leave a voice mail, the ARU checks to see whether the subscriber mailbox is full. If the mailbox is not full, the ARU performs the ARU Xfer to Voice/Fax Guest Voice routine of Fig. 69K. If the routine returns, that indicates that 20 it was not successful. In that case, or if the mailbox was full, the ARU plays a prerecorded message indicating that the voicemail could not be sent, and in Step 69195 prompts the caller to indicate whether he would like to send a page instead. If the caller selects an option to send a page, the ARU performs the ARU Send Page routing in Step 69200, as if the 25 caller had initially selected that option. If the ARU Send Page routine is not successful, the ARU plays a diagnostic message and disconnects the caller in Step 69202. Fig. 69P depicts the main menu for the ARU User Call routine for 30 processing a call from a subscriber. This routine is performed as Step 69052 in the ARU Guest Menu routine as depicted in Fig. 69D, if the caller enters a valid passcode. After playing an introductory welcome greeting, the ARU checks to see if the subscriber's mailbox is full. If the mailbox is full, the ARU plays a message informing the subscriber of this condition in '39c) WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Step 69300. After playing this warning, or if the mailbox is not full, the ARU in Step 69302 plays a status recording informing the subscriber of the number of new voicemail messages and fax messages stored for the subscriber. 5 In Step 69304, the ARU plays a menu for the subscriber. In the example shown, item '1' corresponds to a request to change call routing; item '2' corresponds to a request to send or retrieve mail; item '3' corresponds to a request to place a call; item '4' corresponds to a request for the 10 administration menu; and item 'O' corresponds to a request to be transferred to customer service. If the subscriber selects the option to change call routing, the ARU in Step 69310 performs the ARU Change Routing routine, described below with 15 respect to Fig. 69T. If the subscriber selects the option to send and retrieve mail, the ARU plays a prerecorded message asking the subscriber to hold and then in Step 69312 performs the ARU Xfer to Voice/Fax Subscriber Send/Retrieve routine, described with respect to Fig. 69Q, below. If the subscriber selects the option to place a call, the ARU in Step 69314 20 presents the subscriber with a menu querying the type of call desired to be placed. If the subscriber responds with an international or domestic telephone number, or with a previously specified speed-dial number corresponding to an international or domestic telephone number, the ARU in Step 69316 connects the call. If the subscriber requests operator 25 assistance, the ARU in Step 69318 performs the ARU User Xfer to MOTC routine to transfer the subscriber to the operator. If the subscriber cancels the call request, the ARU returns to Step 69304. If, from the main menu presented in Step 69304, the ARU performs the Administration routine, described below with respect to Fig. 69P. If the subscriber requests 30 customer service, the ARU performs the ARU User Xfer to Customer Service routine of Fig. 69AH, described below. Fig. 69Q depicts the ARU Xfer to Voice/Fax Subscriber Send/Receive routine, which connects the subscriber to the VFP to send and retrieve 99/ WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 voice mail messages. The ARU attempts to acquire a handshake with the VFP. If the handshake is successful, the ARU connects the call in Step 69330. If unsuccessful, the ARU plays an error message in Step 69332 and exits. 5 Fig. 69R depicts the ARU Xfer to Voice/Fax Subscriber Send/Receive routine, which connects the subscriber to the VFP to manage the subscriber's distribution lists. The ARU attempts to acquire a handshake with the VFP. If the handshake is successful, the ARU connects the call in 10 Step 69340. If unsuccessful, the ARU plays an error message in Step 69342 and exits. Fig. 69S depicts the ARU Xfer to Voice/Fax Subscriber Record Name routine, which connects the subscriber to the VFP to record the name that 15 will be used in VFP-originated messages identifying the subscriber. The ARU attempts to acquire a handshake with the VFP. If the handshake is successful, the ARU connects the call in Step 69350. If unsuccessful, the ARU plays an error message in Step 69352 and exits. The routines of Figs. 69Q, 69R, and 69S are similar except for the service requested of the VFP 20 and the contents of the error message played to the subscriber. Fig. 69T depicts the ARU Change Routing routine, by which the subscriber modifies the routing options associated with his or her service. In Step 69390, the ARU presents a menu of options to the subscriber. If the 25 subscriber selects the option for Find-Me routing, the ARU performs the ARU Change Find-Me Routing routine, described below with respect to Fig. 69U. If the subscriber selects the option for Override routing, the ARU in Step 69400 plays a message indicating the subscriber's present override routing setting and in Step 69404 presents the subscriber with a menu to 30 select a new option. If the subscriber selects a change in option, the ARU performs, as Step 69408, the ARU Program routine to set the override option as specified, by passing the parameters of "override" and the selected option. If the subscriber selects the "Cancel" option, the ARU returns to Step 69390. ,3 ?,2 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 If, from the ARU Change Routing menu of Step 69390 the subscriber selects the "Alternate Routing" option, the ARU in Step 69409 plays a message indicating the subscriber's present alternate routing setting and in 5 Step 69410 presents the subscriber with a menu to select a new option. If the subscriber selects a change in option, the ARU performs, as Step 69414, the ARU Program routine to set the alternate option as specified, by passing the parameters of "alternate" and the selected option. If the subscriber selects the "Cancel" option, the ARU returns to Step 69390. 10 If, from the Change Routing menu of Step 69390, the subscriber selects the "cancel and return" option, the ARU in Step 69412 returns to the user menu of Fig. 69P. 15 Fig. 69U depicts the ARU Change Find-Me Routing routine. In Step 69420, the ARU checks to see whether the subscriber's Find-Me routing is by schedule. If not, in Step 69422, the ARU plays a message indicating that the routing is set to attempt three successive telephone numbers, and in Step 69424 performs the ARU Change 3-Number Sequence routine, which 20 is described below with respect to Fig. 69V. If the subscriber's Find-me routing is by schedule, the ARU in Step 69426 plays a message indicating that the subscriber's Find-Me routing is currently set by schedule, and in Step 69428 presents the subscriber with a Change Schedule Routing menu. If the subscriber selects the option to change to 3-Number routing, 25 the ARU in Step 69430 plays a message that the routing is set to 3-Number sequence and in Step 69432 performs the ARU Change 3 -number Sequence routine of Fig. 69V. If the subscriber selects the Save and Continue option, the ARU in Step 69434 plays a message that the subscriber's Find-Me routing is set to routing by schedule, and in Step 30 69436 performs the ARU Change Routing routine. Step 69436 and the ARU Change Routing routine are also performed if the subscriber selects the option to cancel and return. Fig. 69V depicts the ARU Change 3-Number Sequence routine, which WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 permits the subscriber to alter contents and order of the three alternate numbers used by the ARU Find-Me routine of Fig. 69E and 69F. In Step 69440, the ARU presents the subscriber with a menu of options. If the subscriber selects an option to change one of the three telephone numbers, 5 the ARU in Step 69442 plays a recorded message indicating the current setting for the number, and then in Step 69444 performs the Program routine, passing to the routine a parameter identifying the number to be changed and indicating the POTS number to which it is to be changed. The ARU then returns to Step 69440. If the subscriber selects an option to 10 review the current settings, the ARU in Step 69446 plays a series of messages disclosing the settings for each of the three numbers. The ARU then returns to Step 69440. If the subscriber selects an option to change the schedule routing, the ARU 15 in Step 69450 checks whether the subscriber is eligible for schedule routing. If so, in Step 69454 the ARU plays a message indicating that the Find-Me routing is set to the subscriber's schedule and in Step 69456 toggles the schedule setting to enable it. After toggling the setting, the ARU in Step 69450 returns to the ARU Change Routing routine of Fig. 69T. If 20 schedule routing is not an option for this subscriber, the ARU plays a diagnostic message indicating that schedule routing is not available and that the subscriber may contact Customer Service to obtain the option. The ARU then returns to Step 69440. 25 If the subscriber selects an option indicating cancel and return, the ARU returns to the ARU Change Routing routine of Fig. 69T. Fig. 69W depicts the ARU Administration routine. In Step 69460, the ARU provides the subscriber with a menu of options. In the example shown, 30 item '1' corresponds to a request to maintain the subscriber's broadcast or speed-dial lists; item '2' corresponds to a request to record a greeting; and item '3' corresponds to a request to activate or deactivate features. If the subscriber requests list maintenance the ARU, in Step 69462 presents the subscriber with a menu of options. If the subscriber selects an option to WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 maintain his or her broadcast lists, the ARU in Step 69464 performs the ARU Xfer to Voice/Fax Subscriber Distribution Lists routine of Fig. 69R. After performing that routine, the ARU in Step 69468 performs the ARU Lists routine of Fig. 69W. If the subscriber selects the option to maintain 5 the speed-dial list, the ARU in Step 69470 performs the ARU Change Speed-Dial Numbers routine of Fig. 69X. If the subscriber selects an option to cancel and return, the ARU returns to Step 69460. If, in response to the menu presented in Step 69460, the subscriber selects 10 an option to record greetings, the ARU in Step 69474 presents the subscriber with a menu of options. In the example depicted, item '1' corresponds to a request to modify the subscriber's welcome message; item '2' corresponds to a request to modify the name associated with subscriber's mailbox. If the subscriber selects the option to modify the 15 welcome message, the ARU in Step 69476 performs the ARU Play Greeting routine of Fig. 69B to play the current welcome message, and in Step 69478 performs the ARU Change Greeting routine of Fig. 69Y. If the subscriber selects an option to modify the mailbox name, the ARU plays a message requesting the subscriber to hold and in Step 69480 perform the 20 ARU Xfer to Voice/Fax Subscriber Mailbox Name routine, described previously with respect to Fig. 69S. After performing this routine, the ARU returns to Step 69474. If the subscriber, in response to the menu presented in Step 69474, indicates that the request to modify greetings should be canceled (e.g., by pressing the asterisk button), the ARU returns 25 to Step 69460. If, in response to the menu presented in Step 69460, the subscriber selects an option to activate or deactivate features, the ARU in Step 69484 performs the ARU Feature Activation routine, which is described below with 30 respect to Fig. 69Z. If the subscriber instead indicates that the request to modify greetings should be canceled (e.g., by pressing the asterisk button), the ARU returns to the ARU User Menu routine, which is depicted as Step 69304 in Fig. 69P.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Fig. 69X depicts the ARU Change Speed Dial Numbers routine. In Step 69490, the ARU provides the subscriber with a menu of options corresponding to particular speed dial numbers. For example, item '1' corresponds to the first speed dial number, item "2' corresponds to the 5 second speed-dial number, etc., through item '9', which corresponds to the ninth speed-dial number. When the subscriber selects one of these options, the ARU in Step 69492 plays a message indicating the current setting for the selected speed-dial number. In Step 69494, the ARU performs the ARU Program routine, described below with respect to Fig. 10 69AA, specifying parameters of "SpdDial-n" to indicate the speed dial number to being programmed (where n is replaced by a digit corresponding to the number of the addressed speed dial button) and the POTS number to which the specified speed dial number is to be set. The ARU then returns to Step 69490. If the subscriber selects an option (indicated in the 15 example as an asterisk) to cancel the Change Speed Dial Numbers request, the ARU returns to Step 69462 as depicted in Fig. 69W. Fig. 69Y depicts the ARU Change Greeting routine. In Step 69500, the ARU presents a menu to the subscriber corresponding to available options. 20 For example, item '1' corresponds to a request to record a custom greeting, and item '2' corresponds to a request to use the standard system greeting. If the subscriber selects the option to record a custom greeting, the ARU in Step 69502 presents a menu of options related to the customized greetings. In the example shown, item '1' corresponds to a request to review the 25 present contents of the subscriber's custom greeting and item '2' corresponds to a request to replace the currently recorded custom greeting with a new recorded custom greeting. The octothorp ('#') corresponds to a request to save the contents of the greetings, and the asterisk ('*) corresponds to a request to cancel and return. 30 If the subscriber selects an option to review the present contents of the subscriber's custom greeting, the ARU in Step 69504 performs the ARU Play Temp Greeting routine, previously described with respect to Fig. 69C, and returns to Step 69502. If the subscriber selects an option to replace ' 96 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 the currently recorded custom greeting with a new recorded custom greeting, the ARU in Step 69506 prompts the subscriber to begin recording the new greeting and in Step 69506 records the new greeting. After recording the greeting, the ARU returns to Step 69502. After recording a 5 greeting, a subscriber may request that the newly recorded greeting be saved. If the subscriber selects saving the greeting, the ARU in Step 69510 saves the recorded greeting to disk, overwriting the previous contents of the greeting file, and in Step 69514 plays a message indicating that the new greeting has been stored. After storing the greeting, the ARU performs the 10 ARU Administration routine previously described with respect to Fig. 69W. If, in response to the menu presented by the ARU in Step 69502, the subscriber cancels the request to modify greetings, the ARU in Step 69518 performs the ARU Greetings routine, previously described with respect to Fig. 69W. 15 If, in response to the menu presented in Step 69500, the subscriber selects an option to use the system greeting (i.e., a default greeting that does not identify the subscriber), then the ARU in Step 69520 erases any previously recorded greeting and in Step 69522 plays a prerecorded message that 20 callers will now hear the system greeting instead of a personalized greeting. The ARU then returns in Step 69525 to the ARU Administration routine, previously described with respect to Fig. 69W. The ARU also returns in Step 69525 if the subscriber selects an option to cancel and return. 25 Fig. 69Z depicts the ARU Feature Activation routine. In Step 69530, the ARU presents a menu to the subscriber corresponding to available options. For example, item '1' corresponds to a request to set the Call Screening option; item '2' corresponds to a request to activate or deactivate a pager recipient; option '3' corresponds to an request to set pager notification; and 30 option '4' corresponds to a request to activate or deactivate an account. If the subscriber selects the call screening option, the ARU in Step 69532 plays a recording indicating the current setting of the call screening option. In Step 69534, the ARU presents the subscriber with a list of options relating to call screening. In this example, item '1' corresponds to a request 3 c7 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 to select screening by ANI (telephone number) only; item '2' corresponds to a request to select screening by name only; item '3' corresponds to select screening by both ANI and name; and item '4' corresponds to a request to turn call screening off completely. If the subscriber selects one of these 5 options, the ARU in Step 69536 performs the ARU Program routine, described below with respect to Fig. 69AA, passing it a first parameter to indicate that the screening option is desired to -be altered, and a second parameter indicating the value to which the option should be set. Following Step 69536, the ARU returns to Step 69530. Likewise, if the 10 subscriber selects a cancel and return option in Step 69534, the ARU returns to Step 69530. If the subscriber selects an option to activate or deactivate a pager, the ARU in Step 69538 plays a recorded message indicating the new status of the 15 pager notification option. In Step 69540, the ARU toggles the current status of the pager option (i.e., enables the option if it is currently disabled, or disables the option on if it is currently enabled). After the toggle, the ARU returns to Step 69530. 20 If the subscriber selects the pager notification option, the ARU in Step 69542 plays a recording indicating the current setting of the call screening option. In Step 69544, the ARU presents the subscriber with a list of options relating to pager notification. In this example, item '1' corresponds to a request to select notification by pager only of incoming voicemails; item 25 '2' corresponds to a request to select notification by pager only of incoming faxes; item '3' corresponds to select request to select notification by pager both for incoming voicemails and for incoming faxes; and item '4' corresponds to a request to turn call pager notification completely. If the subscriber selects one of these options, the ARU in Step 69546 performs 30 the ARU Program routine, described below with respect to Fig. 69AA, passing it a first parameter to indicate that the pager notification option is desired to be altered, and a second parameter indicating the value to which the option should be set. Following Step 69546, the ARU returns to Step 69530. Likewise, if the subscriber selects a cancel and return option in WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Step 69544, the ARU returns to Step 69530. If the subscriber selects an option in Step 69530 to activate or deactivate his or her account, the ARU in Step 69550 plays a recorded message 5 indicating the new account status. In Step 69552, the ARU toggles the current status of the account option (i.e., activates the option if it is currently deactivated, or deactivates the option on if it is currently activated). After the toggle, the ARU returns to Step 69530. 10 If the subscriber in Step 69530 selects the cancel and return option, the ARU returns to the ARU Administration routine, described above with respect to Fig. 69W. Fig. 69AA depicts the ARU Program routine, which is performed by the 15 ARU to set options selected by the subscriber. As shown in Step 69560, the Program routine takes as input two parameters: TermSlot, which identifies the option whose value is being altered, and Term, whose value indicates the value to which the option addressed by TermSlot is being set. In Step 69562, the ARU checks the type of value specified in Term. If the 20 term value is a POTS identifier (i.e. a telephone number, such as a telephone number being programmed into a speed-dial number, as in Step 69494 in Fig. 69X), the ARU in Step 69564 prompts the subscriber to enter a POTS number. If the subscriber enters a domestic or international number, or an option ('1' in the example shown) to erase a previously stored 25 POTS value, the ARU in Step 69566 plays a message indicating the new setting to which the addressed slot will be changed. In Step 69568, the ARU prompts the subscriber to correct the number by reentering a new number, to confirm the request, or to cancel the request. If the subscriber selects the option to correct the number, the ARU returns to Step 69564. 30 If the subscriber confirms the request, the ARU in Step 69570 stores the Term parameter value as the variable addressed by the TermSlot parameter. If the subscriber cancels the request, the ARU returns to the calling routine in Step 69572. The ARU also returns to the calling routine in Step 69572 if the subscriber selects a cancel option when prompted for 3_9 7 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 a POTS number in Step 69564. If the Term value is not a POTS identifier, the ARU in Step 69580 plays a message that informs the subscriber that the addressed option is about to 5 be changed. In Step 69582, the ARU prompts the subscriber to confirm or cancel the request. If the subscriber opts to confirm the request, the ARU in Step 69584 stores the Term parameter value as the variable addressed by the TermSlot parameter and returns to the calling routine in Step 69572. If the subscriber cancels the request, the ARU returns to the 10 calling routine in Step 69572 without storing the value. Fig. 69AI depicts the ARU User Xfer to Customer Service routine. In Step 69592, the ARU plays a prerecorded message to the subscriber asking the subscriber to hold. In Step 69594, the ARU then transfers the subscriber 15 to customer service. Fig. 69AB depicts the ARU Validate Guest Entry routine. This routine is used by the ARU to determine whether an attempt by a guest to use the VFP guest facilities is valid. The ARU permits up to 3 attempts for the 20 guest to enter his or her identification information. For the first two invalid attempts, the ARU, in Step 69610, returns a status that the guest entry was invalid. On a third attempt, the ARU in Step 69615 performs the ARU Find-Me routine of Figs. 69E and 69F. If a guest entry was received, the ARU in Step 69617 checks to see whether a guest entry was one of the 25 available choices on the applicable menu. If not, the ARU in Step 69620 plays a recorded message that the guest entry option is not available. If this is the third invalid entry, the ARU in Step 69624 performs the ARU Guest Xfer to MTOC routine of Fig. 69H. If it is the first or second invalid entry, the routine in Step 69622 returns with an indication that the guest 30 entry was invalid. If the ARU determines in Step 69617 that the guest entry was a proper menu option, it returns a valid status in Step 69626. Fig. 69AC depicts the ARU Validate User Entry routine, which is used by the ARU to validate an attempt by a subscriber to use subscriber services of Y& C) WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 the VFP. If no user entry is received, the ARU in Step 69630 plays a diagnostic message that no entry was received. If an entry was received, the ARU checks in Step 69634 whether the menu to which the subscriber was responding includes an option for user entry. If so, the ARU returns a 5 valid status in Step 69636. If not, the ARU in Step 69638 plays a diagnostic message that that option is not available. If either no entry was received or the entry was not valid for the menu, the ARU in Step 69632 checks to see whether this is the third failure to specify subscriber information. If so, the ARU in Step 69640 performs the ARU User Xfer to 10 Customer Service routine of Fig 89AI. If this is the first or second failed entry, the ARU returns an invalid status in Step 69642. Fig. 69AD depicts the ARU Validate Passcode Entry routine, which is used by the ARU to authenticate a passcode entered by a subscriber. In Step 15 69650, the ARU checks to see whether the passcode enters matches the passcode for the specific subscriber. If so, in Step 69652 the ARU returns with a valid status. If the entry is not valid, the ARU in Step 69654 plays a recorded message that the entry is not valid. The ARU allows two attempts to specify a valid passcode. In Step 69656, the ARU checks to see whether 20 this is the second attempt to enter a passcode. If this is the second attempt, the ARU in Step 69660 performs the ARU User Xfer to Customer Service routine, which is described above with respect to Fig. 69A. If this is not the second failure, the ARU in Step 69658 prompts the subscriber to enter a valid passcode and returns to Step 69650. 25 Fig. 69AE depicts the ARU Validate Completion routine, used by the ARU to validate the entry of a valid telephone number. In Step 69670 the ARU checks to see whether a valid user entry had been received. If not, the ARU checks to see if this is the third invalid entry attempted. If not, the ARU in 30 Step 69672 returns an indicator that no valid entry was received. If this is the third attempt, in Step 69674, the ARU plays a message and in Step 69676 performs the ARU Xfer User to MTOC routine, which is described above with respect to Fig. 69H.

WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 If a valid user entry was received, the ARU checks to see whether a telephone number entered begins with "011." If so, the ARU in Step 69680 performs the ARU Validate International Completion routine of Fig. 69AF. In Step 69682, the ARU checks to see whether the domestic terms flag has 5 been set by the subscriber. If not, the ARU in Step 69684 plays a diagnostic message that domestic calls are not available, and proceeds to Step 69671. In Step 69686, the ARU checks to see whether a ten-digit number was entered, and in Step 69688 checks to see whether a valid MPA-Nxx number was entered. If number entered was not a ten-digit valid 10 MPA-Nxx number, the ARU in Step 69690 plays a diagnostic message and proceeds to Step 69671. In Step 69690, the ARU checks to see whether NADP blocking is effective for this subscriber, and in Step 69692, the ARU checks to see whether 976 blocking is effective for this subscriber. If either blocking is effective, the ARU in Step 69694 plays a diagnostic message 15 indicating that calls to the addressed number are blocked and proceeds to Step 69671. Otherwise, the ARU in Step 69696 returns with a status that the number entered is valid. Fig. 69AF depicts the ARU Validate International Completion routine. In 20 Step 69700, the ARU checks to see whether the subscriber is configured to place international calls. If not, the ARU plays a diagnostic message in Step 69702. In Step 69704, the ARU checks to see whether the number entered is syntactically valid as an international dialing number. If not, the ARU in Step 69706 plays a diagnostic message. In Step 69708, the ARU 25 checks to see whether Cset blocking will block the specified number. If so, the ARU in Step 69710 plays a diagnostic message. If no error conditions were found, the ARU returns a valid status in Step 69712. If errors were found the ARU in Step 69713 returns an invalid status. If three failed attempts have been made to enter a number, the ARU plays a status 30 message in Step 69714 and transfers the subscriber to the operator in Step 69716. Fig. 69AG depicts the ARU Validate POTS Programming routine, used by the ARU to ensure that only a valid telephone number is stored for use by to.2 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 call routing. In Step 69720 the ARU checks to see whether a valid user entry had been received. If not, the ARU checks to see if this is the third invalid entry attempted. If not, the ARU in Step 69722 returns an indicator that no valid entry was received. If this is the third attempt, in 5 Step 69676 performs the ARU User Xfer to Customer Service routine, which is described above with respect to Fig. 69AI. If a valid user entry was received, the ARU checks to see whether a telephone number entered begins with "011." If so, the ARU in Step 69730 10 performs the ARU Validate International Completion routine of Fig. 69AF. In Step 69732, the ARU checks to see whether the domestic terms flag has been set by the subscriber. If not, the ARU in Step 69734 plays a diagnostic message that domestic calls are not available, and proceeds to Step 69721. In Step 69736, the ARU checks to see whether a ten-digit 15 number was entered, and in Step 69738 checks to see whether a valid MPA-Nxx number was entered. If neither was entered, the ARU in Step 69740 plays a diagnostic message and proceeds to Step 69721. In Step 69750, the ARU checks to see whether 976 blocking is effective for this subscriber. If so, the ARU in Step 69754 plays a diagnostic message 20 indicating that calls to the addressed number are blocked and proceeds to Step 69721. Otherwise, the ARU in Step 69756 returns with a status that the number entered is valid. Fig. 69AH depicts the ARU Validate International Programming routine 25 used by the ARU to assure that only a valid telephone number is stored for use by call routing. In Step 69760, the ARU checks to see whether the subscriber is configured to place international calls. If not, the ARU plays a diagnostic message in Step 69762. In Step 69764, the ARU checks to see whether the number entered is syntactically valid as an international 30 dialing number. If not, the ARU in Step 69766 plays a diagnostic message. In Step 69768, the ARU checks to see whether Cset blocking will block the specified number. If so, the ARU in Step 69770 plays a diagnostic message. If no error conditions were found, the ARU returns a valid status in Step 69772. If errors were found, the ARU in Step 69773 returns an WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 invalid status. If three failed attempts have been made to enter a number, the ARU plays a status message in Step 69774 and transfers the subscriber to the operator in Step 69776. 5 Figs. 70A through 70S depict automated console call flow charts showing software implementation of the directline MCI product described above and are useful for a further understanding of the invention. A console call flow differs from an ARU call flow in that the console, while automated, is manned by an individual who may act in response to requests made by a 10 caller. This permits a caller without DTMF-enabled equipment to utilize the product. DTMF data provided by the caller will be processed, but the availability of a human operator permits many of the available operations to be performed without the use of DTMF input. Data may be provided by the caller by directly entering it on a keypad, if any, or it may be entered by the 15 human operator in accordance with voice responses provided by the caller. Fig. 70A depicts the starting point for processing of an automated console call into an account. As a call initiates, it is assumed to be a guest call. If the account is not currently online, the automated console in Step 70010 20 plays a message indicating that calls cannot be accepted for the account. Unless the caller indicates to the operator that he has a passcode, the console in Step 70012 disconnects the call. If the caller provides the operator with a passcode, the operator in Step 70014 initiates the Console Validate Passcode routine, which is described below with respect to Fig. 25 70K. If the account is currently online, the console checks to see whether the subscriber has indicated an override for incoming calls. If so, the console routes the call to the operator in Step 70018. If the caller is generating a 30 fax tone, the console in Step 70024 performs the Console Fax Tone Detected routine, described below with respect to Fig. 70S. If the caller provides the operator with a passcode, the operator in Step 70026 initiates the Console Validate Passcode routine, which is described below with respect to Fig. 70K. Otherwise, the call is processed as an incoming call for WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 the subscriber, and the console in Step 70020 performs the Console Find Me routine, which is described below with respect to Fig. 70BC. The console supplies the "override" parameter to the Console Find Me routine invocation. 5 If override has not been specified, the console in Step 70030 presents an audible menu to the caller. In the example shown, item '1' corresponds to a request to speak to a subscriber; item '2 corresponds to a request to leave a voice mail message for a subscriber; item '3' corresponds to a request to 10 send a fax to a subscriber; and item '4' corresponds to a request to page a subscriber. In addition, a subscriber may provide his or her passcode to gain access to the console as a subscriber. If the caller requests to speak to a subscriber, the console in Step 70032 15 checks the schedule flags associated with the caller's profile. If the subscriber's profile indicates a schedule, the console in Step 69034 performs the Console Find Me routine of Figs. 70B and 70C, using "Sched 1" as the parameter. If the subscriber's profile does not indicate a schedule, the console in Step 69036 performs the Console Find Me routine 20 using "First" as the parameter. The Console Find Me routine is discussed in further detail with respect to Figs. 70B and 70C, below. If the caller requests to leave a voice mail message, the console in Step 70040 performs the Console Xfer to Voice/Fax Guest routine, described 25 below with respect to Fig. 70E. If the caller requests to send a fax, the console in Step 70042 performs the Console Xfer to Voice/Fax Guest w/ or w/out Annotation routine, describe below with respect to Fig. 70F. After performing this routine, the console returns to the guest menu in Step 70030. If the caller requests to leave a voice mail message, the console in 30 Step 70040 performs the Console Send Page routine, described below with respect to Fig. 70G. After performing any of the routines of Steps 70040, 70042 or 70044, the console returns to the guest menu in Step 70030. If the caller provides a passcode, the console in Step 70046 performs the WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Console Validate Passcode routine, which is described with respect to Fig. 70K, below. If the console detects a fax tone on the incoming call, the console in Step 70048 performs the Console Fax Tone Detected routine, which is described below with respect to Fig. 70S. 5 Figs. 70B and 70C depict the operation of the Console Find Me routine. As shown in Step 70060, the Console Find Me routine takes a single parameter TermSlot, which is set by the caller and used by the console to choose among alternative courses of action. If TermSlot is set to "Find 10 Me", this indicates that the console is to use the default method of determining the subscriber's current number. This value may be set, for example, for override or default processing. If the subscriber's profile includes schedule flags, the console performs the Console Find Me routine using the Schedl parameter as shown in Step 70062; if not, the console 15 performs the Find Me routine using the first telephone number in the list of numbers for the subscriber, as shown in Step 70061. If TermSlot is set to "Voicemail," the console plays a message to the caller that the subscriber has requested that the caller leave a voice mail 20 message, and in Step 70074 performs the Console Xfer to Voice/Fax Guest Voice routine, as depicted in Fig. 70E. That routine returns if unsuccessful, in which case a message is played indicating that the caller should try the call later, and the caller is disconnected in Step 70075. 25 If TermSlot is set to "Pager," the console plays a message to the caller that the subscriber has requested that the caller leave a request to page the subscriber. The console then performs the Console Send Page routine, which is described with respect to Fig. 70G, below. That routine returns if unsuccessful, in which case a message is played indicating that the caller 30 should try the call later, and the caller is disconnected in Step 70066. If TermSlot is set to any POTS value (such as Schedl, Sched2, First, Second, or Third) that indicates that the subscriber has specified that incoming calls are to be sent using the standard telephone system, and the C) 6 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 console has been directed to use the particular scheduled or selected telephone number. In Step 70070, the console performs the Console Record Name routine to acquire a digital recording of the caller's identification. The Console Record Name routine is described in detail with 5 respect to Fig. 70H, below. The console in Steps 70073 and 70075 plays an appropriate message for the caller (e.g., "Please hold while I try to reach your party" on the first attempt, and "I am still trying to reach your party; please continue to hold" for subsequent attempts). 10 If the call is answered by an individual, the console in Step 70072 performs the Console Connect Call routine, which is discussed below with respect to Fig. 70D, to connect the caller. If the call is answered by an answering machine, the console in Step 70090 checks to see whether the subscriber has requested that the console roll over to the next alternative number 15 upon encountering an answering machine. If not, the console in Step 70094 connects the call. If the subscriber has selected rollover, the console selects the next number in rotation to call and re-performs the Console Find Me routine using the newly-selected number, as shown in steps 70081, 70082 and 70083. 20 If the line called is busy, or if no more numbers to check remain, the console in Step 70074 performs the Console Alternate Routing routine of Fig. 701. 25 Fig. 70D depicts the Console Connect Call routine. If the subscriber has not requested call screening, the console in Step 70100 connects the call to the subscriber. If the subscriber has selected call screening, the console in Step 70104 plays an informational message to the subscriber, identifying the caller by name and by ANI, if available. If the subscriber opts to take 30 the call, the console in Step 70106 takes the caller off hold and in Step 70108 plays a message indicating that the call is being connected, which it performs in Step 70110. If the subscriber declines to take the call, the console in Step 70114 takes the caller off hold and in Step 70118 plays a recording to the calling party indicating that it was unable to reach the i 07 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 subscriber and optionally prompting the caller to leave a voice mail message. If no mailbox is available, the console in Step 70119 plays a diagnostic message and disconnects the caller in Step 70120. If a mailbox is available and able to receive messages, the console in Step 70128 5 performs the Console Xfer to Voice/Fax Guest Voice routine of Fig. 70E. After this routine has been performed, the console in Step 70119 plays a message asking the caller to call back later, and disconnects in Step 70120. 10 Fig. 70S depicts the Console Fax Tone Detected routine. In Step 70130, the console attempts to acquire a handshake with the VFP. If the handshake is successful, the console connects the call in Step 70132. If unsuccessful, the console disconnects the caller in Step 69132 and exits. 15 Fig. 70E depicts the Console Xfer to Voice/Fax Guest Voice routine, which connects the caller to the VFP to leave a voice mail message. The console plays a status message in Step 70140 and checks to see whether the subscriber's mailbox is full in Step 70142. If the mailbox is full, the console plays a diagnostic message in Step 70144 and returns. If the 20 mailbox is not full, the console attempts to acquire a handshake with the VFP. If the handshake is successful, the console connects the call in Step 70146. If unsuccessful, the console plays an error message in Step 70148 and returns. 25 Fig. 70F depicts the Console Xfer to Voice/Fax Guest Fax w/ or w/out Annotation routine, which connects the caller to the VFP to transmit a fax. The console plays a status message in Step 70150 and checks to see whether the subscriber's mailbox is full in Step 70152. If the mailbox is full, the console plays a diagnostic message in Step 70154 and returns. If 30 the mailbox is not full, the console attempts to acquire a handshake with the VFP. If the handshake is successful, the console connects the call in Step 70156. If unsuccessful, the console plays an error message in Step 70148 and returns. The routines of Figs. 70E and 70F are similar except for the service requested of the VFP and the contents of the error message

,-

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 played to the caller. Fig. 70G depicts the Console Send Page routine, which initiates a call to the subscriber's paging service. In Step 70160 the console prompts the caller 5 to provide the telephone number that should be provided to the addressed pager. In Step 70162, the console plays a status recording to the caller, asking him or her to hold while the page is sent. If the page is successfully sent, the console in Step 70164 plays a status message indicating that the page has been sent and in Step 70165 disconnects the call. If the call to 10 the paging service is unsuccessful, the console in Step 70166 plays a message indicating the failure and returns, enabling the console to present the caller with additional options. Fig. 70H depicts the Console Record Name routine. This routine is used to 15 record the name of the caller if the subscriber has specified call screening, either by name or by name and ANI. If the subscriber has specified call screening by name of by name and ANI, the console in Step 70170 prompts the caller to supply a name, and records the audible response. If a fax tone is detected during the recording process, the console in Step 70172 20 performs the Console Fax Tone Detected routine; otherwise, the routine returns. Fig. 701 depicts the Console Alternate Routing routine. The console performs this routine to route calls that cannot be routed to the subscriber. 25 If the subscriber has indicated that such unrouted calls are to be routed to his or her paging service, the console in Step 70180 plays a recording indicating that the caller may send a page. If the caller elects to send a page, the console in Step 70182 performs the Console Send Page routine that has been described with respect to Fig. 70G. If the page was 30 unsuccessful, the console in Step 70185 plays a message indicating the failure and disconnects the caller in Step 70184. If the subscriber has indicated that unrouted calls are to be routed to voice mail, the console in Step 70183 plays a recorded message indicating that the caller may leave a voice mail message. If the caller elects to leave a voicemail, the console in MVO

?

WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Step 70186 performs the Console Xfer to Voice/Fax Guest Voice routine that has been described with respect to Fig. 70E. If the voicemail was unsuccessful, the console in Step 70185 plays a message indicating the failure and disconnects the caller in Step 70184. 5 If the subscriber has indicated a "guest option," the console in Step 69190 performs the Console Alternate Routing Guest Option routine of Fig. 70J; otherwise the console plays a diagnostic message in Step 69192 and disconnects the caller in Step 69194. 10 Fig. 70J depicts the Console Alternate Routing Guest Option routine. This routine permits the guest to select whether to leave a voice mail or send a page if the subscriber is unreachable. The console in Step 70200 presents the caller with a menu of available routing options; here, either to leave a 15 voice mail or to send a page. If the caller requests to send a voice mail, then the console in Step 70202 performs the Console Xfer to Voice/Fax Guest Voice routine of Fig. 70E. If that routine returns a return code indicative of an unsuccessful event, then the console plays a prerecorded message indicating that the voicemail could not be sent, and in Step 70204 20 prompts the caller to indicate whether he would like to send a page instead. If the caller, in response to either the prompt of Step 70200 or the prompt of Step 70204, requests to send a page, the console in Step 70206 performs the Console Send Page routine of Fig. 70G. If the Console Send Page routine returns (indicating the page could not be sent), or if the caller 25 declines to send a page in response to the prompt of Step 70204, the console plays a diagnostic message in Step 70208 and disconnects the caller in Step 70209. Fig. 70K depicts the Console Validate Passcode Entry routine, which is 30 used by the console to authenticate a passcode provided by a subscriber. In Step 70220, the caller is prompted for a passcode. In Step 70224, the console checks to see whether the passcode provided matches the passcode for the specific subscriber. If so, in Step 70226 the console performs the Console User Call routine, described below with respect to Fig. 70L. The WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 console allows two attempts to specify a valid passcode. In Step 70228, the console checks to see whether this is the second failed attempt to provide a passcode. If this is the second attempt, the console in Step 70232 informs the caller that the passcode is not valid, and offers to connect the caller to 5 customer service. If the caller elects not to be connected to customer service, the caller is disconnected in Step 70234. If this is the first failed attempt, the console in Step 70230 prompts the subscriber to provide a valid passcode and returns to Step 70224. 10 Fig. 70L depicts the Console User Call routine. In Step 70240, the console checks to see whether the subscriber's mailbox is full. If so, in Step 70242, the console plays a warning message to the subscriber. Regardless of whether the mailbox is full, the console in Step 70244 plays a status message for the subscriber informing the subscriber of the number of 15 voicemail messages and faxes in the mailbox. On Step 70246, the console provides a menu of options to the subscriber. In the example shown, option 'I' corresponds to a request to send or retrieve mail; '2' corresponds to a request to place a call; and '3' corresponds to a request to exit. If the subscriber selects the option to send or retrieve mail, the console in Step 20 70248 plays a hold message and then performs the Console Xfer to Voice/Fax Subscriber Send/Retrieve routine of Fig. 70M. After that routine has completed, the console again returns to Step 70246. If the subscriber selects an option to place a call, the console performs the Console Outbound Calling routine, which is described below with respect to Fig. 25 70N. If the subscriber selects the Exit Programming option, the console disconnects the call. Fig. 70M depicts the Console Xfer to Voice/Fax Subscriber Send/Receive routine, which connects the subscriber to the VFP to send and retrieve 30 voice mail messages. The console attempts to acquire a handshake with the VFP. If the handshake is successful, the console connects the call in Step 70250. If unsuccessful, the console plays an error message in Step 70252 and exits. A' // WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Fig. 70N depicts the Console Outbound Calling routine, by which a subscriber may place an outgoing call. In Step 70260, the console checks to see whether the subscriber is configured to place international calls. If so, the console in Step 70262 enables the international call key, enabling 5 non-domestic calls to be made. In Step 70264, the subscriber is prompted for a telephone number. The console connects the subscriber to the outgoing call in Step 70268. Fig. 700 depicts the Console Validate Guest Entry routine. This routine is 10 used by the console to determine whether an attempt by a guest to use the VFP guest facilities is valid. The console in Step 70270 checks to see whether a guest entry was one of the available choices on the applicable menu. If not, the entry is not accepted, and the console maintains the same menu, as shown in Step 70272. If guest entry is a proper menu 15 option, the console returns a valid status in Step 70274. Fig. 70P depicts the Console Validate User Entry routine, which is used by the console to validate an attempt by a subscriber to use subscriber services of the VFP. The console in Step 70280 checks to see whether user 20 entry is one of the available choices on the applicable menu. If not, the entry is not accepted, and the console maintains the same menu, as shown in Step 70282. If user entry is a proper menu option, the console returns a valid status in Step 70284. 25 Fig. 70Q depicts the Console Validate Completion routine, used by the console to validate the entry of a valid telephone number. In Step 70292, the console checks to see whether the domestic terms flag has been set by the subscriber. If not, the console in Step 70294 plays a diagnostic message that domestic calls are not available, and in Step 70310 returns 30 with an indication that the number provided is not valid. In Step 70296, the console checks to see whether a ten-digit number was provided, and in Step 70298 checks to see whether a valid MPA-Nxx number was provided. If number provided was not a ten-digit valid MPA-Nxx number, was provided, the console in Step 70302 plays a diagnostic message and in 4/2 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Step 70310 returns with an indication that the number provided is not valid. In Step 70304, the console checks to see whether NADP blocking is effective for this subscriber, and in Step 70306, checks to see whether 976 blocking is effective for this subscriber. If either form of blocking is 5 effective, the console in Step 70308 plays a diagnostic message indicating that calls to the addressed number are blocked and in Step 70310 returns with an indication that the number provided is not valid. Otherwise, the console in Step 70312 returns with a status that the number provided is valid. 10 Fig. 70R depicts the Console Validate International Completion routine. In Step 70322, the console checks to see whether the subscriber is configured to place international calls. If not, the console plays a diagnostic message in Step 70324 and in Step 70340 returns with an indication that the 15 number provided is not valid. In Step 70326, the console checks to see whether the number begins with the "011" prefix indicating an international number, and in Step 70327, the console checks to see whether the number provided is syntactically valid as an international dialing number. If the number does not begin with "011" or is not 20 syntactically valid, the console in Step 70328 plays a diagnostic message and in Step 70340 returns with an indication that the number provided is not valid. In Step 70330, the console checks to see whether Cset blocking will block 25 the specified number. If so, the console in Step 70332 plays a diagnostic message. If no error conditions were found, the console returns a valid status in Step 70334. Implementation of the improved directline MCI product as described above 30 has the following impacts on billing procedures. directlineMCI domestic Bill Type: 15 directlineMCI international Bill Type: 115 directlineMCI Call Types: WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Call Type Call Description 52 Transfer to Customer Service 138 User Call Completion 5 139 User Administration Call 140 Guest termination to programmed number 141 Guest termination to voicemail 142 Guest termination to billing number (and defaults, see below) 10 143 Pager termination 144 Message delivery 145 Guest termination to Fax 146 Guest termination to Inactive Account 147 User termination to voice / fax mail 15 178 Op Assist User Call Completion 179 Op Assist Guest Termination to programmed number 336 Op Assist Guest Termination to Billing number 337 Op Assist Guest Termination to voicemail 338 Op Assist Guest Termination to Pager 20 339 Op Assist Guest Termination to Fax 340 Op Assist User Termination to voice/fax platform Billing Detail Records and OSR's for billing, and SCAI messaging for 25 reorigination, are populated as follows for the various directlineMCI Call Types: Bill Type 115 is not applicable for BDR's generated by the VFP (Call Types 144); because all these calls are originated at the VFP, they are all be billed 30 as domestically originated, using Bill Type 15. Guest termination to Inactive Account Billable Call? N Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 146 Terminating Number: Blank Billing Number Account number* + 0000 Originating Number Originating ANI Lj A La WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Termination Method 02 Termination Status 00** Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 3 OSR-Only Flag N OSR Entry Code 08 SCAI OIR Flagn/a SCAI BNOA n/a 5 * Account number refers to the user's 800/8xx access number ** Termination Status is suggested; other values may be more appropriate Guest Disconnect - call completion Billable Call N Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 140 OR 142 Terminating Number: Blank Billing Number 10 Account number + 0000 Originating Number Originating ANI Termination Method 01 Termination Status 262 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 3 OSR-Only Flag N OSR Entry Code 08 SCAI OIR Flagn/a SCAI BNOA n/a Guest Disconnect - call completion (Console) Billable Call 15 N Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 179 OR 336 Terminating Number: Blank Billing Number Account number + 0000 Originating Number Originating ANI Termination Method 01 Termination Status 262 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 3 OSR-Only Flag N OSR Entry Code 08 SCAI 20 OIR Flag n/a SCAI BNOA n/a A Guest Disconnect BDR may have a different Call Type, depending on at what point in the call flow the disconnect came Guest Disconnect - voicemail completion Billable Call N Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 141 Terminating Number: Blank Billing Number 25 Account number + 0000 Originating Number Originating ANI Termination Method 01 Termination Status 262 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 3 OSR-Only Flag N OSR Entry Code 08 SCAI OIR Flagn/a SCAI BNOA n/a Guest Disconnect - voicemail completion (Console) Billable 30 Call N Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 337 Terminating Number: Blank Billing Number Account number + 0000 Originating Number Originating ANI Termination Method 01 Termination Status 262 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 3 OSR-Only Flag N OSR Entry Code 08 SCAI bL1S WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 OIR Flag n/a SCAI BNOA n/a Guest Disconnect - fax completion Billable Call N Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 145 Terminating Number: Blank Billing Number 5 Account number + 0000 Originating Number Originating ANI Termination Method 01 Termination Status 262 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 3 OSR-Only Flag N OSR Entry Code 08 SCAI OIR Flagn/a SCAI BNOA n/a Guest Disconnect - fax completion (Console) Billable Call 10 N Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 339 Terminating Number: Blank Billing Number Account number + 0000 Originating Number Originating ANI Termination Method 01 Termination Status 262 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 3 OSR-Only Flag N OSR Entry Code 08 SCAI 15 OIR Flag n/a SCAI BNOA n/a Guest Disconnect - pager completion Billable Call N Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 140 OR 142 Terminating Number: Blank Billing Number Account number + 0000 Originating Number Originating 20 ANI Termination Method 01 Termination Status 262 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 3 OSR-Only Flag N OSR Entry Code 08 SCAI OIR Flagn/a SCAI BNOA n/a Guest Disconnect - call completion (Console) Billable CallN Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 179 OR 336 25 Terminating Number: Blank Billing Number Account number + 0000 Originating Number Originating ANI Termination Method 01 Termination Status 262 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 3 OSR-Only Flag N OSR Entry Code 08 SCAI OIR Flagn/a SCAI BNOA n/a 30 Guest termination to Fax - Mailbox full Billable Call? N Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 145 Terminating Number: Fax Routing Number Billing Number Account number + 0000 Originating Number Originating ANI Termination Method 03 Termination Status 257 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 3 OSR-Only Flag N OSR Entry Code 08 SCAI OIR FlagN SCAI BNOA 7C Guest termination to Fax - Mailbox full (Console) Billable Call? N Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 339 5 Terminating Number: Fax Routing Number Billing NumberAccount number + 0000 Originating Number Originating ANI Termination Method 03 Termination Status 257 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 3 OSR-Only Flag N OSR Entry Code 08 SCAI OIR FlagN SCAI BNOA 7C 10 Guest termination to Fax - Normal Billable Call? Y - Match/Merge Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 145 Terminating Number: Fax Routing Number Billing Number Account number + 0000 Originating Number Originating ANI Termination Method 00 Termination Status 15 257 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 3 OSR-Only Flag N OSR Entry Code 90 SCAI OIR Flag N SCAI BNOA 7C Guest termination to Fax Normal (Console) Billable Call? Y - Match/Merge Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 339 Terminating Number: Fax Routing Number 20 Billing Number Account number + 0000 Originating Number Originating ANI Termination Method 00 Termination Status 257 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 3 OSR-Only Flag N OSR Entry Code 90 SCAI OIR FlagN SCAI BNOA 7C 25 Guest Termination to Voicemail Billable Call? Y - Match/Merge Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 141 Terminating Number: Voicemail Routing Number Billing Number Account number + 0000 Originating Number Originating ANI Termination Method 00 Termination Status 30 257 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 3 OSR-Only Flag N OSR Entry Code 90 SCAI OIR Flag N SCAI BNOA 7C Guest Termination to Voicemail (Console) Billable Call? Y - Match/Merge Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 337 Terminating Number: Voicemail Routing 4A1' WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Number Billing Number Account number + 0000 Originating Number Originating ANI Termination Method 00 Termination Status 257 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 3 OSR-Only Flag N OSR Entry Code 90 SCAI OIR Flag N SCAI 5 BNOA7C Guest Term to Closing Message Billable Call ? N Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 140 OR 142 Terminating Number: Blank Billing Number Account number + 0000 Originating Number Originating ANI 10 Termination Method 02 Termination Status 00 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 3 OSR-Only Flag N OSR Entry Code 08 SCAI OIR Flagn/a SCAI BNOA n/a Guest Term to Closing Message (Console) Billable Call ? N Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 179 OR 336 Terminating 15 Number: Blank Billing Number Account number + 0000 Originating Number Originating ANI Termination Method 02 Termination Status 00 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 3 OSR-Only Flag N OSR Entry Code 08 SCAI OIR Flag n/a SCAI BNOA n/a__ 20 Guest Term to Closing Message - Voicemail handshake failure Billable Call ? N Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 141 Terminating Number: Blank Billing Number Account number + 0000 Originating Number Originating ANI Termination Method 02 Termination Status 25 00 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 3 OSR-Only Flag N OSR Entry Code 08 SCAI OIR Flag n/a SCAI BNOA n/a Guest Term to Closing Message - Voicemail handshake failure (Console) Billable Call ? N Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 337 Terminating Number: 30 Blank Billing Number Account number + 0000 Originating Number Originating ANI Termination Method 02 Termination Status 00 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 3 OSR-Only Flag N OSR Entry Code 08 SCAI OIR Flag n/a SCAI BNOA n/a__ hA 4 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Guest Term to Closing Message - Fax handshake failure Billable Call ? N Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 145 Terminating Number: Blank Billing Number Account number + 0000 Originating 5 Number Originating ANI Termination Method 02 Termination Status 00 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 3' OSR-Only Flag N OSR Entry Code 08 SCAI OIR Flag n/a SCAI BNOA n/a Guest Term to Closing Message - Fax handshake failure (Console) Billable Call ? N Bill 10 Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 339 Terminating Number: Blank Billing Number Account number + 0000 Originating Number Originating ANI Termination Method 02 Termination Status 00 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 3 OSR-Only Flag N OSR Entry Code 08 SCAI OIR Flagn/a SCAI 15 BNOAn/a_ Guest Term to Billing Number Billable Call? Y - Match/Merge Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 142 Terminating Number: Billing number Billing Number Account number + 0000 Originating Number 20 Originating ANI Termination Method 00 Termination Status 257 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 3 OSR-Only Flag N OSR Entry Code 90 SCAI OIR FlagN SCAI BNOA7C Guest Term to Billing Number (Console) Billable Call? Y - Match/Merge Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 336 25 Terminating Number: Billing number Billing Number Account number + 0000 Originating Number Originating ANI Termination Method 00 Termination Status 257 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 3 OSR-Only Flag N OSR Entry Code 90 SCAI OIR Flag N SCAI BNOA 7C 30 Guest term to Programmed Number Billable Call? Y - Match/Merge Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 140 Terminating Number: Programmed number Billing Number Account number + 0000 Originating Number Originating ANI Termination Method 00

MA

WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Termination Status 257 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 3 OSR-Only Flag N OSR Entry Code 90 SCAT OIR Flag N SCAT BNOA 7C Guest term to Programmed Number (Console) Billable Call? Y - Match/Merge Bill 5 Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 179 Terminating Number: Programmed number Billing Number Account number + 0000 Originating Number Originating ANT Termination Method 00 Termination Status 257 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 3 OSR-Only Flag N OSR Entry 10 Code 90 SCAT OIR FlagN SCAT BNOA 7C Guest Transfer to Operator Billable Call? N Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 140 OR 142 Terminating Number: Transfer Routing Number Billing Number Account number + 0000 Originating Number 15 Originating ANT Termination Method 03 Termination Status 257 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 3 OSR-Only Flag N OSR Entry Code 08 SCAT OIR FlagN SCAT BNOA7C 20 Guest termination to Pager Billable Call? Y - BDR Only Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 143 Terminating Number: Pager Routing Number Billing Number Account number + 0000 Originating Number Originating ANT Termination Method 00 Termination Status 257 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 3 25 Callback number OSR-Only Flag N OSR Entry Code 08 SCAT OIR Flag n/a SCAT BNOA n/a Guest termination to Pager (Console) Billable Call? Y - BDR Only Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 338 Terminating Number: Pager Routing Number Billing Number Account number + 0000 Originating Number Originating 30 ANT Termination Method 00 Termination Status 257 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 3 Callback number OSR-Only Flag N OSR Entry Code 08 SCAT OIR Flag n/a SCAT BNOA n/a_ /2o WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 User termination to voicemail - message retrieval Billable Call? Y Match/Merge Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 147 Terminating Number: Voicemail Routing Number Billing Number Account number + 0000 Originating Number Originating ANI Termination Method 00 5 Termination Status 257 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 3 OSR-Only Flag N OSR Entry Code 80 SCAI OIR FlagY SCAI BNOA 7C User termination to voicemail - message retrieval (Console) Billable Call?Y - Match/Merge Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 340 Terminating Number: 10 Voicemail Routing Number Billing Number Account number + 0000 Originating Number Originating ANI Termination Method 00 Termination Status 257 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 3 OSR-Only Flag N OSR Entry Code 80 SCAI OIR FlagY SCAI BNOA 7C_ 15 User termination to voicemail - administration call Billable Call? N Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 147 Terminating Number: Voicemail Routing Number Billing Number Account number + 0000 Originating Number Originating ANI Termination Method 03 20 Termination Status 257 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 3 OSR-Only Flag N OSR Entry Code 08 SCAI OIR FlagY SCAI BNOA 7C__ User Call Completion Billable Call? Y - Match/Merge Bill Type: 15 25 OR 115 Call Type: 138 Terminating Number: Customer Input/Speed Dial ANI Billing Number Account number + 0000 Originating Number Originating ANI Termination Method 00 Termination Status 257 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 3 OSR-Only Flag N OSR Entry Code 80 SCAI OIR FlagY SCAI 30 BNOA7C User Call Completion - Console Billable Call? Y Match/Merge Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 178 Terminating Number: Customer Input/ Speed Dial ANI Billing Number Account number + 0000 Originating Number Originating ANI Termination Method 00 Termination Status 257 Miscellaneous 1 Account 02A WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 number Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 3 OSR-Only Flag N OSR Entry Code 80 SCAI OIR FlagY SCAI BNOA 7C Subscriber Administration Call Billable Call? N Bill Type: 15 OR 115 5 Call Type: 139 Terminating Number: Blank Billing Number Account number + 0000 Originating Number Originating ANI Termination Method 08 Termination Status 257 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Programmed information Miscellaneous 3 OSR-Only Flag N OSR Entry Code 08 SCAI 10 OIR Flag n/a SCAI BNOA n/a Subscriber Disconnect - programming or no choice at User Menu Billable Call? N Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 139 Terminating Number: Blank Billing Number Account number + 0000 Originating 15 Number Originating ANI Termination Method 01 Termination Status 262 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Programmed information Miscellaneous 3 OSR-Only Flag N OSR Entry Code 08 SCAI OIR Flagn/a SCAI BNOA n/a Subscriber Disconnect - No choice at User Menu (Console) Billable 20 Call? N Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 340 Terminating Number: Blank Billing Number Account number + 0000 Originating Number Originating ANI Termination Method 01 Termination Status 262 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Programmed information Miscellaneous 3 OSR-Only Flag N 25 OSR Entry Code 08 SCAI OIR Flagn/a SCAI BNOA n/a Subscriber Disconnect - call completion Billable Call? N Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 138 Terminating Number: Blank Billing Number Account number + 0000 Originating Number Originating ANI 30 Termination Method 01 Termination Status 262 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Programmed information Miscellaneous 3 OSR-Only Flag N OSR Entry Code 08 SCAI OIR Flag n/a SCAI BNOA n/a Subscriber Disconnect - call completion (Console) Billable Call? N Bill Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 178 Terminating Number: Blank Billing Number Account number + 0000 Originating Number Originating ANI Termination Method 01 Termination Status 262 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Programmed information Miscellaneous 3 5 OSR-Only Flag N OSR Entry Code 08 SCAI OIR Flagn/a SCAI BNOAn/a User Transfer to Customer Service Billable Call? N Bill Type:70 Call Type: 52 Terminating Number: Transfer Routing Number Billing 10 Number Account number + 0000 Originating Number Originating ANI Termination Method 03 Termination Status 257 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 3 OSR-Only Flag N OSR Entry Code 08 SCAI OIR FlagN SCAI BNOA7C User Transfer to Operator Billable Call? N Bill 15 Type: 15 OR 115 Call Type: 138 Terminating Number: Transfer Routing Number Billing Number Account number + 0000 Originating Number Originating ANI Termination Method 03 Termination Status 257 Miscellaneous 1 Account number Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 3 OSR-Only Flag N OSR Entry Code 08 SCAI 20 OIR Flag N SCAI BNOA 7C The following are the new directlineMCI scripts for the automated response unit (ARU), referencing the corresponding call flow diagram on which they 25 appear: Call Flow Diagram IV Number ARU Script Number Text All 7330001 1 Press 1. 7330002 2 Press 2. 30 7330003 3 Press 3. 7330004 4 Press 4. 7330005 5 Press 5. 7330006 6 Press 6. 7330007 7 Press 7. 4Z'3 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 7330008 8 Press 8. 7330009 9 Press 9. 7330010 10 Press 0. 7330011 11 Press* 5 7330012 12 Press 1 7330101 101 I'm sorry, calls are not being accepted at this time. 2 7330201 201 Welcome to directlineMCI! 3 7330301 301 To speak to your party 10 7330302 302 To leave a voicemail message 7330303 303 To send a fax 7330304 304 To send a page 7330306 306 Please hold while I transfer you to voicemail. 15 7330307 307 I'm sorry, your party's mailbox is full 7330308 308 Please hold to send a fax. 4 7330401 401 Your party has requested that you leave a voicemail message. 7330403 403 Your party has requested that you send a page. 20 7330404 404 Please hold while I try to reach your party. 7330405 405 I am still trying to reach your party. Please continue to hold 7330406 406 I am unable to reach your party at this time. 25 6 7330408 408 May I please have your name? 7330409 409 Please hold while I transfer you to the operator. 7 7330701 701 You have a call from 30 7330702 702 at ... 7330703 703 an undetermined location. 7330704 704 an international location. 8 7330801 801 To accept the call 7330802 802 To send your caller to voicemail (i2L WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 7330803 803 To have your caller try again later 7330805 805 Your caller will be asked to leave a voicemail message. 7330806 806 Your caller will be asked to try again later. 5 7330807 807 I'm sorry, your caller has disconnected. 7330809 809 Please try your call again later. 9 7330901 901 I'm sorry, I am unable to access voicemail at this time. 7330902 902 I'm sorry, I am unable to access faxmail at this 10 time. 10 7331001 1001 Please enter your call-back number, followed by the # sign. 7331002 1002 willbe sent 7331003 1003 To re-enter your call-back number 15 7331004 1004 To continue 7331006 1006 No entry was received. 7331007 1007 Thankyou. Yourpage has been sent. 7331008 1008 I'm sorry, I am unable to complete your page. 20 7331101 1101 I was not able to reach your party. 11 7331102 1102 Please hold to send a page or try your call again later. 12 7331207 1207 To send a page, press 1; or, please try your call again later. 25 13 7331301 1301 Welcome to User Programming! 7331302 1302 Your mailbox is full. Please delete your saved messages. 7331303 1303 You have 7331304 1304 new voicemail and 30 7331305 1305 new fax messages. 7331306 1306 no 7331307 1307 To change your call routing 7331308 1308 To send or retrieve mail 7331309 1309 To ple a acall 142.5 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 7331310 1310 For account maintenance 7331311 1311 To reach customer service from any menu 7331313 1313 Please hold to retrieve your voice and fax 5 messages. 7331314 1314 For a domestic call, enter the area code and number. 7331315 1315 For an international call, enter 0 1 1 and the number. 10 7331316 1316 Please enter the phone or speed-dial number, followed by the # sign. 7331317 1317 For operator assistance ... 14 7331401 1401 I'm sorry, I am unable to access your voice/fax mailbox at this time. 15 7331403 1403 I'm sorry, I am unable to access your distribution lists at this time. 7331404 1404 I'm sorry, I am unable to record your mailbox name at this time. 15 7331501 1501 To change Find-Me routing 20 7331502 1502 To change override routing 7331503 1503 To change final routing 7331504 1504 To cancel and return to the previous menu 7331507 1507 Override routing is currently set to 25 7331508 1508 voicemail. 7331509 1509 pager. 7331510 1510 your Find-Me sequence. 7331512 1512 Your override routing is currently turned off. 30 7331513 1513 To set override routing to a telephone number 7331514 1514 To set override routing to voicemail 7331515 1515 To set override routing to your pager 7331516 1516 To set override routing to your Find-Me WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 sequence 7331517 1517 To turn off override routing 7331519 1519 Your final routing is currently set to 7331520 1520 the voicemail or pager option. 5 7331523 1523 a closing message. 7331525 1525 To set finalrouting to the voicemail or pager option 7331526 1526 To set finalrouting to your voicemail 7331527 1527 To set finalrouting to your pager 10 7331528 1528 To set finalrouting to a closing message 16 7331601 1601 Your Find-Me routing is set to your schedule. 7331602 1602 Your Find-Me routing is set to your three number sequence. 15 7331604 1604 To change to your three-number sequence 7331606 1606 To save and continue 17 7331701 1701 To change your first number 7331702 1702 To change your second number 20 7331703 1703 To change your third number 7331704 1704 To review all three numbers 7331705 1705 To change to schedule routing 7331708 1708 Your first number is set to 7331709 1709 Your second number is set to 25 7331710 1710 Your third number is set to 7331711 1711 Your second number is currently not programmed. 7331712 1712 Your third number is currently not programmed. 30 7331713 1713 You do not have a schedule set up at this time. Please contact customer service. 18 7331801 1801 To create or update your lists. 7331802 1802 To record your greeting or mailbox name 7331803 1803 To activate or deactivate features WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 7331806 1806 For broadcast lists 7331807 1807 For speed-dial numbers 7331808 1808 Please hold to update broadcast lists. 7331809 1809 For your personal greeting 5 7331810 1810 For your mailbox name 7331811 1811 Please hold to record your mailbox name. 7331812 1812 Your current greeting is 19 7331901 1901 To change speed-dial number 7331911 1911 Speed-dial number 10 7331912 1912 issetto 7331913 1913 is currently not programmed. 7331914 1914 To record a new greeting 7331915 1915 To use the system greeting 7331916 1916 Begin recording after the tone. 15 7331917 1917 To reviewyour greeting 7331918 1918 To re-record your greeting 7331921 1921 Your callers will now hear the system greeting. 7331922 1922 Your new greeting has been saved. 20 20 7334000 4000 To set caller- screening 7334001 4001 To activate or deactivate your pager 7334002 4002 To set pager notification 7334003 4003 To activate or deactivate your account 7334005 4005 Caller-screening is set to 25 7334006 4006 Caller-screening is currently turned off. 7334007 4007 number only. 7334008 4008 name only. 7334009 4009 name and number. 7334010 4010 To set caller- screening to number only 30 7334011 4011 To set caller-screening to name only 7334012 4012 To set caller- screening to name and number 7334013 4013 To turn off caller- screening 7334015 4015 Your callers will be given the option to page you. 7331922 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 7334016 4016 Your callers will not be given the option to page you. 7334017 4017 Your account has been activated. 5 7334018 4018 Your account has been deactivated. 7334019 4019 You are currently being paged for 7334020 4020 new voicemail messages. 7334021 4021 new fax messages. 7334022 4022 new voicemail and fax messages. 10 7334023 4023 Pager notification is currently turned off. 7334024 4024 To be paged for voicemail messages 7334025 4025 To be paged for fax messages 7334026 4026 To be paged for voice and fax messages 7334027 4027 To turn off pager notification 15 21 7334101 4101 For a domestic number, enter the area code and number. 7334102 4102 For an international number, enter 0 11 and the number. 7334103 4103 To erase this number 20 7334105 4105 To re-enter the number 7334107 4107 Your override routing will be deactivated. 7334108 4108 Your override routing will be changed to 7334111 4111 Please hold for customer service. 7334112 4112 Your finalrouting will be changed to 25 7334116 4116 Your first number will be changed to 7334117 4117 Your second number will be erased. 7334118 4118 Your second number will be changed to 7334119 4119 Your third number will be erased. 7334120 4120 Your third number will be changed to 30 7334121 4121 This speed-dial number will be erased. 7334122 4122 This speed-dial number will be changed to 7334123 4123 Your caller-screening will be turned off. 7334124 4124 Your caller-screening will be changed to 4rly WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 7334128 4128 Your pager notification will be turned off. 7334129 4129 You will be paged for 22 7330309 309 That option is not available. 23 7330102 102 That entry is invalid. 5 7330103 103 Please re-enter your passcode. 24 7334401 4401 I'm sorry, domestic calls are not available. 7334403 4403 I'm sorry, calls to that number are blocked. 25 7332501 2501 I'm sorry, international calls are not available. 10 26 7332601 2601 I'm sorry, you may not program a domestic number. 27 7332701 2701 I'm sorry, you may not program an international number. 15 The following are the new directlineMCI scripts for the Console Application: Call Flow Diagram Console Script NumberText 1 14160 Welcome to directlineMCI Calls are not currently being accepted on this account {Courtesy Close} 20 22008 MCI Operator! How may I help you reach your party? 22005 MCI Operator! {Press User Prog if caller is account owner} 2 22033 Your party has requested that you leave a voicemail 25 message; please hold {Procedure Call} 22034 Your party has requested that you send a page {Procedure Call} 22037 Please try your call again later {Courtesy Close} 3 22031 Please hold while I try to reach your party. {Procedure 30 Call} 15848 MCI Operator! Please hold while I try to reach your party {Proc Call} 15844 I am still trying to reach your party; please continue to hold {Proc Call} 43(0 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 15849 MCI Operator! I am still trying to reach your party; please continue to hold {Proc Call} 33000 {Press YES if answered, BUSY if busy, NO if no answer after 4-5 rings, ANS MACH for Answer Machine.} 5 4 22036 This is the MCI Operator. You have a call from NAME and/or ANI; would you like to speak to your caller? 15845 I'm sorry, I'm unable to reach your party at this time {Proc Call} 22032 Thank you; your call is connected {Proc Call} 10 5 7115 Please hold while I transfer you to voicemail {Proc Call} 22900 I'm sorry, your party's voice mailbox is full {Procedure Call} 22104 I'm sorry, I'm unable to access voicemail at this time {Procedure Call} 15 22340 Please hold to send a fax {Procedure Call} 22105 I'm sorry, I'm unable to access faxmail at this time {Procedure Call} 6 15865 What callback number would you like to send? 15866 MCI Operator! What callback number would you like 20 to send? 22375 Please hold while your page is sent {Procedure Call} 15863 Your page has been sent. Thank you! {Disconnect} 25 15693 I'm sorry; I'm unable to complete your page {Procedure Call} 22035 What is your name, please? 7 15860 I'm sorry, I'm unable to reach your party at this time; would you like to send a page? 30 22040 Would you like to send a page? 15842 I'm sorry, I'm unable to reach your party at this time; please try your call again later {Courtesy Close 8 22038 I'm sorry, I'm unable to reach your party at this time; would you like to leave a voicemail message, or send a page? 3A WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 9 22003 May I please have your passcode? 22102 Please repeat your passcode 22017 I'm sorry; that is not a valid passcode {Offer Customer Service or disconnect} 5 10 22901 Your mailbox is full; please delete your saved messages {Procedure Call} 22902 You have X new voicemail and Y new fax messages {Procedure Call} 22400 How may I help you? 10 22904 Please hold for your voice and fax messages. {Procedure Call} 11 22905 I'm sorry; I'm unable to access your voice / fax mailbox {Procedure Call} 22906 What number do you wish to dial? {Enter number or 15 1-digit Speed Dial number} 22908 MCI Operator! What number do you wish to dial? {Enter number of 1-digit Speed Dial number} 22907 Thank you; please hold while your call is connected {Procedure Call} 20 13 15063 I'm sorry; domestic termination are not available {Procedure Call} 15053 I'm sorry ; that is not a valid domestic number {Procedure Call} 15057 I'm sorry; calls to that number are blocked {Procedure 25 Call} 14 15061 I'm sorry; international termination are not available {Procedure Call} 15051 I'm sorry; that is not a valid international number {Procedure Call} 30 16001 (Press GEN ASST to process a No D-Dial Call} ARU impacts are described in detail below, as well as in the call flow diagrams. User input L4324 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 In general, throughout the call flow, at every opportunity for user/caller input, the possibility of response delay is minimized as much as possible. Following are some examples: During 'guest' portion of the call, the subscriber may enter '*', at which time 5 the NIDS Audio Server (NAS) begins to collect 6 passcode digits, applying an inter-digit timeout. During playing of the Guest Menu, a single key pressed results in an immediate response, unless the key pressed is the '*' key, at which point the NAS collects six passcode digits 10 During playing of any User Menu, a single key pressed results in an immediate response, except in the Outbound Call menu. Because a domestic telephone number, an international telephone number, or a Speed Dial number can be entered here, the system allows the user to press '#', which indicates the end of dialed digits. The '#' is accepted whether it's 15 entered following a single digit entry or a string of digits, i.e. a telephone number. At any place in the call flow where the user is able to enter a domestic or international number, the '#' key must be accepted to indicate the end of 20 dialed digits. This includes during programming of the First, Second or Third Find-Me numbers, Override Routing to POTS and Speed Dial numbers. Where possible, the ability for the user to 'power dial' is built into the call 25 flow. This means that, in the event that multiple keys are pressed, scripting is bypassed and the appropriate menu is reached. One access method is supported for directlineMCI in this embodiment: 800/8xx number access, with no PIN. The PIN field in the database is defaulted to 0000. 30 Billed Number Screening (Fraud) Validation All directlineMCI calls received are subject to a Billed Number Screening validation, to verify that the number has not been tagged as a Fraud risk. The lookup is into Category 5, Type 0; the flag checked is the Credit Card (Hot) flag. In the event that the number has been 'shut down', i.e. the Hot 433 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 flag is set to 'Y', the application treats the call as an off-line account, but does not allow a subscriber to access programming options. WorldPhone Callers are able to access the directlineMCI platform via WorldPhone. In a 5 preferred embodiment, these calls arrive at the directline platform with a pseudo-ANI in the Originating Number field of the SCAI message. This pseudo-ANI is associated with the specific Feature Group A (FGA) circuit on which the WorldPhone call extension was launched. In another embodiment, the true originating country information is forwarded to the 10 directline platform; the Originating Number field is populated with the 3 digit Country Code. In a preferred embodiment, the WorldPhone-originated directline call is billed as follows: Calls originating via WorldPhone, and arriving at the directline platform 15 with a pseudo-ANI as the origination, are billed as domestic, using Bill Type 15. The Originating Number field in the BDR is the FGA pseudo-ANI. In another embodiment, the call is billed as follows: The ARU and Console implement code to identify whether the Originating Number field contains a pseudo-ANI or true origination information. If the 20 true Country Code origination information is provided, the application refers to its configuration files, where a WorldPhone pseudo-ANI is an optional entry. The existence of this item in the configuration file indicates to the application how the call should be billed. If the application finds a WorldPhone pseudo-ANI in its config file, the call 25 is billed as domestic, using Bill Type 15. The Calling Number in the BDR is set to that WorldPhone pseudo-ANI, and the application instructs the bridging switch to change its Originating Number to that same pseudo-ANI. If the application does not find the WorldPhone pseudo-ANI in its config file, the call is billed as international, using Bill Type 115, and the Originating 30 Number information is retained in the switch record. The BDR is populated with a 10-digit string: '19 1' + 3-digit Country Code + '0000'. Guest call routing is prescribed by the directlineMCI subscriber in several ways, as described in the following paragraphs: WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Blocking checks for guest termination, based on origination, are included below. Call Routing Two options are provided to the user in defining Call Routing: the Find-Me 5 sequence, and the Schedule sequence. With the exception of Schedule definition, the user has the ability to define Call Routing via DTMF. 3-Number Find-Me Sequence If the user has chosen the Find-Me sequence for his Call Routing, the application launches a call to the user's Primary (First) programmed 10 number. If a live answer is received, the guest caller is connected with the answering party. Call screening, described below, may be active, in which case the answering party must actively accept the call before it is connected. If the line at the First number is busy, the call is routed to the user's programmed Alternate Routing, described below. If no answer is 15 detected after a configurable time, the application launches a call to the user's Secondary (Second) programmed number. Answer treatment at the Second number is the same as for a call attempt to the First number with no answer resulting in a call attempt to the user's Tertiary (Third) number. Answer treatment at the Third number is the 20 same, with no answer resulting in Alternate Routing. If, at any point in this calling sequence, a termination slot is not programmed, the application skips that number in the sequence, and proceed to the next number, or Alternate Routing. For any programmed international termination, the application looks up 25 the terminating country code in the Country Code tables. If the Direct Dial Country flag is set to 'Y' for that country, the ARU transfers the call to the manual console (TTC =le) for processing. 2-Level Schedule Sequence If the user has chosen the Schedule sequence for his Call Routing, the 30 application takes the Schedule 1 Trans and Schedule 2 Trans fields to use as keys into the 800 Translation database to retrieve schedule information. From the user's two schedule translations, and using the current day and time, the First and Second Schedule numbers are determined. A call is launched to the First Schedule number, and answer treatment is WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 as described in the Find-Me sequence, with no answer resulting in a call attempt to the Second Schedule number. Answer treatment at the Second Schedule number is the same, with no answer resulting in Alternate Routing. 5 Again, if at any point in the Schedule calling sequence, a terminating number cannot be found, the application skips that slot in the sequence, and proceeds to the next number, or Alternate Routing. The user's schedule is set up during Order Entry, and is not user updatable via DTMF. At Order Entry, the user is asked to define his 10 schedule by Date, Day of Week, Time of Day (in 30 minute increments), and by Time Zone. Override Routing The option is available, via DTMF, for the user to disable the presentation of the Guest Menu by prescribing specific routing for all guest callers. Via 15 Override Routing, the user is able to: route callers to a single telephone number, have callers leave a voicemail message, have callers page him, or route callers through his programmed Call Routing (Find-Me or Schedule). If the user has programmed Override Routing to route to a telephone number, no answer at that number results in Alternate Routing treatment. 20 Alternate Routing Alternate Routing allows the user to define, via DTMF, the treatment of a caller for whom an attempt to reach the subscriber has been made, but no answer was received. Alternate Routing options include Voicemail, Pager, Closing Message, or the Guest Option of Voicemail or Pager. The default for 25 Alternate Routing, if not programmed, is the playing of the Closing Message. Default Routing The user is able to prescribe at Order Entry the treatment for a caller who, when presented the Guest Menu, does not respond after two attempts. The 30 Default Routing options are: a transfer to the Operator (TTC = 67), where the Guest menu is presented again, a telephone number, with no answer resulting in Alternate Routing, Voicemail, or Call Routing (Find-Me or Schedule). The default for Default Routing, if it's not programmed, is the Operator transfer.

WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Call Screening The user may choose to have Call Screening invoked, to announce all guest callers. Call Screening options include pre-programming of Name Only, ANI Only, Name and ANI, and No Call Screening. The user has the ability 5 to program Call Screening via DTMF. When Name Only or Name and ANI screening is programmed, the caller's name is recorded. If the caller does not respond to the prompt, and nothing is recorded, the system will default to ANI Only screening. When an answer 10 is received at a terminating telephone number, the caller's Name and/or ANI is played and the answering party is asked to accept or reject the call. If the call is accepted, the caller is connected. If Caller Screening includes ANI screening, and the originating number is a Country Code, the scripts '... an international location' will be played in place of the ANI. 15 If the call is rejected, or no response is received from the answering party, the caller is asked to leave a voicemail message, or the Closing Message is played, if the user has not subscribed to Voicemail. Timeout Parameters Timeout values are defined, in seconds, in the directlineMCI database for 20 the following termination: For this termination: Use this timeout value: First Find-Me Primary Timeout Second Find-Me Secondary Timeout Third Find-Me Tertiary Timeout 25 Schedule 1 Primary Timeout Schedule 2 Secondary Timeout Override Routing, if telephone number Override Timeout Default Routing, if telephone number Default Timeout 30 These timeout values are defaulted to 25 (seconds), but the user is allowed to change them via Customer Service. Call Connection times Call connection delays, when a guest call to a programmed termination is completed, are minimized as much as possible. 4i31 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Answer detection For all call attempts to a telephone number, treatment on detection of an answering machine is defined by the Roll on Machine Detect flag (State flag, bit 9). If this flag is set to 'N', the caller is connected to the answering 5 machine . If the flag is set to 'Y', the application routes to the next number in the calling sequence or Alternate Routing. Current answer detection performance on the ISN is as follows: The NAS correctly detects a live answer at 99% reliability; a machine is correctly 10 detected at 67% reliability. For any Answer Detection responses not addressed specifically in this requirement, Fast-Busy for example, treatment is as described for a No Answer condition. 15 Programmed Number Validation The user has the ability to program a telephone number in his First, Second, and Third Find-Me numbers, and Override Routing. Before a number is accepted for programming, the application makes the following validation checks: 20 Domestic numbers The Domestic Terms flag (PIN bit 1) is examined to ensure that the user is authorized to program a domestic number The International Blocking database is queried, using Category 000, Type 002, and the programmed NPA, looking for a pattern match, to ensure that 25 the programmed number is not a blocked Information/Adult Services number. The Exchange Master is examined to determine whether the termination is an NADP number. If so, Country Set blocking is applied. The Pseudo 30 Country Code (PCC) associated with the programmed number is validated against the Country Set found in the directlineMCI Property Record. If that PCC is blocked, programming to that number is not allowed. International numbers.

WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 The International Terms flag (PIN bit 2) is examined to ensure that the user is authorized to program a international number. The Country Set from the directlineMCI Property Record is retrieved, and 5 the application verifies that the programmed Country Code is not blocked for that Country Set. Blocking checks for programming guest termination are included below. The Call Flow diagram depicts the various situations for which a transfer to 10 the Voice/Fax Platform (VFP) is necessary. A transfer is implemented using the routing number in the Voicemail Route Number field of the customer record. In order to 'mask' some of the delay in call extension to the VFP, the call is 15 extended before the 'please hold' script is played to the caller. Call extension delay is reduced additionally by removing inter-digit timeouts, as described previously. After launching a call and playing the script, the application awaits answer detection, at which time the user's directlineMCI access number (800/8xx number) is out-pulsed to the VFP, followed by a 20 '*', then a single mode digit, which indicates to the VFP the type of transfer to process, followed by a '#'. The mode indicator is one of the values, described in the table that follows. To ensure that the information has been received and validated by the VFP, the application awaits the playing of two DTMF '00' tones from the VFP, then the caller is connected. 25 Mode indicator Transfer type 1 Guest voicemail 2 Guest fax with voice annotation 3 Guest fax without annotation 30 4 User voice/fax retrieval 5 User list maintenance 6 User recording of mailbox name A VFP transfer attempt is considered failed if two handshake attempts have 428~ WO 98/47298 PCTUS9' .7927 failed. If a Guest transfer to voice or faxmail fails during Override, Default, or Alternate Routing, the guest caller is asked to try his call again later. If a Guest transfer fails on a Guest Menu choice, the menu will be presented again. If a user transfer to voice or faxmail fails, a script will be played, 5 informing the user of the failure, and the user is returned to the previous menu. A guest fax transfer without annotation occurs when, at the outset of the call, fax tone is detected. Fax tone detection is independent of the 10 presentation of the welcome message, so the length of the greeting has no effects on the reliable detection of fax tones. When a user accesses User Programming, the application presents the count of new voicemail messages, new fax messages, and a full mailbox 15 message, if applicable. The application queries this information from the VFP via the VFPTrans Service. The user also has the ability to define, via DTMF, whether he would like a pager notification of new voice and fax messages. Pager notification options 20 are: Voicemail notification, Fax notification, notification of both Voicemail and Fax, and No notification. Pager notification settings are stored in the Page on Vmail flag (PIN bit 15) and Page on Fax flag (PIN bit 16). 25 Paging The option to page the subscriber is one of the choices presented at the guest menu. In addition, the guest may be asked to send a page, according to the user's programmed Override or Alternate Routing. 30 In sending a page, the application requests the callback number from the caller. The user's customer record contains the following information used in processing the page: the Pager Access Number, used in launching the call to the pager company, the user's Pager PIN, and the Pager Type, which points to a configurable dial string for communicating the page information. )A4< WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 The dial string provides the timeout value for waiting for answer detection, the delay following answer detection, the number of PIN digits to DTMF, and any termination characters needed, for example '#. 5 If a caller disconnects after entering a callback number, the page is completed and billed. Pager types supported are as follows: Pager Type Pager Company Pager dial string Pager Access Number 10 1 SkyTel/MTel A180T32R7D#ED# 6019609560 2 AirTouch A180T32R7D#ED# 6019609560 3 Mobile Media A180T32R7D#ED# 6019609560 4 AirSignal/McCaw A180T32R7D#ED# 6019609560 15 5 American Paging A180T32R7D#ED# 6019609560 6 Mobile Comm A180T136R6T18ET32 8009464646* 7 MCI Page A180T136R7T18ET32 8006247243* 8 MCI Word A180T136R7T18ET32 8006247243* * 800-access numbers will be routed via the DAP-looparound at the 20 bridging switches. The user has the ability to enable/disable the presentation of pager as a guest menu option. When pager is disabled, it is not presented at the Guest Menu, nor is it presented to the user in programming Override or 25 Alternate Routing. The Guest Option of Voicemail or Pager also is removed from Alternate Routing programming choices. If Override Routing is set to Pager, and pager has been turned off, the call is handled as if Override were not populated. If Alternate Routing is set to Pager, and pager has been turned off, the caller is routed to voicemail, if he has it, or the closing 30 message is presented. These are the default treatments for Override and Alternate Routing. The Pager On/Off flag (State bit 13) is where the pager's enabled/disabled status is stored. In addition to the pager enable/disable ability, the user can define pager 44A WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 notification options, as described in the Voicemail/Faxmail section of this description. The VFP performs pages for notification of new voice and fax messages, and supports those pager types supported by the ISN. The status Pager On/Off flag has no impact on pager notification; the user is 5 required to set Pager Notification to No Notification, in order to receive no notification of new messages. Outbound Dialing The user has the ability to make a call, billing the call to his directlineMCI 10 account. This option is presented at the Main User Programming menu. Outbound calling options include: Domestic termination, dependent on the Domestic Completion flag (State bit 4), International termination, dependent on the International Compilations flag (State bit 5), and programmed Speed Dial termination, dependent on the Speed Dial 15 Completion flag (State bit 6). For any requested international completion, the application looks up the terminating country code in the Country Code tables. If the Direct Dial Country flag is set to 'Y' for that country, the ARU transfers the call to the 20 manual console (TTC =9d) for processing. The following validation checks are made before a call is completed for a subscriber: 25 Domestic numbers The Domestic Compilations flag must be set to Y' The International Blocking database is queried, using Category 000, Type 002, and the programmed NPA, looking for a pattern match, to ensure that 30 the programmed number is not a blocked Information/Adult Services number. The Exchange Master is examined to determine whether the termination is an NANP number. If so, Country Set blocking is applied using the Country 442..- WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Set found in the directline AuthCode Property record. In the case of a subscriber calling in from an international location, the Country Sets from both the Property Record of the originating country and from the directlineMCI Property Record are retrieved, and the application verifies 5 that the PCC is not blocked for either Country Set. The Property Record for an originating country is looked up using '191'+3-digit Country Code+'0000' as key into the Property Record database. International numbers 10 The International Compilations flag must be set to 'Y' The Country Set from the directlineMCI Property Record is retrieved, and the application verifies that the destination Country Code is not blocked for that Country Set. In the case of an international origination, the Country Sets from both the Property Record of the originating country and from the 15 directlineMCI Property Record are retrieved, and the application verifies that the destination Country Code is not blocked for either Country Set. Blocking checks for user call compilations, based on origination, and for programming Speed Dial numbers, are included below. 20 Reorigination A caller may reoriginate from a call completion, either to the VFP or a telephone number, by pressing the # key for 2 seconds. The switch verifies that reorigination is permitted for that call, and if so, it delivers the caller 25 back to the ISN. The status of a reoriginating caller is derived from the value in the Val Stat field of the BDR of the original call. The following table defines possible values for that field and what each value indicates: 30 Val Stat Value Caller Type Disposition of Original Call Reoriginatable? 200 Subscriber Call Completion Y 201 Subscriber Voice Mail Y 202 Subscriber Fax * n/a WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 100 GuestOff-Line N 101 GuestPrimary N 102 GuestSecondary N 103 GuestTertiary N 5 104 GuestOverride N 105 Guest Closing Message N 112 GuestVoice Mail N 113 GuestPager N 114 GuestFax N 10 * Unused - Currently there is no differentiation between subscriber access to voice mail and subscriber access to fax mail; it will be indicated with a Val Stat of 201 Additionally, # Reorigination is made available to the subscriber from 15 completion to the voice mail/fax mail platform. This is done with two changes to the data populated in the switch record (OSR), as indicated in the Billing section. Subscriber reorigination A subscriber reorigination is identified as such via the Val Stat field of the 20 original call, and the User Programming menu is presented. A subscriber who has completed to the voice/faxmail platform or to a telephone number is allowed to reoriginate. Console Impact Console impacts are described in detail in the following sections, as well as 25 in the call flow diagrams. ARU Transfers The Console receives transfers from the ARU for the following reasons. Treatment for these transfers is indicated in the Console call flow diagrams. TTC Transfer Reason Text 30 le Guest call completion requiring Operator assistance 'Guest call requires Operator assistance' 64 Third non-entry at pager callback number prompt 'Pager callback number not entered properly' 67 Request or timeout at Guest Menu 'Requested transfer or time 444 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 out at Main menu' 9d Subscriber call completion requiring Operator assistance 'Subscriber call requires Operator assistance' 5 Access Method Refer to the Access Method section in ARU Impacts. Direct Calling Refer to the Direct Calling section in ARU Impacts., with the following exception: 10 Default Routing Default Routing does not have an impact on the Console, except when it's been programmed or defaulted to Operator Transfer. In this case, the call will be handled as a new call, with the Guest Menu presented. Voicemail / Faxmail 15 Refer to the Voicemail/Faxmail section in ARU Impacts. Paging Refer to the Paging section in ARU Impacts. Outbound Dialing Refer to the Outbound Dialing section in ARU Impacts. 20 Reorigination Refer to the Reorigination section in ARU Impacts. Flag Dependencies Flag dependencies are shown in the following table: 25 Diagram MenuMenu Item Dependencies 3 Guest Menu Leave a voicemail message VMail Flag Send a fax Fax Termination Flag Send a pagePager Termination Flag AND Pager On/Off Flag 30 (Passcode) Program (Follow-Me) Flag 13 User Main Menu Change Call Routing Find-Me Flag AND (Domestic TerminationsFlag OR International Termination Flag OR Vmail Flag OR Pager Termination Flag) WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Send / Retrieve Mail VMail Flag OR Fax Termination Flag Place a Call Domestic Completion Flag OR International Completion Flag OR Speed Dial Completion Flag 5 Administration Vmail Flag OR Fax Termination Flag OR Speed Dial Programming Flag OR Greeting Recording OR Call Screening Programming Flag OR Pager Termination Flag OR Avail Programming Flag Place a Call Speed Dial Number Speed Dial Compilations Flag 10 Domestic Number Domestic Compilations Flag International Number International Compilations Flag 15 Change Routing Find-Me Routing Domestic TerminationsFlag 15 OR International Termination Flag Override Routing Domestic TerminationsFlag OR International Termination Flag OR Vmail Flag OR Pager Termination Flag Alternate Routing Vmail Flag OR Pager Termination Flag 20 Override Routing POTS Domestic Termination is Flag OR International Termination Flag Voicemail Vmail Flag Pager Pager Termination Flag 25 Find-Me Domestic TerminationsFlag OR International Termination Flag Alternate Routing Guest Option Vmail Flag AND Pager Termination Flag Voicemail Vmail Flag 30 Pager Pager Termination Flag 17 Change 3-Number Sequence First Number Domestic TerminationsFlag OR International Termination Flag Second Number Domestic TerminationsFlag OR International Termination Flag WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Third Number Domestic TerminationsFlag OR International Termination Flag Change to Schedule Routing Schedule 1 Flag AND Schedule 2 Flag 5 18 Administration List Maintenance VMail Flag OR Fax Termination Flag OR Speed Dial Programming Flag Record Greetings Greeting Recording Flag OR Vmail Flag OR Fax Termination Flag Activate / Deactivate Features Call Screening Programming 10 Flag OR Pager Termination Flag OR VMail Flag OR Fax Termination Flag OR Avail Programming Flag Lists Broadcast Lists VMail Flag OR Fax Termination Flag Speed Dial Lists Speed Dial Programming Flag Greetings Welcome Greeting Recording Flag 15 Mailbox Name VMail Flag OR Fax Termination Flag 20 Feature ActivationCall Screening Call Screening Programming Flag Activate / Deactivate Pager Pager Termination Flag Pager Notification Options Pager Termination Flag AND 20 (VMail Flag OR Fax Termination Flag) Activate / Deactivate Account Available Programming Flag Pager Notification Voicemail Only VMail Flag Fax Only Fax Termination Flag 25 Voicemail and Fax VMail Flag AND Fax Termination Flag 21 Program Domestic number Domestic Flag International number International Flag 30 Blocking Checks This description does not include flags checks; it discusses Country Set, 'Adult Services' (976), and Inter-NANP Blocking. Where needed, a default ANI Property record is used for Country Set Blocking. 441 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 976 blocking is implemented as follows: The International Blocking database is queried, using Category 000, Type 002, , and the programmed NPA, looking for a pattern match, to ensure that the programmed number is not a blocked Information/Adult 5 Services number. If a match is found, the call/programming is not allowed. Inter-NANP blocking is implemented as follows: The Exchange Master is examined to determine whether the termination is an NANP number. If so, the Intra-NANP flag is checked to see if it's set to 'Y'. If it is, the Intra-Country flag for the originating number 10 is checked. If the Intra-Country flag for the originating number is also set to 'Y', the call is blocked. If not, the call is allowed. In short, if the Intra Country flags of both the originating and terminating numbers are Y', the call is blocked; if either one is set to 'N, the call is allowed. Country Set blocking is implemented as follows: 15 The Country Set(s) of the directlineMCI Property record, and possibly the originating ANI/country, as indicated below, are validated against the Country Code of the termination. If the terminating country is blocked in any of the Country Sets, the call is blocked. Guest Call Completion 20 TerminationG OriginationB Domestic NANP International Domestic Inter-NANP (Allow) Inter-NANP (Allow) Cset Blocking using Term PCC, Orig ANI & Auth Csets Cset Blocking using Term CC, Orig ANI* & Auth Csets 25 NANP Inter-NANP (Allow) Inter-NANP (Block) Cset Blocking using Term CC, Orig ANI & Auth Csets International Allow Cset Blocking using Term PCC, Orig CC and Auth Csets Cset Blocking using Term CC, Orig CC and Auth Csets 30 User Call Completion TerminationG OriginationB Domestic NANP International Domestic Domestic Comp Flag Inter-NANP (Allow) 976 Blocking WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Domestic Comp Flag Inter-NANP (Allow) 976 Blocking Cset Blocking using Term PCC, Orig ANI & Auth Csets International Comp Flag Cset Blocking using Term CC, Orig ANI & Auth Csets NANP Domestic Comp Flag Inter-NANP (Allow) 976 Blocking Domestic 5 Comp Flag Inter-NANP (Block) 976 Blocking International Comp Flag Cset Blocking using Term CC, Orig ANI & Auth Csets International Domestic Comp Flag 976 Blocking Domestic Comp Flag 976 Blocking Cset Blocking using Term PCC, Orig CC and Auth Csets International Comp Flag Cset Blocking using Term CC, Orig 10 CC and Auth Csets Programming Routing TerminationG OriginationB Domestic NANP International 15 N/A Domestic Flag 976 Blocking Domestic Flag 976 Blocking Cset Blocking using Term PCC, Auth Cset International Flag Cset Blocking using Term CC, Auth Cset Programming Speed Dial Numbers 20 TerminationG OriginationB Domestic NANP International N/A Domestic Comp Flag 976 Blocking Domestic Comp Flag 976 Blocking Cset Blocking using Term PCC, Auth Cset International Comp Flag Cset Blocking using Term CC, Auth Cset 25 XIX. INTERNET FAX A. Introduction A large percentage of calls on the PSTN are Fax calls. These calls send digital information encoded and modulated for analog transmission to the 30 phone company's central office (CO). At the CO the analogue signal is digitized for continuous transmission across the PSTN at 64 Kbps. At the destination CO the digital signal is converted to analogue for transmission to the recipient Fax machine. Continuous transmission of international Fax traffic results in high utilization of scarce transmission capacity and WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 incurs the high cost of international direct dial phone service. B. Details Currently, there is an increased interest in sending fax and voice over the 5 Internet. In the past, facsimiles tended to be on the periphery of the network and did not utilize the intelligence inherent in the Internet. A preferred embodiment transparently routes faxes over the internet rather than tying up the telephone network. A network subsidized with appropriate logic can sense a fax call by sensing tones on the line. Then, 10 the call can be directed to another piece of hardware or software that would then perform a fax over the Internet. The network performs routing by utilizing the destination fax machines phone number as an address. Then, by accessing the DAP, the appropriate gateway can be selected to route the call to the appropriate destination based on the phone number. This is 15 accomplished by sending a routing request to the DAP. The DAP selects the destination gateway by one of several methods. One method may be by point of origin. That is, by table lookup a particular point of origin is assigned a particular destination gateway. Another method could be by a load balancing technique. The network logic can transparently detect 20 normal telephone network activities and transmit them over the internet without affecting their integrity. One embodiment employs a double dialing scenario similar to the current telephone credit card. The first number is utilized to designate how the call was to be routed, while the second telephone number is used to route the call to the destination address like 25 any other telephone call once the appropriate gateway was identified. The detailed logic associated with the alternative routing of faxes on the Internet is accomplished by monitoring calls on trunk groups. Typically, a company or other organization will purchase capacity on a trunk line that 30 can be utilized exclusively to service the requirements of the organization. The trunk group of a preferred embodiment is modified with appropriate sensing hardware which can be a hybrid network, such as, or including a Digital Signal Processor (DSP) to divert faxes destined for predetermined carriers over a data network such as an internet or an X.25 network Af' O WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 instead of the public switched network. The monitoring of the calls coming into a specific trunk group is performed transparently. The trunk group comes into a bridging switch which diverts calls to an 5 intelligent network. The intelligent network detects if the call is being directed to a particular country or city that is targeted for special routing treatment over the internet or another data network instead of the PSTN. If the call is not targeted for one of the country or city codes of interest the call is routed normally across the PSTN to its destination. 10 Dropping down one more level of detail, when the call comes into an MCI switch, the switch launches a DAP query requesting a route for the call. The DAP analyzes the call based on the number dialed and other profile information, and routes the call to a fax done detection system. The fax 15 tone detection system listens for fax CNG tone and if it detects a CHG tone, then a second phone call is placed to a fax internet gateway. When the fax internet gateway answers, the first and second call are bridged together at a bridging switch. 20 The required modification is to screen incoming calls by destination, For predetermined target destinations, the intelligent network holds the call for additional processing. This is accomplished according to a preferred embodiment illustrated in Figure 52B. In that figure, an originating user's fax machine F1, is connected via switch 5260 to the phone line. Switch 25 5260 connects the call via switch 5261 and places a routing request to the DAP 5262 for routing data query purposes. The DAP is connected to a routing database such as a Long Term Regulatory Routing Database. The trunk is also connected to appropriate logic, only the Fax Tone Detector (FTD) is shown, at 5263. That logic includes logic to route fax calls 30 destined for predetermined countries to a fax gateway 5264 via switches 5261and 5265 to an alternate data network 5266 to a fax gateway 5267 in the predetermined country. For countries other than the predetermined country, the switch 5261 will send the call by way of the PSTN.

WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Operation of the above embodiment of Figure 52B is seen with respect to the flow chart of Figure 52C. At step 5270 of the flow chart, the originating switch 5261 of Figure 52B receives the call. The call can be from a telephone, a PC, a fax machine Fl, or other suitable device. Using the 5 destination information associated with the call, the DAP is queried via Switch 5261 at step 5271. The DAP looks up the routing information and a decision is made at step 5273 whether the destination is one of the predetermined countries, cities, or other locations of interest. If not, the call is handled through normal routing as in step 5274. 10 If the call is for a predetermined destination of interest it is routed to the FTP as in step 5275. The FTP then determines whether this call is a fax call at step 5276. This may be done by attempting to detect a CNG tone by well known means. In one method of accomplishing this a timer can be 15 used. If a CNG tone is not detected within a specified time period the call is assumed not to be a fax call. It is then released and bridged through normal routing over the PSTN as at step 5277. If a CNG tone is detected, the call is released and bridged to fax gateway 5264 as at step 5278, the call is collected and the fax is transmitted over the alternate data network 20 5266 over which it is sent to fax gateway 5267 and then on to fax machine F2 at the destination point. This may have further routing via a domain name that may have several countries. The Domain Name Server will distribute calls amongst several 25 destinations via a lookup table. A gateway will be located in a destination country and a TCP/IP session is set up with the gateway for control purposes. The data may be passed TCP or UDP based on the particular network characteristics. In any case, the dialed digits are passed to the origin gateway which forwards the digits to the destination gateway where 30 the phone number is dialed. The destination gateway then dials the destination number and engages a fax machine at the other end. The system utilizes two pairs of fax modems to convert a telephony signal to packets and back. Fax modems like any 4(S-2 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 other modems negotiate for baud rate, but they do it each time a page is transmitted. Each side specifies its capabilities and they negotiate what speed they can support. First, start the transfer of fax information, then an ACK is transmitted after each page and finally the baud rate is renegotiated 5 at 300 baud (LCD). Finally, the messages are received at the distant modem and the packet is repackaged as a fax package. At the end of every page, there is a renegotiating of baud rate based on error rate, and, if there are too many errors, the faxes will renegotiate to a lower speed before resending and/or retransmitting the page. 10 In accordance with a preferred embodiment, the system detects that the destination telephone circuit has been connected before transmitting fax information. The overhead associated with this processing requires the following detriments to normal fax processing. 15 1) Increased postdial delay; and 2) Actual transmission of the fax may take five percent longer. XX. INTERNET SWITCH TECHNOLOGY A. An Embodiment The problem with current switched networks is that when you have a LEC 20 connected via legislated feature group D trunks, providing inexpensive access is difficult because access charges are dictated by the LEC. Therefore, if the Internet access is provided via a service which utilizes feature group D trunks, the cost passed on to the consumer is exorbitant. If the feature group D trunks are bypassed, and a dedicated network is 25 provided, ie., the LEC is connected directly to a modem pool which provides access to the Internet, a second tier of problems arises. These problems include: scalability, survivability and inefficiency of design. Further, a modem would be necessary for each DSO purchased from the LEC. All of these problems are solved by the architecture discussed below. 30 Scalability is addressed by the CBLs described in Figure 1C because the modem pool can be adjusted to meet the network traffic requirements. The CBLs can be adjusted to meet the requirements of the particular community of interest. In a dedicated network, a one-to-one relationship /453 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 exists between CBLs and entries in a modem pool. Then, if a modem fails, the ability to service users is directly affected by the ability to utilize modems. By eliminating the direct correlation between the modem pools and the CBLs, the DAP can map calls to dynamic resources obtained 5 through the network wherever they reside. This design is more efficient than any current architecture. A detailed discussion of this architecture ensues below. The third problem which was overcome by a preferred embodiment was a 10 direct result of solving the previous two problems. A method for routing a call in the network was required when only an origination indication is provided by a LEC. An embodiment incorporating the functionality of a hotline provides a solution to this problem. When an origination is detected on an incoming trunk (circuit) for which the hotline functionality is 15 enabled, a database lookup is performed as an internal process of a switch's routing database. This database lookup results in a preliminary dialing plan (i.e. a 7 or 10 digit number) that will be used to determine the destination of the call. The hotline function resides in the switch, but it was not integrated into routing capability which exploited the DAP and 20 allowed a switch to formulate a DAL procedure request without any calling information (ADF transaction) to the DAP. The request is transmitted over an X.25 protocol link, a local area network, an Optical Connection Three (OC3) ATM network, a frame relay, SMDS or other communication link to the DAP for processing. The DAP performs additional database lookups to 25 determine the appropriate destination (in this case, it would be the SWitch ID (SWID) and Terminating Trunk Group (TTG) that corresponds with the trunk connection to the Modem Pool). The hotline is a foundation in the design that overcame the problems described above. 30 Figure 71 depicts a typical customer configuration of a hybrid network for carrying private network services, such as VNET, Vision or other media while providing local dial access, private dialing plans over shared or dedicated access. The combination of the FDDI LAN 10201, the 6S4 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 transaction servers 10205, and the communication servers 10215 and 10225 are collectively referred to as a DAP. A local area network such as Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) LAN 10201 is used to connect various communication devices. In the configuration depicted, Transaction 5 Server (TS) 10205 is connected to the LAN 10201. Telephony switches such as switch 10210 and switch 10220 are connected to LAN 10201 through Communication Servers (CS) 10215 and 10225, respectively. In the example shown, CS 10225 communicates with the switches utilizing a protocol termed Application Data Field (ADF) 10245. Gateway 10230 10 connects to the LAN 10201 and provides communication between the Customer Access Processor (CAP). The CAP 10235 is typically a microprocessor such as the Intel Pentium, RISC or Motorola 68xxx family. The DAP would send a transaction query to the CAP. The CAP performs a database lookup to return routing instruction based upon, for example, the 15 status of how many operators are available at a particular customer service center. The CAP returns a response that indicates how a call should be routed based upon that database lookup. The DAP uses that information basically as an extension of its own database. The DAP would then interpret the information received from the CAP 10235 and translate it into 20 routing information that the switch requires to route the call to where the customer required. Figure 72 depicts the operation of DAPs 10240, individually labeled as DAPs 10241, 10242 and 10243. Routing and customer profile 25 information is entered into the order entry system 10235 after validation and the information is routed to the Service Control Manager (SCM) 10230. SCM 10320 sends the routing and customer profile information to each of the DAPs in the network. 30 For example, if a problem arises with Windows95, a customer would call 1 800-FIX-WIN95. The call enters the network at Originating Switch 10350 which would initiate a transaction to a DAP 10241-3 querying for appropriate routing information for the call. The queried DAP recognizes the number, creates a transaction and routes it to the appropriate gateway WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 10230 that is connected to the appropriate CAP 10235 (in this case the CAP associated with the Microsoft company). The CAP 10235 receives the transaction and determines that the customer service center in New York is swamped, but the customer service center in California is not very busy 5 (time of day could account for the reason in this case). The CAP 10235 would send a response back to the queried DAP 10241-3 (via the gateway 10230) indicating that this particular 1-800-FIX-WIN95 call should be routed to the California customer service center. The selected DAP 10241-3 translates the transaction information into a specific Switch ID (SWID) and 10 a specific Terminating Trunk Group (TTG) that corresponds to the route out of the MCI network necessary to arrive at the California customer service center. The selected DAP 10241-3 transmits this response information to the originating switch 10350 which routes the original call to 1-800-FIX WIN95 to the correct Terminating switch 10351, as indicated in the DAP 15 response via the SWID. The terminating switch 10351 then determines the correct Terminating Trunk Group (TTG) utilizing information transmitted via SS7 network created from a parameter in the original DAP response, and routes the call 20 to the California customer service center. When a call is routed through a switch, it is passed via a Direct Access Line (DAL) connection such as DAL 10386 to the customer PBX 10387 which delivers the call to the target telephone 10361. 25 Figure 73 depicts the process by which a telephone connects to a release link trunk for 1-800 call processing. A telephone such as telephone 10410 is connected to local exchange carrier (LEC) 10415. The user of telephone 10410 uses the telephone keypad to enter a 1-800 number, which causes LEC 10415 to route the call to MCI Originating switch 10420. In order to 30 process the 1-800 request, switch 10420 must communicate with ISN 10480. Switch 10420 therefore connects the call to bridging switch 10440, which is connected to Intelligent Service Network 10480 via a release link trunk 10490. Bridging switch 10440 passes the DAP request with the 1-800 information to ISN 10480, which passes it to the addressed /56 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 DAP 10241, DAP 10241 examines the 1-800 request and selects the appropriate release link trunk 10490, which it connects to MCI D switch 10420, which in turn is connected to the LEC 10415 which is ultimately connected to telephone 10410, thereby completing the call. ANI is a 5 standard term in the industry that refers to Automatic Number Identification (ANI). ANI can be used to complete the call. This is the information that the MCI network receives from the LEC To identify where the call originated from. In simple terms, it would be your home phone number if you originated the call. It could also be the payphone number 10 that a credit card caller originated from, so it is not always used to determine to whom to bill the call. A similar process may be used to connect telephone 10450 through LEC 10455 to a switch 10460 utilizing a bridging switch 10440 to bridge the 15 call to the release link trunk 10490 through ISN 10480. Figure 74 depicts the customer side of a DAP procedure request. In the home and small office environment, devices such as modem 10510, telephone 10515 and fax 10510 are plugged into a standard RJ1 1 jack 20 10520, which is connected to the local exchange carrier. Local exchange carrier 10525 connects to switch 10530 via common business lines 10527. In a large office environment, an office equipped with a PBX 10540 may connect to switch 10530 via dedicated access line (DAL) 10547, without the involvement of the local carrier. Switch 10530 issues DAL 25 procedure request to DAP 10560, which selects routing 10570 for the call, as will be more fully described with respect to Figure 75. Figure 75 depicts operation of the switch 10530 to select a particular number or "hotline" for a caller. Switch 10530 accepts an incoming call 30 from CBL 10527 or DAL 10547, and contacts DAP 10560 for instructions on routing the call. DAP 10560 returns routing information encoded in the form of a pseudo-telephone number. The pseudo telephone number has the same format as an ordinary telephone number but instead encodes a 3 digit switch identifier (SWID) and a file number of a file that identifies a WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 desired Terminating Trunk Group (TTG) . Switch 10530 contacts the switch 10610 identified by the SWID and passes to it the file number. Switch 10610 uses the TTG to select the appropriate modem pool 10620 to complete the connection. The modem pool in turn provides an Internet 5 Protocol (IP) connection 10630 to such services as authentication service 10640 and to Basic Internet Protocol Platform (BIPP) 10650. The BIPP 10650 is composed of packet switches, such as ATM switches, that transfer IP packets from one node to another. Authentication service 10640 optionally performs security functions to authenticate the calling 10 party and to prevent unauthorized access to the Internet. It may also be used to formulate billing information necessary to ensure proper reconciliation for customers that access the Internet via the TTG hotline. The provision of this hotline function enables routing of the call through switches 10530 and 10610 without the use of expensive FGD links such 15 as the FGD 10380 depicted in Figure 72. Figure 76 depicts the operation of a gateway for selectively routing telephone calls through the Internet. Terminal switch 10710 connects to an ARU 10720 to request routing information. ARU 10720 interrogates 20 the properties of the call to determine whether it is a candidate for Internet routing. If the call is a modem call, the call is routed to modem pool 10730. From modem pool 10730, the call may then be routed to Basic Internet Protocol Platform 10750 to provide Internet access to the modem call. The modem call is optionally authenticated by authentication service 25 10760. If the call is a fax call, the call is routed to modem pool 10730. From modem pool 10730, the call may then be routed to Basic Internet Protocol Platform 10750 and from there to fax gateway 10770. As with a modem call, a fax call is optionally authenticated by authentication service 10760. 30 If the call to be routed is a voice call, ARU 10720 waits for the user to dial a calling card number and a destination telephone number. ARU 10720 interrogates the destination number to determine whether the destination telephone is an international call or a domestic call. Domestic calls are 4S'9 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 returned to the termination switch 10710 for conventional routing. International calls are encoded as data by providing the analog voice signal to coder/decoder (or "codec") 10725. Codec 10725, having encoded the signal as digital data then routes the call through modem pool 10730 and 5 Basic Internet Protocol Platform 10750. In an alternate embodiment, when the call is delivered to the ISN by the network switch, an SS7 ISUP message is routed to the resident ISN switch. That switch is called a DMS-ACD. ACD stands for Automatic Call 10 Distributor. The ACD takes an incoming SS7 ISUP message and converts it to SCAI (Switch/Computer Application Interface). On the opposite side of the ACD is a device called an ISN-AP (Intelligent Services Network - Adjunct Processor). SCAI is the language spoken between the ACD and the ISN-AP. So, there are two interfaces: on the inbound side from the network to the 15 ACD a SS7 ISUP, and on the outbound side from the ACD to the ISN-AP a SCAI. These are simply two different signaling protocols. When the call arrives at the ACD from the network, the ACD doesn't automatically know where to route the call. The ACD receives its 20 instructions from the ISN-AP. To do that, the ACD takes the ISUP signaling parameters received from the network and converts them to SCAI protocol format and sends a SCAI message to the ISN-AP. Specifically, the SCAI message is called DVCallReceived (DV means 25 Data/Voice. When the ISN-AP receives this message it looks at the Called Party Number (CPN) field within the SCAI message and, based on that number, determines where in the ISN the ACD should route the call. When the ISN-AP has made the decision, the ISN-AP builds a DVCallReceivedRR (a response to the previous message -- RR means 30 Return Result). Within the RR message are instructions to the ACD regarding the ACD port to which the call should be terminated. For this service, the ACD is instructed to terminate the call to the ACD ports connected to the ARU 10720. When the call arrives at the ARU WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 10720, there are two things that can happen: 1) If the caller has dialed the access number from an: a)telephone or b)fax machine, 5 that caller will hear a voice prompt that says "Press 1 for voice, or press 2 for fax." 2) If the caller has dialed the access number using a PC modem, that caller likely won't hear any announcement. What will happen is that a ARU timer will expire. Expiration of that timer indicates to the ARU that this 10 call is from a modem. The call flow for these scenarios can be confusing, so let's consider them one at a time. 15 If a caller has called from a telephone, then at the ARU 10720 voice prompt, the caller will press 1 (for voice service). At that time, the ARU 10720 will collect further information about the caller. This feature is a modified version of existing calling card services that telephone companies offer today. The ARU 10720 first collects the card number, then collects 20 the number the caller wishes to terminate to. After capturing this information, the ARU 10720 sends the data across the ISN Local Area Network (LAN) to a validation data base. In addition to verifying the calling card number, the data base also ensures that the terminating number is within the allowed dialing plan for the card holder. 25 Once the card information is verified, the ARU 10720 will then determine if the terminating number is domestic or international. If the terminating number is domestic, the ARU 10720 will release the call from the ISN back into the voice network where the call will be routed to its intended 30 destination. If the terminating number is international, the call will be routed to a device called a CODEC (COde DECode) resident at a BIPP site. The purpose of the CODEC is to convert the voice signal to data for routing over the Internet using UDP/IP.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 In an alternate embodiment, if the caller has called from a fax machine, at the ARU 10720 voice prompt, the caller will press 2 indicative of a request for fax service. At that time, the ARU 10720 will route the call to a fax platform that is a guaranteed fax service 10770 for those who don't have 5 the time or patience to wait for a terminating fax number to become available, or for those who need assistance delivering an international fax. An embodiment collects information about the caller and terminating number, then instructs the caller to begin the send process. The fax service 10770 captures the fax and stores it for delivery at a later time. 10 If a caller has dialed via a PC modem, then at the ARU 10720 voice prompt, the caller will likely not hear any announcement. This is intended. It is possible that the caller may hear the ARU 10720 announcement via the PC speaker or modem, but the caller is unable to make an entry at the ARU 15 10720 and will ultimately time-out (as described above), indicating to the ARU 10720 that this call originated from a PC modem. The ARU 10720 releases the call back into the network for termination to a Modem Pool (MP) 10730 at one of MCI's BIPP 10750 sites. 20 Figure 77 depicts the operation of the ARU of Figure 76 deployed in a centralized architecture. Telephone 10810 communicates through local exchange 10820 to switch 10710. Switch 10710 connects through bridge switch 10830 to Intelligent Services Network (ISN) 10840 to ARU 10720. ARU 10720 controls the call routing either directly to the modem pool 25 10730, via codec 10725 to the BIPP 10750 or to a fax server. Figure 78 depicts the operation of the ARU of Figure 77 deployed in a distributed architecture. Telephone 10910 communicates through local exchange 10920 to switch 10710. Switch 10710 connects through bridge 30 switch 10930 to intelligent service network 10840 to ARU 10720. ARU 10720 operates under control of voice response unit 10950, connected through switch 10911 and bridge switch 10930 to control the call routing either through switch 10912 to modem pool 10730, or via a codec. The ARU must be placed in the ISN, but the other pieces (i.e., ARUs 10850 and X / / WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 10950, modem pool 10730 and codec 10725) may be placed anywhere in the network. Figure 79A and 79B depict the operation of sample applications for 5 Internet call routing. Figure 79A depicts a sample application for customer service. Intranet computer 11010 connects to the Internet 11020 as described above, and thereby connects to a server computer 11025. Server computer 11025, through designation of an Internet resource, such as a packing shipping service provider 11030, via a Uniform Resource Locator 10 permits a user of Intranet computer 11010 to query the provider 11030. Through internal functions shown as 11032, provider 11030 may provide in response to user interactions such resources as a full motion video display 11035 from its customer service department, or direct interactive conversations with a customer service representative 11037. 15 Figure 79B depicts a number of applications for caller-initiated consumer transactions. A consumer calling a predetermined number 11040 (such as 555-IMCI, 555-PAGE or 555-RNET) may be routed to a particular transaction processor through the use of common business line (CBL) 20 11050. CBL 11050 connects to switch 11060. Switch 11060 calls DAP 11065, which analyzes the incoming call using Automatic Number Identification (ANI) to determine the identity of the caller. Based on the identity of the caller in combination with the number called, DAP 11065 directs switch 11060 to direct calls to 555-IMCI, for example, to Data 25 Network Interface (DNI) 11070. DNI 11070 serves as an interface between the switch network and a database host 11075 capable of processing point of-sale debit and credit card transactions. In addition to routing the call based on the target telephone number, the ANI data is used to identify the caller to the database host 11075. Similarly, a call to 555-PAGE may be 30 routed to the PBX of a paging service company 11080, and the ANI data used to select a particular paging service 11085 offered by the company. Finally, calls to 555-RNET may be used to provide connection to the Basic Internet Protocol Platform 11090, as previously described.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Figure 80 illustrates a configuration of a switching network offering voice mail and voice response unit services, as well as interconnection into a service provider, in accordance with a preferred embodiment. Telephones 11111 and 11112 enter the network via switches 11120 and 11121 5 respectively, Switch 11121, in addition to offering network entry to telephone 11112, provides an intermediate link for switch 11120. Switch 11125 provides interconnection for switch 11121, as well as accepting direct input such as PBXs 11130. Switch 11125 provides connections to voice response unit server 11140 and to voice mail server 11145. In 10 addition, switch 11125 connects to service provider server 11150 through Dial Access Line 11155. Service provider 11150 further routes incoming calls according to service requested and authenticity to paging service 11060 or to email service 11070 using BIPP 11075 connected through modem pool 11076. 15 B. Another Embodiment Figure 81 illustrates an inbound shared Automated Call Distributor (ACD) call with data sharing through a database in accordance with a preferred embodiment. A dial-up internet user 12000 uses a computer modem to dial a telephone number. The telephone call is routed from the RBOC/LEC 20 Switch 12002 to MCI Switch 1 12004. MCI Switch 1 12004 queries the Network Control System (NCS) 12020 to ask for a route for the given ANI and dialed telephone number. The NCS 12020 returns a terminating address, instructing MCI Switch 1 12004 to route the call to a trunk group on MCI Switch 2 12006. 25 MCI Switch 2 12006 completes the call to the Internet Access Device 12008. The modem in the dial-up user's computer 12000 and the Internet Access Device 12008 establish a data session, and data packets are exchanged according to the Point to Point Protocol (PPP). From the Internet 30 Access Device 12008, PPP packets are translated to Internet Protocol (IP) packets and sent on the internet, represented by 12026. Similarly, the Internet Access Device 12008 receives IP packets from the internet 12026 and sends them to the dial-up user 12000. 463 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Before packets are allowed to pass freely through the Internet Access Device 12008, the dial-up user 12000 is authenticated. This is done using the username/password method, or the challenge/response method. 5 In the username/password method, the Internet Access Device 12008 prompts the dial-up user 12000 to enter a user name. The dial-up user 12000 types a user name into the computer, and the user name is transported from the dial-up user 12000 to the Internet Access Device 12008. The Internet Access Device 12008 then prompts the dial-up user 10 12000 to enter a password. The dial-up user 12000 types a password into the computer, and the password is transported from the dial-up user 12000 to the Internet Access Device 12008. Once the user name and password are received, the Internet Access Device 12008 sends an authentication request, containing the user name and password, to the 15 Authentication Server 12014. The Authentication Server 12014 checks the user name/password against a database of valid user name/password pairs. If the entered user name/password are in the database, the Authentication Server 12014 sends an "user authenticated" message back to the Internet Access Device 12008. If the entered user name/password 20 are not in the database, the Authentication Server 12014 sends a "user not authenticated" message back to the Internet Access Device 12008. In the challenge/response method, the Internet Access Device 12008 prompts the dial-up user 12000 to enter a user name. The dial-up user 25 12000 types a user name into the computer, and the user name is transported from the dial-up user 12000 to the Internet Access Device 12008. The Internet Access Device 12008 then prompts the dial-up user 12000 to with a challenge, which is a sequence of digits. The dial-up user 12000 computes a response to the challenge by entering the challenge 30 digits and a shared secret key into response-generation program. The shared secret key is known only to the dial-up user 12000 and the Authentication Server 12014. The dial-up user 12000 types in the computed response, and the response is transported from the dial-up user 12000 to the Internet Access Device 12008. The Internet Access Device 464 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 12008 sends an authentication message, containing the user name, the challenge, and the response, to the Authentication Server 12014. The Authentication Server reads the user name, finds the shared secret key for that user name, and uses the shared secret key and the challenge digits to 5 compute the response. The computed response is compared to the response given by the dial-up user 12000. If the responses match, a "user authenticated" message is sent from the Authentication Server 12014 to the Internet Access Device 12008. If the responses do not match, a "user not authenticated" message is sent from the Authentication Server 12014 10 to the Internet Access Device 12008. Whether the user name/password or challenge/response methods of authentication are used, the rest of this description assumes a "user authenticated" message is sent from the Authentication Server 12014 to 15 the Internet Access Device 12008, and IP packet communication is allowed to flow freely through the Internet Access Device 12008. The dial-up user 12000 starts a web browser and browses web pages from the Corporate Web Server 12024. The Corporate Web Server 12024 20 records the web pages viewed by the dial-up user 12000 in the Call Center Server 12028 using a unique identifier. The dial-up user 12000 may also submit information to the Corporate Web Server 12024 by filling out Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) forms and submitting the information to the Corporate Web Server 12024. The Corporate Web Server 12024 25 deposits this information in the Call Center Server 12028 using the same unique identifier. The dial-up user 12000 browses another web page, upon which an icon is displayed along with text indicating that the user can talk to an agent by 30 clicking on the icon. Clicking on the icon results in a download of a Multipart Internet Mail Extensions (MIME) file from the Corporate Web Server 12024 to the dial-up user's 12000 web browser. The MIME file contains an alphanumeric string identifying the destination for a resulting phone call, called a user-identifier. The browser invokes a helper WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 application or browser plug-in to handle the file of the designated MIME type. The helper application reads the MIME file, and launches a query with the MIME file contents from the dial-up user 12000 to the Directory Server 12012. The Directory Server 12012 translates the alphanumeric 5 string from the MIME file into the destination IP Address of the destination Internet Telephony Gateway 12018, and sends a message containing the IP Address back to the dial-up user's 12000 helper application. The helper application then launches an internet telephony call to the Internet Telephony Gateway's 12018 IP Address, providing to the Internet 10 Telephony Gateway 12018 the alphanumeric string from the MIME file, as a part of the call setup. The Internet Telephony Gateway 12018 translates the given alphanumeric string into a destination telephone number, and dials the destination 15 telephone number on it's telephone network interface to MCI Switch 2 12006. MCI Switch 2 12006 queries the NCS 12020 with the dialed telephone number, requesting routing instructions. The NCS 12020 determines the appropriate route and sends routing instructions back to MCI Switch 2 12006 to route the call to a particular trunk group on MCI 20 Switch 1 12004. The call is routed to MCI Switch 1 12004, and then the call is completed to the Automated Call Distributor (ACD) 12022. When the ACD 12022 answers the call, the Internet Telephony Gateway 12018 completes a constant audio path between the ACD 12022 and the Dial-up user 12000, with the audio from the ACD to the Internet Telephony 25 Gateway being circuit-switched PCM audio, and the audio from the Internet Telephony Gateway to the Dial-up user being packetized encoded digital audio, using any audio codec. When the call is delivered to the ACD 12022, the unique record identifier is 30 delivered to the ACD via telephone network signaling mechanisms. When an agent in the call center 12026 receives the call, the unique record identifier is displayed for the agent, and the call information entered by the dial-up user 12000 is retrieved from the Call Center Server 12028. 2166 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 XXI. BILLING Another embodiment in accordance with this invention relates generally to telecommunication networks, and more specifically, to switches of a telecommunication network that generate call records using a flexible and 5 expandable record format and generates a unique call identifier for each telephone call that traverses the network. A typical telecommunication network comprises multiple telecommunication switches located throughout a geographical area. When 10 a user makes a call, the call may be routed through one or more switches before reaching its destination. Figure 82 illustrates an exemplary telecommunications system 30102 across the United States. For purposes of illustration, a caller 30104 15 places a call from Los Angeles, California to a party 30112 located in New York City, New York. Such a call is typically transmitted across three (3) switches: the Los Angeles, California switch 30106; the Chicago, Illinois switch 30108; and the New York City, New York switch 30110. In this scenario, the originating switch is the Los Angeles, California switch 20 30106, and the terminating switch is the New York City, New York switch 30110. Each of the switches, 30106-30110, is connected to two (2) or more Data Access Points (DAP) 30116-30120, for instance a primary DAP 30116 25 30120 and a backup DAP 30116-30120. A DAP 30116-30120 is a facility that receives requests for information from the switches 30106-30110, processes the requests, and returns the requested information back to the requesting switch 30106-30110. The switches 30106-30110 use information from the DAPs 30116-30120 to process calls through the 30 network. When a call passes through one of the switches, 30106-30110, that switch creates a call record. The call record contains information on the call, including but not limited to: routing, billing, call features, and trouble WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 shooting information. After the call is terminated, each switch 30106 30110 that processed the call completes the associated call record. The switches 30106-30110 combine multiple call records into a billing block. 5 When a switch 30106-30110 fills the billing block, the switch 30106 30110 sends the billing block to a billing center 30114. Thus, the billing center 30114 receives one billing block from each switch 30106-30110 that handled the call, which in this case would be three billing blocks. The billing center 30114 searches each billing block and retrieves the call 10 record associated with the call, thereby retrieving one call record per switch 30106-30110 that handled the call. The billing center 30114 then uses one or more of the retrieved call records to generate a billing entry. The billing center 30114 is also connected to each DAP 30116-30120 to retrieve information regarding a switch 30106-30110 or call record. 15 To better understand the invention, it is useful to describe some additional terminology relating to a telecommunication network. A telephone call comes into a switch on a transmission line referred to as the originating port, or trunk. The originating port is one of many transmission lines 20 coming into the switch from the same location of origin. This group of ports is the originating trunk group. After processing an incoming call, the switch transmits the call to a destination location, which may be another switch, a local exchange carrier, or a private branch exchange. The call is transmitted over a transmission line referred to as the terminating port, or 25 trunk. Similar to the originating port, the terminating port is one of a group of ports going from the switch to the same destination. This group of ports is the terminating trunk group. Contemporary telecommunication networks provide customers with the 30 capability of using the general public network as well as the capability of defining a custom virtual network (VNet). With a VNet, a customer defines a private dialing plan, including plan telephone numbers. A VNet customer is not limited to the default telephone numbers allocated to a public telecommunication system dedicated to a specific geographic region, but WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 can define custom telephone numbers. Upon processing a telephone call, a switch must generate a call record large enough to contain all of the needed information on a call. The call record, 5 however, must not be so large that the typical call results in the majority of the record fields in the call record to be unused. In such a case, storing such call records results in large amounts of wasted storage, and transmitting such a call record causes unnecessary transmissions. 10 One solution for creating and processing call records is to implement a fixed length call record format, such as a 32-word call record. A word is two (2) bytes, or sixteen (16) bits. A fixed length record format, however, cannot expand when new call features are implemented. More importantly, fixed call record formats cannot handle expanded data fields as the 15 telecommunications network becomes more complex with new features and telephone numbers. Contemporary fixed length record formats include time point fields recording local time in three (3) second increments where local switch time 20 represents the time of day at a switch. The timepoint fields are used by the network switches, billing center, and other network subsystems. Each subsystem, however, may require the time period for a different use and in a different format, such as in an epoch time format. Epoch time is the number of one (1) second increments since a particular date and time in 25 history. For example, the billing center requires epoch time for its billing records whereas switch reports and error logs require local switch time. A problem also arises when using only local switch time in that there is no accommodation for time changes due to daylight savings time. In addition, 30 each subsystem may require a finer granularity of precision than the current three (3) second increments. By providing only local switch time at three (3) second increments, the switches have passed the burden of translating the time into a usable format to the network subsystems. The fixed record format cannot accommodate the various time period WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 requirements because it only contains the time periods in local switch time at a low level of precision. Because of its fixed nature, the fixed record format cannot expand to include different time formats, nor to include a finer granularity of precision, such as a one (1) second increment. 5 Therefore, there is a need for switches of a telecommunications network to store call record information in a flexible and expandable format. There is a further need to provide time point fields with one (1) second granularity in a flexible format that easily and efficiently responds to daylight savings time 10 and time zone changes. There is also a need to match all of the call records associated with a specific telephone call. For example, for proper billing and cost control, it is necessary for the billing center to match the originating switch's call record 15 to the terminating switch's call record. Also, for troubleshooting and security purposes, it may be necessary to trace a specific telephone call through the network with ease in order to isolate problem areas. Therefore, there is a need for switches of a telecommunications network to 20 uniquely identify each telephone call that traverses the network, thereby uniquely identifying all of the call records associated with a specific telephone call. A. An Embodiment 1. Call Record Format. 25 An embodiment solves the problem of providing a flexible and expandable call record format by implementing both a small and a large call record format. In particular, the embodiment implements a default 32-word call record format, plus an expanded 64-word call record format. An embodiment uses a 32-word call record format for the typical telephone 30 call, which comprises the majority of all telephone calls, and uses a 64 word call record format when additional information is needed regarding the call. This implementation provides the flexibility needed to efficiently manage varying data requirements of a given call record. New call features can be developed and easily incorporated into the variable call record 1 .7c WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 format of the present invention. This embodiment also records timepoints in the epoch time format. The embodiment records the origination time of a call in epoch time format, and 5 the remaining timepoints are offsets, or the number of seconds, from that origination time. This embodiment solves the problems associated with converting to and from daylight savings time because daylight savings time is a local time offset and does not affect the epoch time. Furthermore, the timepoints in epoch time format require less space in the call record than 10 they do in local switch time format. The epoch time format may represent coordinated universal time (UTC), as determined at Greenwich, England, which has a time zone of zero (0) local switch time, or any other time. Epoch time is only a format and does not 15 dictate that UTC must be used. The billing time and the local switch time may be in UTC or local time, and the local switch time may not necessarily be the same time that is used for billing. Therefore, the switch must keep billing time and local switch time separate in order to prevent the problems that occur during daylight savings time changes. 20 2. Network Call Identifier. This embodiment solves the problem of uniquely identifying each telephone call and all of the call records associated with a specific telephone call by providing a unique identifier to each call record. It generates a network call 25 identifier (NCID) that is assigned to each call record at the point of call origination, that is, the originating switch generates an NCID for each telephone call. The NCID accompanies the associated telephone call through the telecommunications network to the termination point at the terminating switch. Therefore, at any point of a telephone call in the 30 network, the associated NCID identifies the point and time of origin of the telephone call. Each switch through which the telephone call passes records the NCID in the call record associated with the call. The NCID is small enough to fit in a 32-word call record, thereby reducing the data throughput and storage. The NCID provides the billing center and other LA7/ WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 network subsystems with the ability to match originating and terminating call records for a specific telephone call. This embodiment also provides the switch capability of discarding a 5 received NCID and generating a new NCID. A switch discards a received NCID if the NCID format is invalid or unreliable, thereby ensuring a valid unique identifier to be associated with each call going through the network. For instance, an NCID may be unreliable if generated by third party switches in the telecommunications network. 10 This embodiment relates to switches of a telecommunication network that generate call records using a flexible and expandable record format. The call record formats include a small (preferably 32-word) and a large (preferably 64-word) expanded format. It would be readily apparent to one 15 skilled in the relevant art to implement a small and large record format of different sizes. The embodiment also relates to switches of a telecommunication network that generate a unique NCID for each telephone call traversing the network. 20 The NCID provides a mechanism for matching all of the call records associated with a specific telephone call. It would be readily apparent to one skilled in the relevant art to implement a call record identifier of a different format. 25 The chosen embodiment is computer software executing within a computer system. Figure 83 shows an exemplary computer system. The computer system 30202 includes one or more processors, such as a processor 30204. The processor 30204 is connected to a communication bus 30206. 30 The computer system 30202 also includes a main memory 30208, preferably random access memory (RAM), and a secondary memory 30210. The secondary memory 30210 includes, for example, a hard disk drive 30212 and/or a removable storage drive 30214, representing a floppy disk 1 1%72 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 drive, a magnetic tape drive, a compact disk drive, etc. The removable storage drive 30214 reads from and/or writes to a removable storage unit 30216 in a well known manner. 5 Removable storage unit 30216, also called a program storage device or a computer program product, represents a floppy disk, magnetic tape, compact disk, etc. The removable storage unit 30216 includes a computer usable storage medium having therein stored computer software and/or data. 10 Computer programs (also called computer control logic) are stored in main memory 30208 and/or the secondary memory 30210. Such computer programs, when executed, enable the computer system 30202 to perform the functions of the present invention as discussed herein. In particular, 15 the computer programs, when executed, enable the processor 30204 to perform the functions of the present invention. Accordingly, such computer programs represent controllers of the computer system 30202. B. [Another Embodiment] 20 Another embodiment is directed to a computer program product comprising a computer readable medium having control logic (computer software) stored therein. The control logic, when executed by the processor 30204, causes the processor 30204 to perform the functions as described herein. 25 Another embodiment is implemented primarily in hardware using, for example, a hardware state machine. Implementation of the hardware state machine so as to perform the functions described herein will be apparent to persons skilled in the relevant arts. 30 1. Call Record Format. This embodiment provides the switches of a telecommunication network with nine (9) different record formats. These records include : Call Detail Record (CDR), Expanded Call Detail Record (ECDR), Private Network Record (PNR), Expanded Private Network Record (EPNR), Operator Service Record WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 (OSR), Expanded Operator Service Record (EOSR), Private Operator Service Record (POSR), Expanded Private Operator Service Record (EPOSR), and Switch Event Record (SER). Each record is 32 words in length, and the expanded version of each record is 64 words in length. 5 Example embodiments of the nine (9) call record formats discussed herein are further described in Figures 82-86. The embodiments of the call records of the present invention comprise both 32-word and 64-word call record formats. It would be apparent to one skilled in the relevant art to 10 develop alternative embodiments for call records comprising a different number of words and different field definitions. Table 301 of the Appendix contains an example embodiment of the CDR and PNR call record formats. Figure 84 shows a graphical representation of the CDR and PNR call record formats. Table 302 of the Appendix contains an example embodiment of 15 the ECDR and EPNR call record formats. Figures 85A and 85B show a graphical representation of the ECDR and EPNR call record formats. Table 303 of the Appendix contains an example embodiment of the OSR and POSR call record formats. Figure 86 shows a graphical representation of the OSR and POSR call record format. Table 304 of the Appendix contains 20 an example embodiment of the EOSR and EPOSR call record formats. Figures 87(A) and 87(B) show a graphical representation of the EOSR and EPOSR call record formats. Table 305 of the Appendix contains an embodiment of the SER record format. Figure 88 shows a graphical representation of the SER record format. 25 The CDR and PNR, and thereby the ECDR and EPNR, are standard call record formats and contain information regarding a typical telephone call as it passes through a switch. The CDR is used for a non-VNET customer, whereas the PNR is used for a VNET customer and is generated at switches 30 that originate VNET calls. The fields of these two records are identical except for some field-specific information described below. The OSR and POSR, and thereby the EOSR and EPOSR, contain information regarding a telephone call requiring operator assistance and WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 are generated at switches or systems actually equipped with operator positions. A switch completes an OSR for a non- VNET customer and completes a POSR for a private VNET customer. These records are only generated at switches or systems that have the capability of performing 5 operator services or network audio response system (NARS) functions. The formats of the two (2) records are identical except for some field-specific information described below. A SER is reserved for special events such as the passage of each hour mark, time changes, system recoveries, and at the end of a billing block. 10 The SER record format is also described in more detail below. Figures 89(A) and 89(B) collectively illustrate the logic that a switch uses to determine when to use an expanded version of a record format. A call 30202 comes into a switch 30106-30110 (called the current switch for 15 reference purposes; the current switch is the switch that is currently processing the call), at which time that switch 30106-30110 determines what call record and what call record format (small/default or large/expanded) to use for the call's 30802 call record. In this regard, the switch 30106-30110 makes nine (9) checks for each call 30802 that it 20 receives. The switch 30106-30110 uses an expanded record for a call 30802 that passes any check as well as for a call 30802 that passes any combination of checks. The first check 30804 determines if the call is involved in a direct 25 termination overflow (DTO) at the current switch 30106-30110. For example, a DTO occurs when a customer makes a telephone call 30802 to an 30800 number and the original destination of the 800 number is busy. If the original destination is busy, the switch overflows the telephone call 30802 to a new destination. In this case, the switch must record the 30 originally attempted destination, the final destination of the telephone call 30802, and the number of times of overflow. Therefore, if the call 30802 is involved in a DTO, the switch 30106-30110 must complete an expanded record (ECDR, EPNR, EOSR, EPOSR) 30816. J,4 7 S WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 The second check 30806 made on a call 30802 by a switch 30106-30110 determines if the calling location of the call 30802 is greater than ten (10) digits. The calling location is the telephone number of the location from where the call 30802 originated. Such an example is an international call 5 which comprises at least eleven (11) digits. If the calling location is greater than ten (10) digits, the switch records the telephone number of the calling location in an expanded record (ECDR, EPNR, EOSR, EPOSR) 30816. A switch 30106-30110 makes a third check 30808 on a call 30802 to 10 determine if the destination address is greater than seventeen (17) digits. The destination address is the number of the called location and may be a telephone number or trunk group. If the destination is greater than seventeen (17) digits, the switch records the destination in an expanded record (ECDR, EPNR, EOSR, EPOSR) 30816. 15 A switch 30106-30110 makes a fourth check 30810 on a call 30802 to determine if the pre-translated digits field is used with an operated assisted service call. The pre-translated digits are the numbers of the call 30802 as dialed by a caller if the call 30202 must be translated to another number 20 within the network. Therefore, when a caller uses an operator service, the switch 30106-30110 records the dialed numbers in expanded record (EOSR, EPOSR) 30816. In a fifth check 30812 on a call 30802, a switch 30106-30110 determines 25 if the pre-translated digits of a call 30802 as dialed by a caller without operator assistance has more than ten (10) digits. If there are more than ten (10) pre-translated digits, the switch 30106-30110 records the dialed numbers in expanded record (ECDR, EPNR) 30816. 30 In a sixth check 30814 on a call 30802, a switch 30106-30110 determines if more than twenty-two (22) digits, including supplemental data, are recorded in the Authorization Code field of the call record. The Authorization Code field indicates a party who gets billed for the call, such as the calling location or a credit card call. If the data entry requires more -4 7 6 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 than twenty-two (22) digits, the switch 30106-30110 records the billing information in an expanded record (ECDR, EPNR, EOSR, EPOSR) 30816. In a seventh check 30820 on a call 30802, a switch 30106-30110 5 determines if the call 30802 is a wideband call. A wideband call is one that requires multiple transmission lines, or channels. For example, a typical video call requires six (6) transmission channels : one (1) for voice and five (5) for the video transmission. The more transmission channels used during a wideband call results in a better quality of reception. 10 Contemporary telecommunication systems currently provide up to twenty four (24) channels. Therefore, to indicate which, and how many, of the twenty-four channels is used during a wideband call, the switch records the channel information in an expanded record (ECDR, EPNR) 30828. 15 In an eighth check 30822 on a call 30802, a switch 30106-30110 determines if the time and charges feature was used by an operator. The time and charges feature is typically used in a hotel scenario when a hotel guest makes a telephone call using the operator's assistance and charges the call 30802 to her room. After the call 30802 has completed, the 20 operator informs the hotel guest of the charge, or cost, of the call 30802. If the time and charges feature was used with a call 30802, the switch 30106-30110 records the hotel guest's name and room number in an expanded record (EOSR, EPOSR) 30832. 25 The ninth, and final, check 30824 made on a call 30802 by a switch 30106-30110 determines if the call 30802 is an enhanced voice service/network audio response system (EVS/NARS) call. An EVS/NARS is an audio menu system in which a customer makes selections in response to an automated menu via her telephone key pad. Such a system includes 30 a NARS switch on which the audio menu system resides. Therefore, during an EVS/NARS call 30802, the NARS switch 30106-30110 records the customer's menu selections in an expanded record (EOSR, EPOSR) 30832. If none of the checks 30804-30824 return a positive result, then the switch WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 30106-30110 uses the default record format (OSR, POSR) 30830. Once the checks have been made on a call, a switch generates and completes the appropriate call record. Call record data is recorded in binary and Telephone Binary Coded Decimal (TBCD) format. TBCD format 5 is illustrated below: 0000 = TBCD-Null 0001 = digit 1 0010 = digit 2 0011 = digit 3 10 0100 = digit 4 0101 = digit 5 0110 = digit 6 0111 = digit 7 1000 = digit 8 15 1001 = digit 9 1010 = digit 0 1011 = special digit 1 (DTMF digit A) 1100 = special digit 2 (DTMF digit B) 1101 = special digit 3 (DTMF digit C) 20 1110 = special digit 4 (DTMF digit D) 1111 = special digit 5 (Not Used) All TBCD digit fields must be filled with TBCD-Null, or zero, prior to data being recorded. Where applicable, dialed digit formats conform to these 25 conventions : N = digits 2-9 X = digits 0-9 Y = digits 2-8 30 Thus, if the specification for a call record field contains a N, the valid field values are the digits 2-9. Each call record, except SER, contains call specific timepoint fields. The timepoint fields are recorded in epoch time format. Epoch time is the WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 number of one second increments from a particular date/time in history. The embodiment of the present invention uses a date/time of midnight (00:00 am UTC) on January 1, 1976, but this serves as an example and is not a limitation. It would be readily apparent to one skilled in the relevant 5 art to implement an epoch time based on another date/time. In the records, Timepoint 1 represents the epoch time that is the origination time of the call 30802. The other timepoint stored in the records are the number of seconds after Timepoint 1, that is, they are offsets from Timepoint 1 that a particular timepoint occurred. All of the timepoint fields 10 must be filled in with "O's" prior to any data being recorded. Therefore, if a timepoint occurs, its count is one (1) or greater. Additionally, timepoint counters, not including Timepoint 1, do not rollover their counts, but stay at the maximum count if the time exceeds the limits. 15 The switch clock reflects local switch time and is used for all times except billing. Billing information is recorded in epoch time, which in this embodiment is UTC. The Time offset is a number reflecting the switch time relative to the UTC, that is, the offset due to time zones and, if appropriate, daylight savings time changes. There are three factors to consider when 20 evaluating time change relative to UTC. First, there are time zones on both sides of UTC, and therefore there may be both negative and positive offsets. Second, the time zone offsets count down from zero (in Greenwich, England) in an Eastward direction until the International Dateline is reached. At the Dateline, the date changes to the next day, such that the 25 offset becomes positive and starts counting down until the zero offset is reached again at Greenwich. Third, there are many areas of the world that have time zones that are not in exact one-hour increments. For example, Australia has one time zone that has a thirty (30) minute difference from the two time zones on either side of it, and Northern India has a time zone 30 that is fifteen (15) minutes after the one next to it. Therefore, the Time Offset of the call records must account for variations in both negative and positive offsets in fifteen (15) minute increments. The embodiment of the present invention satisfies this requirement by providing a Time Offset representing either positive or negative one minute increments.

WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 There are two formulas used to convert local switch time to epoch time and back. 5 i) Epoch Time + (Sign Bit * Time Offset) = Local Switch Time ii) Local Switch Time - (Sign Bit * Time Offset) = Epoch Time The switch records the Time Offset in the SER using a value where one (1) equals one (1) minute, and computes the Time Offset in seconds and adds io this value to each local Timepoint 1 before the call record is recorded. For example, Central Standard Time is six (6) hours before UTC. In this case, the Sign Bit indicates "1" for negative offset and the Time Offset value recorded in the SER would be 360 (6 hours * 60 minutes/hour = 360 minutes). See Figure 86 for more details on the SER record format. When 15 recording Timepoint 1 in the call record, the switch multiplies the Time Offset by 60, because there is 60 seconds in each 1 minute increment, and determines whether the offset is positive or negative by checking the Sign Bit. This example results in a value of -21,600 (-1* 360 minutes* 60 seconds/minute = -21,600 seconds). Using equation (ii) from above, if the 20 local switch time were midnight, the corresponding epoch time might be, for example, 1,200,000,000. Subtracting the Time Offset of -21,600 results in a corrected epoch time of 1,200,021,600 seconds, which is the epoch time for 6 hours after midnight on the next day in epoch time. This embodiment works equally as well in switches that are positioned on the East side of 25 Greenwich where the Time Offset has a positive value. Two commands are used when changing time. First, Figure 90 illustrates the control flow of the Change Time command 30900, which changes the Local Switch Time and the Time Offset. In Figure 90, after a switch 30 operator enters the Change Time command, the switch enters step 30902 and prompts the switch operator for the Local Switch Time and Time Offset from UTC. In step 30902 the switch operator enters a new Local Switch Time and Time Offset. Continuing to step 30904, the new time and Time Offset are displayed back to the switch operator. Continuing to step WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 30906, the switch operator must verify the entered time and Time Offset before the actual time and offset are changed on the switch. If in step 30906 the switch operator verifies the changes, the switch proceeds to step 30908 and generates a SER with an Event Qualifier equal to two which 5 identifies that the change was made to the Local Switch Time and Time Offset of the switch. The billing center uses the SER for its bill processing. The switch proceeds to step 30910 and exits the command. Referring back to step 30906, if the switch operator does not verify the changes, the switch proceeds to step 30910 and exits the command without updating 10 the Local Switch Time and Time Offset. For more information on SER, see Figure 86. Figure 91 illustrates the control flow for the Change Daylight Savings Time command 31000 which is the second command for changing time. In 15 Figure 91, after a switch operator enters the Change Daylight Savings Time command, the switch enters step 31002 and prompts the switch operator to select either a Forward or Backward time change. Continuing to step 31004, the switch operator makes a selection. In step 31004, if the switch operator selects the Forward option, the switch enters step 31006. In step 20 31006, the switch sets the Local Switch Time forward one hour and adds one hour (count of 60) to the Time Offset. The switch then proceeds to step 31010. Referring back to step 31004, if the switch operator selects the Backward option, the switch sets the Local Switch Time back one hour and subtract one hour (count of 60) from the Time Offset. The switch then 25 proceeds to step 31010. In step 31010, the switch operator must verify the forward or backward option and the new Local Switch Time and Time Offset before the actual time change takes place. If in step 31010, the switch operator verifies the 30 new time and Time Offset, the switch proceeds to step 31012 and generates a SER with an Event Qualifier equal to nine which changes the Local Switch Time and Time Offset of the switch. The switch proceeds to step 31014 and exits the command. Referring back to step 31010, if the switch operator does not verify the changes, the switch proceeds to step WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 31014 and exits the command without updating the Local Switch Time and Time Offset. After the successful completion of a Change Daylight Savings Time 5 Command, the billing records are affected by the new Time Offset. This embodiment allows the epoch time, used as the billing time, to increment normally through the daylight savings time change procedure, and not to be affected by the change of Local Switch Time and Time Offset. 10 2. Network Call Identifier. An embodiment provides a unique NCID that is assigned to each telephone call that traverses through the telecommunications network. Thus, the NCID is a discrete identifier among all network calls. The NCID is transported and recorded at each switch that is involved with the 15 telephone call. The originating switch of a telephone call generates the NCID. The chosen embodiment of the NCID of the present invention is an eighty-two (82) bit identifier that is comprised of the following subfields: 20 i) Originating Switch ID (14 bits) : This field represents the NCS Switch ID as defined in the Office Engineering table at each switch. The SER call record, however, contains an alpha numeric representation of the Switch ID. Thus, a switch uses the alphanumeric Switch ID as an index into a 25 database for retrieving the corresponding NCS Switch ID. ii) Originating Trunk Group (14 bits) : This field represents the originating trunk group as defined in the 32/64-word call record format described above. 30 iii) Originating Port Number (19 bits) : This field represents the originating port number as defined in the 32/64-word call record format described above.

WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 iv) Timepoint 1 (32 bits) : This field represents the Timepoint 1 value as defined in the 32/64-word call record format described above. v) Sequence Number (3 bits) : This field represents the number of calls 5 which have occurred on the same port number with the same Timepoint 1 (second) value. The first telephone call will have a sequence number set to '0.' This value increases incrementally for each successive call which originates on the same port number with the same Timepoint 1 value. 10 It would be readily apparent to one skilled in the relevant art to create an NCID of a different format. Each switch records the NCID in either the 32 or 64-word call record format. Regarding the 32-word call record format, intermediate and terminating switches will record the NCID in the AuthCode field of the 32-word call record if the AuthCode filed is not used 15 to record other information. In this case, the Originating Switch ID is the NCS Switch ID, not the alphanumeric Switch ID as recorded in the SER call record. If the AuthCode is used for other information, the intermediate and terminating switches record the NCID in the 64-word call record format. In contrast, originating switches do not use the AuthCode field when storing 20 an NCID in a 32-word call record. Originating switches record the subfields of the NCID in the corresponding separate fields of the 32-word call record. That is, the Originating Switch ID is stored as an alphanumeric Switch ID in the Switch ID field of the SER call record; the Originating Trunk Group is stored in the Originating Trunk Group field of the 32-word call record; the 25 Originating Port Number is stored in the Originating Port field of the 32 word call record; the Timepoint 1 is stored in the Timepoint 1 field of the 32-word call record; the Sequence Number is stored in the NCID Sequence Number field of the 32-word call record. The 32-word call record also includes an NCID Location (NCIDLOC) field to identify when the NCID is 30 recorded in the AuthCode field of the call record. If the NCID Location field contains a '1,' then the AuthCode field contains the NCID. If the NCID Location field contains a 'O,' then the NCID is stored in its separate sub fields in the call record. Only intermediate and terminating switches set the NCID Location field to a '1' because originating switches store the NCID WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 in the separate fields of the 32-word call record. Regarding the 64-word call record format, the expanded call record includes a separate field, call the NCID field, to store the 82 bits of the 5 NCID. This call record is handled the same regardless of whether an originating, intermediate, or terminating switch stores the NCID. In the 64-word call record format, the Originating Switch ID is the NCS Switch ID, not the alphanumeric Switch ID as recorded in the SER call record. 10 Figure 92 illustrates the control flow of the Network Call Identifier switch call processing. A call 30202 comes into a switch 30106-30110 (called the current switch for reference purposes; the current switch is the switch that is currently processing the call) at step 31104. In step 31104, the current switch receives the call 30202 and proceeds to step 31106. In step 31106, 15 the current switch accesses a local database and gets the trunk group parameters associated with the originating trunk group of the call 30202. After getting the parameters, the current switch proceeds to step 31108. In step 31108, the current switch determines if it received an NCID with the call 30202. If the current switch did not receive an NCID with the call 20 30202, the switch continues to step 31112. In step 31112, the switch analyzes the originating trunk group parameters to determine the originating trunk group type. If the originating trunk group type is an InterMachine Trunk (IMT) or a release link trunk (RLT), 25 then the switch proceeds to step 31116. An IMT is a trunk connecting two normal telecommunication switches, whereas a RLT is a trunk connecting an intelligent services network (ISN) platform to a normal telecommunication switch. When the current switch reaches step 31116, the current switch knows that it is not an originating switch and that it has 30 not received an NCID. In step 31116, the current switch analyzes the originating trunk group parameters to determine whether it is authorized to create an NCID for the call 30202. In step 31116, if the current switch is not authorized to create an NCID for the call 30202, the current switch proceeds to step 31118. When in step 31118, the current switch knows WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 that it is not an originating switch, it did not receive an NCID for the call 30202, but is not authorized to generate an NCID. Therefore, in step 31118, the current switch writes the call record associated with the call 30202 to the local switch database and proceeds to step 31120. In step 5 31120, the current switch transports the call 30202 out through the network with its associated NCID. Step 31120 is described below in more detail. Referring again to step 31116, if the current switch is authorized to create 10 an NCID for the call 30202, the current switch proceeds to step 31114. In step 31114, the current switch generates a new NCID for the call 30202 before continuing to step 31136. In step 31136, the current switch writes the call record, including the NCID, associated with the call 30202 to the local switch database and proceeds to step 31120. In step 31120, the 15 current switch transports the call 30202 out through the network with its associated NCID. Step 31120 is described below in more detail. Referring again to step 31112, if the current switch determines that the originating trunk group type is not an IMT or RLT, the current switch 20 proceeds to step 31114. When reaching step 31114, the current switch knows that it is an originating switch and, therefore, must generate a NCID for the call 30202. Step 31114 is described below in more detail. After generating a NCID in step 31114, the current switch proceeds to step 31136 to write the call record, including the NCID, associated with the call 25 30202 to the local database. After writing the call record, the current switch proceeds to step 31120 to transport the call out through the network with its associated NCID. Step 31120 is also described below in more detail. 30 Referring again to step 31108, if the current switch determines that it received an NCID with the call 30202, the current switch proceeds to step 31110. In step 31110, the current switch processes the received NCID. In step 31110, there are two possible results. First, the current switch may decide not to keep the received NCID thereby proceeding from step 31110 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 to step 31114 to generate a new NCID. Step 31110 is described below in more detail. In step 31114, the current switch may generate a new NCID for the call 30202 before continuing to step 31136. Step 31114 is also described below in more detail. In step 31136, the current switch writes 5 the call record associated with the call 30202 to the local database. The current switch then proceeds to step 31120 and transports the call 30202 out through the network with its associated NCID. Step 31120 is also described below in more detail. 10 Referring again to step 31110, the current switch may decide to keep the received NCID thereby proceeding from step 31110 to step 31115. In step 31115, the current switch adds the received NCID to the call record associated with the call 30202. Steps 31110 and 31115 are described below in more detail. After step 31115, the current switch continues to 15 step 31136 where it writes the call record associated with the call 30202 to the local database. The current switch then proceeds to step 31120 and transports the call 30202 out through the network with its associated NCID. Step 31120 is also described below in more detail. 20 Figure 93 illustrates the control logic for step 31110 which processes a received NCID. The current switch enters step 31202 of step 31110 when it determines that an NCID was received with the call 30202. In step 31202, the current switch analyzes the originating trunk group parameters to determine the originating trunk group type. If the originating 25 trunk group type is an IMT or RLT, then the current switch proceeds to step 31212. When in step 31212, the current switch knows that it is not an originating switch and that it received an NCID for the call 30202. Therefore, in step 31212, the current switch keeps the received NCID and exits step 31110, thereby continuing to step 31115 in Figure 92, after 30 which the current switch will store the received NCID in the call record and transport the call. Referring again to step 31202, if the originating trunk group type is not an IMT or RLT, the current switch proceeds to step 31204. In step 31204, the WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 current switch determines if the originating trunk group type is an Integrated Services User Parts Direct Access Line (ISUP DAL) or an Integrated Services Digital Network Primary Rate Interface (ISDN PRI). ISUP is a signaling protocol which allows information to be sent from 5 switch to switch as information parameters. An ISUP DAL is a trunk group that primarily is shared by multiple customers of the network, but can also be dedicated to a single network customer. In contrast, an ISDN PRI is a trunk group that primarily is dedicated to a single network customer, but can also be shared by multiple network customers. A network customer is 10 an entity that leases network resources. In step 31204, if the current switch determines that the trunk group type is not an ISUP DAL or ISDN PRI, the current switch proceeds to step 31206. When in step 31206, the current switch knows that it received an NCID that was not generated by a switch that is part of the telecommunication network or by a switch that is 15 a customer of the network. Therefore, in step 31206, the current switch discards the received NCID because it is an unreliable NCID. From step 31206, the current switch exits step 31110, thereby continuing to step 31114 in Figure 92 where the current switch will create a new NCID and transport that NCID with the call 30202. 20 Referring back to step 31204, if the current switch determines that the originating trunk group type is an ISUP DAL or ISDN PRI, the current switch continues to step 31208. When in step 31208, the current switch knows that it received an NCID from a customer trunk group. Therefore, 25 the current switch analyzes the originating trunk group parameters to determine whether it is authorized to create a new NCID for the call 30202. The current switch may be authorized to create a new NCID and overwrite the NCID provided by the customer to ensure that a valid NCID corresponds to the call 30202 and is sent through the network. In step 30 31208, if the current switch is not authorized to create a new NCID for the call 30202, the current switch proceeds to step 31210. In step 31210, the current switch checks the validity of the received NCID, for example, the NCID length. If the received NCID is invalid, the current switch proceeds to step 31206. In step 31206, the current switch discards the invalid NCID.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 From step 31206, the current switch exits step 31110, thereby continuing to step 31114 in Figure 92 where the current switch will create a new NCID and transport that NCID with the call 30202. Referring again to step 31210, if the current switch determines that the 5 received NCID is valid, the current switch proceeds to step 31212. In step 31212 the current switch keeps the received NCID and exits step 31110, thereby continuing to step 31115 in Figure 92 where the current switch will store the received NCID in the call record and transport the call. 10 Figure 94A illustrates the control logic for step 31114 which generates an NCID. The current switch enters step 31302 when an NCID must be created. In step 31302, the current switch will calculate a sequence number. The sequence number represents the number of calls which have occurred on the same port number with the same Timepoint 1 value. The 15 first call has a sequence number value of '0,' after which the sequence number will increase incrementally for each successive call that originates on the same port number with the same Timepoint 1 value. After creating the sequence number in step 31302, the current switch proceeds to step 31304. In step 31304, the current switch creates a call record for the call 20 30202, including in it the call's 30202 newly created NCID. After the call record has been created, the current switch exits step 31114 and proceeds to step 31136 in Figure 92 where the current switch writes the call record to the local switch database. 25 Figure 94B illustrates the control logic for step 31115 which adds a received NCID to the call record associated with the call 30202. Upon entering step 31115, the current switch enters step 31306. When in step 31306, the current switch knows that it has received a valid NCID from an intermediate or terminating switch, or from a customer switch. In step 30 31306, the current switch determines if the AuthCode field of the 32-word call record is available for storing the NCID. If the AuthCode field is available, the current switch proceeds to step 31310. In step 31310, the current switch stores the NCID in the AuthCode field of the 32-word call record. The current switch must also set the NCID Location field to the WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 value '1' which indicates that the NCID is stored in the AuthCode field. After step 31310, the current switch exits step 31115 and continues to step 31136 in Figure 92 where the current switch writes the call record to the local switch database. 5 Referring again to step 31306, if the AuthCode field is not available in the 32-word call record, the current switch proceeds to step 31308. In step 31308, the current switch stores the NCID in the NCID field of the 64-word call record. After step 31308, the current switch exits step 31115 and 10 continues to step 31136 in Figure 92 where the current switch writes the call record to the local switch database. Figure 95 illustrates the control logic for step 31120 which transports the call from the current switch. There are two entry points for this control 15 logic: steps 31402 and 31412. Upon entering step 31402 from step 31136 on Figure 92, the current switch knows that it has created an NCID or has received a valid NCID. In step 31402, the current switch accesses a local database and gets the trunk group parameters associated with the terminating trunk group for transporting the call 30202. After getting the 20 parameters, the current switch proceeds to step 31404. In step 31404, the current switch determines the terminating trunk group type. If the terminating trunk is an ISUP trunk, the current switch proceeds to step 31408. In step 31408, the current switch analyzes the parameters associated with the ISUP trunk type to determine whether or not to deliver 25 the NCID to the next switch. If the current switch is authorized to deliver the NCID, the current switch proceeds to step 31416. In step 31416, the current switch transports the call to the next switch along with a SS7 initial address message (IAM). The NCID is transported as part of the generic digits parameter of the IAM. The IAM contains setup information for the 30 next switch which prepares the next switch to accept and complete the call 30202. The format of the generic digits parameter is shown below in Table 306: Generic Digits Parameter WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Code: 11000001 Type: 0 Byte #, Bit # Description 5 byte 1, bits 0-4 Type of Digits : Indicates the contents of the parameter. This field has a binary value of '11011' to indicate that the parameter contains the NCID. byte 1, bits 5-7 Encoding Scheme : Indicates the format of the parameter contents. This field has a binary value of '011' to indicate 10 that the NCID is stored in the binary format. byte 2, bits 0-7 byte 3, bits 0-5 Originating Switch ID byte 3, bits 6-7 byte 4, bits 0-7 byte 5, bits 0-3 Originating Trunk Group byte 5, bits 4-7 byte 6, bits 0-7 byte 7, bits 0-6 Originating Port 15 Number byte 7, bit 7 Not Used byte 8, bits 0-7 byte 9, bits 0-7 byte 10, bits 0-7 byte 11, bits 0-7 Timepoint 1 byte 12, bits 0-2 NCID Sequence Number 20 byte 12, bits 3-7 Not Used Table 306 After transporting the call 30202 and the IAM, the current switch proceeds 25 to step 31418, thereby exiting the switch processing. Referring again to step 31408, if the current switch is not authorized to deliver the NCID to the next switch in an IAM message, the current switch proceeds to step 31412. In step 31412, the current switch transports the call 30202 to the next switch under normal procedures which consists of 30 sending an IAM message to the next switch without the NCID recorded as part of the generic digits parameter. After transporting the call 30202, the current switch proceeds to step 31418, thereby exiting the switch processing. Referring again to step 31404, if the current switch determines that the WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 terminating trunk is not an ISUP, the current switch proceeds to step 31406. In step 31406, the current switch determines if the terminating trunk 5 group is an ISDN trunk (the terminating trunk group is dedicated to one network customer). If the terminating trunk group is an ISDN, the current switch proceeds to step 31410. In step 31410, the current switch analyzes the parameters associated with the ISDN trunk group type to determine whether or not to deliver the NCID to the next switch. If the current switch 10 is authorized to deliver the NCID, the current switch proceeds to step 31414. In step 31414, the current switch transports the call to the next switch along with a setup message. The setup message contains setup information for the next switch which prepares the next switch to accept and complete the call 30202. The NCID is transported as part of the 15 locking shift codeset 6 parameter of the setup message. The format of the locking shift codeset 6 parameter is shown below in Table 307 Locking Shift Codeset 6 Parameter Code: 11000001 20 Type: 0 Byte #, Bit # Description byte 1, bits 0-4 Type of Digits : Indicates the contents of the parameter. This field has a binary value of '11011' to indicate that the 25 parameter contains the NCID. byte 1, bits 5-7 Encoding Scheme : Indicates the format of the parameter contents. This field has a binary value of '011' to indicate that the NCID is stored in the binary format. byte 2, bits 0-7 byte 3, bits 0-5 Originating Switch ID 30 byte 3, bits 6-7 byte 4, bits 0-7 byte 5, bits 0-3 Originating Trunk Group byte 5, bits 4-7 byte 6, bits 0-7 byte 7, bits 0-6 Originating Port Number byte 7, bit 7 Not Used WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 byte 8, bits 0-7 byte 9, bits 0-7 byte 10, bits 0-7 byte 11, bits 0-7 Timepoint 1 byte 12, bits 0-2 NCID Sequence Number byte 12, bits 3-7 Not Used 5 Table 307 After transporting the call 30202 and the setup message, the current 10 switch proceeds to step 31418, thereby exiting the switch processing. Referring again to step 31410, if the current switch determines that it does not have authority to deliver the NCID to the next switch in a setup message, the current switch proceeds to step 31412. In step 31412, the current switch transports the call 30202 to the next switch under normal 15 procedures which consists of sending a setup message to the next switch without the NCID recorded as part of the locking shift codeset 6 parameter. After transporting the call 30202, the current switch proceeds to step 31418, thereby exiting the switch processing. 20 Referring again to step 31412, this step is also entered from step 31118 on Figure 92 when the current switch did not receive an NCID, is an intermediate or terminating switch, and is not authorized to create an NCID. In this case, in step 31412, the current switch also transports the call 30202 to the next switch under normal procedures which consists of 25 sending an IAM or setup message to the next switch without the NCID recorded as part of the parameter. After transporting the call 30202, the current switch proceeds to step 31418, thereby exiting the switch processing. 30 A system and method for the switches of a telecommunications network to generate call records for telephone calls using a flexible and expandable record format. Upon receipt of a telephone call, a switch in the network analyzes the telephone call to determine whether the default call record is sufficiently large to store call record information pertaining to the telephone 49V2- WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 call, or whether the expanded call record must be used to store the call information pertaining to the telephone call. After determining which call record to use, the switch generates the default or expanded call record. The switch sends a billing block, comprised of completed call records, to a 5 billing center upon filling an entire billing block. XXII. PRIORITIZING ACCESS/ A. Prioritizing Access/Router Overview 10 A prioritizing access router (PAR) is designed to combine the features of an internet access device and an Internet Protocol (IP) Router. It enables dial up modem access to the internet by performing essential modem and PPP/SLIP to IP and the reverse IP to PPP/SLIP conversion. It also analyzes IP packet source/destination addresses and UPD or TCP ports and selects 15 appropriate outgoing network interfaces for each packet. Lastly, it uses a priority routing technique to favor packets destined for specific network interfaces over packets destined for other network interfaces. The design goal of the prioritizing access/router is to segregate real-time 20 traffic from the rest of the best-effort data traffic on internet networks. Real-time and interactive multimedia traffic is best segregated from traffic without real-time constraints at the access point to the internet, so that greater control over quality of service can be gained. Figure 114A is a block diagram of an access/router system in accordance with a preferred 25 embodiment. B. Prioritizing Access/Router Process 1. A computer dials up the PAR via a modem. The computer modem negotiates data transfer rate and modem protocol parameters with the PAR 30 modem (11410). 2. The computer sets up a Point to Point Protocol (PPP) session with the PAR using the modem to modem connection over a Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) connection. 3. The computer transfers PPP packets to the PAR using the modem WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 connection. The PAR modem (11410) transfers PPP packets to the PPP to IP conversion process (11420) via the modem to host processor interface (11480). The modem to host processor interface can be any physical interface presently available or yet to be invented. Some current examples 5 are ISA, EISA, VME, SCbus, MVIP bus, Memory Channel, and TDM buses. There is some advantage in using a multiplexed bus such as the Time Division Multiplexing buses mentioned here, due to the ability to devote capacity for specific data flows and preserve deterministic behavior. 4. The PPP to IP conversion process (11420) converts PPP packets to IP 10 packets, and transfers the resulting IP packets to the packet classifier (11450) via the process to process interface (11485). The process to process interface can be either a physical interface between dedicated processor hardware, or can be a software interface. Some examples of process to process software interfaces include function or subroutine calls, 15 message queues, shared memory, direct memory access (DMA), and mailboxes. 5. The packet classifier (11485) determines if the packet belongs to any special prioritized group. The packet classifier keeps a table of flow specifications, defined by 20 destination IP Address source IP address combined source/ destination IP Address combined destination IP Address/UDP Port combined destination IP Address/TCP Port 25 combined source IP address/UDP Port combined source IP Address/TCP Port combined source IP Address and TCP or UDP port with source IP address combined destination IP Address and TCP or UDP port with source IP 30 address combined source IP Address and TCP or UDP port with destination IP address and TCP/UDP Port The packet classifier checks its table of flow specifications against the IP addresses and UDP or TCP ports used in the packet. If any match is found, WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 the packet is classified as belonging to a priority flow and labeled as with a priority tag. Resource Reservation Setup Protocol techniques may be used for the packet classifier step. 6. The packet classifier (11450) hands off priority tagged and non 5 tagged packets to the packet scheduler (11460) via the process to process interface (11490). The process to process interface (11490) need not be identical to the process to process interface (11485), but the same selection of techniques is available. The packet scheduler (11460) used a priority queuing technique such as Weighted Fair Queueing to help ensure that 10 prioritized packets (as identified by the packet classifier) receive higher priority and can be placed on an outbound network interface queue ahead of competing best-effort traffic. 7. The packet scheduler (11460) hands off packets in prioritized order to any outbound network interface (11410, 11470, 11471, or 11472) via 15 the host processor to peripheral bus (11495). Any number of outbound network interfaces may be used. 8. Similar to step 3, IP packets can arrive at the PAR via non-modem interfaces (11470, 11471, 11472). Some examples of these interfaces include Ethernet, fast Ethernet, FDDI, ATM, and Frame Relay. These 20 packets go through the same steps 5 through 7 as IP packets arriving via the modem PPP interfaces. 9. The priority flow specifications are managed through the controller process (11430). The controller process can accept externally placed priority reservations through the external control application programming 25 interface (11440). The controller validates priority reservations for particular flows against admission control procedures and policy procedures, and if the reservation is admitted, the flow specification is entered in the flow specification table in the packet classifier (11450) via the process to process interface (11465). The process to process interface 30 (11465) need not be identical to the process to process interface (11485), but the same selection of techniques is available. ,1 9s- WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 XXIII. CALLBACK TELEPHONY SYSTEM A. Introduction to a Callback Telephony System in Accordance with a preferred Embodiment 5 In today's telephony environment, a caller must contact an operator to initiate a conference call and/or have all parties dial a common number to connect into a conference call. this requires the cost of a human operator and the inconvenience of dialing a predefined number to be 10 carried as overhead of each conference call. It also makes it very inefficient to schedule a conference call and assure that all parties are available to participate. It also requires a dedicated number for all the parties to access to facilitate the call 15 In accordance with a preferred embodiment, a callback system is facilitated by a caller accessing a display from a computer and filling out information describing the parameters of a call. Information such as the date and time the call should be initiated, billing information, and telephone numbers of parties to participate in the call could be captured. 20 Then, based on the information entered, a central or distributed computing facility with access to the hybrid network transmits e-mail in a note to each party required for the call copying the other parties to verify participation and calendar the event. The e-mail would include any particulars, such as the password associated with the call and time 25 the call would be commenced. The necessary network facilities would also be reserved to assure the appropriate Quality of Service (QOS) would be available, and when the date and time requested arrived, the call is initiated by contacting each of the participants whether they be utilizing a telephone attached to a PSTN or a voice capable apparatus 30 (such as a computer or intelligent television) attached to the hybrid network. At any time during scheduling, initiation or duration of the call, any party could request operator assistance by selecting that 446 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 service from the display associated with the call. Thus, a completely automated callback system is provided for call setup and control. For callers that utilize the callback system on a regular basis a custom 5 profile is provided as an extension to the users existing profile information. The custom profile allows a user to store frequent conference call participants information. The profile contains participant's telephone numbers (which could be DDD, IDDD, IP Address or Cellular phone number), E-mail address, paging service, fax number, 10 secretary phone number, location, time zone, working hours and other pertinent information that will be useful for initiating a call. Default profiles based on company or organization needs are also enabled and can be tailored to meet the needs of a particular user based on more global information. 15 Billing information would also be provided online. A user could enter a pre-arranged billing number or the ability to bill to a credit card or telephone number. If billing to a telephone number, the system treats the call like a collect or third party call to verify billing. 20 If profile. information were predefined for a particular call scenario, then another option would allow an immediate connection of a conference call or single call at the press of a button, much as speed dialing is performed today except that more than one caller could be joined 25 without intervention of the calling party, Internet callers are supported and an operator can be joined as required. B. Internet-Based Callback Architecture The following information discusses the detailed architecture of an 30 internet-based callback architecture in accordance with a preferred embodiment. A block diagram of the architecture is illustrated in Figure 114B in accordance with a preferred embodiment. The callback call flow commences when a caller 11412 calls into a local internet service 97'6?l WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 provider 11419 as illustrated in Figure 114B at 11410. The caller addresses the callback server 11414 to access the callback home page 11411 through the internet 11419, shown as an internet cloud labeled Basic Internet Protocol Platform 11419. At 5 the callback server home page 11411, the caller enters, sees and/or updates default information such as: callback Internet Protocol (IP) address, call-to phone number (or multiple phone numbers to initiate a conference call) and charge-to method at a minimum. Other information, such as one or more numbers comprising entry of a Direct 10 Distance Dialing (DDD), International Direct Distance Dialing (IDDD) or an Internet Protocol (IP) address can be utilized to specify a phone number or internet computer with voice capability. In addition, a date and time can be prearranged for staging the callback operation. Additional information that can be captured at 15 the callback server home page 11411 is detailed below in specific examples designed to elaborate and clarify in accordance with a preferred embodiment. Then, at 11420, the callback server 11414 send a message to the 20 callback switch 11432 with the appropriate calling information, and the callback switch 11432 initiates the callback leg as shown by step 11430 of the call through the Public Service Telephony Network (PSTN) 11435 to the destination specified by the caller whereby the callback caller answers the incoming call to 11437. Once the caller end of the call is 25 prepared, then the callback switch initiates call-to call leg(s) which connect the call through path 11440 through PSTN 11445 to telephone set 11446 and/or 11447. Once all of the callers have been connected, then when the status of the call changes, an exception condition is indicated on the display if it is an IP call, or an audio indicia of the 30 condition is transmitted to the callers if they are utilizing a standard telephony device. A change in status could be a caller hanging up or a glitch occurring in the transmission. The exception conditions are also captured for quality of service analysis.

WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 When the call is initiated utilizing the information entered into the callback server home page 11411, as part of the initialization of the callback session, a separate temporary webpage is created which is accessible to all members of the callback via a password selected by the 5 initiator of the callback session. While all of the callers are being connected and throughout the duration of the telephony experience, the status of the call leg changes, and exception conditions, are indicated on the temporary created status webpage, or an audio indicia, where appropriate, of the condition is transmitted to the callers if they are 10 utilizing a standard telephony device. Then, as callers are connected, removed, or change status, the display is updated to reflect the status of each participant's connection. In addition, as the call progresses, participants can drag and drop files, video clips or any other information which would be utilized as collaborative material during the call. Each 15 participant would be required to move information to their personal computer before the call terminated, since the webpage is temporary and is deleted upon termination of the call. The temporary webpage is password protected to avoid unauthorized access to the information contained in the webpage. 20 C. Callback Service Potential The callback service includes support for one-to-one calling, one-to many calling (conference calling, fax broadcast, text-to-speech message delivery, voice-to-voice message delivery, conference call reservation 25 whereby the server sends E-mails to call-to participants with the conference call details, the server sends fax to call-to participants, or the server sends a text-to-speech message to call-to participants. D. Internet Service Potential 30 Real-time view of the status of each conference call participant, ANI and an alphanumeric representation to identify each participant entered by the initiator when a call is "reserved" can be displayed on screen as WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 participants connect to conference. This information is captured as part of the call record set forth earlier and detailed in the appendix. In an alternative embodiment, a conference call without callback leg is 5 enabled. In this embodiment, a callback customer participates through a Voice Over Network (VON) application utilizing a computer with voice capability, and can initiate a video screen popup on the computer display for manual operator assistance as detailed above in the description of a video operator. 10 E. Internet-Based Callback Architecture In an internet based callback architecture as illustrated in Figure 115, the callback caller dials into a local internet service provider 11512. Then, the caller addresses the host server 11514 containing the callback 15 home page 11510 11511. At the callback server home page 11511, the caller enters the information described earlier including a callback Internet Protocol (IP) address, call-to phone number (or multiple phone numbers to initiate a conference call) and charge-to method at a minimum. Then, for the callback call flow to initiate the call, the 20 callback server 11514, where the callback server home page 11511 is located, transmits a message to the callback switch 11532 with the necessary calling information generated from the callback home page 11511. Finally, the callback caller utilizing the internet service provider 11512 to establish a voice IP session with the initiating client 11535. 25 The callback switch 11511 then initiates the call-to call leg(s) routing the call 11540 out over the public service telephony network 11541 to a telephone set 11542. F. Self Regulating System 30 An expert system monitors each call in accordance with a preferred embodiment. The system includes rules that define what logic to execute when an exception occurs. The rules include specialized Soo WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 processing based on whether the call is routed via a PSTN or the internet. In addition, the system includes a default connection to a manual operator if no other correction of the connection is available. For example, if a caller hangs up during a teleconference and other 5 callers are still connected, an exception message is sent to each of the still connected callers informing them of the status change. Another aspect of the expert system is to ensure quality of service (QOS) and produce reports indicating both integrity and exceptions. Scheduling of resources is tied to this expert system, which regulates whether calls can 10 be scheduled based on available or projected resources at the time of the proposed call. For example, since all calls used by this system are initiated by the callback switch (item 11432 in Figure 114B and item 11532 in Figure 115), if there are insufficient outgoing trunk ports during the period of time that a callback subscriber requests, then the 15 callback subscriber is prompted to select another time or denied access to the resources for that time. This is utilized to predict when additional ports and/or resources are required. This document describes a more efficient method for performing a 20 callback feature. The proposed method eliminates the need for external local access lines, and increases the number of users which can utilize the callback feature simultaneously. This method describes the use of virtual connectivity rather than physical connectivity from the remote test system to the remote user. Local phone lines from the remote test 25 system and the remote user are no longer necessary. The following illustrations show examples utilizing customers which circuit traverses through a DXC I/O. The same would apply for customers who circuits traverse through other DXC types/levels as well 30 as access and testing customer's circuits through a switch by accessing their incoming port via a switch maintenance port accessed through the TAD by the remote test system. Figure 116 - Chart A WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Figure 116 illustrates how a callback feature has traditionally been implemented. In this illustration the connectivity from a Digital VAX computer 11650 to the remote test system is via an X.25 connection utilizing an X.25 network. The remote user 11660 has selected a voice 5 circuit test for a customer's circuit which traverses through the DXC I/O 11617 at test system 11602. Test system 11602 displays a prompt to remote user 11660 on the remote user's display "Enter Callback Number?" Remote user 11660 enters the phone number of co-located phone 11603. After entering the co-located phone number, remote test 10 system 11602 selects one of its local phone lines 11622. Upon detecting dialtone from the local telephone company, the remote test system 11602 pulse dials or transmits DTMF tones indicative of the remote user's phone number. The remote user's local telephone company receives the incoming call and routes the call to the remote 15 user's co-located phone 11603 over a local line. The remote user 11660 places the phone 11603 in an off hook condition, and can either audibly monitor the customer's circuit which traverses through the DXC I/O 11617, or utilizes the remote test 20 system's 11602 signaling state to initiate a call to the customer's phone. When the customer answers the phone, the remote tester 11660 communicates to the customer from the co-located phone 11603 through the test system 11602. Figure 117 - CHART B 25 Figure 117 illustrates a method for implementing a callback feature utilizing virtual callback in accordance with a preferred embodiment. In this architecture the entire path from the remote user to the remote test system traverses an Internet Protocol (IP) network. The remote user's computer 11721 and remote test system 11702 are both equipped with 30 software to facilitate internet telephony as described previously which connects IP calls to a user entered IP destination address. The remote user's computer 11721 is equipped with the appropriate internal modem or a specially designed Network Interface Card (NIC) which supports speaker and microphone capabilities. Communication by the user WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 11721 through the modem or NIC card could occur via a headset equipped with a speaker and microphone. The headset would plug directly into the modem or NIC card within the user's computer 11721. 5 The remote user 11721 has selected a voice circuit test for a customer who's circuit traverses through the DXC I/O 11717 which is connected to test system 11702. The remote user would initiate the internet telephony software which resides on their computer 11721, test system 11702 displays a prompt to remote user 11721, "Do You Desire Virtual 10 Callback?" Upon selecting "Yes" the remote test system 11702 would initiate its internet telephony software. The remote test system's 11702 Internet Phone software would prompt the remote user 11721 for their IP address. After entering their IP address, the remote test system 11702 would initiate a IP call to the remote user's computer 11721. 15 Upon establishing an IP connection to the remote user's computer 11721, the remote test system's 11702 internet telephone software requests a connection to the remote user's 11721 internet telephony software. Once the remote user's 11721 software has linked with the remote test system's 11702 internet telephony software, the remote user 20 11721 has monitoring and communication capabilities over the customer's circuit under test as detailed above. All communication for the remote user is advantageously through a headset and a phone. The local access line would no longer be 25 necessary. The remote test system is not limited by the number of local lines for support of calls with a callback feature, because local access lines are no longer utilized, and therefore, local access charges by the telephone company would no longer apply since none are being utilized. 30 Figure 118 - CHART C Figure 118 is an illustration of a system architecture with internet telephony support in accordance with a preferred embodiment. MCI's remote test systems provide support for a command structure necessary for voice circuit assurance testing, dial plans and signaling states. Once WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 the appropriate enhancements are installed MCI remote testing capabilities are enhanced. The remote VAX 11876 and remote test system 11884 are software and hardware upgraded to support the TCP/IP protocol for Internet communication. This includes the addition 5 of TCP/IP system software and a Token Ring, Ethernet or other network support card. The remoter VAX 11876 and remote test system 11884 are connected to either a Token Ring, Ethernet or other network. The network has connectivity to a router 11878 and 11882 for 10 accessibility to the Wide Area Network (WAN) and/or the INTERNET. The remote test system 11884 includes software which allows the remote test system 11884 to perform voice circuit assurance testing. This includes the ability to select various signaling states such as loop start or ground start, number to dial, and appropriate signaling such as 15 DTMF, dial pulse or Multifrequency (MF). The remote test system 11884 bridges the customer's selected circuit to Internet telephony software for audible monitoring and verbal communication with the customer over the customer's circuit path. The remote user's computer 11811 and remote test system 11884 is equipped with software to facilitate Internet 20 telephony as described previously which connects IP calls to a user defined IP destination address. The remote user's computer 11811 is equipped with the appropriate internal modem or Network Interface Card (NIC) which supports speaker 25 and microphone capabilities. The user plugs their headset which is equipped with a microphone and speaker directly into the modem or NIC card within the user's computer 11811 for audible monitoring or verbal communication support. 30 This document describes a new service and functionality for voice as well as data communications through use of the Internet. Customers would be able to subscribe to this service at a much lower per minute rate thus reducing their monthly long distance calling charges as compared to by all other long distance carriers. This method of communication would WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 revolutionize the way the world currently views dial-up voice and data communication. This service could be rolled out in two phases which this document will dictate. The Server/Route switch is a conceptual device and would require development to support my proposed method 5 of physical/virtual communication. Examples are now provided to illustrate typical, Continental U.S. call placement. The same could apply for global calling as well. County and city codes would have cross reference tables within the Server Switches 10 to identify the out of country Server Switch city destinations. Figure 119 - CHART A Figure 119 is a call flow in a accordance with a preferred embodiment. Remote Personal Computer (PC) user 11904 accesses the Internet 15 11905 via dial access 11902. Customers subscribing to the service have their PCs 11903 and 11904 equipped with internet access software which allows them to connect and access the Server Route Switch 11906 by the software placing a call to the Server Route Switch 11906 IP which recognizes the individual as an active account through 20 the customer provided account number and password. The user's PC 11903 and 11904 are equipped with the appropriate modem type equipped for speaker as well as microphone functionality. The Internet Phone software updates its installation files indicating that 25 a successful installation has occurred and will not allow a second installation of the same software package to another PC. This check prevents others from using the program illegally. When the Internet program is activated, the user is required to enter an account number, a user id and an assigned password. The password is alphanumeric, 30 which makes it difficult for unauthorized use of the program. The software program also has a selectable button to allow either data mode for sending a FAX or chat mode for verbal communication.

WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Before launching the program from a PC 11903 or 11904, personal information such as their user account number, password, and destination phone number must be entered. Upon field completion the user would select an indicia to initiate transmission. For direct IP 5 access a PC 11903 would communicate to the Server Route Switch 11906. For dial-up access from the user's PC 11904, the user would first establish a dial-up connection to the internet 11905. Once their dial-up connection 11902 to the Internet 11905 has been established, the user activates the Internet Phone Software and places an IP call to 10 the Server Route Switch 11906. Once the user's PC 11903 or 11904 has established an IP connection with the Server route Switch 11906, the user's account and password are verified by the Server Route Switch 11906 as an active account. Upon information verification, the Server Route Switch 11906 scans the destination number dialed to determine 15 which destination server switch to utilize in routing the call. If the user 11903 or 11904 entered an area code and NXX that does not have a Server Switch, the user would be prompted for another number accordingly. 20 South Carolina has three server switches, each serving a major city. Charleston 11907, Columbia 11908 and Florence 11909. The dial-up customer 11904 located in Washington D.C. establishes a connection to the Internet 11905 over a local loop 11902. Once access to the Internet 11905 has been established, the user 11904 activates the Internet 25 Phone software installed on the PC 11904. The user 11904 enters the user id and password and destination phone number into the appropriate fields within the Internet Phone software. After the information has been entered, the user 11904 clicks on the 30 Connect button within the Internet Phone program. In this example, the user 11904 dialed 803-554-9899 as the destination which is a Charleston S.C. phone number. S-v6 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 The Server Route Switch 11906 views area code 803 and cross references it to its known server route tables to determine unambiguously that this phone number is a South Carolina Server Switch NPA. The Server Route Switch then scans 554, cross references 5 554 to the NXX table for South Carolina and determines it to be the Server Switch for Charleston 11907. The Server Route Switch 11906 scans an IP cross reference table for the Charleston Server Switch 11907 IP address. Depending on traffic capacity, each city may have more than one IP node to the switch. The Server Route Switch could 10 ping each node 11910, 11910, 11912 or 11913 to determine which node has the best response time indicative of less traffic load. For this example, node address 166.22.784.215 11911 was found to have the best response. Once the IP address with the best response time 15 11911 was identified, the Server Route Switch 11906 places an IP call to the Charleston Server Switch 11907 to node 11911 over the Internet 11905. Once the connection to the Charleston Server Switch 11907 has been established, the Server Route Switch 11906 strips the 803 NPA from the calling number and places the call over the Internet 11905 to 20 the Charleston Server Switch 11907 located with the called party's exchange. The Charleston Server Switch 11907 is equipped with either multiple FG-A access, or FG-B tandem trunks 11914 to the local Telco Tandem 25 Switch 12015 or Telco Central Office 12016 illustrated in Figure 120. When one of the access lines 11914 are selected and seized by the Charleston Server Switch 11907, the Telco would provide dial tone from the local telco central office 12016 or Tandem Switch 12015. Upon dial tone detection the Charleston Server Switch 11907 would either 30 dialpulse, DTMF or MF the received digits, as shown in Figure 120 from the calling party 12014 to the telco central office 12016 closest to the called party 12017. Figure 120 is a detailed view of the operations of a central office in accordance with a preferred embodiment.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 The telco central office 12016 would recognize the NXX as within its calling area, treat the received 7 digits as a local call and place ring cycle current on the customer's local loop 12018 which would cause the end customer's phone 12017 to ring. When the called party answered the 5 phone 12017 the call path would be cut through and considered complete. The calling party 11904 could then verbally communicate with the called party 12017 via the calling party's PC 11904. This method of communication could also be used in PC to PC 10 communication for verbal communication or sending a FAX. A similar architecture would function for global calling. County and city codes would be indexed utilizing cross reference tables to determine out of country Server Switch IP destinations. 15 An example of a routing table is provided below in accordance with a preferred embodiment. Route Table Representation NPA: 803: South Carolina 20 NXX: 522: Charleston 766: Charleston 572: Charleston IPI: 161.22.784.214 IP2: 166.22.784.215 25 IP3: 166.22.784.216 IP4: 166.22.784.217 730: Columbia 761: Columbia 856: Columbia 30 IPI: 166.22.796.112 IP2: 166.22.796.113 IP3: 166.22.796.114 IP4: 166.22.766.115 943: Florence WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 683: Florence IPI: 166.22.796.122 IP2: 166.22.796.123 IP3: 166.22.796.124 5 IP4: 166.22.766.125 Figure 121 illustrates a block diagram supporting PC to PC, PC to phone or phone to phone communication over the Internet. These users they would need to be located within an exchange area served by a Server 10 Switch. When traveling and calling from other than the user's residence, the user could gain access by calling a specific 800 number for voice and specific 800 number for PC communication. In the Phase II configuration there is no need for a dedicated Route 15 Switch. Each major city would be equipped with a Server Switch capable of handling 2-way communication to and from the local telco. The Server Switch could be equipped with 2-way Feature Group A or 2 way FG-B trunks to support inbound as well as outbound traffic to and from the switch from the local telco. 20 The PC user would be equipped with a specially developed Internet Phone software program as stated in Phase I. The user would be required to enter the appropriate 800 number when calling from other than the user's residence. The Internet Phone software would have an 25 option for the user to select indicating "Residence" or "Roaming". If the user has selected "Residence" the user must be PIC'd to MCI as their primary Long Distance provider. Their call would then be treated as an Equal Access call and User id and Password verification would not be necessary. If the user selected "Roaming" the user would be required to 30 enter into the appropriate Internet Phone field the 800 number for remote PC access. The user would also be required to enter their user account number. The software program would have a selectable button to allow either data mode for sending a FAX and file transfers or chat mode for verbal communication.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 A phone user, such as Tommy Zey 12149, would have their primary residence PIC'd to MCI. When traveling or calling from other than the primary residence the users would have a special 800 number for remote 5 dial to a Server Switch for verbal communication. When calling from their primary residence their call would be treated as an Equal Access call. When calling from other than the primary residence, the user would be required to dial the appropriate 800 number for access to a Server Switch for voice communication. Upon establishing a connection 10 to the Server Switch, the Server Switch will prompt the user for their account number. Once the Server Switch has received and verified the user's account number as active, the user will be prompted for the number they wish to dial. At this point the user enters the number they wish to call, area code followed by the 7 digit exchange. This user could 15 be prompted for the information by a Voice Response Unit (VRU) which would greatly simplify user instructions. A user accesses the Server Switch via means of either Equal Access or an 800 access line. The Server Switch uses the Internet at its transport 20 to get the user to the distant Server Switch for call termination within the Telco's local exchange for the called number. A call example after the completion of the evolution Switched Virtual Communications network is described next. From a customer's perspective, all calls are handled no differently then they were by standard traditional IMT 25 switches. The one exception is that all calls are routed to their destination switch over the IP network rather than Inter-Machine Trunks. A customer in Washington D.C. 12149 has MCI as their long distance 30 provider and dials 18035524475. Telco 12151 recognizes the off hook from the customer's local loop 12150 and as soon as the Telco Central Office 12151 receives the 1 they know the call is to be routed to MCI. The call is routed from the CO 12151 to the Telco Tandem switch 12152. The Telco Tandem Switch 12152 sends the call over the S_70 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Tandem access line 12153 to the local MCI Server switch 12154. The MCI Server switch 12154 recognizes the ANI as a MCI customer and billing for the call would begin upon connection completion. The Server Switch 12154 scans the dialed number from the NPA and recognizes it 5 as South Carolina. The Server Switch 12154 then scans the NXX and recognizes it as a Charleston NXX. The Server Switch 12154 then scans its logical routing table and finds the appropriate IP addresses for the Charleston Server Switch 12158. Each city depending on traffic capacity may have more than one IP node 12157 to the switch. 10 The Server Switch 12154 could ping each IP node 12157 to determine which node has the best response time thus less of a traffic load. Once the IP node 12157 address with the best response time was identified, the Server Switch 12154 would place a IP call to the Charleston Server 15 Switch 12158 to the identified node 12155 over the Internet 12156. Once a connection has been established with the Charleston Server Switch 12158, the Washington Server Switch 12154 strips the 803 NPA and forwards 5524475 to the Charleston Server Switch 12158. The Charleston Server Switch 12158 scans its physical routing table and 20 identified 552 as one of its local exchanges. The Charleston Server Switch 12158 seizes one of its FG-A/FG-B tandem trunks 12159 to the local Telco Tandem Switch 12160. The local Telco Tandem Switch 12160 then routes the called digits to the appropriate Telco CO 12161 serving the customer with the phone number account of 5524475 25 12163. The local CO 12161 receives called digits from Tandem Switch 12160 and seizes trunk 12162 for 5524475 and places ring cycle on customer's line 12162. A ring cycle causes phone 12163 at location 5524475 to 30 ring. Upon answering call at the Charleston destination 12163, the call is considered complete and billing from the Washington D.C. Server Switch 12154 begins. A customer from Washington D.C. 12149 and destination location in Charleston 12163 can now verbally communicate.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 While various embodiments have been described above, it should be understood that they have been presented by way of example only, and not limitation. Thus, the breadth and scope of a preferred embodiment 5 should not be limited by any of the above described exemplary embodiments, but should be defined only in accordance with the following claims and their equivalents S-2 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 APPENDIX Table 301 - CDRIPNR Record Format: Word #, Bit # Description Word 0, bits 0-3 Call Record Id (CRID): Identifies the record type. 0 = Default I = CDR 2 = SER 3 = PNR 4 = OSR 5 = POSR 6 = ECDR 7 = EPNR 8 = EOSR 9 = EPOSR 10-15 = Not Used Word 0, bits 4-15 Call Disconnect ID (CDID): Identifies the call record. Each call record has a unique ID number. These 12 bits contain the 12 least significant bits of the CDID. Word 1, bits 0-15 Timepoint 1 (TP1): A binary count of the number of seconds that Word 2, bits 0-15 occurred between midnight (UTC) on January 1, 1976, and the time that the incoming call was detected by the switch. Word 3, bits 0-12 Timepoint 3 (TP3): A binary count of the number of seconds between Timepoint 1 and the time the outgoing signalling protocol was completed; that is, the number of seconds that it took for the switch to connect to the outgoing trunk. Word 3, bits 13-15 Timepoint 6 (TP6): A binary count of the number of seconds Word 4, bits 0-9 between timepoint I and the time Answer Supervision was detected or received. This is the time that it took for the call to be answered by the person or audio system being called. Word 4, bits 10-15 Timepoint 7 (TP7): A binary count of the number of seconds Word 5, bits 0-15 between timepoint 1 and the time that the originating or terminating party disconnected whichever is first. Word 6, bits 0-15 Originating Port (OP): The absolute port number of the originating Word 7, bits 0 trunk. Originating trunk is the line on which the call came to the switch. Word 7, bits 1-15 Terminating Port (TP): The absolute port number of the last Word 8, bits 0-1 terminating trunk seized for an outgoing call attempt. The terminating trunk is the last line on which the call is transmitted. Word 8, bits 2-14 Originating Trunk Group (OTG): A binary number expressing the Originating Trunk Group number of the originating trunk. An originating trunk group is a group of ports coming from the same location. Word 8, bits 15 Terminating Trunk Group (TTG): A binary number expressing the Word 9, bits 0-11 Terminating Trunk Group number of the Terminating trunk. A terminating trunk group is a group of ports going to the same location. If a call fails because no trunks are available, record the last trunk group number that was attempted. e-1 o> WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 9, bits 12-15 Timepoint 3 qualifier (TP3Q): Contains the outpulsed call disposition qualifier which provides the telephone number of the person making the call to the person being called. The person being called needs to have signed up for the "ANI Delivery" service and have a display device for displaying the caller's telephone number. 0 = Default 1 = ANI/CSI was delivered 2 = DNIS was delivered 3 = ANI/CSI and DNIS were delivered 4-5 = Not Used 6 = NCT 7 = NCT, ANI/CSI was delivered 8 = NCT, DNIS was delivered 9 = NCT, ANI/CSI and DNIS was delivered 10 = NCT Tandem 11-15 = Not Used Word 10, bits 0-1 Timepoint 6 qualifier (TP6Q): Contains the answer supervision qualifier indicating the way in which the telephone call was answered. 0 = Hardware detected an Answer 1 = Software detected Voice 2 = Not Used 3' = Operator/NARS detected an Answer * Not Used in CDR/PNR Word 10, bits 2-7 Action Code (AC): The switch provides an action code which indicates the type of destination address, or what type of telephone number was called, or an error code.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description 0 = Default I = 7-digit number without overflow 2 = 7-dicit number with overflow 3 = DDD number 4 = IDDD number 5 = Switch generated Action Code 6 = Incoming exclusion failure 7 = ID code failure 8 = Unexpected error occurs in the NCS/DAP 9 = Misdialed number and the NCS/DAP is unable to translate the dialed number 10 = 10-digit number without overflow 11 = 10-digit number with overflow 12 = National with overflow 13 = International with overflow 14 = ANI not found 15 = NPA-NXXX not found 16 = Pilot number not found 17 = Associated partition not found 18 = ADF format error 19 = Switch ID not found 20 = 800 number not found 21 = 800 number out of band 22 = 800 number no longer in service 23 = Invalid ID code 24 = Range privilege 25 = 7-digit number not in database 26 = 10-digit exclusion feature 27 = 900 number not found 28 = 900 number out of band 29 = 900 number no longer in service 30 = NCS network management blocked 31 = NCS Gate Denial 32 = FlexSTC, Overflow Not Allowed 33 = FlexSTC, Overflow Allowed 34 = SAC Number Not Found 35 = SAC Number Out of Band 36 = 700 Number Not Found 37 = 700 Number Out of Band 38 = ICR designated Out of Band 39 = NCT - Reversed Call Direction 40-49 = Not Used 50 = Flexible Direct Termination Call without overflow 51 = Flexible Direct Termination Call with overflow 52 = Outbound VNet without overflow 53 = Outbound IVNet with overflow 54 = Global Switch Profile Not Found 55 = ANI Index Provided by DAP 56-62 = Not Used 63 = International Inbound AAP WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 10, bits 8-11 Originating Trunk Class (OTC): Indicates what type of originating trunk was accessed. o = ONAL (FG-A) I = ONAT (FG-B, FG-C, FG-D, CAMA, LAMA) 2 = DAL, VNET CAMA, FGS-DAL) 3 = IMT (Inband or SS7) 4 = International Circuit (R1, R2, #5, #6, #7) 5 = ISDN PRI 6 = OST 7-15 = Not Used FG = Feature Group Word 10, bits 12-15 Terminating Trunk Class (TTC): Indicates what type of terminating trunk was accessed. 0 = ONAL (FG-A) 1 = ONAT (FG-B, FG-C, FG-D, CAMA, LAMA) 2 = DAL, VNET CAMA, FGS-DAL) 3 = IMT (Inband or SS7) 4 = International Circuit (R1, R2, #5, #6, #7) 5 = ISDN PRI 6 = OST 7-15 = Not Used FG = Feature Group Word 11, bits 0-7 Information Digits (ID): The switch receives these digits from the originating trunk group indicating the type of telephone on which the telephone call originated, such as a home telephone, pay telephone, or prison telephone. FG-B Direct, CAMA FG-D MCI IMT #5 #6 bits 0-3:TBCD Null X X TBCD Null X bits 4-7: X X X X X Word 11, bits 8-15 Automatic Number Identification (ANI) Index Number: The index number is obtained from the ANI Index Table for all calls except 800 calls. The ANI number is looked up to determine whether the caller is a VNet customer or not. If the caller is a VNet caller, the index number is used to look up the destination address.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 12, bits 0-15 Call Location ID (CLI): Represents the 10 digits from where the Word 13, bits 0-15 call came. If switch receives more than 10 digits, record them in Word 14, bits 0-7 the ECDR/EPNR. There are nine (9) types of calling locations: 1. VNet CA.MA DAL originations: If CSI is available. prefix the CSI with filed HNPA and HNXX information, if available, and record. Use NOCLI value of 7. 2. FG-C originations: If ANI. or CSI information is not available and the number is in the OOY+NXX+XXXX format, record the OOY in CLIl-3, and record the OSID/OTG in CLI4-10. Use NOCLI vadue of 8. 3. Inband FG-D Originations: Record the ANI that was received starting with CLI1. Use NOCLI value of 1. 4. SS7 FG-D Originations: Record the charge number, if available. If not available, record the calling party number. Use NOCLI value of 2 or 3. 5. International originations: Record the country code and the national number of the calling party. Use NOCLI of 9. 6. SS7 IMTs Originations: Record the following information in this order of importance: 1) charge number, 2) calling party number, 3) OSID/OTG from generic digits. Use NOCLI of 2, 3, or 8. 7. SS7 Reseller Originations: The CLI field is filled with TBCD Nulls. 8. SS7 Private Network Originations: The CLI field is filled with TBCD-Nulls. 9. PRI Organizations: Record the calling party number received in the ISDN setup message. 4- WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description The format: 1-10 digit Incoming ANI OSID/OTG Int'l Word 12, bits 0-3 CLIl TBCD Null X(CC) Word 12, bits 4-7 CLI2 TBCD Null X(CC) Word 12, bits 8-11 CLI3 TBCD Null X(CC) Word 12, bits 12-15 CLI4 X(OSID) X(NN) Word 13, bits 0-3 CLI5 X(OSID) X(NN) Word 13, bits 4-7 CLI6 X(OSID) X(NN) Word 13, bits 8-11 CLI7 X(OTG) X(NN) Word 13, bits 12-15 CLI8 X(OTG) X(NN) Word 14, bits 0-3 CLI9 X(OTG) X(NN) Word 14, bits 4-7 CLIl0 X(OTG) X(NN) CC = Customer Connect NN = National Number OSID = Originating Switch NSC ID (000-999) OTG = Originating Trunk Group (0000-8191) Word 14, bits 8-15 Authorization Codes: Represents 22 digits of who gets billed for Word 15, bits 0-15 the call which includes one or more of the following and/or an Word 16, bits 0-15 optional Supplementary Code: Word 17, bits 0-15 Word 18, bits 0-15 1. Authorization Code - Contains the authorization code digits. Word 19, bits 0-15 AUTH 1-AUTH5 records the dialed or filed authorization codes, afterwhich is recorded an optional variable 1-4 digit security code, SECl-SEC4, comprised of TBCD digits 0-9 and A-D. After the last digit, record a TBCD-Null, afterwhich record any supplementary code digits, SUPPl-SUPP12. Record TBCD-Null in any unused byte. Authorization Code format: WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description 5 digit 6 digit 7 digit Auth Code Auth Code Auth Code Word 14, bits 8-11 Al AUTHI AUTHI AUTH1 Word 14, bits 12-15 A2 AUTH2 AUTH2 AUTH2 Word 15, bits 0-3 A3 AUTH3 AUTH3 AUTH3 Word 15, bits 4-7 A4 AUTH4 AUTH4 AUTH4 Word 15, bits 8-11 A5 AUTH5 AUTH5 AUTH5 Word 15, bits 12-15 A6 SEC1 AUTH6 AUTH6 Word 16, bits 0-3 A7 SEC2 SECI AUTH7 Word 16, bits 4-7 A8 SEC3 SEC2 SECI Word 16, bits 8-11 A9 SEC4 SEC3 SEC2 Word 16, bits 12-15 AIO TBCD-Null SEC4 SEC3 Word 17, bits 0-3 All SUPPI TBCD-Null SEC4 Word 17, bits 4-7 A12 SUPP2 SUPP1 TBCD-Null Word 17, bits 8-11 A13 SUPP3 SUPP2 SUPP1 Word 17, bits 12-15 A14 SUPP4 SUPP3 SUPP2 Word 18, bits 0-3 A15 SUPP5 SUPP4 SUPP3 Word 18, bits 4-7 A16 SUPP6 SUPP5 SUPP4 Word 18, bits 8-11 A17 SUPP7 SUPP6 SUPP5 Word 18, bits 12-15 A18 SUPP8 SUPP7 SUPP6 Word 19, bits 0-3 A19 SUPP9 SUPP8 SUPP7 Word 19, bits 4-7 A20 SUPP10 SUPP9 SUPP8 Word 19, bits 8-11 A21 SUPPi SUPP10 SUPP9 Word 19, bits 12-15 A22 SUPP12 SUPPIl SUPPI0 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description 2. Calling Station ID (CSI) - Contains the digits of the calling station identifier. The CSI digits will be recorded starting at Al. A TBCD-Null is recorded after the last CSI digit, followed by Supplemental Code digits. Unused bytes contain a TBCD-Null. Calling Station ID format: 7 digit 10 digit CSI CSI Word 14, bits 8-11 Al X X Word 14, bits 12-15 A2 X X Word 15, bits 0-3 A3 X X Word 15, bits 4-7 A4 X X Word 15, bits 8-11 A5 X X Word 15, bits 12-15 A6 X X Word 16, bits 0-3 A7 X X Word 16, bits 4-7 A8 TBCD-Null X Word 16, bits 8-11 A9 SUPPi X Word 16, bits 12-15 A10 SUPP2 X Word 17, bits 0-3 All SUPP3 TBCD-Null Word 17, bits 4-7 A12 SUPP4 SUPPI Word 17, bits 8-11 A13 SUPP5 SUPP2 Word 17, bits 12-15 A14 SUPP6 SUPP3 Word 18, bits 0-3 AIS SUPP7 SUPP4 Word 18, bits 4-7 A16 SUPP8 SUPP5 Word 18, bits 8-11 A17 SUPP9 SUPP6 Word 18, bits 12-15 A18 SUPPIO SUPP7 Word 19, bits 0-3 A19 SUPPI 1 SUPP8 Word 19, bits 4-7 A20 SUPP12 SUPP9 Word 19, bits 4-11 A21 SUPPI1 SUPPlO Word 19, bits 12-15 A22 SUPP12 SUPPIl WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description 3. Supplementary Codes - Supplemental Codes are recorded starting in Al. Unused bytes contain TBCD-Null. Supplementary Code format: 800/900 VNet Supp. Codes Word 14, bits 8-11 Al SUPPI Word 14, bits 12-15 A2 SUPP2 Word 15, bits 0-3 A3 SUPP3 Word 15, bits 4-7 A4 SUPP4 Word 15, bits 8-11 A5 SUPP5 Word 15, bits 12-15 A6 SUPP6 Word 16, bits 0-3 A7 SUPP7 Word 16, bits 4-7 A8 SUPP8 Word 16, bits 8-11 A9 SUPP9 Word 16, bits 12-15 A1O SUPPIO Word 17, bits 0-3 All SUPP11 Word 17, bits 4-7 A12 SUPP12 Word 17, bits 8-11 A13 SUPP13 Word 17, bits 12-15 A14 SUPP14 Word 18, bits 0-3 A15 SUPP15 Word 18, bits 4-7 A16 SUPP16 Word 18, bits 8-11 A17 SUPP17 Word 18, bits 12-15 A18 SUPP18 Word 19, bits 0-3 A19 SUPP19 Word 19, bits 4-7 A20 SUPP20 Word 19, bits 8-11 A21 SUPP21 Word 19, bits 12-15 A22 SUPP22 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description 4. VNet Remote Access - If the caller accesses VNet services through the Remote Access Service, the access number is recorded starting at Al. A TBCD-Null is recorded after the last digit followed by any Supplemental Codes. Unused bytes contain TBCD-Null. VNet Remote Access format: Word 14, bits 8-11 Al X Word 14, bits 12-15 A2 X Word 15. bits 0-3 A3 X Word 15, bits 4-7 A4 X Word 15, bits 8-11 A5 X Word 15, bits 12-15 A6 X Word 16, bits 0-3 A7 X Word 16, bits 4-7 A8 X Word 16, bits 8-11 A9 X Word 16, bits 12-15 AlO X Word 17, bits 0-3 All TBCD-Null Word 17, bits 4-7 A12 SUPPI Word 17, bits 8-11 A13 SUPP2 Word 17, bits 12-15 A14 SUPP3 Word 15, bits 0-3 A15 SUPP4 Word 18, bits 4-7 A16 SUPP5 Word 18, bits 8-11 A17 SUPP6 Word 18, bits 12-15 A18 SUPP7 Word 19, bits 0-3 A19 SUPP8 Word 19, bits 4-7 A20 SUPP9 Word 19, bits 8-11 A21 SUPP10 Word 19, bits 12-15 A22 SUPP1I WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description 5. Calling Parry Number - The calling party number is recorded for SS7 FGD call originations received with a charge number and a calling parry number. Record the SS7 calling party number in Al-10. A TBCD-Null is recorded after the last digit, followed by supplementary codes. Unused bytes contain TBCD-Null. Calling party number format: Word 14, bits 8-11 Al N Word 14, bits 12-15 A2 X Word 15, bits 0-3 A3 X Word 15, bits 4-7 A4 N Word 15, bits 8-11 A5 X Word 15, bits 12-15 A6 X Word 16, bits 0-3 A7 N Word 16, bits 4-7 A8 X Word 16, bits 8-11 A9 X Word 16, bits 12-15 A1O X Word 17, bits 0-3 All TBCD-Null Word 17, bits 4-7 A12 SUPPI Word 17, bits 8-11 A13 SUPP2 Word 17, bits 12-15 A14 SUPP3 Word 18, bits 0-3 A15 SUPP4 Word 18, bits 4-7 A16 SUPP5 Word 18, bits 8-11 A17 SUPP6 Word 18, bits 12-15 A18 SUPP7 Word 19, bits 0-3 A19 SUPP8 Word 19, bits 4-7 A20 SUPP9 Word 19, bits 8-11 A21 SUPP10 Word 19, bits 12-15 A22 SUPP11 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description 6. Credit Card Number - Record the commercial credit card or presubcribed credit card number starting in Al. The PIN digits of a valid presubscribed credit card number are masked out by writing TBCD-A over the 4 PIN digits. A TBCD-Null is recorded after the last digit, followed by supplementary codes. Unused bytes contain TBCD-Null. Credit card number format: Word 14, bits 8-11 Al X Word 14, bits 12-15 A2 X Word 15, bits 0-3 A3 X Word 15, bits 4-7 A4 X Word 15, bits 8-11 A5 X Word 15, bits 12-15 A6 X Word 16, bits 0-3 A7 X Word 16, bits 4-7 A8 X Word 16, bits 8-11 A9 X Word 16, bits 12-15 A10 X Word 17, bits 0-3 All X Word 17, bits 4-7 A12 X Word 17, bits 8-11 A13 X Word 17, bits 12-15 A14 X Word 18, bits 0-3 A15 X Word 18, bits 4-7 A16 X Word 18, bits 8-11 A17 X Word 18, bits 12-15 A18 X Word 19, bits 0-3 A9 X Word 19, bits 4-7 A20 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 8-11 A21 SUPPI Word 19, bits 12-15 A22 SUPP2 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description 7. 14 Digit MCI/VNet Cards - The 14 digit calling card/VNet card number is recorded starting in Al with the last 4 PIN digits. masked out by writing TBCD-A for those digits. A TBCD-Null is written after the last digit, followed by supplemental codes. Unused bytes contain TBCD-Null. Calling card/VNet card format: Word 14, bits 8-11 Al X Word 14, bits 12-15 A2 X Word 15, bits 0-3 A3 X Word 15, bits 4-7 A4 X Word 15, bits 8-11 A5 X Word 15, bits 12-15 A6 X Word 16, bits 0-3 A7 X Word 16, bits 4-7 A8 X Word 16, bits 8-11 A9 X Word 16, bits 12-15 A10 X Word 17, bits 0-3 All TBCD-A Word 17, bits 4-7 A12 TBCD-A Word 17, bits g-11 A13 TBCD-A Word 17, bits 12-15 A14 TBCD-A Word 18, bits 0-3 A15 TBCD-Null Word 18, bits 4-7 A16 SUPPI Word 18, bits 8-11 A17 SUPP2 Word 18,bits 12-15 A18 SUPP3 Word 19, bits 0-3 A19 SUPP4 Word 19, bits 4-7 A20 SUPP5 Word 19, bits 8-11 A21 SUPP6 Word 19, bits 12-15 A22 SUPP7 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description 8. Telecommunications/PTT Cards - The 23 digits, or less, of the telecommunications card is recorded starting in Al. A TBCD-Null is recorded after the last digit. followed by supplemental codes. Unused bytes contain TBCD-Null. Telecommunications card format: Word 14, bits 8-11 Al X Word 14, bits 12-15 A2 X Word 15, bits 0-3 A3 X Word 15, bits 4-7 A4 X Word 15, bits 8-11 A5 X Word 15, bits 12-15 A6 X Word 16, bits 0-3 A7 X Word 16, bits 4-7 A8 X Word 16, bits 8-11 A9 X Word 16, bits 12-15 A1O X Word 17, bits 0-3 All X Word 17. bits 4-7 A12 X Word 17, bits 8-11 A13 X Word 17, bits 12-15 A14 X Word 18, bits 0-3 A15 X Word 18, bits 4-7 A16 X Word 19, bits 8-11 A17 X Word 19, bits 12-15 A18 X Word 19, bits 0-3 A19 X Word 19, bits 4-7 A20 X Word 19, bits 8-11 A21 X Word 19, bits 12-15 A22 X t.2 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description 9. OSID and OTG - For international inbound VNet or SAC calls, the OSID and OTG are recorded as received from the SS7 Generic Digits parameter. After the parameters are recorded, the remaining bytes contain TBCD-Null. OSID and OTG format: Word 14, bits 8-11 Al X (OSID) Word 14, bits 12-15 A2 X (OSID) Word 15, bits 0-3 A3 X (OSID) Word 15, bits 4-7 A4 X (OTG) Word 15, bits 8-11 A5 X (OTG) Word 15, bits 12-15 A6 X (OTG) Word 16, bits 0-3 A7 X (OTG) Word 16, bits 4-7 A8 TBCD-Null Word 16, bits 8-11 A9 TBCD-Null Word 16, bits 12-15 A10 TBCD-Null Word 17, bits 0-3 All TBCD-Null Word 17, bits 4-7 A12 TBCD-Null Word 17, bits 8-11 A13 TBCD-Null Word 17, bits 12-15 A14 TBCD-Null Word 18, bits 0-3 A15 TBCD-Null Word 18, bits 4-7 A16 TBCD-Null Word 18, bits 8-11 A17 TBCD-Null Word 18, bits 12-15 A18 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 0-3 A19 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 4-7 A20 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 8-11 A21 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 12-15 A22 TBCD-Null OSID = Originating Switch ID OTG = Originating Trunk Group P2 7 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description 10. Business Group ID - For some SS7 trunk groups, a business group ID is received in a SS7 parameter and is recorded in Al-A6. After the last digit, a TBCD-Null is recorded followed by any supplemental codes. Unused bytes contain TBCD-Null. Word 14, bits 8-11 Al X Word 14, bits 12-15 A2 X Word 15, bits 0-3 A3 X Word 15, bits 4-7 A4 X Word 15, bits 8-11 A5 X Word 15, bits 12-15 A6 X Word 16, bits 0-3 A7 TBCD-Null Word 16, bits 4-7 A8 SUPPI Word 16, bits 8-11 A9 SUPP2 Word 16, bits 12-15 A10 SUPP3 Word 17, bits 0-3 All SUPP4 Word 17, bits 4-7 A12 SUPP5 Word 17, bits 8-11 A13 SUPP6 Word 17, bits 12-15 A14 SUPP7 Word 18, bits 0-3 A15 SUPP8 Word 18, bits 4-7 A16 SUPP9 Word 18, bits 8-11 A17 SUPP10 Word 18, bits 12-15 A18 SUPPI1 Word 19, bits 0-3 A19 SUPP12 Word 19, bits 4-7 A20 SUPP13 Word 19, bits 8-11 A21 SUPP14 Word 19, bits 12-15 A22 SUPP15 11. Network Information - For some SS7 trunk groups, a network information ID is received in a SS7 parameter and is recorded in A1-A4. After the last digit, a TBCD-Null is recorded followed by any supplemental codes. Unused bytes contain TBCD-Null. Word 14, bits 8-11 Al N Word 14, bits 12-15 A2 X Word 15, bits 0-3 A3 X Word 15, bits 4-7 A4 N Word 15, bits 8-11 AS TBCD-Null Word 15, bits 12-15 A6 SUPPI Word 16, bits 0-3 A7 SUPP2 Word 16, bits 4-7 A8 SUPP3 Word 16, bits 8-11 A9 SUPP4 Word 16, bits 12-15 A1O SUPP5 Word 17, bits 0-3 All SUPP6 Word 17, bits 4-7 A12 SUPP7 Word 17, bits 8-11 A13 SUPP8 Word 17, bits 12-15 A14 SUPP9 Word 18, bits 0-3 A15 SUPP1O Word 18, bits 4-7 A16 SUPP1I Word 15, bits 8-11 A17 SUPP12 Word 18, bits 12-1:5 A18 SUPP13 Word 19, bits 0-3 A19 SUPP14 Word 19, bits 4-7 A20 SUPP15 Word 19, bits 8-11 A21 SUPP16 Word 19, bits 12-1:5 A22 SUPP17 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description 12. Network Call Identifier (NCID) - If the NCID is recorded in the "A" field, it will be recorded in binary beginning with Al. The Entry Code field will be indicative of the call processing associated with the particular call or "0". If the NCID is recorded in the NCID field of a 64 word call record, the Entry Code will also be indicative of the call processing associated with the particular call or "0". The NCID is comrpnsed of the following: Originating Switch ID Originating Trunk Group Originating Port Number Timepoint One NCID Sequence Number Word 20, bits 0-15 Destination Address: This is the seventeen digits of the destination Word 21, bits 0-15 address which is the number being called. If more than 17 digits is Word 22, bits 0-15 required, use ECDR/EPNR format. Unused bytes contain TBCD Word 23, bits 0-15 Null. Word 24, bits 0-3 7-digit 10-digit DDD IDDD Word 20, bits 0-3 D1 N N N CC Word 20, bits 4-7 D2 X X X CC Word 20, bits 8-11 D3 X X X CC Word 20, bits 12-15 D4 X N N NN Word 21, bits 0-3 D5 X X X NN Word 21, bits 4-7 D6 X X X NN Word 21, bits 8-11 D7 X X X NN Word 21, bits 12-15 D8 X(TSID) X NN Word 22, bits 0-3 D9 X(TSID) X NN Word 22, bits 4-7 D1O X(TSID) X NN Word 22, bits 8-11 DI1 X(TTG) X(TSID) T-Null NN Word 22, bits 12-15 D12 X(TTG) X(TSID) T-Null NN Word 23, bits 0-3 D13 X(TTG) X(TSID) T-Null NN Word 23, bits 4-7 D14 X(T'G) X(TSID) T-Null NN Word 23, bits 8-11 D15 T-Null X(TTG) T-Null NN Word 23, bits 12-15 D16 T-Null X(TTG) T-Null T-Null Word 24, bits 0-3 D17 T-Null X(TTG) T-Null T-Null CC = Customer Carrier NN = National Number TSID = Terminating Switch ID TTG= Terminating Trunk Group WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 24, bits 4-15 Pretranslated Digits: This represents the digits as dialed by the Word 25, bits 0-15 caller which may or may not be the Destination Address. The Word 26, bits 0-11 pretranslated digits are only recorded if a translation of the number occurs. If the dialed number is the destination number, and is not translated to another number, this field contains TBCD-Nulls. If there are more than 10 digits, use the ECDR/EPNR format. 10 digit VNet, SAC QOY 7 digit IDDD DNIS. or SAC VNet or 10 digit Hotline Code Hotline (example) Word 24, bits 4-7 PTDI N 0 N N Word 24, bits 8-11 PTD2 X 0 X N Word 24, bits 12-15 PTD3 X Y X N Word 25, bits 0-3 PTD4 N N X N Word 25, bits 4-7 PTD5 X X X N Word 25, bits 8-11 PTD6 X X X N Word 25, bits 12-15 PTD7 X X X N Word 26, bits 0-3 PTD8 X X TBDC-Null N Word 26, bits 4-7 PTD9 X X TBDC-Null N Word 26, bits 8-1 1 PTDIO X X TBDC-Null N Word 26, bits 12-15 Not Used. Word 27, bits 0-3 Feature Code (FC): The switch determines a feature code for the call which indicates whether a specific type of data line is required for the call such as a higher quality line for facsimile transmissions. 0 = Default PD= FAX 2 = NARS 3 = Data Call 4 = Switched DS1 (NSCS) 5 = Switched DS3 (HSCS) 6-8 = Not Used 9 X NX64 10 =Offnet Routing 11 =AAP Call (Used in Gateway Toll Ticket Conversion) 12 Card Gate Denial 13 = Forum Dial In audio/video conference 14 = Concert Freephone D15 = Not Used Word 27, bits 4-7 Terminating Network Code (TNC): Indicates the terminating facilities to be used for the remainder of the path of the call. For example, an indicator for no satellite transmission. 0 = Default 1 = No Routing Restrictions 2 = Avoid Satellite 3 = Route via DS I 4 = Route via DSI and avoid satellite 5 = Route via Protected Facilities Required 6 = Route via Protected Facilities Preferred 7-15 = Not Used I- - WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 27, bits 8-11 Network Access Type (NAT): Indicates which type of network access was used as defined at the originating switch on the network; that is, how the caller gained access to the network. The types of access are: 0 = Default 1 = 800 call 2 = Credit Card Access 3 = Operator Assistance Access 4 = VNET Remote Access 5 = BPP Access 6 = FGD Cut-Through Access 7-15 = Not Used Word 27, bits 12-15 Timepoint 7 Qualifier (TP7Q): Contains the call's first disconnect qualifier, that is, how the call was terminated. The types of disconnection are: 0 = Calling party disconnects I = Called party disconnects 2 = Calling party reorigination 3 = Switch initiated (ex. switch error cut off the call) 4 = All Routes Busy 5 = Disconnected due to a long ring; ring timer exceeded 6 = Call disconnected due to network invoked transfer 7= Feature/Service Interaction 8-15 = Not Used Word 28, bits 0-6 Entry Code (EC): Indicates the type of call processing that took place and what type of information is recorded in the Authorization Code field. If more than one entry code is received, record the last one. The following codes are valid: $3I WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description 0 = Default I = Person-to-Person (P-P) 2 = Station-to-Station (S-S) 3 = Third Party Billing (3rd party number recorded) 4 = P-P collect (bill to called party) 5 = S-S collect (bill to called party) 6 = MCI card or VNet card (S-S) 7 = BOC inward dialing without call completion 8 = general assistance 9 = BOC/LEC card 10 = Presubsribed credit card 11 = PTT card 12 = Directory Assistance 13 = Commercial Credit Card 14 = BOC inward dialing with call completion 15 = MCI card or VNet card (P-P) 16-19 = Not Used 20 = ANI validation (screened pass/fail) 21 = Auth Validation (filed or dialed) 22 = Not Used 23 = 700 Service Access Code (overrides #20) 24 = 500, 800 Service Access Code (overrides #20) 25 = 900 Service Access Code (overrides #20) 26-28 = Not Used 29 = Operator Release Timer Expired 30 = EVS/NARS - Disconnect message referral (DMR) without referral 31 = EVS/NARS - DMR with referral to MCI number 32 = EVS/NARS - DMR with referral to non-MCI number 33 = EVS/NARS - DMR with referral and call extension (CE) to MCI number 34 = EVS/NARS - DMR with referral and CE to non-MCI number 35 = EVS/NARS - Customized Message Announcement (CMA) with CE WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description 36 = EVS/NARS - CMA without CE 37 = EVS/NARS - Enhanced Call Routing (ECR) 38-41 = EVS/NARS - Reserved 42-47 = Not Used 48 = GETS card 49 = Not Used 50 = Billed to international number 51 = Calling station ID information recorded 52 = Supplemental code only recorded 53 = VNet remote access number recorded 54 = SS7 calling party number recorded 55 = OSID and OTG recorded 56 = DNIS recorded 57 = Business group ID recorded 58 = Network information recorded 59 = BG + Null + OSID/OTG 60 = Card Number + Null + OSID/OTG 61 = VNet RA + Null + OSID/OTG 62 = VNet RA + Null + OSID/OTG 63 = Network Call Transfer (NCT) 64-79 = Reserved 80-89 = Reserved 90-99 = Reserved 100 = 18C It's Me PIN S/S 101 = 18C It's Me Global S/S 102 = 18C It's Me ANI S/S 103 = 18C It's Me NPA S/S 104 = 18C It's Me Messenger S/S 105 = 18C It's Me Messenger PIN S/S 106 = 18C It's Me Messenger Global S/S 107 = 18C BOC Card S/S 108 = 18C MCI Card S/S 109 = Aos Messenger S/S 110 = International Messenger S/S 111 = International Speed Dial 112-127 = Not Used Word 28, bits 7-9 Prefix Digits (PD): Represents the prefix digits of the called number. These digits tell the switch how to process the call. 0 = No prefix digits received I = 0- (operator assisted) 2 = 0+ (domestic CDOS) 3 = 01 + (international CDOS) 4 = 011 +IDDD 5 = 1+DDD 6 = 0+operator assisted, subscriber address 7 = *XX where XX = 0-9, Star Card WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 28, bits 10-12 NDID (NCS/DAP ID): Indicates whether the switch processed the call or if one of the databases, such as NCS/DAP, was queried for information for services, including but not limited to, VNET, Calling Card, 800, and 900 calls. The NDID further indicates the ID of the NCS/DAP that was involved in the last transaction attempt. 0 = Switch call processing 1 = NCS/DAP 1 2 = NCS/DAP 2 3 = NCS/DAP 3 4-5 = Not Used 6 = Received from operator platform via RLT 7 = TCAP to NCS/DAP Word 28, bits 13-15 Division ID (DIVID): Contains the division ID for credit card calls, including the telecommunication system's card. The DIVID is received from the NCS/DAP for the card number validation. If no information is received by the switch, record the default value of '0.' 0 = No division ID specified I = Division ID1 2 = Division ID2 3 = Division ID3 4 = Division ID4 5 = Division ID5 6 = Division ID6 7 = Division ID7 Word 29, bit 0 Distant Overflow (DO): When set to 1 in the originating switch's call record, indicates that a direct termination overflow (DTO) transaction was attempted at an intermediate or terminating switch in order to get the final destination address digits for this call. Word 29, bit I Not Used. Word 29, bit 2 Customer Connect (CC): Indicates whether to use timepoint 6 or timepoint 3 to calculate the call duration. 0 = Use Time Point 6, *F to calculate the call duration I = Use Time Point 3, *C to calculate the call duration Word 29, bit 3 Inter-Network (IN): Indicates whether or not a call is originating from one customer/network and is terminating to a different customer/network. The default setting = 0; bit set to I if a business group or Netinfo parameter is received from the NCS/DAP. Word 29, bit 4 Not Used. Word 29, bit 5 SAC Bit (SC): This bit is used for the Flexible SAC feature. This bit will be set to "1- whenever the received number which is collected during the address digit collection phase, is identified as a SAC number in the FlexSac Index associated with the originating trunk group. This bit will be set to "0" in all other cases.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 29, bit 6 Call Direction (CD): Indicates whether the call originated in the domestic or international network. 0 = Call origination occurred in the Domestic Network I = Call origination occurred in the International Network Word 29, bit 7 Destination (DE): Indicates when a call is expected to terminate to an international destination 0 = Default, NANP, Domestic VNet, or any other calls which are not expected to terminate to an international destination I = Calls expected to terminate to an international destination Word 29, bit 8 Dedicated Termination (DT): Indicates that a 10-digit shared network number was completed to a dedicated destination. If the terminating trunk class (TTC) in the call record is equal to 3 or 7, then it is considered to be a direct termination trunk. Word 29, bits 9-10 Not Used. Word 29, bit 11 Satellite (SA): Indicates that a satellite circuit was involved in the call. The default setting is 0; bit set to I indicates that a satellite was involved in the call. The bit is set when the incoming trunk group is classmarked as satellite equipped, when the SAT digit on an incoming inband IMT call shows that a satellite circuit is involved in the connection, or when the SS7 Nature of Connection parameter indicates that a satellite trunk was previously used. This is used for trouble-shooting purposes, and not for billing. Word 29, bits 12-15 Nature Of Calling Location ID (NOCLI): A binary value that identifies what data is recorded in the Call Location ID. The Calling Location ID field will contain the information that is referenced in the NOCLI. 0 = Not Used 1 = ANI from Inbound trunk 2 = SS7 charge number 3 = SS7 calling party number 4 = original called number 5 = Pseudo ANI created at this switch 6 = CSI from originating trunk 7 = Filed NPA-NXX trunk group information plus CSI 8 = NNN+OSID+OTG or OOY+OSID+OTG (N=TBCD-Null) 9 = Country Code + national number 10 = No CLI record 11 = Redirecting Number 12 = CLI received from Operator platform via RLT 13 = ANI of NCT originator 14-15 = Not Used WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 30, bits 0-15 Carrier Number (CN): Represents the carrier number provided on FG-B or FG-D originations, or the carrier number received over an SS7 IMT. If only three digits are used, then they are recorded in CN2-CN4 and CNl will contain a TBCD-Null. This field also contains the last four digits of the specific 800 number assigned to VISA cards (9595). It will also contain the last four digits of the MCI card access number regardless of the access facility. Examples of carrier numbers are: MCI = 222, ATT = 288, and Friends = 333. FGB/FGD FGB/D 3 digit 4 digit visa CIC CIC card Word 30, bits 0-3 CN1 TBCD-Null X 9 Word 30, bits 4-7 CN2 X X 5 Word 30, bits 8-11 CN3 X X 9 Word 30, bits 12-15 CN4 X X 5 SS7 MCI VNet TNS card card Word 30, bits 0-3 CNI X 1 1 Word 30, bits 4-7 CN2 X 0 1 Word 30, bits 8-11 CN3 X 2 1 Word 30, bits 12-15 CN4 X 2 1 Word 31, bits 0-3 Authorization Code ID Field (ACIF): Contains the Authorization Code Identification Field for recording a card number status. This field indicates whether the card number (calling card or credit card) is good or bad. 0 = Seven digit authcode file (default) I = 1st or only five digit authcode file 2 = 2nd five digit file 3 = 3rd five digit file 4 = 4th five digit file 5 = 5th five digit file 6 = Six digit authcode file 7 = Range restriction failure (invalid address digits) 8 = Positive Commercial Credit Card/89 Card/M Card Validation 9 = Not Used 10 = MCI Card/Visa Card invalid or not assigned. Disallowed. 11 = BOC billing number assigned but blocked 12 = BOC billing number usage exceeded 13 = Not Used 14 = Default authorization of MCI Card/VISA Card if response timeout from NCS/DAP 15 = MCI Card/VISA Card authorized by NCS/DAP WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 31, bits 4-10 Release Code: Used with timepoint 7 qualifier to determine from which direction the release message came. The code indicates why one of the parties hung up, for example, normal release = 16, and no circuit available = 34. 1 = Unallocated number 2 = No route to specified network 3 = No route to destination 4 = Send special information tone 5 = Misdialed trunk prefix 16 = Normal clearing 17 = User Busy 18 = No user responding 19 = No user responding (user alerted) 21 = Call rejected 22 = Number changed 27 = Destination out of service 28 = Address incomplete 29 = Facility rejected 31 = Normal - unspecified 34 = No circuit available 38 = Network out of order 41 = Temporary failure 42 = Switching equipment congestion 44 = Requested channel not available 47 = Resource unavailable - unspecified 50 = Requested facility not subscribed 55 = Incoming calls barred within CUG 57 = Bearer capability not authorized 58 = Bearer capability not available 63 = Service or option not available 65 = Bearer capability not implemented 69 = Requested facility not implemented 70 = Only restricted digital information bearer capability is available 79 = Service or option not implemented 87 = Called user not member of CUG 88 = Incompatible destination 91 = Invalid transit network selector 95 = Invalid message - unspecified 97 = Message type non-existent or not implemented 99 = Parameter non-existent or not implemented - discarded 102 = Recovery on timer expired 103 = Parameter non-existent or not implemented - passed on 111 = Protocol error - unspecified 127 = Interworking - unspecified Word 31, bits 11-13 NCID Sequence Number: Represents the number of calls which have occurred on the same port number with the same Timepoint 1 value. The first call will have the sequence number set to '0'. This value will increase incrementally for each successive call which originates on the same port number which has the same Timepoint 1 value. Range = 0-7.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 31, bit 14 NCID Location (NCIDLOC): This bit identifies when the NCID is recorded in the Authcode field of the call record. The NCID is recorded in the Authcode field of the call record at intermediate and terminating switches if the Authcode field is not being used to record other information. If the Authcode field is being used to record other information, the NCID is recorded in the "NCID" field of the 64 word call record. o = NCID is not recorded in the Authcode field (default) 1 = NCID is recorded in the Authcode field Word 31, bit 15 Remote ANI Screened (RS): This bit is set to' ' if the NPA of the ANI is not listed in the switch's Local-Service-Area table, and the ANI was sent to the DAP for ANI index screening purposes. This~ bit is set to '0' if the switch sent the ANI to the DAP for ANI index screening purposes and no response is received from the DAP or if normal switch ANI screening occurs. o = ANI was not screened by the DAP (default) 1 = ANI was screened by the DAP WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Table 302 - ECDR/EPNR Record Format: Word #, Bit # [ Description Words 0-11, bits 0-15 Same as CDR/PNR format. Word 12, t.:s 0-15 Calling Location ID: Contains 1-15 digits of the originating station Word 13, bits'0-15 line. This is the ANI number of the calling party. If 1 to 15 ANI Word 14, bits 0-15 or CS! digits are received, they are recorded in order starting with Word 15, bits 0-11 CLII. Unused bytes contain TBCD-Null. If no ANI or CSI is available, record the OSID/OTG in CLI4-10, except where noted. If nothing is recorded in the CLI field, use a NOCLI value of 10. This field contains 1 of the following nine formats: 1. VNet CAMA DAL originations: If CSI is available, prefix the CSI with filed HNPA and HNXX information, if available, and record. Use NOCLI value of 7. 2. FG-C Originations: If ANI or CSI information is not available and the number is in the OOY+NXX-XXXX format, record the 00Y code that was received in CLI1-3, and record the OSID/OTG in CLI4-10. Use NOCLI value of 8. 3. Inband FG-D Originations: Record the ANI that was received starting with CLI. Use NOCLI value of 1. 4. SS7 FG-D Originations: Record the charge number, if available. If the charge number is not available, record the calling party number. Use NOCLI value of 2 or 3. 5. International Originations: Record the country code and national number of the calling party. Use NOCLI value of 9. 6. SS7 IMTs Originations: Record the following information in this order of importance: 1) charge number, 2) calling party number, 3) OSD/OTG from generic digits. Use NOCLI value of 2, 3, or 8. 7. SS7 Reseller Originations: The CLI field will be filled with TBCD Nulls. 8. SS7 Private Network Originations: The CLI field will be filled with TBCD Nulls. 9. PRI Originations: Record the calling party number received in the ISDN setup message.

WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description The format: 1-15 digit ANI/CSI (13 digit Incoming example) OSID/OTG Int'l Word 12, bits 0-3 CLII X TBCD-Null X(CC) Word 12, bits 4-7 CLI2 X TBCD-Null X(CC) Word 12, bits 8-11 CLI3 X TBCD-Null X(CC) Word 12, bits 12-15 CLI4 X X(OSID) X(NN) Word 13, bits 0-3 CL15 X X(OSID) X(NN) . Word 13, bits 4-7 CLI6 X X(OSID) X(NN) Word 13, bits 8-11 CLI7 X X(OTG) X(NN) Word 13, bits 12-15 CLI8 X X(OTG) X(NN) Word 14, bits 0-3 CLI9 X X(OTG) X(NN) Word 14, bits 4-7 CLI1O X X(OTG) X(NN) Word 14, bits 8-11 CLIll X TBCD-Null X(NN) Word 14, bits 12-15 CLI12 X TBCD-Null X(NN) Word 15, bits 0-3 CLI13 X TBCD-Null X(NN) Word 15, bits 4-7 CLI14 TBCD-Null TBCD-Null X(NN) Word 15, bits 8-11 CLI15 TBCD-Null TBCD-Null X(NN) CC = Customer Connect NN = National Number OSID = Originating Switch ID (000-999) OTG = Originating Trunk Group (0000-8191) Word 15, bits 12-15 Authorization Code (Auth Code): Same as CDR/PNR format Auth Word 16, bits 0-15 Code, but represents 45 digits. Word 17, bits 0-15 Word 18, bits 0-15 1. Authorization Codes: Word 19, bits 0-15 Word 20, bits 0-15 5 digit 6 digit 7 digit Word 21, bits 0-15 Word 15, bits 12-15 Al AUTH1 AUTH1 AUTH 1 Word 22, bits 0-15 Word 16, bits 0-3 A2 AUTH2 AUTH2 AUTH2 Word 23, bits 0-15 Word 16, bits 4-7 A3 AUTH3 AUTH3 AUTH3 Word 24, bits 0-15 Word 16, bits 8-11 A4 AUTH4 AUTH4 AUTH4 Word 25, bits 0-15 Word 16, bits 12-15 A5 AUTH5 AUTH5 AUTH5 Word 26, bits 0-15 Word 17, bits 0-3 A6 SECI AUTH6 AUTH6 Word 17, bits 4-7 A7 SEC2 SECI AUTH7 Word 17, bits 8-11 A8 SEC3 SEC2 SECI Word 17, bits 12-15 A9 SEC4 SEC3 SEC2 Word 18, bits 0-3 A10 T-Null SEC4 SEC3 Word 18, bits 4-7 All SUPPI T-Null SEC4 Word 18, bits 8-11 A12 SUPP2 SUPP T-Null Word 18, bits 12-15 A13 SUPP3 SUPP2 SUPPI WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 19, bits 0-3 A14 SUPP4 SUPP3 SUPP2 Word 19. bits 4-7 A15 SUPP5 SUPP4 SUPP3 Word 19, bits 8-11 A16 SUPP6 SUPP5 SUPP4 Word 19, bits 12-15 A17 SUPP7 SUPP6 SUPP5 Word 20, bits 0-3 A18 SUPP8 SUPP7 SUPP6 Word 20, bits 4-7 A19 SUPP9 SUPP8 SUPP7 Word 20, bits 8-11 A20 SUPP1O SUPP9 SUPP8 Word 20, bits 12-15 A21 SUPP1I SUPP10 SUPP9 Word 21, bits 0-3 A22 SUPP12 SUPPII SUPP1O Word 21. bits 4-7 A23 SUPP13 SUPP12 SUPPlI Word 21, bits 8-11 A24 SUPP14 SUPP13 SUPP12 Word 21, bits 12-15 A25 SUPP15 SUPP14 SUPP13 Word 22, bits 0-3 A26 SUPP16 SUPP15 SUPP14 Word 22, bits 4-7 A27 SUPP17 SUPP16 SUPP15 Word 22, bits 8-11 A28 SUPP18 SUPP17 SUPP16 Word 22, bits 12-15 A29 SUPP19 SUPP18 SUPP17 Word 23, bits 0-3 A30 SUPP20 SUPP19 SUPP18 Word 23, bits 4-7 A31 SUPP21 SUPP20 SUPP19 Word 23, bits 8-11 A32 SUPP22 SUPP21 SUPP20 Word 23, bits 12-15 A33 SUPP23 SUPP22 SUPP21 Word 24, bits 0-3 A34 SUPP24 SUPP23 SUPP22 Word 24, bits 4-7 A35 SUPP25 SUPP24 SUPP23 Word 24, bits 8-11 A36 SUPP26 SUPP25 SUPP24 Word 24, bits 12-15 A37 SUPP27 SUPP26 SUPP25 Word 25, bits 0-3 A38 SUPP28 SUPP27 SUPP26 Word 25, bits 4-7 A39 SUPP29 SUPP28 SUPP27 Word 25, bits 8-11 A40 SUPP30 SUPP29 SUPP28 Word 25, bits 12-15 A41 T-Null SUPP30 SUPP29 Word 26, bits 0-3 A42 T-Null T-Null SUPP30 Word 26, bits 4-7 A43 T-Null T-Null T-Null Word 26, bits 8-11 A44 T-Null T-Null T-Null Word 26, bits 12-15 A45 T-Null T-Null T-Null T-Null = TBCD-Null 2. Calling Station ID (CSI): 7 digit 1-10 digit Word 15, bits 12-15 Al X X Word 16, bits 0-3 A2 X X Word 16, bits 4-7 A3 X X Word 16, bits 8-11 A4 X X Word 16, bits 12-15 A5 X X Word 17, bits 0-3 A6 X X Word 17, bits 4-7 A7 X X Word 17, bits 8-11 A8 TBCD-NulI X Word 17, bits 12-15 A9 SUPPi X Word 18, bits 0-3 A1O SUPP2 X Word 18, bits 4-7 All SUPP3 TBCD-Null Word 18, bits 8-11 A12 SUPP4 SUPPI Word 18, bits 12-15 A13 SUPP5 SUPP2 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 19, bits 0-3 A14 SUPP6 SUPP3 Word 19, bits 4-7 A15 SUPP7 SUPP4 Word 19, bits 8-11 A16 SUPP8 SUPP5 Word 19, bits 12-15 A17 SUPP9 SUPP6 Word 20, bits 0-3 A18 SUPPIO SUPP7 Word 20, bits 4-7 A19 SUPPI 1 SUPP8 Word 20, bits 8-11 A20 SUPP12 SUPP9 Word 20, bits 12-15 A21 SUPP13 SUPP1O Word 21, bits 0-3 A22 SUPP14 SUPP11 Word 21, bits 4-7 A23 SUPP15 SUPP12 Word 21, bits 8-11 A24 SUPP16 SUPP13 Word 21, bits 12-15 A25 SUPP17 SUPP14 Word 22, bits 0-3 A26 SUPP18 SUPP15 Word 22, bits 4-7 A27 SUPP19 SUPP16 Word 22, bits 8-11 A28 SUPP20 SUPP17 Word 22, bits 12-15 A29 SUPP21 SUPP18 Word 23, bits 0-3 A30 SUPP22 SUPP19 Word 23, bits 4-7 A31 SUPP23 SUPP20 Word 23, bits 8-11 A32 SUPP24 SUPP21 Word 23, bits 12-15 A33 SUPP25 SUPP22 Word 24, bits 0-3 A34 SUPP26 SUPP23 Word 24, bits 4-7 A35 SUPP27 SUPP24 Word 24, bits g- 11 A36 SUPP28 SUPP25 Word 24, bits 12-15 A37 SUPP29 SUPP26 Word 25, bits 0-3 A38 SUPP30 SUPP27 Word 25, bits 4-7 A39 TBCD-Null SUPP28 Word 25, bits 8-11 A40 TBCD-Null SUPP29 Word 25, bits 12-15 A41 TBCD-Null SUPP30 Word 26, bits 0-3 A42 TBCD-Null TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 4-7 A43 TBCD-Null TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 8-11 A44 TBCD-Null TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 12-15 A45 TBCD-Null TBCD-Null 3. Supplemental Codes: Word 15, bits 12-15 Al SUPPI Word 16, bits 0-3 A2 SUPP2 Word 16, bits 4-7 A3 SUPP3. Word 16, bits 8-11 A4 SUPP4 Word 16, bits 12-15 A5 SUPP5 Word 17, bits 0-3 A6 SUPP6 Word 17, bits 4-7 A7 SUPP7 Word 17, bits 8-11 A8 SUPP8 Word 17, bits 12-15 A9 SUPP9 Word 18, bits 0-3 AIO SUPPIO Word 18, bits 4-7 All SUPPI1 Word 18, bits 8-11 A12 SUPP12 Word 18, bits 12-15 A13 SUPP13 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 19, bits 0-3 A14 SUPP14 Word 19, bits 4-7 A15 SUPP15 Word 19. bits 8-11 A16 SUPP16 Word 19, bits 12-15 A17 SUPP17 Word 20, bits 0-3 A18 SUPP18 Word 20, bits 4-7 A19 SUPP19 Word 20, bits 8-11 A20 SUPP20 Word 20, bits 12-15 A21 SUPP21 Word 21, bits 0-3 A22 SUPP22 Word 21, bits 4-7 A23 SUPP23 Word 21, bits 8-11 A24 SUPP24 Word 21, bits 12-15 A25 SUPP25 Word 22, bits 0-3 A26 SUPP26 Word 22, bits 4-7 A27 SUPP27 Word 22, bits 8-11 A28 SUPP28 Word 22, bits 12-15 A29 SUPP29 Word 23, bits 0-3 A30 TBCD-Null Word 23, bits 4-7 A31 TBCD-Null Word 23, bits 8-11 A32 TBCD-Null Word 23, bits 12-15 A33 TBCD-Null Word 24, bits 0-3 A34 TBCD-Null Word 24, bits 4-7 A35 TBCD-Null Word 24, bits 8-11 A36 TBCD-Null Word 24, bits 12-15 A37 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 0-3 A38 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 4-7 A39 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 8-11 A40 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 12-15 A41 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 0-3 A42 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 4-7 A43 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 8-11 A44 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 12-15 A45 TBCD-Null 4. VNet Remote Access and Calling Party Number: Word 15, bits 12-15 Al N Word 16, bits 0-3 A2 X Word 16, bits 4-7 A3 X Word 16, bits 8-11 A4 N Word 16, bits 12-15 A5 X Word 17, bits 0-3 A6 X Word 17, bits 4-7 A7 X Word 17, bits 8-11 A8 X Word 17, bits 12-15 A9 X Word 18, bits 0-3 AlO X Word 18, bits 4-7 All TBCD-Null Word 18, bits 8-11 A12 SUPPI Word 18, bits 12-15 A13 SUPP2 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 19, bits 0-3 A14 SUPP3 Word 19, bits 4-7 A15 SUPP4 Word 19, bits 8-11 A16 SUPP5 Word 19, bits 12-15 A17 SUPP6 Word 20, bits 0-3 A18 SUPP7 Word 20, bits 4-7 A19 SUPP8 Word 20, bits 8-11 A20 SUPP9 Word 20, bits 12-15 A21 SUPP1O Word 21, bits 0-3 A22 SUPPil Word 21, bits 4-7 A23 SUPP12 Word 21, bits 8-11 A24 SUPP13 Word 21, bits 12-15 A25 SUPP14 Word 22, bits 0-3 A26 SUPP15 Word 22, bits 4-7 A27 SUPP16 Word 22, bits 8-11 A28 SUPP17 Word 22, bits 12-15 A29 SUPP18 Word 23, bits 0-3 A30 SUPP19 Word 23, bits 4-7 A31 SUPP20 Word 23, bits 8-11 A32 SUPP2I Word 23, bits 12-15 A33 SUPP22 Word 24, bits 0-3 A34 SUPP23 Word 24, bits 4-7 A35 SUPP24 Word 24,bits 8-11 A36 SUPP25 Word 24, bits 12-15 A37 SUPP26 Word 25, bits 0-3 A38 SUPP27 Word 25, bits 4-7 A39 SUPP28 Word 25, bits 8-11 A40 SUPP29 Word 25, bits 12-15 A41 SUPP30 Word 26, bits 0-3 A42 TBCD-NuII Word 26, bits 4-7 A43 TBCD-NuIl Word 26, bits 8-11 A44 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 12-15 A45 TBCD-Null 5. Credit Card: Word 15, bits 12-15 Al X Word 16, bits 0-3 A2 X Word 16, bits 4-7 A3 X Word 16, bits 8-11 A4 X Word 16, bits 12-15 A5 X Word 17, bits 0-3 A6 X Word 17, bits 4-7 A7 X Word 17, bits 8-11 A8 X Word 17, bits 12-15 A9 X Word 18, bits 0-3 AIO X Word 18, bits 4-7 All X Word 18, bits 8-11 A12 X Word 18, bits 12-15 A13 X WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 19, bits 0-3A A14 X Word 19, bits 4-7 A15 X Word 19, bits 8-11 A16 X Word 19, bits 12-15 A17 X Word 20, bits 0-3 A18 X Word 20, bits 4-7 A19 X Word 20, bits 8-11 A20 TBCD-Null Word 20, bits 12-15 A21 SUPPi Word 21, bits 0-3 A22 SUPP2 Word 21, bits 4-7 A23 SUPP3 Word 21, bits 8-11 A24 SUPP4 Word 21, bits 12-15 A25 SUPP5 Word 22, bits 0-3 A26 SUPP6 Word 22, bits 4-7 A27 SUPP7 Word 22, bits 8-11 A28 SUPP8 Word 22, bits 12-15 A29 SUPP9 Word 23, bits 0-3 A30 SUPPIO Word 23, bits 4-7 A31 SUPPli Word 23, bits 8-11 A32 SUPP12 Word 23, bits 12-15 A33 SUPP13 Word 24, bits 0-3 A34 SUPP14 Word 24, bits 4-7 A35 SUPP15 Word 24, bits 8-11 A36 SUPP16 Word 24, bits 12-15 A37 SUPP17 Word 25, bits 0-3 A38 SUPP18 Word 25, bits 4-7 A39 SUPP19 Word 25, bits 8-11 A40 SUPP20 Word 25, bits 12-15 A41 SUPP21 Word 26, bits 0-3 A42 SUPP22 Word 26, bits 4-7 A43 SUPP23 Word 26, bits 8-11 A44 SUPP24 Word 26, bits 12-15 A45 SUPP25 6. 14 Digit MC VNet Calling Card: Word 15, bits 12-15 Al X Word 16, bits 0-3 A2 X Word 16, bits 4-7 A3 X Word 16, bits 8-11 A4 X Word 16, bits 12-15 A5 X Word 17, bits 0-3 A6 X Word 17, bits 4-7 A7 X Word 17, bits 8-11 A8 X Word 17, bits 12-15 A9 X Word 18, bits 0-3 A10 X Word 18, bits 4-7 All TBCD-A Word 18, bits 8-11 A12 TBCD-A Word 18, bits 12-15 A13 TBCD-A &-v S- WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 19, bits 0-3 A14 TBCD-A Word 19, bits 4-7 A15 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 8-11 A16 SUPPI Word 19, bits 12-15 A17 SUPP2 Word 20, bits 0-3 A18 SUPP3 Word 20, bits 4-7 A19 SUPP4 Word 20, bits 8-11 A20 SUPP5 Word 20, bits 12-15 A21 SUPP6 Word 21, bits 0-3 A22 SUPP7 Word 21, bits 4-7 A23 SUPP8 Word 21, bits 8-11 A24 SUPP9 Word 21, bits 12-15 A25 SUPPlO Word 22, bits 0-3 A26 SUPP1i Word 22, bits 4-7 A27 SUPP12 Word 22, bits 8-11 A28 SUPP13 Word 22, bits 12-15 A29 SUPP14 Word 23, bits 0-3 A30 SUPP15 Word 23, bits 4-7 A31 SUPP 16 Word 23, bits 8-11 A32 SUPP 17 Word 23, bits 12-15 A33 SUPP18 Word 24, bits 0-3 A34 SUPP19 Word 24,bits 4-7 A35 SUPP20 Word 24, bits 8-11 A36 SUPP21 Word 24, bits 12-15 A37 SUPP22 Word 25, bits 0-3 A38 SUPP23 Word 25, bits 4-7 A39 SUPP24 Word 25, bits 8-11 A40 SUPP25 Word 25, bits 12-15 A41 SUPP26 Word 26, bits 0-3 A42 SUPP27 Word 26, bits 4-7 A43 SUPP28 Word 26, bits 8-11 A44 SUPP29 Word 26, bits 12-15 A45 SUPP30 7. OSD/OTG: Word 15, bits 12-15 Al X (OSID) Word 16, bits 0-3 A2 X (OSID) Word 16, bits 4-7 A3 X (OSID) Word 16, bits 8-11 A4 X (OTG) Word 16, bits 12-15 A5 X (OTG) Word 17, bits 0-3 A6 X (OTG) Word 17, bits 4-7 A7 X (OTG) Word 17, bits 8-11 A8 TBCD-Null Word 17, bits 12-15 A9 TBCD-Null Word 18, bits 0-3 AlO TBCD-Null Word 18, bits 4-7 All TBCD-Null Word 18, bits 8-11 A12 TBCD-Null Word 18, bits 12-15 A13 TBCD-Null WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 19, bits 0-3 A14 TBCD-NuII Word 19, bits 4-7 A15 TBCD-NuIl Word 19, bits g-II A16 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 12-15 A17 TBCD-Null Word 20, bits 0-3 Al1 TBCD-NulI Word 20, bits 4-7 A19 TBCD-Nu1 Word 20, bits 8-11 A20 TBCD-NuII Word 20, bits 12-15 A2I TBCD-NuII Word 21, bits 0-3 A22 TBCD-NuII Word 21, bits 4-7 A23 TBCD-NuII Word 21, bits g-1 1 A24 TBCD-Nul Word 21, bits 12-15 A25 TBCD-Null Word 22, bits 0-3 A26 TBCD-NuIl Word 22, bits 4-7 A27 TBCD-NuII Word 22, bits 8-11 A-8 TBCD-Null Word 22, bits 12-15 A29 TBCD-NuII Word 23, bits 0-3 A30 TBCD-NuI Word 23, bits 4-7 A31 TBCD-NuII Word 23, bits 8-11 A32 TBCD-Null Word 23, bits 12-15 A33 TBCD-Null Word 24, bits 0-3 A34 TBCD-Null Word 24, bits 4-7 A35 TBCD-Null Word 24, bits 8-11 A36 TBCD-Nul Word 24, bits 12-15 A37 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 0-3 A38 TBCD-NulI Word 25, bits 4-7 A39 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 8-11 A40 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 12-15 A41 TBCD-Nul Word 26, bits 0-3 A42 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 4-7 A43 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 8-11 A44 TBCD-NuI Word 26, bits 12-15 A45 TBCD-Nul OSID =Originating Switch ID OTG =Originating Trunk ID 8. TelecoAunication N Cards: Word 15, bits 12-15 Al X Word 16, bits 0-3 A2 X Word 16, bits 4-7 A3 X Word16,bits8-11 A4 X Word 16. bits 12-15 A5 X Word 17, bits 0-3 A6 X Word 17, bits 4-7 A7 X Word 17, bits 8-11 A8 X Word 17, bits 12-15 A9 X Word 18, bits 0-3 A30 X Word 18, bits4-7 All X WordA8, bits 8-1 A12 X Word 18, bits 12-15 A13 X A3 BDNl WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 19, bits 0-3 A14 Word 19, bits 4-7 A15 X Word 19, bits 8-11 A16 X Word 19, bits 12-15 A17 X Word 20, bits 0-3 A18 X Word 20, bits 4-7 A19 X Word 20, bits 8-11 A20 X Word 20, bits 12-15 A21 X Word 21, bits 0-3 A22 X Word 21, bits 4-7 A23 X Word 21, bits 8-11 A24 TBCD-Null Word 21, bits 12-15 A25 SUPPI Word 22, bits 0-3 A26 SUPP2 Word 22, bits 4-7 A27 SUPP3 Word 22, bits 8-11 A28 SUPP4 Word 22, bits 12-15 A29 SUPP5 Word 23, bits 0-3 A30 SUPP6 Word 23, bits 4-7 A31 SUPP7 Word 23, bits 8-11 A32 SUPP8 Word 23, bits 12-15 A33 SUPP9 Word 24, bits 0-3 A34 SUPP1O Word 24, bits 4-7 A35 SUPPI 1 Word 24, bits 8-11 A36 SUPP12 Word 24, bits 12-15 A37 SUPP13 Word 25, bits 0-3 A35 SUPP14 Word 25, bits 4-7 A39 SUPP15 Word 25, bits 8-11 A40 SUPP16 Word 25, bits 12-15 A41 SUPP17 Word 26, bits 0-3 A42 SUPP18 Word 26, bits 4-7 A43 SUPP19 Word 26, bits 8-11 A44 SUPP20 Word 26, bits 12-15 A45 SUPP21 9. Business Group ID: Word 15, bits 12-15 Al X Word 16, bits 0-3 A2 X Word 16, bits 4-7 A3 X Word 16, bits 8-11 A4 X Word 16, bits 12-15 A5 X Word 17, bits 0-3 A6 X Word 17, bits 4-7 A7 TBCD-NulI Word 17, bits 8-11 A8 SUPPI Word 17, bits 12-15 A9 SUPP2 Word 18, bits 0-3 A1O SUPP3 Word 18, bits 4-7 All SUPP4 Word 18, bits 8-11 A12 SUPP5 Word 18, bits 12-15 A13 SUPP6 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 19, bits 0-3 A14 SUPP7 Word 19, bits 4-7 A15 SUPP8 Word 19, bits 8-11 A16 SUPP9 Word 19, bits 12-15 A17 SUPPIO Word 20, bits 0-3 A18 SUPP1i WoVrd 20, bits 4-7 A19 SUPP12 Word 20, bits 8-11 A20 SUPP13 Word 20, bits 12-15 A21 SUPP14 Word 21, bits 0-3 A22 SUPP 15 Word 21, bits 4-7 A23 SUPP16 Word 21, bits 8-11 A24 SUPP17 Word 21, bits 12-15 A25 SUPP18 Word 22, bits 0-3 A26 SUPP19 Word 22, bits 4-7 A27 SUPP20 Word 22, bits 8-11 A28 SUPP21 Word 22, bits 12-15 A29 SUPP22 Word 23, bits 0-3 A30 SUPP23 Word 23, bits 4-7 A31 SUPP24 Word 23, bits 8-11 A32 SUPP25 Word 23, bits 12-15 A33 SUPP26 Word 24, bits 0-3 A34 SUPP27 Word 24, bits 4-7 A35 SUPP28 Word 24, bits 8-11 A36 SUPP29 Word 24, bits 12-15 A37 SUPP30 Word 25, bits 0-3 A38 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 4-7 A39 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 8-11 A40 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 12-15 A41 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 0-3 A42 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 4-7 A43 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 8-11 A44 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 12-15 A45 TBCD-Null 11. Network Information: Word 15, bits 12-15 Al X Word 16, bits 0-3 A2 X Word 16, bits 4-7 A3 X Word 16, bits 8-11 A4 X Word 16, bits 12-15 A5 TBCD-Null Word 17, bits 0-3 A6 SUPPI Word 17, bits 4-7 A7 SUPP2 Word 17, bits 8-11 A8 SUPP3 Word 17, bits 12-15 A9 SUPP4 Word 18, bits 0-3 AIO SUPP5 Word 18, bits 4-7 All SUPP6 Word 18, bits 8-11 A12 SUPP7 Word 18, bits 12-15 A13 SUPP8 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 19, bits 0-3 A14 SUPP9 Word 19, bits 4-7 A15 SUPP1O Word 19, bits 8-11 A16 SUPPlI Word 19, bits 12-15 A17 SUPP12 Word 20, bits 0-3 A18 SUPP13 Word 20, bits 4-7 A19 SUPP14 Word 20, bits 8-11 A20 SUPP15 Word 20, bits 12-15 A21 SUPP16 Word 21, bits 0-3 A22 SUPP17 Word 2 1, bits 4-7 A23 SUPP18 Word 21, bits 8-11 A24 SUPP19 Word 21, bits 12-15 A25 SUPP20 Word 22, bits 0-3 A26 SUPP21 Word 22, bits 4-7 A27 SUPP22 Word 22, bits 8-11 A28 SUPP23 Word 22, bits 12-15 A29 SUPP24 Word 23, bits 0-3 A30 SUPP25 Word 23, bits 4-7 A31 SUPP26 Word 23, bits 8-11 A32 SUPP27 Word 23, bits 12-15 A33 SUPP28 Word 24, bits 0-3 A34 SUPP29 Word 24, bits 4-7 A35 SUPP30 Word 24, bits 8-11 A36 TBCD-Null Word 24, bits 12-15 A37 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 0-3 A38 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 4-7 A39 TBCD-Null Word 2:5, bits 8-11 A40 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 12-15 A41 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 0-3 A42 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 4-7 A43 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 8-11 A44 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 12-15 A45 TBCD-Null 12. Network Call Identifier (NCID) - If the NCID is recorded in the "A" field, it will be recorded in binary beginning with Al. The Entry Code field will be indicative of the call processing associated with the particular call or "0". If the NCID is recorded in the NCID field of a 64 word call record, the Entry Code will also be indicative of the call processing associated with the particular call or "0". The NCID is comprised of the following: Originating Switch ID Originating Trunk Group Originating Port Number Timepoint One NCID Sequence Number Word 27, bits 0-3 Feature Code (FC): Same as CDR/PNR format. Word 27, bits 4-7 Terminating Network Code (TNC): Same as CDRIPNR format. Word 27, bits 8-11 Network Access Type (NAT): Same as CDR/PNR format. Word 27, bits 12-15 Timepoint 7 Qualifier (TP&Q): Same as CDR/PNR format. Word 28, bits 0-6 Entry Code (EC): Same as CDR/PNR format. Word 28, bits 7-9 Prefix Digits (PD): Same as CDR/PNR format. S3 O WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 28, bits 10-12 NCS/DAP ID (NDID):- Same as CDR/PNR format. Word 28, bits 13-15 Division ID (DIVID): Same as CDR/PNR format. Word 29, bit 0 Distant Overflow (DO): Same as CDR/PNR format. Word 29, bit 1 MCI Network Overflow (MNO): This bit indicates whether or not the Cause parameter that initiated overflow was generated due to MCI network detected conditions versus Reseller or Customer Location detected circumstances. This bit is set to 1 if the MNO subfield of the MBCSI parameter is set to 1 which indicates that the cause parameter that initiated overflow was generated due to MCI network detected conditions. This bit is set to 0 if the MNO subfield of the MBCSI parameter is set to 0 which indicates that the cause parameter that initiated overflow was generated due to a LEC, BOC. or Reseller condition. Word 29, bit 2 Customer Connect (cc): Same as CDR/PNR format. Word 29, bit 3 Inter-Network (IN): Same as CDR/PNR format. Word 29, bit 4 Reported Overflow (RO): Same as CDR/PNR format. Word 29, bit 5 Not Used. Word 29, bit 6 Call Direction (CD): Same as CDR/PNR format. Word 29, bit 7 Destination (DE): Same as CDR/PNR format. Word 29, bit 8 Dedicated Termination (DT): Same as CDR/PNR format. Word 29, bits 9-10 Not Used. Word 29, bit 11 Satellite (SA): Same as CDR/PNR format. Word 29, bits 12-15 Nature of Calling Location ID (NOCLI): Same as CDR/PNR format. Word 30, bits 0-15 Carrier Number (CN): Same as CDR/PNR format. Word 31, bits 0-3 Authorization Code ID (ACIF): Same as CDR/PNR format. Word 31, bits 4-10 Release Code (RC): Same as CDR/PNR format. Word 31, bits 11-13 NCID Sequence Number: Same as CDR/PNR format. Word 31, bit 14 NCID Location (NCIDLOC): Same as CDR/PNR format. Word 31, bit 15 Remote ANI Screened (RS): Same as CDR/PNR format. Word 32, bits 0-15 Not Used. Word 33, bits 0-15 Word 34, bits 0-15 Destination Address (DA): Records up to 25 digits of the Word 35, bits 0-15 destination address in TBCD format in the sequence that they are Word 36, bits 0-15 received or translated to, starting with Dl. Unused bytes contain Word 37, bits 0-15 TBCD-Null. Word 38, bits 0-15 Word 39, bits 0-15 Word 40, bits 0-3 Vs- WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description 7-digit 10-digit DDD IDDD Word 34, bits 0-3 DI N N N CC Word 34, bits 4-7 D2 X X X CC Word 34, bits 8-11 D3 X X X CC Word 34, bits 12-15 D4 X N N NN Word '5, bits 0-3 D5 X X X NN Word 35, bits 4-7 D6 X X X NN Word 35, bits 8-11 D7 X X X NN Word 35, bits 12-15 D8 X(TSID) X X NN Word 36, bits 0-3 D9 X(TSID) X X NN Word 36, bits 4-7 D1O X(TSID) X X NN Word 36, bits 8-11 Dil X(TTG) X(TSID) T-Null NN Word 36, bits 12-15 D12 X(TTG) X(TSID) T-Null NN Word 37, bits 0-3 D13 X(TTG) X(TSID) T-Null NN Word 37, bits 4-7 D14 X(TTG) X(TTG) T-Null NN Word 37, bits 8-11 D15 T-Null X(TTG) T-Null NN Word 37, bits 12-15 D16 T-Null X(TTG) T-Null T-Null Word 38, bits 0-3 D17 T-Null X(TTG) T-Null T-Null Word 38, bits 4-7 D18 T-Null T-Null T-Null T-Null Word 38, bits 8-11 D19 T-Null T-Null T-Null T-Null Word 38, bits 12-15 D20 T-Null T-Null T-Null T-Null Word 39, bits 0-3 D21 T-Null T-Null T-Null T-Null Word 39, bits 4-7 D22 T-Null T-Null T-Null T-Null Word 39, bits 8-11 D23 T-Null T-Null T-Null T-Null Word 39, bits 12-15 D24 T-Null T-Null T-Null T-Null Word 40, bits 0-3 D25 T-Null T-Null T-Null T-Null CC = Customer Connect NN = National Number TSID = Terminating Switch ID TTG = Terminating Trunk ID T-Null = TBCD-Null WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description 18-digit Word 34, bits 0-3 Dl N Word 34, bits 4-7 D2 N Word 34, bits 8-11 D3 N Word 34, bits 12-15 D4 N Word 35, bits 0-3 D5 N Word 35, bits 4-7 D6 N Word 35, bits 8-11 D7 N Word 35, bits 12-15 D8 N Word 36, bits 0-3 D9 N Word 36, bits 4-7 D10 N Word 36, bits 8-11 D11 N Word 36, bits 12-15 D12 N Word 37, bits 0-3 D13 N Word 37, bits 4-7 D14 N Word 37. bits 8-1i D15 N Word 37, bits 12-15 D16 N Word 38, bits 0-3 D17 N Word 38, bits 4-7 D18 N Word 38, bits 8-11 D19 X(TSID) Word 38, bits 12-15 D20 X(TSID) Word 39, bits 0-3 D21 X(TSID) Word 39, bits 4-7 D22 X(TTG) Word 39, bits 8-11 D23 X(TTG) Word 39, bits 12-15 D24 X(TTG) Word 40, bits 0-3 D25 X(TTG) TSID = Terminating Switch ID TTG = Terminating Trunk ID Word 40, bits 4-15 Pretranslated Digits (PTD): Represents up to 15 digits of a Word 41, bits 0-15 number that is the translation of a number dialed by the caller. Word 42, bits 0-15 Word 43, bits 0-15 10 digit VNetI VNet, SAC OOY 7 digit IDDD DNIS, or SAC VNet or 15 digit Hotline Code SNS (example) Word 40, bits 4-7 PTD1 N 0 N N Word 40, bits 8-11 PTD2 X 0 X N Word 40, bits 12-15 PTD3 X Y X N Word 41, bits 0-3 PTD4 N N X N Word 41, bits 4-7 PTD5 X X X N Word 41, bits 8-11 PTD6 X X X N Word 41, bits 12-15 PTD7 X X X N Word 42, bits 0-3 PTD8 X X T-Null N Word 42, bits 4-7 PTD9 X X T-Null N Word 42, bits 8-11 PTD1O X X T-Null N Word 42, bits 12-15 PTD11 T-Null T-Null T-Null N Word 43, bits 0-3 PTD12 T-Null T-Null T-NuII N Word 43, bits 4-7 PTD13 T-Null T-Null T-Null N Word 43, bits 8-11 PTD14 T-Null T-Null T-Null N Word 43, bits 12-15 PTD15 T-Null T-NuII T-Null N T-Null = TBCD-Null WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 44, bits 0-7 Enhanced International Routing (EIR) Call Type: Contains the EIR call type ID as received from the DAP in the NCS billing information parameter or from the operator in the NCS billing information ISUP RLT parameter. Recorded in binary. Word 44, bits 8-14 Overflow Cause Value (OVFVAL): This field is the binary equivalent of the first cause value received or formatted in-switch. This value is taken from the cause value subfield in the cause parameter that initiated overflow. Word 44, bit 15 Counts As Bid (CB): This field is used with the EIR feature. The bit is set to '1' or '0' as per the information received from the DAP in the CB field of the NCS billing information parameter or from the operator in the NCS billing information ISUP RLT parameter. 0 = Does not count as bid (default) I = Counts as bid Word 45, bits 0-3 Overflow Cause Location (OVFCL): This field is the binary equivalent to the value recorded from the first cause location received or formatted in-switch. This information is taken from the cause location subfield in the cause parameter that initiated overflow. Word 45, bits 4-15 Desired Terminating Address (DTA): These 15 bytes contain the Word 46, bits 0-15 originally intended or "desired" termination before overflow was Word 47, bits 0-15 triggered. They contain either: 1) the desired terminating switch Word 48, bits 0-15 id and trunk group for calls that were sent to a DTC termination, 2) a national number, or 3) international number based on what the action code returned from the DAP for the desired termination. DTC DTSID + DTTG DDD Word 45, bits 4-7 DTA1 0 N Word 45, bits 8-11 DTA2 X(DTSID1) X Word 45, bits 12-15 DTA3 X(DTSID2) X Word 46, bits 0-3 DTA4 X(DTSID3) N Word 46, bits 4-7 DTA5 0 X Word 46, bits 8-11 DTA6 X(DTTG1) X Word 46, bits 12-15 DTA7 X(DTTG2) X Word 47, bits 0-3 DTA8 X(DTTG3) X Word 47, bits 4-7 DTA9 X(DTTG4) X Word 47, bits 8-11 DTA10 TBCD-Null X Word 47, bits 12-15 DTA11 TBCD-Null TBCD-Null Word 48, bits 0-3 DTA12 TBCD-Null TBCD-Null Word 48, bits 4-7 DTA13 TBCD-Null TBCD-Null Word 48, bits 8-11 DTA14 TBCD-Null TBCD-Null Word 48, bits 12-15 DTA15 TBCD-Null TBCD-Null DTSID = Desired Termination Switch ID DTTG = Desired Termination Trunk Group WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description IDDD DTC (example) (future) Word 45, bits 4-7 DTAI CC X(DTSID1) Word 45, bits 8-11 DTA2 CC X(DTSID2) Wo-d 45, bits 12-15 DTA3 CC X(DTSID3) Word 46, bits 0-3 DTA4 NN X(DTSID4) Word 46, bits 4-7 DTA5 NN X(DTTG1) Word 46, bits 8-11 DTA6 NN X(DTTG2) Word 46, bits 12-15 DTA7 NN X(DT-TG3) Word 47, bits 0-3 DTA8 NN X(DTTG4) Word 47, bits 4-7 DTA9 NN X(DTTG5) Word 47, bits 8-11 DTA10 NN TBCD-Null Word 47, bits 12-15 DTA ll NN TBCD-Null Word 48, bits 0-3 DTA12 NN TBCD-Null Word 48, bits 4-7 DTA13 NN TBCD-Null Word 48, bits 8-11 DTA14 NN TBCD-Null Word 48, bits 12-15 DTA15 TBCD-Null TBCD-Null CC = Customer Connect DTSID = Desired Termination Switch ID DTITG = Desired Termination Trunk Group NN = National Number Word 49, bits 0-6 Overflow Count (OVFC): Indicates the total number of intermediate overflow attempts before successful termination was achieved. This value is incremented each time the DAP is accessed for overflow information. Word 49, bits 7-12 Desired Termination Action Code (DTAC): This field represents the action code which was received from the DAP in the first response. This information is used to identify the type of information which is recorded in the DTA field. Word 49, bit 13 Not Used. Word 49, bits 14-15 Network Call Identifier (NCID): Contains the binary Words 50-54, bits 0-15 representation of the NCID. The NCID is recorded here at intermediate and terminating switches if the Authcode field is being used to record other information. The NCID is created at the originating switch and is passed to intermediate and terminating switches. The format of the NCID is: Originating Switch ID (OSID) Originating Trunk Group (OTG) Originating Port (OP) Timepoint I (TPI) NCID Sequence Number Words 55-58, bits 0-15 Not Used. Word 59, bits 0-10 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 59, bits 11-13 User to User Type (UUS Type): Contains a binary representation used to identify the type of User to User services being utilized. If this field is set to '0' and the UUIE Count field is set to a value other than '0'. then non-call associated User to User information is being transferred. o = No message or call associated UUS invoked (default) I = MA-UUI only 2 = CA-TSC at call setup only 3 = CA-TSC after call setup only 4 = CA-TSC at call setup and CA-TSC after call setup 5 = MA-UUI and CA-TSC at call setup 6 = MA-UUI and CA-TSC after call setup 7 = MA-UUI and CA-TSC at call setup and CA-TSC after call setup Word 59, bits 14-15 User to User Information Element Count (UUIE Count): Contains Word 60, bits 0-13 the binary count of UUIE delivered in either direction per TSC. Both the originating and terminating switches shall maintain a counter to count the number of UUIE delivered on a per call basis. Each switch shall count all UUIE in either direction whether delivered or not. The billed party shall be responsible for paying for the UUIE transport. If the count reaches the maximum value of 65535, it will hold at this value until a new call record is created. The beared channel will be disconnected one the maximum count is reached. Word 60, bits 14-15 Overflow Case Coding Standard (OVFCS): Contains the binary equivalent of the first coding standard received or formatted in switch. This value is taken from the coding standard subfield in the cause parameter that initiated overflow. It will not be overwritten by subsequent coding standards received or in-switch formatted values. This field is used for enhanced overflow calls only. Word 61, bits 0-15 Originating NX64 Bitmap: Records the port number that Word 62, bits 0-7 corresponds with the originating control channel of the call in the originating port in the CDR/PNR. This bitmap is used to identify the subsequent channels in the same TI timespan that are used in the call. A particular bit is set to indicate if this channel was used on the call. The number of bits that are set is used to identify the number N in an NX64 call. Word 62, bits 8-15 Terminating NX64 Bitmap: Record the port number that Word 63, bits 0-15 corresponds to the terminating control channel of the call in the terminating port in the CDR/PNR. This bitmap will be used to identify the subsequent channels in the same T1 span that are used in the call. A particular bit is set to indicate if this channel was used on the call. The number of bits that are set is used to identify the number N in an NX64 call. In general, each channel transmits at 64 Kbits/second, and if a customer needs more than one channel, this bitmap indicates which channels are used in the call.

WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Table 303 OSR/POSR Record Format: Word 0, bits 0-3 Call Record Id (CRID): Identifies the record type. 0 = Default I= CDR 2 = SER 3 = PNR 4 = OSR 5 = POSR 6 = ECDR 7 = EPOSR 8 = EOSR 9 = EPOSR 10-15 = Not Used Word 0, bits 4-15 Call Disconnect ID (CDID): Identifies the call record. Each call record has a unique ID number. These 12 bits contain the 12 least significant bits of the CDID. Word 1, bits 0-15 Timepoint 1 (TP1): A binary count of the number of seconds that Word 2, bits 0-15 occurred between midnight (UTC) on January 1, 1976, and the time that the incoming call was detected by the switch. Word 3, bits 0-12 Timepoint 4 (TP4): A binary count of the number of seconds between Timepoint 1 and the time the operator position was seized by the switch. Word 3, bits 13-15 Timepoint 6 (TP6): A binary count of the number of seconds Word 4, bits 0-0 between timepoint 1 and the time Answer Supervision was detected or received. This is the time that it took for the call to be answered by the person or audio system being called. Word 4, bits 10-15 Timepoint 7 (TP7): A binary count of the number of seconds Word 5, bits 0-15 between timepoint 1 and the time that the originating or terminating party disconnected whichever is first. Word 6, bits 0-15 Originating Port (OP): The absolute port number of the Word 7, bit 1 originating trunk. Originating trunk is the line on which the call came to the switch. Word 7, bits 2-15 Terminating Port (TP): The absolute port number of the last Word 8, bits 0-1 terminating trunk seized for an outgoing call attempt. The terminating trunk is the last line on which the call is transmitted. Word 8, bits 2-14 Originating Trunk Group (OTG): A binary number expressing the Originating Trunk Group number of the originating trunk. An originating trunk group is a group of ports coming from the same location. Word 8, bit 15 Terminating Trunk Group (TTG): A binary number expressing the Word 9, bits 0-11 Terminating Trunk Group number of the Terminating trunk. A terminating trunk group is a group of ports going to the same location. If a call falls because no trunks are available, record the last trunk group number that was attempted. SS7 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 9. bits 12-15 Timepoint 3 qualifier (TP3Q): Contains the outpulsed call disposition qualifier which provides the telephone number of the person making the call to the person being called. The person being called needs to have signed up for the "ANI Delivery" service and have a display device for displaying the caller's telephone number. 0 = Default I = ANI/CSI was delivered 2 = DNIS was delivered 3 = AN/CSI and DNIS were delivered 4-5 = Not Used 6 = NCT 7 = NCT, AN/CSI was delivered 8 = NCT, DNIS was delivered 9 = NCT, ANI/CSI and DNIS was delivered 10 = NCT Tandem 11-15 = Not Used Word 10, bits 0-1 Timepoint 6 qualifier (TP6Q): Contains the answer supervision qualifier indicating the way in which the telephone call was answered. 0 = Hardware detected an Answer I = Software detected Voice 2 = Not Used 3 = Operator/NARS detected an Answer Word 10, bits 2-7 Action Code (AC): The switch provides an action code which indicates the type of destination address, or what type of telephone number was called, or an error code. 0 = Default I = 7-digit number without overflow 2 = 7-digit number with overflow 3 = DDD number 4 = IDDD number 5 = Switch generated Action Code 6 = Incoming exclusion failure 7 = ID code failure 8 = Unexpected error occurs in the NCSIDAP 9 = Misdialed number and the NCS/DAP is unable to translate the dialed number 10 = 10-digit number without overflow 11 = 10-digit number with overflow 12 = National with overflow 13 = International with overflow 14 = ANI not found 15 = NPA-NXXX not found 16 = Pilot number not found 17 = Associated partition not found 18 = ADF format error 19 = Switch ID not found 20 = 800 number not found WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description 21 = 800 number out of band 22 = Not Used 23 = Invalid ID code 24 = Range privilege 25 = 7-digit number not in database 26 = 10-digit exclusion feature 27 = 900 number not found 28 = 900 number out of band 29 = Not Used 30 = NCS network management blocked 31 = NCS Gate Denial 32 = FlexSTC, Overflow Not Allowed 33 = FlexSTC, Overflow Allowed 34 = SAC Number Not Found 35 = SAC Number Out of Band 36 = 700 Number Not Found 37 = 700 Number Out of Band 38 = ICR designated Out of Band 39 = NCT - Reversed call direction 40-48 = Not Used 49 = Information Call 50 = Flexible Direct Termination Call without overflow 51 = Flexible Direct Termination Call with overflow 52 = Outbound IVNet without overflow 53 = Outbound IVNet with overflow 54 = Global Switch Profile not found 55 = ANT Index Provided by DAP 56-62 = Not Used 63 = International Inbound APP Word 10, bits 8-11 Originating Trunk Class (OTC): Indicates what type of originating trunk was accessed. 0 = ONAL (FG-A) I = ONAT (FG-B, FG-C, FG-D, CAMA, LAMA) 2 = DAL, VNET CAMA, FGS-DAL) 3 = IMT (Inband or SS7) 4 = International Circuit (RI, R2, #5, #6, #7) 5 = ISDN PRI 6 = OST 7-15 = Not Used Word 10, bits 12-15 Terminating Trunk Class (TTC): Indicates what type of terminating trunk was accessed. 0 = ONAL (FG-A) 1 = ONAT (FG-B, FG-C, FG-D, CAMA, LAMA) 2 = DAL, VNET CAMA, FGS-DAL) 3 = IMT (Inband or SS7) 4 = International Circuit (RI, R2, #5, #6, #7) 5 = ISDN PRI 6 = OST 7-15 = Not Used FG = Feature Group WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 11, bits 0-7 Information Digits (ID): The switch receives these digits from the originating trunk group indicating the type of telephone on which the telephone call originated, such as a home telephone, pay telephone, or prison telephone. FG-B Direct, CAMA FG-D MCI IMT #5 #6 bits 0-3: TBCD Null X X TBCD Null X bits 4-7: X X X X X Word 11, bits 8-11 Originating NACC (ONACC): This field contains the North American Coding Convention code which is received in the incoming digit stream to the operator switch. This code identifies the type of assistance required for inbound international calls. 0 = default 1 = 121 (Assistance without call completion) 2 = 13 1 (Directory assistance) 3 = 151 (Assistance with call completion) 4 = 160 (Manual transit) 5 = 191 (Call USA) 6-15 = Not Used Word 11, bits 12-15 Terminating NACC (TNACC): This field contains the North American Coding Convention code which is transmitted in the incoming digit stream to another operator switch. This code identifies the type of assistance required at the next operator switch. 0 = default 1 = 121 (Assistance without call completion) 2 = 131 (Directory assistance) 3 = 151 (Assistance with call completion) 4 = 160 (Manual transit) 5 = 191 (Call USA) 6-15 = Not Used Word 12, bits 0-15 Call Location ID (CLI): Represents the 10 digits from where the Word 13, bits 0-15 call came. If switch receives more than 10 digits, record them in Word 14, bits 0-7 the ECDR/EPOSR. 1. VNet CAMA DAL originations: If CSI is available, prefix the CSI with filed HNPA and HNXX information, if available, and record. Use NOCLI value of 7. 2. FG-C originations: If ANI or CSI information is not available and the number is in the OOY+NXX+XXXX format, record the OY in CLI 1-3, and record the OSID/OTG in CLI4-10. Use NOCLI value of 8. 3. Inband FG-D Originations: Record the ANI that was received starting with CLIL. Use NOCLI value of 1.

WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description 4. SS7 FG-D Originations: Record the charge number, if available. If not available, record the calling parry number. Use NOCLI value of 2 or 3. 5. International originations: Record the country code and the national number of the calling party. Use NOCLI of 9. 6. SS7 IMTs Originations: Record the following information in this order of importance: 1) charge number, 2) calling party number, 3) OSID/OTG from generic digits. Use NOCLI of 2, 3, or 8. 7. SS7 Reseller Originations: The CLI field is filled with TBCD Nulls. 8. SS7 Private Network Originations: The CLI field is filled with TBCD-Nulls. 9. PRI Organizations: Record the calling party number received in the ISDN setup message. The format: 1-10 digit Incoming ANI OSID/OTG Int'l Word 12, bits 0-3 CLIl TBCD Null X(CC) Word 12, bits 4-7 CLI2 TBCD Null X(CC) Word 12, bits 8-11 CLI3 TBCD Null X(CC) Word 12, bits 12-15 CLI4 X(OSID) X(N Word 13, bits 0-3 CLIS X(OSID) X(NN) Word 13, bits 4-7 CLI6 X(OSID) X(N Word 13, bits 8-11 CLI7 X(OTG) X(NN) Word 13, bits 12-15 CLI8 X(OTG) X(NN) Word 14, bits 0-3 CLI9 X(OTG) X(NN) Word 14, bits 4-7 CLIlO X(OTG) X(NN) CC = Customer Connect NN = National Number OSID = Originating Switch NSC ID (000-999) OTG = Originating Trunk Group (0000-8191) WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 14, bits 8-15 Authorization Codes: Represents 22 digits of who gets billed for Word 15, bits 0-15 the call which includes one or more of the following and/or an Word 16, bits 0-15 optional Supplementary Code: Word 17, bits 0-15 Word 18, bits 0-15 1. Authorization Code - Contains the authorization code digits. Word 19, bits 0-15 AUTH1-AUTH5 records the dialed or filed authorization codes, afterwhich is recorded an option: variable 1-4 digit security code, SEC1-SEC4, comprised of TBCD digits 0-9 and A-D. After the last digit, record a TBCD-Null, afterwhich record any supplementary code digits, SUPP1-SUPP12. Record TBCD-Null in any unused byte. Authorization Code format: 5 digit 6 digit 7 digit Auth Code Auth Code Auth Code Word 14, bits 8-11 Al AUTH I AUTH 1 AUTHI Word 14, bits 12-15 A2 AUTH2 AUTH2 AUTH2 Word 15, bits 0-3 A3 AUTH3 AUTH3 AUTH3 Word 15, bits 4-7 A4 AUTH4 AUTH4 AUTH4 Word 15, bits 8-11 A5 AUTH5 AUTH5 AUTH5 Word 15, bits 12-15 A6 SECI AUTH6 AUTH6 Word 16, bits 0-3 A7 SEC2 SEC1 AUTH7 Word 16, bits 4-7 A8 SEC3 SEC2 SEC1 Word 16, bits 8-11 A9 SEC4 SEC3 SEC2 Word 16, bits 12-15 A1O TBCD-Null SEC4 SEC3 Word 17, bits 0-3 All SUPPI TBCD-Null SEC4 Word 17, bits 4-7 A12 SUPP2 SUPPI TBCD-Null Word 17, bits 8-11 A13 SUPP3 SUPP2 SUPPi Word 17, bits 12-15 A14 SUPP4 SUPP3 SUPP2 Word 18, bits 0-3 A15 SUPP5 SUPP4 SUPP3 Word 18, bits 4-7 A16 SUPP6 SUPP5 SUPP4 Word 18, bits 8-11 A17 SUPP7 SUPP6 SUPP5 Word 18, bits 12-15 A18 SUPP8 SUPP7 SUPP6 Word 19, bits 0-3 A19 SUPP9 SUPP8 SUPP7 Word 19, bits 4-7 A20 SUPPIO SUPP9 SUPP8 Word 19, bits 8-11 A21 SUPP1I SUPP1O SUPP9 Word 19, bits 12-15 A22 SUPP12 SUPP11 SUPP10 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description 2. Calling Station ID (CSI) - Contains the digits of the calling station identifier. The CSI digits will be recorded starting at Al. A TBCD-Null is recorded after the last CSI digit. followed by Supplemental Code digits. Unused bytes contain a TBCD-Null. Calling Station ID format: 7 digit 10 digit CS1 CS1 Word 14, bits 8-11 Al X X Word 14, bits 12-15 A2 X X Word 15, bits 0-3 A3 X X Word 15, bits 4-7 A4 X X Word 15, bits 8-11 A5 X X Word 15, bits 12-15 A6 X X Word 16, bits 0-3 A7 X X Word 16, bits 4-7 A8 TBCD-Null X Word 16, bits 8-11 A9 SUPPl X Word 16, bits 12-15 AlO SUPP2 X Word 17, bits 0-3 All SUPP3 TBCD-Null Word 17, bits 4-7 A12 SUPP4 SUPPi Word 17, bits 8-11 A13 SUPP5 SUPP2 Word 17, bits 12-15 A14 SUPP6 SUPP3 Word 18, bits 0-3 A15 SUPP7 SUPP4 Word 18, bits 4-7 A16 SUPP8 SUPP5 Word 18, bits 8-11 A17 SUPP9 SUPP6 Word 18, bits 12-15 A18 SUPP1O SUPP7 Word 19, bits 0-3 A19 SUPP11 SUPP8 Word 19, bits 4-7 A20 SUPP12 SUPP9 Word 19, bits 8-11 A21 SUPP13 SUPP1O Word 19, bits 12-15 A22 SUPP14 SUPPI S-6 3 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description 3. Supplementary Codes - Supplemental Codes are recorded starting in Al. Unused bytes contain TBCD-Null. Supplementary Code format: 800/900 VNet Supp. Codes Word 14, bits 8-11 Al SUPPi Word 14, bits 12-15 A2 SUPP2 Word 15, bits 0-3 A3 SUPP3 Word 15, bits 4-7 A4 SUPP4 Word 15, bits 8-11 A5 SUPP5 Word 15, bits 12-15 A6 SUPP6 Word 16, bits 0-3 A7 SUPP7 Word 16, bits 4-7 A8 SUPP8 Word 16, bits 8-11 A9 SUPP9 Word 16, bits 12-15 A1O SUPPIO Word 17, bits 0-3 All SUPPI1 Word 17, bits 4-7 A12 SUPP12 Word 17, bits 8-11 A13 SUPP13 Word 17, bits 12-15 A14 SUPPl4 Word 18, bits 0-3 A15 SUPP15 Word 18, bits 4-7 A16 SUPP16 Word 18, bits 8-11 A17 SUPP17 Word 18, bits 12-15 A18 SUPP18 Word 19, bits 0-3 A19 SUPP19 Word 19, bits 4-7 A20 SUPP20 Word 19, bits 8-11 A21 SUPP21 Word 19, bits 12-15 A22 SUPP22 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description 4. VNet Remote Access - If the caller accesses VNet services through the Remote Access Service, the access number is recorded starting at Al. A TBCD-Null is recorded after the last digit followed by any Supplemental Codes. Unused bytes contain TBCD-Null. VNet Remote Access format: Word 14, bits 8-11 Al N Word 14, bits 12-15 A2 X Word 15, bits 0-3 A3 X Word 15, bits 4-7 A4 N Word 15, bits 8-11 A5 X Word 15, bits 12-15 A6 X Word 16, bits 0-3 A7 X Word 16, bits 4-7 A8 X Word 16, bits 8-11 A9 X Word 16, bits 12-15 AlO X Word 17, bits 0-3 All TBCD-Null Word 17, bits 4-7 A12 SUPP Word 17, bits 8-11 A13 SUPP2 Word 17, bits 12-15 A14 SUPP3 Word 18, bits 0-3 A15 SUPP4 Word 18, bits 4-7 A16 SUPP5 Word 18, bits 8-11 A17 SUPP6 Word 18, bits 12-15 A18 SUPP7 Word 19, bits 0-3 A19 SUPP8 Word 19, bits 4-7 A20 SUPP9 Word 19, bits 8-11 A21 SUPPIO Word 19, bits 12-15 A22 SUPPli WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description 5. Calling Party Number - The calling party number is recorded for SS7 FGD call originations received with a charge number and a calling party number. Record the SS7 calling party number in Al-10. A TBCD-Null is recorded after the last digit, followed by supplementary codes. Unused bytes contain TBCD-Null. Calling party number format: Word 14, bits 8-11 Al N Word 14, bits 12-15 A2 X Word 15, bits 0-3 A3 X Word 15, bits 4-7 A4 N Word 15, bits 8-11 A5 X Word 15, bits 12-15 A6 X Word 16, bits 0-3 A7 X Word 16, bits 4-7 A8 X Word 16, bits 8-11 A9 X Word 16, bits 12-15 A10 X Word 17, bits 0-3 All TBCD-Null Word 17, bits 4-7 A12 SUPPI Word 17, bits 8-11. A13 SUPP2 Word 17, bits 12-15 A14 SUPP3 Word 18, bits 0-3 A15 SUPP4 Word 18, bits 4-7 A16 SUPP5 Word 18, bits 8-11 A17 SUPP6 Word 18, bits 12-15 A18 SUPP7 Word 19, bits 0-3 A19 SUPP8 Word 19, bits 4-7 A20 SUPP9 Word 19, bits 8-11 A21 SUPPIO Word 19, bits 12-15 A22 SUPPI1 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description 6. Credit Card Number - Record the commercial credit card or presubscribed credit card number starting in Al. The PIN digits of a valid presubscribed credit card number are masked out by writing TBCD-A over the 4 PIN digits. A TBCD-Null is recorded after the last digit, followed by supplementary codes. Unused bytes contain TBCD-Null. Credit card number format: Word 14, bits 8-11 Al X Word 14, bits 12-15 A2 X Word 15, bits 0-3 A3 X Word 15, bits 4-7 A4 X Word 15, bits 8-11 A5 X Word 15, bits 12-15 A6 X Word 16, bits 0-3 A7 X Word 16, bits 4-7 A8 X Word 16, bits 8-11 A9 X Word 16, bits 12-15 AlO X Word 17, bits 0-3 All X Word 17, bits 4-7 A12 X Word 17, bits 8-11 A13 X Word 17, bits 12-15 A14 X Word 18, bits 0-3 A1S X Word 18, bits 4-7 A16 X Word 18, bits 8-11 A17 X Word 18, bits 12-15 A18 X Word 19, bits 0-3 A19 X Word 19, bits 4-7 A20 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 8-11 A21 SUPPI Word 19, bits 12-15 A22 SUPP2 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description 7. 14 Digit MCI/VNet Cards - The 14 digit calling card/VNet card number is recorded starting in Al with the last 4 PIN digits masked out by writing TBCD-A for those digits. A TBCD-Null is written after the last digit, followed by supplemental codes. Unused bytes contain TBCD-Null. Calling card/VNet card format: Word 14, bits 8-11 Al I Word 14, bits 12-15 A2 X Word 15, bits 0-3 A3 X Word 15, bits 4-7 A4 X Word 15, bits 8-11 A5 X Word 15, bits 12-15 A6 X Word 16, bits 0-3 A7 X Word 16, bits 4-7 A8 X Word 16, bits 8-11 A9 X Word 16, bits 12-15 A1O X Word 17, bits 0-3 Al l TBCD-A Word 17, bits 4-7 A12 TBCD-A Word 17, bits 8-11 A13 TBCD-A Word 17, bits 12-15 A14 TBCD-A Word 18, bits 0-3 A15 TBCD-Null Word 18, bits 4-7 A16 SUPPI Word 18, bits 8-11 A17 SUPP2 Word 18, bits 12-15 A18 SUPP3 Word 19, bits 0-3 A19 SUPP4 Word 19, bits 4-7 A20 SUPP5 Word 19, bits 8-11 A21 SUPP6 Word 19, bits 12-15 A22 SUPP7 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description 8. Telecommunications/PTT Cards - The 23 digits, or less, of the telecommunications card is recorded starting in Al. A TBCD-Null is recorded after the last digit, followed by supplemental codes. Unused bytes contain TBCD-Null. Telecommunications card format: Word 14, bits 8-11 Al X Word 14, bits 12-15 A2 X Word 15, bits 0-3 A3 X Word 15, bits 4-7 A4 X Word 15, bits 8-11 A5 X Word 15, bits 12-15 A6 X Word 16, bits 0-3 A7 X Word 16, bits 4-7 A8 X Word 16, bits 8-11 A9 X Word 16, bits 12-15 AlO X Word 17, bits 0-3 All X Word 17, bits 4-7 A12 X Word 17, bits 8-11 A13 X Word 17, bits 12-15 A14 X Word 18, bits 0-3 A15 X Word 18, bits 4-7 A16 X Word 18, bits 8-11 A17 X Word 18, bits 12-15 A18 X Word 19, bits 0-3 A19 X Word 19, bits 4-7 A20 X Word 19, bits 8-11 A21 X Word 19, bits 12-15 A22 X WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description 9. OSID and OTG - For international inbound VNet or SAC calls, the OSID and OTG are recorded as received from the SS7 Generic Digits parameter. After the parameters are recorded, the remaining bytes contain TBCD-Null. OSID and OTG format: Word 14, bits 8-11 Al X (OSID) Word 14, bits 12-15 A2 X (OSID) Word 15, bits 0-3 A3 X (OSID) Word 15, bits 4-7 A4 X (OTG) Word 15, bits 8-11 A5 X (OTG) Word 15, bits 12-15 A6 X (OTG) Word 16, bits 0-3 A7 X (OTG) Word 16, bits 4-7 A8 TBCD-Null Word 16, bits 8-11 A9 TBCD-Null Word 16, bits 12-15 A10 TBCD-Null Word 17, bits 0-3 All TBCD-Null Word 17, bits 4-7 A12 TBCD-Null Word 17, bits 8-11 A13 TBCD-Null Word 17, bits 12-15 A14 TBCD-Null Word 18, bits 0-3 A15 TBCD-Null Word 18, bits 4-7 A16 TBCD-Null Word 18, bits 8-11 A17 TBCD-Null Word 18, bits 12-15 A18 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 0-3 A19 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 4-7 A20 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 8-11 A21 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 12-15 A22 TBCD-Null OSID = Originating Switch Group (000-999) OTG = Originating Trunk Group (0000-8191)

$'

WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description 10. Business Group ID - For some SS7 trunk groups, a business group ID is received in a SS7 parameter and is recorded in Al A6. After the last digit, a TBCD-Null is recorded followed by any supplemental codes. Unused bytes contain TBCD-Null. Word 14, bits 8-11 Al X Word 14, bits 12-15 A2 X Word 15, bits 0-3 A3 X Word 15, bits 4-7 A4 X Word 15, bits 8-11 A5 X Word 15, bits 12-15 A6 X Word 16, bits 0-3 A7 TBCD-Null Word 16, bits 4-7 A8 SUPPI Word 16. bits 8-11 A9 SUPP2 Word 16, bits 12-15 A10 SUPP3 Word 17, bits 0-3 All SUPP4 Word 17, bits 4-7 A12 SUPP5 Word 17, bits 8-11 A13 SUPP6 Word 17, bits 12-15 A14 SUPP7 Word 18, bits 0-3 A15 SUPP8 Word 18, bits 4-7 A16 SUPP9 Word 18, bits 8-11 A17 SUPPIO Word 18, bits 12-15 A18 SUPPI1 Word 19, bits 0-3 A19 SUPP12 Word 19, bits 4-7 A20 SUPP13 Word 19, bits 8-11 A21 SUPP14 Word 19, bits 12-15 A22 SUPP15 11. Network Information - For some SS7 trunk groups, a network information ID is received in a SS7 parameter and is recorded in Al-A4. After the last digit, a TBCD-Null is recorded followed by any supplemental codes. Unused bytes contain TBCD-Null. Word 14, bits 8-11 Al N Word 14, bits 12-15 A2 X Word 15, bits 0-3 A3 X Word 15, bits 4-7 A4 N Word 15, bits 8-11 A5 TBCD-Null Word 15, bits 12-15 A6 SUPP1 Word 16, bits 0-3 A7 SUPP2 Word 16, bits 4-7 A8 SUPP3 Word 16, bits 8-11 A9 SUPP4 Word 16, bits 12-15 A10 SUPP5 Word 17, bits 0-3 All SUPP6 Word 17, bits 4-7 A12 SUPP7 Word 17, bits 8-11 A13 SUPP8 Word 17, bits 12-15 A14 SUPP9 Word 18, bits 0-3 A15 SUPP10 Word 18, bits 4-7 A16 SUPPI1 Word 18, bits 8-11 A17 SUPP12 Word 18, bits 12-15 A18 SUPP13 Word 19, bits 0-3 A19 SUPP14 Word 19, bits 4-7 A20 SUPP15 Word 19, bits 8-11 A21 SUPP16 Word 19, bits 12-15 A22 SUPP17 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description 12. BOC Card: The BOC/LEC Card Number is recorded in Al A1O with the remaining bytes containing TBCD-Null. Word 14, bits 8-11 Al N Word 14, bits 12-15 A2 X Word 15, bits 0-3 A3 X Word 15, bits 4-7 A4 N Word 15, bits 8-11 A5 X Word 15, bits 12-15 A6 X Word 16, bits 0-3 A7 X Word 16, bits 4-7 A8 X Word 16, bits 8-11 A9 X Word 16, bits 12-15 AlO X Word 17, bits 0-3 All TBCD-Null Word 17, bits 4-7 A12 TBCD-Null Word 17, bits 8-11 A13 TBCD-Null Word 17, bits 12-15 A14 TBCD-Null Word 18, bits 0-3 A15 TBCD-Null Word 18, bits 4-7 A16 TBCD-Null Word 18, bits 8-11 A17 TBCD-Null Word 18, bits 12-15 A18 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 0-3 A19 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 4-7 A20 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 8-11 A21 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 12-15 A22 TBCD-Null 13. Third Party Numbers: If a call is billed to a third party NANP number, record the number in Al-A1O with the remaining bytes containing TBCD-Null. Word 14, bits 8-11 Al N Word 14, bits 12-15 A2 X Word 15, bits 0-3 A3 X Word 15, bits 4-7 A4 N Word 15, bits 8-11 A5 X Word 15, bits 12-15 A6 X Word 16, bits 0-3 A7 X Word 16, bits 4-7 A8 X Word 16, bits 8-11 A9 X Word 16, bits 12-15 A1O X Word 17, bits 0-3 All TBCD-Null Word 17, bits 4-7 A12 TBCD-Null Word 17, bits 8-11 A13 TBCD-Null Word 17, bits 12-15 A14 TBCD-Null Word 18, bits 0-3 A15 TBCD-Null Word 18, bits 4-7 A16 TBCD-Null Word 18, bits 8-11 A17 TBCD-Null Word 18, bits 12-15 A18 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 0-3 A19 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 4-7 A20 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 8-11 A21 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 12-15 A22 TBCD-Null S 72 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description 14. International Numbers: If a call is billed to an international number, record the starting number in Al. Unused bytes contain TBCD-Null. Word 14, bits 8-11 Al X (CC) Word 14, bits 12-15 A2 X (CC) Word 15, bits 0-3 A3 X (CC) Word 15, bits 4-7 A4 X (NN) Word 15, bits 8-11 A5 X (NN) Word 15, bits 12-15 A6 X (NN) Word 16, bits 0-3 A7 X (NN) Word 16, bits 4-7 A8 X (NN) Word 16, bits 8-11 A9 X (NN) Word 16, bits 12-15 A10 X (NN) Word 17, bits 0-3 All X (NN) Word 17, bits 4-7 Al2 X (NN) Word 17, bits 8-11 A13 X (NN) Word 17, bits 12-15 A14 X (NN) Word 18, bits 0-3 A15 X (NN) Word 18, bits 4-7 A16 TBCD-Null Word 18, bits 8-11 A17 TBCD-Null Word 18, bits 12-15 A18 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 0-3 A19 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 4-7 A20 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 8-11 A21 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 12-15 A22 TBCD-Null CC = Customer Connect NN = National Number WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description 15. LAN Sequence Numbers: If a call is handled by a LAN, and billable information cannot be transported back to the billing switch, then the LAN records all of the billable information in a Billing Detail Record (BDR) and sends back a LAN sequence number to the switch. The LAN sequence number is recorded in Al-A16 with the remaining bytes containing TBCD-Null. Word 14, bits 8-11 Al X Word 14, bits 12-15 A2 X Word 15, bits 0-3 A3 X Word 15, bits 4-7 A4 X Word 15, bits 8-11 A5 X Word 15, bits 12-15 A6 X Word 16, bits 0-3 A7 X Word 16, bits 4-7 A8 X Word 16, bits 8-11 A9 X Word 16, bits 12-15 A1O X Word 17, bits 0-3 All X Word 17, bits 4-7 A12 X Word 17, bits 8-11 A13 X Word 17, bits 12-15 A14 X Word 18, bits 0-3 A15 X Word 18, bits 4-7 A16 X Word 18, bits 8-11 A17 TBCD-Null Word 18, bits 12-15 A18 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 0-3 A19 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 4-7 A20 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 8-11 A21 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 12-15 A22 TBCD-Null WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description 16. DNIS: The DNIS may be recorded as received from the SS7 generic address parameter, such as with EVS/NARS processed calls. Word 14, bits 8-11 Al N Word 14, bits 12-15 A2 X Word 15, bits 0-3 A3 X Word 15, bits 4-7 A4 N Word 15, bits 8-11 A5 X Word 15, bits 12-15 A6 X Word 16, bits 0-3 A7 X Word 16, bits 4-7 A8 X Word 16, bits 8-11 A9 X Word 16, bits 12-15 A10 X Word 17, bits 0-3 Al1 TBCD-Null Word 17, bits 4-7 A12 TBCD-Null Word 17, bits 8-11 A13 TBCD-Null Word 17, bits 12-15 A14 TBCD-Null Word 18, bits 0-3 A15 TBCD-Null Word 18, bits 4-7 A16 TBCD-Null Word 18, bits 8-11 A17 TBCD-Null Word 18, bits 12-15 A18 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 0-3 A19 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 4-7 A20 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 8-11 A21 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 12-15 A22 TBCD-Null 17. Network Call Identifier (NCID): If the NCID is recorded in the "A" field, it is recorded in binary beginning with Al. The entry code will indicate the call processing associated with the particular call or 'O.' If the NCID is recorded in the NCID field of a 64-word call record, the entry code will also indicate the call processing associated with the particular call or '0.' The NCID comprises the following: Originating Switch ID Originating Trunk Group Originating Port Number Timepoint I NCID Sequence Number WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 20, bits 0-15 Destination Address: This is the seventeen digits of the destination Word 21, bits 0-15 address which is the domestic or international number being Word 22, bits 0-15 called, or an operator number format. In the POSR. if the dialed Word 23, bits 0-15 number was translated by the NCS/DAP or LAN, the translated Word 24, bits 0-3 number will be recorded. If more than 17 digits is required, use EOSR/EPOSR format. Unused bytes contain TBCD-Null. 7-digit 10-digit DDD IDDD Word 20, bits 0-3 Dl N N N CC Word 20, bits 4-7 D2 X X. X CC Word 20, bits 8-11 D3 X X X CC Word 20, bits 12-15 D4 X N N NN Word 21, bits 0-3 D5 X X X NN Word 21, bits 4-7 D6 X X X NN Word 21, bits 8-11 D7 X X X NN Word 21, bits 12-15 D8 X(TSID) X X NN Word 22, bits 0-3 D9 X(TSID) X X NN Word 22, bits 4-7 DIO X(TSID) X X NN Word 22, bits 8-11 DlI X(TTG) X(TSID) T-Null NN Word 22, bits 12-15 D12 X(TTG) X(TSID) T-Null NN Word 23, bits 0-3 D13 X(TTG) X(TSID) T-Null NN Word 23, bits 4-7 D14 X(TTG) X(TTG) T-Null NN Word 23, bits 8-11 D15 T-Null X(TTG) T-Null NN Word 23, bits 12-15 D16 T-Null X(TTG) T-Null T-Null Word 24, bits 0-3 D17 T-Null X(TTG) T-Null T-Null CC = Customer Connect NN = National Number TSID = Terminating Switch ID TTG = Terminating Trunk Group BOC Op-to-Op OD-to-Op Inward Domestic/ Manual Dialing Int'l Transit Word 20, bits 0-3 DI N X(CC) X(CC) Word 20, bits 4-7 D2 0/1 X(CC) X(CC) Word 20, bits 8-11 D3 X X(CC) X(CC) Word 20, bits 12-15 D4 X(ATC) TBCD-Null 1 Word 21, bits 0-3 D5 X(ATC) TBCD-Null 6 Word 21, bits 4-7 D6 X(ATC) TBCD-Null 0 Word 21, bits 8-11 D7 X(SII) TBCD-Null TBCD-Null Word 21, bits 12-15 D8 X(S12) TBCD-Null TBCD-Null Word 22, bits 0-3 D9 X(S13) TBCD-Null TBCD-Null Word 22, bits 4-7 D1O X(S14) TBCD-Null TBCD-NuIl Word 22, bits 8-11 D11 X(S15) TBCD-Null TBCD-Null Word 22, bits 12-15 D12 TBCD-Null TBCD-Null TBCD-Null Word 23, bits 0-3 D13 TBCD-Null TBCD-Null TBCD-Null Word 23, bits 4-7 D14 TBCD-Null TBCD-Null TBCD-Null Word 23, bits 8-11 D15 TBCD-Null TBCD-Null TBCD-Nul Word 23, bits 12-15 D16 TBCD-Null TBCD-Null TBCD-Null Word 24. bits 0-3 D17 TBCD-Nul TBCD-Null TBCD-Null Word 24, bits 4-15 Operator ID Number (OPIN): Contains the operator id number of Word 25, bits 0-1 the operator that handled the call. 7 6 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 25, bit 2 Not Used. Word 25, bits 3-15 Timepoint 5 (TPS): A binary count of the number of seconds between the time TP1 occurred and the time that the operator stopped handling the call and releases the position. If the call is transferred to other operators, the value contained in this field shall express the release time of the last operam-r providing the service. Word 26, bits 0-15 Room Number (RN): Contains the last four digits of the Calling Station ID (CSI) when a call originates from a hotel, a university, or any other community identified by only a main telephone number. The CSI shall be obtained from the originating signalling information, or verbally by the operator who enters the information manually into the OSR. Word 27, bits 0-3 Feature Code (FC): The switch determines a feature code for the call which indicates whether a specific type of data line is required for the call such as a higher quality line for facsimile transmissions. 0 = Default 1 = FAX 2 = NARS 3 = Data Call 4 = Switched DS1 (HSCS) 5 = Switched DS3 (HSCS) 6-8 = Not Used 9 = NX64 10 = Offnet Routing 11 = AAP Call (Used in Gateway Toll Ticket Conversion) 12 = Card Gate Denial 13 = Forum Dial out audio/video conference 14 = Concert Freephone 15 = Not Used Word 27, bits 4-7 Terminating Network Code (TNC): Indicates the terminating facilities to be used for the remainder of the path of the call. For example, an indicator for no satellite transmission. 0 = Default 1 = No Routing Restrictions 2 = Avoid Satellite 3 = Route via DSI 4 = Route via DS1 and avoid satellite 5 = Route via Protected Facilities Required 6 = Route via Protected Facilities Preferred 7-15 = Not Used WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 27, bits 8-11 Network Access Type (NAT): Indicates which type of network access was used as defined at the originating switch on the network: that is, how the caller gained access to the network. The types of access are: 0 = Default 1 = 800 call 2 = Credit Card Access 3 = Cperator Assistance Access 4 = VNET Remote Access 5 = Billed party preference (BPP) Access 6 = FGD Cut-Through Access 7-15 = Not Used Word 27, bits 12-15 Timepoint 7 Qualifier (TP7Q): Contains the call's first disconnect qualifier; that is, how the call was terminated. The types of disconnection are: 0 = Calling party disconnects 1 = Called party disconnects 2 = Calling party reorigination 3 = S -vitch initiated (ex. switch error cut off the call) 4 = A.l Routes Busy 5 = D sconnected due to a long ring; ring timer exceeded 6-15 Not Used Word 28, bits 0-6 Entry .ode (EC): Indicates the type of call processing that took place and what type of information is recorded in the Authorzation Code field. If more than one entry code is received, record the last one. The following codes are valid: WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description 0 = Default I = Person-to-Person (P-P) 2 = Station-to-Station (S-S) 3 = Third Party Billing (3rd party number recorded) 4 = P-P collect (bill to called party) 5 = S-S collect (bill to called party) 6 = MCI card or VNet card (S-S) 7 = BOC inward dialing without call completion 8 = general assistance 9 = BOC/LEC card 10 = Presubscribed credit card 11 = PIT card 12 = Directory Assistance 13 = Commercial Credit Card 14 = BOC inward dialing with call completion 15 = MCI card or VNet card (P-P) 16-19 = Not Used 20 = ANI validation (screened pass/fail) 21 = Auth Validation (filed or dialed) 22 = Not Used 23 = 700 Service Access Code (overrides #20) 24 = 500, 800 Service Access Code (overrides #20) 25 = 900 Service Access Code (overrides #20) 26-28 = Not Used 29 = Operator Release Timer Expired 30 = EVS/NARS - Disconnect message referral (DMR) without referral 31 = EVS/NARS - DMR with referral to MCI number 32 = EVS/NARS - DMR with referral to non-MCI number 33 = EVS/NARS - DMR with referral and call extension (CE) to MCI number 34 = EVS/NARS - DMR with referral and CE to non-MCI number 35 = EVS/NARS - Customized Message Announcement (CMA) with CE WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description 36 = EVS/NARS - CMA without CE 37 = EVS/NARS - Enhanced Call Routing (ECR) 38-41 = EVS/NARS - Reserved 42-47 = Not Used 48 = GETS card 49 = Not Used 50 = Billed to international number 51 = Calling station ID information recorded 52 = Supplemental code only recorded 53 = VNet remote access number recorded 54 = SS7 calling party number recorded 55 = OSID and OTG recorded 56 = DNIS recorded 57 = Business group ID recorded 58 = Network information recorded 59 = BG + Null + OSID/OTG 60 = Card Number + Null + OSID/OTG 61 = VNet RA + Null + OSID/OTG 62 = VNet RA + Null + OSID/OTG 63 = Network Call Transfer (NCT) 64-79 = Reserved 80-89 = Reserved 90-99 = Reserved 100 = 18C It's Me PIN S/S 101 = 18C It's Me Global S/S 102 = 18C It's Me ANI S/S 103 = 18C It's Me NPA S/S 104 = 18C Messenger S/S 105 = 18C Messenger PIN S/S 106 = 18C Messenger Global S/S 107 = 18C BOC Card S/S 108 = 18C MCI Card S/S 109 = Aos Messenger S/S 110 = International Messenger 111 = International Speed Dial 112-127 = Not Used Word 28, bits 7-9 Prefix Digits (PD): Represents the prefix digits of the called number. These digits tell the switch how to process the call. 0 = No prefix digits received I = 0- (operator assisted) 2 = 0+ (domestic CDOS) 3 = 01 + (international CDOS) 4 = 01 1+IDDD 5 = 1+DDD 6 = 0+operator assisted, subscriber address 7 = *XX where XX = 0-9, Star Card WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 28, bits 10-12 NDID (NCS/DAP ID): Indicates whether the switch processed the call or if one of the databases, such as NCS/DAP, was queried for information for services, including but not limited to, VNET, Calling Card, 800, and 900 calls. The NDID further indicates the ID of the NCS/DAP that was involved in the last transaction attempt. o = Switch call processing I = NCS/DAP 1 2 = NCS/DAP 2 3 = NCS/DAP 3 4-5 = Not Used 6 = Received from operator platform via RLT 7 = TCAP to NCS/DAP Word 28, bits 13-15 Division ID (DIVID): Contains the division ID for credit card calls, including the telecommunication system's card. The DIVID is received from the NCS/DAP for the card number validation. If no information is received by the switch, record the default value of '0.' 0 = No division ID specified I = Division ID 1 2 = Division ID2 3 = Division ID3 4 = Division ID4 5 = Division ID5 6 = Division ID6 7 = Division ID7 Word 29, bit 0 Distant Overflow (DO): When set to I in the originating switch's call record, indicates that a direct termination overflow (DTO) transaction was attempted at an intermediate or terminating switch in order to get the final destination address digits for this call. Word 29, bit I Not Used. Word 29, bit 2 Customer Connect (CC): Indicates whether to use timepoint 6 or timepoint 3 to calculate the call duration. 0 = Use Time Point 6, *F to calculate the call duration I = Use Time Point 3, *C to calculate the call duration Word 29, bit 3 Inter-Network (IN): Indicates whether or not a call is originating from one customer/network and is terminating to a different customer/network. The default setting = 0; bit set to I if a business group or Netinfo parameter is received from the NCS/DAP. Word 29, bit 4 Not Used Word 29, bit 5 SAC Bit (SC): This bit is used for the Flexible SAC feature. This bit will be set to "1" whenever the received number which is collected during the address digit collection phase, is identified as a SAC number in the FlexSac Index associated with the originating trunk group. This bit will be set to "0" in all other cases.

WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 29, bit 6 Call Direction (CD): Indicates whether the call originated in the domestic or international network. 0 = Call origination occurred in the Domestic Network I = Call origination occurred in the International Network Word 29, bit 7 Destination (DE): Indicates when a call is expected to terminate to an international destination. o = Default, NANP, Domestic VNet, or any other calls which are not expected to terminate to an international destination I = Calls expected to terminate to an international destination Word 29, bit 8 Dedicated Termination (DT): Indicates that a 10-digit shared network number was completed to a dedicated destination. If the terminating trunk class (TTC) in the call record is equal to 3 or 7, then it is considered to be a direct termination trunk. Word 29, bit 9 Person-to-Person (PP): This bit is set to 1 if the operator authorizes a person-to-person call. This bit is used in combination with the entry codes to determine the nature of the call. Word 29, bit 10 Transferred Bit (XB): This bit is set to 1 if the call has been transferred from one operator position or ARU to another. Word 29, bit II Satellite (SA): Indicates that a satellite circuit was involved in the call. The default setting is 0; bit set to 1 indicates that a satellite was involved in the call. The bit is set when the incoming trunk group is classmarked as satellite equipped, when the SAT digit on an incoming inband IMT call shows that a satellite circuit is involved in the connection, or when the SS7 Nature of Connection parameter indicates that a satellite trunk was previously used. This is used for trouble-shooting purposes, and not for billing. Word 29, bits 12-15 Nature Of Calling Location ID (NOCLI): A binary value that identifies what data is recorded in the Call Location ID. The Calling Location ID field will contain the information that is referenced in the NOCLI. 0 = Not Used I = ANI from Inbound trunk 2 = SS7 charge number 3 = SS7 calling party number 4 = original called number 5 = Pseudo ANI created at this switch 6 = CSI from originating trunk 7 = Filed NPA-NXX trunk group information plus CSI 8 = NNN+OSID+OTG or 00Y+OSID+OTG (N = TBCD Null) 9 = Country Code + national number 10 = No CLI record 11 = Redirecting Number 12 = CLI received from Operator platform via RLT 13 = ANI of NCT Originator 14-15 = Not Used WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 30, bits 0-15 Carrier Number (CN): Represents the carrier number provided on FG-B or FG-D originations, or the carrier number received over an SS7 IMT. If only three digits are used, then they are recorded in CN2-CN4 and CNl will contain a TBCD-Null. This field also contains the last four digits of the specific 800 number assigned to VISA cards (9595). It will also contain the last four digits of the MCI card access number regardless of the access facility. Examples of carrier numbers are: MCI = 222, ATT = 288, and Friends = 333. FGB/FGD FGB/D 3 digit 4 digit visa CIC CIC card Word 30, bits 0-3 CNl Null X 9 Word 30, bits 4-7 CN2 X X 5 Word 30, bits 8-11 CN3 X X 9 Word 30, bits 12-15 CN4 X X 5 SS7 MCI VNet TNS card card Word 30, bits 0-3 CN1 X 1 1 Word 30, bits 4-7 CN2 X 0 1 Word 30, bits 8-11 CN3 X 2 1 Word 30, bits 12-15 CN4 X 2 1 Word 31, bits 0-3 - Authorization Code ID Field (ACIF): Contains the Authorization Code Identification Field for recording a card number status. This field indicates whether the card number (calling card or credit card) is good or bad. 0 = Seven digit authcode file I = 1st or only five digit authcode file 2 = 2nd five digit file 3 = 3rd five digit file 4 = 4th five digit file 5 = 5th five digit file 6 = Six digit authcode file 7 = Range restriction failure (invalid address digits) 8 = Positive Commercial Credit Card/89 Card/M Card Validation 9 = Not Used 10 = MCI Card/Visa Card invalid or not assigned. Disallowed. 11 = BOC billing number assigned but blocked 12 = BOC billing number usage exceeded 13 = Not Used 14 = Default authorization of MCI Card/VISA Card if response timeout from NCS/DAP 15 = MCI Card/VISA Card authorized by NCS/DAP WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 31, bits 4-10 Release Code: Used with timepoint 7 qualifier to determine from which direction the release message came. The code indicates why one of the parties hung up, for example, normal release = 16, and no circuit available = 34. 1 = Unallocated number 2 = No route to specified network 3 = No route to destination 4 = Send special information tone 5 = Misdialed trunk prefix 16 = Normal clearing 17 = User Busy 18 = No user responding 19 = No user responding (user alerted) 21 = Call rejected 22 = Number changed 27 = Destination out of service 28 = Address incomplete 29 = Facility rejected 31 = Normal - unspecified 34 = No circuit available 38 = Network out of order 41 = Temporary failure 42 = Switching equipment congestion 44 = Requested channel not available 47 = Resource unavailable - unspecified 50 = Requested facility not subscribed 55 = Incoming calls barred within CUG 57 = Bearer capability not authorized 58 = Bearer capability not available 63 = Service or option not available 65 = Bearer capability not implemented 69 = Requested facility not implemented 70 = Only restricted digital information bearer capability is available 79 = Service or option not implemented 87 = Called user not member of CUG 88 = Incompatible destination 91 = Invalid transit network selector 95 = Invalid message - unspecified 97 = Message type non-existent or not implemented 99 = Parameter non-existent or not implemented - discarded 102 = Recovery on timer expired 103 = Parameter non-existent or not implemented - passed on 111 = Protocol error - unspecified 127 = Interworking - unspecified Word 31, bits 11-13 NCID Sequence Number: Represents the number of calls which have occurred on the same port number with the same Timepoint 1 value. The first call will have the sequence number set to '0'. This value will increase incrementally for each successive call which originates on the same port number which has the same Timepoint 1 value. Range = 0-7.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 31, bit 14 NCID Location (NCIDLOC): This bit identifies when the NCID is recorded in the Authcode field of the call record. The NCID is recorded in the Authcode field of the call record at intermediate and terminating switches if the Authcode field is not being used to record other information. If the Authcode field is being used to record other information, the NCID is recorded in the "NCID" fielc of the 64 word call record. o = NCID is not recorded in the Authcode field (default) I = NCID is recorded in the Authcode field Word 31, bit 15 Remote ANI Screened (RS): This bit is set to 'I' if the NPA of the .. NI is not listed in the switch's Local-Service-Area table, and' the .'NI was sent to the DAP for ANI index screening purposes. This bit is set to '0' if the switch sent the ANI to the DAP for AN' index screening purposes and no response is received from the DAP or if normal switch ANI screening occurs. o = ANI was not screened by the DAP (default) I = ANI was screened by the DAP Words 0-11, bits 0-15 Same as OSR/POSR format. Word 12, bits 0-15 Callirg Location ID: Contains 1-15 digits of the originating station Word 13, bits 0-15 line. ~~his is the ANI number of the calling party. If 1 to 15 ANI Word 14, bits 0-15 or CS: digits are received, they are recorded in order starting with Word 15, bits 0-11 CLIl. Unused bytes contain TBCD-Null. If no ANI or CSI is available, record the OSID/OTG in CLI4-10, except where noted. If nothing is recorded in the CLI field, use a NOCLI value of 10. This field contains 1 of the following nine formats: 1. VNet CAMA DAL originations: If CSI is available, prefix the CSI with filed HNPA and HNXX information, if available, and record. Use NOCLI value of 7. 2. FG-C Originations: If ANI or CSI information is not available and the number is in the OOY+NXX-XXXX format, record the OOY code that was received in CLIl-3, and record the OSID/OTG in CLI4-10. Use NOCLI value of 8. 3. Inband FG-D Originations: Record the ANI that was received starting with CLI. Use NOCLI value of 1. 4. SS7 FG-D Originations: Record the charge number, if available. If the charge number is not available, record the calling party number. Use NOCLI value of 2 or 3. 5. International Originations: Record the country code and national number of the calling party. Use NOCLI value of 9. 6. SS7 IMTs Originations: Record the following information in this order of importance: 1) charge number, 2) calling party number, 3) OSID/OTG from generic digits. Use NOCLI value of 2, 3, or 8. 7. SS7 Reseller Originations: The CLI field will be filled with TBCD Nulls.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description 8. SS7 Private Network Originations: The CLI field will be filled with TBCD Nulls. 9. PRI Originations: Record the calling party number received in the ISDN setup message. The format: 1-15 digit ANI/CSI (13 digit Incoming example) OSID/OTG Int'l Word 12. bits 0-3 CLII X TBCD-Null X(CC) Word 12, bits 4-7 CLI2 X TBCD-Null X(CC) Word 12, bits 8-11 CLI3 X TBCD-Null X(CC) Word 12, bits 12-15 CLI4 X X(OSID) X(NN) Word 13, bits 0-3 CLI5 X X(OSID) X(NN) Word 13, bits 4-7 CLI6 X X(OSID) X(NN) Word 13, bits 8-11 CLI7 X X(OTG) X(NN) Word 13, bits 12-15 CL18 X X(OTG) X(NN) Word 14, bits 0-3 CLI9 X X(OTG) X(NN) Word 14, bits 4-7 CLIl0 X X(OTG) X(NN) Word 14, bits 8-11 CLII X TBCD-Null X(NN) Word 14, bits 12-15 CLI12 X TBCD-Null X(NN) Word 15, bits 0-3 CLIl3 X TBCD-Null X(NN) Word 15, bits 4-7 CLI14 TBCD-Null TBCD-Null X(NN) Word 15, bits 8-11 CLI1S TBCD-Null TBCD-Null X(NN) CC = Customer Connect NN = National Number OSID = Originating Switch ID OTG = Originating Trunk Group Word 15, bits 12-15 Authorization Code (Auth Code): Same as OSR/POSR format Word 16, bits 0-15 Auth Code, but represents 45 digits. Word 17, bits 0-15 Word 18, bits 0-15 1. Authorization Codes: Word 19, bits 0-15 Word 20, bits 0-15 5 digit 6 digit 7 digit Word 21, bits 0-15 Word 22, bits 0-15 Word 15, bits 12-15 Al AUTHI AUTHI AUTHI Word 23, bits 0-15 Word 16, bits 0-3 A2 AUTH2 AUTH2 AUTH2 Word 24, bits 0-15 Word 16, bits 4-7 A3 AUTH3 AUTH3 AUTH3 Word 25, bits 0-15 Word 16, bits 8-11 A4 AUTH4 AUTH4 AUTH4 Word 26, bits 0-15 Word 16, bits 12-15 A5 AUTH5 AUTH5 AUTH5 Word 17, bits 0-3 A6 SECI AUTH6 AUTH6 Word 17, bits 4-7 A7 SEC2 SECI AUTH7 Word 17, bits 8-11 A8 SEC3 SEC2 SECI Word 17, bits 12-15 A9 SEC4 SEC3 SEC2 Word 18, bits 0-3 A1O T-Null SEC4 SEC3 Word 18, bits 4-7 All SUPPI T-Null SEC4 Word 18, bits 8-11 A12 SUPP2 SUPPI T-Null _____________________Word 18, bits 12-15 A13 SUPP3 SUPP2 SUPP1 asOS/OS ora WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 19, bits 0-3 A14 SUPP4 SUPP3 SUPP2 Word 19, bits 4-7 A15 SUPP5 SUPP4 SUPP3 Word 19, bits 8-11 A16 SUPP6 SUPP5 SUPP4 Word 19, bits 12-15 A17 SUPP7 SUPP6 SUPP5 Word 20, bits 0-3 A18 SUPP8 SUPP7 SUPP6 Word 20, bits 4-7 A19 SUPP9 SUPP8 SUPP7 Word 20, bits 8-11 A20 SUPP1O SUPP9 SUPP8 Word 20, bits 12-15 A21 SUPP1I SUPPIO SUPP9 Word 21, bits 0-3 A22 SUPP12 SUPP1I SUPPIO Word 21, bits 4-7 A23 SUPP13 SUPP12 SUPPlI Word 21, bits 8-11 A24 SUPP14 SUPP13 SUPP12 Word 21, bits 12-15 A25 SUPP15 SUPP14 SUPP13 Word 22, bits 0-3 A26 SUPP16 SUPP15 SUPP14 Word 22, bits 4-7 A27 SUPP17 SUPP16 SUPP15 Word 22, bits 8-11 A28 SUPP18 SUPP17 SUPP16 Word 22, bits 12-15 A29 SUPP19 SUPP18 SUPP17 Word 23, bits 0-3 A30 SUPP20 SUPP19 SUPP18 Word 23, bits 4-7 A31 SUPP21 SUPP20 SUPP19 Word 23, bits 8-11 A32 SUPP22 SUPP21 SUPP20 Word 23, bits 12-15 A33 SUPP23 SUPP22 SUPP21 Word 24, bits 0-3 A34 SUPP24 SUPP23 SUPP22 Word 24, bits 4-7 A35 SUPP25 SUPP24 SUPP23 Word 24, bits 8-11 A36 SUPP26 SUPP25 SUPP24 Word 24, bits 12-15 A37 SUPP27 SUPP26 SUPP25 Word 25, bits 0-3 A38 SUPP28 SUPP27 SUPP26 Word 25, bits 4-7 A39 SUPP29 SUPP28 SUPP27 Word 25, bits 8-11 A40 SUPP30 SUPP29 SUPP28 Word 25, bits 12-15 A41 T-Null SUPP30 SUPP29 Word 26, bits 0-3 A42 T-Null T-Null SUPP30 Word 26, bits 4-7 A43 T-NuIl T-Null T-Null Word 26, bits 8-11 A44 T-Null T-Null T-NulI Word 26, bits 12-15 A45 T-Null T-Null T-Null T-Null = TBCD-Null 2. Calling Station ID (CSI): 7 digit 1-10 digit Word 15, bits 12-15 Al X x Word 16, bits 0-3 A2 X x Word 16, bits 4-7 A3 X X Word 16, bits 8-11 A4 X X Word 16, bits 12-15 A5 X X Word 17, bits 0-3 A6 X X Word 17, bits 4-7 A7 X X Word 17, bits 8-11 A8 TBCD-Null X Word 17, bits 12-15 A9 SUPPI X Word 18, bits 0-3 AO SUPP2 X Word 18, bits 4-7 All SUPP3 TBCD-Null Word 18, bits 8-11 A12 SUPP4 SUPPI 7Word 18, bits 12-15 A13 SUPP SUPP2 ,5-X X WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 19, bits 0-3 A14 SUPP6 SUPP3 Word 19, bits 4-7 A15 SUPP7 SUPP4 Word 19, bits 8-11 A16 SUPP8 SUPP5 Word 19, bits 12-15 A17 SUPP9 SUPP6 Word 20, bits 0-3 A18 SUPPIO SUPP7 Word 20, bits 4-7 A19 SUPPlI SUPP8 Word 20, bits 8-11 A20 SUPP12 SUPP9 Word 20, bits 12-15 A21 SUPP13 SUPP1O Word 21, bits 0-3 A22 SUPP14 SUPPLI Word 21, bits 4-7 A23 SUPP15 SUPP12 Word 21, bits 8-11 A24 SUPP16 SUPP13 Word 21, bits 12-15 A25 SUPP17 SUPP14 Word 22, bits 0-3 A26 SUPP18 SUPP15 Word 22, bits 4-7 A27 SUPP19 SUPP16 Word 22, bits 8-11 A28 SUPP20 SUPP17 Word 22, bits 12-15 A29 SUPP21 SUPP18 Word 23, bits 0-3 A30 SUPP22 SUPP19 Word 23, bits 4-7 A31 SUPP23 SUPP20 Word 23, bits 8-11 A32 SUPP24 SUPP21 Word 23, bits 12-15 A33 SUPP25 SUPP22 Word 24, bits 0-3 A34 SUPP26 SUPP23 Word 24, bits 4-7 A35 SUPP27 SUPP24 Word 24, bits 8-11 A36 SUPP28 SUPP25 Word 24, bits 12-15 A37 SUPP29 SUPP26 Word 25, bits 0-3 A38 SUPP30 SUPP27 Word 25, bits 4-7 A39 TBCD-Null SUPP28 Word 25, bits 8-11 A40 TBCD-Null SUPP29 Word 25, bits 12-15 A41 TBCD-Null SUPP30 Word 26, bits 0-3 A42 TBCD-Null TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 4-7 A43 TBCD-Null TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 8-11 A44 TBCD-Null TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 12-15 A45 TBCD-Null TBCD-Null 3. Supplemental Codes: Word 15, bits 12-15 Al SUPPi Word 16, bits 0-3 A2 SUPP2 Word 16, bits 4-7 A3 SUPP3 Word 16, bits 8-11 A4 SUPP4 Word 16, bits 12-15 A5 SUPP5 Word 17, bits 0-3 A6 SUPP6 Word 17, bits 4-7 A7 SUPP7 Word 17, bits 8-11 A8 SUPP8 Word 17, bits 12-15 A9 SUPP9 Word 18, bits 0-3 AlO SUPP1O Word 18, bits 4-7 All SUPPII Word 18, bits 8-11 A12 SUPP12 Word 18, bits 12-15 A13 SUPP13 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 19, bits 0-3 A14 SUPP14 Word 19. bits 4-7 A15 SUPP15 Word 19, bits 8-11 A16 SUPP16 Word 19, bits 12-15 A17 SUPP17 Word 20, bits 0-3 A18 SUPP18 Word 20, bits 4-7 A19 SUPP19 Word 20, bits 8-11 A20 SUPP20 Word 20, bits 12-15 A21 SUPP21 Word 21, bits 0-3 A22 SUPP22 Word 21, bits 4-7 A23 SUPP23 Word 21, bits 8-11 A24 SUPP24 Word 21, bits 12-15 A25 SUPP25 Word 22, bits 0-3 A26 SUPP26 Word 22, bits 4-7 A27 SUPP27 Word 22, bits 8-11 A28 SUPP28 Word 22, bits 12-15 A29 SUPP29 Word 23, bits 0-3 A30 TBCD-Null Word 23, bits 4-7 A31 TBCD-Null Word 23, bits 8-11 A32 TBCD-Null Word 23, bits 12-15 A33 TBCD-Null Word 24, bits 0-3 A34 TBCD-Nul Word 24, bits 4-7 A35 TBCD-Null Word 24, bits 8-11 A36 TBCD-Nul Word 24, bits 12-15 A37 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 0-3 A38 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 4-7 A39 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 8-11 A40 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 12-15 A41 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 0-3 A42 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 4-7 A43 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 8-11 A44 TBCD-NulI Word 26, bits 12-15 A45 TBCD-Null 4. VNet Remote Access and Calling Party Number: Word 15, bits 12-15 Al N Word 16, bits 0-3 A2 X Word 16, bits 4-7 A3 X Word 16, bits 8-11 A4 N Word 16, bits 12-15 AS X Word 17, bits 0-3 A6 X Word 17, bits 4-7 A7 X Word 17, bits 8-11 A8 X Word 17, bits 12-15 A9 X Word 18, bits 0-3 AIO X Word 18, bits 4-7 AllI TBCD-NulI Word 18, bits 8-11 A12 SUPPI Word 18, bits 12-15 A13 SUPP2 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 19, bits 0-3 A14 SUPP3 Word 19, bits 4-7 A15 SUPP4 Word 19, bits 8-11 A16 SUPP5 Word 19, bits 12-15 A17 SUPP6 Word 20, bits 0-3 A18 SUPP7 Word 20, bits 4-7 A19 SUPP8 Word 20, bits 8-11 A20 SUPP9 Word 20, bits 12-15 A21 SUPPIO Word 21, bits 0-3 A22 SUPPII Word 21, bits 4-7 A23 SUPP12 Word 21, bits 8-11 A24 SUPP13 Word 21, bits 12-15 A25 SUPP14 Word 22, bits 0-3 A26 SUPP15 Word 22, bits 4-7 A27 SUPP16 Word 22, bits 8-11 A28 SUPP17 Word 22, bits 12-15 A29 SUPP18 Word 23, bits 0-3 A30 SUPP19 Word 23, bits 4-7 A31 SUpp2O Word 23, bits 8-11 A32 SUPP21 Word 23, bits 12-15 A33 SUPP22 Word 24, bits 0-3 A34 SUPP23 Word 24, bits 4-7 A35 SUPP24 Word 24, bits 8-11 A36 SUPP25 Word 24, bits 12-15 A37 SUPP26 Word 25, bits 0-3 A38 SUPP27 Word 25, bits 4-7 A39 SUPP28 Word 25, bits 8-11 A40 SUPP29 Word 25, bits 12-15 A41 SUPP30 Word 26, bits 0-3 A42 TBCD-NulI Word 26, bits 4-7 A43 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 8-11 A44 TBCD-Null ________________________Word 26, bits 12-15 A45 TBCD-Null 5. Calling Party Number: Word 15, bits 12-15 Al N Word 16, bits 0-3 A2 X Word 16, bits 4-7 A3 X Word 16, bits 8-11 A4 N Word 16, bits 12-15 A5 X Word 17, bits 0-3 A6 X Word 17, bits 4-7 A7 X Word 17, bits 8-11 A8 X Word 17, bits 12-15 A9 X Word 18, bits 0-3 AIO X Word 18, bits 4-7 All TBCD-Nul Word 18, bits 8-11 A12 SUPPI Word 18, bits 12-15 A13 SUPP2

SUP

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 19, bits 0-3 A14 SUPP3 Word 19, bits 4-7 A15 SUPP4 Word 19, bits 8-11 A16 SUPP5 Word 19, bits 12-15 A17 SUPP6 Word 20, bits 0-3 A18 SUPP7 Word 20, bits 4-7 A19 SUPP8 I o.'crd 20, bits 8-11 A20 SUPP9 Word 20, bits 12-15 A21 SUPPlO Word 21, bits 0-3 A22 SUPPIl Word 21, bits 4-7 A23 SUPP12 Word 21, bits 8-11 A24 SUPP13 Word 21, bits 12-15 A25 SUPP14 Word 22, bits 0-3 A26 SUPP15 Word 22, bits 4-7 A27 SUPP16 Word 22, bits 8-11 A28 SUPP17 Word 22, bits 12-15 A29 SUPP18 Word 23, bits 0-3 A30 SUPP19 Word 23, bits 4-7 A31 SUPP20 Word 23, bits 8-11 A32 SUPP21 Word 23, bits 12-15 A33 SUPP22 Word 24, bits 0-3 A34 SUPP23 Word 24, bits 4-7 A35 SUPP24 Word 24, bits 8-11 A36 SUPP25 Word 24, bits 12-15 A37 SUPP26 Word 25, bits 0-3 A35 SUPP27 Word 25, bits 4-7 A39 SUPP28 Word 25, bits 8-11 A40 SUPP29 Word 25, bits 12-15 A41 SUPP30 Word 26, bits 0-3 A42 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 4-7 A43 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 8-11 A44 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 12-15 A45 TBCD-Nul 6. Credit Card: Word 15, bits 12-15 Al X Word 16, bits 0-3 A2 X Word 16, bits 4-7 A3 X Word 16, bits 8-11 A4 X Word 16, bits 12-15 A5 X Word 17, bits 0-3 A6 X Word 17, bits 4-7 A7 X Word 17, bits 8-11 A8 X Word 17, bits 12-15 A9 X Word 18, bits 0-3 AlO X Word 18, bits 4-7 All X Word 18, bits 8-11 A12 X ______________________Word 18, bits 12-15 A13 X

SUPP

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 19, bits 0-3 A14 X Word 19, bits 4-7 A15 X Word 19, bits 8-11 A16 X Word 19, bits 12-15 A17 X Word 20, bits 0-3 A18 X Word 20, bits 4-7 A19 X Word 20, bits 8-11 A20 TBCD-Null Word 20, bits 12-15 A21 SUPP1 Word 21, bits 0-3 A22 SUPP2 Word 21, bits 4-7 A23 SUPP3 Word 21, bits 8-11 A24 SUPP4 Word 21, bits 12-15 A25 SUPP5 Word 22, bits 0-3 A26 SUPP6 Word 22, bits 4-7 A27 SUPP7 Word 22, bits 8-11 A28 SUPP8 Word 22, bits 12-15 A29 SUPP9 Word 23, bits 0-3 A30 SUPP1O Word 23, bits 4-7 A31 SUPP1I Word 23, bits 8-11 A32 SUPP12 Word 23, bits 12-15 A33 SUPP13 Word 24, bits 0-3 A34 SUPP14 Word 24, bits 4-7 A35 SUPP15 Word 24, bits 8-11 A36 SUPP16 Word 24, bits 12-15 A37 SUPP17 Word 25, bits 0-3 A38 SUPP18 Word 25, bits 4-7 A39 SUPP19 Word 25, bits 8-11 A40 SUPP20 Word 25, bits 12-15 A41 SUPP21 Word 26, bits 0-3 A42 SUPP22 Word 26, bits 4-7 A43 SUPP23 Word 26, bits 84 1 A44 SUPP24 Word 26, bits 12-15 A45 SUPP25 7. 14 Digit MCI/VNet Calling Card: Word 15, bits 12-15 Al X Word 16, bits 0-3 A2 X Word 16, bits 4-7 A3 X Word 16, bits 8-11 A4 X Word 16, bits 12-15 A5 X Word 17, bits 0-3 A6 X Word 17, bits 4-7 A7 X Word 17, bits 8-11 A8 X Word 17, bits 12-15 A9 X Word 18, bits 0-3 AlO X Word 18, bits 4-7 All TBCD-A Word 18, bits 8-11 A12 TBCD-A Word 18, bits 12-15 A13 TBCD-A S-?2 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 19, bits 0-3 A14 TBCD-A Word 19, bits 4-7 A15 TBCD-NuIl Word 19, bits 8-11 A16 SUPPI Word 19, bits 12-15 A17 SUPP2 Word 20, bits 0-3 A18 SUPP3 Word 20. bits 4-7 A19 SUPP4 Word 20, bits 8-11 A20 SUPP5 Word 20, bits 12-15 A21 SUPP6 Word 21, bits 0-3 A22 SUPP7 Word 21, bits 4-7 A23 SUPP8 Word 21, bits 8-11 A24 SUPP9 Word 21, bits 12-15 A25 SUPPlO Word 22, bits 0-3 A26 SUPPil Word 22. bits 4-7 A27 SUPP12 Word 22, bits 8-11 A28 SUPP13 Word 22, bits 12-15 A29 SUPP14 Word 23, bits 0-3 A30 SUPP15 Word 23, bits 4-7 A31 SUPP16 Word 23, bits 8-11 A32 SUPP17 Word 23, bits 12-15 A33 SUPP18 Word 24, bits 0-3 A34 SUPP19 Word 24, bits 4-7 A35 SUPP20 Word 24, bits 8-11 A36 SUPP21 Word 24, bits 12-15 A37 SUPP22 Word 25, bits 0-3 A38 SUPP23 Word 25, bits 4-7 A39 SUPP24 Word 25, bits 8-11 A40 SUPP25 Word 25, bits 12-15 A41 SUPP26 Word 26, bits 0-3 A42 SUPP27 Word 26, bits 4-7 A43 SUPP28 Word 26, bits 8-11 A44 SUPP29 Word 26, bits 12-15 A45 SUPP30 8. OSID/OTG: Word '5, bits 12-15 Al X (OSID) Word 16, bits 0-3 A2 X (OSID) Word 16, bits 4-7 A3 X (OSID) Word 16, bits 8-11 A4 X (OTG) Word 16, bits 12-15 A5 X (OTG) Word 17, bits 0-3 A6 X (OTG) Word 17, bits 4-7 A7 X (OTG) Word 17, bits 8-11 A8 TBCD-Null Word 17, bits 12-15 A9 TBCD-Null Word 18, bits 0-3 AIO TBCD-Null Word 18, bits 4-7 All TBCD-Null Word 18, bits 8-11 A12 TBCD-Null Word 18, bits 12-15 A13 TBCD-Null WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 19, bits 0-3 A14 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 4-7 A15 TBCD-NulI Word 19, bits 8-11 A16 TBCD-NuIl Word 19, bits 12-15 A17 TBCD-NuIl Word 20, bits 0-3 A18 TBCD-NuII Word 20, bits 4-7 A19 TBCD-NuIl Word 20, bits 8-11 A20 TBCD-NuIl Word 20, bits 12-15 A21 TBCD-Null Word 21, bits 0-3 A22 TBCD-Null Word 21, bits 4-7 A23 TBCD-Null Word 21, bits 8-11 A24 TBCD-NuIl Word 21, bits 12-15 A25 TBCD-Null Word 22, bits 0-3 A26 TBCD-NuIl Word 22, bits 4-7 A27 TBCD-NuIl Word 22, bits 8-11 A28 TBCD-Null Word 22, bits 12-15 A29 TBCD-Null Word 23, bits 0-3 A30 TBCD-Null Word 23, bits 4-7 A31 TBCD-Null Word 23, bits 8-11 A32 TBCD-Null Word 23, bits 12-15 A33 TBCD-Null Word 24, bits 0-3 A34 TBCD-Null Word 24, bits 4-7 A35 TBCD-Null Word 24, bits 8-11 A36 TBCD-Null Word 24, bits 12-15 A37 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 0-3 A38 TBCD-NuII Word 25, bits 4-7 A39 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 8-11 A40 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 12-15 A41 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 0-3 A42 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 4-7 A43 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 8-11 A44 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 12-15 A45 TBCD-Null OSID = Originating Switch ID (000-999) OTG = Originating Trunk ID (0000-8191) 9. Telecommunication/PTT Cards: Word 15, bits 12-15 Al X Word 16, bits 0-3 A2 X Word 16, bits 4-7 A3 X Word 16, bits 8-11 A4 X Word 16, bits 12-15 A5 X Word 17, bits 0-3 A6 X Word 17, bits 4-7 A7 X Word 17, bits 8-11 A8 X Word 17, bits 12-15 A9 X Word 18, bits 0-3 A10 X Word 18, bits 4-7 All X Word 18, bits 8-11 A12 X Word 18, bits 12-15 A13 X S 9. 1 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 19, bits 0-3 A14 X Word 19, bits 4-7 A15 X Word 19, bits 8-11 A16 X Word 19, bits 12-15 A17 X Word 20, bits 0-3 A18 X Word 20, bits 4-7 A19 X Word 20, bits 8-11 A20 X Word 20, bits 12-15 A21 X Word 21, bits 0-3 A22 X Word 21. bits 4-7 A23 X Word 21, bits 8-11 A24 TBCD-Null Word 21, bits 12-15 A25 SUPP1 Word 22, bits 0-3 A26 SUPP2 Word 22. bits 4-7 A27 SUPP3 Word 22, bits 8-11 A28 SUPP4 Word 22, bits 12-15 A29 SUPP5 Word 23, bits 0-3 A30 SUPP6 Word 23, bits 4-7 A31 SUPP7 Word 23, bits 8-11 A32 SUPP8 Word 23, bits 12-15 A33 SUPP9 Word 24, bits 0-3 A34 SUPP1O Word 24, bits 4-7 A35 SUPP1I Word 24, bits 8-11 A36 SUPP12 Word 24, bits 12-15 A37 SUPP13 Word 25, bits 0-3 A38 SUPP14 Word 25, bits 4-7 A39 SUPP15 Word 25, bits 8-11 A40 SUPP16 Word 25, bits 12-15 A41 SUPP17 Word 26, bits 0-3 A42 SUPP18 Word 26, bits 4-7 A43 SUPP19 Word 26, bits 8-11 A44 SUPP20 Word 26, bits 12-15 A45 SUPP21 10. Business Group ID: Word 15, bits 12-15 Al X Word 16, bits 0-3 A2 X Word 15, bits 4-7 A3 X Word 15, bits 8-11 A4 X Word 16, bits 12-15 A5 X Word 17, bits 0-3 A6 X Word 17, bits 4-7 A7 TBCD-Null Word 17, bits 8-11 A8 SUPP1 Word 17, bits 12-15 A9 SUPP2 Word 18, bits 0-3 AlO SUPP3 Word 18, bits 4-7 All SUPP4 Word 18, bits 8-11 A12 SUPP5 Word 18, bits 12-15 A13 SUPP6 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 19, bits 0-3 A14 SUPP7 Word 19, bits 4-7 A15 SUPP8 Word 19, bits 8-11 A16 SUPP9 Word 19, bits 12-15 A17 SUPP1O Word 20, bits 0-3 A18 SUPP1I Word 20, bits 4-7 A19 SUPP12 Word 20, bits 8-11 A20 SUPP13 Word 20, bits 12-15 A21 SUPP14 Word 21, bits 0-3 A22 SUPP15 Word 21, bits 4-7 A23 SUPP16 Word 21, bits 8-11 A24 SUPP17 Word 21, bits 12-15 A25 SUPP18 Word 22, bits 0-3 A26 SUPP19 Word 22, bits 4-7 A27 SUPP20 Word 22, bits 8-11 A28 SUPP21 Word 22, bits 12-15 A29 SUPP22 Word 23, bits 0-3 A30 SUPP23 Word 23, bits 4-7 A31 SUPP24 Word 23, bits 8-11 A32 SUPP25 Word 23, bits 12-15 A33 SUPP26 Word 24, bits 0-3 A34 SUPP27 Word 24, bits 4-7 A35 SUPP28 Word 24, bits 8-11 A36 SUPP29 Word 24, bits 12-15 A37 SUPP30 Word 25, bits 0-3 A38 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 4-7 A39 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 8-11 A40 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 12-15 A41 TBCD-NulI Word 26, bits 0-3 A42 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 4-7 A43 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 8-11 A44 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 12-15 A45 TBCD-Null 11. Network Information: Word 15, bits 12-15 Al X Word 16, bits 0-3 A2 X Word 16, bits 4-7 A3 X Word 16, bits 8-11 A4 X Word 16, bits 12-15 A5 TBCD-NuII Word 17, bits 0-3 A6 SUPPI Word 17, bits 4-7 A7 SUPP2 Word 17, bits 8-11 A8 SUPP3 Word 17, bits 12-15 A9 SUPP4 Word 18, bits 0-3 AlO SUPP Word 18, bits 4-7 All SUPP6 Word 18, bits 8-11 A12 SUPP7 Word 18, bits 12-15 A13 SUPP8 Word 19, bits 0-3 A14 SUPP9 Word 19, bits 4-7 A15 SUPPIO Word 19, bits 8-11 A16 SUPPI1 Word 19, bits 12-15 A17 SUPP12

SUPP

WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 20, bits 0-3 A18 SUPP13 Word 20, bits 4-7 A19 SUPP14 Word 20, bits 8-11 A20 SUPP1 Word 20, bits 12-15 A21 SUPP16 Word 21, bits 0-3 A22 SUPP17 Word 21, bits 4-7 A23 SUPP18 Word 21, bits 8-11 A24 SUPP19 Word 21, bits 12-15 A25 SUPP20 Word 22, bits 0-3 A26 SUPP21 Word 22, bits 4-7 A27 SUPP22 Word 22, bits 8-11 A28 SUPP23 Word 22, bits 12-15 A29 SUPP24 Word 23, bits 0-3 A30 SUPP25 Word 23, bits 4-7 A31 SUPP26 Word 23, bits 8-11 A32 SUPP7 Word 23, bits 12-15 A33 SUPP28 Word 24, bits 0-3 A34 SUPP29 Word 24, bits 4-7 A35 SUPP30 Word 24, bits 8-11 A36 TBCD-Null Word 24, bits 12-15 A37 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 0-3 A38 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 4-7 A39 TBCD-NulI Word 25, bits 8-11 A40 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 12-15 A41 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 0-3 A42 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 4-7 A43 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 8-11 A44 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 12-15 A45 TBCD-Null 12. BOC/LEC Card: Word 15, bits 12-15 Al N Word 16, bits 0-3 A2 X Word 16, bits 4-7 A3 X Word 16, bits 8-11 A4 N Word 16, bits 12-15 A5 X Word 17, bits 0-3 A6 X Word 17, bits 4-7 A7 X Word 17, bits 8-11 A8 X Word 17, bits 12-15 A9 X Word 18, bits 0-3 AlO X Word 18, bits 4-7 All TBCD-Nul Word 18, bits 8-1l A12 TBCD-Null Word 18, bits 12-15 A13 TBCD-Null SUP 7 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 19, bits 0-3 A14 TBCD-NulI Word 19, bits 4-7 A15 TBCD-NulI Word 19, bits 8-11 A16 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 12-15 A17 TBCD-NuII Word 20, bits 0-3 A18 TBCD-NuIl Word 20, bits 4-7 Ai" TBCD-Null Word 20, bits 8-11 A20 TBCD-NuIl Word 20, bits 12-15 A21 TBCD-Null Word 21, bits 0-3 A22 TBCD-Null Word 21, bits 4-7 A23 TBCD-Null Word 21, bits 8-11 A24 TBCD-Null Word 21, bits 12-15 A25 TBCD-NulI Word 22, bits 0-3 A26 TBCD-Null Word 22, bits 4-7 A27 TBCD-NulI Word 22, bits 8-11 A28 TBCD-Null Word 22, bits 12-15 A29 TBCD-NuIl Word 23, bits 0-3 A30 TBCD-Nul Word 23, bits 4-7 A31 TBCD-Null Word 23, bits 8-11 A32 TBCD-Null Word 23, bits 12-15 A33 TBCD-Null Word 24, bits 0-3 A34 TBCD-Null Word 24, bits 4-7 A35 TBCD-NuIl Word 24, bits 8-11 A36 TBCD-Null Word 24, bits 12-15 A37 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 0-3 A38 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 4-7 A39 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 8-11 A40 TBCD-NuII Word 25, bits 12-15 A41 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 0-3 A42 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 4-7 A43 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 8-11 A44 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 12-15 A45 TBCD-NuIl 13. Third Party Number: Word 15, bits 12-15 Al N Word 16, bits 0-3 A2 X Word 16, bits 4-7 A3 X Word 16, bits 8-11 A4 N Word 16, bits 12-15 A5 X Word 17, bits 0-3 A6 X Word 17, bits 4-7 A7 X Word 17, bits 8-11 A8 X Word 17, bits 12-15 A9 X Word 18, bits 0-3 A1O X Word 18, bits 4-7 All TBCD-Null Word 18, bits 8-11 A12 TBCD-Null Word 18, bits 12-15 A13 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 0-3 A14 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 4-7 A15 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 8-11 A16 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 12-15 A17 TBCD-NulI WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 20, bits 0-3 A18 TBCD-Null Word 20, bits 4-7 A19 TBCD-Null Word 20, bits 8-11 A20 TBCD-Null Word 20, bits 12-15 A21 TBCD-Null Word 21, bits 0-3 A22 TBCD-Null Word 21, bits 4-7 A23 TBCD-Null Word 21, bits 8-11 A24 TBCD-Null Word 21, bits 12-15 A25 TBCD-Nul Word 22, bits 0-3 A26 TBCD-Null Word 22, bits 4-7 A27 TBCD-NuIl Word 22, bits 8-11 A28 TBCD-Null Word 22, bits 12-15 A29 TBCD-Null Word 23, bits 0-3 A30 TBCD-Null Word 23, bits 4-7 A31 TBCD-Null Word 23, bits 8-11 A32 TBCD-Null Word 23, bits 12-15 A33 TBCD-Null Word 24, bits 0-3 A34 TBCD-Null Word 24, bits 4-7 A35 TBCD-Null Word 24, bits 8-11 A36 TBCD-Null Word 24, bits 12-15 A37 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 0-3 A38 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 4-7 A39 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 8-11 A40 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 12-15 A41 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 0-3 A42 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 4-7 A43 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 8-11 A44 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 12-15 A45 TBCD-Null 14. International Number: Word 15, bits 12-15 Al X(CC) Word 16, bits 0-3 A2 X(CC) Word 16, bits 4-7 A3 X(CC) Word 16, bits 8-11 A4 X(NN) Word 16, bits 12-15 A5 X(NN) Word 17, bits 0-3 A6 X(NN) Word 17, bits 4-7 A7 X(NN) Word 17, bits 8-11 A8 X(NN) Word 17, bits 12-15 A9 X(NN) Word 18, bits 0-3 AlO X(NN) Word 18, bits 4-7 All X(NN) Word 18, bits 8-11 A12 X(NN) Word 18, bits 12-15 A13 X(NN) Word 19, bits 0-3 A14 X(NN) Word 19, bits 4-7 A15 X(NN) Word 19, bits 8-11 A16 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 12-15 A17 TBCD-Null WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 20, bits 0-3 A18 TBCD-Null Word 20, bits 4-7 A19 TBCD-Null Word 20, bits 8-11 A20 TBCD-Nul Word 20, bits 12-15 A21 TBCD-Nul1 Word 21, bits 0-3 A22 TBCD-Nul Word 21, bits 4-7 A23 TBCD-Nul Word 21, bits 8-11 A24 TBCD-Nul1 Word 21, bits 12-15 A25 TBCD-Nul Word 22, bits 0-3 A26 TBCD-Nul1 Word 22, bits 4-7 A27 TBCD-Nul Word 22, bits 8-11 A28 TBCD-Nul1 Word 22, bits 12-15 A29 TBCD-Nul1 Word 23, bits 0-3 A30 TBCD-Nu1 Word 23, bits 4-7 A31 TBCD-Null Word 23, bits 8-11 A32 TBCD-NulI Word 23, bits 12-15 A33 TBCD-Nu1 Word 24, bits 0-3 A34 TBCD-Null Word 24, bits 4-7 A35 TBCD-NuII Word 24, bits 8-11 A36 TBCD-Nu1 Word 24, bits 12-15 A37 TBCD-Nul Word 25, bits 0-3 A38 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 4-7 A39 TBCD-Nu1 Word 25, bits 8-11 A40 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 12-15 A41 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 0-3 A42 TBCD-Nu1 Word 26, bits 4-7 A43 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 8-11 A44 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 12-15 A45 TBCD-Null CC = Customer Connect NN = National Number 15. L-kN Sequence Number: Word 15, bits 12-15 Al X Word 16, bits 0-3 A2 X Word 16, bits 4-7 A3 X Word 16, bits 8-11 A4 X Word 16, bits 12-15 AS X Word 17, bits 0-3 A6 X Word 17, bits 4-7 A7 X Word 17, bits 8-11 A8 X Word 17, bits 12-15 A9 X Word 18, bits 0-3 AlO X Word 18,Tbits4-7 All X Word 18, bits 8-11 A12 X Word 18, bits 12-15 A13 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 0-3 A14 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 4-7 A15 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 8-11 A16 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 12-15 A17 TBCD-Null TBD-ul WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 20, bits 0-3 A18 TBCD-NuII Word 20, bits 4-7 A19 TBCD-NulI Word 20, bits 8-11 A20 TBCD-Null Word 20, bits 12-15 A21 TBCD-NuI Word 21, bits 0-3 A22 TBCD-Null Word 21, bits 4-7 A23 TBCD-Null Word 21, bits 8-11 A24 TZCD-NuII Word 21, bits 12-15 A25 TBCD-Null Word 22, bits 0-3 A26 TBCD-Null Word 22, bits 4-7 A27 TBCD-Null Word 22, bits 8-11 A28 TBCD-Null Word 22, bits 12-15 A29 TBCD-Null Word 23, bits 0-3 A30 TBCD-Null Word 23, bits 4-7 A31 TBCD-Null Word 23, bits 8-11 A32 TBCD-Null Word 23, bits 12-15 A33 TBCD-Null Word 24, bits 0-3 A34 TBCD-Null Word 24, bits 4-7 A35 TBCD-NulI Word 24, bits 8-11 A36 TBCD-Null Word 24, bits 12-15 A37 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 0-3 A38 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 4-7 A39 TBCD-NuII Word 25, bits 8-11 A40 TBCD-NuI Word 25, bits 12-15 A41 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 0-3 A42 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 4-7 A43 TBCD-Nul Word 26, bits 8-11 A44 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 12-15 A45 TBCD-Null 16. DNIS: Word 15, bits 12-15 Al N Word 16, bits 0-3 A2 X Word 16, bits 4-7 A3 X Word 16, bits 8-11 A4 N Word 16, bits 12-15 AS X Word 17, bits 0-3 A6 X Word 17, bits 4-7 A7 X Word 17, bits 8-11 A8 X Word 17, bits 12-15 A9 X Word 18, bits 0-3 AlO X Word 18, bits 4-7 All TBCD-Null Word 18, bits 8-11 A12 TBCD-Null Word 18, bits 12-15 A13 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 0-3 A14 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 4-7 A15 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 8-11 A16 TBCD-Null Word 19, bits 12-15 A17 TBCD-Null TBDN0 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 20, bits 0-3 A18 TBCD-Null Word 20, bits 4-7 A19 TBCD-Null Word 20, bits 8-11 A20 TBCD-Null Word 20, bits 12-15 A21 TBCD-Null Word 21, bits 0-3 A22 TBCD-Null Word 21, bits 4-7 A23 TBCD-Null Word 21, bits 8-11 A24 TBCD-Null Word 21, bits 12-15 A25 TBCD-Null Word 22, bits 0-3 A26 TBCD-Null Word 22, bits 4-7 A27 TBCD-Null Word 22, bits 8-11 A28 TBCD-Null Word 22, bits 12-15 A29 TBCD-Nul Word 23, bits 0-3 A30 TBCD-Nul Word 23, bits 4-7 A31 TBCD-Null Word 23, bits 8-11 A32 TBCD-Null Word 23, bits 12-15 A33 TBCD-Null Word 24, bits 0-3 A34 TBCD-Null Word 24, bits 4-7 A35 TBCD-Null Word 24, bits 8-11 A36 TBCD-Null Word 24, bits 12-15 A37 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 0-3 A38 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 4-7 A39 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 8-11 A40 TBCD-Null Word 25, bits 12-15 A41 TBCD-NulI Word 26, bits 0-3 A42 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 4-7 A43 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 8-11 A44 TBCD-Null Word 26, bits 12-15 A45 TBCD-Null 17. Network Call Identifier (NCID): If the NCID is recorded in the "A" field, it is recorded in binary beginning with Al. The entry code will indicate the call processing associated with the particular call or '0. If the NCID is recorded in the NCID field of a 64-word call record, the entry code will also indicate the call processing associated with the particular call or '0' The NCID comprises the following: Originating Switch ID Originating Trunk Group Originating Port Number Timepoint 1 NCID Sequence Number Word 27, bits 0-3 Feature Code (FC): Same as OSR/POSR format. Word 27, bits 4-7 Terminating Network Code (TNC): Same as OSRIPOSR format. Word 27, bits 8-11 Network Access Type (NAT): Same as OSRPOSR format. Word 27, bits 12-15 Timepoint 7 Qualifier (TP&Q): Same as OSRPOSR format. Word 28, bits 0-6 Entry Code (EC): Same as OSR/POSR format. Word 28, bits 7-9 Prefix Digits (PD): Same as OSR/POSR format Word 28, bits 10-12 NCS/DAP ID (NDID): Same as OSRPOSR format. Word 28, bits 13-15 Division ID (DIVID): Same as OSRIPOSR format.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 29, bits 0 Distant Overflow (DO): Same as OSR/POSR format. Word 29, bit 1 MCI Network Overflow (MNO): Same as OSR/POSR format. Word 29, bit 2 Customer Connect (CC): Same as OSR/POSR format. Word 29, bit 3 Inter-Network (IN): Same as OSR/POSR format. Word 29, bit 4 Not Used Word 29, bit 5 SAC Bit (SC): This bit is used for the Flexible SAC feature. This bit will be set to "I" whenever the received number which is collected during the address digit collection phase, is identified as. a SAC number in the FlexSac Index associated with the originating trunk group. This bit will be set to "0" in all other cases. Word 29, bit 6 Call Direction (CD): Same as OSR/POSR format. Word 29, bit 7 Destination (DE): Same as OSR/POSR format. Word 29, bit 8 Dedicated Termination (DT): Same as OSR/POSR format. Word 29, bit 9 Person-to-Person (PO): Same as OSR/POSR format. Word 29, bit 10 Transferred Bit (XB): Same as OSR/POSR format. Word 29, bit I1 Satellite (SA): Same as OSR/POSR format. Word 29, bits 12-15 Nature of Calling Location ID (NOCLI): Same as OSR/POSR format. Word 30, bits 0-15 Carrier Number (CN): Same as OSR/POSR format. Word 31, bits 0-3 Authorization Code ID (ACIF): Same as OSR/POSR format. Word 31, bits 4-10 Release Code (RC): Same as OSR/POSR format. Word 31, bits 11-13 NCID Sequence Number: Same as OSR/POSR format. Word 31. bit 14 NCID Location (NCIDLOC): Same as OSR/POSR format. Word 31, bit 15 Remote ANI Screened (RS): Same as OSR/POSR format. Word 32, bits 0-15 Time & Changes Guest Name (T&C Guest): Records the Time Word 33, bits 0-15 and Charges guest name that will be passed back to the switch from the operator service platform for the time and charges feature. The information is recorded as ASCII characters starting with the first character in word 32, bits 0-7. 6 63 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 34, bits 0-15 Destination Address (DA): Records up to 25 digits of the Word 35, bits 0-15 destination address in TBCD format in the sequence that they are Word 36, bits 0-15 received or translated to, starting with DI. Unused bytes contain Word 37, bits 0-15 TBCD-Null. Word 38, bits 0-15 Word 39, bits 0-15 7-aig;: 10-digit DDD IDDD Word 40, bits 0-3 Word 34, bits 0-3 D1 N N N CC Word 34, bits 4-7 D2 X X X CC Word 34, bits 8-11 D3 X X X CC Word 34, bits 12-15 D4 X N N NN Word 35, bits 0-3 D5 X X X NN Word 35, bits 4-7 D6 X X X NN Word 35, bits 8-11 D7 X X X NN Word 35, bits 12-15 D8 X(TSID) X X NN Word 36, bits 0-3 D9 X(TSID) X X NN Word 36, bits 4-7 D1O X(TSID) X X NN Word 36, bits 8-11 D1I X(TTG) X(TSID) T-Null NN Word 36, bits 12-15 D12 X(TTG) X(TSID) T-Null NN Word 37, bits 0-3 D13 X(TTG) X(TSID) T-Null NN Word 37, bits 4-7 D14 X(TTG) X(TTG) T-Null NN Word 37, bits 8-11 D15 T- Null X(TTG) T-Null NN Word 37, bits 12-15 D16 T-Null X(TTG) T-Null T-Null Word 38, bits 0-3 D17 T-Null X(TTG) T-Null T-Null Word 38, bits 4-7 D18 T-Null T-Null T-Null T-Null Word 38, bits 8-11 D19 T-Null T-Null T-Null T-Null Word 38, bits 12-15 D20 T-Null T-Null T-Null T-Null Word 39, bits 0-3 D21 T-Null T-Null T-Null T-Null Word 39, bits 4-7 D22 T-Null T-Null T-Null T-Null Word 39, bits 8-11 D23 T-Null T-Null T-Null T-Null Word 39, bits 12-15 D24 T-Null T-Null T-Null T-Null Word 40, bits 0-3 D25 T-Null T-Null T-Null T-Null CC = Customer Connect NN = National Number TSID = Terminating Switch ID TTG = Terminating Trunk ID T-Null = TBCD-Null WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description 18-digit Word 34, bits 0-3 Dl N Word 34, bits 4-7 D2 N Word 34, bits 8-11 D3 N Word 34, bits 12-15 D4 N Word 35, bits 0-3 D5 N Word 35, bits 4-7 D6 N Word 35, bits 8-11 D7 N Word 35, bits 12-15 D8 N Word 36, bits 0-3 D9 N Word 36, bits 4-7 D1O N Word 36, bits 8-11 D1l N Word 36, bits 12-15 D12 N Word 37, bits 0-3 D13 N Word 37, bits 4-7 D14 N Word 37, bits 8-11 D15 N Word 37, bits 12-15 D16 N Word 38, bits 0-3 D17 N Word 38, bits 4-7 D18 N Word 38, bits 8-11 D19 X (TSID) Word 38, bits 12-15 D20 X (TSID) Word 39, bits 0-3 D21 X (TSID) Word 39, bits 4-7 D22 X (TTG) Word 39, bits 8-11 D23 X (TTG) Word 39, bits 12-15 D24 X (TTG) Word 40, bits 0-3 D25 X (TTG) TSID = Terminating Switch ID TTG = Terminating Trunk Group Word 40, bits 4-15 Pretranslated Digits (PTD): Represents up to 15 digits of a Word 41, bits 0-15 number that is the translation of a number dialed by the caller. Word 42, bits 0-15 Word 43, bits 0-15 10 digit VNet/ VNet.SAC OOY 7 digit IDDD DNIS. or SAC VNet or 15 digit Hotline Code SNS (example) Word 40, bits 4-7 PTD1 N 0 N N Word 40, bits 8-11 PTD2 X 0 N N Word 40, bits 12-15 PTD3 X Y X N Word 41, bits 0-3 PTD4 N N X N Word 41, bits 4-7 PTD5 X X X N Word 41, bits 8-11 PTD6 X X X N Word 41, bits 12-15 PTD7 X X X N Word 42, bits 0-3 PTD8 X X T-Null N Word 42, bits 4-7 PTD9 X X T-Null N Word 42, bits 8-11 PTD1O X X T-Null N Word 42, bits 12-15 PTD1 1 T-Null T-Null T-Null N Word 43, bits 0-3 PTD12 T-Null T-Null T-Null N Word 43, bits 4-7 PTD13 T-Null T-Null T-Null N Word 43, bits 8-11 PTD14 T-Null T-Null T-Null N Word 43, bits 12-15 PTD15 T-Null T-Null T-Null N T-Null = TBCD-Null 6 c' S~ WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 4-4, bits 0-7 Enhanced international Routing (EIR) Call Type: Contains the EIR call type ID as received from the DAP in the NCS billing information parameter or from the operator in the NCS billing information ISUP RLT parameter. It is recorded in binary, the default = '0.' Word 44, bits 8-14 Overflow Cause Value (OVFVAL): This field is the binary equivalent of the first cause value received or formatted in-switch. This value is taken from the cause value subfield in the cause parameter that initiated overflow. Word 44, bit 15 Counts As Bid (CB): Used with the EIR feature. This bit is set to '1' or '0' as per the information received from the DAP in the CB field of the NCS billing information parameter or from the operator in the NCS billing information ISUP RLT parameter. 0 = Does not count as bid (default) I = Counts as bid Word 45, bits 0-3 Overflow Cause Location (OVFCL): This field is the binary equivalent of the value recorded from the first cause location received or formatted in-switch. This information is taken from the cause location subfield in the cause parameter that initiated overflow. Word 45, bits 4-15 Desired Terminating Address (DTA): These 15 bytes contain the Word 46, bits 0-15 originally intended or "desired" termination before overflow was Word 47, bits 0-15 triggered. They contain either: 1) the desired terminating switch id Word 48, bits 0-15 and trunk group for calls that were sent to a DTC termination, 2) a national number, or 3) international number based on what the action code returned from the DAP for the desired termination. DTC DTSID + DTTG DDD Word 45, bits 4-7 DTA1 0 N Word 45, bits 8-11 DTA2 X (DTSID1) X Word 45, bits 12-15 DTA3 X (DTSID2) X Word 46, bits 0-3 DTA4 X (DTSID3) N Word 46, bits 4-7 DTA5 0 X Word 46, bits 8-11 DTA6 X (DTTGI) X Word 46, bits 12-15 DTA7 X (DTTG2) X Word 47, bits 0-3 DTA8 X (DTTG3) X Word 47, bits 4-7 DTA9 X (DTTG4) X Word 47, bits 8-11 DTA1O TBCD-Null X Word 47, bits 12-15 DTA I TBCD-Null TBCD-Null Word 48, bits 0-3 DTA12 TBCD-Null TBCD-Null Word 48, bits 4-7 DTA13 TBCD-Null TBCD-Null Word 48, bits 4-11 DTA14 TBCD-Null TBCD-Null Word 48, bits 12-15 DTA15 TBCD-Null TBCD-Null DTSID = Desired Terminating Switch ID DTTG = Desired Terminating Trunk Group 6'e6 WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description IDDD DTC (example) (future) Word 45, bits 4-7 DTA1 cc X (DTSID) Word 45, bits 8-11 DTA2 cc X (DTSID2) Word 45, bits 12-15 DTA3 cc X (DTSID3) Word 46, bits 0-3 DTA4 NN X (DTSID4) Word 46, bits 4-7 DTA5 NN X (DTTGI) Word 46, bits 8-11 DTA6 NN X (DTTG2) Word 46, bits 12-15 DTA7 NN X (DTTG3) Word 47, bits 0-3 DTA8 NN X (DTTG4) Word 47, bits 4-7 DTA9 NN X (DTTG5) Word 47, bits 8-11 DTA10 NN TBCD-Null Word 47, bits 12-15 DTAIl NN TBCD-Null Word 48, bits 0-3 DTA12 NN TBCD-Null Word 48, bits 4-7 DTA13 NN TBCD-Null Word 48, bits 8-11 DTA14 NN TBCD-Null Word 48, bits 12-15 DTA15 TBCD-Null TBCD-Nul CC = Customer Connect NN =National Number DTSID = Desired Terminating Switch ID ____________________DTTG = Desired Terminating Trunk Group Word 49, bits 0-6 Overflow Count (OVFC): Indicates the total number of intermediate overflow attempts before successful termination was achieved. This value is incremented each time the DAP is accessed for overflow information. Word 49, bits 7-12 Desired Termination Action Code (DTAC): This field represents the action code which was received from the DAP in the first response. This information is used to identify the type of __________________________information which is recorded in the DTA field. Word 49, bit 13 Not Used Word 49, bits 14-15 Network Call Identifier (NCID): Contains the binary Words 50-54, bits 0-15 representation of the NCID. The NCID is recorded here at intermediate and terminating switches if the Authcode field is being used to record other information. The NCID is created at the originating switch and is passed to intermediate and terminating switches. The format of the NCID is: Originating Switch ID (OSID) Originating Trunk Group (OTG) Originating Port (OP) TimepNint 1 (TP() NNCID Sequence Number Word 55, bits 0-15 Time and Charges Room Number (T&C Room): This field Word 56, bits 0-15 records the time and charges room number that will be passed Word 57, bits 0-15 back to the switch from the operator service platform for the time and charges feature. The information is recorded as ASCII characters starting with the first character in word 53, bits 0-7. res one Thsifraini sd oietf hyeo WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 58, bits 0-15 EVS Application Counter (EAC-1): This field records the EVS Word 59, bits 0-15 application counter values if an ARU is used in the call. The field Word 60, bits 0-156 contains the digits that were dialed by the customer in response to audio menu options. Word 61, bits 0-13 Operator ID Number (OPIN): This field contains the operator ID number of the operator that handled the call. Word 61, bits 14-15 Overflow Cause Coding Standard (OVFCS): Contains the binary equivalent of the first coding standard received or formatted in switch. This value is taken from the coding standard subfield in the cause parameter that initiated overflow. It will not be overwritten by subsequent coding standards received or in-switch formatted values. This field is used for enhanced overflow calls only. Word 62, bits 0-12 Timepoint 5 (TPS): A binary count of the number of seconds between the time timepoint 1 occurred and the time that the operator stopped handling the call and releases the position. If the call is transferred to other operators, the value contained in this field shall express the release time of the last operator providing the service. Word 62, bits 13-15 Not Used. Word 63, bits 0-15 Room Number (RN): Contains the last four digits of the Calling Station ID (CSI) when a call originates from a hotel, a university, or any other community identified by only a main telephone number. The CSI shall be obtained from the originating signalling information, or verbally by the operator who enters the information manually into the OSR. Word 0, bits 0-3 Call Record Id (CRID): Identifies the record type. 0 = Default 1 = CDR 2 = SER 3 = PNR 4 = OSR 5 = POSR 6 = ECDR 7 = EPOSR 8 = EOSR 9 = EPOSR 10-15 = Not Used Word 0, bits 4-15 Sync word: This word contains a minus two (7776,). Word 1, bits 0-15 Call Disconnect ID (CDID): Identifies the call record. Each call Word 2, bits 0-15 record has a unique number. When a switch cold restart of reload occurs, the CDID is set to 0 and a Switch Event Record with an event code of 3 is written. When the CDID count rolls over, an event code of 10 SER is recorded. 68c- WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 3, bits 0-15 Switch ID (SWID): Contains the unique identifier of the current switch. the SWID consists of three (3) packed alphanumeric characters. The lead character may be any hex digit (0-F). The next two (2) characters are any number in a base 36 system. Base 36 symbols are 0-9, A-Z. The maximum octal number in the base 36 is 43, which represents the letter Z. Values 4-4 through 77, are unused. Word 3, bits 0-3 SWID 1 (0-9, A-F) Word 3, bits 4-9 SWID2 (0-9, A-Z) Word 3, bits 10-15 SWID3 (0-9, A-Z) Word 4, bits 0-7 Switch Type (ST): Indicates the type of switch. 0 = default I = 580L SCX 2 = DEX-400 3 = CTSS-1000 4 = CTSS-4000 5 = DMS-250 6 = AXE-10 7 = DEX-600 8 = DMS-300 9 = DMS-TOPS 10 = DEX-600E 11 = AS20 12 = AS27 13 = EVS ARU 14-255 = Not Used (e 6 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 4, bits 8-15 Event Qualifier (EQ): Identifies the event causing the record. 0 = default I = Input command or automatic system update that changed date 2 = Input command or automatic system update that changed time 3 = System restart 4 Hourly log (HH:00:00) 5 = Recovery Action 6 = End of billing data (End of File) 7 = Start of billing data (Start of File) 8 = NEMAS SRB blocking record (end of billing block) 9 = Daylight savings time changed (time and offset time changed) 10 = CDID LOG (CDID rolled over to 0) I1 = Not Used 12 = Blank SER (filler record for billing block) 13-255 = Not Used An event code 7 SER will always be the first record in the call history data set. An event code 8 SER will always be the last record in the call block and will be immediately proceeded by event code 6. An event code 9 SER will be invoked by a man-machine command that invokes a Daylight Saving Time change. An event code 10 SER will be written each time the Call Disconnect ID (CDID) rolls over from a maximum count to '0'. This event code will not be written for CDID rollovers due to system restarts. Word 5, bits 0-15 SER Event Time (SERET): Contains the epoch time of this SER Word 6, bits 0-15 and is used for event codes. Word 7, bits 0-3 Not Used Word 7, bits 4-15 First CDID (FCDID): Contains the last 12 bits of the CDID that was recorded in the first call record or SER in this billing block. This field is used in SER event code 8. Word 8, bits 0-3 Not Used Word 8, bits 4-15 Last CDID (LCDID): Contains the CDID that was recorded in the last call record or SER in this billing block. This field is used in SER 8. Word 9, bits 0-3 Not Used Word 9, bits 4-15 Next CDID (NCDID): Contains the CDID in the next call record or SER. This field is used in SER 8. Word 10, bits 0-15 NEMAS Blocking Sequence Number (NBSN): Contains the NEMAS blocking sequence number in event code 8 SERs. The first event code 8 SER within a call history file is set to a NBSN value of 0. The NBSN value is sequentially incremented in following event code 8 SERs.

WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 11, bits 0-15 Previous Time (PT): Contains the epoch time of the time before a Word 12, bits 0-15 system time change was made. Used in SER 1, 2, and 9. Word 13, bit 0 Sign Bit (SB): Indicates whether the time offset is a negative or positive number. This field is used in all SERs. 0 = positive offset I = negative offset Word 13, bits 1-10 Time Offset (TO): Used to record the time offset from universal time (UTC) in one minute increments. This field is used in all SERs. Word 13, bits 11-15 Not Used. Word 14, bits 0-15 Word 15, bits 0-15 Word 16, bits 0-15 Software Load IDI-6: Contains 6 bytes of the software load Word 17, bits 0-15 identifier of the switch recording the billing. This field is written Word 18, bits 0-15 in EBCDIC format and contains the same data as the software load identifier that is recorded in the call history tape label Word 19, bits 0-15 Last Patch #1, #2: These 2 bytes contain the latest patch number/point release of the switch recording the billing. This field is written in EBCDIC format and contains the same data as the latest patch number/point release that is recorded in the call history tape label. The point release identifies the upgrade level of the current software load. Used in SER 7. Word 20, bits 0-5 Quantity CDR (QCDR): Contains the quantity of CDRs that were recorded in this billing block. Used only for event code 8 SERs. Word 20, bits 6-11 Quantity ECDR (QECDR): Contains the quantity of expanded CDRs that were recorded in this billing block. Used only for event code 8 SERs. Word 20, bits 12-15 Not Used Word 21, bits 0-5 Quantity PNR (QPNR): Contains the quantity of PNRs that were recorded in this billing block. Used only for event code 8 SERs. Word 21, bits 6-11 Quantity EPNR (QEPNR): Contains the quantity of expanded PNRs that were recorded in this billing block. Used only for event code 8 SERs. Word 21, bits 12-15 Not Used Word 22, bits 0-5 Quantity OSR (QOSR): Contains the quantity of OSRs that were recorded in this billing block. Used only for event code 8 SERs. Word 22, bits 6-11 Quantity EOSR (QEOSR): Contains the quantity of expanded OSRs that were recorded in this billing block. Used only for event code 8 SERs. Word 22, bits 12-15 Not Used Word 23, bits 0-5 Quantity POSR (QPOSR): Contains the quantity of POSRs that. were recorded in this billing block. Used only for event code 8 SERs.

WO 98/47298 PCTIUS98/07927 Word #, Bit # Description Word 23, bits 6-11 Quantity EPOSR (QEPOSR): Contains the quantity of expanded POSRs that were recorded in this billing block. Used only for event code 8 SERs. Word 23, bits 12-15 Not Used Word 24, bits 0-5 Quantity SER (QSER): Contains the quantity of SERs that were recorded in this billing block. Used only for event code 8 SERs. Word 24, bits 6-12 Call History File Number (CHFN): Contains the call history file number as assigned when a call history file is opened at the switch. Used in all SERs. The first opened file contains a CHFN value of 0. Each new file opened in that same day shall increment the CHFN by one. When the Julian date changes (at midnight), the next file opened shall cause the CHFN to be reset back to zero. Word 24, bits 13-14 Not Used. Word 24, bit 15 SER 12 Used (SU): This bit is set in an SER 8 if the previous call record was a SER 12. Word 25, bits 0-15 CDR Throttle Start Time: Records the epoch time when CDR Word 26, bits 0-15 throttling started. Used in SER 8. Word 27, bits 0-15 CDR Throttle Stop Time: Records the epoch time when CDR Word 28, bits 0-15 throttling stopped. Used in SER 8. Word 29, bits 0-11 Not Used. Word 29, bits 12-15 Format Version: This field is filled with l's to identify the 32/64 word format. The billing system must then look to Word 0, bits 0 3 to determine the type of call record used. Word 30, bits 0-15 Throttle Count: Used to record the number of CDRs that were not Word 31, bits 0-15 written during the time that CDR throttling was invoked. Used in SER 8. 6'/ 2

Claims

1. A hybrid telecommunications system, which comprises: a switched communications network; a packet transmission network coupled to the switched 5 communications network; a call router coupled to the switched communications network and the packet transmission network; and a memory coupled to the call router and having stored therein a call parameter database; 10 the call router being configured to route a call over the switched communications network and the packet transmission network based on at least one call parameter from the call parameter database.

2. The telecommunications system of claim 1 in which the call 15 parameter database comprises profile information pertaining to a subscriber to the hybrid telecommunications system.

3. The telecommunications system of claim 1 in which the call parameter database comprises information pertaining to a call type. 20

4. The telecommunications system of claim 1 in which the call parameter database comprises information pertaining to usage of the switched communications network and the packet transmission network. 25

5. The telecommunications system of claim 1 in which the call parameter database comprises information pertaining to time of the call.

6. The telecommunications system of claim 1 in which the packet 30 transmission network comprises an internet.

7. The telecommunications system of claim 1 in which the switched communications network comprises a public switched communications network. 61 2 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927

8. The telecommunications system of claim 1 in which the public switched communications network is a telephone network. 5

9. A method for directing calls in a hybrid telecommunications system including a switched communications network and a packet transmission network, which comprises: storing a call parameter database in a memory; receiving a call on the hybrid telecommunications system; 10 accessing the call parameter database to determine at least one call parameter; and routing the call over the switched communications network and the packet transmission network based on the at least one call parameter. 15

10. The method of claim 9 in which the call parameter database comprises profile information pertaining to a subscriber to the hybrid telecommunications system. 20

11. The method of claim 9 in which the call parameter database comprises information pertaining to a call type.

12. The method of claim 9 in which the call parameter database comprises information pertaining to usage of the switched 25 communications network and the packet transmission network.

13. The method of claim 9 in which the call parameter database comprises information pertaining to time of the call. 30

14. The method of claim 9 in which the packet transmission network comprises an internet.

15. The method of claim 14 in which the switched communications network comprises a public switched communications network. WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927

16. The method of claim 15 in which the public switched communications network is a telephone network. 5

17. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for directing calls in a hybrid telecommunications system including a switched communications network and a packet transmission network, which comprises: first software that stores a call parameter database in a memory; 10 second software that accesses the call parameter database when the hybrid telecommunications system receives a call to determine at least one call parameter; and third software that routes the call over the switched communications network and the packet transmission network based on 15 the at least one call parameter.

18. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium of claim 17 in which the call parameter database comprises profile information pertaining to a subscriber to the hybrid telecommunications 20 system.

19. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium of claim 17 in which the call parameter database comprises information pertaining to a call type. 25

20. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium of claim 17 in which the call parameter database comprises information pertaining to usage of the switched communications network and the packet transmission network. 30

21. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium of claim 17 in which the call parameter database comprises information pertaining to time of the call. 61s/ WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927

22. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium of claim 17 in which the packet transmission network comprises an internet. 5

23. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium of claim 22 in which the switched communications network comprises a public switched communications network.

24. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium 10 of claim 23 in which the public switched communications network is a telephone network.

25. A hybrid telecommunications system, which comprises: 15 a switched communications network; a packet transmission network coupled to the switched communications network; a call router coupled to the switched communications network and the packet transmission network; 20 a computer with an attached display in communication with the switched communications network and the packet transmission network; and the computer being configured to initiate remote management of the hybrid telecommunications system. 25

26. The hybrid telecommunications system of claim 25 further comprising callback logic capable of initiating tests of the hybrid telecommunications system. 30

27. The hybrid telecommunications system of claim 25 wherein the tests includes circuit analysis.

28. The hybrid telecommunications system of claim 25 further comprising a management device for selecting signaling states such as 6/16 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 loop start, ground start or signaling such as dual tone multifrequency detection, multifrequency or dialpulse.

29. The hybrid telecommunications system of claim 25 wherein the 5 hybrid telecommunications system includes support for internet telephony.

30. The hybrid telecommunications system of claim 25 comprising means for an operator to monitor the management of the hybrid 10 network.

31. The hybrid telecommunications system of claim 25 further comprising an expert system regulating the Quality of Service of the hybrid telecommunications system. 15

32. A method for enabling communication on a hybrid telecommunications system, the hybrid telecommunications system including one or more switched communication networks coupled to one or more packet transmission networks, comprising the steps of: 20 coupling a call router to the switched communication network and the packet transmission network; and integrating a computer with an attached display to communicate with the packet transmission network, the computer being capable of initiating remote management of the hybrid telecommunications system. 25

33. The method for enabling communication on the hybrid telecommunications system as recited in claim 32, wherein callback logic is utilized to initiate tests of the hybrid telecommunications system. 30

34. The method for enabling communication on the hybrid telecommunications system as recited in claim 33, wherein the tests includes circuit analysis.

35. The method for enabling communication on the hybrid (1 -T WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927 telecommunications system as recited in claim 32, further comprising managing the hybrid telecommunications system by selecting signaling states such as loop start, ground start, or detecting signals such as dual tone multifrequency, multifrequency or dialpulse. 5

36. The method for enabling communication on the hybrid telecommunications system as recited in claim 32, wherein the hybrid telecommunications system includes support for internet telephony. 10

37. The method for enabling communication on the hybrid telecommunications system as recited in claim 32, further comprising the step of an operator monitoring the management of the hybrid telecommunications system. 15

38. The method for enabling communication on the hybrid telecommunications system as recited in claim 32, further comprising the step of using an expert system to regulate the Quality of Service of the hybrid telecommunications system. 20

39. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for enabling communication on a hybrid telecommunications system, the hybrid telecommunications system including one or more switched networks coupled to one or more packet transmission networks, comprising: 25 first software that couples a call router to the switched communications network and the packet transmission network; and second software that communicates with the packet transmission network, the second software initiating remote management of the hybrid communications system. 30

40. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for enabling communication on the hybrid telecommunications system as recited in claim 39, further including callback logic to initiate tests of the hybrid telecommunications system. 61'8 WO 98/47298 PCT/US98/07927

41. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for enabling communication on the hybrid telecommunications system as recited in claim 40, wherein the tests includes circuit analysis. 5

42. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for enabling communication on the hybrid telecommunications system as recited in claim 39, further comprising management software for selecting signaling states such as loop start, ground start, or detecting 10 signals such as dual tone multifrequency, multifrequency or dialpulse.

43. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for enabling communication on the hybrid telecommunications system as recited in claim 39, wherein the hybrid telecommunications system 15 includes support for internet telephony.

44. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for enabling communication on the hybrid telecommunications system as recited in claim 39, further comprising operator software facilitating 20 an operator to monitor the management of the hybrid telecommunications system.

45. The computer program embodied on a computer-readable medium for enabling communication on the hybrid telecommunications system 25 as recited in claim 39, wherein the hybrid telecommunications system includes an expert system regulating the Quality of Service of the hybrid telecommunications system.